Yamaha LS9 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: LS9

Categoría: Mezcladores de audio

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner’s Manual

LS9-16/LS9-32

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (Perchlorate)

This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.

Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁ-

cations not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your

authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accesso-

ries and/or another product use only high quality shielded

cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used.

Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instruc-

tions could void your FCC authorization to use this product

in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for

Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these require-

ments provides a reasonable level of assurance that your

use of this product in a residential environment will not

result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC

regulations does not guarantee that interference will not

occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by turning

the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem

by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to dis-

tribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appro-

priate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of

America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis-

tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiar-

ies.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE

Model Name : LS9-16, LS9-32

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio recep-

tion is suspected.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the

terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be

connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the

letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or

GREEN-and-YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

(3 wires)

This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains

a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material

may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer to

the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The above warning is located on the rear or side of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table

speciﬁed by the manufacturer,

or sold with the apparatus. When

a cart is used, use caution when

moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from

tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects

have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate

normally, or has been dropped.

(98-6500)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig

håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af

samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri

tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd

samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som reko-

mmenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera

använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asen-

nettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan

suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo

valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

(lithium caution)

NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.

• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het

moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve

dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in

uw land.

•For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end

of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative ofﬁce in

your country.

• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical

waste.

(lithium disposal)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from

electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the device. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the device.

• Use only the included power cord.

If you intend to use the device in an area other than in the one you

purchased, the included power cord may not be compatible. Please check

with your Yamaha dealer.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy

objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,

or roll anything over it.

• Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding

connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.

• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have

it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill

into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may

fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the

device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device.

• If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the

power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the

device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or

damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• When transporting or moving the device, do not hold the display.

Improper transportation can result in injury or damage to the device itself.

• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn

off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the

power switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the

minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make

sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord Location

PA_en_1 1/2

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

• Do not place the device in a location where it may come into contact with

corrosive gases or salt air. Doing so may result in malfunction.

•Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum.

Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause

feedback and may damage the speakers.

• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)

to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top and rear

to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular,

do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate ventilation

can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the device(s), or

even ﬁre.

• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise, both

in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it.

• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all

devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume

levels to minimum.

• Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw is

provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock

prevention. If the mains outlet is not grounded, be sure to connect the

ground screw to a conﬁrmed ground point before plugging the device into

the mains. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.

• When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the

power ampliﬁer LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power

off, the power ampliﬁer should be turned off FIRST for the same reason.

• Do not insert your ﬁngers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device

(vents, etc.).

•Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into

any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then

have the device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the faders. Doing so may

cause problems with electrical contact or fader motion.

• Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and

avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord

from the AC outlet, the current scene data and library data is retained.

However, if the backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When

the backup battery is running low, the LCD display indicates “Low Battery!”

when you starting up the system (the Battery ﬁeld also indicates “LOW” or

“NO” in the MISC SETUP screen.) In this case, immediately save the data

to a USB memory, then have qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel replace

the backup battery.

Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.

The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualiﬁed Yamaha service

personnel about replacing defective components.

Connections

Handling caution

Backup battery

XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.

PA_en_1 2/2

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

1. Introduction 9

Thank you ...................................................................9

An overview of the LS9.............................................. 9

Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 ......... 11

Number of INPUT channels................................. 11

Rear panel ........................................................... 11

Top panel............................................................. 12

Other.................................................................... 13

The LS9’s channel structure ...................................13

About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED)................ 14

About word clock .....................................................14

Conventions in this manual.....................................14

About the firmware version..................................... 14

2. Parts and their function 15

Top panel...................................................................15

Rear panel ................................................................. 23

Front panel................................................................ 26

3. Basic operations on the LS9 27

Basic operations in the top panel........................... 27

About the [HOME] key......................................... 27

Selecting the fader layer...................................... 27

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section........... 29

Selecting functions ..............................................29

Viewing the display .................................................. 30

Constant display area.......................................... 30

Main area............................................................. 31

The on-screen user interface............................... 32

Assigning a name..................................................... 34

Using the tool buttons ............................................. 35

About the tool buttons.......................................... 35

Using libraries...................................................... 35

Initializing settings ...............................................38

Copying and pasting settings ..............................39

Comparing two sets of settings ...........................39

4. Connections and setup 41

Connections.............................................................. 41

Installing an option card.......................................... 44

Setup required when starting up ............................ 45

Returning the current scene to the initial state ....45

Word clock connection and settings .................... 46

HA (head amp) settings....................................... 47

Sending an input channel signal

to the STEREO bus.......................................... 50

5. Input channel operations 53

Signal flow for input channels.................................53

Specifying the channel name / icon........................55

HA (head amp) settings............................................57

Sending the signal from

an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus......58

Sending the signal from

an input channel to a MIX bus..............................62

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........62

Using a popup window.........................................64

Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) .....65

6. Output channel operations 67

Signal flow for output channels ..............................67

Specifying the channel name / icon........................69

Sending signals from MIX channels

to the STEREO/MONO bus ...................................71

Sending signals from MIX channels

and STEREO/MONO channels

to MATRIX buses...................................................75

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........75

Using a popup window.........................................77

Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) .....78

7. Operations in

the SELECTED CHANNEL section 81

About the SELECTED CHANNEL section...............81

About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen..................82

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section..83

8. Custom fader layer 91

About the custom fader layer ..................................91

Assigning channels to the custom fader layer ......92

9. Input/output patching 95

Changing the output patching.................................95

Changing the input patching ...................................99

Inserting an external device into a channel .........101

Directly outputting an INPUT channel ..................103

10. USB memory recorder 105

About the USB memory recorder..........................105

Assigning channels to

the input/output of the recorder.........................106

Recording to USB memory ....................................108

Playing back audio files from USB memory ........110

Editing the title list..................................................112

Linking scene recall with audio file playback ......113

Contents

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Contents

11. EQ and Dynamics 115

About EQ and dynamics........................................ 115

Using EQ .................................................................115

Using dynamics...................................................... 117

Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries.......................... 120

EQ library........................................................... 120

Dynamics library ................................................ 120

12. Grouping and linking 121

About mute groups ................................................ 121

Using mute groups................................................. 121

Using the MUTE GROUP screen

to operate mute groups .................................. 121

Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen

to specify mute groups ................................... 122

Using the Mute Safe function ............................123

The Channel Link function .................................... 124

Linking the desired input channels ....................124

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel...........126

Copying the parameters of a channel................ 126

Moving the parameters of a channel .................127

Initializing the parameters of a channel ............. 128

13. Scene memory 129

About scene memories.......................................... 129

Using scene memories ..........................................129

Storing a scene.................................................. 129

Recalling a scene ..............................................131

Using user-defined keys to recall ......................132

Editing scene memories ........................................ 134

Sorting and renaming scene memories............. 134

Scene memory editing....................................... 136

Copying/pasting a scene ...................................136

Clearing a scene................................................ 137

Cutting a scene.................................................. 138

Inserting a scene ...............................................138

Using the Focus function ...................................... 139

Using the Recall Safe function..............................140

Using the Fade function.........................................143

14. Monitor/Cue 145

About the monitor/cue functions.......................... 145

Using the Monitor function....................................146

Using the Cue function .......................................... 148

About cue groups ..............................................148

Operating the Cue function................................ 149

15. Talkback / Oscillator 151

About talkback and oscillator................................151

Using talkback ........................................................151

Using the oscillator ................................................153

16. Meters 155

Using the METER screen .......................................155

17. Graphic EQ and effects 157

About the virtual rack.............................................157

Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack ......158

Graphic EQ operations...........................................161

About the graphic EQ.........................................161

Inserting a GEQ in a channel.............................161

Using the 31 Band GEQ ....................................163

Using the Flex15GEQ ........................................164

About the internal effects ......................................166

Using an internal effect via send/return .............167

Inserting an internal effect into a channel ..........168

Editing the internal effect parameters ................170

Using the Tap Tempo function...........................172

Using the Freeze effect......................................173

Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries ............174

GEQ library ........................................................174

Effect library .......................................................174

Using an external head amp ..................................175

Remotely controlling an external head amp.......175

18. MIDI 177

MIDI functionality on the LS9 ................................177

Basic MIDI settings.................................................178

Using program changes

to recall scenes and library items......................180

Using control changes to control parameters .....183

Using parameter changes

to control parameters .........................................185

Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control)

to operate the USB memory recorder ...............186

19. User settings (Security) 187

User Level settings.................................................187

User types and user authentication keys ...........187

Setting the Administrator password ...................188

Creating a user authentication key ....................188

Logging-in ..........................................................189

Changing the password .....................................191

Editing a user authentication key .......................192

Changing the user level .....................................192

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Contents

Preferences............................................................. 194

User-defined keys .................................................. 196

Console lock ........................................................... 197

Locking the console........................................... 197

Unlocking the console .......................................198

Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK

screen image.................................................. 198

Using USB memory to save/load data.................. 199

Saving the LS9’s internal data

on USB memory............................................. 199

Loading a file from USB memory....................... 200

Editing the files saved on USB memory ............201

Formatting USB memory media ........................204

20. Other functions 205

About the SETUP screen ....................................... 205

Word clock settings ............................................... 206

Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off............. 208

Using cascade connections .................................. 209

Operations on the cascade slave LS9............... 210

Operations on the cascade master LS9 ............212

Basic settings for MIX buses and

MATRIX buses..................................................... 213

Setting the date and time of the internal clock.... 215

Setting the network address ................................. 216

Specifying the brightness or

contrast of the display, LEDs, and lamps......... 217

Using the Help function ......................................... 218

Loading a Help file from a USB memory ...........218

Loading a text file from a USB memory............. 219

Assigning the Help function to

a user-defined key.......................................... 219

Viewing Help...................................................... 220

Initializing the LS9’s internal memory.................. 222

Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ......... 223

Adjusting the input/output gain

(Calibration function).......................................... 224

Appendices 225

EQ Library List........................................................ 225

DYNAMICS Library List.......................................... 227

Dynamics Parameters ............................................229

Effect Type List....................................................... 232

Effects Parameters .................................................233

Effects and tempo synchronization...................... 244

Scene Memory/Effect Library

to Program Change Table ..................................245

Parameters that can be assigned

to control changes ..............................................249

Control change parameter assignments.............. 251

NRPN parameter assignments ..............................253

Mixing parameter operation applicability............. 256

Functions that can be assigned

to user-defined keys ........................................... 257

MIDI Data Format ....................................................260

Warning/Error Messages .......................................268

Troubleshooting .....................................................270

General Specifications........................................... 272

Input/output characteristics ..................................273

Electrical characteristics ....................................... 275

Mixer Basic Parameters .........................................277

Pin Assignment ......................................................278

Dimensions .............................................................279

Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit

(sold separately).................................................. 280

MIDI Implementation Chart .................................... 281

Index ........................................................................ 282

Block Diagram ..................................... End of Manual

Level Diagram ...................................... End of Manual

• The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s manual are for instructional purposes

only, and may be different from the ones on your device.

• The bitmap fonts used in this device have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies.

• MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Introduction

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Chapter 1

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha LS9 digital mixing console. In order to take full advantage

of the LS9’s superior functionality and enjoy years of trouble-free use, please read this manual

before you begin using the product. After you have read the manual, keep it in a safe place.

The LS9 is a digital mixing console with the following features.

■

Mixing system that packs top-class

functionality into a compact size

• • • • •

The LS9 is a full-digital mixing console designed for

installed systems or SR applications, and in spite of its

compact size, provides functionality and a channel count

comparable to large-format consoles. 24-bit linear AD/DA

converters are used to deliver up to 108 dB of dynamic

range and amazing sound quality.

As input channels, it provides 32 (LS9-16 model) or 64

(LS9-32 model) monaural INPUT channels, and four ste-

reo ST IN channels.

As output channels, it provides 16 MIX channels, eight

MATRIX channels, a STEREO channel, and a MONO

channel. L/C/R three-channel output using the STEREO/

MONO channels is also supported.

■

Analog-feeling operability

• • • • • • • • • •

Simply by pressing a key, you can select the combination

of channels (“fader layer”) to be operated from the top

panel faders. You can operate the console while quickly

switching between input channels and output channels. In

addition, you can also use a custom fader layer that lets

you specify any desired combination of channels. Since

fader/cue operations and on/off switching for all channels

can be performed from the panel, even customers using

digital consoles for the ﬁrst time will ﬁnd operation famil-

iar and comfortable.

The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right

of the display lets you use the knobs to control the main

parameters (gain, EQ, dynamics threshold, bus send lev-

els, etc.) for the particular channel on which you’re focus-

ing. This section can be operated just like a module on an

analog mixer.

Mix parameter settings, including head amp gain and

phantom power for input channels, can be stored and

recalled as “scenes.”

All faders on the panel are motorized moving faders, so

that when you recall a scene, the previous fader locations

are reproduced immediately.

Thank you

An overview of the LS9

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■

Effects and graphic EQ that can be

patched into a desired signal path

• • • •

There are eight virtual racks, in which you can mount

effects or graphic EQ and then patch them into the desired

signal route. Graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 1–4,

and effects or graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 5–8.

You can simultaneously use up to four high-quality multi-

effects, which include reverb, delay, multi-band compres-

sor, and various modulation-type effects. These can be

used via an internal bus, or inserted into a desired channel.

For the graphic EQ you can select either 31-band graphic

EQ or Flex 15 GEQ. These can be inserted into the desired

channel or output. The Flex 15 GEQ allows you to adjust

the gain for any ﬁfteen of the thirty-one bands. Since two

Flex 15 GEQ units can be mounted in a single virtual rack,

a total of up to sixteen graphic EQ units can be used

simultaneously.

■

A recorder function that’s useful for

sound checks or recording mixes

• • • •

A recorder function is provided, allowing you to use USB

memory to record the output of the STEREO bus or a

MIX bus, or assign an audio ﬁle in USB memory to a

desired input channel or monitor output and play it back.

Supported ﬁle formats are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)

for recording, and MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio),

and MPEG-4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) for play-

back. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not

supported. This function is convenient when you want to

record the mix output of a speciﬁc bus, or if you want to

play back a song from the speakers during the sound

check.

■

Cascade connections in the digital

domain

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

A second LS9 console or a digital mixer such as the

Yamaha M7CL or PM5D connected via a digital I/O card

installed in a slot can be cascade-connected in the digital

domain.

Of the MIX buses, MATRIX buses, STEREO (L/R) bus,

MONO buses, and CUE (L/R) bus, the desired buses can

be merged, and all mixed bus signals can be cascaded

individually.

■

Security functions that can be speciﬁed

at user-level or system-level

• • • • • • •

User levels can be distinguished into three levels (admin-

istrator, guest, user), and the functionality available to

each non-administrator user can be restricted. Passwords

can be speciﬁed for the administrator and users, prevent-

ing important settings from being changed accidentally.

Information speciﬁc to each user (user level, system set-

tings, and user-deﬁned key settings) can be stored on USB

memory as a “user authentication key.” By loading your

own user authentication key from USB memory, you can

instantly set up the ideal operating environment for your-

self.

■

I/O card expansion

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The rear panel provides one slot (LS9-16) or two slots

(LS9-32) in which separately sold mini-YGDAI cards can

be installed. AD cards, DA cards, or digital I/O cards can

be installed in these slots to add inputs and outputs port.

Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32

Introduction

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The LS9 is available in two models; the LS9-16 and the LS9-32. These models differ as follows.

The LS9-16 has up to 32 operable INPUT channels, while the LS9-32 has up to 64. The number and structure of other chan-

nels (ST IN channels, MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO/MONO channels) are identical.

The LS9-16 and LS9-32 differ in the number of rear panel INPUT jacks, OMNI OUT jacks, and slots they provide.

The rear panel of the LS9-16 provides sixteen INPUT jacks, eight OMNI OUT jacks, and one slot.

In contrast, the rear panel of the LS9-32 provides thirty-two INPUT jacks, sixteen OMNI OUT jacks, two slots, and one

LAMP connector.

Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32

Number of INPUT channels

Rear panel

INPUT jacksOMNI OUT jacks Slot

OMNI OUT jacks INPUT jacks

Slots

LAMP connector

Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The LS9-16 and LS9-32 differ in the number of top panel channel modules and ST IN channels they provide.

The LS9-16 provides sixteen channel modules and two ST IN channels, and by switching fader layers you can operate up to

32 INPUT channels (monaural) and four ST IN channels (stereo).

The LS9-16 provides thirty-two channel modules and four ST IN channels. By switching fader layers you can operate up to

sixty-four INPUT channels (monaural).

The four ST IN channels (stereo) can be operated from either layer (1-32 or 33-64).

Top panel

Channel modules ST IN channels

Introduction

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The names of the LAYER section keys differ between the LS9-16 and LS9-32.

● LS9-16 ● LS9-32

In conjunction with this difference, there are also differences in the numbering of the channel modules on the panel and the

channels that are assigned to each fader layer.

The LS9 provides the following input channels and output channels.

■ Input channels • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This section processes input signals and sends them to

various buses (STEREO, MONO, MIX). The LS9 has the

following two types of input channel.

● INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64}

These channels process monaural signals. In the initial

state, the input signals from the rear panel INPUT jacks

and the input channels of the slot(s) are assigned to these

channels.

● ST IN channels 1–4

These channels process stereo signals. In the initial state,

the outputs of virtual racks 5–8 are assigned to these chan-

nels.

Signal assignments to the input channels (input patching)

can be changed as desired.

■ Output channels • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This section mixes the signals sent from input channels

etc., and sends them to the corresponding output ports or

output buses.

There are three types of output channel, as follows.

● MIX channels 1–16

These channels process the signals sent from input chan-

nels to the MIX buses, and send them from the output

ports. These are used mainly to send signals to the monitor

system or to external effects.

The signals of MIX channels 1–16 can also be sent to the

STEREO bus, MONO bus, or MATRIX buses.

When the LS9 is in the initial state, these are assigned to

the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot(s).

● MATRIX channels 1–8

These channels process the signals that are sent from MIX

channels, STEREO channels, and MONO channel to the

MATRIX buses, and send them from the output ports.

Using the STEREO and MONO buses, different combina-

tions of signals and mix balances can be sent out from the

console.

● STEREO channel / MONO channel

These channels process the signals that are sent from the

input channels or MIX channels, and send them to the cor-

responding output port. These channels are used as the

main stereo output and monaural output.

The STEREO channel and MONO channel can be used

either to output independent signals, or for three-channel L/

C/R playback.

When the

LS9

is in the initial state, the STEREO channel is

assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 15/16 {31/32} and to the

2TR OUT DIGITAL jack.

Signal assignments to the output channels (output patch-

ing) can be changed as desired.

Other

LAYER [1-16] key LAYER [17-32] key

LAYER [MASTER] key LAYER [CUSTOM

FADER] key

LAYER [1-32] key LAYER [33-64] key

LAYER [MASTER] key LAYER [CUSTOM

FADER] key

• In this owner’s manual, whenever there is a difference between the LS9-16 model and the LS9-32 model, speciﬁca-

tions that apply only to the LS9-32 model are enclosed in curly brackets { } (e.g., INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}).

• When the speciﬁcations are common to both models, the manual refers simply to the LS9.

HINT

The LS9’s channel structure

Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 • The LS9’s channel structure

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The sixteen MIX buses provided on the LS9 can be assigned either as VARI or FIXED types in

pairs of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered buses (→ p. 213). They can also be switched

between monaural/stereo for the same pairs of buses. VARI type and FIXED type buses differ as

follows.

● VARI

This type allows the send level of the signal sent from the

input channels to the MIX bus to be varied. The point at

which the signal is sent from the input channel to a VARI

type MIX bus can be chosen from before the EQ

(attenuator), before the fader, or after the channel on/off.

This type is used mainly for sending the signal to a moni-

tor system or external effect.

● FIXED

With this type, the send level of the signal sent from the

input channels to the MIX bus is ﬁxed. The signal from an

input channel is sent to a FIXED type MIX bus from

before Pan (if the MIX bus is monaural) or after Pan (if

the MIX bus is stereo). This type is used mainly when you

want to distribute signals to an external device with the

same mix as the STEREO/MONO buses.

“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal process-

ing.

Normally, one device transmits a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive this

word clock signal and synchronize to it.

In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or from an external device via the LS9’s

2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, the word

clock must be synchronized between the devices. Be aware that if the word clock is not synchro-

nized, the signal will not be sent correctly, or there may be unpleasant noise. (For details on syn-

chronizing the LS9’s word clock with an external device → p. 46)

In this manual, switch-type controllers on the panel are called “keys.” Of the control knobs on the

panel, those that turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are called “controls,” while

those that turn endlessly are called “encoders.”

Controllers located on the panel are enclosed in square

brackets [ ] (e.g., [CUE] key) in order to distinguish them

from the virtual buttons and knobs displayed in the screen.

For some controllers, the name of the section is given

before the [ ] (e.g., LAYER [MASTER] key).

Whenever there is a difference between the LS9-16 model

and the LS9-32 model, speciﬁcations that apply only to

the LS9-32 model are enclosed in curly brackets { } (e.g.,

INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}).

You can view the ﬁrmware version number in the MISC SETUP screen (→ p. 206).

You can also download the most recent ﬁrmware version from the website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED)

About word clock

Conventions in this manual

About the ﬁrmware version

About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) • About word clock • Conventions in this manual • About the firmware version

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Parts and their function

Chapter 2

Parts and their function

This chapter explains the LS9’s parts and their functions.

The LS9’s top panel is organized into the following sections.

Top panel

LS9-16

z Channel module section (p. 17) c STEREO MASTER section (p. 18)

v USER DEFINED KEYS section (p. 18)

b DISPLAY ACCESS section (p. 19)

n LAYER section (p. 19)

m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section (p. 20)

, Display (p. 20)

. Stereo meter / Cue section (p. 20)

⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section (p. 21)

⁄1 Data entry section

(p. 22)

x ST IN (stereo input)

section (p. 17)

⁄2 USB connector (side

panel, to the right of the

display) (p. 22)

Top panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

LS9-32

z Channel module section (p. 17) c STEREO MASTER section (p. 18)

v USER DEFINED KEYS section (p. 18)

b DISPLAY ACCESS section (p. 19)

n LAYER section (p. 19)

m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section (p. 20)

, Display (p. 20)

. Stereo meter / Cue section (p. 20)

⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section (p. 21)

⁄1 Data entry section

(p. 22)

⁄2 USB connector

(side panel, to the

right of the display)

(p. 22)

x ST IN (stereo input) section (p. 17)

Top panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Parts and their function

z Channel module section • • • • • • • • • • •

In this section you can operate the main parameters of the

input channels and output channels, as well as the monitor

output. Use the LAYER section (→ p. 19) to select the

channels that are mapped to this section.

x ST IN (stereo input) section • • • • • • • •

In this section you can operate the main parameters of the

stereo ST IN channels 1–4. The function of each control-

ler is the same as in the Channel Module section, with the

exception that the L-channel or R-channel will be alter-

nately selected as the target of operations each time you

press the [SEL] key, and the fact that the encoder rather

than the fader is used to adjust the level.

1 [SEL] key

This key selects the channel to be operated. When you

press this key to make the LED light, the corresponding

channel will be selected for operations in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section or in the display. In the ST IN section,

the L-channel and R-channel will be alternately selected

as the target of operations each time you press the [SEL]

key.

B [CUE] key

This key selects the channel to be cue-monitored. When

cue is on, the LED will be lit.

C Meter LEDs

These LEDs indicate the audio signal level of the input

channel or output channel.

D [ON] key

This switches the channel on/off. The key LED will light

for channels that are on. In SENDS ON FADER mode,

this key is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from

that channel to the currently selected MIX bus (or from a

MIX channel, to the MATRIX bus).

E Fader/Encoder

This adjusts the signal level or monitor level of the input

channel or output channel. In SENDS ON FADER mode,

this adjusts the send level from that channel to the cur-

rently selected MIX bus (or from a MIX channel, to the

MATRIX bus).

LS9-32LS9-16

Top panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

c STEREO MASTER section • • • • • • • • • • •

In this section you can operate the main parameters of the

STEREO channel.

1 [SEL] key

This key selects the STEREO channel as the target of

operations. The L-channel and R-channel will be alter-

nately selected as the target of operations each time you

press the [SEL] key.

B [CUE] key

This key cue-monitors the STEREO channel. When cue is

on, the LED will be lit.

C [ON] key

This switches the STEREO channel on/off. When on, the

key LED will light. In SENDS ON FADER mode, you can

use this as an on/off switch for MIX/MATRIX channels or

as an on/off switch for the signal sent from the STEREO

channel to the MATRIX buses, depending on the LAYER.

D Fader

This adjusts the output level of the STEREO channel. In

SENDS ON FADER mode, this adjusts the level of the

MIX/MATRIX channels or the send level from the STE-

REO channel to the MATRIX buses, depending on the

LAYER.

v USER DEFINED KEYS section• • • • • • • • •

Here you can execute the functions that are programmed

for the user-deﬁned keys.

1 User-deﬁned keys [1]–[12]

These keys execute the functions that have been pro-

grammed for each key (e.g., switching scenes, turning

talkback or the internal oscillator on/off).

• If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER in the USER

DEFINED KEY SETUP screen, the [ON] key and fader will respec-

tively turn MONITOR on/off and control its level.

HINT

Top panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Parts and their function

b DISPLAY ACCESS section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 [SCENE MEMORY] key

This key accesses a screen where you can store, recall, and

edit scene memories, and make settings for the Focus

function and Fade Time function.

B [MONITOR] key

This key accesses a screen where you can make settings

for cue, monitor, oscillator, and talkback.

C [SETUP] key

This key accesses a screen where you can set and verify

the user level, and make basic system settings.

D [CHANNEL JOB] key

This key accesses a screen where you can make settings

for Channel Link, Mute Group, and Recall Safe functions,

and copy or move settings between channels.

E [RECORDER] key

This key accesses a screen where you can operate and

make settings for the Recorder function which records and

plays audio ﬁles.

F [METER] key

This key accesses a meter screen where you can view the

input/output levels of all channels in a single view.

G [RACK 1-4] key

This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic

EQ assigned to virtual racks 1–4. By pressing the [RACK

1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously you can

access the VIRTUAL RACK screen, where you can assign

a graphic EQ (31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ) to each vir-

tual rack.

H [RACK 5-8] key

This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic

EQ or internal effect that is assigned to virtual racks 5–8,

and make settings for external head amps. By pressing the

[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously you

can access the VIRTUAL RACK screen, where you can

assign a graphic EQ (31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ) or

internal effect to each virtual rack.

n LAYER section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Here you can select the type of channels that will be operated from the channel module section (→ p. 17) and ST IN section

(→ p. 17).

1 LAYER [1-16] {LAYER [1-32]} key

B LAYER [17-32] {LAYER [33-64]} key

C LAYER [MASTER] key

These keys assign ﬁxed preset combinations of channels to the channel module section and the ST IN

section. The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows.

D LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key

This key assigns the channels selected by you (the user) to the channel module section and the ST IN

section. (For the channel assignment procedure → p. 91)

1 2

LS9-16 LS9-32

For the LS9-16

LAYER key / module 1–16 ST IN 1–2

LAYER [1-16] key CH 1–16 ST IN 1–2

LAYER [17-32] key CH 17–32 ST IN 3–4

LAYER [MASTER] key MIX 1–16 —

For the LS9-32

LAYER key / module 1–16 17–24 25–31 32 ST IN 1–4

LAYER [1-32] key CH 1–16 CH 17–24 CH 25–31 CH 32 ST IN 1–4

LAYER [33-64] key CH 33–48 CH 49–56 CH 57–63 CH 64 ST IN 1–4

LAYER [MASTER] key MIX 1–16 MATRIX 1–8 — MONO —

Top panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section • • • • • • • • •

In this section you can select the MIX channel or

MATRIX channel that will be the object of operations.

1 MIX/MATRIX [1]–[16] keys

These keys select the MIX channel (or if the selected

channel is a MIX/STEREO/MONO channel, the

MATRIX channel) whose send level will be adjusted by

the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The LED of the key

corresponding to the currently selected channel will light

(or blink, in the case of a MATRIX channel).

In SENDS ON FADER mode, these keys select a MIX bus

or MATRIX button as the send-destination. In this case,

the LED of the key corresponding to the currently selected

bus will blink, and the LED of keys corresponding to

selectable buses will light. For MATRIX buses, the [9]–

[16] keys will be dark and cannot be selected.

, Display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this display you can view and edit all mix parameters,

as well as various settings.

Use the DISPLAY ACCESS section (→ p. 19) to select the

screen that you want to view. Then use the cursor keys of

the data entry section (→ p. 22) to move the cursor to the

desired parameter, and use the dial or the [INC][DEC]

keys to edit the value.

. Stereo meter / Cue section • • • • • • • •

In this section you can view the level of the STEREO

channel or cue monitor.

1 Stereo meter

This is a 32-segment LED meter that indicates the L/R

channel levels of the STEREO channel.

While the [CUE] key of any channel is on, this meter will

indicate the cue monitor level.

B CUE LED

This LED will blink while the [CUE] key of any channel

is on.

C [CUE CLEAR] key

This key clears all cue monitoring that is currently active.

Top panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Parts and their function

⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section• • • • • • • • •

In this section you can operate the most important mix

parameters for the currently selected input channel or out-

put channel.

The function of the controllers in this section will depend

on the type of channel that is selected.

1 [HA GAIN] encoder

● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the gain of the internal head

amp or an external head amp device (AD8HR) con-

nected to a rear panel slot.

● When any other channel is selected

The encoder will not do anything.

B [PAN] encoder

● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected

● When a MIX channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the panning of the signal sent

to the L/R channels (or the L/C/R channels in the case

of LCR mode) of the STEREO bus. If a MIX channel

set to stereo is selected, the encoder will adjust the

output balance of the left and right channels.

● When a MATRIX channel is selected

If a monaural MATRIX channel is selected, the

encoder will not do anything. If a stereo MATRIX

channel is selected, the encoder will adjust the output

balance of the left and right channels.

● When a STEREO/MONO (C) channel is

selected

The encoder will not do anything for MONO (C)

channel. For a STEREO channel, the encoder will

adjust the output balance of the left and right channels.

C [SELECTED SEND] encoder

● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the send level from that chan-

nel to the currently selected bus. (For a FIXED type

bus, the encoder will switch the send on/off.)

If the send-destination bus is stereo, this encoder will

specify the panning of the signal sent to the two buses

if an odd-numbered bus is selected, or will specify the

send level if an even-numbered bus is selected.

● When a MIX channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the send level from that MIX

channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus.

● When a MATRIX channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the send level from the MIX

channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus.

D [DYNAMICS 1] encoder

● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 1

(e.g., gate).

● When any other channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the threshold of the compres-

sor, etc.

E [DYNAMICS 2] encoder

● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected

The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 2

(e.g., compressor).

● When any other channel is selected

The encoder will not do anything.

F EQ [Q] encoder

G EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder

H EQ [GAIN] encoder

These encoders adjust the Q, frequency, and gain of the

band selected by keys 9–L.

• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA

gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind

that noise may be generated if there is a difference between

the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

NOTE

• In SENDS ON FADER mode, this encoder will not do any-

thing regardless of which channel is selected.

NOTE

• By simultaneously pressing the EQ [Q] encoder and the EQ

[GAIN] encoder, you can reset the gain to 0 dB for the band

selected by the keys below (

–

• If you have selected a LOW band or HIGH band whose type can

be changed, you can switch the type by turning the EQ [Q]

encoder while pressing it when Q is set to the maximum or mini-

mum value.

LOW band :

• Switches to LOW shelving if you turn the encoder toward the

right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value

• Switches to high pass ﬁlter if you turn the encoder toward the

left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value (MIX,

MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO channels only)

HIGH band :

• Switches to HIGH shelving if you turn the encoder toward the

right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value

• Switches to low pass ﬁlter if you turn the encoder toward the

left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value

For shelving, high pass ﬁlter, and low pass ﬁlter as well, you can

switch the type by turning the encoder while pressing it.

HINT

Top panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

I EQ [HIGH] key

J EQ [HIGH MID] key

K EQ [LOW MID] key

L EQ [LOW] key

These keys select the band controlled by encoders 6–8.

By simultaneously pressing the EQ [HIGH] key and EQ

[LOW] key, you can reset the gain of all four bands to 0

dB.

M [HOME] key

This key returns the state of the LS9’s panel to home posi-

tion. When you press this key, the panel will change as fol-

lows.

• The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen for the currently selected channel.

• The channel level function will be assigned to the fad-

ers (SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated).

⁄1 Data entry section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This section lets you edit speciﬁc parameters in the screen.

1 [DEC]/[INC] keys

These keys increment or decrement the value of the

parameter at which the cursor is located in the screen, in

steps of -1/+1.

B Cursor keys

These keys move the cursor up/down/left/right in the

screen.

C Dial

This dial continuously increments or decrements the value

of the parameter at which the cursor is located in the

screen.

D [ENTER] key

This key is used to switch a button in the screen on/off, or

to conﬁrm a change you make.

⁄2 USB connector (side panel, to the right

of the display)

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This connector lets you connect USB memory.

1 USB connector

USB memory can be connected here, and used to save or

load internal data. User authentication key data to deﬁne

the user level can also be saved on USB memory and used

to restrict the functionality that is available to each user.

■ USB memory format

Only USB memory that is 2 GB or less in capacity

and is formatted in FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 is sup-

ported. If the USB memory is formatted in any

other way, you must reformat it in the USER SETUP

screen.

■ Write protection

Some USB memory has write protection that prevents

data from being erased inadvertently. If your USB memory

contains important data, we suggest that you use its write

protect feature to prevent accidental erasure.

Conversely, you must make sure that your USB memory’s

write protect feature is disabled before you attempt to

save data to it.

• Operation is guaranteed only for USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

• The ACCESS indicator will appear in the upper part of the

screen while data is being accessed, such as during saving,

loading, or deleting. During this time, you must not discon-

nect the USB memory from the USB connector or power-off

the LS9. Doing so may damage your USB memory, or damage

the data in the LS9 or in the USB memory.

CAUTION

Rear panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Parts and their function

Rear panel

LS9-16

1 32

4 5 6 7 8

K JL M

LS9-32

14JK 5 6 7 8 9

2L M 3

Rear panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

1 INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}

These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks for inputting analog

audio signals from line level devices or microphones. The nominal

input level is -62 dBu – +10 dBu. Resettable head amps are provided

on all jacks, and head amp settings can be stored in scene memory.

B OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16}

These are XLR-3-32 male output jacks for outputting ana-

log audio signals. These are used mainly to output MIX/

MATRIX channel signals. The nominal output level is +4

dBu.

C Slots {1–2}

Separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards can be installed in

these slots to provide additional input/output ports. The

LS9-16 has one slot, and the LS9-32 has two slots. Each

slot can input/output a maximum of 16 channels of sig-

nals.

LS9-16

LS9-32

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

LS9-16

LS9-32

Female XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

• The nominal output level of OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} is +4 dBu

(maximum level is +24 dBu), but if necessary this can be changed

by an internal switch to -2 dBu (maximum level is +18 dBu). (A fee

will be charged for this change.) For details, contact to your

Yamaha dealer listed at the end of this manual.

NOTE

LS9-16

LS9-32

Rear panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Parts and their function

D NETWORK connector

This connector allows the LS9 to be connected to a Win-

dows computer via a CAT3 (transfer rate: maximum 10

Mbps) or CAT5 (transfer rate: maximum 100 Mbps) com-

patible Ethernet cable. This is used mainly for controlling

mix parameters or editing scene memories and libraries

from the dedicated “LS9 Editor” application program.

E WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors

These are BNC connectors used to transmit and receive

word clock signals to and from an external device. The

WORD CLOCK IN connector is internally terminated by

a 75 ohm resistor.

F 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack

This is a coaxial jack that outputs the digital audio signal

of a speciﬁed channel in consumer format (IEC-60958).

This is used mainly to output STEREO/MONO channel

signals.

G 2TR IN DIGITAL jack

This is a coaxial jack that inputs a stereo digital audio sig-

nal in consumer format (IEC-60958). The signal input

from this jack can be patched to any input channel.

H MIDI IN/OUT connectors

These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI

messages to and from external MIDI devices. The MIDI

IN connector receives messages from an external device,

and the MIDI OUT connector transmits messages from

the LS9. These are used mainly for recording LS9 param-

eter operations or scene/library changes on an external

device, or for remotely operating LS9 parameters.

I LAMP connector (LS9-32 only)

This is an XLR-4-31 connector that supplies power to a

separately sold gooseneck lamp (e.g., Yamaha LA1L). The

brightness of the lamp can be adjusted in the screen.

J AC IN connector

Connect the included power cable to this connector to sup-

ply power to the unit.

K POWER switch

This switch turns the power on/off.

L Grounding screw

To ensure safe operation, be sure to ground the LS9

securely. The included power cable has a three-conductor

plug, so if the AC outlet is grounded the LS9 will be

grounded appropriately. If the AC outlet is not grounded,

establish a secure ground connection from this screw. Cor-

rectly grounding the unit is an effective way to eliminate

hum and interference noise.

M Cooling fan vent

This is the vent for the cooling fan inside the console.

When placing the console, be careful not to block this

vent.

4 5 6 7 8

4 5 6 7 8 9

LS9-16

LS9-32

• The DME-N Network Driver required for connection to the NET-

WORK connector, the Studio Manager required for running LS9

Editor, and the LS9 Editor itself can downloaded from the Yamaha

website listed below.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

NOTE

JKML

LS9-16

LS9-32

Front panel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

1 PHONES LEVEL control

This adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the

PHONES OUT jack 2.

B PHONES OUT (headphone output) jack

This is a headphone jack for monitoring the MONITOR

OUT or CUE signal.

Front panel

1 2

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Basic operations on the LS9

Chapter 3

Basic operations on the LS9

This chapter explains the various user interfaces you’ll use to operate the

LS9, and basic operations.

Here we explain basic operations you’ll perform in the LS9’s top panel.

The [HOME] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

restores the LS9’s panel to its basic state (home position).

When you press the [HOME] key, the panel will change as

follows.

• The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen, where you can view all parameters of the

selected channel.

• The channel level function will be assigned to the fad-

ers (SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated).

The [HOME] key will blink if the display is showing any

screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, or if

SENDS ON FADER mode is active. In such cases, you

will ﬁnd it convenient to press the [HOME] key to restore

the panel to home position (the [HOME] key will change

to steadily lit), and then proceed with operations.

The channel module section of the top panel lets you

switch between combinations of channels to be controlled

(“fader layers”) so that you can control input channels,

output channels, or monitor levels.

Press the keys of the LAYER section to switch the combi-

nation of channels you want to control.

Basic operations in the top panel

About the [HOME] key Selecting the fader layer

LS9-16 LS9-32

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Basic operations in the top panel

The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows.

LAYER section key

LAYER [1-16]

LAYER [17-32]

LAYER [MASTER]

LAYER [CUSTOM FADER]

INPUT CH 1–16

INPUT CH 17–32

MIX 1–16

Any desired channels

STEREO ST IN 1–2

ST IN 3–4STEREO

STEREO

STEREO Any desired channels

—

LS9-16

LAYER section key

LAYER [1-32]

LAYER [33-64]

LAYER [MASTER]

LAYER [CUSTOM FADER]

INPUT CH 1–16

INPUT CH 33–48

MIX 1–16

INPUT CH 17–32 STEREO ST IN 1–4

ST IN 1–4STEREO

STEREO

STEREO Any desired channels

INPUT CH 49–64

MATRIX 1–8

——

MONO

Any desired channels

LS9-32

• On the LS9-16, MATRIX channels and MONO channels are not assigned to the fader layers that are preset.

If you want to use the top panel faders and [ON] keys to control the MATRIX channels or MONO channel,

you can assign them to the custom fader layer (

→

p. 91).

HINT

Basic operations on the LS9

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Basic operations in the top panel

You can use the encoders and keys of the SELECTED

CHANNEL section to directly operate the mix parameters

(EQ, pan, dynamics, etc.) of the currently selected channel

from the top panel.

Make sure that the desired fader layer is

selected in the LAYER section.

Use the [SEL] keys of the channel module

section, STEREO section, and ST IN section

to select the channel that you want to oper-

ate.

The currently selected channel is indicated in the

upper left of the screen.

For stereo channels (STEREO channels, ST IN chan-

nels), you will alternate between the L-channel and R-

channel each time you press the [SEL] key.

Turn the encoders of the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL section to edit the desired parameters.

The parameter assigned to each encoder will change.

Before operating the EQ encoders, you’ll need to use

the EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID],

and EQ [LOW] keys to select the band you want to

control.

Use the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section when you

want to use functions other than mix parameters, or when

you want to change various settings.

When you press one of the keys in the DISPLAY

ACCESS section, the corresponding screen will appear in

the display. If the screen consists of more than one page,

you can switch between pages by pressing the same key

repeatedly. For example if you press the [SCENE MEM-

ORY] key, the SCENE MEMORY screen will appear,

where you can store or recall scene memories.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion

• If AUTO CHANNEL SELECT is turned on in the PREFER-

ENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can select a channel

simply by operating its [ON] key or fader, without having to

press its [SEL] key.

HINT

• By pressing one of the SELECTED CHANNEL section’s

encoders inward, you can also access a popup window where

you can edit detailed settings for the parameter (

→

p. 194).

HINT

Selecting functions

• If you press the lit DISPLAY ACCESS key while a popup

screen is displayed, the popup screen will close.

• If you press and hold down the DISPLAY ACCESS section

key, the previously displayed screen will appear.

HINT

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Viewing the display

Here we explain the various types of information shown in the display.

1 Selected channel

This shows the number, name, and icon of the channel

currently selected by its [SEL] key for operations. (For

details on assigning a name → p. 34, For details on select-

ing an icon → p. 55, 69) You can also move the cursor to

this area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

change the selected channel.

B Scene memory

This shows the number and name of the scene that is cur-

rently selected for store/recall operations.

An “R” (Read Only) indication is shown for read-only

scenes or write-protected scenes. If you have modiﬁed the

parameters from their most recently stored or recalled

state, an “E” (Edited) indication is shown. Move the cur-

sor to the scene number, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to change the scene number, and press the [ENTER]

key to recall the scene.

C MIDI

The MIDI indicator will appear when MIDI messages are

received.

D User name / status

This shows the name of the user who is currently logged-

in (authenticated and permitted to operate the console).

Other indicators are shown here if oscillator or talkback is

on, or if internal memory or USB memory is being

accessed.

E ST IN level

This indicates the on/off status and input level of ST IN

channels 1–4. This shows a gray knob and black index

when on, or a dark gray knob and black index when off.

In SENDS ON FADER mode, this shows the on/off status

and send level of the signal sent from ST IN channels 1–4

to the MIX bus. When on, the knob will be a color corre-

sponding to the send-destination (the same type of color

as the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section), and

the indices will be white. When off, the knob will be gray

and the indices will be black.

Viewing the display

Constant display area

12 5

• Simply changing the scene that is shown here will not execute a

store/recall operation.

•To execute a store or recall operation, access the SCENE MEM-

ORY screen and use the STORE/RECALL buttons in the screen

(

→

p. 129), or press a user-deﬁned key to which you’ve assigned

the scene store/recall operation (

→

p. 132).

•You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the constant

display area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to change

the scene number. This scene number will blink if the most

recently stored or recalled scene is different than the currently

selected scene.

NOTE

When oscillator is on

When talkback is on

While recording to USB memory

While playing from USB memory

While accessing internal memory when storing

USB memory or a scene

• In SENDS ON FADER mode, the send-destination bus is shown

blinking at the right of the scene number.

HINT

Basic operations on the LS9

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Viewing the display

The contents of the main area will depend on the currently

selected function.

■ SELECTED CH VIEW screen

This screen shows all mix parameters of the currently

selected channel. To access this screen, press the [HOME]

key of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

■ Various function screens

These screens allow you to access functions and settings

other than channel mix parameters. To access each of

these screens, press the appropriate key of the DISPLAY

ACCESS section.

■ Popup windows

Some windows show lists or details of speciﬁc parameters

in the screen. These are called “popup windows.”

By operating the knobs and buttons in a popup window,

you can edit more detailed parameters. In some popup

windows, there are several buttons called “tool buttons” in

the upper part of the window. You can use these tool but-

tons to recall or copy/paste library data.

To close the popup window and return to the previous

screen, move the cursor to the “×” symbol or the CLOSE

button, and press the [ENTER] key. (You can also close

the popup window and return to the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL VIEW screen by pressing the [HOME] key.)

Main area

Popup window

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Viewing the display

The interface shown in the screen of the LS9 includes the

following items.

■ Cursor

The blinking red and yellow frame displayed in the screen

is called the “cursor.”

The cursor is used to specify the object of your operations.

Use the cursor keys of the data entry section to move the

cursor up/down/left/right.

■ Buttons

Buttons in the screen are used to execute speciﬁc func-

tions, to switch parameters on/off, or to select one of sev-

eral choices.

To execute a button’s function, to switch it on/off, or to

select a desired item, move the cursor to the desired button

and press the [ENTER] key of the data entry section.

By moving the cursor to a button that shows the ▼ symbol

and then pressing the [Enter] key, you can open another

popup window where you can specify details.

■ Knobs and faders

Knobs in the screen are used to view or edit the values of

the corresponding parameters. Normally, you will move

the cursor to a knob and use the dial or [DEC]/[INC] keys

of the data entry section to edit the value. The current

value is shown in numerical form immediately below the

knob. Some knobs will move in tandem with the encoders

of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

Faders in the screen are mainly used to view or edit the

level of the corresponding channels. They will move in

tandem with the faders of the top panel. You can also

move the cursor to a fader and use the dial or [DEC]/

[INC] keys of the data entry section to edit the value. The

current value is shown in numerical form immediately

below the fader.

■ List window

A window like the following will appear when you are

selecting an item from a list, such as when selecting a

function for a user-deﬁned key.

Within the list, the constantly-highlighted item in the cen-

ter is the selected item. To scroll the list up or down, use

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

The on-screen user interface

Cursor

Buttons

Knob

Fader

List window

Basic operations on the LS9

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Viewing the display

■ Keyboard window

The keyboard window shown below will appear when you

assign a name or comment to a scene or library, or when

you assign a name to a channel. To enter characters, move

the cursor to the desired character in the window and press

the [ENTER] key. (For the procedure → p. 34)

■ Dialog box

When you need to conﬁrm the operation you just per-

formed or when a problem has occurred, a dialog box will

appear, asking you to conﬁrm the operation or displaying

a warning.

● CONFIRMATION dialog box

This dialog box will appear when conﬁrmation is

required. Move the cursor to the OK button to execute

the operation (or to the CANCEL button to cancel it),

and press the [ENTER] key.

● ATTENTION dialog box

This dialog box will display a warning when a prob-

lem has occurred with the operation you are attempt-

ing to execute.

If you move the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key, the operation will be executed in a way

that circumvents the problem. If you move the cursor

to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key,

the operation will be cancelled.

● CAUTION dialog box

This dialog box will display a warning if a fatal error

has occurred in the operation you attempted to exe-

cute. When you move the cursor to the CLOSE button

and press the [ENTER] key, the operation will be forc-

ibly cancelled, and the dialog box will disappear.

Keyboard window

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Assigning a name

On the LS9, you can assign a name to each input channel and output channel, and assign a title

to each scene or library data item when you save it.

To assign a name, you will use the keyboard window that is shown in the main area.

Access the window where you can assign a

name.

The illustration below shows the SCENE STORE

popup window that is used when assigning a name to a

scene.

A yellow vertical line called the “text cursor” is shown

to indicate the current location in the box that displays

the characters that have been input.

Use the on-screen keyboard to enter text.

Move the cursor (the red frame) to the desired charac-

ter in the keyboard window and press the [ENTER]

key; the character will be entered in the text input box,

and the text cursor (yellow vertical line) in the box will

move to the right.

Enter the subsequent characters in the

same way.

While entering characters, you can use the following

buttons in the keyboard window.

● COPY button

Copies the entire text string from the text box into

buffer memory.

● PASTE button

Inserts the text string copied using the COPY button at

the location of the text cursor.

● CLEAR button

Erases all characters that were entered in the text input

box.

● ←←

←←

/ →→

→→

buttons

Moves the text cursor forward or backward in the text

input box.

● INS button

Inserts a space (blank) at the text cursor.

● DEL button

Deletes the character to the right of the text cursor.

● BS button

Deletes the character to the left of the text cursor.

● SHIFT LOCK button

Switches between uppercase and lowercase alphabeti-

cal characters. You’ll be able to enter uppercase char-

acters and symbols if this button is on, and lowercase

characters and numerals if this button is off.

● ENTER button

Finalizes the name you entered. In the SCENE

STORE popup window, you can obtain the same result

by moving the cursor to the STORE button and press-

ing the [ENTER] key.

When you’ve entered the name, move the

cursor to the STORE button or the ENTER

button and press the [ENTER] key.

The name you entered will be applied.

Assigning a name

Text input box

• The basic procedure is the same in the windows that let you

assign names to channels or other types of library data. If

you’re entering a channel name, the name will be updated

immediately, without your having to use the ENTER button.

HINT

Basic operations on the LS9

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Using the tool buttons

The title bar at the top of some popup windows and screens contains tool buttons that provide

additional functions. You can use these buttons to recall related libraries, or to copy the parame-

ters of a channel to a different channel. Here we will explain how to use the tool buttons.

Tool buttons like the following are shown in the ATT/

HPF/EQ, DYNAMICS 1/2, GEQ, and EFFECT popup

windows and screens.

1 LIB (library) button

This button recalls the library that is related to the current

popup window or screen (EQ, dynamics, GEQ, or effect

library).

B DEF (default) button

This button restores the currently selected channel (EQ/

dynamics) or rack (effect) to the default state.

C COPY button

This button copies the settings of the currently selected

channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). The copied

settings are held in buffer memory (a memory area for

temporary storage).

D PASTE button

This button pastes the settings held in buffer memory into

the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack

(GEQ/effect).

E COMPARE button

This button exchanges the settings held in buffer memory

with the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/

dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect).

In addition, some screens have the following tool buttons.

• SET ALL ...............Turns on all of the parameters in the

screen.

• CLEAR ALL..........Turns off all of the parameters in the

screen.

Here we will explain the basic procedure for using librar-

ies. You can use libraries to store (save) or recall (load)

the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynam-

ics) or rack (GEQ/effect).

The following libraries are provided.

• Input EQ library

• Output EQ library

• Dynamics library

• GEQ library

•Effect library

The operating procedure is essentially the same for all

libraries.

● Recalling data from a library

Access a popup window or screen that con-

tains tool buttons.

To access each popup window or screen, proceed as

follows.

[ ATT/HPF/EQ popup window ]

[ DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window ]

Using the tool buttons

About the tool buttons

12 345

•You cannot press the PASTE button or COMPARE button if no set-

tings have been copied into buffer memory.

NOTE

Using libraries

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Using the tool buttons

In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, move the cursor

to the knob corresponding to EQ or dynamics 1/2, or

to a button that has a ▼ symbol, and press the

[ENTER] key.

[ RACK screen ]

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RACK

1-4] or [RACK 5-8] key.

Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack

(GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to

recall.

The method of selecting a channel/rack will depend on

the type of popup window or screen that is currently

displayed.

[ ATT/HPF/EQ popup window ]

[ DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window ]

Press a [SEL] key on the panel, or move the cursor to

the selected channel in the constant display area of the

screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

[ RACK screen ]

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press

the [RACK 1-4] or [RACK 5-8] key.

Move the cursor to the LIB button in the

toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to

access the popup window of the corre-

sponding library.

List

This shows the settings that are saved in the library.

The highlighted line indicates the data that is selected

for operations. Read-only data is indicated by an “R”

symbol.

B RECALL button

This button recalls the settings selected in the list into

the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack

(GEQ/effect).

Move the cursor to the list, and select the

recall-source library number by using the

dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to move the

highlighted line in the list.

In some cases, the data selected as the recall-source

cannot be recalled into the currently selected channel/

rack. Each library has the following limitations.

● Dynamics library

The dynamics library holds three types of data;

Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 for input channels, and

Dynamics 1 for output channels. Recall is not possible

if you’ve selected a type that is not supported by the

corresponding dynamics processor.

• If POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS is turned

on in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

access the popup window by pressing the SELECTED

CHANNEL section encoder that corresponds to EQ or

dynamics 1/2.

HINT

Selected channel

• If you want to change the assignment (31BandGEQ,

Flex15GEQ, or effect) to each rack, simultaneously press the

[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] to access the VIRTUAL

RACK screen (

→

p. 158).

HINT

• The right side of the list shows information about the corre-

sponding data (the dynamics type or effect type used, etc.).

For the dynamics library, a symbol is shown to indicate

whether the data can be recalled by dynamics 1 or 2.

HINT

Basic operations on the LS9

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Using the tool buttons

● GEQ library

The GEQ library holds two types of data; 31BandGEQ

or Flex15GEQ. Recall is not possible if you’ve

selected a type that is different than the recall-destina-

tion GEQ.

● Effect library

Effect settings whose effect type is “HQ.Pitch” or

“Freeze” can be recalled only to racks 5 or 7. They

cannot be recalled if any other rack is selected.

If you select a library item number that cannot be

recalled, the RECALL button will be disabled.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The selected data will be loaded into the channel (EQ/

dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2.

● Storing data in a library

Access a popup window or screen that con-

tains tool buttons.

Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) whose

settings you want to store, or the rack in

which the GEQ/effect whose settings you

want to store is already mounted.

Move the cursor to the LIB button in the

toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to

access the popup window or screen of the

corresponding library.

Move the cursor to the list, and use the dial

or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the store-

destination library number.

After you’ve selected the store-destination,

move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a name to the data. For details

on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→

p. 34).

When you’ve assigned a name to the data,

move the cursor to the STORE button in the

LIBRARY STORE popup window and press

the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Store opera-

tion.

To execute the Store operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The current settings will be stored in the library num-

ber you selected in step 4. If you decide to cancel the

Store operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL but-

ton instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER]

key.

•You also have the option of displaying a dialog box that asks

you to conﬁrm the recall operation (

→

p. 194).

HINT

STORE button

•Even after you’ve stored the settings, you can edit the title of

the data by moving the cursor to the data name in the list and

pressing the [ENTER] key to access the LIBRARY TITLE

EDIT popup window. However, you can’t rename read-only

data (indicated by the “R” symbol).

HINT

• Please be aware that if you store to a location that already

contains data, the existing data will be overwritten. (However,

you can’t overwrite read-only data.)

• Don’t turn off the power while the Store operation is in

progress. The data will not be stored correctly if you do so.

NOTE

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Using the tool buttons

● Erasing data from a library

Access a popup window or screen that con-

tains tool buttons.

Move the cursor to the LIB button in the

toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to

access the popup window of the corre-

sponding library.

1 CLEAR button

Clears (erases) the data that is selected in the list.

Move the cursor to the list, and use the dial

or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the library

item number that you want to clear.

Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Clear opera-

tion.

To execute the Clear operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The data you selected in step 3 will be cleared. If you

decide to cancel the Clear operation, move the cursor

to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

Here’s how you can return the EQ/dynamics settings of

the currently selected channel or the effect settings of a

rack to their initial state.

Access a popup window or screen that con-

tains tool buttons.

Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack

(effect) whose settings you want to initial-

ize.

Move the cursor to the DEF button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Initialize

operation.

To execute the Initialize operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The EQ/dynamics settings of the channel you selected

in step 2 or the effect settings of the rack will be ini-

tialized. If you decide to cancel the Initialize opera-

tion, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead

of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.

•You can’t clear read-only data (data indicated by an “R” sym-

bol).

NOTE

Initializing settings

• GEQ settings can be initialized using the FLAT button in the

screen.

HINT

Basic operations on the LS9

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Using the tool buttons

Here’s how you can copy the EQ/dynamics settings of the

currently selected channel or the GEQ/effect settings of

the currently selected rack to buffer memory, and then

paste them to a different channel or rack.

Copy/paste is limited to the following combinations.

• Between EQ of input channels

• Between EQ of output channels

• Between dynamics for which the same type (GATE,

DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COM-

PANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER) is

selected

• Between effects mounted in a rack

Access a popup window or screen that con-

tains tool buttons.

Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack

(GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to

copy.

Move the cursor to the COPY button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The current settings will be held in buffer memory.

Select the paste-destination channel or

rack.

Move the cursor to the PASTE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The settings of the channel (EQ/dynamics) or the rack

(GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2 will be pasted.

By using the compare button in the toolbar, you can

exchange the settings held in the buffer memory with the

settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics)

or rack (GEQ/effect). This is convenient when you want to

temporarily save an interim result of your editing, and

then compare it with subsequent edits.

Access a popup window or screen that con-

tains tool buttons.

Select a channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack

(GEQ/effect).

Move the cursor to the COPY button and

press the [ENTER] key to save the current

settings in the buffer memory.

This will be the ﬁrst version of your settings.

Edit the settings of the currently selected

channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/

effect).

This will be the second version of your settings.

Copying and pasting settings Comparing two sets of settings

• Please note that if you copy other settings before you execute

the Compare operation, the buffer memory will be overwritten.

• After saving the ﬁrst version of your settings in buffer memory,

you can also initialize the channel/rack and create the second

version of your settings from scratch.

NOTE

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Using the tool buttons

When you want to compare the ﬁrst and

second versions of your settings, move the

cursor to the COMPARE button and press

the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the ﬁrst version of your settings. At

this time, the second version of your settings will be

saved in buffer memory.

With the cursor left at the COMPARE but-

ton, repeatedly press the [ENTER] key to

compare the ﬁrst and second versions of

settings.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the current set-

tings will be exchanged with the settings saved in

buffer memory. Unlike the Paste operation, this opera-

tion lets you return to the previous settings at any time

as long as the buffer memory has not been overwritten.

The ﬁrst set

Edit the settings

(The second set)

The ﬁrst set

Buffer memory

The ﬁrst set

Buffer memory

The ﬁrst set

Buffer memory

The second set

COPY

COMPARE

• The settings held in buffer memory can also be used by the

Paste operation.

• If you operate the tool buttons for a rack in which Flex15GEQ

(of the two types of GEQ) is selected, A and B will be individ-

ually exchanged with the buffer memory.

HINT

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Connections and setup

Chapter 4

Connections and setup

This chapter explains how to connect the audio inputs and outputs, how to

perform the setup necessary when starting the LS9 for the ﬁrst time, and

how to check the operation.

■ Analog input connections • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Connect microphones or line level devices to INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}. When the LS9 is in its initial state,

the signal from each INPUT jack is patched to the following channels.

Connections

LS9-16

LS9-32

For the LS9-16

Analog input jacks Input channels

INPUT jacks 1–16 INPUT channels 1–16

For the LS9-32

Analog input jacks Input channels

INPUT jacks 1–32 INPUT channels 1–32

• This patching can be changed as necessary (

→

p. 99). For example if you want to connect a stereo line-level device, you can assign

two INPUT jacks to a ST IN channel so that the left and right channels can be operated in tandem for convenience.

NOTE

Connections

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ Analog output connections• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} can be connected to your main speakers, monitor speakers (foldback), or mon-

itor speakers for the engineer.

When the LS9 is in its initial state, the signal from the following channels is patched to each OMNI OUT jack.

This patching can be changed as necessary (→ p. 95).

Monitor speakers

Power amp

Monitor speakers (foldback)

Main speakers

LS9-16

For the LS9-16

Analog output jacks Output channels

OMNI OUT jacks 1–6 MIX channels 1–6

OMNI OUT jacks 7–8 STEREO L/R channel

For the LS9-32

Analog output jacks Output channels

OMNI OUT jacks 1–14 MIX channels 1–14

OMNI OUT jacks 15–16 STEREO L/R channel

Connections

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Connections and setup

■ Digital input/output connections • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Use the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or the mini-YGDAI slot to send or receive digital audio

signals between the LS9 and external equipment. When the LS9 is in the default state, the signals of the fol-

lowing channels are patched to the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks and slots. This patching can

be changed as necessary (→ p. 95, 99).

The LS9’s 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks are used to transfer two-channel digital audio signals

to or from an external device (e.g., CD player or CD/MD recorder).

By installing a separately sold digital I/O card in a slot, you can add more input/output jacks to the LS9, or

connect a DAW system or speaker processor.

For details on the types of I/O cards that can be used, refer to the appendix at the end of this manual (→

p. 274). Check the Yamaha website for the most recent information on I/O cards.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

e.g., CD recorder

Digital I/O card

Speaker processor

(e.g., Yamaha DME64N)

Main speakers

Power amp

LS9-16

For the LS9-16

Digital input/output jacks Input/output channels

2TR IN DIGITAL jack (L/R) No assignment

2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel

Slot input channels 1–8 INPUT channels 17–24

Slot input channels 9–16 INPUT channels 25–32

Slot output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8

Slot output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16

For the LS9-32

Digital input/output jacks Input/output channels

2TR IN DIGITAL jack (L/R) No assignment

2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel

Slot 1 input channels 1–8 INPUT channels 33–40

Slot 1 input channels 9–16 INPUT channels 41–48

Slot 2 input channels 1–8 INPUT channels 49–56

Slot 2 input channels 9–16 INPUT channels 57–64

Slot 1 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8

Slot 1 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16

Slot 2 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8

Slot 2 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16

• In order for digital audio signal to be transmitted or received via the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks

or slots, the word clock of both devices must be synchronized (

→

p. 46).

NOTE

Installing an option card

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Before you install an I/O card in a slot, you must check the Yamaha website to verify whether the

LS9 supports that card and to verify the number of other Yamaha cards or third-party cards that

can be used in conjunction with it.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

To install an option I/O card, proceed as follows.

Make sure that the power is turned off.

Loosen the screws that fasten the slot, and

remove the slot cover.

Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place.

Align both edges of the card with the guide

rails inside the slot, and insert the card into

the slot.

Push the card all the way into the slot to ensure that the

contacts of the card are correctly inserted into the con-

nector inside the slot.

Fasten the card using the screws attached

to the card.

Be aware that damage or malfunctions may occur if

the card is not fastened.

Installing an option card

Slot cover

LS9-16

Card

LS9-16

• Before installing separately sold I/O cards into the console,

you must make sure that the console’s power switch is

turned off. Otherwise, malfunctions or electrical shock may

occur.

CAUTION

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Connections and setup

Here we explain the setup that is required when starting the LS9 for the ﬁrst time. So that you

can check whether the connections are correct, we also describe the basic procedure for getting

the input signal from an INPUT channel to be output from the STEREO bus.

We will power-on the LS9 and recall (load) the initial set-

ting scene (scene number 000).

Power-on the LS9.

When you power-on the LS9, you must turn on your

equipment in the order of the LS9 → power amp or

monitor system. (Use the opposite order when power-

ing-off.)

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key to access the

SCENE LIST screen.

In this screen you can recall or store scene memories.

1 Scene list

B RECALL button

Move the cursor to the scene list, and use

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to make

“000 Initial Data” appear in the highlighted

line in the center of the list.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Scene number “000” will be loaded, and the mix

parameters will return to their initial state.

Setup required when starting up

Returning the current scene to the

initial state

•We are recalling the default setting scene here so that the remain-

ing operations in this chapter can be performed appropriately. In

actual operation, there’s no need to recall the default setting scene

each time you start up.

NOTE

• Be aware that when scene number “000” is loaded, the input

patch, output patch, internal effect/GEQ, and HA (head amp)

settings will also return to their initial state. (However, the

word clock source selection will not be affected.)

NOTE

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

“Word clock” is the clock data that provides the timing

basis for audio signals to be processed digitally.

If a digital I/O card installed in a slot is digitally con-

nected to an external device such as a DAW system, CD

player, or HDR (hard disk recorder), and you want digital

audio signals to be transmitted or received between the

LS9 and the external device, you must synchronize the

word clock of the respective devices.

In order for this to occur, one device must be the word

clock master (transmitting device) and the other device

must be the slave (receiving device), and the slave device

must synchronize to the master device.

If you want to set the LS9 as the word clock slave so that it

will synchronize to the word clock supplied from an exter-

nal device, you can either use the clock data included in

the digital audio signal received from a digital I/O card, or

provide dedicated word clock to the WORD CLOCK IN

jack located on the rear panel.

In either case, you must use the following procedure to

specify the word clock source that the LS9 will use for

operation.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYS-

TEM SETUP screen.

In this screen you can make various settings that affect

the entire LS9.

1 WORD CLOCK button

Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK but-

ton in the MIXER SETUP ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear,

allowing you to select the clock source on which the

LS9 will operate.

Word clock connection and set-

tings

Digital audio device

Clock data

LS9 (word clock slave)

HDR or other digital

audio device (word

clock master)

Slot

Clock data

LS9 (word clock slave)

Digital MTR or other

digital audio device

(word clock master)

Digital audio signal

WORDCLOCK

IN jack

Slot

• The following procedure is not necessary if you are using the LS9

as the word clock master, or if no external devices are digitally

connected to the LS9.

HINT

LS9-32

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Connections and setup

Use the buttons in the window to select the

clock source to which the LS9 will synchro-

nize.

● If you want the clock source to be the clock

data included in a digital audio signal from a

slot

Turn on a valid 2-channel button for the corresponding

slot.

● If you want the clock source to be the clock

data included in the digital audio signal from

the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack

Turn on the 2TR IN button.

● If you want the word clock data from the

WORD CLOCK IN jack to be the clock source

Turn on the WC IN button.

● If you want the LS9’s internal clock to be the

clock source

Turn on the INT48k (sampling frequency: 48 kHz) or

INT44.1k (sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz) button.

If the LS9 is correctly operating with the new clock,

the symbol located immediately above the correspond-

ing button will turn light blue. Also, the frequency of

the selected clock source is shown in the upper left of

the window.

To close the WORD CLOCK popup window,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

Here we explain how to adjust the HA (head amp) gain,

switch phantom power on/off, and switch the phase for

each input channel to which you’ve connected a mic or

instrument.

When setting HA-related parameters on the LS9, you can

either use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen in the display to make set-

tings for a single channel at a time, or use the popup win-

dow to make settings for eight channels at a time.

● Making HA settings for one channel at a

time

Select the channel that you want to set, and use the

SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen of the display to make HA settings.

Make sure that a mic or instrument is con-

nected to the INPUT jack (→ p. 41).

Make sure that the fader layer that contains

the desired channel is selected in the

LAYER section.

If necessary, use the keys of the LAYER section to

switch fader layers.

Press the [SEL] key of the channel for the

INPUT jack you want to operate, so that the

LED is lit.

That channel is now selected for operations in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section.

1 [SEL] key

B Meter LEDs

• If a conventional CD player or similar device is connected to

the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack, use that device as the clock master.

In some cases, noise may occur when synchronization is lost.

NOTE

• The word clock setting is maintained even if you turn off the

power. If you’ve set the LS9 to synchronize to the word clock

of an external device, be aware that an error message will

appear and the system will not operate correctly if the exter-

nal device is powered-off when you power-cycle the LS9 or if

the connection is disconnected.

NOTE

HA (head amp) settings

LS9-16 LS9-32

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The [HOME] key restores the LS9’s panel to its basic

state (home position). When you press this key, the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the dis-

play, showing all the parameters of the channel that is

selected by its [SEL] key. Also, SENDS ON FADER

mode will be defeated, and the channel level function

will be assigned to the faders.

1 GAIN knob

Use either of the following methods to

adjust the HA gain of the selected channel.

● Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section

Operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA

GAIN] encoder. When you do so, the GAIN knob in

the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will move in tan-

dem. (If any other screen is displayed, a small popup

window will show the value.)

● Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen

Use the cursor keys of the DATA ENTRY section to

move the cursor to the GAIN knob in the screen, and

use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the HA

gain.

In either case, the level of that channel is shown by the

meter LEDs in the channel module section.

If the meter does not move even though a signal is

being input, check whether the INPUT jack is con-

nected appropriately, and whether the meter detection

point might have been set to POST ON (immediately

after the channel on/off) (→ p. 155).

To make HA settings for another channel,

use the [SEL] keys to select another chan-

nel and make settings in the same way.

• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA

gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind

that noise may be generated if there is a difference between

the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

NOTE

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Connections and setup

● Making HA settings for a group of eight

channels

Here’s how to access a popup window where you can

make HA settings for a group of eight channels.

Make sure that a mic or instrument is con-

nected to the INPUT jack (→ p. 41).

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 HA popup button

B GAIN knob

Use the keys of the LAYER section and the

[SEL] keys of the channel module section

to select the channel for the INPUT jack you

want to control.

Move the cursor to the HA popup button or

GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The HA/PATCH popup window will appear, allowing

you to adjust the HA gain, switch phantom power on/

off, and switch the phase in groups of eight channels.

This popup window shows the parameters for the eight

channels that include the channel you selected in step

1 +48V button

B GAIN knob

C ø (phase) button

To adjust the HA gain, move the cursor to

the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the

window, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys.

The input level of the channel is shown by the level

meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN

knob in the screen.

To turn on phantom power for each chan-

nel, move the cursor to the +48V button in

the HA ﬁeld of the screen, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The +48V button will turn on (red), and phantom

power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT

jack.

To switch the phase of each channel

between normal and reverse phase, move

the cursor to the ø button in the HA ﬁeld

and press the [ENTER] key.

The ø button will change from black to red, and the

phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed.

If you want to operate the HA of a channel

that is not currently shown in the popup

window, use the [SEL] key to select that

channel, and then make settings for it.

For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the

popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]

key will change the popup window to INPUT channels

9–16.

1 2

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access this popup window by pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.

HINT

• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA

gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind

that noise may be generated if there is a difference between

the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

NOTE

• If you want to use phantom power, you must ﬁrst turn ON the

+48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM

SETUP screen.

NOTE

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here we explain how to adjust the level of a signal sent

from a gain-adjusted input channel to the STEREO bus,

adjust its pan (INPUT channel) or balance (ST IN chan-

nel), and monitor it from external speakers connected to

the STEREO channel. The following procedure will let

you check whether the mic, instrument, and main speakers

are connected appropriately.

When setting the level or pan/balance of a signal being

sent to the STEREO bus, you can either use the

SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen in the display to make settings for a single

channel at a time, or use the popup window to make set-

tings for eight channels at a time.

● Controlling the signal sent to the STE-

REO bus, one channel at a time

Here’s how to select the input channel that you want to

control, and use the top panel faders/encoders, the

SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen of the display to control the level and pan/

balance.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 ST button

B PAN/BAL knob

Use the keys of the LAYER section and the

[SEL] keys of the channel module section

to select the channel for the INPUT jack you

want to control.

Make sure that the ST button in the screen

is on (white characters on a pink back-

ground).

The ST button is an on/off switch for the signal sent

from that channel to the STEREO bus. If this is off

(gray characters on a black background), move the

cursor to ST button and press the [ENTER] key.

In the STEREO MASTER section of the top

panel, make sure that the STEREO channel

[ON] key is on, and raise the STEREO chan-

nel fader to 0 dB.

1 STEREO channel [ON] key

B STEREO channel fader

In the channel module section or the ST IN

section, make sure that the [ON] key of the

currently selected channel is turned on.

Sending an input channel signal to

the STEREO bus

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Connections and setup

Raise the fader of the currently selected

channel (or the encoder for a ST IN chan-

nel) to obtain an appropriate volume.

In this state, you should hear sound from the speaker

system patched to the STEREO channel. If you don’t

hear sound, watch the stereo meter located at the right

of the display to see whether the LR meter is moving.

● If the LR meter is moving

It is possible that the output jack connected to your

speaker system is not correctly patched to the STE-

REO channel. Check the output port patching (→

p. 95).

● If the LR meter is not moving

It is possible that the channel’s [ON] key is off, or that

the ST button is turned off in the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen. Check the setting of the [ON] key or ST

button.

To adjust the pan/balance of the signal that

is sent from the input channel to the STE-

REO bus, turn the SELECTED CHANNEL

section [PAN] encoder.

When you turn the [PAN] encoder, the PAN/BAL

knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will also

move in tandem with it. You can obtain the same result

by moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and oper-

ating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

To control another channel, use the [SEL]

keys to select another channel and make

settings in the same way.

● Controlling the signal sent to the STE-

REO bus, eight channels at a time

Here’s how to access a popup window in which the level

and pan/balance of the signal sent to the STEREO bus can

be adjusted for eight channels at a time.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 PAN popup button

B PAN/BAL knob

Use the keys of the LAYER section and the

[SEL] keys of the channel module section

to select the channel for the INPUT jack you

want to control.

Move the cursor to the PAN popup button

or PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The TO STEREO/MONO popup window will appear,

allowing you to adjust the level and pan/balance of the

signal sent to the STEREO bus, eight channels at a

time. This popup window shows the parameters for the

eight channels that include the channel you selected in

step 2.

1 ST button

B PAN/BAL knob

•You can also use headphones connected to the front panel

PHONES OUT jack to monitor the signal that is being output

from the STEREO channel (

→

p. 146).

HINT

Setup required when starting up

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

In the STEREO MASTER section of the top

panel, make sure that the STEREO channel

[ON] key is on, and raise the STEREO chan-

nel fader to 0 dB.

Make sure that the ST button for each chan-

nel in the window is on (white characters on

a pink background).

The ST button is an on/off switch for the signal sent

from each channel to the STEREO bus. This is the

same function as the ST button in the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen.

To adjust the pan (INPUT channel) or bal-

ance (ST IN channel) of the signal sent from

the input channel to the STEREO bus, move

the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob of the

desired channel in the window, and operate

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

In the channel module section or the ST IN

section, make sure that the [ON] key of the

channel you want to operate is turned on.

Raise the fader/encoder of each channel to

obtain an appropriate volume.

If you want to operate a channel that is not

currently shown in the popup window, use

the [SEL] key to select that channel, and

then make settings for it.

For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the

popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]

key will change the popup window to INPUT channels

9–16. If you press a [SEL] key of the ST IN section,

the L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4 will be dis-

played together.

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access this popup window by pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.

HINT

Input channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Chapter 5

Input channel operations

This chapter explains operations for input channels (INPUT channels and ST

IN channels).

The input channel are the section that processes the signals received from the rear panel input

jacks or slot, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, and MIX buses. There are two

types of input channel, as follows.

■ INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the LS9 is in the default state, the input signals from the

rear panel INPUT jacks and the input channels of the slot(s) are assigned to these channels. For details, refer to p.99.

■ ST IN channels 1–4• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the LS9 is in the default state, the outputs of virtual racks 5–

8 are assigned to these channels.

Signal ﬂow for input channels

{64}

To OUTPUT PATCH

CH 1-32{64}

To RACKIN PATCH

INSERT OUT 1-32

INSERT IN 1-32

PRE HPF

METER

KEYIN CUE

PAN LINK

INSERT

PAN

To MIX

LCR

ON LEVEL

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

PRE EQ

EQ OUT

POST EQ

DYNA1OUT DYNA2OUT

Keyin

Self PRE EQ

Self POST EQ

MIX13-16 OUT

CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ{16}

CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48,49-56,57-64]POST EQ{32}

PRE HPF

GR METER

Keyin Filter

PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER

PRE FADER

INSERT

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

LEVEL

FIXED

To MIX

FIXED

STEREO

To MIX

VARI

To MIX

VARI

STEREO

POST ON

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R

POST ON

INSERT OUT

LEVEL

PAN

DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}

LR MONO

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

TO MONO TO ST

TO LCR

PAN MODE

To OUTPUT PATCH

To RECORDER IN PATCH

ST L

MONO(C)

ST R

MIX1,3...15

MIX2,4...16

CUE L

CUE R

HPF

METER

ATT

4BAND

GR METER

GATE

DUCK

EXPAND

COMP

METER METER METER

COMP

COMPAND

DE-ESSER

METER METER

CSR

INSERT

INPUT PATCH

... ...

15 16

MATRIX CUE

MIX

(C)

12 78 LR

BAL

LCR

INPUT PATCH

ST IN 1L-4R

PRE HPF

PRE EQ

ATT

EQ OUT

GR METER

COMP

COMPAND

DE-ESSER

KEYIN CUE

Keyin Filter

Keyin

Self PRE EQ

Self POST EQ

MIX13-16 OUT

ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ

PRE FADER

LEVEL

PRE FADER

POST ON

LR MONO

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

TO MONO TO ST

TO LCR

PAN MODE

ST L

ST R

MIX1,3...15

MIX2,4...16

CUE L

CUE R

POST ON

To MIX

FIXED

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

To MIX

FIXED

STEREO

To MIX

VARI

To MIX

VARI

STEREO

PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON

LEVEL

BAL

PAN LINK

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R

MONO(C)

METER

HPF

METER

4BAND

PRE EQ POST EQ

METER

DYNA1OUT

METER

GATE

DUCK

EXPAND

COMP

GR METER

DYNA2OUT

METER

CSR

... ...

15 16

MATRIX CUE

MIX

(C)

12 78 LR

Signal flow for input channels

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● INPUT PATCH

This assigns input signals to the input channels.

● ø (phase)

Switches the phase of the input signal.

● HPF (High Pass Filter)

This is a high pass ﬁlter that cuts the region below the

speciﬁed frequency.

● ATT (attenuator)

Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.

● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)

A parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID,

LOW MID, and LOW.

● DYNAMICS 1

This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a gating,

ducking, expander, or compressor.

● DYNAMICS 2

This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com-

pressor, compander, or de-esser.

● LEVEL

Adjusts the input level of the input channel.

● ON (on/off)

Turns the input channel on/off. If this is off, the corre-

sponding channel is muted.

● PAN

This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the

INPUT channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, this pan

setting can also be applied to signals sent to two MIX

buses that are assigned as stereo.

● BALANCE

On ST IN channels, the BALANCE is used instead of

PAN. The BALANCE adjusts the volume balance of the

left/right signals sent from the ST IN channel to the STE-

REO bus. If necessary, you can also apply this balance set-

ting to the signal sent to two MIX buses that are assigned

as stereo.

● LCR (Left/Center/Right)

This sends the signal of the input channel to the STEREO

bus / MONO bus as a three-channel signal that adds a C

(Center) channel to the L/R channels.

● TO MIX ON/OFF MIX (MIX send on/off)

This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input

channel to MIX buses 1–16.

There are two types of MIX buses; FIXED types whose

send level is ﬁxed, and VARI types whose send level can

be adjusted. You can switch between FIXED type and

VARI type in sets of two adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered MIX buses. (For details, refer to → p. 213)

● TO MIX LEVEL 1-16 (MIX send level 1–16)

This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input

channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–16. The signal sent to

VARI type MIX buses can be taken from pre-EQ, pre-

fader, or post-channel on/off as desired. The signal sent to

FIXED type MIX buses is taken pre-pan if the MIX bus is

monaural, or post-pan if the MIX bus is stereo.

● INSERT (INPUT channels 1–32 only)

This lets you patch the desired output/input ports in order

to insert an effect processor or other external device (→

p. 101). The insert-out/insert-in position can be switched

pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-channel on/off.

● DIRECT OUT (INPUT channels only)

This lets you patch the desired output port in order to out-

put the input signal directly (→ p. 103). The direct out sig-

nal can be taken from pre-HPF, pre-EQ, or pre-fader.

● METER

This meters the level of the input channel. You can switch

the position at which the level is detected.

Specifying the channel name / icon

Input channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

On the LS9, the name and icon shown in the screen can be speciﬁed for each input channel.

Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

Use the LAYER section to select the desired

fader layer.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section or ST IN section to select the input

channel that you want to operate.

1 Input port select popup button

Move the cursor to the input port select

popup button in the HA ﬁeld of the screen,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The PATCH/NAME popup window will appear,

allowing you to select an input port and icon for the

input channel, and to assign a name.

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Input port button

This indicates the currently selected input port. When

you’re selecting the icon or editing the channel name,

moving the cursor to this button and pressing the

[ENTER] key will take you back to the input port

selection screen.

B Icon button

This indicates the icon selected for that channel.

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, a screen where you can select an icon

and a sample name will appear.

C Channel name input box

This indicates the name assigned to that channel.

When you move the cursor to this ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear, allow-

ing you to enter a name.

D Tabs

These tabs switch the items that are shown in the win-

dow.

Specifying the channel name / icon

LS9-32

14 2 3

Specifying the channel name / icon

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To select an icon for this channel, move the

cursor to the icon button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The window display will change as follows.

1 Icon select buttons

These buttons select the icon that is used for this chan-

nel.

B Sample name select buttons

These buttons select sample names that are related to

the currently selected icon. When you press a button,

its sample name will be entered in the channel name

ﬁeld.

C Icon background color select buttons

These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the

background color for the icon.

Use the icon select buttons and the icon

background color select buttons to select

the icon and icon color you want to use for

that channel.

The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the

upper part of the window.

If desired, use the sample name select but-

tons to select a sample name. The selected

sample name will be entered in the channel

name ﬁeld in the upper part of the window.

If you want to enter a channel name directly

(or edit the previously-entered sample

name), move the cursor to the channel

name ﬁeld in the upper part of the window

and press the [ENTER] key.

The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of

the window, allowing you to enter or edit the text. For

details on using the keyboard window, refer to p.34.

Use the [SEL] keys to select another input

channel, and specify its icon and channel

name in the same way.

While the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed,

you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel that

you’re operating.

When you’ve ﬁnished entering information,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.

•You can add or edit the text after entering the sample name in

the channel name ﬁeld. If you want to assign channel names

that consist of a common name plus a number, such as “Vocal

1” and “Vocal 2,” you can simply enter a sample name and

then add a number.

HINT

HA (head amp) settings

Input channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to make HA (Head Amp) settings such as phantom power on/off, gain, and phase for

each input channel.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 HA popup button

B GAIN knob

Use the LAYER section to select the desired

fader layer.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section or ST IN section to select the input

channel that you want to operate.

If you only want to adjust the HA gain for

that channel, operate the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.

You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to

the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen

and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

If you want to edit detailed parameters such

as phantom power on/off and phase, move

the cursor to the HA popup button or GAIN

knob in the HA ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the HA/PATCH popup window.

In the HA/PATCH popup window you can adjust the

HA gain, switch phantom power on/off, and switch the

phase for sets of eight channels. This popup window

shows the parameters for the eight channels that

include the channel you selected in step 3.

1 +48V button

B GAIN knob

C ø (phase) button

To adjust the HA gain, move the cursor to

the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the

window, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys.

The input level of the channel is shown by the level

meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN

knob in the screen.

To turn on phantom power, move the cursor

to the +48V button of the desired channel in

the window, and press the [ENTER] key.

The +48V button will turn on (red), and phantom

power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT

jack.

HA (head amp) settings

1 2

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access the above popup window by pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.

HINT

• If you don’t need phantom power, be sure to turn this but-

ton off.

• Before you turn phantom power on, make sure that no

devices other than phantom-powered devices, such as a

condenser microphone, are connected. Otherwise, you

risk damaging the devices.

• Do not connect or disconnect a device while phantom

power is applied. Doing so can damage the connected

device and/or the unit itself.

•To protect your speaker system, leave the power amps

(powered speakers) turned off when switching the phan-

tom power on/off. We also recommend that you set all

output level faders to the minimum position. Otherwise,

high-volume output may damage your hearing or equip-

ment.

CAUTION

• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA

gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind

that noise may be generated if there is a difference between

the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

NOTE

• If you want to use phantom power, you must ﬁrst turn ON the

+48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM

SETUP screen.

NOTE

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To switch the phase of each channel

between normal and reverse phase, move

the cursor to the ø button of the desired

channel in the window, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The ø button will change from black to red, and the

phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed.

If you want to operate the HA of a channel

that is not currently shown in the popup

window, use the [SEL] key to select that

channel, and then make settings for it.

For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the

popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]

key will change the popup window to INPUT channels

9–16.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO

bus.

The STEREO bus / MONO bus are used to output signals to the main speakers. Signals can be

sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode, and you can

choose either of these two modes for each channel. These two modes differ as follows.

■ ST/MONO mode • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this mode, signals are sent independently from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus.

• The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/

off independently.

• The panning of the signal sent from an INPUT channel to the STEREO bus L/R can be operated by the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen. (The signal sent to

the MONO bus is not affected by this encoder or knob.)

• The volume balance of the signal sent from a ST IN channel to the STEREO bus left and right can be operated

by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen. (The

signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)

■ LCR mode • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this mode, the signal from the input channel is sent to three buses at once; STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C).

• The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/

off together.

• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the input

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus.

• The level of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus will

change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder or the TO ST PAN

knob / TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen.

Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus

• If you want to use headphones etc. to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus, you should

press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] key several times to access the MONITOR screen, and

select “LCR” as the monitor source (

→

p. 146).

HINT

HA (head amp) settings • Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus

Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus

Input channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Make sure that an input source is con-

nected to the input channel you’re operat-

ing, and make head amp settings for

phantom power, gain, and phase to obtain

the optimal input signal (→ p. 57).

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 TO ST ﬁeld

B TO ST PAN knob (for a ST IN channel, the

TO ST BAL knob)

Use the LAYER section to select the desired

fader layer.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section or ST IN section to select the input

channel for the desired source.

If you only want to adjust the pan or bal-

ance for that channel, operate the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN]

encoder (→ p. 86).

You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to

the PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

If you want to switch the on/off setting of

the signal sent from the input channel to

the STEREO/MONO bus, or if you want to

switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR

mode, move the cursor to the TO ST PAN

knob or the PAN popup button located in

the TO ST ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the TO STEREO/MONO popup win-

dow.

In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can

switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode in

sets of eight channels, and change the on/off status and

pan/balance settings of the signals sent from those

channels to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup

window shows the parameters for the eight channels

that include the channel you selected in step 4.

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Channel number / Channel name

This indicates the number and name of the channel

you’re operating.

B MODE button

This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR

mode to as the way in which the signal will be sent to

the STEREO bus and MONO bus. This mode can be

speciﬁed individually for each channel. The setting

will alternate between the two modes each time you

press the button.

The currently selected mode is shown by the position

of the indicator (the green ◆ symbol) located immedi-

ately above the button.

C ST button

D MONO button

When the MODE button is set to ST/MONO mode,

these buttons act as individual on/off switches for the

signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and

MONO bus.

E TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob

For an INPUT channel, this acts as a PAN knob that

adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the

STEREO bus.

For a ST IN channel, this acts as a BALANCE knob

that adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals

sent to the STEREO bus.

Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting.

1 2

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access the above popup window by pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.

HINT

Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR

mode, the following button and knob are shown

instead of the ST button

3 and MONO button 4.

F LCR button

This button is an on/off switch for all signals sent from

that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If

you turn off the button, no signals will be sent from

that input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.

G CSR knob

This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent

from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the

MONO (C) bus, in a range of 0–100%. Move the cur-

sor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to adjust the setting.

Use the MODE button to select either ST/

MONO mode or LCR mode for each chan-

nel.

The ST button and MONO button are on/off

switches for the signal sent from each

channel to the STEREO bus and MONO

bus.

If you want to use the STEREO bus, make

sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO chan-

nel is turned on in the top panel STEREO

MASTER section, and raise the fader of the

STEREO channel to an appropriate posi-

tion.

If you want to use the MONO bus, make

sure that the [ON] key of the MONO channel

is turned on, and raise the fader of the

MONO channel to an appropriate position.

This operation will differ between the LS9-16 and

LS9-32.

● For the LS9-16

Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer,

press the LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key to access

the custom fader layer, and then operate the [ON] key

and fader of the corresponding channel module.

● For the LS9-32

Press the LAYER [MASTER] key to access the master

fader layer, and operate the [ON] key and fader of

channel module 32.

In the top panel channel module section or

ST IN section, make sure that the [ON] key

is turned on for the input channel you want

to operate, and raise the fader/encoder to

an appropriate position.

● For a channel set to ST/MONO mode

Use the ST button and MONO button in the

TO STEREO/MONO popup window as on/off

switches for the signal sent from the input

channel to the STEREO bus and MONO

bus.

Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[PAN] encoder to adjust the pan/balance of

the signal sent from the input channel to

the STEREO bus.

You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST

PAN/TO ST BAL knob in the TO STEREO/MONO

popup window.

● For a channel set to LCR mode

Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO/

MONO popup window as an on/off switch

for the signal sent from the input channel to

the STEREO bus and MONO bus.

For a channel that is set to LCR mode, the signal sent

to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be switched

on/off in a single operation.

Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO/MONO

popup window to adjust the proportion

between the signal level sent from that

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the

signal level sent to the MONO (C) bus.

Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO/

MONO popup window to set the panning of

the signal sent from the input channel to

the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C)

bus.

If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST

PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the signal

levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C)

bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case,

the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional

PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.

The following steps will differ depending on whether

you selected a ST/MONO mode channel or an LCR

mode channel in step 7.

Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus

Input channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If a ST IN channel is selected, operating the TO ST

BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent

from the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R)

bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following

illustration. In this case, the [PAN] encoder will oper-

ate as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal

is sent to the MONO (C) bus.

If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the TO ST

PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the

STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in

the following illustration.

If a ST IN channel is selected, operating the TO ST

BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent

from the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R)

bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following

illustration.

If you want to operate a channel that is not

currently shown in the popup window, use

the [SEL] key to select that channel, and

then make settings for it.

For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the

popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]

key will change the popup window to INPUT channels

9–16.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

CLR

TO ST PAN knob

Signal sent to the

STEREO (L) bus

Signal sent to the

STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

ST IN (L) channel to

the STEREO (L) bus

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

ST IN (R) channel to

the STEREO (R) bus

Signal levelSignal level

CLR

PAN knob

Signal sent to the

MONO (C) bus

Signal sent to the

STEREO (L) bus

Signal sent to the

STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

ST IN (L) channel to

the STEREO (L) bus

Signal sent from the

ST IN (L) channel to

the MONO (C) bus

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

ST IN (R) channel to

the STEREO (R) bus

Signal sent from the

ST IN (R) channel to

the MONO (C) bus

Signal levelSignal level

Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to MIX buses 1–16.

MIX buses are used mainly to send signals to on-stage foldback speakers or to external effect

processors. Signals can be sent from an input channel to a MIX bus in the following three ways.

■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of

the signal sent to the MIX bus.

This method lets you control the signals sent from a speciﬁc input channel to all MIX buses.

■ Using a popup window • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this method, you use the MIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus.

This method lets you control the send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight

channels to a speciﬁc MIX bus.

■ Using the top panel faders• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this method, you switch the LS9 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to adjust the send

levels to the MIX bus. This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on/off switching for the sig-

nals sent from all input channels to a speciﬁc MIX bus.

Here’s how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of the

signals sent from a speciﬁc input channel to each MIX

bus.

Make sure that an output port is assigned

to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the

signal, and that a monitor system or exter-

nal effect processor etc. is connected to the

corresponding output port.

Refer to p.95 for details on assigning an output port to

a MIX bus, or to p.42 for details on connecting exter-

nal equipment.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 TO MIX ﬁeld

In this ﬁeld you can switch the on/off status and adjust

the send level of the signal sent from the input channel

to the MIX bus.

B TO MIX LEVEL knob

This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the

input channel to a VARI type MIX bus. To adjust the

send level in this ﬁeld, move the cursor to the knob

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

C TO MIX ON/OFF button

If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, this

button is displayed instead of the knob

2. This button

is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input

channel to a FIXED type MIX bus. To turn the signal

on/off, move the cursor to the button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion

Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus

Input channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

D PRE/POST indicator

This indicates the send position of the signal sent from

the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus. The signal

is being sent from the pre-EQ or pre-fader position if

this indicates PRE, or from immediately after the

channel on/off if the PRE indication is not shown. This

indicator is only for display. You cannot use this ﬁeld

to change the send position of the signal.

Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]

keys of the channel module section or ST

IN section to select the input channel that

you want to operate.

Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys

to select the send-destination MIX bus.

The LED of the corresponding key will light, indicat-

ing that it is selected as the send-destination.

● If the send-destination MIX bus is the VARI

type

The TO MIX ﬁeld in the screen shows the knob in the

same color as the corresponding key of the MIX/

MATRIX SEND section.

● If the send-destination MIX bus is the FIXED

type

The TO MIX ﬁeld will show the TO MIX ON/OFF

button instead of the TO MIX LEVEL knob. In this

case, you can’t adjust the send level.

If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step

4, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the

send level from that channel to the MIX bus

you selected in step 4.

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the

function of the [SELECTED SEND] encoder will

change depending on which of the two adjacent keys

of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are lit.

● If the left key is lit

Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the

pan (or balance, for a ST IN channel) of the signal that

is sent from the INPUT channel to the two MIX buses.

● If the right key is lit

Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the

send level shared by the two MIX buses.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

to a VARI type MIX bus, move the cursor to

the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen and

press the [ENTER] key to accsess the MIX

SEND popup window.

If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

to a FIXED type MIX bus, move the cursor to

the TO MIX ON/OFF button in the screen

and press the [ENTER] key.

If you switch this off, the knob will change to black

characters on a blue background. To turn it back on,

press the [ENTER] key once again.

Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select

another input channel, and adjust the send

level to the selected MIX bus in the same

way.

Use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT

section to select another MIX bus as the

send-destination, and adjust the send level

from the input channel in the same way.

• If the LED of only a speciﬁc key in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT

section is blinking and the LEDs of the remaining keys are lit,

the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode (the mode in which

you can use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX

buses or MATRIX buses). Press the desired key in the MIX/

MATRIX SELECT section so that only the LED of that key is

lit.

NOTE

• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus, then

you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately

before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the

fader) for each MIX bus (

→

p. 213).

• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a ste-

reo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL

knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (

→

p. 213).

• If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a speciﬁc

MIX bus, select the master fader layer and press the [CUE]

key for that MIX channel.

HINT

Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

In this method, you use the MIX SEND popup window to

adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus.

Make sure that an output port is assigned

to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the

signal, and that a monitor system or exter-

nal effect processor etc. is connected to the

corresponding output port.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 SEND popup button

Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]

keys of the channel module section or ST

IN section to select the send-source input

channel.

Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys

to select the send-destination MIX bus.

Move the cursor to the SEND popup button

in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the MIX SEND popup window.

In the MIX SEND popup window you can control the

send level, on/off setting, and send point for the sig-

nals sent from a set of eight input channels to the cur-

rently selected MIX bus.

The MIX SEND popup window shows the parameters

for the eight channels that include the channel you

selected in step 3. The contents of the window will dif-

fer depending on whether the send-destination MIX

bus is VARI type or FIXED type.

[ For a VARI type MIX bus ]

1 Channel number / Channel name

This indicates the number and name of the send-

source channel.

B PRE button

This switches the position from which the signal is

sent from the send-source channel to the currently

selected MIX bus. If this button is on, the pre-EQ or

pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the

signal from immediately after the channel on/off will

be sent.

C TO MIX ON/OFF button

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from

the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX

bus.

D TO MIX LEVEL knob

This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the

send-source channel to the currently selected MIX

bus.

E ALL PRE button

This button selects PRE as the position from which the

signals are sent from all input channels to the VARI

type MIX bus.

F ALL POST button

This button selects POST as the position from which

the signals are sent from all input channels to the

VARI type MIX bus.

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the

screen will change as follows.

Using a popup window

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access the above popup window by pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.

• If you want to switch the on/off status of the signal sent to a

VARI type MIX bus, you can move the cursor to the TO MIX

LEVEL knob in the screen and press the [ENTER] key to

access the above popup window.

HINT

5 6

Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus

Input channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

G TO MIX PAN/TO MIX BALANCE knob

This knob adjusts the pan (or balance, for a ST IN

channel) of the signal that is sent from the INPUT

channel to the two MIX buses.

[ For a FIXED type MIX bus ]

1 Channel number / Channel name

This indicates the number and name of the send-

source channel.

B TO MIX ON/OFF button

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from

the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX

bus.

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, on/off

operations are linked for adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered MIX buses.

If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step

4, move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL

knob in the screen, and use the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the send level

from each channel to the selected MIX bus.

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, move

the cursor to the TO MIX PAN (TO MIX BALANCE)

knob and adjust the pan (or balance, for a ST IN chan-

nel) of the signal sent from each channel to the two

MIX buses.

To switch the send position of a signal sent

to a VARI type MIX bus, move the cursor to

the PRE button in the screen and press the

[ENTER] key.

If the PRE button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal

will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from imme-

diately after the channel on/off will be sent.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

to a VARI/FIXED type MIX bus, move the

cursor to the TO MIX ON/OFF button in the

screen and press the [ENTER] key.

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, opera-

tion of the adjacent left/right pair of buttons is linked.

If you want to operate a channel that is not

currently shown in the popup window, use

the [SEL] key to select that channel, and

then make settings for it.

If you want to adjust the send level to

another MIX bus, use the keys of the MIX/

MATRIX SELECT section to select another

MIX bus, and make settings in the same

way.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

Here’s how to use the top panel faders/encoders to adjust

the send level and turn the signal on/off for the signals sent

from all input channels to a speciﬁc MIX bus.

Make sure that an output port is assigned

to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the

signal, and that a monitor system or exter-

nal effect processor etc. is connected to the

corresponding output port.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 SEND popup button

• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus, then

you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately

before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the

fader) for each MIX bus (

→

p. 213).

• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a ste-

reo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL

knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (

→

p. 213).

HINT

• If the PRE button is on, then you will be able to select either

PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER

(immediately before the fader) for each MIX bus (

→

p. 213).

HINT

Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER

mode)

Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys

to select the send-destination MIX bus.

The LED of the corresponding key will light, indicat-

ing that it is selected as the send-destination.

Press the same key of the MIX/MATRIX

SELECT section once again.

The key will change from lit to blinking, and the LEDs

of the remaining keys in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT

section will light. This indicates that the LS9 is now in

SENDS ON FADER mode (in which you can use the

faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus /

MATRIX bus).

In SENDS ON FADER mode, the function of the

channel module section’s faders and [ON] keys (the

ST IN section’s encoders and [ON] keys) will change

as follows.

● Faders/Encoders

These will adjust the send level of the signal sent from

the input channels to the currently selected MIX bus.

When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON

FADER mode, the fader positions will move to the

value of the send levels to the currently selected MIX

bus.

● [ON] keys

These will operate as on/off switches for the signal

sent from the input channels to the currently selected

MIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to

SENDS ON FADER mode, the [ON] keys will light or

go dark according to the on/off status of the signals

being sent to the currently selected MIX bus.

● [SEL] keys

The [SEL] key of the selected channel will blink, and

the [SEL] keys of channels that are not selected will

light. However, the [SEL] keys of unassigned modules

will go dark.

If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step

3, use the faders of the channel module

section and the encoders of the ST IN sec-

tion to adjust the send level from the chan-

nels to the MIX bus you selected in step 3.

As necessary, switch fader layers to the layer that con-

tains the desired send-source input channels.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

to a VARI/FIXED type MIX bus, press the top

panel [ON] key.

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, on/off

operations will be linked for the signal sent to the two

adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses.

Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level

and switch the on/off status for other MIX

buses in the same way.

When you’ve ﬁnished setting the MIX send

levels, press the key that is currently blink-

ing in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section.

The LS9 will return to normal mode.

In SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destina-

tion is a MIX bus), the STEREO MASTER module

will operate differently depending on the selected

fader layer.

Fader layer Function

1-16 {1-32}/17-32

{33-64}

Send-destination MIX channel module

MASTER/CUS-

TOM FADER

STEREO channel (however, the fader

and [ON] key will do nothing)

•You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a user-

deﬁned key. This allows you quickly switch to SENDS ON

FADER mode for a speciﬁc MIX bus, or quickly return to the

previous state.

•You can also use the [HOME] key to cancel SENDS ON

FADER mode.

HINT

• If you switch the fader layer from 1-16 {1-32}, 17-32 {33-64},

or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER

mode (when the send-destination is a MIX bus), SENDS ON

FADER mode will be cancelled.

•You cannot operate the fader or [ON] key of a channel that is

not a send-source (a channel that does not have a MIX SEND

parameter) or of a channel that is not a send-destination bus

master.

NOTE

Output channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Chapter 6

Output channel operations

This chapter explains operations for output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX

channels, STEREO channels, MONO channels).

The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses,

processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The fol-

lowing types of output channel are provided.

■ MIX channels 1–16• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

These channels process the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding

output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus. When the LS9 is in the initial state, these are assigned

to the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot(s).

Signal ﬂow for output channels

... ...

15 16

MATRIX CUE

MIX

(C)

12 78 LR

PAN

MIX 1-16

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

INSERT OUT 1-16

MIX

INSERT IN 1-16

MIX

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

METER

INSERT

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

PRE EQ POST EQ

EQ OUT

METER

DYNA OUT

METER

PRE FADER

METER

INSERT

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

LEVEL

PRE FADER

Keyin

Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/

MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ

LEVEL

CUE ON

MATRIX1,3...7

MATRIX2,4...8

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL

PRE FADER / POST ON

To MATRIX

VARI

To MATRIX

VARI

STEREO

ST L

POST ON

METER

POST ON

MIX OUT1-16

(13-16)To KEYIN

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

To MONITOR SELECT

To RECORDER IN PATCH

MONO(C)

ST R

PAN MODE

TO ST TO MONO

TO LCR

PAN

LR MONO

LCR

POST ON

CSR

GR METER

ATT

4BAND

COMP

COMPAND

EXPAND

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

POST ON

INSERT OUT

INSERT

Signal flow for output channels

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ STEREO channel / MONO (C) channel • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and

send it to an output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are set to LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and

the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels.

When the LS9 is in the initial state, the STEREO channel is assigned to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack.

■ MATRIX channels 1–8 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

These channels process the signals sent from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses,

and send them to the corresponding output ports.

● ATT (attenuator)

Attenuates/boosts the level of the signal.

● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)

This is a parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH

MID, LOW MID, and LOW.

● COMP/COMPANDER/EXPAND (compressor/com-

pander/expander)

This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com-

pressor, compander, or expander.

● LEVEL

This adjusts the output level of the channel.

● BALANCE (STEREO channel only)

Adjusts the left/right volume balance of the STEREO (L/

R) channel.

● ON (on/off)

Turns the output channel on/off. If this is off, the corre-

sponding channel is muted.

● TO MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)

This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the MIX

channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel

to each MATRIX bus 1–8.

● TO MATRIX LEVEL 1-8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)

This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX

channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel

to each MATRIX bus 1–8. As the position from which the

signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either

pre-fader or after the channel on/off.

... ...

15 16

MATRIX CUE

MIX

(C)

12 78 LR

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

To OUTPUT PATCH

To MONITOR SELECT

To RECORDER IN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

To RECORDER IN PATCH

STEREO L,R,MONO(C)

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

STEREO

INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)

STEREO

INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

METER

INSERT

PRE EQ

ATT

POST EQ

4BAND

EQ OUT

METER

DYNA OUT

METER

GR METER

Keyin

Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/

ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

METER

INSERT

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

LEVEL BAL

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL

MATRIX1,3...7

MATRIX2,4...8

CUE ON

PAN

LEVEL

PRE FADER / POST ON

To MATRIX

VARI

PRE FADER / POST ON

To MATRIX

VARI

STEREO

POST ON

METER

To STEREO OUT L+C,R+C

POST ON

STEREO OUT

L,R,MONO(C)

STEREO OUT L

STEREO OUT MONO(C)

STEREO OUT R

STEREO OUT L+C

STEREO OUT R+C

To OUTPUT PATCH

To RECORDER IN PATCH

COMP

COMPAND

EXPAND

POST ON

INSERT OUT

INSERT

... ...

15 16

MATRIX CUE

MIX

(C)

12 78 LR

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

MATRIX1-8

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

MATRIX

INSERT OUT 1-8

MATRIX

INSERTIN1-8

CUE ON

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

METER

EQ OUT

METER

INSERT

PRE EQ

ATT

POST EQ

4BAND

DYNA OUT

METER

COMP

COMPAND

EXPAND

PRE FADER

METER

INSERT

LEVEL

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

Keyin

Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/

MATRIX1-8 POST EQ

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL

POST ON

METER

MATRIX OUT 1-8

To OUTPUT PATCH

To MONITOR SELECT

To RECORDER IN PATCH

GR METER

POST ON

INSERT OUT

INSERT

POST ON

Output channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you

can use the TO MATRIX PAN knob in the screen to adjust

the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-

source is the STEREO channel or a stereo MIX channel,

use the TO MATRIX BALANCE knob to adjust the vol-

ume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two

MATRIX buses.

● INSERT

You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an

external device such as an effect processor. You can switch

the insert-out and insert-in locations.

● METER

This meters the level of the output channel. You can

switch the position at which the level is detected.

● KEY IN (MIX channels 13–16 only)

You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13–16 to

the dynamics processors of each channel, and use them as

key-in signals to control the dynamics.

● RACK IN PATCH

This patches the output signal of a MIX channel to an

input of the rack.

● OUTPUT PATCH

This assigns an output port to an output channel.

● MONITOR SELECT

This selects the output signal of an output channel as a

monitor source.

Here’s how to specify the channel name and icon for each output channel.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

Use the LAYER section to select the fader

layer that contains the desired output chan-

nel.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section or ST IN section to select the output

channel that you want to operate.

1 PATCH ﬁeld

B Output port select popup button

Move the cursor to the output port select

popup button in the PATCH ﬁeld of the

screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The PATCH/NAME popup window will appear,

allowing you to select an output port and icon for the

output channel, and to assign a name.

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Output port button

This indicates the output port that is assigned to the

corresponding channel. If more than one output port is

assigned, one port will be displayed to represent them.

When you’re selecting the icon or editing the channel

name, moving the cursor to this button and pressing

the [ENTER] key will take you back to the output port

selection screen.

Specifying the channel name / icon

• In order to select a MATRIX channel or MONO channel on the

LS9-16, you must assign the channel to the custom fader

layer, and then select this layer.

HINT

4 2 3 1

Signal flow for output channels • Specifying the channel name / icon

Specifying the channel name / icon

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

B Icon button

This shows the icon that is selected for the correspond-

ing channel.

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, a screen where you can select an icon

and a sample name will appear.

C Channel name input box

This indicates the name that is assigned to the corre-

sponding channel. When you move the cursor to this

ﬁeld and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window

will appear, allowing you to enter a name.

D Tabs

These tabs switch the items that are shown in the win-

dow.

To select an icon for this channel, move the

cursor to the icon button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The window display will change as follows.

1 Icon select buttons

These buttons select the icon that is used for this chan-

nel.

B Sample name select buttons

These buttons select sample names that are related to

the currently selected icon. When you press a button,

its sample name will be entered in the channel name

ﬁeld.

C Icon background color select buttons

These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the

background color for the icon.

Use the icon select buttons and the icon

background color select buttons to select

the icon you want to use for that channel.

The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the

upper part of the window.

If desired, use the sample name select but-

tons to select a sample name. The selected

sample name will be entered in the channel

name ﬁeld in the upper part of the window.

If you want to enter a channel name directly

(or edit the previously-entered sample

name), move the cursor to the channel

name ﬁeld in the upper part of the window

and press the [ENTER] key.

The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of

the window, allowing you to enter or edit the text. For

details on using the keyboard window, refer to p.34.

Use the [SEL] keys to select another output

channel, and specify its icon and channel

name in the same way.

While the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed,

you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel that

you’re operating.

When you’ve ﬁnished entering information,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.

•You can add or edit the text after entering the sample name in

the channel name ﬁeld. If you want to assign channel names

that consist of a common name plus a number, such as “Vocal

1” and “Vocal 2,” you can simply enter a sample name and

then add a number.

HINT

Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus

Output channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how to send the signal of a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO

bus.

Signals can be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode,

and you can choose either of these two modes for each MIX channel. These two modes differ as

follows.

■ ST/MONO mode• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This mode sends the signal from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently.

• The signals sent from the same MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off

individually.

• The panning of the signal sent from a monaural MIX channel to the STEREO bus L/R can be operated by the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen. (The signal sent to

the MONO bus is not affected by this encoder or knob.)

• The volume balance of the signals sent from two stereo-assigned MIX channels to the STEREO bus left and

right can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST BAL knob in

the screen. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)

This mode sends the signal of the MIX channel to a total of three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) together.

• The signals sent from the same MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off

together.

• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the MIX

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus.

• The level of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus will

change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder or the TO ST PAN

knob / TO ST BAL knob in the screen.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 TO ST ﬁeld

B TO ST PAN knob (for a stereo MIX channel,

the TO ST BAL knob)

In the LAYER section, press the LAYER

[MASTER] key to select the master fader

layer.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section to select the send-source MIX chan-

nel.

If you only want to adjust the pan or bal-

ance of the MIX channel, operate the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN]

encoder (→ p. 86).

You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to

the PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus

• If you want to use headphones etc. to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus, you should

press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] key several times to access the MONITOR (2/4) screen,

and select “LCR” as the monitor source (

→

p. 146) before you continue with the following procedure.

HINT

1 2

Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If you want to switch the on/off status of the

signal sent from the MIX channel to the

STEREO/MONO bus, or switch it between

ST/MONO mode and LCR mode, use either

of the following methods to access the TO

STEREO/MONO popup window.

•Move the cursor to the PAN popup button located in

the TO ST ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

•Move the cursor to the TO ST PAN knob located in

the TO ST ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can

switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode in

sets of eight MIX channels, and change the on/off sta-

tus and pan/balance settings of the signals sent from

those channels to the STEREO/MONO bus. This

popup window shows the parameters for the eight

channels that include the MIX channel you selected in

step 3.

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Channel number / Channel name

This indicates the number and name of the channel

you’re operating.

B MODE button

This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR

mode to specify how the signal is sent to the STEREO

bus and MONO bus. You can specify this mode indi-

vidually for each MIX channel. The setting will alter-

nate between the two modes each time you press the

button.

The currently selected mode is shown by the position

of the indicator (the green ◆ symbol) located immedi-

ately above the button.

C ST button

D MONO button

When the MODE button is set to ST/MONO mode,

these buttons act as individual on/off switches for the

signal sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO bus

and MONO bus.

E TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob

For monaural MIX channels, this acts as the PAN

knob that adjusts the left/right panning of the signal

sent to the STEREO bus.

For stereo MIX channels, this acts as the BALANCE

knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right sig-

nals sent to the STEREO bus.

Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting.

For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR

mode, the following button and knob are shown

instead of the ST button (

3) and MONO button (4).

F LCR button

This button is an on/off switch for all signals sent from

that MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO

bus. If you turn off the button, no signals will be sent

from that output channel to the STEREO bus or

MONO bus.

G CSR knob

This knob adjusts the proportion between the signal

level sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO (L/

R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus, over a

range of 0–100%. To adjust the setting, move the cur-

sor to the knob, press the [ENTER] key, and use the

dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

Use the MODE button to select either ST/

MONO mode or LCR mode for each MIX

channel.

The ST button and MONO button are on/off

switches for the signal sent from the MIX

channel to the STEREO bus and MONO

bus.

If you want to use the STEREO bus, make

sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO chan-

nel is turned on in the top panel STEREO

MASTER section, and raise the fader of the

STEREO channel to an appropriate posi-

tion.

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access the above popup window by pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.

HINT

Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus

Output channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If you want to use the MONO bus, make

sure that the [ON] key of the MONO channel

is turned on, and raise the fader of the

MONO channel to an appropriate position.

This operation will differ between the LS9-16 and

LS9-32.

● For the LS9-16

Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer,

press the LAYER [CUSTOM] key to access the cus-

tom fader layer, and then operate the [ON] key and

fader of the corresponding channel module.

● For the LS9-32

Press the LAYER [MASTER] key to access the master

fader layer, and operate the [ON] key and fader of

channel module 32.

Select the master fader layer, make sure

that the [ON] key of the desired MIX channel

is turned on, and raise the fader to an

appropriate position.

● For a MIX channel set to ST/MONO

mode

Use the ST button and MONO button in the

TO STEREO/MONO popup window as on/off

switches for the signal sent from the MIX

channel to the STEREO bus and MONO

bus.

Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[PAN] encoder to adjust the pan/balance of

the signal sent from the MIX channel to the

STEREO bus.

You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST

PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob in the TO STEREO/

MONO popup window.

● For a MIX channel set to LCR mode

Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO/

MONO popup window as an on/off switch

for the signal sent from the MIX channel to

the STEREO bus and MONO bus.

For a MIX channel that is set to LCR mode, the signal

sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be

switched on/off in a single operation.

Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO/MONO

popup window to adjust the proportion

between the signal level sent from that MIX

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the

signal level sent to the MONO (C) bus.

Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO/

MONO popup window to set the panning of

the signal sent from the MIX channel to the

STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus.

If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST

PAN knob of a MIX channel will change the signal

levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C)

bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case,

the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional

PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.

If a MIX channel set to stereo is selected, operating

the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal

levels sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/

R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following

illustration. In this case, the [PAN] encoder will oper-

ate as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal

is sent to the MONO (C) bus.

The following steps will differ depending on whether

you selected a ST/MONO mode MIX channel or an

LCR mode MIX channel in step 6.

CLR

TO ST PAN knob

Signal sent to the

STEREO (L) bus

Signal sent to the

STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

odd-numbered MIX

channel to the STE-

REO (L) bus

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

even-numbered MIX

channel to the STE-

REO (R) bus

Signal levelSignal level

Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the TO ST

PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the

STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in

the following illustration.

If a stereo MIX channel is selected, operating the TO

ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent

from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and

MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration.

If you want to operate a channel that is not

currently shown in the popup window, use

the [SEL] key to select that channel, and

then make settings for it.

For example if MIX channels 1–8 are shown in the

popup window, pressing the MIX channel 9 [SEL] key

will change the popup window to MIX channels 9–16.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

CLR

PAN knob

Signal sent to the

MONO (C) bus

Signal sent to the

STEREO (L) bus

Signal sent to the

STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

odd-numbered MIX

channel to the STE-

REO (L) bus

Signal sent from the

odd-numbered MIX

channel to the

MONO (C) bus

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the

even-numbered MIX

channel to the

MONO (C) bus

Signal sent from the

even-numbered MIX

channel to the STE-

REO (R) bus

Signal levelSignal level

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses

Output channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how to send the signal from a MIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel to

MATRIX buses 1–8. You can do this in any of the following three ways.

■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of

the signal sent to the MATRIX bus.

In this method, you use the MATRIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a

MATRIX bus.

This method lets you control the send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight

channels to a speciﬁc MATRIX bus.

■ Using the top panel faders • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

In this method, you switch the LS9 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to adjust the send

levels to the MATRIX bus. This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on/off switching for

the signals sent from MIX, STEREO (L/R), and MONO channels to a speciﬁc MATRIX bus.

In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of

the signal sent to the MATRIX bus.

You can either control the signals sent from a desired

MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to all MATRIX

buses, or control the signals sent from all MIX channels to

a speciﬁc MATRIX bus.

■ Controlling the signals sent from a MIX,

STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to all

MATRIX buses

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 TO MATRIX ﬁeld

If a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is

selected, this area of the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen will show the TO MATRIX ﬁeld, allowing you

to switch the on/off status and adjust the send level of

the signals sent to the MATRIX buses.

B TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs

These adjust the send level of the signals sent from the

MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to the

MATRIX buses. These knobs are the same color as the

corresponding keys of the MIX/MATRIX SEND sec-

tion.

To adjust the send level in this ﬁeld, move the cursor to

the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. To

switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a MATRIX

bus, move the cursor to the corresponding knob and

press the [ENTER] key.

Use the LAYER section keys and the chan-

nel module section [SEL] keys to select the

send-source MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO

channel.

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels

to MATRIX buses

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion

• In order to select a MONO channel on the LS9-16, you must

ﬁrst select the custom fader layer to which you’ve assigned

that MONO channel, and then press the corresponding [SEL]

key.

HINT

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys

to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.

When a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is

selected, the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT sec-

tion are used to select the send-destination MATRIX

bus.

When you press a key to select the send-destination

MATRIX bus, only the LED of the corresponding key

will blink, indicating that it is selected as the send-des-

tination. The cursor will move to the corresponding

TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the TO MATRIX ﬁeld

of the screen.

Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the

send level from that channel to the MATRIX

bus you selected in step 3.

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,

the function of the [SELECTED SEND] encoder will

change depending on which of the two adjacent keys

of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are lit.

● If the left key is lit

Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the

pan (or balance, for a STEREO channel) of the signal

that is sent from that channel to the two MATRIX

buses.

● If the right key is lit

Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the

send level shared by the two MATRIX buses.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

to a MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the TO

MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen and

press the [ENTER] key.

If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey. To turn

it back on, press the [ENTER] key once again.

Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select

another channel, and adjust the send level

to the selected MATRIX bus in the same

way.

Use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT

section to select another MATRIX bus as

the send-destination, and adjust the send

level in the same way.

■ Controlling the signals sent from MIX, STE-

REO (L/R), or MONO channels to a speciﬁc

MATRIX bus

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]

keys of the channel module section to

select the send-destination MATRIX chan-

nel.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will change as fol-

lows.

1 FROM MIX ﬁeld

If a MATRIX channel is selected, this area of the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen will show the FROM

MIX ﬁeld, allowing you to switch the on/off status and

adjust the send level of the signals sent from each MIX

channel to the MATRIX bus.

B FROM MIX LEVEL knobs

These knobs indicate and control the send level of the

signals sent from MIX channels 1–16 to the currently

selected MATRIX bus.

• If a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is selected, MIX/

MATRIX SELECT section keys 9–16 are inactive.

• If the LED of only the speciﬁed key is blinking in the MIX/

MATRIX SELECT section and the LEDs of the remaining keys

are lit, the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode. Press the

desired key of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section so that only

the LED of that key is blinking.

NOTE

• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus,

then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immedi-

ately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately

before the fader) for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered MATRIX buses (

→

p. 213).

• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a ste-

reo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST

BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (

→

p. 213).

• If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a speciﬁc

MATRIX bus, select the fader layer that includes that MATRIX

channel, and press the corresponding [CUE] key.

HINT

• In order to select a MATRIX channel on the LS9-16, you must

ﬁrst select the custom fader layer to which you’ve assigned

that MATRIX channel, and then press the corresponding

[SEL] key.

HINT

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses

Output channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To adjust the send level from a MIX channel

to the selected MATRIX bus, move the cur-

sor to the corresponding knob of the FROM

MIX ﬁeld, and operate the [SELECTED

SEND] encoder.

You can obtain the same result by operating the dial or

the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,

the send level to the two adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered MATRIX buses will be linked.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

from a MIX channel to the selected MATRIX

bus, move the cursor to the corresponding

knob of the FROM MIX ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey. To turn

it back on, press the [ENTER] key once again.

Use the top panel [SEL] keys to switch the

send-destination MATRIX channel and con-

trol the send level to a speciﬁc MATRIX bus

in the same way.

Here’s how you can use the MATRIX SEND popup win-

dow to adjust the send levels from up to eight channels to

a MATRIX bus.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 SEND popup button

Use the LAYER section keys and the chan-

nel module section [SEL] keys to select the

send-source MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO

channel.

Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys

to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.

Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink,

indicating that it is selected as the send-destination.

Move the cursor to the SEND popup button

in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the MATRIX SEND popup window.

In the MATRIX SEND popup window you can view

eight MIX channels or the STEREO (L/R) and MONO

channels at once, and control the send level, on/off sta-

tus, and send point for the signals sent to the MATRIX

bus.

The MATRIX SEND popup window shows the param-

eters for a maximum of eight channels that include the

channel you selected in step 3.

1 Channel number / Channel name

This indicates the number and name of the send-

source channel.

B PRE button

This switches the position from which the signal is

sent from the send-source channel to the currently

selected MATRIX bus. If this button is on, the pre-EQ

or pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the

signal from immediately after the channel on/off will

be sent.

C TO MATRIX ON/OFF button

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from

the send-source channel to the currently selected

MATRIX bus.

D TO MATRIX LEVEL knob

This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the

send-source channel to the currently selected

MATRIX bus.

Using a popup window

• When the SELECTED CH VIEW screen for MATRIX channels

is displayed, the keys of the MIX/MATRIX section will operate

as keys that select the send-destination MIX bus for the input

channels.

NOTE

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,

the screen will change as follows.

E TO MATRIX PAN/TO MATRIX BALANCE

knob

This knob adjusts the panning (or the balance, if the

send-source is a STEREO channel or a MIX channel

set to stereo) of the signal sent from this channel to the

two MATRIX buses.

To adjust the send level from each channel

to the selected MATRIX bus, move the cur-

sor to a TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the

screen, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys.

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,

move the cursor to the TO MATRIX PAN (TO

MATRIX BAL) knob and adjust the pan (or balance,

for a STEREO channel or MIX channels set to stereo)

of the signal sent from each channel to the two

MATRIX buses.

To switch the send position of a signal sent

to the MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the

PRE button in the screen and press the

[ENTER] key.

If the PRE button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal

will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from imme-

diately after the channel on/off will be sent.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

to the MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the

TO MATRIX ON/OFF button in the screen

and press the [ENTER] key.

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,

operation of the adjacent left/right pair of buttons is

linked.

If you want to operate a channel that is not

currently shown in the popup window, use

the [SEL] key to select that channel, and

then make settings for it.

If you want to adjust the send level to

another MATRIX bus, use the keys of the

MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select

another MATRIX bus, and make settings in

the same way.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow) and press the [ENTER] key.

Here’s how to use the top panel faders and [ON] keys to

adjust the send level and turn the signal on/off for the sig-

nals sent from the MIX, STEREO (L/R), and MONO

channels to a speciﬁc MATRIX bus.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 SEND popup button

Use the LAYER section keys and the chan-

nel module section [SEL] keys to select a

MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel.

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access the above popup window by pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.

• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus,

then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immedi-

ately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately

before the fader) for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered MATRIX buses (

→

p. 213).

• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a ste-

reo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST

BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (

→

p. 213).

HINT

• If the PRE button is on, then you will be able to select either

PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER

(immediately before the fader) for each two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered MATRIX buses (

→

p. 213).

HINT

Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER

mode)

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses

Output channel operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys

to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.

Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink,

indicating that it is selected as the send-destination.

Press the same key of the MIX/MATRIX

SELECT section once again.

The key will change from lit to blinking, and the LEDs

of the remaining keys in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT

section will light. This indicates that the LS9 is now in

SENDS ON FADER mode, allowing you to use the

faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus /

MATRIX bus.

In SENDS ON FADER mode, the faders and [ON]

keys of the channel module section will change their

operation as follows.

● Faders

The faders will adjust the send level of the signal sent

from each channel to the currently selected MATRIX

bus. When you switch from normal mode to SENDS

ON FADER mode, the fader positions will move to the

value of the send levels to the currently selected

MATRIX bus.

● [ON] keys

These keys will function as on/off switches for the sig-

nal sent from each channel to the currently selected

MATRIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to

SENDS ON FADER mode, the [ON] keys will light or

go dark according to the on/off status of the signals

being sent to the currently selected MATRIX bus.

● [SEL] keys

The [SEL] key of the selected channel will blink, and

the [SEL] keys of channels that are not selected will

light. However, the [SEL] keys of unassigned modules

will go dark.

Use the channel module faders to adjust

the send levels from the channels to the

MATRIX bus you selected in step 3.

As necessary, switch fader layers to access the layer

that contains the desired send-source channel.

To switch the on/off status of a signal sent

to the MATRIX bus, press the top panel [ON]

key.

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,

on/off operations will be linked for the signal sent to

the two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered

MATRIX buses.

Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level

and switch the on/off status for other

MATRIX buses in the same way.

When you’ve ﬁnished setting the MATRIX

send levels, press the key that is currently

blinking in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT sec-

tion.

The LS9 will return to normal mode.

In SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destina-

tion is a MATRIX bus), the STEREO MASTER mod-

ule will operate differently depending on the selected

fader layer.

• While SENDS ON FADER mode is active with a MATRIX bus

as the send-destination, the faders/encoders and [ON] keys

of input channels will be disabled. If you want to operate an

input channel, you must ﬁrst disable the above SENDS ON

FADER mode.

NOTE

Fader layer Function

1-16 {1-32}/17-32 {33-64}

Send-destination MATRIX channel

module

MASTER/

CUSTOM FADER

[SEL] key, [CUE] key:

STEREO channel

[ON] key, fader:

Adjust the on/off status and

send level of signals sent to

MATRIX buses

•You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a user-

deﬁned key. This allows you quickly switch to SENDS ON

FADER mode for a speciﬁc MATRIX bus, or quickly return to

the previous state.

•You can also use the [HOME] key to cancel SENDS ON

FADER mode.

HINT

• If you switch the fader layer from 1-16 {1-32}, 17-32 {33-64},

or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER

mode (when the send-destination is a MATRIX bus), SENDS

ON FADER mode will be cancelled.

•You cannot operate the fader or [ON] key of a channel that is

not a send-source (a channel that does not have a MATRIX

SEND parameter) or of a channel that is not a send-destina-

tion bus master.

NOTE

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Chapter 7

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL

section

This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section

and the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to control the parameters of a selected

channel.

The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display corresponds to a channel

module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to manually adjust all the major parame-

ters of the currently selected channel.

Operations in this section will affect the channel that is currently selected by its [SEL] key. You

can use the encoders and keys on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain,

EQ settings, the threshold setting of the dynamics processors, pan/balance settings, and send

levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.

For a ST IN channel or STEREO channel, either the L or the R channel is selected, and the

major parameters are linked.

About the SELECTED CHANNEL section

SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16

• If you want to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to set the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses,

use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section located at the left of the display.

HINT

About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

When you press the [HOME] key, the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display.

This screen shows most of the parameters of the channel currently selected by its [SEL] key. You

can use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to check the values when operating the encoders of

the SELECTED CHANNEL section, or when you need to edit more detailed parameters.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following

items.

1 SEND ﬁeld

● When an input channel is selected

Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals

sent from that channel to each MIX bus (if the MIX

bus is set to the FIXED type), and view or edit the

send levels.

● When a MIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is

selected

Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals

sent from that channel to each MATRIX bus, and view

or edit the send levels.

● When a MATRIX channel is selected

Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals

sent from each MIX channel to that MATRIX bus, and

view or edit the send levels.

B HA ﬁeld (input channels only)

In this ﬁeld you can view or edit the input port patched to

the input channel, the head amp gain, the phantom power

on/off status, and the phase setting. The input level OVER

indicator is also shown here.

C PATCH ﬁeld (output channels only)

For output channels, the PATCH ﬁeld is shown in the

area. In this ﬁeld you can view and edit the output port

that is patched to the output channel. For channels to

which two or more output ports are patched, only one will

be shown as a representative.

D PAN ﬁeld

● When an INPUT channel or monaural MIX

channel is selected

This functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent

from that channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. Here

you can also view or edit the panning of the signal sent

to the STEREO bus.

● When a ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel

is selected

This functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent

from that channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This

also lets you view or edit the balance of the left/right

signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus.

● When a stereo MATRIX channel is selected

This shows the balance of the signals sent from the

two MATRIX channels.

● When a STEREO channel is selected

This shows the balance of the left/right signals sent

from the STEREO channel.

E DYNA1 ﬁeld

F DYNA2 ﬁeld (input channels only)

Here you can view or edit the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.

This also accesses the DYNAMICS 1 / DYNAMICS 2

popup windows where you can edit detailed dynamics

parameters that cannot be edited in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section.

G EQ ﬁeld

Here you can switch the four-band EQ on/off, and view or

edit its parameters. For input channels, you can also

switch the HPF (high-pass ﬁlter) on/off, and view or

adjust its cutoff frequency.

H EQ graph ﬁeld

This shows the response of the EQ/HPF.

I INSERT ﬁeld (INPUT channels 1–32 and MIX/

MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only)

The signal route for insertion in the channel can be

switched on/off here.

J DIRECT ﬁeld (INPUT channels only)

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is directly out-

put from the channel. You can also view and edit the out-

put level here.

K SAFE ﬁeld

Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for that channel. If

only some of the channel parameters are set to Recall

Safe, the PARTIAL indicator will light.

L FADER ﬁeld

Here you can view and edit the input/output level of the

channel, and switch the channel on/off.

M MUTE ﬁeld

Here you can select the mute group to which that channel

is assigned. SAFE indicator will light if the corresponding

channel is set to Mute Safe.

About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen

7LMJ8

1234

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control all of the

parameters for a speciﬁc channel.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display. If you leave this screen displayed, you will

always be able to view the settings in the screen while

operating an encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL

section.

Use the LAYER section to select the desired

fader layer.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section, ST IN section, or STEREO MASTER

section to select a channel.

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

will affect the channel that is currently selected by its

[SEL] key. The number and name of the currently

selected channel is shown in the upper left of the dis-

play.

1 Channel number

B Channel name

Even if a screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen is selected, the encoders of the SELECTED

CHANNEL section always affect the currently

selected channel. When you operate an encoder, a

small popup window indicating the value of that

parameter will appear in the screen.

Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL section and the buttons and knobs in

the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to edit the

parameters of the selected channel.

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

•You can also access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen by

pressing any one of the encoders in the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL section.

HINT

• In the case of ST IN channels or STEREO channels, you can

switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same

[SEL] key.

• In order to select a MATRIX/MONO channel on the LS9-16,

you must ﬁrst select the custom fader layer to which you’ve

assigned that channel, and then press the corresponding

[SEL] key.

•You can also move the cursor to the selected channel in the

upper left of the display, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to change the selected channel.

HINT

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Adjusting the send levels from a spe-

ciﬁc channel to the MIX buses / MATRIX

buses

Use the SEND ﬁeld when you want to send the signal

from an INPUT/ST IN channel to a MIX bus, or from a

MIX, STEREO, or MONO channel to a MATRIX bus.

1 SEND popup button

This accesses a popup window where you can make send

level settings for eight channels at a time.

B TO MIX LEVEL (TO MATRIX LEVEL) knobs

These knobs indicate the send level of the signal sent from

that input channel to each MIX bus or MATRIX bus. If the

send-destination MIX bus / MATRIX bus is set to stereo,

the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a

PAN knob. (For a ST IN channel, a stereo MIX channel, or

STEREO channel, it will operate as the BALANCE knob.)

C TO MIX ON/OFF button

If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, the TO

MIX LEVEL knob will not appear; instead, the TO MIX

ON/OFF button will be shown. By moving the cursor to

the TO MIX ON/OFF button and pressing the [ENTER]

key, you can turn the signal sent from that channel to the

MIX button on/off.

To adjust the send level to a MIX bus / MATRIX bus, use

the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select

the send-destination bus, and use the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. (Alternatively,

move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL/TO MATRIX

LEVEL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys.)

If desired, you can use the TO MIX ON/OFF buttons to

switch the signal sent to each bus on/off (if the MIX bus is

the FIXED type).

At the left side of these buttons is shown the position from

which the signal is sent from the current channel. (For

details on changing the send position → p. 213)

Subsequent operations will differ depending on the

parameters you want to adjust.

• If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a

time, use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the

popup window (

→

p. 64).

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.

•You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to

the To MIX SEND knob of a VARI type, and pressing the [ENTER]

key.

•For MIX buses that are set to STEREO, the left knob indicates the

PAN of the MIX SEND, and the right knob indicates the SEND

LEVEL.

HINT

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Adjusting the send level from the MIX

channels to a speciﬁc MATRIX bus

To adjust the send level from the MIX channels to a spe-

ciﬁc MATRIX bus, access the send-destination MATRIX

channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.

1 SEND popup button

This button displays a popup window where you can make

send level settings for eight channels at a time.

B TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs

These adjust the send level of the signal sent from each

MIX channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus.

To adjust the send level to a MATRIX bus, use the keys of

the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select the MIX

channel you want to operate, and then operate the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND]

encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the TO

MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen, and operate the dial

or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.)

At the left side of each of these knobs is shown the posi-

tion from which the signal is sent from the MIX channel.

(For details on changing the send position → p. 213)

● Making HA settings (input channels

only)

To control the head amp (HA) assigned to an INPUT/ST

IN channel, you will use the [HA GAIN] encoder of the

SELECTED CHANNEL section and the HA ﬁeld of the

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. The HA ﬁeld

includes the following items.

1 HA popup button

This button displays the HA/PATCH popup window

where you can make head amp settings for eight channels

at a time (→ p. 57).

B Input port select popup button

This accesses the PATCH/NAME popup window, where

you can select the input port and specify the channel name

and icon. The input port assigned to that channel is shown

inside this button.

C +48V button

This button switches the phantom power on/off for the

head amp assigned to that channel.

D ø (phase) button

This button switches the input assigned to that channel

between normal phase and reverse phase. The phase is

reversed when the button is on, and normal when the but-

ton is off.

E OVER indicator

This will light when the input signal from the HA reaches

the overload point.

F GAIN knob

This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp

assigned to that channel.

To adjust the gain value, use the SELECTED CHANNEL

section [HA GAIN] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cur-

sor to the GAIN knob and operate the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys.) The indicator above the GAIN knob in the

screen shows whether the signal of the patched input port

has overloaded.

When you move the cursor to the input port select popup

button and press the [ENTER] key, the PATCH/NAME

popup window will appear, allowing you to select the

input port and specify the channel name and icon. (For

details on the popup window → p. 55)

• If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a

time, use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the

popup window (

→

p. 77).

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.

•You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to

the To MATRIX SEND knob and pressing the [ENTER] key.

•For MATRIX buses that are set to STEREO, the left knob indicates

the PAN of the MATRIX SEND, and the right knob indicates the

SEND LEVEL.

HINT

• If you want to make head amp settings for eight channels at a

time, use the HA popup button in the screen to access the HA/

PATCH popup window (

→

p. 57).

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.

HINT

• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is

adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may

be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold

output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT

connector when using phantom power.

NOTE

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Changing the output patching (Output

channels only)

To change the output patching of an output channel in the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the PATCH popup but-

ton.

1 PATCH popup button

This button displays the HA/PATCH popup window

where you can make output port settings for eight chan-

nels at a time (→ p. 95).

B Output port select popup button

This accesses the PATCH/NAME popup window, where

you can select the output port and specify the channel

name and icon. The output port assigned to that channel is

shown inside the button. For channels to which two or

more output ports are patched, only one will be shown as a

representative.

To select the output port and specify the channel name or

icon, move the cursor to the output port select popup but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key to access the PATCH/

NAME popup window (→ p. 69).

● Setting the pan/balance

To adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent from that

channel to the STEREO bus, use the [PAN] encoder of the

SELECTED CHANNEL section and the PAN ﬁeld of the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen. The PAN ﬁeld includes

the following items.

1 PAN popup button

This button displays the TO STEREO/MONO popup win-

dow where you can make pan/balance settings for eight

channels at a time.

B PAN/BAL knob

The following parameter will change, according to the

channel that is selected.

C ST/MONO button (INPUT, ST IN, MIX channels

only)

This switches the on/off status of the signal sent from that

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.

D LCR button

If an INPUT, ST IN, or MIX channel is set to LCR mode,

the LCR button is displayed in location

3. The LCR but-

ton is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the

channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus.

To adjust the pan/balance of each channel, use the ST/

MONO button or the LCR button to select the send-desti-

nation bus, and operate the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion [PAN] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the

PAN/BAL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys.)

• If you want to make output port settings for eight channels at a

time, use the PATCH popup button in the screen to access the HA/

PATCH popup window (

→

p. 95).

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.

HINT

INPUT channel TO STEREO PAN

ST IN channel TO STEREO BALANCE

MIX (MONO x 2) channel TO STEREO PAN

MIX (STEREO) channel MIX BALANCE

MATRIX (MONO x 2) channel Not displayed

MATRIX (STEREO) channel MATRIX BALANCE

STEREO channel STEREO BALANCE

MONO channel Not displayed

•You can also access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window by

moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and pressing the [ENTER]

key.

HINT

• If you want to make pan/balance settings for eight channels at a

time, use the PAN popup button in the screen to access the TO

STEREO/MONO popup window (

→

p. 72). Alternatively, you can

move the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and press the [ENTER] key

to access it.

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.

HINT

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Making dynamics settings

To operate the dynamics of the currently selected channel,

use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/

[DYNAMICS 2] encoder, and the DYNA1/DYNA2 ﬁeld

of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.

The DYNA1/DYNA2 ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen contains the following items.

1 DYNA1/DYNA2 popup buttons

These buttons access the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2

popup window, where you can make detailed settings for

dynamics.

B THRESH knob

This indicates the setting of the threshold parameter of a

gate or compressor. To adjust the value, use the

SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/

[DYNAMICS 2] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor

to the knob and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.)

C DYNAMICS ON/OFF button

These buttons turn dynamics processors 1/2 on/off.

D OVER indicator

This will light if the output level of the dynamics reaches

the overload point.

E Level meter

This displays a bar graph indication of the signal level

being input to the dynamics (on=green, off=gray) and the

amount of gain reduction (orange). The threshold setting

is shown as a vertical line.

F Parameter knobs

These knobs indicate the values of parameters other than

threshold.

To operate the dynamics, turn the DYNAMICS ON/OFF

button on, and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders to adjust the

threshold parameters. (Alternatively, move the cursor to

the DYNA1/DYNA2 ﬁeld, and operate the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys.)

To make detailed dynamics settings, move the cursor to

the DYNA1/DYNA2 popup button or the DYNA1/

DYNA2 ﬁeld, and press the [ENTER] key to access the

DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window. (For

details on the popup window → p. 117)

● Making HPF/EQ settings

To operate the HPF/EQ of the currently selected channel,

use the SELECTED CHANNEL section EQ encoders,

and the EQ ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.

The EQ ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen con-

tains the following items.

1 EQ popup button

This button accesses the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window,

where you can make detailed HPF/EQ settings.

B EQ ON/OFF button

Switches the EQ on/off.

C HPF ON/OFF button

Switches the HPF on/off.

D HPF FREQ knob

Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF.

E OVER indicator

This will light when the post-EQ signal reaches the over-

load point.

F Q/F/G knobs

These knobs indicate the Q, F (center frequency), and G

(amount of boost/cut) settings for each band (LOW, L-

MID, H-MID, and HIGH).

To operate the EQ, switch the EQ ON/OFF button on, and

use the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN]

knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the

Q, center frequency, and the amount of boost/cut. (Use the

EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID], and EQ

[LOW] keys to select the band you want to operate.)

Alternatively, move the cursor to the knobs of the EQ ﬁeld

in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

To make detailed EQ settings, move the cursor to the EQ

popup button or the knobs of the EQ ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] key to access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window.

(For details on the popup window → p. 115)

• The DYNA 2 ﬁeld of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and the

[DYNAMICS 2] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are

valid only if an input channel is selected.

NOTE

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoder.

HINT

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Making insert settings (INPUT channels

1–32 and MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/MONO

channels only)

Use the INSERT ﬁeld to make insert-related settings in the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen. This ﬁeld includes the fol-

lowing items.

1 INSERT popup button

This accesses the INSERT popup window, where you can

assign input/output ports to insert-in/insert-out and specify

the signal insertion points for eight channels at a time.

B IN indicator

This indicates the signal level of the input port that is

patched to insert-in.

C INSERT ON/OFF button

Switches the insert on/off.

To make insert settings, move the cursor to the INSERT

popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the

INSERT popup window. (For details on the popup win-

dow → p. 101)

When you’ve assigned input/output ports to insert-in/out

in the popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF but-

ton.

●

Making direct output settings (INPUT

channels only)

Use the DIRECT ﬁeld to make direct-output related set-

tings for an INPUT channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen. This ﬁeld includes the following items.

1 DIRECT popup button

This button accesses the DIRECT OUT popup window,

where you can assign an output port to the direct output

and adjust the output level for eight channels at a time.

B DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button

Turns the direct output on/off.

To make direct output settings, move the cursor to the

DIRECT popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the DIRECT OUT popup window. (For details on

the popup window → p. 103)

When you’ve assigned an output port to direct output in

the popup window, turn on the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF

button.

● Setting a channel to Recall Safe

In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the SAFE ﬁeld

to set the currently selected channel to the Recall Safe sta-

tus (in which that channel will not be affected by Recall

operations). This ﬁeld includes the following items.

1 SAFE popup button

This opens the RECALL SAFE screen, where you can

make settings related to Recall Safe.

B PARTIAL indicator

This indicator will light if only some of the parameters of

that channel are set to Recall Safe.

C RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button

Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for the channel.

To set all parameters of the channel to Recall Safe mode,

press the RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button to turn it on.

If you want to set only speciﬁc parameters of the channel

to Recall Safe mode, use the SAFE popup button to access

the RECALL SAFE screen, and select the parameters that

you want to be in Recall Safe mode. (For details on the

RECALL SAFE screen → p. 140)

•You can also use the cursor keys to switch bands.

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you can

also access the above popup window by pressing an EQ encoder

in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

HINT

• The type of the LOW band EQ or HIGH band EQ cannot be

switched in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. If necessary, you

can access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window and switch the EQ

type.

• If the HIGH band EQ type is set to Low Pass Filter, the HIGH band

Q knob will not be displayed, and the GAIN knob will function as

an on/off switch for the Low Pass Filter.

NOTE

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Turning a channel on/off

Use the FADER ﬁeld to switch the channel on/off in the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen. This ﬁeld includes the fol-

lowing items.

1 ∑ CLIP indicator

This indicator will light if an overload occurs at even one

of the level detection points in that channel.

B Fader

This indicates and adjusts the input/output level of the

channel. This is linked with the fader on the top panel.

C Input/output level

This indicates the current setting of the fader.

D CH ON/OFF button

This button switches the channel on/off. This is linked

with the [ON] button of the top panel.

When you press the CH ON/OFF button in the FADER

ﬁeld, that channel will be switched on/off. If you move the

cursor to the fader and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys, the level of that channel will change.

If a fader layer that includes the corresponding channel is

recalled to the top panel, the corresponding [ON] key and

fader will be linked with these operations.

● Assigning a channel to a mute group

In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the MUTE ﬁeld

to assign a channel to a mute group (a group that allows

multiple channels to be muted/unmuted simultaneously).

This ﬁeld includes the following items.

1 MUTE popup button

This accesses the MUTE GROUP screen, where you can

select the channels to be assigned to each mute group.

B MUTE buttons 1–8

These buttons select the mute group(s) to which this chan-

nel is assigned.

C MUTE SAFE indicator

This will light if the corresponding channel is set to Mute

Safe (the state in which it will not be affected by Mute

operations). Mute Safe settings can be made in the MUTE

GROUP screen.

To assign the channel to a mute group, turn on the desired

mute button 1–8 (multiple selections are allowed).

To check the channels that are assigned to each mute

group, move the cursor to the MUTE popup button and

press the [ENTER] key to access the MUTE GROUP

screen. (For details on the MUTE GROUP screen →

p. 121)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Custom fader layer

Chapter 8

Custom fader layer

This chapter explains how to assign the desired channels to the custom

fader layer.

The channel module section and ST IN channel section on the top panel of the LS9 consists of

four layers called “fader layers.”

When you switch between these fader layers, you are changing the channels that will be controlled by the faders, encoders,

[ON] keys, and [SEL] keys of the channel module section and ST IN channel section.

Use the keys of the LAYER section to switch fader layers.

About the custom fader layer

Fader layer 1-16 {1-32}

Fader layer 17-32 {33-64}

Master fader layer

Custom fader layer

LS9-16 LS9-32

Fader layer 1-16 Fader layer 17-32

Master fader layer Custom fader layer

Fader layer 1-32 Fader layer 33-64

Master fader layer Custom fader layer

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Of the above fader layers, channels are pre-assigned to

fader layer 1-16 {1-32}, fader layer 17-32 {33-64}, and

the master fader layer (→ p. 28).

However, you are free to assign desired channels to the

custom fader layer that is recalled when you press the

LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key.

For example, INPUT channels belonging to different fader

layers could be assigned to consecutive modules so that

they can be operated together. Alternatively, input chan-

nels and output channels can both be assigned, so that you

could simultaneously operate the send level from an

INPUT channel to a speciﬁc MIX bus at the same time

that you adjust the master level of that MIX bus itself.

To assign the desired channels to the custom fader layer, proceed as follows.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup button

Move the cursor to the CUSTOM FADER

LAYER popup button in the screen, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the channel that will be

assigned to each channel module or ST channel.

CH1 CH5 CH10 CH13 CH17 CH19 MIX1 MIX2

Assigning channels to the custom fader layer

LS9-32

About the custom fader layer • Assigning channels to the custom fader layer

Assigning channels to the custom fader layer

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Custom fader layer

1 Channel module select ﬁeld

Select the channels that will be assigned to the top

panel channel modules 1–16 {1–32}.

B ST IN channel select ﬁeld

Select the channels that will be assigned to the top

panel ST IN channels 1–2 {1–4}.

Move the cursor to the channel module

select ﬁeld or the ST IN channel select ﬁeld,

use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the channel that you want to assign

to that ﬁeld, and press the [ENTER] key.

The ﬁeld will show the name of the selected channel.

The following channels can be selected for each ﬁeld.

● Channels that can be selected in the chan-

nel module select ﬁeld

• INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64}

• ST IN channels 1–4

• STEREO channel

• MONO channels

• MIX channels 1–16

•MATRIX channels 1–8

• MONITOR LEVEL

If you select a ST IN channel 1–4 or the STEREO

channel in the channel module select ﬁeld, the L/R

channels will be assigned together. In this case, the

channel module will operate as follows.

• The fader and [ON] key will operate the L and R

channels together.

• The L and R channels will be selected alter-

nately each time you press the [SEL] key.

• The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of

the L or R channel, whichever level is greater.

If you select one of a pair of MIX/MATRIX channels

set to stereo in the channel module select ﬁeld, the

channel module will operate as follows.

• The fader and [ON] key will operate the two

MIX/MATRIX channels together.

• Pressing the [SEL] key will select only the MIX/

MATRIX channel that you assigned.

• The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of

the L or R channel, whichever level is greater.

● Channels that can be selected in the ST IN

channel select ﬁeld

• ST IN channels 1–4

Assign channels to other ﬁelds in the same

way.

To recall the custom fader layer you’ve cre-

ated, press the LAYER [CUSTOM FADER]

key in the LAYER section.

The channels you selected in step 3 will be assigned to

the channel module section and ST IN channel section

of the panel.

• As an alternative to using the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys,

you can move the cursor to the ﬁeld you want to edit and

press a [SEL] key to select a channel.

HINT

• Custom fader layer settings are remembered for each user.

When a user logs-in, their previous settings will be repro-

duced.

HINT

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Input/output patching

Chapter 9

Input/output patching

This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching,

how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs.

When the LS9 is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks and internal ports) are patched to the

following output channels.

However, the above patching can be modiﬁed as needed.

If you want to change the output patching, you can either

select the output port that will be the output destination for

each channel, or you can select the channel that will be the

output source for each output port.

● Selecting the output port for each out-

put channel

Here’s how to select the output port that will be the output

destination for each output channel.

Press the [HOME] key to access the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the

[SEL] keys to select an output channel.

1 Channel number / Channel name

B PATCH popup button

C Port select popup button

Changing the output patching

For the LS9-16

Output port (jack / internal port) Output channels

OMNI OUT jacks 1–6 MIX channels 1–6

OMNI OUT jacks 7–8 STEREO L/R channel

Slot output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8

Slot output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16

Rack inputs 5A (L), 6A (L), 7A (L), 8A (L) MIX channels 13–16

2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel

USB memory recorder input (L/R) STEREO L/R channel

For the LS9-32

Output port (jack / internal port) Output channels

OMNI OUT jacks 1–12 MIX channels 1–12

OMNI OUT jacks 13–14 MATRIX channels 1–2

OMNI OUT jacks 15–16 STEREO L/R channel

Slot 1 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8

Slot 1 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16

Slot 2 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8

Slot 2 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16

Rack inputs 5A (L), 6A (L), 7A (L), 8A (L) MIX channels 13–16

2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel

USB memory recorder input (L/R) STEREO L/R channel

1 2 3

• As an alternative to using the PATCH popup button, you can

also select the output port in the PATCH/NAME popup win-

dow that appears when you move the cursor to the port select

popup button and press the [ENTER] key (

→

p. 69).

HINT

Changing the output patching

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the PATCH popup button

in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The HA/PATCH popup window will appear. This

popup window shows the output port assigned to the

output channels, in groups of eight channels.

1 Channel number

This is the number of the output channel.

B Channel name

These are the names of each channel.

C Port select popup button

This button selects the output port assigned to the

channel. The currently selected output port is shown.

Make sure that the cursor is located at the

output port for the desired channel, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the output port for the

output channel.

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Category tab

This selects the type of output ports that are shown in

the lower part of the popup window. Each tab corre-

sponds to the following output ports.

● OMNI/2TR OUT

Shows the OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} and 2TR

OUT DIGITAL jack.

● SLOT {1/2}

Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.

● RACK

Shows the inputs of racks 1–8. Use this when you

want to send the signal of an output channel to the

input of a GEQ or effect.

● REC IN

Shows the input of the USB memory recorder. Use

this when you want to send the signal of an output

channel to the input of the USB memory recorder.

B Port select button

This selects the output port that is assigned to the cor-

responding channel.

C Level indicator

This indicates the state of the port’s signal using the

following colors.

• -60 dB or below ........... black

• -60 dB to -18 dB .......... green

• -18 dB to 0 dB.............. yellow

•OVER............................ red‘

Move the cursor to the desired tab in the

upper part of the window, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The type of ports shown in the lower part of the win-

dow will change according to the tab you selected.

Move the cursor to the desired port select

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

That port will be selected as the output destination.

You can select more than one output port.

Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to return to the pre-

vious screen.

If necessary, perform the same steps for

other output channels.

•Even if multiple output ports are assigned, only one output

port is shown.

HINT

LS9-16

•For details on GEQ and effects, refer to p.157.

HINT

• As an alternative to using the CLOSE button, you can return

to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL section [HOME] key once.

HINT

Input/output patching

Changing the output patching

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Selecting the output channel for each

output port

Here’s how to select the output channel that will be the

output source for each output port.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYS-

TEM SETUP screen.

In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP ﬁeld in the center of

the screen, you can select the output port assigned to

the output channel from the following choices.

● OMNI 1-8 {1-8/9-16}

Select the output channels assigned to OMNI OUT

jacks 1–8 {1–16}.

● SLOT {1/2} 1-8/9-16

Select the output channels assigned to output chan-

nels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.

● 2TR OUT

Select the output channel assigned to the 2TR

OUT DIGITAL jack.

In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP ﬁeld, move

the cursor to the button for the output ports

that you want to set, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The OUTPUT PORT popup window will appear,

allowing you to make output port settings.

1 INITIALIZE button

This initializes the settings for the displayed output

ports. When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, a dialog box will ask you to

conﬁrm the Initialize operation.

B I/O card type

If the output channel of a slot is selected for opera-

tions, this area indicates the type of I/O card installed

in that slot.

C DELAY SCALE ﬁeld

Use the following buttons to select the units for the

delay time displayed below the delay time setting

knob (

6).

● METER

The delay time is displayed as a distance in meters,

calculated as the speed of sound at an air tempera-

ture of 20°C (68°F) (343.59 m/s) × delay time

(seconds).

● FEET

The delay time is displayed as a distance in feet,

calculated as the speed of sound at an air tempera-

ture of 20°C (68°F) (1127.26 feet/s) × delay time

(seconds).

● SAMPLE

The delay time is displayed in units of samples. If

you change the sampling frequency on which the

LS9 operates, the number of samples will change

accordingly.

● msec

The delay time is displayed in units of millisec-

onds.

D Output port

This is the type and number of the output port to

which the channel is assigned.

E Channel select button

This button selects the channel assigned to the output

port. The number of the currently selected channel is

shown.

LS9-16

LS9-32

32 1

Changing the output patching

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

F Delay time setting knob

This knob sets the delay time of the output port. Move

the cursor to this knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys to adjust the setting. The delay time value

is shown below the knob, using the units selected in

the DELAY SCALE ﬁeld (

3).

G DELAY button

Switches the delay on/off for the output port.

H ø (phase) button

Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output

port between normal phase (black) and reverse phase

(orange).

I ATT knob

Adjusts the amount of attenuation/boost for the signal

assigned to the output port. To change the setting,

move the cursor to this knob in the screen, and use the

dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. You can adjust the value

in 1.0 dB steps in a range of -96 – +24 dB. The current

value is shown immediately below the knob.

J Level meter

This meter shows the signal level of the channel

assigned to the output port.

To assign a channel to an output port, move

the cursor to the channel number ﬁeld of

that port, and press the [ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will

appear. This popup window contains the following

items.

1 Category tab

This selects the type of channel that will be shown in

the lower part of the window. Each tab corresponds to

the following channels.

● OUT CH

Output channels (MIX channels 1–16, MATRIX

channels 1–8, STEREO L/R channel, and MONO

● MONITOR OUT

The MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels will be

shown.

● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64}

INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} will be shown.

B Channel select button

This selects the channel that is assigned to the output

port.

Use the category tabs and the channel

select buttons to select the send-source

channel.

Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to return to the pre-

vious screen.

If PATCH is turned on in the CONFIRMATION ﬁeld

of the PREFERENCE popup window, a conﬁrmation

dialog box will appear when you attempt to modify the

patching.

If STEAL PATCH is turned on, a conﬁrmation dialog

box will appear if you attempt to change a location

that is already patched to another location. (For

details, refer to → p. 194)

Make settings for delay, phase, and

attenuator as necessary.

Repeat steps 3–6 to assign channels to

other output ports.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or to

the × symbol in the upper right of the win-

dow), and press the [ENTER] key to return

to the previous screen.

LS9-32

• If you assign CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64} to an output port, the

selected INPUT channel will be output directly from the corre-

sponding output port. In this case, the channel select button

in the OUTPUT PORT popup window will indicate “DIR CH

xx” (xx = channel number). (For details on direct output

→

p. 103)

HINT

Input/output patching

Changing the input patching

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

When the LS9 is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks / internal ports) are patched to

each input channel.

However, the above patching can be modiﬁed as needed.

Here’s how to change the patching of each input channel.

Press the [HOME] key to access the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the

[SEL] keys to select an input channel.

1 Channel number / Channel name

B HA popup button

C Port select popup button

Move the cursor to the HA popup button in

the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The HA/PATCH popup window will appear. In this

popup window, you can view the input port and name

selected for each input channel, turn the phantom

power on/off, adjust the gain, and switch between nor-

mal/reversed phase, in groups of eight channels.

1 Channel number

This is the number of the input channel.

B Channel name

This is the name of the input channel.

C Port select popup button

This button selects the input port assigned to the chan-

nel. The currently selected input port is shown.

D +48V button

This button switches the phantom power on (red) or

off (black) for the head amp assigned to that channel.

E GAIN knob

This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp

assigned to that channel. Move the cursor to the knob

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the

setting. The level meter located immediately to the

right of the knob shows the input level of the corre-

sponding port.

F ø (phase) button

This button switches the head amp assigned to that

channel between normal phase (black) and reverse

phase (orange).

Changing the input patching

For the LS9-16

Input channels Input port (jack / internal port)

INPUT channels 1–16 INPUT jacks 1–16

INPUT channels 17–32 Slot input channels 1–16

ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R) Rack outputs 5–8 (L/R)

For the LS9-32

Input channels Input port (jack / internal port)

INPUT channels 1–32 INPUT jacks 1–32

INPUT channels 33–48 Slot 1 input channels 1–16

INPUT channels 49–64 Slot 2 input channels 1–16

ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R) Rack outputs 5–8 (L/R)

1 2 3

• As an alternative to using the HA popup button, you can also

select the input port in the PATCH/NAME popup window that

appears when you move the cursor to the port select popup

button and press the [ENTER] key (

→

p. 55).

HINT

• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA

gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind

that noise may be generated if there is a difference between

the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

NOTE

100

Changing the input patching

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the port select popup

button for the desired channel, and press

the [ENTER] key.

The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the input port for the

input channel.

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Category tab

These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the

popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following

input ports.

● IN 1-16 {1-32}

Shows INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}.

● SLOT {1/2}

Shows input channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.

● RACK

Shows the outputs of racks 1–8. Use this when you

want to send the output of a GEQ or effect to an

input channel.

● 2TR IN/PB OUT

Shows the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack and the USB

memory recorder’s output. Use this when you

want to send the input signal from the 2TR IN

DIGITAL jack or the output signal of the USB

memory recorder to an input channel.

B Port select button

This selects the input port that is assigned to the chan-

nel.

Use the category tabs and the port select

buttons to select the input-source port.

Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to return to the pre-

vious screen.

If necessary, perform the same steps for

other input channels.

LS9-16

•For details on GEQ and effects, refer to p.157.

HINT

• As an alternative to using the CLOSE button, you can return

to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL section [HOME] key once.

HINT

101

Input/output patching

Inserting an external device into a channel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If necessary, you can insert an internal effect/GEQ or an external device such as an effect pro-

cessor into the signal path of INPUT channels 1–32 or any output channel (MIX, MATRIX, STE-

REO, MONO). When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the signal

patch location of the insertion can be speciﬁed individually for each channel.

Here we will explain how an external device connected to an I/O card in a slot can be inserted

into the desired channel.

Connect your external device to the I/O card

installed in a slot {1/2}.

Press the [HOME] key to access the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the

[SEL] keys to select the channel into which

you want to insert an external device.

1 INSERT popup button

Move the cursor to the INSERT popup but-

ton in the screen, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The INSERT popup window will appear. In this popup

window, you can view the insert input/output port,

change the insert position and switches the insert on/

off, in groups of eight channels.

1 Channel block diagram

This shows the direct output position (only for INPUT

channels) and the position of the insert connection for

the selected channel.

B Channel number

This is the channel number.

C Channel name

This is the channel name.

D Insert point select box

This selects the insert point for the signal. Move the

cursor to this box and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to switch between PRE EQ (immediately before

the EQ), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader),

or POST ON (immediately after the channel on/off).

Inserting an external device into a channel

DIGITAL OUT

LS9

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN

Effect processor

Digital I/O

card

• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an

external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the

LS9 and the external device (

→

p. 46).

NOTE

•For the INPUT channels, insert connections can be made

only for channels 1–32. If an INPUT channel 33–64 is

selected on the LS9-32, the INSERT popup button is not

shown.

NOTE

102

Inserting an external device into a channel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

E Output port select popup button

F Input port select popup button

These buttons select the output port and input port that

are patched to insert-out and insert-in. The currently

selected output port and input port are shown.

G INSERT ON/OFF button

This button turns the insert on/off. To switch this on/

off, move the cursor to this button and use the [DEC]/

[INC] keys or the [ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the output port select

popup button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the output port that will

be patched to insert-out.

1 Category tab

These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the

popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following

output ports.

● SLOT {1/2}

Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.

● RACK

Shows the inputs of racks 1–8. Use these when you

want to insert a GEQ or effect into that channel.

B Port select button

This selects the output port that is assigned to insert-

out.

Use the category tabs and the port select

buttons to select the insert-out port.

Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to return to the pre-

vious screen.

Move the cursor to the input port select

popup button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the input port that will

be patched to insert-in.

1 Category tab

These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the

popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following

input ports.

● SLOT {1/2}

Shows input channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.

● RACK

Shows the outputs of racks 1–8. Use these when

you want to insert a GEQ or effect into the chan-

nel.

B Port select button

This selects the input port that is assigned to insert-in.

Use the category tabs and the port select

buttons to select the insert-in port.

Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to return to the pre-

vious screen.

Move the cursor to the insert point select

box, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to select the insert point.

You can select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ),

PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST

ON (immediately after the channel on/off).

Move the cursor to the INSERT ON/OFF but-

ton, and press the [DEC]/[INC] keys or the

[ENTER] key to turn it ON.

This enables the insertion you speciﬁed.

LS9-16

• After moving the cursor to the insert-out patch select box in

step 4, you can also select the output port by using the dial or

the [DEC]/[INC] keys instead of pressing the [ENTER] key.

HINT

LS9-16

103

Input/output patching

Directly outputting an INPUT channel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from the desired OMNI OUT jack or from

the output channel of a desired slot. For example by sending signals to an external digital

recorder via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, you can make a live recording without affecting

the LS9’s internal mixing.

Connect your external device to an OMNI

OUT jack or to an I/O card installed in a slot

{1/2}.

Press the [HOME] key to access the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the

[SEL] keys to select the INPUT channel

from which you want to take a direct output.

1 DIRECT popup button

Move the cursor to the DIRECT popup but-

ton in the screen, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The DIRECT OUT popup window will appear. In this

popup window you can view the name of each chan-

nel, switch the direct output point, and adjust the out-

put level, in groups of eight channels.

1 Channel block diagram

This shows the direct output point for the selected

channel.

B Channel number

This is the channel number.

C Channel name

This is the channel name.

D Direct out point select box

This selects the point from which the signal will be

directly output. Move the cursor to this box and use

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to switch between

PRE HPF (immediately before the high pass ﬁlter),

PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ), or PRE

FADER (immediately before the fader).

E DIRECT ON/OFF button

This button turns direct output on/off. To switch this

on/off, move the cursor to this button and use the

[DEC]/[INC] keys or the [ENTER] key.

F Port select popup button

This button selects the output port that will be patched

to direct output. The currently selected output port is

shown.

G DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob

This knob adjusts the level of the direct output.

Directly outputting an INPUT channel

DIGITAL OUT

LS9

DIGITAL IN

Digital recorder

Digital I/O

card

• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an

external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the

LS9 and the external device (

→

p. 46).

NOTE

104

Directly outputting an INPUT channel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the port select popup

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the output port that will

be patched to direct output.

1 Category tab

These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the

popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following

output ports.

● OMNI / 2TR OUT

Shows OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} and 2TR

OUT DIGITAL jack.

● SLOT {1/2}

Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.

● REC IN

Shows USB memory recorder input channels.

B Port select button

This selects the output port that is assigned to direct

output.

Use the category tabs and the port select

buttons to select the port that will be the

direct output.

Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to return to the pre-

vious screen.

Move the cursor to the direct out point

select box, and use the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys to select the direct out point.

You can choose PRE HPF (immediately before the

high-pass ﬁlter), PRE EQ (immediately before the

EQ), or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader).

Move the cursor to the DIRECT OUT ON/

OFF button, and press the [DEC]/[INC] keys

or the [ENTER] key to turn it ON.

This enables the direct output you speciﬁed.

As necessary, move the cursor to the

DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob and use the dial

or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the level of

the direct output.

LS9-16

• As an alternate method of specifying a direct output, you can

select an INPUT channel as the output source of an output

port (

→

p. 98).

HINT

105

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

USB memory recorder

Chapter 10

USB memory recorder

This chapter explains how to use the USB memory recorder.

The LS9 provides a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal signals to

USB memory, or play back audio ﬁles recorded on USB memory.

As the ﬁle format for recording, it uses MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3). For playback, it supports

MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) ﬁles. However, DRM

(Digital Rights Management) is not supported.

By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be

recorded to USB memory, or background music or sound effects saved in USB memory can be

played back via an assigned input channel.

■ Signal ﬂow for the USB memory recorder

About the USB memory recorder

MIX 1–16

MATRIX 1–8

STEREO L/R

MONO

INPUT 1–32 {1–64}

DIRECT OUT

RECORDER

INPUT

USB memory

recorder

PLAYBACK

OUT

INPUT 1–32 {1–64}

ST IN 1L/1R–

ST IN 4L/4R

• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.

• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.

NOTE

106

Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder.

You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the

recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the

RECORDER screen.

In this screen you can assign signals to the input and

output of the USB memory recorder, and perform

recording and playback operations.

1 RECORDER INPUT ﬁeld

Here you can make settings for the recorder inputs.

B RECORDER INPUT popup buttons L/R

These buttons access the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window, where you can patch channels to the L/

R inputs of the recorder.

C ATT (attenuator) knob

This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation/boost for

the signal that is input to the recorder. You can adjust

the value in 0.1 dB steps in a range of -96 to +24 dB.

The current value is shown immediately below the

knob.

D Input level meter

This level meter indicates the level of the signal being

input to the recorder.

E INPUT CUE button

This button cue-monitors the signal that is being input

to the recorder. Move the cursor to the button and

press the [ENTER] key to turn cue on/off.

F PLAYBACK OUT ﬁeld

Here you can make settings for the recorder outputs.

G PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons L/R

These buttons access the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window, where you can patch channels to the L/R out-

puts of the recorder.

H Output level meter

This level meter indicates the level of the signal being

output from the recorder.

I OUTPUT CUE button

This button cue-monitors the signal that is being out-

put from the recorder. Move the cursor to the button

and press the [ENTER] key to turn cue on/off.

To assign channels to the recorder inputs,

move the cursor to the RECORDER INPUT

popup button L or R, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will

appear.

1 Category tabs

These tabs select the type of channels shown in the

lower part of the window.

● OUT CH

Output channels will be shown.

● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64}

Direct outputs of INPUT channels 1–32 {1–32/

33–64} will be shown.

Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder

12 3 4 6

LS9-32

107

Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

USB memory recorder

B Channel select buttons

Select the channels that will be assigned to the USB

memory recorder’s inputs, from the following choices.

● MIX 1–16

MIX channels 1–16

● MTRX 1–8

MATRIX channels 1–8

● ST L/R

STEREO channel L/R

● ST L+C

STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C)

channel

● ST R+C

STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO (C)

channel

● MONO

MONO channel

● CH1–32 {1–64}

Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–32 {1–64}

Use the category tabs and the port select

buttons to select the channel that you want

to patch to the USB memory recorder input.

If you select a channel to which another port is already

patched, a dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the patch

change. Move the cursor to the OK button of the

dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.

When you’ve ﬁnished making the assign-

ment, move the cursor to the CLOSE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the RECORDER screen.

Assign a channel to the other input in the

same way.

To assign channels to the recorder outputs,

move the cursor to the PLAYBACK OUT

popup button L or R, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will

appear.

1 Category tabs

These tabs select the type of channels shown in the

lower part of the window.

● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64}

INPUT channels 1–32 {1–32/33–64} will be

shown

● ST IN

L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4 will be

shown.

B Channel select buttons

Select the channels that will be patched to the USB

memory recorder’s outputs, from the following

choices.

● CH 1–32 {1–64}

INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64}

● STIN 1L/1R–STIN 4L/4R

L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4

Use the category tabs and the channel

select buttons to select the channel that

you want to patch to the USB memory

recorder input.

If you select a channel to which another signal is

already patched, a dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm

the patch change. Move the cursor to the OK button of

the dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.

When you’ve ﬁnished making the assign-

ment, move the cursor to the CLOSE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the RECORDER screen.

Assign a channel to the other output in the

same way.

•You cannot assign multiple channels to a single input.

NOTE

• The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in

stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal

for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs

to the same channel.

HINT

LS9-32

•You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output.

HINT

108

Recording to USB memory

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio ﬁle (MP3) onto the

USB memory inserted in the USB connector located at the right of the display.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the

RECORDER screen.

1 Audio ﬁle display ﬁeld

The track number, title, artist, format (MP3/WMA/

AAC), and bit rate of during playback or the most

recently played audio ﬁle are displayed.

B REMAIN/ELAPSE button

This button selects the content that is shown in the

TIME FIELD (

3). When you move the cursor to this

button and press the [ENTER] key, the ﬁeld will alter-

nate between showing REMAIN (remaining time dis-

play) and ELAPSE (elapsed time display).

C TIME (remaining time / elapsed time) ﬁeld

According to the setting in (

2), this shows either the

remaining time that can be recorded to USB memory,

or the elapsed time.

D Transport

These buttons perform record/play/stop operations for

the USB memory recorder.

E REC RATE (bit depth) button

This selects the bit depth for recording.

F FREE SIZE ﬁeld

This indicates the amount of free capacity in USB

memory, in terms of MB and as a percentage.

Connect USB memory with sufﬁcient free

capacity to the USB connector.

The FREE SIZE ﬁeld indicates the amount of free

capacity.

When you connect USB memory to the USB connec-

tor, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE

folder will be created automatically in the root direc-

tory of the USB memory.

The ﬁles created by recording operations will be saved

in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently

selected folder below that level.

For playback as well, you will only be able to play

back audio ﬁles that are saved in the SONGS folder or

in the currently selected folder below that level.

■ USB memory folder structure

Assign the desired channels to the input

and output of the USB memory recorder (→

p. 106).

So that you can monitor the signal being

recorded on the recorder, raise the fader of

the channel(s) that are patched to the input/

output of the recorder.

The level meter in the RECORDER screen shows the

signal level before and after the recorder. If necessary,

use the ATT knob in the RECORDER INPUT ﬁeld to

adjust the input level to the recorder.

Move the cursor to the REC RATE ﬁeld in

the lower right of the screen, and use the

dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the bit

depth of the audio ﬁle that will be recorded.

You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps.

Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but

will increase the size of the data.

Recording to USB memory

5 643

Songs

(Audio ﬁles)

SONGS folder

YPE folder

Root directory

• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder

output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).

NOTE

• Operating the ATT knob will not affect the level of the signal

being output to other ports from the corresponding output

channel.

HINT

• The word clock rate at which the LS9 is currently operating

(44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) will automatically be selected as the

sampling rate of the audio ﬁle.

HINT

109

Recording to USB memory

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

USB memory recorder

Move the cursor to the REC button (●) at

the bottom of the screen, and press the

[ENTER] key.

You will use the transport at the bottom of the screen

to perform record/play/stop operations for the

recorder.

Each button has the following function.

1 REW ( ) button

● When you move the cursor to this button,

and press and immediately release the

[ENTER] key

You will return to the beginning of the song. If you

were already at the beginning, you will return to

the beginning of the preceding song in the title list

(→ p. 110).

● When you move the cursor to this button,

and press and hold the [ENTER] key for

two seconds or longer

The song will rewind.

In either of the above cases, operating this button dur-

ing playback will cause playback to resume from the

current location when you release the [ENTER] key.

B STOP (■) button

●

When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key during playback

Playback will stop.

●

When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key during recording

Recording will stop, and the recorded content will

be saved in a ﬁle (the ﬁle name and title will be

assigned a default name).

● When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key in record-ready

mode

Record-ready mode will be defeated.

C PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button

● When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key while stopped

Playback will start.

●

When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key during playback

Playback will pause.

● When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key in record-ready

mode

Recording will start.

●

When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key during recording

Recording will pause.

D FF ( ) button

● When you move the cursor to this button,

and press and immediately release the

[ENTER] key

You will move to the beginning of the next song in

the title list.

● When you move the cursor to this button,

and press and hold the [ENTER] key for

two seconds or longer

The song will be fast-forwarded.

In either of the above cases, operating this button dur-

ing playback will cause playback to resume from the

current location when you release the [ENTER] key.

E REC (●) button

● When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key while stopped

The recorder will be in record-ready mode, and the

PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will blink.

While stopped, move the cursor to the REC (●) button

and press the [ENTER] key; the PLAY/PAUSE ( )

button will blink, and the recorder will be in record-

ready mode.

To begin recording, move the cursor to the

PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button in the lower part

of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

During recording, the REC (●) button and the PLAY/

PAUSE ( ) button will light. The TIME ﬁeld will

indicate the elapsed time.

To stop recording, move the cursor to the

STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The audio ﬁle will be saved to USB memory.

To audition the recorded content, proceed

as follows.

1 Move the cursor to the PLAY/PAUSE ( )

button and press the [ENTER] key.

The recorded content will be played back via the input

channel you speciﬁed in step 3.

B To stop playback, move the cursor to the

STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER]

key.

1 2 3 4 5

•You can also assign the function of each button to a user-

deﬁned key (

→

p. 196).

HINT

• In the default state, the recorded audio ﬁle will be saved in the

SONGS folder within the YPE folder. However, you may also

specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder.

• The recorded ﬁle will be given a default title and ﬁle name.

You can change this later.

HINT

110

Playing back audio files from USB memory

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to play back audio ﬁles that have been saved on USB memory. In addition to ﬁles that

were recorded on the LS9 console, you can also play ﬁles that were copied from your computer

to USB memory.

Three types of audio ﬁle format can be played: MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA (Windows

Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The sampling rate can be either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz,

and the bit rate can be between 64 kbps and 320 kbps.

Connect the USB memory containing the

audio ﬁles to the USB connector.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the

TITLE LIST screen.

Title list

This list shows the playable audio ﬁles and the folders

that are saved in the selected folder of USB memory.

The row with the blue background in the center of the

list indicates the ﬁle/folder that is selected for opera-

tions.

B No. (track number)

This number indicates the order of each ﬁle for con-

secutive playback. If there is a lower-level folder, a

folder icon ( ) is shown here. If an icon ( ) is

shown here, it indicates that an upper level exists.

Move the cursor to a displayed number and press the

[ENTER] key to play back that audio ﬁle.

C Playback selection check ﬁeld

This ﬁeld lets you select the ﬁles that will be played

back during consecutive playback. When you move

the cursor to this ﬁeld and press the [ENTER] key, the

check mark will alternately appear or disappear.

D Status

This ﬁeld shows a symbol to indicate whether the cur-

rently selected ﬁle is playing ( ) or paused ( ).

E SONG TITLE/FILE NAME

This ﬁeld shows the title or ﬁle name of the song. If

the title is too long to be displayed, a “~” character is

shown at the end.

F ARTIST

This ﬁeld shows the artist of the song. If the artist

name is too long to be displayed, a “~” character is

shown at the end.

G TIME

This ﬁeld shows the length of the song in hours : min-

utes : seconds.

H MODE button

This button switches the playback mode. You can play

back one song or all songs, and play them only once or

repeatedly.

I Change directory button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the list will show the contents of the

directory at the next higher level.

J PATH (current path) ﬁeld

This shows the full pathname of the folder (directory)

that is currently selected as the recording destination

and playback source.

K JPN button

If this button is on, the titles or artist names in the list

or of the currently-playing song will be displayed in

Japanese characters compatible with Shift-JIS charac-

ter encoding (double-byte code).

This setting will also be reﬂected in the RECORDER

screen and in the TITLE/ARTIST EDIT popup win-

dow.

Playing back audio ﬁles from USB memory

• If you want to play back an audio ﬁle, you must save it in the

SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you’ve cre-

ated below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders

and ﬁles of unsupported formats will not be recognized.

NOTE

532678

J9 K

111

Playing back audio files from USB memory

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

USB memory recorder

You can use the change directory button in

the screen and the folder icon in the No.

ﬁeld to view a content list of the folder that

includes the desired ﬁle.

● To move to a folder below

Move the cursor to a folder icon shown in the No. ﬁeld

of the list, and press the [ENTER] key.

● To move to the folder above

Move the cursor to the change directory button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys so

that the desired ﬁle is shown in the center

of the list.

Move the cursor to the MODE button and

press the [ENTER] key to select the play-

back mode.

The setting will alternate between the following four

modes each time you press the [ENTER] key.

●

Starting with the currently selected song in the title

list, songs will play back consecutively, and playback

will stop at the last song in the list.

●

Starting with the currently selected song in the title

list, songs will play back consecutively until the last

song; then playback will return to the ﬁrst song and

will continue until you stop playback.

●

The currently selected song will play repeatedly until

you stop playback.

●

The currently selected song will play once and then

stop.

If you selected a consecutive playback

mode in step 5, move the cursor to the play-

back selection check ﬁeld for each song

you want to play, and press the [ENTER]

key.

When performing consecutive playback, the ﬁles with

a check mark will be played.

Move the cursor to the PLAY/PAUSE ( )

button and press the [ENTER] key.

The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing.

To stop playback, move the cursor to the

STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER]

key.

• When you move to a different folder in this way, that folder will

automatically be selected as the recording-destination.

HINT

• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS

folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the

SONGS folder.

• The LS9 can recognize a ﬁle name that is a maximum of 64

characters. If the ﬁle name is longer than this, the desired ﬁle

may not play correctly.

•A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single direc-

tory. A maximum of 64 songs can be managed in a subdirec-

tory.

NOTE

• The USB memory recorder can play back audio ﬁles whose

sampling rate is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

•Even if the sampling rate at which the LS9 is operating differs

from the sampling rate of the audio ﬁle being played, the

SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically

convert the rate so that the playback will be correct.

HINT

• If or is selected as the playback mode,

playback will continue until you stop playback.

NOTE

112

Editing the title list

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how you can change the order of the audio ﬁles shown in the title list, and edit the titles or

artist names.

Connect USB memory containing audio

ﬁles to the USB connector.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the

TITLE LIST screen.

1 ↑↑

↑↑

/ ↓↓

↓↓

buttons

These buttons move the track number of the song

selected in the list earlier ( ↑ ) or later ( ↓ ) in the

list.

B SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button

This button lets you edit the title or ﬁle name of the

song selected in the list.

C ARTIST EDIT button

This button lets you edit the artist name of the song

selected in the list.

D TITLE SORT button

This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the

title.

E ARTIST SORT button

This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the

artist name.

F SAVE LIST button

This button saves the list sorting data to USB memory.

G SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons

These buttons switch the items (title or ﬁle name) that

are shown in the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME ﬁeld.

Use the No. button and the change direc-

tory button in the screen to view a list of the

contents of the folder that includes the

desired ﬁle.

If you want to edit a title or ﬁle name in the

title list, move the cursor to the SONG

TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button; if you want

to edit the artist name, move the cursor to

the ARTIST EDIT button; then press the

[ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the

text.

Edit the title or artist name.

A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-

byte characters) can be input for both the title and for

the artist name. (For details on entering characters →

p. 34) If the text cannot be shown completely in the

input ﬁeld, the text will scroll horizontally.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key to close the popup window.

If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE

NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button,

and ↑↑

↑↑

/ ↓↓

↓↓

buttons in the screen to change

the order of the title list.

Use the following buttons to change the order of the

title list.

● SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the title list will be sorted in numerical

→ alphabetical order by title. Each time you press the

[ENTER] key, the list will alternate between ascend-

ing and descending order.

● ARTIST SORT button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the title list will be sorted in numerical

→ alphabetical order by artist name. Each time you

press the [ENTER] key, the list will alternate between

ascending and descending order.

Editing the title list

4 5 6

1 7

• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be

displayed, these characters will be converted into for

display.

• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3

format audio ﬁles.

NOTE

113

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

USB memory recorder

● ↑↑

↑↑

/ ↓↓

↓↓

buttons

When you move the cursor to these buttons and press

the [ENTER] key, the track number of the ﬁle cur-

rently selected in the title list will be moved upward or

downward by one.

● SAVE LIST button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the title list order and playback selec-

tions will be saved in USB memory. You should per-

form this operation if you want the title list to be

preserved even after you disconnect the USB memory

or turn off the power.

Since these settings are stored for each folder, a conﬁr-

mation dialog box will ask you whether you want to

save them if you move to a different folder.

You can make link settings so that a speciﬁc audio ﬁle from USB memory is played back when

you recall a certain scene. This is a convenient way to automatically play back a sound effect or

background music at a certain point in the performance.

To link scene recall with audio ﬁle playback, proceed as follows.

Connect the USB memory containing the

audio ﬁle to the USB connector.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to

access the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK

screen.

1 Scene list

This is the list of scenes to which you can assign a

song (audio ﬁle). The line with the blue background in

the middle of the list is the scene that’s selected for

operation.

B No. (scene number)

C TITLE (scene title)

D Protect

These respectively indicate the scene number, title,

and protect status.

E Song list

This is the list of songs (audio ﬁles) that can be linked.

The line with the blue background in the middle of the

list is the ﬁle that’s selected for operation.

F LINK

This indicates whether linking from the scene to an

audio ﬁle is enabled. The PLAY indicator is shown if

linking is enabled. If the PLAY indicator is off even

though a ﬁle is selected, the audio ﬁle will not play

when scene recall occurs.

G SONG TITLE/FILE NAME ﬁeld

This shows the title or ﬁle name of the audio ﬁle.

H OFFSET (Offset time)

This shows the time from the recall operation until the

corresponding audio ﬁle will begin playing.

I SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons

These buttons select the item that is shown in the

SONG TITLE/FILE NAME ﬁeld.

J JPN button

If this button is on, the song title will be displayed

using Shift-JIS code (double-byte character code) to

support Japanese.

Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys so

that the scene to which you want to assign

a song is displayed in the middle.

•Two-byte code or Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1) code characters will

not be sorted correctly.

NOTE

Linking scene recall with audio ﬁle playback

2 3 4 7 81 5

• The audio ﬁle to be played must be saved in the SONGS

folder within the YPE folder. Please note that you won’t be

able to specify a ﬁle that is in the root directory or another

folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE

LIST screen will change to \YPE\SONGS\.

• The ﬁle name is shown in black if the speciﬁed ﬁle no longer

exists, and the song title or ﬁle name is shown in yellow if the

ﬁle can no longer be recognized.

• The ﬁle speciﬁed for linking is distinguished by its eight-char-

acter ﬁle name + three-character extension. If you change the

ﬁle name after specifying it for linking, or if you repeatedly

delete and copy the ﬁle, there may be rare cases in which the

linked ﬁle can no longer be recognized.

NOTE

• Other items in the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen are the

same as in the SCENE LIST screen (

→

p. 134).

NOTE

Editing the title list • Linking scene recall with audio file playback

114

Linking scene recall with audio file playback

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the blue background

area in the middle of the list SONG TITLE/

FILE NAME ﬁeld, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The SONG SELECT popup window will appear,

allowing you to select an audio ﬁle.

1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons

These buttons select the item (song title or ﬁle name)

that is shown in the song list.

B JPN button

If this button is on, the song title will be displayed

using Shift-JIS code (double-byte character code) to

support Japanese.

C PATH ﬁeld

This indicates the path of the folder (\YPE\SONGS\)

in which the audio ﬁles are saved. This cannot be

changed.

D Song list

This shows the playable audio ﬁles in the SONGS

folder.

E SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the song list will be sorted in alphanu-

meric order by song tile or ﬁle name. Each time you

press the [ENTER] key, the list will alternate between

ascending and descending order.

F TYPE

This indicates the type of the audio ﬁle. The signiﬁ-

cance of this indication is as follows.

• MP3 .............MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3

• WMA ...........Windows Media Audio

•AAC.............MPEG4 AAC

G OFFSET (Offset time)

This speciﬁes the time from the recall operation until

the corresponding audio ﬁle begins to play.

Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

scroll the song list so that the ﬁle you want

to link to the scene is shown in the center

with a blue background.

If necessary, move the cursor to the OFF-

SET knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys to specify an offset time before

the audio ﬁle will play back.

You can specify the offset time in a range of 0–99 sec-

onds in 0.5 second units.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The popup window will close, and you will return to

the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen. The title or ﬁle

name of the ﬁle you selected will be displayed in the

center of the song list.

Alternatively, if you select the CANCEL button

instead of the OK button, the settings will be discarded

and you will return to the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK

screen.

Move the cursor to the LINK ﬁeld and press

the [ENTER] key to turn on the link to the

audio ﬁle.

The PLAY indicator will appear in the LINK ﬁeld.

The PLAY indicator will also appear in the STATUS

ﬁeld of the SCENE LIST screen.

Repeat steps 3–8 to assign audio ﬁles to

other scenes in the same way.

Recall a scene to which you’ve linked an

audio ﬁle.

After the offset time has elapsed, the audio ﬁle will

play only once.

1 2 5 6 7

•A maximum of 300 audio ﬁles can be displayed.

• Files other than playable audio ﬁles will not be displayed.

HINT

• As other ways to control audio ﬁle playback, you can use MIDI

MMC commands for remote control from an external device

(

→

p. 186), or assign the DIRECT PLAY function to a user-

deﬁned key and play back the audio ﬁle directly (

→

p. 196).

HINT

• When you recall the scene, the constant display area will

show a count-down until the offset time has elapsed.

•You cannot play back during recording or in record-ready

mode.

• If another song is playing when scene recall occurs, the cur-

rently-playing song will stop when recall occurs, regardless of

the offset time setting.

• The linked audio ﬁle will be played only once, regardless of

the playback mode setting.

NOTE

115

EQ and Dynamics

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Chapter 11

EQ and Dynamics

This chapter explains the EQ (equalizer) and dynamics that are provided on

each channel of the LS9.

Each input channel and output channel of the LS9 provides a four-band EQ and dynamics.

EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immedi-

ately before the EQ, allowing you to adjust the level of the input signal. In addition, input channels

provide a high-pass ﬁlter that is independent of the EQ.

Input channels provide two dynamics processors. Dynamics 1 can be used as gate, ducking,

compressor, or expander. Dynamics 2 can be used as compressor, compander hard, compander

soft, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as com-

pressor, expander, compander hard, or compander soft.

This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 EQ popup button

Use the LAYER section to select the desired

fader layer.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section, STEREO MASTER section, or ST IN

section to select the channel that you want

to operate.

In the screen, move the cursor to the EQ

popup button or any knob in the EQ ﬁeld,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The ATT/HPF/EQ popup window will appear.

In the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window you can view and

edit all EQ parameters of the currently selected chan-

nel.

About EQ and dynamics

Using EQ

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can access the above popup window by pressing either of the

EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], or EQ [GAIN] encoders while the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown.

HINT

116

Using EQ

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The window contains the following items.

1 TYPE I, II buttons

These buttons select the EQ type. If the TYPE I button

is on, the EQ will use the same algorithm as previous

Yamaha digital mixers; if the TYPE II button is on, a

newly-developed algorithm will be used. Using TYPE

II will reduce interference between bands.

B FLAT button

This button resets the GAIN parameter of all bands to

the initial value (0.0 dB). When you move the cursor

to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a dialog box

will ask you to conﬁrm the operation.

C EQ graph

This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ

parameters. A pointer is shown at the peak of each

band. Operating the Q, FREQ, or GAIN knobs of each

band will change the response curve accordingly. If

EQ or high-pass ﬁlter is on, the response curve will be

highlighted.

D Level meter

This meter indicates the peak level before the EQ and

after the EQ. If the signal has overloaded before or

after the EQ, the OVER segment will light. If the cor-

responding channel is stereo (a ST IN channel, a MIX

channel / MATRIX channel that is set to stereo, or the

STEREO channel), level meters for two channels will

be displayed.

E ATT knob

This knob speciﬁes the amount of attenuation/gain

before entering the EQ, in a range of -96 dB–+24 dB.

Use this to compensate for level changes caused by the

EQ.

F HPF FREQ knob, HPF ON/OFF button

(input channels only)

This knob and button let you adjust the cutoff fre-

quency of the high-pass ﬁlter placed immediately after

the attenuation and before the EQ, and switch it on/off.

The cutoff frequency can be adjusted in a range of 20–

600 Hz.

G EQ ON/OFF button

This switches the EQ on/off.

H LOW shelving button

If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will switch to a

shelving type. In this case, the LOW band Q knob will

not be shown.

I Q/FREQ/GAIN knobs

For each of the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and

HIGH bands, these knobs adjust the Q (steepness),

FREQ (center frequency), and GAIN (amount of

boost/cut).

J HIGH shelving button

If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will switch to a

shelving type. In this case, the HIGH band Q knob will

not be shown.

K Low pass ﬁlter button

If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will operate as

a low-pass ﬁlter. In this case, the HIGH band Q knob

will not be shown, and the GAIN knob will operate as

a switch that turns the low-pass ﬁlter on/off.

L High-pass ﬁlter button (output channels

only)

If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will operate as a

high-pass ﬁlter. In this case, the LOW band Q knob

will not be shown, and the GAIN knob will operate as

a switch that turns the high-pass ﬁlter on/off.

To turn the EQ on/off, move the cursor to

the EQ ON/OFF button and press the

[ENTER] key.

If you want to make settings in the ATT/HPF/EQ

popup window, move the cursor to the desired button/

knob and use the [ENTER] key, the dial, or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys.

21 3 4

•You can move the cursor to one of the knobs in

and press

the [ENTER] key to switch the EQ on/off.

HINT

•You can also adjust the Q, center frequency, and boost/cut

amount using the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN]

encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case,

use the EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID], and EQ

[LOW] keys to select the band that you want to adjust. You

can also switch EQ bands for editing by moving the cursor

onto a parameter of the desired band.

HINT

117

EQ and Dynamics

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If you want to use the high-pass ﬁlter on an

input channel, operate the HPF FREQ knob

or HPF ON/OFF button in the ATT/HPF/EQ

popup window.

Input channels provide a high-pass ﬁlter that is inde-

pendent of the four-band EQ. Use the HPF ON/OFF

button to switch the high-pass ﬁlter on/off, and use the

HPF FREQ knob to specify the cutoff frequency.

If you want to initialize EQ settings or copy

them to another channel, use the tool but-

tons in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window.

For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using

the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).

Input channels provide two dynamics processors, and output channels provide one dynamics

processor.

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key.

The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the

display.

1 DYNA1 popup button

B DYNA2 popup button (input channels only)

Use the LAYER section to select the desired

fader layer.

Press a [SEL] key in the channel module

section, STEREO MASTER section, or ST IN

section to select the channel that you want

to operate.

In the screen, move the cursor to the

DYNA1/DYNA2 popup button or any knob in

the DYNA1/DYNA2 ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window

will appear. In this popup window you can view and

edit all dynamics parameters of the currently selected

channel.

• Output channels do not provide a high-pass ﬁlter that is inde-

pendent of the EQ. However by turning on the high-pass ﬁlter

button in the popup window, you can use the LOW band EQ

as a high-pass ﬁlter.

•For both input channels and output channels, you can turn on

the low-pass ﬁlter button and use the HIGH band EQ as a

low-pass ﬁlter.

HINT

•You can also use a dedicated library to save or load EQ set-

tings at any time (

→

p. 120). You can also take advantage of a

wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situ-

ations.

•You can also use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL

section to adjust the EQ or high-pass ﬁlter (

→

p. 87).

HINT

Using dynamics

• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (

→

p. 194), you

can also access the above popup window by pressing any of

the [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders while the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown.

HINT

Using EQ • Using dynamics

118

Using dynamics

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The window contains the following items.

1 Dynamics type buttons

Use these buttons to select one of the following four

types of dynamics.

B Dynamics graph

This graph shows the approximate response of dynam-

ics processing.

C Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR),

and the peak levels before the gate (IN) and after the

gate (OUT). If the signal has overloaded, the OVER

segment will light. If the corresponding channel is ste-

reo (a ST IN channel, a MIX channel / MATRIX chan-

nel that is set to stereo, or the STEREO channel), level

meters for two channels will be displayed.

D DYNAMICS ON/OFF button

This switches dynamics on/off.

E THRESHOLD knob

This speciﬁes the threshold level at which dynamics

will operate.

F KEY IN SOURCE box

You can select a key-in signal in this box. For details

on the procedure, refer to step 6.

G Other parameters

This area shows other dynamics parameters. The

parameters shown will depend on the currently

selected dynamics type.

H KEY IN FILTER ﬁeld (GATE and DUCKING

only)

This ﬁeld lets you apply a ﬁlter to the key-in signal.

This ﬁeld provides a FILTER box that lets you select

the ﬁlter type, a Q knob (which adjusts the Q of the ﬁl-

ter), and a FREQ knob (which adjusts the cutoff fre-

quency or center frequency).

To change the ﬁlter type, move the cursor to the FIL-

TER BOX and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select either HPF (high-pass ﬁlter), BPF (band-pass

ﬁlter), or LPF (low-pass ﬁlter); then press the

[ENTER] key. If you select “----” in the FILTER box,

no ﬁlter will be applied.

I KEY IN CUE (GATE and DUCKING only)

This button lets you cue-monitor the currently selected

key-in signal.

To turn dynamics on/off, move the cursor to

the DYNAMICS ON/OFF button and press

the [ENTER] key.

If you want to make settings in the DYNAMICS 1/

DYNAMICS 2 popup window, move the cursor to the

desired button/knob and use the [ENTER] key, the

dial, or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

Input channels

DYNAMICS 1

GATE

DUCKING

COMPRESSOR

EXPANDER

DYNAMICS 2

COMPRESSOR

COMPANDER-H

COMPANDER-S

DE-ESSER

Output channels

DYNAMICS 1

COMPRESSOR

EXPANDER

COMPANDER-H

COMPANDER-S

2 3

•For details on dynamics types, refer to the appendix at the

end of this manual (

→

p. 229).

HINT

•For details on parameters, refer to the appendix at the end of

this manual (

→

p. 229).

•You can switch dynamics on/off by moving the cursor to one

of the knobs in

and pressing the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• After changing the type of ﬁlter in the FILTER box, be sure to

press the [ENTER] key to apply the change.

NOTE

•Even if you’ve selected MIX CUE mode (when all channels

whose [CUE] key is on will be mixed for monitoring) as the

cue mode, turning on the KEY IN CUE button will give priority

to monitoring only the corresponding signal. All [CUE] keys

that had been turned on at that time will be forcibly defeated.

• KEY IN CUE will automatically be cancelled when you exit the

corresponding screen.

HINT

•You can also adjust the dynamics threshold by using the

[DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders of the SELECTED

CHANNEL section.

HINT

119

Using dynamics

EQ and Dynamics

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Select the key-in signal as necessary.

You can select one of the following as the key-in sig-

nal.

*1: The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which

that channel belongs, from the following ﬁve {nine} groups: CH

1–8, CH 9–16, CH17–24, CH25–32, {CH33–40, CH41–48,

CH49–56, CH57–64}, and STIN1L1R–4L4R.

*1: The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which

that channel belongs, from the following four groups: MIX 1–8,

MIX 9–16, MATRIX 1–8, and ST/MONO.

To select the key-in signal, make your selection in the

DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window.

1 Move the cursor to the KEY IN SOURCE box,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the desired key-in signal.

The newly selected key-in signal will blink.

B Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm your selec-

tion of key-in signal.

If you want to initialize dynamics settings or

copy them to another channel, use the tool

buttons in the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2

popup window.

For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using

the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).

For an input channel

SELF PRE EQ

The signal immediately before the

EQ (attenuator) of the currently

selected input channel

SELF POST EQ

The signal immediately after the EQ

of the currently selected input chan-

nel

CH 1–32 {64} POST

EQ, STIN1L/1R–4L/4R

POST EQ

The signal immediately after the EQ

of the corresponding input channel

(*1)

MIX OUT 13–16

The signal immediately after the ON

of the corresponding MIX channel

For an output channel

SELF PRE EQ

The signal immediately before the

EQ (attenuator) of the currently

selected output channel

SELF POST EQ

The signal immediately after the EQ

of the currently selected output chan-

nel

MIX 1–16 POST EQ,

MTRX1–8 POST EQ,

ST L/R, MONO, POST

The signal immediately after the EQ

of the corresponding output channel

(*1)

MIX OUT 13–16

The signal immediately after the ON

of the corresponding MIX channel

• If the dynamics type of DE-ESSER, the key-in signal is ﬁxed

at SELF POST EQ and cannot be changed.

HINT

• If you move the cursor out of the KEY IN SOURCE box while

the key-in signal is blinking in the box, your change will be dis-

carded, and the key-in signal setting will revert to the previous

choice. To conﬁrm your new choice of key-in signal, press the

[ENTER] key without moving the cursor.

NOTE

•You can also use a dedicated library to save or load dynamics

settings at any time (

→

p. 120). You can also take advantage

of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or

situations.

HINT

120

Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

EQ or dynamics settings can be stored in or recalled from dedicated libraries.

The EQ library consists of an input EQ library that lets

you store and recall EQ settings for input channels, and an

output EQ library that lets you store and recall EQ settings

for output channels.

To access each library, move the cursor to the LIB tool

button in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window and press the

[ENTER] key.

For details on library operations, refer to “Using libraries”

(→ p. 35).

You can use the dynamics library to store and recall

dynamics settings.

All of the LS9’s dynamics processors use this library.

However, the types that can be selected will differ

between dynamics 1 and dynamics 2 for input channels,

and dynamics 1 for output channels. You can’t recall a

type that cannot be used.

To access the dynamics library, move the cursor to the LIB

tool button in the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup

window, and press the [ENTER] key.

For details on library operations, refer to “Using libraries”

(→ p. 35).

Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries

EQ library

LIB button

•For both the input EQ library and the output EQ library, you can

recall 199 settings from each library. Input EQ provides 40 read-

only presets, and output EQ provides 3 read-only presets.

•For details on how to access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window,

refer to “Using EQ” (

→

p. 115).

HINT

Dynamics library

LIB button

•You can recall 199 settings from this library. The library contains

41 read-only presets.

•For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2

popup window, refer to “Using dynamics” (

→

p. 117).

HINT

121

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Grouping and linking

Chapter 12

Grouping and linking

This chapter explains the Mute Group function that lets you simultaneously

control the muting of multiple channels, the Channel Link function that links

the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that let you copy or

move parameters between channels.

Mute groups allow you to switch muting on/off for multiple channels together. For example, you

can use mute groups to cut out multiple non-adjacent channels simultaneously.

The LS9 has eight mute groups, and they can be used with both input channels and output chan-

nels. Both types of channel can exist in the same group.

Here we will explain how to use mute groups. You will use the MUTE GROUP screen of the

CHANNEL JOB screens to assign channels to each mute group or switch muting on/off. You can

also use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify the mute group(s) to which the currently

selected channel belongs.

In the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB

screens, you can select a speciﬁc mute group and specify

the channels that belong to that mute group. You can also

switch each mute group on/off.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access

the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL

JOB screens.

The [CHANNEL JOB] key accesses various CHAN-

NEL JOB screens that allow you to perform opera-

tions on channels. The screen will change each time

you press the key.

About mute groups

Using mute groups

• Mute group 1–8 on/off functions can also be assigned to user-deﬁned keys. For more about

user-deﬁned keys, refer to ““User-deﬁned keys” (

→

p. 196).

HINT

Using the MUTE GROUP screen to

operate mute groups

[CHANNEL JOB] key

122

Using mute groups

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB

screen contains the following items.

1 Channel display ﬁeld

Channels assigned to the mute group selected by the

1–8 buttons are highlighted in red. If the SAFE button

is selected, channels that are temporarily excluded

from all mute groups are highlighted in green.

B CLEAR ALL button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all channels that are currently high-

lighted in the channel display ﬁeld will be cleared.

C 1–8 buttons

These buttons select the mute group that is shown in

the channel display ﬁeld.

D SAFE button

Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude

a speciﬁc channel from all mute groups. The channel

display ﬁeld shows the channels that are temporarily

excluded from the mute groups. For more about mute

safe, refer to “Using the Mute Safe function” (→

p. 123).

E MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons 1–8

These buttons switch muting on/off for mute groups

1–8.

To select the mute group to which you want

to assign channels, move the cursor to one

of the 1–8 buttons and press the [ENTER]

key.

Press the [SEL] key of the input channels /

output channels (you may select more than

one) that you want to assign.

The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light. In

the channel display ﬁeld in the screen, the correspond-

ing channels will also be highlighted in red. To cancel

an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to

make it go dark.

Assign channels to other mute groups in

the same way.

To mute the channels assigned to a mute

group, move the cursor to the MUTE

GROUP MASTER 1–8 button for the desired

mute group, and press the [ENTER] key

(multiple selections are allowed).

The selected MUTE GROUP MASTER button will

light, and all channels belonging to that mute group

will be muted. At this time, the [ON] key of the muted

channels will blink.

To defeat muting for a mute group, move

the cursor to the MUTE GROUP MASTER

button that you turned on in step 5, and

press the [ENTER] key to make the button

go dark.

In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can select a spe-

ciﬁc channel and assign the mute group(s) to which that

channel belongs (multiple assignments are allowed).

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section

[HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen.

Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen

to specify mute groups

•You are free to assign the same channel to more than one

mute group.

HINT

• Mute group assignments are saved as part of the scene.

However, the mute on/off settings are not saved.

NOTE

• If you assigned a mute group on/off function to a user-deﬁned

key, you can switch mute on/off by pressing the correspond-

ing user-deﬁned key to make it light or go dark.

•Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be

affected by mute on/off operations if its [ON] key was off to

begin with.

HINT

• In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can only assign mute

groups. To switch muting on/off, you must either use the MUTE

GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens (

→

p. 121), or

assign the mute on/off function to a user-deﬁned key and operate

that key (

→

p. 196).

HINT

123

Using mute groups

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Grouping and linking

Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]

keys to select the channel whose mute

group(s) you want to specify.

In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can use the

MUTE ﬁeld to specify the mute group(s) to which the

currently selected channel belongs.

1 MUTE ﬁeld

This shows the mute groups to which the currently

selected channel is assigned.

B MUTE popup button

When you move the cursor to this popup button and

press the [ENTER] key, the MUTE GROUP screen of

the CHANNEL JOB screen will appear. For details,

refer to “Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate

mute groups” (→ p. 121).

C Mute group select buttons 1–8

These select the mute group(s) to which the currently

selected channel will be assigned.

D SAFE indicator

This will light if the currently selected channel is set to

Mute Safe. For more about mute safe, refer to “Using

the Mute Safe function”.

To select the mute group(s) to which this

channel will be assigned, move the cursor

to a mute group select button and press the

[ENTER] key (multiple selections are

allowed).

Select the mute group(s) for other channels

in the same way.

If necessary, speciﬁc channels registered to a mute group

can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations

(Mute Safe).

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access

the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL

JOB screens.

1 Channel display ﬁeld

When the SAFE button is on, channels that are tempo-

rarily excluded from the mute group are highlighted in

this ﬁeld.

B SAFE button

This lets you select the channels that will be set to

Mute Safe status.

Move the cursor to the SAFE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Use the LAYER section keys and the chan-

nel module section [SEL] keys to select the

channels you want to exclude from mute

group operations (multiple selections are

allowed).

The [SEL] key will light, and the corresponding chan-

nel in the channel display ﬁeld of the screen will be

highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe

status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it

go dark.

Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected

when you mute a mute group to which that channel

belongs.

Using the Mute Safe function

• Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene. They will

remain valid until you cancel the settings.

HINT

124

The Channel Link function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between

input channels.

The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.

• HA GAIN settings (linked while preserving the difference in level.)

• EQ settings

• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings

• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses

• Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses

•Fader operations (linked while preserving the difference in level.)

• [ON] key operations

Two or more input channels that are linked are called a “link group.” The maximum number of link

groups you can create, and the maximum number of input channels that can be included in each

group, is 18 {34}. However, the selection of parameters for which operations of a channel are

linked for multiple link groups is shared by all link groups.

Here’s how to link speciﬁc parameters of input channels.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access

the CH LINK screen of the CHANNEL JOB

screens.

1 Channel display ﬁeld

When you create a link group, the corresponding

channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more

link groups, each group is shown in a different color.

B LINK PARAMETER ﬁeld

Use the buttons in this ﬁeld to select the parameters

that you want to be linked. These settings are shared

by all link groups.

C SEND PARAMETER ﬁeld

If you have turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND but-

tons in the LINK PARAMETER ﬁeld, use the buttons

of this ﬁeld to specify the send-destination bus(es).

Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER

ﬁeld to select the parameter(s) that will be

linked (multiple selections are allowed).

The table below lists the parameters you can select in

the LINK PARAMETER ﬁeld.

The Channel Link function

Linking the desired input channels

• Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.

• Recall Safe does not affect channel link. When you recall a scene,

the link status saved in that scene will always be reproduced.

HINT

HA button Head amp settings

EQ button EQ settings (including ATT/HPF)

DYNA 1, 2 buttons Dynamics 1 and 2 settings

MIX ON button

On/off status of signals sent to MIX

buses

MIX SEND button Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses

FADER button Fader operations

CH ON button [ON] key operations

•For ST IN channels, all parameters of L and R are always

linked.

HINT

• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the

parameter values will be linked, but the key-in signals are not

linked. For more about dynamics, refer to “EQ and Dynamics”

(

→

p. 115).

• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNA 1/2 buttons, library

recall operations will also be linked.

HINT

125

The Channel Link function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Grouping and linking

If you turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND

buttons in step 2, use the buttons of the

SEND PARAMETER ﬁeld to specify the

bus(es) for which you want operations to be

linked (multiple selections are allowed).

The table below lists the parameters you can select in

the SEND PARAMETER ﬁeld.

To link channels, proceed as follows.

1 Select the fader layer that contains the link-desti-

nation channel.

B Use one of the following methods to select the

link-source channel.

● If the link-source and link-destination

channels are in the same fader layer

Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and select

the [SEL] key of the link-destination channel.

● If the link-source and link-destination

channels are in different fader layers

Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the

channel display ﬁeld to the link-source channel,

then hold down the [ENTER] key and select the

[SEL] key of the link-destination channel.

At this time, the values of the parameters you selected

in steps 2 and 3 will be copied from the link-source to

the link-destination channel. Subsequent operations of

the parameters you selected in steps 2 and 3 will be

linked between channels belonging to the same link

group. The current link status is shown in the channel

display ﬁeld of the window.

If you want to add a new channel to an

existing link group, do so as described in

step 4.

To cancel a link, proceed as follows.

1 Select the fader layer that contains the channel you

want to un-link.

B Use one of the following methods to select any

channel assigned to the link group.

● If the channel that you want to un-link is in

the same fader layer as another channel in

that link group

Hold down any [SEL] key registered in the link

group, and select the [SEL] key of the channel that

you want to un-link.

● If no other channel in that link group is in

the same fader layer as the channel you

want to un-link

Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the

channel display ﬁeld to any channel registered in

the link group, then hold down the [ENTER] key

and select the [SEL] key of the channel you want

to un-link.

TO MIX 1–16 buttons MIX buses 1–16

• If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER ﬁeld, send

on/off and send level will not be linked.

NOTE

• HA GAIN and fader values, which are linked while preserving

their level difference, will not be copied.

NOTE

Link-source channel

• When you press the [SEL] key of a channel belonging to a link

group to make it light, the [SEL] keys of all channels belong-

ing to the same link group will blink.

• If you link an INPUT channel to a ST IN channel, parameters

that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored.

HINT

• If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another

link group, its assignment to the previous group will be can-

celled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.

HINT

•You can temporarily exclude a channel from link groups in

order to adjust parameters that maintain their level balance

while linked, such as when you want to adjust the level bal-

ance between channels in a link group. Hold down the [SEL]

key of the channel whose balance you want to adjust, and edit

the desired parameter. HA GAIN and fader will not be linked

while you are holding down the [SEL] key. (However, this func-

tion will not work during the fade of a scene memory recall

operation.)

HINT

126

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how you can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore

the parameters of a speciﬁc channel to their default settings.

You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to

another channel. When you execute the copy operation,

the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-des-

tination.

You can copy between the following combinations of

channels.

• Between input channels

• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO chan-

nel

• Between MIX channels

• Between MATRIX channels

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access

the CH COPY screen of the CHANNEL JOB

screens.

1 SOURCE CH ﬁeld

Indicates the channel that is selected as the copy-

source.

B CLEAR SOURCE button

This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE

CH ﬁeld and DESTINATION CHs ﬁeld.

C DESTINATION CHs ﬁeld

Indicates the channels selected as the copy-destina-

tion.

D CLEAR DEST button

This button clears the channels shown in the DESTI-

NATION CHs ﬁeld.

E COPY TARGET ﬁeld

If you’ve selected a MIX channel, MATRIX channel,

or STEREO/MONO channel as the copy-source, use

the buttons of this ﬁeld to select the parameters that

will be copied. You may turn both buttons on if

desired.

If both buttons are on, the following parameters will

be copied.

● MODULE PARAM button

All parameters of the copy-source channel

●

WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button

On/off status and send level settings of the send

signals sent to the copy-source channel

F COPY button

Executes the copy.

To select the copy-source channel, press the

corresponding [SEL] key to make it light.

The corresponding channel is highlighted in the

SOURCE CH ﬁeld of the window.

When you choose the copy-source channel, the DES-

TINATION CHs ﬁeld is automatically emboldened,

allowing you to select the copy-destination.

If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, move

the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and press

the [ENTER] key.

To select the copy-destination channel(s),

press the corresponding [SEL] key to make

it light (multiple selections are allowed).

The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the

DESTINATION CHs ﬁeld of the window. The chan-

nels that can be selected as the copy-destination will

depend on the channel you selected in step 2.

If you want to re-select all of the copy-destination

channels, move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button

and press the [ENTER] key.

If you selected a MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/

MONO channel as the copy-source, use the

buttons of the COPY TARGET ﬁeld to select

the parameters you want to copy.

To execute the Copy operation, move the

cursor to the COPY button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The copy will be executed, and the settings will over-

write the parameters of the copy-destination chan-

nel(s). After the copy has been executed, the SOURCE

CH ﬁeld and DESTINATION CHs ﬁeld will return to

an unset state.

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel

Copying the parameters of a chan-

nel

2 5

• Copy settings can be made only in the order of “copy-source”

→

“copy-destination.”

NOTE

127

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Grouping and linking

The settings of a speciﬁc input channel can be moved to a

different input channel. When you execute a Move opera-

tion, the numbering of the channels between the move-

source and move-destination will move forward or back-

ward by one.

You can move settings between the following combina-

tions of channels.

• Between INPUT channels

• Between ST IN channels

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access

the CH MOVE screen of the CHANNEL JOB

screens.

1 SOURCE CH ﬁeld

This indicates the move-source channel.

B CLEAR SOURCE button

This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE

CH ﬁeld and DESTINATION CH ﬁeld.

C DESTINATION CH ﬁeld

This indicates the move-destination channel.

D CLEAR DEST button

This button clears all channels shown in the DESTI-

NATION CH ﬁeld.

E MOVE button

Executes the move.

To select the move-source channel, press

the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light.

The corresponding channel is highlighted in the

SOURCE CH ﬁeld of the window.

When you select the move-source channel, the DES-

TINATION CH ﬁeld will automatically be embold-

ened, allowing you to select the move-destination.

If you want to re-select the move-source channel,

move the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

To select the move-destination channel,

press the corresponding [SEL] key to make

it light.

The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DES-

TINATION CH ﬁeld of the window. The channels that

can be selected will depend on the channel you

selected in step 2.

If you want to re-select the move-destination channel,

move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button and press

the [ENTER] key.

To execute the Move operation, move the

cursor to the MOVE button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The settings of the move-source channel will be

moved to the move-destination. The settings of all

channels between the move-source and move-destina-

tion will be moved by one channel in the direction of

the move-source. When the Move has been executed,

the SOURCE CH ﬁeld and DESTINATION CH ﬁeld

will return to an un-set state.

Moving the parameters of a chan-

nel

1 2 3 4 5

1 5 2 3 4

Move

Move by one

• Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order

of “move-source”

→

“move-destination.”

NOTE

128

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If desired, you can restore the parameters of any channel

to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on

any channel(s).

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access

the CH CLEAR screen of the CHANNEL

JOB screens.

1 TARGET CHs ﬁeld

In this ﬁeld, select the channel(s) that you want to ini-

tialize.

B CLEAR TARGET button

This button clears the channels shown in the TARGET

CHs ﬁeld.

C CLEAR button

Executes the initialization.

To select the channel(s) to be initialized,

press the corresponding [SEL] key to make

it light (multiple selections are allowed).

The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the

TARGET CHs ﬁeld of the window.

If you want to de-select all channels, move the cursor

to the CLEAR TARGET button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To execute the Initialize operation, move the

cursor to the CLEAR button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The parameters of the selected channel(s) will be ini-

tialized. After initialization, the TARGET CHs ﬁeld

will return to a state in which nothing is selected.

Initializing the parameters of a

channel

129

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

Chapter 13

Scene memory

This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations.

On the LS9, settings such as the mix parameters and input/output port patching can be assigned

a name and stored into memory (and later recalled from memory) as a “scene.”

Scenes are numbered with a scene number in the range of 000–300. Of these scenes, scene

000 is a read-only scene that restores the mix parameters to their default state, and scenes 001–

300 are rewritable.

Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] keys, as well as the following

parameters.

This section explains how to store and recall the LS9’s mix parameters as “scenes.”

To store the current mix settings as a scene memory, use

the SCENE MEMORY screen.

Use the various controllers of the top panel

or the buttons in the display to set the mix

parameters as desired.

The number and title of the currently selected scene

are shown in the center of the constant display area.

About scene memories

• Input/output port patching

• Bus settings

• Head amp settings

• EQ settings

• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings

• Rack (GEQ/effect) settings

•Pan/balance settings

• Insert/direct out settings

• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses

• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses

•Mute group settings

• Channel link settings

Using scene memories

Storing a scene

Scene number and title

•You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the con-

stant display area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

change the scene number. This scene number will blink if the

most recently stored or recalled scene is different than the

currently selected scene.

HINT

130

Using scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to

access the SCENE LIST screen.

In this screen you can perform operations such as stor-

ing or recalling a scene.

1 Scene list

This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene

memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that

this scene number is selected for operations. A read-

only scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a write-

protected scene is indicated by the protect (lock) sym-

bol.

B STORE button

This stores the current mix settings into the location

currently selected in the scene list.

C STORE UNDO button

This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the

most recently performed scene Store operation. This

button is available from immediately after you over-

write (save) until the next time you store.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the store-destination scene number.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The SCENE STORE popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a title to the scene.

1 SCENE TITLE ﬁeld

This ﬁeld lets you enter a title for the scene (a maxi-

mum of sixteen characters).

Assign a title to the scene as desired.

For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a

name” (→ p. 34)

Move the cursor to the STORE button

located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE

popup window, and press the [ENTER] key.

The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a

dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Store operation.

• Simply changing the scene number does not actually execute

the store or recall operation. To execute the store or recall

operation, you must use the STORE/RECALL buttons in the

SCENE MEMORY screen as explained in step 2 and follow-

ing or in “Recalling a scene” (

→

p. 131), or use a user-deﬁned

key (

→

p. 132) to which you’ve assigned the scene store/

recall function.

NOTE

[SCENE MEMORY]

key

• Note that the scene number, channel number, or ST IN chan-

nel input level will change if you operate the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys when the cursor is located in the constant display

area.

NOTE

131

Using scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

To execute the Store operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The current mix settings will be stored to the scene

number you selected in step 3.

If you decide to cancel the Store operation, move the

cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK but-

ton, and press the [ENTER] key.

If you want to cancel the scene overwrite-

store operation, move the cursor to the

STORE UNDO button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can

use the STORE UNDO button to undo (cancel) the

most recently executed scene store operation. When

you execute the STORE UNDO button, a dialog box

will ask you to conﬁrm the Undo operation. If you

want to execute the Undo, move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key. After executing the

Undo, you can use the STORE UNDO button once

again to Redo (re-execute) the store operation.

To recall a scene that was stored in scene memory, use the

SCENE MEMORY screen.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to

access the SCENE LIST screen.

1 Scene list

This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene

memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that

this scene number is selected for operations.

B RECALL button

This recalls the scene that is currently selected in the

scene list.

C RECALL UNDO button

This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the

most recently performed scene Recall operation.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the recall-source scene number.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Recall opera-

tion.

• If you store to a scene number in which a scene is already

stored, the previous data will be overwritten.

NOTE

•You have the option of making settings so that the Store Con-

ﬁrmation dialog box does not appear (

→

p. 194).

HINT

• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after

overwrite-storing. Undo will no longer be possible if you sub-

sequently perform a scene store/recall operation.

NOTE

•You can use the same procedure to store a scene in other

SCENE MEMORY screens as well.

• The same function as the STORE button or STORE UNDO

button can also be assigned to a user-deﬁned key (

→

p. 132).

HINT

Recalling a scene

132

Using scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To execute the Recall operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The scene you selected in step 2 will be recalled. If

you decide not to execute the Recall operation, move

the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

If you decide to cancel the scene recall

operation, move the cursor to the RECALL

UNDO button and press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Undo opera-

tion. To execute the operation, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key. After execut-

ing the Undo, you can use the RECALL UNDO button

once again to Redo (re-execute) the recall operation.

You can use the user-deﬁned keys to directly recall a

selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through

the scenes. To do this, you must ﬁrst assign a scene recall

operation to a user-deﬁned key.

The following recall operations can be assigned to a user-

deﬁned key.

● INC RECALL

Recalls the scene of the number that follows the cur-

rently loaded scene.

● DEC RECALL

Recalls the scene of the number that precedes the cur-

rently loaded scene.

● DIRECT RECALL

Allows you to directly specify a certain scene number

and recall that scene.

To assign one of these functions to a user-deﬁned key so

that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke, proceed

as follows.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

•You have the option of making settings so that the Recall

Conﬁrmation dialog box does not appear (

→

p. 194).

HINT

•You can use the same procedure to recall a scene in other

SCENE MEMORY screens as well.

• Alternatively, you can recall a scene by moving the cursor to

the scene number in the constant display area, using the dial

or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select a scene number, and press-

ing the [ENTER] key. A conﬁrmation dialog box will appear if

RECALL CONFIRMATION is turned ON in the PREFER-

ENCE popup window.

• The same function as the RECALL button or RECALL UNDO

button can also be assigned to a user-deﬁned key.

• In addition, you can recall a scene by using MIDI messages

(program changes) (

→

p. 180).

HINT

Using user-deﬁned keys to recall

• If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows

the currently loaded scene, the closest scene number in

which a scene is stored will be recalled.

HINT

USER DEFINED KEYS button

133

Using scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED

KEYS button and press the [ENTER] key to

access the USER DEFINED KEYS popup

window.

The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you

assign functions to user deﬁned keys [1]–[12].

Move the cursor to the popup button for the

user-deﬁned key to which you want to

assign a function, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window

will appear.

Move the cursor to the FUNCTION column,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select “SCENE.”

In this popup window, you will proceed as follows

depending on the function you want to assign.

● To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL

Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column, and

use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select “INC

RECALL” or “DEC RECALL.”

● To assign DIRECT RECALL

Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column, use

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to choose “DIRECT

RECALL,” and then choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is

the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key to close the popup win-

dow.

If desired, assign scene-recall functions to other user-

deﬁned keys in the same way.

Press the user-deﬁned key to which you

assigned a recall function.

The corresponding scene will be recalled.

User deﬁned keys popup buttons

134

Editing scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy/

paste them.

You can use a dedicated window to sort the saved scene

memories in alphabetical order of their titles or in order of

the date on which they were created. You can also edit

their titles.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to

access the SCENE LIST screen.

1 Scene list

This lists the scenes that are stored in scene memory.

The line highlighted in blue indicates the scene cur-

rently selected for operations.

B Scene number

This is the scene number 000–300.

C TITLE

This is the name assigned to each scene (maximum 16

characters). You can move the cursor to this area and

press the [ENTER] key to access the SCENE TITLE

EDIT popup window, where you can assign a title or

comment to the scene.

D R symbol (READ ONLY) / Protect symbol

A read-only scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a

write-protected scene is indicated by the protect (lock)

symbol. For scenes 001–300, you can move the cursor

to this area and press the [ENTER] key to switch

between protected and un-protected settings.

E Store/Recall buttons

These buttons are used to store/recall scenes. You can

also undo (cancel) or redo (re-execute) store/recall

operations. For details, refer to “Using scene memo-

ries” (→ p. 129).

F Tool buttons

Use these buttons to perform operations such as Copy

and Paste on the scenes stored in scene memory. For

details, refer to “Scene memory editing” (→ p. 136).

G STATUS ﬁeld

This ﬁeld indicates the status of each scene. For scenes

for which something other than the ALL button is

selected in the Focus function (→ p. 139), for scenes in

which the Fade function is enabled (→ p. 143), and

for scenes for which the link with an audio ﬁle is

enabled (→ p. 113), the “FOCUS”, “FADING”, and

“PLAY” indications will respectively be lit.

H COMMENT/TIME STAMP ﬁeld

This indicates the comment, or the date and time at

which the scene was last stored, as the year/month/

date and hours/minutes/seconds.

I COMMENT/TIME STAMP tabs

These tabs switch the items (comment or time stamp)

that are shown in the COOMENT/TIME STAMP

ﬁeld.

To select a scene number, make sure that

the cursor is located somewhere other than

the constant display area, and use the dial

or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates

the scene currently selected for operations.

Editing scene memories

Sorting and renaming scene memo-

ries

• The SCENE MEMORY screen consists of four screens, but

the left half (scene list, store/recall buttons) and the tool but-

tons are the same in all screens.

HINT

2 3 4 6

8 79

•You can also change the default order in which the list is

sorted (ascending or descending scene number) (

→

p. 194).

HINT

•You can also assign user-deﬁned keys to execute functions

such as incrementing or decrementing the scene number or

scrolling the scene list up or down (

→

p. 196).

HINT

135

Editing scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

If you want the scenes to be listed in a dif-

ferent order, move the cursor to the “NO.” or

“TITLE” buttons located above the scene

list, or to “TIME STAMP” located above the

STATUS/TIME STAMP ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] key.

1 NO.

Sorted in order of scene number.

B TITLE

Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of title.

C COMMENT/TIME STAMP

Sorted in order of comment or date of creation.

If you want to edit the title of a scene, move

the cursor to the TITLE ﬁeld of the selected

scene, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup win-

dow.

For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a

name” (→ p. 34).

1 TITLE ﬁeld

This ﬁeld lets you enter a title for the scene. (The max-

imum is 16 characters.)

To turn the protect setting on/off for a

scene, move the cursor to the R symbol /

protect symbol of the selected scene, and

press the [ENTER] key.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the indication

will alternate between the protect (lock) symbol, R

(read only) symbol, and no symbol.

● Protect (lock) symbol

The scene cannot be overwritten.

● R (read only) symbol

In addition to the protection described above, it will

also be impossible to overwrite the scene by loading a

ﬁle from USB memory, etc.

This setting can be selected only for consecutive scene

numbers from scene number 000.

● No symbol

The scene is not protected.

Use the tool buttons to edit the scene mem-

ory.

For details, refer to the section “Scene memory edit-

ing” that follows.

1 2 3

• By leaving the cursor at the same button and pressing the

[ENTER] key again, you can change the direction (ascending

or descending) in which the list is sorted.

HINT

•You cannot edit the title of a read-only scene or a write-pro-

tected scene.

• If you want to edit the comment of a scene, use the COM-

MENT/TIME STAMP tabs to display the comments in the

scene list, move the cursor to the SCENE COMMENT ﬁeld of

the selected scene, and press the [ENTER] key to access the

COMMENT EDIT popup window.

HINT

• The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.

NOTE

136

Editing scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied/pasted

to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased).

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of

the SCENE MEMORY screens.

Scene memories are edited using the buttons shown in

the upper part of the SCENE MEMORY screen.

Each button has the following function.

1 COPY button

Copies a scene into a memory buffer (a temporary

storage area). For details on how to use this, refer to

“Copying/pasting a scene” below.

B PASTE button

This button pastes a scene (previously copied into the

memory buffer) into another scene number. For details

on how to use this, refer to “Copying/pasting a scene”

below.

C CLEAR button

This button clears (erases) the selected scene. For

details on how to use this, refer to “Clearing a scene”

(→ p. 137).

D CUT button

Cuts a scene and places it in the memory buffer.

Scenes following the scene number you cut will be

moved forward. For details on how to use this, refer to

“Cutting a scene” (→ p. 138).

E INSERT button

Inserts a scene from the memory buffer at the location

of a different scene number. Scene numbers following

the inserted position will be moved backward. For

details on how to use this, refer to “Inserting a scene”

(→ p. 138).

F UNDO button

This button cancels the most recently-executed scene

editing operation. If you’ve accidentally cleared an

important scene, you can press this key to return to the

state prior to editing the scene.

Perform the desired editing operations.

For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations

that follow.

Here’s how to copy a scene into buffer memory, and then

paste it to a different scene number.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of

the SCENE MEMORY screens.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the copy-source scene number.

Move the cursor to the COPY button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Copy opera-

tion.

To execute the Copy operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in the

buffer memory.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the paste-destination scene number.

Move the cursor to the PASTE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Paste opera-

tion.

Scene memory editing

1 2 3 4 5 6

Copying/pasting a scene

• Be aware that if you copy/cut another scene before you paste,

the other scene will be overwritten to the buffer memory.

HINT

•A copied scene can also be inserted (

→

p. 138).

HINT

• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE

button is not available.

NOTE

137

Editing scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

To execute the Paste operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted

to the scene number you selected in step 5. If you

decide to cancel the Paste operation, use the CANCEL

button instead of the OK button.

Here’s how to clear a speciﬁed scene.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of

the SCENE MEMORY screens.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the scene number that you want to

clear.

Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Clear opera-

tion.

To execute the Clear operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The scene number you selected in step 2 will be

cleared. If you decide to cancel the Clear operation,

use the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.

• Be aware that when you paste to a scene number in which a

scene has already been stored, the existing scene will be

overwritten.

• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be

pasted.

NOTE

Clearing a scene

• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be

cleared.

NOTE

138

Editing scene memories

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to cut a scene. When you cut a scene, the

scenes of subsequent numbers will move forward. After

you cut a scene, you’ll be able to paste or insert it at the

desired location.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of

the SCENE MEMORY screens.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the scene number that you want to

cut.

Move the cursor to the CUT button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Cut opera-

tion.

To execute the Cut operation, move the cur-

sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The scene you selected in step 2 will be cut, and the

scenes of subsequent numbers will be moved forward.

At this time, the scene that was cut will be stored in

buffer memory.

If desired, you can paste (→ p. 136) or insert

the cut scene (that was held in the buffer

memory).

Here’s how a scene held in the buffer memory can be

inserted at the desired scene number location.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of

the SCENE MEMORY screens.

Perform the Copy operation (→ p. 136) or

Cut operation so that the scene you want to

insert is placed in the buffer memory.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the insert-destination scene number.

Move the cursor to the INSERT button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Insert opera-

tion.

To execute the Insert operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The scene stored in the buffer memory will be insert at

the scene number you selected in step 3. The numbers

of scenes stored in locations preceding that scene will

be moved back by one.

Cutting a scene

• The CUT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in

any other way than by the “NO.” column.

NOTE

• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.

NOTE

• Be aware that if you copy or cut a different scene before you

paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite

the scene in the buffer memory.

NOTE

Inserting a scene

• The INSERT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted

in any other way than by the “NO.” column.

• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the INSERT

button is not available.

• The INSERT button cannot be used if the Insert operation

would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed 300.

•You can’t insert in front of a scene for which the R symbol

(read only) is speciﬁed.

NOTE

139

Using the Focus function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

“Focus” is a function that lets you select the parameters that will be updated when you recall each

scene, so that only speciﬁc parameters will be updated when you recall that scene. For example, it

is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to

access the SCENE FOCUS screen.

In this screen you can make various settings for the

Focus function. The screen contains the following

items.

1 FOCUS ﬁeld

This ﬁeld lets you make Focus function settings for a

scene saved in scene memory. Using the buttons

arrayed in the center, select the parameters that will be

updated when you recall the scene selected in the list

in the left side of the screen. For other scenes, you can

only check the on/off status of each parameter.

B CURRENT ﬁeld

This ﬁeld lets you make Focus function settings for the

scene you’re currently operating. If you select a

parameter in this ﬁeld and then store the scene, your

selections will be used the next time you recall that

scene. When you recall a scene, the Focus function

settings of that scene are shown in this ﬁeld.

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the scene for which you want to

make Focus function settings.

Use the buttons other than “ALL” to select

the parameters that will be subject to recall.

These buttons correspond to the following parameters

(multiple selections are allowed).

If you want to cancel the restrictions you

speciﬁed in step 3, so that all parameters

will be subject to recall, turn the ALL button

on.

When you turn on the ALL button, all other buttons for

that scene will be turned off. Turning on any other but-

ton will turn off the ALL button.

Make Focus function settings for other

scenes as described in steps 2–4.

Recall a scene for which you’ve made

Focus settings.

If buttons other than ALL are turned on for the scene,

only the parameters whose buttons are on will be

recalled. If the ALL button is turned on for the scene,

all parameters will be updated.

Using the Focus function

• As a function that is the converse of Focus, there is also a “Recall Safe” function that lets you select

channels and parameters to be excluded from recall operations (

→

p. 140). However while the Focus

function is speciﬁed for each scene, Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes.

HINT

Button name Corresponding parameters

RACK Rack settings

HA Head amp settings

IN (PATCH) Input port patching

OUT (PATCH) Output port patching

IN Input channel parameters

OUT Output channel parameters

SEND

On/off status and send level settings for sig-

nals sent from input channels to MIX buses

(shown only if the OUT button is on)

• The SEND button is shown only if the OUT button is on. How-

ever if both the IN button and OUT button are on, the parame-

ters corresponding to SEND will automatically be subject to

recall.

HINT

•For scenes other than the scene number currently selected in

the scene list, check marks show the state of the Focus func-

tion settings.

• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a

“FOCUS” indication in the STATUS ﬁeld of the SCENE LIST

screen.

• The Focus function can be used in conjunction with the Recall

Safe function (

→

p. 140). Channels or parameters that are

excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall

Safe will not be recalled.

HINT

140

Using the Recall Safe function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only speciﬁc parameters/channels from Recall opera-

tions. This differs from the Focus settings (→ p. 139) made for individual scenes in that Recall

Safe settings are common to all scenes.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access

the RECALL SAFE screen.

In this screen you can make settings for the Recall

Safe function. The window contains the following

items.

1 CH RECALL SAFE ﬁeld

The channels for which Recall Safe is turned on are

highlighted in this ﬁeld. If you turn on the SET BY

SEL button, you can turn on Recall Safe for a channel

simply by pressing the [SEL] key of that channel.

B CLEAR ALL button

This clears all Recall Safe settings for the channels

that are highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE ﬁeld.

C GLOBAL ﬁeld

In this ﬁeld, global parameters (parameters that affect

the entire mix, and are not speciﬁc to individual chan-

nels) can be excluded from Recall operations.

D SAFE PARAMETER ﬁeld

Here you can switch Recall Safe on/off for each chan-

nel, and choose the parameters that will be excluded

from Recall operations. If you select a channel by

pressing its [SEL] key, the Recall Safe settings of that

channel will be shown in this ﬁeld.

E APPLY TO ALL INPUT button / APPLY TO

ALL OUTPUT button

If these buttons are on when you operate the SAFE

PARAMETER buttons, the changes will apply to all

input (or output) channels. This is convenient when

you want to make settings for all channels in a single

action.

To select the channel whose Recall Safe

settings you want to edit, press the corre-

sponding [SEL] key.

The corresponding channel in the CH RECALL SAFE

ﬁeld will be enclosed by a white border. (However,

Recall Safe is not yet enabled at this point.) At this

time, the SAFE PARAMETER ﬁeld will show the

Recall Safe settings of the selected channel.

Using the Recall Safe function

[CHANNEL JOB] key

LS9-16

LS9-32

•You can also access this screen from the SAFE ﬁeld of the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen (

→

p. 88).

HINT

• If the CH RECALL SAFE ﬁeld’s SET BY SEL button is on,

Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the [SEL] key,

and the corresponding channel will be highlighted in the CH

RECALL SAFE ﬁeld. You can select parameters as described

in step 3 even after turning Recall Safe on.

HINT

141

Using the Recall Safe function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

If you want to enable Recall Safe for spe-

ciﬁc parameters of the selected channel,

make the following settings in the SAFE

PARAMETER ﬁeld.

● For an input channel

Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE

PARAMETER ﬁeld (except for the “ALL” button) to

select the parameters that will be subject to Recall

Safe (multiple selections are allowed). If you want all

parameters to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the

ALL button (this is the default setting).

These buttons correspond to the following parameters.

● If a STEREO/MONO channel is selected

With the exception of the types of button that are dis-

played, this is the same as for an input channel.

These buttons correspond to the following parameters.

● If a MIX channel is selected

Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE

PARAMETER ﬁeld (except for the “ALL” button) to

select the parameters that will be subject to Recall

Safe (multiple selections are allowed).

In addition, you can use the WITH MIX SEND button

to enable Recall Safe for the on/off status and send

level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX

buses.

If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of

the ﬁeld to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL

button (this is the default setting).

Button name Corresponding parameters

ALL All parameters

HA Head amp settings (including external HA)

EQ EQ settings (including ATT/HPF)

DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings

DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings

MIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses

MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses

FADER Fader positions

CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys

LS9-16

LS9-32

• If you turn on the ALL button, all other buttons of the SAFE

PARAMETER ﬁeld will be turned off.

NOTE

Button name Corresponding parameters

ALL All parameters

EQ EQ settings (including ATT)

DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings

MTRX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses

MTRX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses

FADER Fader positions

CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys

142

Using the Recall Safe function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

These buttons correspond to the following parameters.

● If a MATRIX channel is selected

With the exception of the types of button that are dis-

played, this is the same as for a MIX channel.

In addition, you can use the WITH MATRIX SEND

button to enable Recall Safe for the on/off status and

send level of the signals sent from output channels to

MATRIX buses.

These buttons correspond to the following parameters.

To enable Recall Safe for the selected chan-

nel, turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE

PARAMETER ﬁeld.

Channels for which Recall Safe is enabled will be

highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE ﬁeld.

Button name Corresponding parameters

ALL All parameters (except for WITH MIX SEND)

EQ EQ settings (including ATT)

DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings

MTRX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses

MTRX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses

FADER Fader positions

CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys

WITH MIX

SEND

On/off status and send level of signals sent

from input channels to MIX buses

Button name Corresponding parameters

ALL

All parameters (except for WITH MATRIX

SEND)

EQ EQ settings (including ATT)

DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings

FADER Fader positions

CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys

WITH MATRIX

SEND

On/off status and send level of signals sent

from MIX channels / STEREO/MONO chan-

nels to MATRIX buses

• If the ALL button is on, all buttons will be turned off except for

the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the

SAFE PARAMETER ﬁeld.

•You can switch the WITH MIX SEND button on/off while the

ALL button is left on.

NOTE

• If you turn on the ALL button, all buttons will be turned off

except for the WITH MATRIX SEND button located in the

SAFE PARAMETER ﬁeld.

•You can switch the WITH MATRIX SEND button on/off while

the ALL button is left on.

NOTE

LS9-16

SAFE button

LS9-32

SAFE button

• Simply selecting a parameter in step 3 does not enable Recall

Safe. To turn Recall Safe on/off, you must also perform the

operation of step 4.

NOTE

• In the CH RECALL SAFE ﬁeld, the color of the highlight will

be green if the ALL button was selected in step 3, or blue if

buttons other than ALL were selected.

• If you press the CLEAR ALL button, Recall Safe will be

defeated for all channels for which it is enabled (i.e., the high-

lighted channels).

•You can also switch Recall Safe on/off in the SELECTED CH

VIEW screen’s SAFE ﬁeld (

→

p. 88).

HINT

143

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Scene memory

If you want to enable Recall Safe for global

parameters, turn on the desired buttons in

the GLOBAL ﬁeld.

These buttons correspond to the following parameters.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings, exe-

cute a Recall operation.

Only the selected channel(s) and parameter(s) will be

excluded from Recall operations.

Channel Link (→ p. 124) and the MIX/MATRIX bus

settings in the SYSTEM SETUP screen (→ p. 213) are

not subject to Recall Safe; the settings of the recalled

scene will always be reproduced.

This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of

several channels included in a link group or one of two

MIX/MATRIX channels set to stereo, the parameter

settings of that channel may differ from those of the

other channel(s) when you recall a scene. In such

cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically

re-linked the next time it is operated.

“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of speciﬁed channels to their new values

over a speciﬁed duration when you recall a scene. This is convenient when you want to obtain a

fade-in/out effect, or when you want the levels to transition smoothly between two scenes.

The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to

access the SCENE FADE screen.

In this screen you can make various settings for the

Fade function. The screen contains the following

items.

1 FADE TIME ﬁeld

This ﬁeld lets you make Fade function settings for a

scene saved in scene memory. Use the buttons located

in the center to make Fade function settings for the

scene selected in the list shown in the left side of the

screen. For other scenes, you can only view the set-

tings.

B CURRENT ﬁeld

This ﬁeld lets you make Fade function settings for the

scene you’re currently operating.

When you recall a scene, the Fade function settings of

that scene are shown in this ﬁeld.

C SETUP popup button

This button displays the FADE TIME popup window.

D FADING button

This button switches the Fade function on/off for each

scene.

E Fade time

This indicates the fade time (the time over which the

fader will reach the new value).

Button name Corresponding parameters

INPUT PATCH Input port patching

INPUT NAME Input channel name

OUTPUT

PATCH

Output port patching

OUTPUT NAME Output channel name

1–8 Rack 1–8 settings

• The Recall Safe function can be used in conjunction with the

Focus function (

→

p. 139). Channels or parameters that are

excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall

Safe will not be recalled.

• By performing the Recall operation while holding down the

[SEL] key of a channel for which Recall Safe is disabled, you

can temporarily enable the Recall Safe settings for that chan-

nel.

HINT

Using the Fade function

3 4 5

Using the Recall Safe function • Using the Fade function

144

Using the Fade function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Make sure that the cursor is located some-

where other than the constant display area,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the scene for which you want to

make Fade function settings.

Move the cursor to the SET popup button,

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

FADE TIME popup window.

In this popup window you can select the channels to

which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time.

1 Channel display ﬁeld

The channels to which Fade is applied are highlighted.

B FADE TIME knob

This knob sets the fade time. Move the cursor to this

knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

adjust the setting.

C SET ALL button

If you press this button, the Fade effect will be enabled

for all faders/encoders of that scene.

D CLEAR ALL button

If you press this button, the Fade effect will be dis-

abled for all faders/encoders of that scene.

Press the [SEL] keys of the desired chan-

nels to select the channels to which the

Fade effect will be applied (multiple selec-

tions are allowed).

The [SEL] keys of the selected channels will light, and

those channels will be highlighted in the channel dis-

play ﬁeld of the popup window. You can cancel a

selection by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to

make it go dark.

Move the cursor to the FADE TIME knob,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

adjust the fade time.

The range is 0.0 sec–60.0 sec.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings, move the cur-

sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to

close the FADE TIME popup window.

To turn on the Fade function, move the cur-

sor to the FADING button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The Fade on/off setting is made individually for each

scene. Save the scene if necessary.

Make Fade function settings for other

scenes as described in steps 2–6.

Recall a scene for which the Fade function

is turned on.

The faders will begin to move immediately after

Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled

scene over the course of the speciﬁed fade time.

123

• The fade time you specify here is used for all channels

selected in step 4.

HINT

• Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a

“FADING” indication in the STATUS ﬁeld of the SCENE LIST

screen.

HINT

• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if

faders are linked by Channel Link.

NOTE

• If you stop a moving fader while you hold down the corre-

sponding [SEL] key, the fade effect will stop at that point.

• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, all

channel faders will move immediately to their target positions.

HINT

145

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Monitor/Cue

Chapter 14

Monitor/Cue

This chapter explains the LS9’s monitor/cue functions.

The Monitor function lets you audition various signals through your nearﬁeld monitors or head-

phones. The LS9’s front panel has a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring, and this jack always lets

you monitor the signal that is selected as the monitoring source. By assigning the MONITOR

OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through

external speakers. You can select the following signals as the monitor source.

The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel by temporarily sending it from the

output jacks assigned to the MONITOR OUT channel or from the PHONES OUT jack. When you

press the top panel [CUE] key, the cue signal of the corresponding channel is sent as the monitor

output from the selected output port.

The following diagram shows the monitor/cue signal ﬂow.

● MONITOR SELECT

Selects the monitor source.

● METER

Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue

signal.

● DIMMER

Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a ﬁxed amount.

● MONITOR LEVEL

Adjusts the level of the monitor/cue signal. This affects

the output jacks that are assigned to the MONITOR OUT

L/R/C channels, and also the PHONES OUT jack.

● ON (On/off)

Turns the monitor output on/off.

● PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)

Adjusts the output level of only the PHONES OUT jack.

About the monitor/cue functions

• STEREO channel output signal

•MONO channel output signal

• STEREO + MONO channel output signal

• 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal

• INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input signal

• USB memory recorder output signal

•Any combination of up to eight signals from the STE-

REO, MONO, MIX, and MATRIX channels, the USB

memory recorder output signal, INPUT channel 15/

16 {31/32}, and the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal

• The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason,

the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor output.

However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack.

NOTE

To PHONES OUT

CUE TRIM

(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)

CUE L

CUE R

MONO

METER

CUE L

METER

CUE R

METER

MONITOR L

METER

MONITOR R

METER

MONITOR MONO(C)

MONO

MONITOR L

MONITOR R

MONITOR MONO(C)

2TRD L,R

INPUT 15,16{31,32}

PLAYBACK OUT

STEREO OUT L,R

STEREO OUT MONO(C)

STEREO OUT L,C,R

2TRD L,R

INPUT 15,16{31,32}

PLAYBACK OUT

STEREO OUT

L,R

STEREO OUT

MONO(C)

MIX OUT1-16

MATRIX OUT1-8

DEFINE

MIX

(MAX:8ch)

MONITOR SELECT

CUE LOGIC

TALKBACK ON

MONITOR DIMM ON MONITOR LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL LINK

+MONO(C)

PHONES L

PHONES R

MONITOR OUT L

MONITOR OUT R

MONITOR OUT MONO(C)

To PHONES OUT

To OUTPUT PATCH

DIMMER

PHONES OUT LR

PHONES LEVEL

[PHONES]

Tip

Ring

Sleeve

CUE

146

Using the Monitor function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES

OUT jack or external monitor speakers.

Connect your monitor system to the rear

panel OMNI OUT jacks, 2TR OUT DIGITAL

jack, or an I/O card installed in a slot.

The monitor signal can be sent to any desired output

jack or output channel. If you’re monitoring through

headphones, make sure that your headphones are con-

nected to the front panel PHONES OUT jack.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MONITOR] key repeatedly to access the

MONITOR screen.

In the MONITOR screen you can check the current

monitor settings, and turn monitoring on/off.

The screen contains the following items.

1 OUTPUT button

Turns the monitor output on/off.

B SOURCE SELECT ﬁeld

Use the buttons in this ﬁeld to select the monitor

source.

C ASSIGN ﬁeld

If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT

ﬁeld, use this ﬁeld to specify the monitor source. You

can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously.

If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to

the CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key.

D PHONES LEVEL LINK button

If this is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust

the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.

E MONITOR LEVEL knob

Adjusts the output level of the monitor signal.

F DIMMER ﬁeld

The Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates

the monitor signal can be switched on/off here. Use

the knob in this ﬁeld to adjust the amount of attenua-

tion.

G TALKBACK DIMMER ﬁeld

If Talkback is enabled, this will indicate the on/off sta-

tus of the Talkback Dimmer function which automati-

cally attenuates the monitor signal. Here you can also

specify the amount of attenuation applied by the talk-

back dimmer.

H Meter ﬁeld

This indicates the level of the monitor signal. This

meter shows the level immediately before the dimmer.

If you move the cursor to the port select box located

below the level meter and press the [ENTER] key, a

popup window will appear, allowing you to select the

port that will output the monitor signal.

I MONO MONITOR button

This button allows monaural monitoring. If this button

is on, the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and

the MONITOR OUT L/R channels will be monaural.

Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT

ﬁeld to select a monitor source.

In the SOURCE SELECT ﬁeld you can select only

one monitor source. However if you’ve selected

DEFINE, you can use the ASSIGN ﬁeld to specify

multiple monitor sources.

The following table shows the monitor sources you

can select in the SOURCE SELECT ﬁeld.

Using the Monitor function

56 7 4

ST L/R button STEREO L/R channel output signal

MONO button MONO channel output signal

2TR L/R button 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal

LCR button

STEREO L/R + MONO channel (LCR)

output signal

IN 15/16 {31/32}

button

INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input

signal

PLAYBACK OUT

button

USB memory recorder playback signal

DEFINE button

The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN

ﬁeld

• If the normal dimmer and the talkback dimmer are both

switched on simultaneously, the setting with the greatest

amount of attenuation will be applied.

HINT

147

Using the Monitor function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Monitor/Cue

If you’ve selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT

ﬁeld, you can use the ASSIGN ﬁeld to select multiple

sources. The following table shows the monitor

sources you can select in the ASSIGN ﬁeld.

Move the cursor to one of the port select

boxes (L/R/C) located below the level meter,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The OUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear,

allowing you to specify the port from which the L, R,

and C monitor signals will be output.

Move the cursor to the output destination

port and press the [ENTER] key to select it;

then move the cursor to the CLOSE button

and press the [ENTER] key to close the

popup window.

The following table lists the output ports you can

select.

To output the monitor signal, move the cur-

sor to the OUTPUT button of the MONITOR

screen and press the [ENTER] key to turn it

on.

The monitor source you selected in step 3 will be sent

to the output destination you speciﬁed in step 5.

Move the cursor to the MONITOR LEVEL

knob in the MONITOR screen, and use the

dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the

monitor level.

If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both

the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel

PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level

when monitoring through headphones.

Make settings for Dimmer and Monaural as

desired.

MIX 1–16 buttons MIX channels 1–16 output signals

MATRIX 1–8 but-

tons

MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals

STEREO L/R button STEREO L/R channel output signal

MONO button MONO channel output signal

2TR L/R button 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal

INPUT 15/16 {31/32}

button

INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input

signal

PLAYBACK OUT

button

USB memory recorder playback signal

OMNI 1–8 {1–16} OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16}

2TR OUT L/R 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L, R

SLOT {1/2} 1–16

Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card

installed in a slot {1/2}

•You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the

ASSIGN ﬁeld. If you select eight monitor sources, no further

selections will be possible. Please turn off the buttons for

unneeded sources.

NOTE

LS9-16

• If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR

OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers. If you have

not speciﬁed an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting

the MONO button or LCR button as the monitor source will

automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distrib-

uted to MONITOR OUT L/R.

HINT

• The PHONES OUT jack will always output the monitor signal,

regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off.

HINT

• If PHONES LEVEL LINK is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob

will also affect the PHONES OUT jack.

• If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER that you’ve

assigned to a user-deﬁned key, you’ll be able to use the mas-

ter fader to control the monitor.

HINT

• Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source,

and dimmer on/off operations can also be assigned to user-

deﬁned keys (

→

p. 196).

HINT

148

Using the Cue function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how to use the LS9’s Cue function.

The LS9’s cue signals can be categorized into the follow-

ing three groups.

1 INPUT CUE group

The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To

enable Cue for this group, press to turn on the [CUE] key

of a channel module to which an INPUT channel is

assigned or the [CUE] key of a ST IN channel.

B OUTPUT CUE group

The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To

switch to Cue for this group, press to turn on the [CUE]

key of the STEREO MASTER section or the [CUE] key

of a channel module to which a MIX/MATRIX/MONO

channel is assigned.

C Other CUE group

These are the Cue signals operated using buttons dis-

played in the screen. This group is enabled if you turn on a

CUE button in a RACK screen to which you’ve assigned

an effect, the CUE button of the RECORDER screen, or

the KEY IN CUE button of the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup

window. This group will automatically be disabled when

you exit the corresponding screen.

It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue between

different groups. Normally, the group to which the most

recently pressed [CUE] key (or a CUE/KEY IN CUE but-

ton in the screen) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE]

keys of the previously selected group will be defeated.

However if you switch the Cue signal group in a speciﬁc

order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the previously-

selected group will be restored when the current Cue sig-

nal is defeated.

The following illustration shows the priority order of the

[CUE] keys. After you have switched groups from lower

to upper levels, if you then defeat Cue for the upper group,

the previous [CUE] key status of the group immediately

below will be restored.

For example if you switch groups in the order of OUT-

PUT CUE group → INPUT CUE group → Other CUE

group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys

(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the

[CUE] key status of the previously selected group. How-

ever, if the CUE MODE is LAST CUE, the state of the

[CUE] key is not reproduced.

Using the Cue function

About cue groups

[CUE] key of a channel module to

which an INPUT channel is assigned

[CUE] key of a ST IN channel

[CUE] key of the STEREO channel

[CUE] key of a channel module to which a

MIX/MATRIX/MONO channel is assigned

CUE button in the screen

Other CUE group

INPUT CUE group

OUTPUT CUE group

149

Using the Cue function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Monitor/Cue

This section explains how you can use the [CUE] key of a

desired channel to monitor the Cue signal.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the

CUE screen.

In the CUE screen you can check the Cue status, and

turn Cue on/off.

1 CUE MODE ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the mode of operation when multiple

[CUE] keys within the same group are turned on.

B INPUT ﬁeld

Here you can select one of the following positions

from which input channels will be cued.

● PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button

The pre-fader signal will be output

● AFL (After-Fader Listen) button

The signal immediately after the [ON] key will be

output

● POST PAN button

The post-pan signal will be output

● PFL TRIM knob

If PFL is selected, you can adjust the output level

of the cue signal in a range of -20 dB to +10 dB.

C OUTPUT ﬁeld

Here you can select one of the following choices as the

position from which output channels will be cued.

● PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button

The pre-fader signal will be output

● AFL (After-Fader Listen) button

The signal immediately after the [ON] key will be

output

● PFL TRIM knob

If PFL is selected, you can adjust the output level

of the cue signal in a range of -20 dB to +10 dB.

D Meter ﬁeld

● CUE meter

This indicates the level of the cue signal.

● ACTIVE CUE indicator

This indicates the currently-active CUE group.

● CLEAR CUE button

Clears all Cue selections.

Use the buttons of the CUE MODE section

to specify what will happen when multiple

[CUE] keys within the same CUE group are

turned on.

Use the following two buttons to choose the Cue

mode.

● MIX CUE button

All channels within the same CUE group whose

[CUE] key is on will be mixed for monitoring

(MIX CUE mode).

● LAST CUE button

Only the channel whose [CUE] key was last turned

on will be monitored (LAST CUE mode).

Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT

ﬁeld and OUTPUT ﬁeld to specify the out-

put position and output level for each CUE

group.

Operating the Cue function

• The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the moni-

tor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will not be

sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor

output. However, the front panel PHONES OUT jack will always

output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. For

details on Monitor function settings, refer to “Using the Monitor

function” (

→

p. 146).

NOTE

1 2 3 4

• Be aware that if you turn the POST PAN button on, you can

no longer use input CUE to monitor the signal sent to the

MONO bus from an input channel that is set to LCR mode.

NOTE

• [CUE] keys belonging to different CUE groups cannot be

turned on simultaneously. The CUE group to which the last-

pressed [CUE] key belongs will be turned on, allowing only

the signals of that group to be monitored.

HINT

150

Using the Cue function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel to

turn it on.

The Cue signal of the corresponding channel will be

sent to the monitor signal output destination.

You can also watch the Cue meter of the meter ﬁeld to

check the output level of the cue signal. The ACTIVE

CUE indicator located below the Cue meter indicates

the CUE group (INPUT or OUTPUT) that is currently

turned on.

Press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONI-

TOR] button to access the MONITOR

screen, and use the MONITOR LEVEL knob

in the screen to adjust the level of the cue

signal.

If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both

the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel

PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level

when monitoring through headphones.

To defeat Cue, press the [CUE CLEAR] key

or the currently-on [CUE] key once again.

If you want to clear all Cue selections, move the cursor

to the CUE CLEAR button in the CUE screen, and

press the [ENTER] key.

ACTIVE CUE indicator

CUE meter

• If you want Cue operations and channel select operations to

be linked, open the PREFERENCE popup window of the

USER SETUP screen, and turn “[CUE]>[SEL] LINK” on (

→

p. 194).

HINT

• All Cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX

CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section.

•You can also assign the same function as the CLEAR CUE

button to a user-deﬁned key (

→

p. 196).

HINT

151

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Talkback / Oscillator

Chapter 15

Talkback / Oscillator

This chapter explains how to use the talkback and oscillator functions.

Talkback is a function that sends the signal of the selected INPUT jack to the desired bus. This is

used mainly to convey directions from the operator to the performers and staff. The LS9 also con-

tains an oscillator that allows a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, and this can be used

to check external equipment or to test the response of the room.

The diagram below shows the signal ﬂow of the talkback and oscillator.

Here’s how a signal received at an INPUT jack 1–16 {1–32} can be output to the desired bus.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the

TALKBACK screen.

In the TALKBACK screen you can check the status of

the talkback and turn it on/off.

1 TALKBACK ON button

This switches talkback on/off.

B INPUT TO TALKBACK ﬁeld

Of the INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}, the input sensitiv-

ity, input level, and phantom power on/off status of the

jack used for talkback is shown here. You can adjust

the input sensitivity by selecting the GAIN knob in

this ﬁeld.

● Input select popup button

This displays the INPUT PORT SELECT popup

window, where you can select the INPUT jack

used for talkback.

● +48V button

This is an on/off switch for the phantom power

(+48V) supplied to the INPUT jack used for talk-

back.

● GAIN knob

This adjusts the input sensitivity of the INPUT

jack used for talkback.

● Input level meter

This indicates the input level of the mic connected

to the INPUT jack used for talkback.

C ASSIGN ﬁeld

This selects the buses to which the talkback signal will

be sent. If you want to clear all selections, move the

cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the

[ENTER] key.

About talkback and oscillator

TALKBACK

INPUT 1-16{32}

... ...

15 16

MATRIX CUE

+48V

[INPUT]

METER

GAIN/TRIM

[1-16{32}]

INPUT

+48V

+48V MASTER

INPUT

SELEECT

OSCILLATOR

Sine Wave

Pink Noise

Burst Noise

HPF

LPF

LEVEL

OSC

MIX

(C)

12 78 LR

Using talkback

152

Using talkback

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To assign the input from the INPUT jack to

talkback, move the cursor to the input

select popup window in the INPUT TO

TALKBACK ﬁeld, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear.

Of the IN1–16 {1–32} buttons, move the cur-

sor to the port you want to use for talkback,

and press the [ENTER] key. To cancel the

selection, press the [ENTER] key once

again on the selected port.

You can select only one port at a time.

When you’ve selected the port, move the

cursor to the CLOSE button and press the

[ENTER] key to close the popup window.

Connect your mic to the rear panel INPUT

jack, move the cursor to the TALKBACK

GAIN knob, and use the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys to adjust the input sensitivity of

the mic.

The input level meter in the INPUT TO TALKBACK

ﬁeld shows the input level of the mic connected to the

INPUT jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be

supplied to the INPUT jack, turn on the +48V button

in the INPUT TO TALKBACK ﬁeld.

Using the buttons in the ASSIGN ﬁeld,

select the bus(es) to which you want to

send the talkback signal. (You may select

more than one.)

The buttons correspond to the following buses.

To enable talkback, move the cursor to the

TALKBACK ON button and press the

[ENTER] key to turn it on.

The TALKBACK ON button will alternate between on

and off each time you press the [ENTER] key (latched

operation).

While talkback is on, the signal from the INPUT jack

selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the

send-destination bus.

LS9-32

• If you want to use phantom power, you must ﬁrst turn ON the

+48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM

SETUP screen.

• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA

gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind

that noise may be generated if there is a difference between

the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device

connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

NOTE

MIX 1–16 buttons MIX buses 1–16

MATRIX 1–8 buttons MATRIX buses 1–8

ST L, ST R, MONO

buttons

STEREO bus L/R, MONO bus

• If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the

CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

•You can also assign the talkback on/off function to a user-

deﬁned key. In this case, you can choose either latched oper-

ation or unlatched operation (i.e., talkback will be On only

while you hold down the key) (

→

p. 196).

•You can also use Talkback Dimmer to lower the monitor level

of the non-talkback signals when talkback is on (

→

p. 146).

HINT

153

Using the oscillator

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Talkback / Oscillator

Here’s how you can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the

OSCILLATOR screen.

In the OSCILLATOR screen you can check the set-

tings of the oscillator and turn it on/off.

1 OUTPUT button

This switches the oscillator on/off.

B MODE ﬁeld

Move the cursor to a button in this ﬁeld to select the

desired type of oscillator.

C Parameter ﬁeld

Here you can adjust the parameters of the oscillator

you selected in the MODE ﬁeld. Use the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys to operate the knobs shown in the

ﬁeld.

D Oscillator level

This indicates the output level of the oscillator.

E ASSIGN ﬁeld

This selects the buses to which the oscillator signal

will be sent. If you want to clear all selections, move

the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Use the buttons in the MODE ﬁeld to select

the type of signal you want to output.

You can choose from the following signals.

If you want to adjust the oscillator parame-

ters, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

operate the knobs shown in the ﬁeld.

The parameters shown in the parameter ﬁeld will

depend on the type of oscillator selected in the MODE

ﬁeld.

The following table lists the oscillator types and the

parameters displayed for each type.

The following table describes each parameter in detail.

Using the buttons in the ASSIGN ﬁeld,

select the bus(es) to which you want to

send the oscillator signal. (You may select

more than one.)

The buttons correspond to the following buses.

Using the oscillator

SINE WAVE 1CH Sine wave, one channel

PINK NOISE Pink noise

BURST NOISE

Burst noise (intermittently output pink

noise)

Oscillator type Parameters

SINE WAVE 1CH LEVEL, FREQ

PINK NOISE LEVEL, HPF, LPF

BURST NOISE LEVEL, HPF, LPF, WIDTH, INTERVAL

Parameter Details

LEVEL Oscillator output level

FREQ

Frequency of the sine wave produced

by the oscillator

HPF

High-pass ﬁlter (on/off switch, cutoff

frequency)

LPF

Low-pass ﬁlter (on/off switch, cutoff fre-

quency)

WIDTH Duration of the noise

INTERVAL Length of silence between noise bursts

MIX 1–16 buttons MIX buses 1–16

MATRIX 1–8 but-

tons

MATRIX buses 1–8

ST L, ST R, MONO

buttons

STEREO bus L/R, MONO bus

Level

The BURST NOISE button is on

WIDTH

INTERVAL

Pink noise output

Time

• If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the

CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

154

Using the oscillator

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To enable the oscillator, move the cursor to

the OUTPUT button and press the [ENTER]

key to turn it on.

The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus(es) you

selected in step 4. When you select the button and

press the [ENTER] key once again, the oscillator will

be turned off.

•You can also assign the oscillator on/off function to a user-

deﬁned key (

→

p. 196).

HINT

155

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Meters

Chapter 16

Meters

This chapter describes the meter screen which displays input/output level

meters for all channels.

By accessing the Meter screen you can view the input/output levels of all channels in the screen,

and switch the metering point (the location at which the level is detected) of the level meters.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[METER] key to access the Meter screen.

The Meter screen is divided into the METER CH1-32

screen, {METER CH 33-64 screen}, OUTPUT

METER screen, and CUSTOM FADER screen.

[ METER CH1-32 screen ]

[ OUTPUT METER screen ]

[ CUSTOM FADER screen ]

1 Metering point select buttons

Use these three buttons to select the metering point for

the input/output channels.

B Level meters

These show the input/output levels or fader values.

The current fader value is shown in a range of -

∞–10.

When you operate the corresponding fader, the value

will change in realtime.

The ∑ segment will light if even one of the level detec-

tion points within each channel is overloaded.

The ∑ segment level detection points are as follows.

• Input channels

........... PRE HPF, PRE FADER, POST ON

• Output channels

........... PRE EQ, PRE FADER, POST ON

C PEAK HOLD button

If you turn this button on, the peak levels of the meters

will be held. When you turn this button off, the peak

level indications that had been held will be cleared.

Using the METER screen

LS9-16

156

Using the METER screen

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

D Metering point select box

Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the

metering point for the input/output channels.

E Channel name

This shows the ﬁrst four characters of the channel

name for the channels assigned to the [CUSTOM

FADER] layer. Channels that are not assigned are

shown as “----”.

If desired, you can move the cursor to the

metering point select buttons and press the

[ENTER] key to switch the metering point.

In the CUSTOM FADER screen, move the

cursor to the metering point select box, use

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to make

your selection, and then press the [ENTER]

key.

The metering point for the level meters can be set

independently for input channels and output channels.

You can choose from the following metering points.

● Input channels

• PRE HPF ............Immediately before the high-

pass ﬁlter

• PRE FADER .......Immediately before the fader

• POST ON ...........Immediately after the channel

on/off.

● Output channels

• PRE EQ ..............Immediately before the

attenuator

• PRE FADER .......Immediately before the fader

• POST ON ...........Immediately after the channel

on/off.

For details on the metering points, refer to the block

diagram at the end of this manual.

If you want to hold the peak levels of the

level meters, move the cursor to the PEAK

HOLD button and press the [ENTER] key to

turn it on.

On/off operations of the PEAK HOLD button will

apply to both input channels and output channels.

When you turn this button off, the peak level indica-

tions that had been held will be cleared.

•You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to

a user-deﬁned key (

→

p. 196).

• If you turn on METER FOLLOW LAYER in the PREFERENCE

screen, the same meter screen as the selected layer will be

displayed when you press a LAYER key.

HINT

157

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

Chapter 17

Graphic EQ and effects

This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ and effects, and how

to perform remote control operations via the dedicated protocol to control an

external head amp (Yamaha AD8HR) from the LS9.

The LS9 lets you insert the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ”) and effects

into the desired signal route to process the signals.

You can use two types of GEQ; 31 Band GEQ which lets you freely adjust thirty-one bands (fre-

quency regions), and Flex15GEQ which lets you adjust any ﬁfteen of thirty-one bands. You can

also use 48 different effect types.

In order to use a GEQ or effect, you must mount the GEQ or effect in one of the eight virtual racks provided in the screen,

and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had

installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. Only GEQ can be mounted

in racks 1–4, and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5–8. [Figure 1]

Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the “31 Band GEQ” is mounted in a rack,

there will be only one channel each for input and output.) [Figure 2] shows the signal ﬂow for the virtual racks.

About the virtual rack

RACK5

EFFECT CUE

RACK

METER

To MATRIX INSERT IN

MIX OUT

1-16

MATRIX OUT

1-8

STEREO OUT

L,R,MONO(C)

INSERT OUT

1-32

MIX

INSERT OUT

1-16

STEREO

INSERT OUT

L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX

INSERT OUT

1-8

RACK

PATCH

RACK1 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK2 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK3 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK4 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK5 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK6 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK7 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK8 IN

A(L)/B(R)

INSERT

PATCH

RACK1

METER

RACK IN

31BandGEQ

Flex15GEQ

RACK IN A

RACK IN B

RACK OUT

RACK OUT A

RACK OUT B

METER

RACK IN

31BandGEQ

RACK OUT

Flex15GEQ

RACK IN A

RACK IN B

RACK OUT A

RACK OUT B

RACK IN L

RACK IN R

METER

RACK OUT L

RACK OUT R

EFFECT

RACK6 (same as RACK5)

RACK7 (same as RACK5)

RACK8 (same as RACK5)

RACK1 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK2 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK3 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK4 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK5 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK6 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK7 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK8 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

CH INSERT IN 1-32

MIX INSERT IN 1-16

STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8

To CH INSERT IN

To MIX INSERT IN

To STEREO INSERT IN

METER

RACK2 (same as RACK1)

RACK3 (same as RACK1)

RACK4 (same as RACK1)

METER

RACK 1

RACK 2

RACK 3

RACK 4

RACK 5

RACK 6

RACK 7

RACK 8

[Figure 1]

[Figure 2]

Only for GEQGEQ or effects

• In addition to the virtual rack for GEQ and effects, there is also a rack for mounting external head amps

(Yamaha AD8HR). For details, refer to “Using an external head amp” (

→

p. 175).

HINT

158

About the virtual rack

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the

virtual rack, and patch the input/output of the rack.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simulta-

neously to access the VIRTUAL RACK

screen.

In the VIRTUAL RACK screen you can mount GEQ

or effects, and make input/output settings.

The screen contains the following items.

1 GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld

In this ﬁeld you can mount GEQ or effects in racks 1–

8, and edit the input/output patching for each rack.

B RACK button

This displays the RACK MOUNT popup window,

where you can select an item to mount in the rack.

Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at

the immediate right.

C SAFE button

This button switches Recall Safe on/off for the rack.

Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at

the immediate right.

D INPUT button

This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window, where you can select the input source

for the rack.

E Virtual rack

This area shows eight virtual racks in which GEQ or

effects can be mounted. Racks 1–4 are only for GEQ,

and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5–

8. (However depending on the type of internal effect,

some can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7.)

When you move the cursor to a virtual rack and press

the [ENTER] key, the result will depend on whether a

GEQ or effect is already mounted.

● If a GEQ/effect is already mounted in that

rack

The RACK 1–RACK 8 screen will appear, allow-

ing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or

effect.

● If the rack is vacant

The RACK MOUNTER popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the GEQ or effect

that will be mounted in the rack.

F OUTPUT button

This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window, where you can select the output destination of

the rack.

To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack, move

the cursor to the RACK button for that rack

and press the [ENTER] key.

The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear.

1 Rack number

This indicates the number of the selected rack.

B Virtual rack

This is the virtual rack in which you can mount a GEQ

or effect.

Mounting a GEQ or effect in the vir-

tual rack

• If you press only the [RACK 1-4] key or the [RACK 5-8] key,

the setting screen (RACK 1–RACK 8 screens) for the rack you

operated most recently will appear. To ensure that you access

the desired screen, hold down one of the keys and then press

the other key.

HINT

645

213

4 5

159

About the virtual rack

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

C MODULE SELECT buttons

Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will

be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following

function.

● BLANK button

Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in

the rack; the rack will be empty.

● 31 Band GEQ button

Mounts a 31 Band GEQ in the rack.

● Flex15GEQ button

Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.

● EFFECT button

Mounts an effect in the rack. This button will not

operate for racks 1–4.

D CANCEL button

Cancels the changes you made in the RACK

MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.

E OK button

Applies the changes you made in the RACK

MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.

Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select

the item you want to mount, move the cur-

sor to the OK button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

To select the input source for a rack, move

the cursor to the INPUT button for that rack

and press the [ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the input source for the

rack.

1 Channel select tabs

These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown

in the lower part of the window.

B Channel select buttons

Use these buttons to select the input source. Use the

three tabs to switch between groups of input sources

shown in the window.

C CLOSE button

Closes the popup window.

The following input sources can be selected in this

popup window.

*1: This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ.

• Input/output patching will be cleared if you change the item

that is mounted or remove the mounted item.

HINT

• Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was

mounted in a rack and close the window, all parameter set-

tings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded. If you have not

yet closed the window, you can recover the settings by mount-

ing the same GEQ or effect once again.

NOTE

•You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by

moving the cursor to a vacant rack in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld

and pressing the [ENTER] key.

HINT

Tab name Button name Input source

OUT CH

(*1)

MIX 1–16 MIX channel 1–16 outputs

MTRX 1–8

MATRIX channel 1–8 out-

puts

ST L, ST R,

MONO

STEREO (L/R) channel

output, MONO (C) channel

output

CH 1-32

(INSERT OUT)

CH 1–32

INPUT channel 1–32

Insert Outs

OUT CH

(INSERT OUT)

MIX 1–16

MIX channel 1–16 Insert

Outs

MTRX 1–8

MATRIX channel 1–8

Insert Outs

ST L, ST R,

MONO

STEREO (L/R) channel

Insert Out, MONO (C)

channel Insert Out

• If you select Insert Out of a channel as the input source for 31

Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ, the Insert In of that same channel

will automatically be selected as the output destination for

that rack. When you defeat an Insert Out, the Insert In will

also be defeated automatically. For details on Insert Out/In,

refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (

→

p. 101).

HINT

160

About the virtual rack

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Switch the tabs as necessary, and select

the input source that you want to use.

When you select an input source in the OUTPUT CH

SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you to

conﬁrm the change in patching. To conﬁrm the opera-

tion, move the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the OUTPUT button for

that rack, and press the [ENTER] key.

The INPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear,

allowing you to select the output destination for the

rack.

1 Channel select tabs

These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown

in the lower part of the window.

B Channel select buttons

Use these buttons to select the output destination.

C CLOSE button

Closes the popup window.

The following output destinations can be selected in

this popup window (multiple selections are allowed).

*1: This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ.

Switch the tabs as necessary, and select

the output destination that you want to use.

When you select an output destination in the INPUT

CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you

to conﬁrm the patching change. To conﬁrm the opera-

tion, move the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To turn Recall Safe on/off, move the cursor

to the SAFE button for that rack and press

the [ENTER] key.

If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack, the contents and

parameters of that rack will not change when a scene

is recalled. For more about Recall Safe, refer to

“Using the Recall Safe function” (→ p. 140).

•You have the option of making settings so that the patch

change conﬁrmation dialog box does not appear (

→

p. 194).

• If you selected 31 Band GEQ, you’ll be able to select one

channel of input; otherwise you’ll be able to select two chan-

nels of input.

HINT

Tab name Button name Output destination

CH 1-32

(*1) CH 1–32

INPUT channel 1–32

inputs

CH33-64

(*1)

(LS9-32 only)

CH 33–64

INPUT channel 33–64

inputs

STIN

(*1)

STIN1L/1R–

4L/4R

ST IN channel 1–4 inputs

CH 1-32

(INSERT OUT)

CH 1–32

INPUT channel 1–32

Insert In

OUT CH

(INSERT OUT)

MIX 1–16 MIX channel 1–16 Insert In

MTRX 1–8

MATRIX channel 1–8

Insert In

ST L, ST R,

MONO

STEREO (L/R) channel

Insert In, MONO (C) chan-

nel Insert In

• If you selected the Insert In of a certain channel as the output

destination for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ, the Insert Out of

the same channel will automatically be selected as the input

source of that rack. When you defeat an Insert In, the Insert

Out will also be defeated automatically.

HINT

•You have the option of making settings so that the patch

change conﬁrmation dialog box does not appear (

→

p. 194).

•You can specify multiple output destinations for a rack.

• If you selected 31 Band GEQ, you’ll be able to select one

channel of output; otherwise you’ll be able to select two chan-

nels of output.

HINT

• The type of GEQ or effect mounted in each rack, its parame-

ter settings, and the input-source/output-destination settings

are saved as part of the scene.

HINT

161

Graphic EQ operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

The LS9 lets you mount a GEQ in racks 1–8 and patch it

to the insert-out/in of a channel. You can use the top panel

faders and [ON] keys to operate the amount of boost/cut

for each band.

The following two types of GEQ are provided.

● 31 Band GEQ

This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave

wide, the adjustable boost/cut range is ±15 dB, and the

amount of boost/cut for each of the thirty-one bands can

be adjusted. If a 31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack, one

channel of input and output can be used for that rack.

● Flex15GEQ

This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave

wide, and the adjustable boost/cut range is ±15 dB. The

Flex 15GEQ lets you adjust the boost/cut amount for any

ﬁfteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31

Band GEQ. (Once you’ve used up ﬁfteen bands of adjust-

ment, you won’t be able to adjust the boost/cut amount of

another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to

the ﬂat setting.)

A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two

Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively)

mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input

and output. If you mount a Flex15GEQ in each rack,

you’ll be able to use up to sixteen GEQ units simulta-

neously.

The LS9’s GEQ units can be patched to the insert-in/out

of any channel except the ST IN channels. Here’s how to

insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.

As described in steps 1–3 of “Mounting a

GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158),

mount a GEQ in a rack.

The GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld shows the approximate set-

tings and input/output levels of the GEQ. A rack in

which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show informa-

tion for two GEQ units (A and B).

1 Racks

B INPUT buttons

C OUTPUT buttons

Use the INPUT button to open the OUTPUT

CH SELECT popup window where you can

select the input-source for the rack, and

choose the insert-out of the desired chan-

nel.

The insert-out will be assigned to the input of the

GEQ. (For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window → p. 159)

Graphic EQ operations

About the graphic EQ

INPUT

Rack

OUTPUT

31 Band GEQ

INPUT

Rack

OUTPUT

Flex15GEQ (A)

Flex15GEQ (B)

Inserting a GEQ in a channel

213

• If you’re using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ

in one rack, or mount two 31 Band GEQ units in adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two

GEQ units later.

HINT

• If you select the Insert Out of a certain channel as the input

source, the Insert In of that same channel will automatically

be selected as the output destination for that rack. For details

on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external device into a

channel” (

→

p. 101).

HINT

162

Graphic EQ operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Use the OUTPUT button to open the INPUT

CH SELECT popup window where you can

select the output-destination for the rack,

and choose the insert-in to which you want

to assign the output of the GEQ (multiple

selections are allowed).

The insert-in will be assigned to the output of the

GEQ. (For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window → p. 160)

In the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld, move the cursor

to the rack in which you mounted the GEQ

and press the [ENTER] key.

The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the

parameters of the GEQ or effect.

1 GEQ ON/OFF button

Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.

B FLAT button

This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to

0 dB.

C INPUT button

This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window, where you can select the input source

of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for

the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld.

D OUTPUT button

This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window, where you can select the output destination of

the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for

the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld.

E GEQ LINK button

This button links adjacent GEQ units. In the case of a

31 band GEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case

of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the

same rack will be linked.

If you want to link two GEQ units, turn on

the GEQ LINK button.

If you’ve selected 31 Band GEQ for two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered racks, or if you’ve selected

a Flex15GEQ, you can use the GEQ LINK button to

link the two GEQ units. This is convenient when you

want to process a stereo source through GEQ units

with identical settings.

When you turn the GEQ LINK button on, a popup

window like the following will appear. The popup

window contains the following items.

1 RACK x→y button (“x” and “y” are the rack

number, or the rack number and the alpha-

betical characters A or B)

The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then

linked.

B RACK y→x button

The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then

linked.

C RESET BOTH button

The parameters of both will be initialized, and then

linked.

D CANCEL button

Cancels the link and closes the popup window.

To conﬁrm the link, move the cursor to a button other

than CANCEL, and press the [ENTER] key. When

you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ/

EFFECT ﬁeld to indicate the linked status.

• If you select the Insert In of a certain channel as the output

source, the Insert Out of that same channel will automatically

be selected as the input source for that rack.

HINT

•You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the [RACK

1-4] key or [RACK 5-8] key. By repeatedly pressing the [RACK

1-4] key you can access the RACK 1–4 screens, and by

repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key you can access the

RACK 5–8 screens and EXTERNAL HA screen.

• The RACK screens for the 31 Band GEQ and the Flex15GEQ

are nearly identical. However, the Flex15GEQ individually dis-

plays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.

HINT

1 2 3 4 5

• The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible.

NOTE

Symbol indicating

linked status

163

Graphic EQ operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

To turn on the GEQ, move the cursor to the

GEQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER]

key.

After you’ve turned the GEQ on, adjust the bands of

the GEQ. For details on operating the GEQ, refer to

“Using the 31 Band GEQ” (below) or “Using the

Flex15GEQ” (→ p. 164).

Check whether INSERT is turned on for the

patched channel.

For details, refer to “Inserting an external device into

a channel” (→ p. 101).

Here we will explain how to use the 31 Band GEQ.

As described in steps 1–3 of “Mounting a

GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158),

mount a GEQ in a rack.

A rack in which a 31 Band GEQ is mounted will show

the approximate settings.

In the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld, move the cursor

to the rack in which you mounted the GEQ

and press the [ENTER] key.

The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the

parameters of the GEQ.

You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the

[RACK 1-4] key or [RACK 5-8] key. By repeatedly

pressing the [RACK 1-4] key you can access the

RACK 1–4 screens, and by repeatedly pressing the

[RACK 5-8] key you can access the RACK 5–8

screens and EXTERNAL HA screen.

1 EQ graph

This indicates the approximate response of the current

31 Band GEQ settings.

B Faders

These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each

band of the 31 Band GEQ. The frequency and value

for the fader currently selected by the cursor are

shown below the fader.

C FADER ASSIGN ﬁeld

Use this ﬁeld when you want to operate the boost/cut

amount for each band using the top panel faders.

D GEQ ON/OFF button

Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.

E FLAT button

This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to

0 dB.

F INPUT button

This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window, where you can select the input source

of the rack.

G OUTPUT button

This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window, where you can select the output destination of

the rack.

H GEQ LINK button

This button links adjacent GEQ units.

After you’ve set the input-source and out-

put-destination correctly, use the GEQ ON/

OFF button to turn on the 31-band GEQ.

To adjust the boost/cut of each band, move

the cursor to the desired fader and operate

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

If you want to use the top panel faders to

adjust the boost/cut of each band, proceed

as follows.

1 Move the cursor to the button in the

FADER ASSIGN ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

When this button is turned on, the faders in the screen

will turn white, and you will be able to use the top

panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands.

Using the 31 Band GEQ

Rack image display

4 5 6 7 8

LS9-32

• The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. For

a 31 Band GEQ, this button is displayed if a 31 Band GEQ is

mounted in two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered

racks.

NOTE

164

Graphic EQ operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● For the LS9-16

On the LS9-16, the bands that can be controlled

will depend on the button you selected. In order to

adjust all of the bands, you’ll need to switch these

buttons as you work.

● For the LS9-32

Only the [20-20k] button can be selected. When

this button is on, you can use the top panel faders

1–31 to operate all 31 bands.

B Operate the faders.

The corresponding frequency region will be boosted

or cut.

C When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

turn off the button(s) of the FADER

ASSIGN ﬁeld.

The top panel faders and [ON] keys will return to their

previous function.

If you want to copy the currently-displayed

31 Band GEQ settings to the GEQ of

another rack, or to initialize the settings,

you can do so using the tool buttons at the

top of the screen.

For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using

the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).

Here we will explain how to use the Flex15GEQ.

As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect

in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,

mount a GEQ in a rack.

A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show

information for two GEQ units (A and B).

1 GEQ (A)

B GEQ (B)

C Rack graphic display area

Move the cursor to a rack in which a

Flex15GEQ is mounted, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the

parameters of GEQ (A) or GEQ (B).

To switch the RACK screen, repeatedly press the

[RACK 1-4] keys (RACK 1–4 screens) or [RACK 5-8]

key (RACK 5–8 screens / EXTERNAL HA screens).

For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the

RACK screen is shown separately as xA and xB (x is

the rack number).

Button name Bands

[20-630] button 16 bands from 20 Hz–630 Hz

[125-4k] button 16 bands from 125 Hz–4 KHz

[630-20k] button 16 bands from 630 Hz–20 KHz

• When a top panel fader is in the center (ﬂat) position, the cor-

responding [ON] key will go dark. This indicates that the cor-

responding band is not being modiﬁed. If you raise or lower

the fader even lightly, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this

band is being modiﬁed. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it

go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the

ﬂat state.

HINT

• If a button in the FADER ASSIGN ﬁeld is on, switching the

display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top

panel fader assignments.

•However if you once again display the same rack, the group of

bands you had previously been controlling will automatically

be assigned to the faders.

•FADER ASSIGN on/off settings apply to all GEQ units

together.

HINT

Using the Flex15GEQ

• If a 31 Band GEQ is using 15 or fewer bands, its settings can

also be copied to a Flex15GEQ.

NOTE

• GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the ded-

icated library (

→

p. 174).

HINT

• When you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31 Band GEQ

units (A and B) are placed in a single rack. However, only up

to ﬁfteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.

HINT

165

Graphic EQ operations

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

1 EQ graph

This indicates the approximate response of the current

Flex15GEQ settings.

B Faders

These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each

band of the Flex15GEQ. The frequency and value for

the fader currently selected by the cursor are shown

below the fader.

C FADER ASSIGN ﬁeld

Use this ﬁeld when you want to operate the boost/cut

amount for each band using the faders. At the right

side of “AVAILABLE BANDS,” there is always an

indication of the remaining number of bands (maxi-

mum 15) that can be controlled for the current

Flex15GEQ.

D GEQ ON/OFF button

Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.

E FLAT button

This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to

0 dB.

Use the [RACK 1-4] key (for RACK 1–4

screens) or the [RACK 5-8] key (for RACK

5–8 screens) to select either GEQ unit A or

B, make the correct input-source and out-

put-destination settings, and then turn on

the Flex15GEQ.

To adjust the boost/cut of each band, move

the cursor to the desired fader and operate

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.

For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B),

a maximum of ﬁfteen bands can be controlled.

The remaining number of bands that can be controlled

is shown at the right of “AVAILABLE BANDS” in the

FADER ASSIGN ﬁeld. If you have used all ﬁfteen

bands, you will have to return one of the used bands

(i.e., a band for which a fader was raised or lowered)

to the ﬂat position before you can operate any other

band.

If you want to use the top panel faders to

adjust the boost/cut of each band, proceed

as follows.

1 Move the cursor to the button in the

FADER ASSIGN ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

For details on how operation and the buttons differ

between models, refer to step 5 of “Using the 31 Band

GEQ” (→ p. 163).

When this button is turned on, the faders in the screen

will turn white, and you will be able to use the top

panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands.

B Operate the faders.

The corresponding frequency region will be boosted

or cut. A maximum of 15 bands can be controlled.

C When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

turn off the button(s) of the FADER

ASSIGN ﬁeld.

The top panel faders and [ON] keys will return to their

previous function.

If you want to copy the currently-displayed

Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of another

rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do

so using the tool buttons at the top of the

screen.

For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using

the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).

4 5

Remaining number

of bands

• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the

slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band

is being modiﬁed.

•To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the ﬂat position,

press the corresponding [ON] key to make it go dark.

HINT

• If a button in the FADER ASSIGN ﬁeld is on, switching the

display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top

panel fader assignments. However if you once again display

the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been

controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.

HINT

• GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the ded-

icated library (

→

p. 174).

HINT

166

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The internal effects of the LS9 can be mounted in racks 5–8. For each mounted effect you can

choose one of 48 effect types, and patch the effect to the output of an output channel or the input

of an input channel, or insert it into a channel.

With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 13–16 are input to racks 5–8, and output

to ST IN 1–4 (L/R).

To use an internal effect via send/return, assign the output

of a MIX channel etc. to the input of the effect, and assign

the output of the effect to an input channel.

In this case, the corresponding MIX bus is used as a mas-

ter channel for the effect send, and the input channel is

used as an effect return channel.

Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the

internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel

(except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted

into that channel.

The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO

type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel

input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out)

effects that mix the two channels to monaural before pro-

cessing them.

If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an

effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed

will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix

effect type is selected, as follows.

● STEREO type effects

● MIX type effects

If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input

effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regard-

less of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is

selected.

About the internal effects

• The internal effects cannot be mounted in racks 1–4.

• Some effect types can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7.

NOTE

Rack 5

Output of the

output channel

Input of the

input channel

EFFECT

Rack 6

EFFECT

Rack 7

EFFECT

Rack 8

EFFECT

OUTPUT PATCH

INPUT PATCH

Insert-out of a

desired channel*

Insert-in of a

desired channel*

EFFECT

* Except for a ST IN channel

INPUT L

INPUT R

L RETURN

R RETURN

EFFECT L

EFFECT R

INPUT L

INPUT R

L RETURN

R RETURN

EFFECT

INPUT L

or R

L RETURN

R RETURN

EFFECT

167

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

Here we will explain how to use a MIX bus as an effect

send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel,

so that the effect can be used in a send/return conﬁgura-

tion.

As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect

in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,

mount an effect in a rack.

A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the

effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off

status.

1 Racks

B INPUT buttons

C OUTPUT buttons

Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT-

PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select

a MIX channel as the input source for the

rack.

The output of the MIX channel you’re using as the

effect send will be assigned to the L input of the effect.

For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup win-

dow, refer to step 4 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in

the virtual rack” (→ p. 158).

If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals

of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs of the

rack.

Use the OUTPUT L button to open the

INPUT CH SELECT popup window, and

select the L input of the desired ST IN chan-

nel as the output-destination for the rack.

The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect

return channel will be assigned to the L output of the

effect. For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window, refer to step 6 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect

in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158).

If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign

the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output

of the rack in the same way.

Move the cursor to a rack in which an effect

is mounted in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the

parameters of the effect.

You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeat-

edly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key.

1 MIX BAL. knob

This knob adjusts the balance between the original

sound and effect sound included in the output signal

from the effect.

B Input/output meters

These indicate the level of the signals before and after

the effect.

C INPUT L/R buttons

These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window. The operating procedure is the same as

for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld.

D OUTPUT L/R buttons

These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window. The operating procedure is the same as for

the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld.

Using an internal effect via send/

return

• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI”

as the bus type (

→

p. 213). This will allow you to adjust the send

level separately for each input channel.

• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it is convenient to

assign the send-source MIX bus to stereo (

→

p. 213).

HINT

213

•You can select more than one output destination for the effect.

HINT

• The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate

the [RACK 5-8] key is used when you’re using an external

head amp (

→

p. 175).

HINT

3 2 41

168

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To change the mix balance of the original

sound and effect sound, move the cursor to

the MIX BAL. knob and use the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys.

The MIX BAL. knob adjusts the balance between the

original sound and effect sound included in the output

signal from the effect. This parameter is provided for

all effect types.

If you’re using the effect via send/return, set this to

100% (effect sound only).

To adjust the effect send level of an input

channel, press the [HOME] key to access

the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and

access the input channel that you want to

control.

1 SEND ﬁeld

B TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob

Move the cursor to the TO MIX SEND LEVEL

knob for the desired MIX bus, and use the

dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the

send level.

With these settings, the signal will be sent from the

input channel to the internal effect. Adjust the send

level of other input channels in the same way.

By moving the cursor to the knob and pressing the

[ENTER] key, you can switch the signal sent from

each channel to the corresponding bus on/off, and

access a popup window where you can choose the

send point (PRE/POST) (→ p. 64).

To adjust the master level of the effect

send, call up the fader layer that includes

the MIX channel you speciﬁed as the input-

source of the rack in step 2, and adjust the

corresponding fader.

Set the level as high as possible without allowing the

post-effect signal to reach the overload point.

To adjust the effect return level, operate the

encoder of the ST IN channel you selected

as the output-destination of the rack in step

Here we will explain how to insert an effect into a channel

by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the

input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN

channel).

As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect

in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,

mount an effect in a rack.

A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the

effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off

status.

1 Racks

B INPUT buttons

C OUTPUT buttons

Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT-

PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select

the insert-out of a channel as the input-

source.

Insert-out will be assigned to the L input of the effect.

For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup win-

dow, refer to step 4 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in

the virtual rack” (→ p. 158).

•For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing

the internal effect parameters” (

→

p. 170).

HINT

• Make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you

selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to 0. If

you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be

returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing

oscillation.

NOTE

Inserting an internal effect into a

channel

213

169

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

Use the INPUT L button to open the INPUT

CH SELECT popup window, and select the

insert-in of the same channel as the output-

destination.

Insert-in will be assigned to the L output of the effect.

If you are inserting in a channel that handles a stereo

source, use the same procedure to assign the insert-

out/insert-in of the other channel to the R input and R

output of the effect.

Press the [HOME] key to access the

SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and access

the channel into which you want to insert

the effect.

Move the cursor to the INSERT popup but-

ton, and press the [ENTER] key to access

the INSERT popup window.

Make sure that the desired rack is selected for the

input/output ports you’re using for the insertion. For

details on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external

device into a channel” (→ p. 101).

1 INSERT ON/OFF button

Make sure that the INSERT ON/OFF button

is turned on for the channel into which you

inserted the effect.

If this is off, turn it on. In this state, effect insertion is

enabled for the corresponding channel.

Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to

access the RACK screen for the rack you

inserted into the channel.

In this screen you can edit the parameters of the effect.

The screen contains the following items.

1 Input/output meters

These indicate the level of the signals before and after

the effect.

B INPUT L/R buttons

These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window. The operating procedure is the same as

for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld.

C OUTPUT L/R buttons

These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window. The operating procedure is the same as for

the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT ﬁeld.

Select the effect type and edit the effect

parameters.

For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to

“Editing the internal effect parameters.”

Select the fader layer that includes the

channel you selected in step 3 as the out-

put destination of the rack, and operate the

corresponding fader to adjust the level

appropriately.

• The INSERT popup window also lets you change the insert-

out/in position within the channel.

HINT

2 1 3

• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input/

output meters at the upper right of the RACK screen.

HINT

• Adjust the insert out signal level and the effect parameters so

that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input

or output stage of the effect.

NOTE

170

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how to change the effect type and

edit the parameters.

As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect

in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,

mount an effect in a rack.

A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the

effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off

status.

1 Effect title/type

B Bypass on/off status

Move the cursor to the rack in which the

effect you want to edit is mounted, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the

parameters of the effect.

You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeat-

edly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key.

1 Effect type ﬁeld

This shows the effect title, the name of the type that is

used, and a graphic. The number of input/output chan-

nels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also

shown. If you move the cursor to the effect type

graphic and press the [ENTER] key, the EFFECT

TYPE popup window will appear, allowing you to

select the effect type.

B BYPASS button

This button temporarily bypasses the effect.

C EFFECT CUE button

This button cue-monitors the output of the currently

displayed effect. This cue function is valid only while

this screen is displayed. The cue will be cancelled

automatically when you switch to a different screen.

D Special parameter ﬁeld

This shows special parameters that are speciﬁc to

some effect types.

E Input/output meters

These indicate the level of the signals before and after

the effect.

F INPUT L/R buttons

These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT

popup window.

G OUTPUT L/R buttons

These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup

window.

H Effect parameter ﬁeld

This area shows parameters for the currently selected

effect type.

If you want to change the effect type, pro-

ceed as follows.

1 Move the cursor to the effect type graphic,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The EFFECT TYPE popup window will appear.

Editing the internal effect parame-

ters

1 2

• The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate

the [RACK 5-8] key is used when you’re using an external

head amp (

→

p. 175).

HINT

5 7

1 462

CLOSE button

171

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

B Use the dial or the cursor keys to move the

cursor, and select the new effect type.

You can move the cursor up or down to select a new

type in steps of twelve.

If you decide not to change the effect type, use the cur-

sor keys to move the cursor to the CLOSE button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

C When you’ve selected a new effect type,

press the [ENTER] key.

The EFFECT TYPE popup window will close auto-

matically, and the new effect is now available for use.

To edit the effect parameters, move the cur-

sor to the knobs in the effect parameter

ﬁeld, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys.

Edit the settings in the special parameter

ﬁeld as necessary.

For some effect types, parameters such as the follow-

ing will appear in the special parameter ﬁeld.

● TEMPO

This is shown if a tempo-type or modulation-type

effect is selected.

1 MIDI CLK button

If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of

that effect will be set to match the tempo of the

MIDI timing clock being input from the currently-

enabled MIDI port.

B BPM knob

This knob sets the BPM parameter manually. You

can also assign the Tap Tempo function to a user-

deﬁned key, and set the BPM using it (→ p. 172).

● PLAY/REC

This is shown if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.

1 PLAY button / REC button

These buttons are used to record (sample) and play

back when using the freeze effect. For details on

how to use this, refer to “Using the Freeze effect”

(→ p. 173).

● SOLO

This is shown if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND

COMP. is selected as the effect type.

1 HIGH/MID/LOW buttons

These buttons pass only the selected frequency

band (multiple selections are allowed).

B Gain reduction meters

These show the amount of gain reduction for each

band.

If you want to monitor only the output sig-

nal of the currently displayed effect, press

the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on.

If you want to bypass the currently dis-

played effect, turn the BYPASS button on.

If you want to copy the currently-displayed

effect settings to the effect of another rack,

or to initialize the settings, you can do so

using the tool buttons at the top of the

screen.

For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using

the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).

•You can also switch the effect type by recalling a library set-

ting.

HINT

• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and FREEZE” can be used only in

rack 5 or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you

will not be able to paste them to rack 6 or 8.

NOTE

•For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the

supplementary material at the end of this manual (

→

p. 233).

HINT

• If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE mode (in which all chan-

nels whose [CUE] keys are on will be mixed for monitoring),

only the output signal of the effect will be monitored when you

turn on the EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had

been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.)

HINT

• Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using

the effect library (

→

p. 174).

HINT

172

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay

time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modu-

lation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. To

use the Tap function, you must ﬁrst assign Tap Tempo to a

user-deﬁned key, and then operate that user-deﬁned key.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen within the SETUP screens.

1 USER DEFINED KEYS popup button

Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED

KEYS popup button and press the [ENTER]

key to access the USER DEFINED KEYS

popup window.

The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you

assign functions to user deﬁned keys [1]–[12].

1 User deﬁned keys popup buttons

Move the cursor to the popup button for the

user-deﬁned key to which you want to

assign the Tap Tempo function, and press

the [ENTER] key.

The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window

will appear.

Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION col-

umn, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the

PARAMETER 1 column, move the cursor to

the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.

To select an item in each column, move the cursor to

the desired column and use the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key; the Tap Tempo function will

be assigned to the user-deﬁned key you selected in

step 3, and you will return to the USER DEFINED

KEY SETUP page.

Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to

access the RACK screen for the rack in

which the effect you want to control is

mounted.

Select an effect type that includes a BPM

parameter.

For details on selecting the effect type, refer to step 3

of “Editing the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170).

The BPM parameter is shown in the special parameter

ﬁeld. It is included in delay-type and modulation-type

effects, and can be used to specify the delay time or

modulation speed.

1 BPM parameter

Using the Tap Tempo function

• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 col-

umn, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-

shown effect (rack).

• If you specify “RACK x” (x=5–8) in the PARAMETER 1 col-

umn, the Tap Tempo function can be used only for a speciﬁc

effect (rack).

•For more about user-deﬁned keys, refer to “User-deﬁned

keys” (

→

p. 196).

HINT

173

About the internal effects

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the

user-deﬁned key to which you assigned the

Tap Tempo function.

The average interval (BPM) at which you press the

key will be calculated, and that value will be reﬂected

by the BPM parameter.

Here’s how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which pro-

vides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this

effect type is selected, you can perform operations in the

screen to record (sample) and play back a sound.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simulta-

neously to access the VIRTUAL RACK

screen.

Mount an effect in rack 5 or rack 7.

Move the cursor to the rack in which the

effect you want to edit is mounted, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the

parameters of the effect.

You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeat-

edly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key.

Select “FREEZE” as the effect type.

For details on selecting the effect type, refer to step 3

of “Editing the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170).

If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY but-

ton, REC button, and progress bar are shown in the

special parameter ﬁeld.

1 PLAY button

B REC button

C Progress bar

To begin recording (sampling), turn on the

REC button to make it light, and then turn

on the PLAY button.

The signal being input to the effect will be recorded.

The progress bar shows the current recording location.

When a ﬁxed time has elapsed, the buttons will auto-

matically turn off.

To play back the recorded sample, move the

cursor to the PLAY button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Using the Freeze effect

•For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the

supplementary material at the end of this manual (

→

p. 233).

HINT

The average interval will be input

(the average of a, b, and c)

First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap

ab c

• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it

will be ignored.

• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter

ﬁeld, the BPM parameter value will change according to the

tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the currently-

enabled MIDI port.

HINT

• Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in

rack 5 or 7.

NOTE

123

• As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also

recall settings that use the “FREEZE” effect type from the

effect library.

HINT

•You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed

settings for recording time, the way in which recording will

begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For

details on the parameters, refer to the supplementary material

at the end of this manual (

→

p. 233).

HINT

•If, after recording, you turn on the REC button again to enter

record-ready mode, the sampled content will be erased.

NOTE

174

Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall graphic EQ and effect settings.

Use the “GEQ library” to store and recall GEQ settings.

This GEQ library can be referenced by all GEQ units used

in the LS9. (However, the 31 Band GEQ and Flex15GEQ

are different types. You cannot recall a GEQ library item

of a different type.)

200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is

read-only, and the remaining library numbers can be

freely read or written.

To access the GEQ library, move the cursor to the LIB

toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when a GEQ is

shown in the RACK screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

1 LIB button

For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”

(→ p. 35).

Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings.

199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Library

items 1–48 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect

types 1–48 respectively. Library items 49–57 are reserved

for use by the system. Other library item numbers can be

freely read and written.

To access the effect library, move the cursor to the LIB

toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when an effect is

shown in a RACK 5–8 screen, and press the [ENTER]

key.

1 LIB button

For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”

(→ p. 35).

Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries

GEQ library

• Store/recall operations are performed on individual racks. You

can’t individually store/recall two Flex15GEQ units that are

mounted in the same rack.

NOTE

Effect library

• Library items using the “HQ.PITCH” or “FREEZE” effect types can

be recalled only into rack 5 or 7. They cannot be recalled into rack

6 or 8.

NOTE

•You can also use MIDI messages (program changes) to recall

effect settings from the library (

→

p. 180).

HINT

175

Using an external head amp

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Graphic EQ and effects

If an I/O card (expected to go on sale in the future) that supports the external head amp (Yamaha

AD8HR) remote protocol is installed in an LS9 slot, you’ll be able to remotely control parameters

such as the external head amp’s phantom power (+48V) on/off, gain, and HPF from the LS9.

For an example of actual connections, refer to the owner’s manual of the I/O card.

Here’s how to control the external head amp (subse-

quently called “external HA”) from the LS9 via an I/O

card installed in a slot.

Connect the LS9 and external HA.

Refer to the owner’s manual for the I/O card and for

the external head amp.

Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to

access the EXTERNAL HA screen.

The EXTERNAL HA screen includes the following

items.

1 COMM PORT box

This box lets you select the communication port for

the currently-installed I/O card(s).

● SLOT {SLOT1}

Select the communication port for the I/O card

installed in the slot {slot 1}.

● SLOT2 (LS9-32 only)

Select the communication port for the I/O card

installed in slot 2.

B ID / Model name / +48V master

This displays information for the external HA

mounted in the rack. The ID number is assigned auto-

matically as 1 to 2 {1 to 4} in the order in which

devices are connected to the I/O card. This area also

shows the on/off status of the master phantom power.

C Virtual racks

These are two {four} racks in which remotely control-

lable external HA units can be mounted. If an external

HA is mounted, its settings (gain setting, phantom

power on/off, HPF on/off) are shown. When you move

the cursor to a rack and press the [ENTER] key, the

EXTERNAL HA popup window for that rack will

appear.

D EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup but-

ton

This button accesses the EXTERNAL HA PORT

SELECT popup window, where you can specify the

input ports to which the external HA mounted in the

rack will be connected.

To select the communication port for the I/O

card, move the cursor to the COMM PORT

box, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select a port, and press the [ENTER] key.

To specify the input ports for an external

HA, move the cursor to the EXTERNAL HA

PORT SELECT popup button for that rack,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window

will appear. The popup window includes the following

items.

1 PORT SELECT buttons

These buttons specify the input ports to which the

external HA is connected.

B NO ASSIGN button

This button defeats the port selection.

Using an external head amp

Remotely controlling an external

head amp

234

• When installing an MY16-ES64 or similar EtherSound inter-

face card in an LS9-32, be sure to install it in SLOT 1.

NOTE

1 2

176

Using an external head amp

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify

the input ports to which the audio output of

the external HA is connected.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings, move the cur-

sor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key

to close the popup window.

To remotely control an external HA, move

the cursor to the rack in which the external

HA you want to control is mounted, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear.

Here you can remotely control the external HA by

using the knobs and buttons in the LS9’s display or the

dial etc. of the top panel.

1 Rack select buttons

These switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTER-

NAL HA popup window.

B +48V MASTER

If an external HA is connected to the REMOTE con-

nector, the on/off status of the master phantom power

is shown here. (Switching this on/off is performed on

the external HA itself.)

C +48V buttons

These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.

D GAIN knobs

These indicate the gain of the external HA. Move the

cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to adjust the setting.

E HPF knobs / ON buttons

These controls switch the external HA’s built-in high-

pass ﬁlter on/off, and adjust its cutoff frequency.

To remotely control the external HA in an

LS9 input channel, press the [HOME] key to

access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen,

and access the channel that you want to

control.

1 HA popup button

Move the cursor to the HA popup button,

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

HA/PATCH popup window.

1 Input port popup button

Press the input port popup button, and

select the input port assigned to the exter-

nal HA.

With these settings, the external HA can be used in the

same way as the LS9’s own HA. For details on the

HA/PATCH popup window, refer to “HA (head amp)

settings” (→ p. 57).

• If an external HA is connected to one of the LS9’s slots, you

must specify the appropriate input port manually. If this is set

incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly

when you patch input ports to input channels.

NOTE

• When you newly connect an AD8HR, the above screen will

reﬂect the state of the AD8HR’s settings.

• Since the above knobs and buttons will be shown even if an

AD8HR is not connected, you can use them to make settings

even without the AD8HR, and store these settings in a scene.

HINT

• Settings for the external HA are saved as part of the scene

(However, master phantom on/off, HPF on/off, and cutoff fre-

quency settings are excepted).

• When you adjust the brightness of the LS9’s panel LEDs, this

will also affect the LEDs of the external HA.

HINT

177

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

MIDI

Chapter 18

MIDI

This chapter explains how MIDI messages can be transmitted from an exter-

nal device to control the LS9’s parameters, and conversely how operations

on the LS9 can be transmitted as MIDI messages.

The LS9 can use MIDI to perform the following operations.

● Program Change transmission and reception

When you execute a speciﬁc event (scene/effect library recall) on the LS9, a program change message of the cor-

responding number can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be exe-

cuted when a program change message is received from an external device.

● Control Change transmission and reception

When you execute a speciﬁc event (fader/encoder or key operation) on the LS9, the corresponding control

change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when control

change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a

MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later.

● Parameter change (SysEx) transmission and reception

When speciﬁc events (fader/encoder or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed

on the LS9, “parameter change” system exclusive messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely,

events can be executed when parameter changes are received from an external device.

Using this capability, LS9 operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external

device, or changes in system settings and user settings can be reﬂected on another LS9 console.

MIDI functionality on the LS9

• As the MIDI port used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages, you can select either the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT

connectors or an I/O card installed in the slot {1, 2}. (If you select an I/O card, you can also select a port number.) All of

the above functionality will be common to the selected port.

• MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages can be received to control the transport of the USB memory recorder.

NOTE

178

Basic MIDI settings

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to select the type of MIDI messages the LS9 will transmit and receive, the MIDI port

that will be used, and the MIDI channel.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC

SETUP screen within the SETUP screens.

Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup

button, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the MIDI SETUP popup window.

In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of

MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received,

and choose the port that will be used. This page

includes the following items.

1 PORT/CH ﬁeld

Here you can select the port and MIDI channel that

will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. If

MIDI messages are being transmitted or received, the

SIGNAL indicators at the top of this ﬁeld will light.

B Port select box

Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the

MIDI message transmit (Tx) port and receive (Rx)

port. If you select the same port as used by another

function such as cascade link or HA remote, a conﬁr-

mation dialog box will appear. If you select OK, the

port setting for the other function will be disabled.

C Channel select box

Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the

MIDI message transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx)

channel.

D PROGRAM CHANGE ﬁeld

Here you can make settings for program change trans-

mission and reception.

● Tx button

Switches program change transmission on/off.

● Rx button

Switches program change reception on/off.

● ECHO button

This selects whether incoming program changes

are echoed-out from the transmission port.

E PROGRAM CHANGE MODE ﬁeld

Here you can select the program change transmit/

receive mode.

● SINGLE button

If this button is on, program changes will be trans-

mitted and received on a single MIDI channel.

● OMNI button

If this button is on, program changes of all MIDI

channels will be received in Single mode. (Multi

mode transmission/reception and Single mode

transmission are disabled.)

● BANK button

If this button is on, bank select messages can be

transmitted and received in Single mode. (This is

disabled for Multi mode transmission/reception.)

● MULTI button

If this button is on, program changes will be trans-

mitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi

mode).

F CONTROL CHANGE ﬁeld

Here you can make settings for control change trans-

mission/reception.

● Tx button

Switches control change transmission on/off.

● Rx button

Switches control change reception on/off.

● ECHO button

This selects whether incoming control changes are

echoed-out from the transmission port.

Basic MIDI settings

MIDI SETUP popup button

53 72

•For details on how to assign the scene or effect for each pro-

gram number, refer to “Using program changes to recall

scenes and library items” (

→

p. 180).

HINT

179

Basic MIDI settings

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

MIDI

G CONTROL CHANGE MODE ﬁeld

Here you can select the control change transmission/

reception mode.

● NRPN button

If this button is on, the LS9’s mix parameters will

be transmitted/received as NRPN messages on one

MIDI channel (NRPN mode).

● TABLE button

If this button is on, the LS9’s mix parameters will

be transmitted/received as control change mes-

sages on one MIDI channel (TABLE mode).

H PARAMETER CHANGE ﬁeld

Here you can make settings for transmission/reception

of “parameter change” system exclusive messages.

● Tx button

Switches parameter change transmission on/off.

● Rx button

Switches parameter change reception on/off.

● ECHO button

This selects whether incoming parameter changes

are echoed-out from the transmission port.

I OTHER COMMAND ﬁeld

Here you can specify how MIDI messages other than

program changes, control changes, and parameter

changes (i.e., messages such as note-on/off and MIDI

timing clock) will be received.

● ECHO button

Selects whether other MIDI messages that are

received will be echoed out from the transmit port.

To specify the port that will transmit or

receive each type of MIDI message, move

the cursor to the transmit (Tx) or receive

(Rx) port selection box, use the dial or the

[DEC]/[INC] keys to specify the setting, and

then press the [ENTER] key.

You can choose from the following items.

To specify the channel (CH1–CH16) on

which MIDI messages will be transmitted or

received, move the cursor to the channel

selection box, use the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys to specify the setting, and press

the [ENTER] key.

Turn transmission/reception on or off for

each MIDI message.

Item Description

---- No port will be used.

MIDI

Rear panel MIDI IN (Rx) / OUT (Tx)

connector

SLOT {1/2} -1–8

(The number of available

ports will depend on the

card that is installed.)

A card that supports serial trans-

mission, installed in a rear panel

slot {1/2} (MY16-CII is valid in

SLOT {1–2})

• When transmitting or receiving parameter changes, the chan-

nel number you specify here is used as the device number (a

number that identiﬁes the transmitting or receiving unit).

HINT

•For details on using program changes, refer to “Using pro-

gram changes to recall scenes and library items,” below.

•For details on using control changes, refer to “Using control

changes to control parameters” (

→

p. 183).

HINT

180

Using program changes to recall scenes and library items

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

The LS9 lets you assign a speciﬁc event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each program

change number, so that when this event is executed on the LS9, a program change message of

the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the correspond-

ing event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device.

Connect the LS9 to your external device.

The following illustration shows an example of using

the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive

MIDI messages.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup

button, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the MIDI SETUP popup window.

As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→

p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels

that will be used to transmit/receive pro-

gram changes.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to close the popup

window.

You will return to the MISC SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the PROGRAM CHANGE

popup button, and press the [ENTER] key

to access the PROGRAM CHANGE popup

window.

In the PROGRAM CHANGE popup window you can

specify how program changes will be transmitted and

received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect

library recall) that will be assigned to each program

number.

This page includes the following items.

1 PROGRAM CHANGE ﬁeld

Here you can switch program change transmission/

reception on/off, and specify whether program

changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with

the PROGRAM CHANGE ﬁeld of the MIDI SETUP

popup window.

B PROGRAM CHANGE MODE ﬁeld

Here you can select the program change transmit/

receive mode. This setting is linked with the PRO-

GRAM CHANGE MODE ﬁeld of the MIDI SETUP

page popup window.

C List

This list shows the event (scene recall / effect library

recall) assigned to each program number. The list

shows the following items.

● CH/BANK

Indicates the MIDI channel 1–16 on which pro-

gram changes are transmitted/received. In Single

mode if the BANK button is on, this will be

labeled BANK, and the numerical value in this

column will correspond to the bank number.

● NO.

Indicates the program number 1–128.

Using program changes to recall scenes and library items

MIDI IN

LS9

MIDI OUT

external device

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

181

Using program changes to recall scenes and library items

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

MIDI

● PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT

Indicates the type/number/title of the event

assigned to the program number for each MIDI

channel (bank number). By pressing the popup

button for an individual event, you can access the

PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window,

where you can change the assignment for each

program number.

D CLEAR ALL button

Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in

the list.

E INITIALIZE ALL button

Pressing this button will restore all event assignments

in the list to their default state.

Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE

MODE ﬁeld to select the program change

transmission/reception mode.

You can select one of the following two program

change transmission/reception modes.

● Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on)

Program changes of all MIDI channels will be trans-

mitted and received. (The transmit/receive channel

speciﬁed in the MIDI SETUP popup window will be

ignored.)

When a program change is received, the event

assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and pro-

gram number in the list will be executed.

When you execute the speciﬁed event on the LS9, the

program change of the corresponding MIDI channel

and program number in the list will be transmitted.

● Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on)

Only program changes of the transmit (Tx) and

receive (Rx) channels speciﬁed in the MIDI SETUP

popup window will be transmitted and received.

When a program change on the Rx channel is

received, the event assigned to that program number of

the corresponding channel in the list will be executed.

When you execute a speciﬁc event on the LS9, the

program change of the corresponding program number

will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list.

(If an event is assigned to more than one program

number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered

program number will be transmitted.)

If you turn on the OMNI button / BANK button in Sin-

gle mode, operation will change as follows.

● When the OMNI button is on

Program changes of all MIDI channels will be

received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel

that is received, the event assigned to the corre-

sponding program number of the Rx channel will

be executed.

Turning on the OMNI button will not change the

operation for program change transmission.

● When the BANK button is on

The CH indication in the list will change to BANK

(bank number), and bank select (control change

#0, #32) + program change messages can be trans-

mitted and received. This is convenient when you

want to control more than 128 events on a single

MIDI channel.

When bank select and then program change messages

(in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the

event assigned to that bank number and program num-

ber in the list will be executed.

When you execute a speciﬁc event on the LS9, bank

select + program change messages for the bank num-

ber and program number assigned to that event will be

transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is

assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-num-

bered bank number and program number will be trans-

mitted.)

Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE

ﬁeld to turn transmission and reception on/

off, and make settings for echo output.

This ﬁeld includes the following items.

● Tx button

Switches program change transmission on/off.

● Rx button

Switches program change reception on/off.

● ECHO button

This selects whether incoming program changes are

echoed-out from the transmission port.

• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in

Multi mode.

• If the BANK button is on and only a program change on an

applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank

number will be used.

NOTE

• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned

on at the same time. In this case, bank select + program

change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.

HINT

182

Using program changes to recall scenes and library items

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

To change the event assignment for each

program number, move the cursor to the

popup button for the corresponding event

in the list, and press the [ENTER] key.

The PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window

will appear. In this window you can specify the event

assigned to each program number. This popup window

contains the following items.

1 TYPE ﬁeld

Select the type of event.

The following table lists the events you can select.

B LIBRARY NAME ﬁeld

Select the number and title of the scene or library item

to recall. If you selected SCENE in the TYPE ﬁeld,

this shows the scene number and its title. If you

selected RACK 5–8, this shows the library number

and its title.

Use the TYPE ﬁeld to select the type of

event you want to assign, and use the

LIBRARY NAME ﬁeld to select the scene/

library number that will be recalled.

To select an item, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key to ﬁnalize the changes and close the

PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window.

Assign events to other program numbers in

the same way.

With these settings, executing the speciﬁed event on

the LS9 will cause the corresponding program change

(or bank select + program change) message to be

transmitted to the external device.

When an external device transmits a program change

(or bank select + program change) message on the

appropriate channel, the event assigned to that pro-

gram number of the corresponding MIDI channel (or

bank number) will be executed.

Item Content

NO ASSIGN No assignment

SCENE Scene memory recall operations

RACK 5–8

Effect library recall operations for racks 5–8

(only if an effect is mounted)

•You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments

to program numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all

program number assignments to their default state.

• Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings

for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.

HINT

• In Single mode, if the same event is assigned to more than

one program number on a Tx channel, only the lowest pro-

gram number will be transmitted. (If the BANK button is on,

only the program number of the lowest bank number will be

transmitted.)

• In Multi mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one

MIDI channel and more than one program number, only the

lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be trans-

mitted.

NOTE

183

Using control changes to control parameters

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

MIDI

You can use MIDI control change messages to control speciﬁed events (fader/encoder opera-

tions, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the LS9. This capability can be used to record fader and

key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later.

You can use control changes to control events in either of the following two ways.

● Using control changes

This method uses typical control changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely assign an

event to each control number.

● Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)

This method uses a special type of control change messages called NRPN.

NRPN uses control change numbers 62 and 63 to specify the MSB (Most Signiﬁcant Byte) and LSB (Least Sig-

niﬁcant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted control change messages of control

change number 6 (or 6 and 26) to specify the value of that parameter.

The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-deﬁned, and cannot be changed.

Connect the LS9 to your external device.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup

button, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the MIDI SETUP popup window.

As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→

p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels

that will be used to transmit/receive control

changes.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to close the popup

window.

You will return to the MISC SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the CONTROL CHANGE

popup button, and press the [ENTER] key

to access the CONTROL CHANGE popup

window.

In the CONTROL CHANGE popup window you can

specify how control changes will be transmitted and

received, and assign the event (fader/encoder opera-

tion, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each

control number. This page includes the following

items.

1 CONTROL CHANGE ﬁeld

Here you can switch control change transmission/

reception on/off, and specify whether control changes

will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the

CONTROL CHANGE ﬁeld of the MIDI SETUP

popup window.

Using control changes to control parameters

•For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the appendix (

→

p. 253).

HINT

184

Using control changes to control parameters

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

B CONTROL CHANGE MODE ﬁeld

Here you can select the control change transmission/

reception mode. This setting is linked with the CON-

TROL CHANGE MODE ﬁeld of the MIDI SETUP

popup window.

C List

This list shows the event (fader/encoder pattern, [ON]

key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control

number.

● NO.

This indicates the control number. You can use

control numbers 1–31, 33–95, and 102–119.

● CONTROL CHANGE EVENT

Indicates/selects the type of event assigned to each

control number. When you press the popup button

for an event, the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT

popup window will appear, allowing you to change

the control number assignment.

D CLEAR ALL button

Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in

the list.

E INITIALIZE ALL button

Pressing this button will restore all event assignments

in the list to their default state.

Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE

MODE ﬁeld to select the control change

transmission/reception mode.

You can choose one of the following two modes for

control change transmission/reception.

● NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on)

The LS9’s various mix parameters will be transmitted

and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN mes-

sages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the

list will be ignored.

● TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on)

The LS9’s various mix parameters will be transmitted

and received on a single MIDI channel as control

change messages.

Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE

ﬁeld to turn transmission and reception on/

off, and make settings for echo output.

Each button has the following function.

● Tx button

Switches control change transmission on/off.

● Rx button

Switches control change reception on/off.

● ECHO button

This selects whether incoming control changes are

echoed-out from the transmission port.

To change the event assignment for each

control number, move the cursor to the

popup button for the corresponding event

in the list, and press the [ENTER] key.

The CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window

will appear. In this window you can specify the event

assigned to each control number. The window contains

the following items.

1 MODE ﬁeld

Select the type of event.

B PARAMETER 1/2 ﬁeld

In conjunction with the MODE ﬁeld, this speciﬁes the

type of event.

In the order of the MODE ﬁeld → PARAME-

TER 1 ﬁeld → PARAMETER 2 ﬁeld, specify

the type of event you want to assign.

To select an item, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key to ﬁnalize the changes and close the

CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window.

Assign events to other control numbers in

the same way.

When you operate the parameters you assigned on the

LS9, control change messages will be transmitted to

external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding con-

trol change messages are sent from an external device

on the appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to

those control numbers will change.

• The channel on which control changes are transmitted and

received is speciﬁed by the MIDI SETUP popup window

PORT/CH ﬁeld (

→

p. 178).

HINT

1 2

• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmis-

sion/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored.

NOTE

•For details on the events that can be assigned to control

changes, refer to the appendix (

→

p. 249).

HINT

•You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments

to control numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all

control number assignments to their default state.

• Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings

for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.

HINT

185

Using parameter changes to control parameters

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

MIDI

On the LS9, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “parameter changes” to

control speciﬁc events (fader/encoder operations, [ON] key on/off operations, etc.) as an alterna-

tive to using control changes or NRPN messages.

For details on the parameter changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI Data

Format” in the appendix.

Connect the LS9 to your external device.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup

button, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the MIDI SETUP popup window.

As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→

p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels

(device numbers) that will be used to trans-

mit/receive parameter changes.

Use the Tx button and Rx button of the

PARAMETER CHANGE ﬁeld to turn on

parameter change transmission/reception.

In this state when you operate speciﬁc parameters on

the LS9, the corresponding parameter change mes-

sages will be transmitted. If valid parameter change

messages are transmitted from an external device, the

parameters assigned to those parameter changes will

be controlled.

Using parameter changes to control parameters

•Parameter changes include a “device number” that speciﬁes

the transmitting or receiving device. The transmit (Tx) channel

and receive (Rx) channel speciﬁed in the MIDI SETUP page

are used as the device number.

• Please be aware that if the device number included in the

transmitted parameter change does not match the device

number of the receiving LS9 console, the message will be

ignored.

• If parameter change and control change transmission/recep-

tion are turned on at the same time, a large amount of data

will ﬂood the MIDI port and cause overﬂows or other prob-

lems, so you should avoid this.

NOTE

186

Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) to operate the USB memory recorder

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

You can use MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages to operate the LS9’s USB memory

recorder from an external device.

MMC is only received (not transmitted). For details on the MMC messages that can be received,

refer to “MIDI Data Format” in the appendix.

Connect the LS9 to your external device.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC

SETUP screen within the SETUP screens.

Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup

button, and press the [ENTER] key to

access the MIDI SETUP popup window.

As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→

p. 178), select the port and MIDI channel

(device number) that will be used to receive

MMC messages.

Prepare the USB memory recorder for use.

For details on using the USB memory

recorder, see p.105.

In this state, an external device will be able to control

operations such as play, record, stop, and pause on the

LS9’s USB memory recorder.

The following MMC commands are supported.

Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) to operate the USB

memory recorder

Command MMC# Content

Stop 01 Stop playback or recording.

Play 02

Begins playback of the selected ﬁle.

The ﬁle to be played can be selected

beforehand in the TITLE LIST

screen, or the desired track number

can be selected using a MIDI Song

Select message (F3).

Play 03

Begins playback of the selected ﬁle.

The ﬁle to be played can be selected

beforehand in the TITLE LIST

screen, or the desired track number

can be selected using a MIDI Song

Select message (F3).

Record 06 Begins recording.

Pause 09 Pauses playback or recording.

• MMC messages include a “device number” that speciﬁes the

receiving device. The receive (Rx) channel speciﬁed in the

MIDI SETUP page is used as the device number.

• Please be aware that if the device number included in the

transmitted MMC message does not match the device num-

ber of the receiving LS9 console, the message will be

ignored.

NOTE

187

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Chapter 19

User settings (Security)

This chapter explains the User Level settings that allow restrictions on the

parameters that can be operated by each user, the Console Lock function

that temporarily disables operation of the console, the Preferences settings

that allow the operating environment to be customized, and Save/Load oper-

ations using USB memory.

User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that be operated by each user, or to

change the settings of the custom fader layer, user-deﬁned keys, and preference settings for

each user. Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” on USB memory,

allowing users to be switched easily, simply by connecting the memory device to a USB connec-

tor. This is convenient in the following situations.

•Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.

• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited.

• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can

be locked to prevent unintended operations.

•Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.

There are three types of user, as follows. In order to operate the LS9, you must log-in as some type of user.

● Administrator

This is the administrator of the LS9, and can use all of its functionality. Only one set of Administrator

settings is internally maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys

for other users.

● Guest

A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. Only one set of Guest

settings is internally maintained in the console.

● User

A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. User settings are saved

on USB memory as a user authentication key. Multiple sets of User settings can be saved with different

user names. Custom fader layer, user-deﬁned key, and preference settings can be edited, and these set-

tings stored in the user authentication key.

In addition, a User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a

speciﬁed user level.

When a user logs on, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following informa-

tion.

•Password (except for Guest)

• User level (except for Administrator)

• Preferences

• User-deﬁned keys

User Level settings

User types and user authentication keys

188

User Level settings

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Privileges for each user are as follows.

With the factory settings, the Administrator password is

not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator

privileges and perform all operations. If you want to

restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an

Administrator password.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the PASSWORD

CHANGE popup button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter

a password.

Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD

ﬁeld; then move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The password can be up to eight characters. For details

on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name”

(→ p. 34)

Here’s how to create a user authentication key and save it

on USB memory. A user authentication key can be created

only by an Administrator or Power User. The user level

can be speciﬁed when the authentication key is created,

but the custom fader layer, user-deﬁned key settings, and

preference settings will be carried over from the user who

is currently logged-in.

Connect USB memory to the USB connec-

tor.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Logged-in user

Custom fader layer / user-

deﬁned keys / preference

setting editing

User Level setting

Password

setting

Comment

editing

User authentication key

(USB memory)

Create new Overwrite-save

Administrator

Available

(Can edit the settings for

Administrator and for

Guest.)

Available

(Cannot edit the user level, since

the administrator can always

perform all operations. Can edit

the user level for Guest.)

Available — Available —

User

Power user Available Available Available Available Available Available

Normal user (a

user without

Power User

privileges)

Available

N/A

(View only)

Available Available —

Available

(Only settings

other than User

Level)

Guest Available

N/A

(View only)

—Available — —

Setting the Administrator pass-

word

PASSWORD CHANGE popup button

Creating a user authentication key

CREATE USER KEY button

189

User Level settings

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the CREATE USER KEY

button and press the [ENTER] key.

The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear.

1 USER NAME

The user name of up to eight characters is shown (and

can be edited) here. When you move the cursor to this

ﬁeld and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window

will appear, allowing you to enter a user name (→

p. 34).

B PASSWORD

Specify a password of up to eight characters. Press this

to access a keyboard window where you can enter the

password (→ p. 34).

C POWER USER

Speciﬁes whether Power User privileges will be

granted to this user.

D Access permission settings

These settings specify the range of operations that the

user can perform. For details on each item, refer to

p.193.

When you have speciﬁed the user name,

password, power user privileges on/off, and

user rights, move the cursor to the CREATE

button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you are logged-in as the Administrator, the user

authentication key will be saved on USB memory.

If you are logged-in as a Power User, a dialog box will

ask you to conﬁrm the store-destination USB memory.

If you want to save the user authentication key on dif-

ferent USB memory, connect the desired USB mem-

ory and then press [OK].

In order to operate the LS9, you must log in as the Admin-

istrator, Guest, or a User.

User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in

the console itself, but in order to log in as a User you must

connect USB memory on which a user authentication key

has been saved. If you disconnect the USB memory after

logging-in, your access privileges will forcibly revert to

Guest.

● Logging-in as Administrator

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the log-in popup button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The LOGIN popup window will appear.

1 2 3

Logging-in

• If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will gener-

ally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If

a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the

password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly

logged-in as Guest. Similarly, you will also be forcibly logged-in as

Guest if you had been logged-in as a user requiring a user authen-

tication key, but USB memory is no longer connected.

NOTE

Log-in popup button

190

User Level settings

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the ADMINISTRATOR

If no Administrator password has been set, you will

simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a key-

board window will appear, allowing you to enter the

password.

Enter the password, move the cursor to the

OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.

For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning

a name” (→ p. 34).

If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG

PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen.

● Logging-in as Guest

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the log-in popup button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The LOGIN popup window will appear.

Move the cursor to the GUEST LOGIN but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

● Logging-in as a User

To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key

saved on USB memory. You may also log-in using a user

authentication key that was created on a different LS9

console.

Connect the USB memory to the USB con-

nector.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the log-in popup button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The LOGIN popup window will appear.

Move the cursor to the LOAD USER KEY

button and press the [ENTER] key.

The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the

ﬁles and folders saved on the USB memory will be

displayed. User authentication keys have a ﬁle name

of “User name.L9U”.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list, and turn the

dial to select the user authentication key of

the user as whom you want to log-in.

The highlighted line in the ﬁle list indicates the ﬁle

that is selected for operations.

For details on loading from USB memory, refer to

“Loading a ﬁle from USB memory” (→ p. 200).

LOAD buttonFile list

191

User Level settings

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the LOAD button and

press the [ENTER] key.

If no password has been set, you will simply be

logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard win-

dow will appear, allowing you to enter the password.

Enter the password, move the cursor to the

OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.

For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning

a name” (→ p. 34).

If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG

PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen.

Here’s how to change the password of the logged-in user.

A change in the Administrator password is updated imme-

diately. A change in a User password will be discarded if

the user simply logs-out; it must be applied to the user

authentication key before the user logs-out. The Guest

account does not have a password.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the PASSWORD

CHANGE popup button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter

the password.

• If you select a user authentication key that was created on a

different LS9 console, a keyboard window will appear, allow-

ing you to enter the Administrator password of the LS9 con-

sole that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are

identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the

correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will

appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected

user.

• If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be

asked for the Administrator password the next time. (

→

p. 192

Editing a user authentication key)

NOTE

Changing the password

PASSWORD CHANGE popup button

192

User Level settings

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Enter the current password, move the cur-

sor to the OK button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning

a name” (→ p. 34).

When you enter the correct password, a keyboard win-

dow will appear, allowing you to enter the new pass-

word.

Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD

ﬁeld; then move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your custom

fader layer, user-deﬁned keys, and preference settings, and

overwrite (save) them onto your user authentication key. If

you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change

the user level.

Log-in as a user, and edit the custom fader

layer (→ p. 91), user-deﬁned keys (→ p. 196)

and preference settings (→ p. 194).

If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also

change the user level.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE KEY popup

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask whether you really want to over-

write (save) the user authentication key.

To overwrite (save), move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

Here’s how to view/change the user level of the logged-in

user.

• For the Administrator

...............There is no such setting for the

Administrator himself, but the set-

ting for the Guest account can be

changed.

• For the Guest ..........The setting of the Guest account

can be viewed. It cannot be

changed.

• For a normal User...The setting of that User account

can be viewed. It cannot be

changed.

• For a Power User....The setting of that User account

can be changed.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the USER LEVEL popup

button and press the [ENTER] key to

access the USER LEVEL popup window.

Editing a user authentication key

SAVE KEY popup button

Changing the user level

• If you attempt to log-in as a different user after changing the

settings but not saving them, a message will ask you whether

you want to save the user authentication key. In this case, you

can also save the user authentication key by moving the cur-

sor to the OK button and pressing the [ENTER] key.

HINT

USER LEVEL popup button

• If you are logged in as Administrator, you can move the cursor

to the “for Guest” USER LEVEL popup button and press the

[ENTER] key to access the USER LEVEL popup window,

where you can view or change the guest’s user level.

NOTE

193

User Level settings

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This page includes the following items.

1 CH OPERATION ﬁeld

Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations

that will be permitted for input channels and output

channels. The settings will apply to the currently

selected channel. Use the panel [SEL] keys to select

the channel for which you want to make settings.

Channels that have the same settings are shown with

the same color in the channel display ﬁeld. The

selected channel is shown with a frame around it.

● HA

Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched

to that channel.

● PROCESSING

Restricts operation of all signal processing param-

eters for that channel (except for fader and [ON]

key).

● FADER / ON

Restricts operation of that channel’s fader and

[ON] key.

● SET BY SEL

If this button is on, you can use the [SEL] keys of

the panel to turn all settings of the corresponding

channel on or off.

B CURRENT SCENE ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the operations that can be performed on

the current scene memory.

● INPUT PATCH / NAME

Restricts operations for input channel patching and

names.

● OUTPUT PATCH / NAME

Restricts operations for output channel patching

and names.

● BUS SETUP

Restricts operations for bus setup.

● RACK 1–8

Restricts operations for the racks (1–8).

● MUTE GROUP ASSIGN / MASTER

Restricts operations for mute group assignment

and mute group master.

C SCENE LIST ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the operations that can be performed on

scene memories.

● STORE / SORT operations

● RECALL operations

D LIBRARY LIST ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the operations that can be performed on

libraries.

● STORE / CLEAR operations

● RECALL operations

E FILE LOAD ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the types of ﬁle that can be loaded from

USB memory.

● USER SETUP (user-deﬁned keys and pref-

erence settings)

● SYSTEM SETUP / MONITOR SETUP

● CURRENT SCENE

● SCENE LIST

● LIBRARY LIST

F MONITOR ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the monitor setup operations that can be

performed.

● OSCILLATOR

● TALKBACK

G SYSTEM SETUP ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the system setup operations that can be

performed.

● MIXER SETUP

● OUTPUT SETUP

● MIDI

H SET ALL/CLEAR ALL buttons

These buttons set or clear all items in the window.

Specify the user level by turning-on the but-

ton for each item that will be permitted.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to close the popup

window.

1 2

54 73 6

•For the channel parameters included in PROCESSING,

refer to the appendix (

→

p. 256).

HINT

194

Preferences

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Settings related to the operating environment (such as whether or not certain messages are dis-

played, or whether key operations are linked) can be made according to the preferences of each

user. These settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the

Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the PREFERENCE

popup button, and press the [ENTER] key

to access the PREFERENCE popup win-

dow.

This page includes the following items.

1 CONFIRMATION ﬁeld

Here you can select whether conﬁrmation messages

will appear when you perform scene or patch opera-

tions.

● STORE

● RECALL

If these buttons are on, a conﬁrmation message

will appear when you perform a scene Store or

Recall operation respectively.

● PATCH

If this button is on, a conﬁrmation message will

appear when you edit an input patch or output

patch.

● STEAL PATCH

If this button is on, a conﬁrmation message will

appear when you edit an input patch or output

patch item that is already patched.

B ERROR MESSAGE ﬁeld

Here you can select whether an error message will be

displayed when the following problems occur.

● DIGITAL I/O

When an error is detected in the digital input/out-

put.

● MIDI I/O

When an error is detected in MIDI transmission/

reception.

C PANEL OPERATION ﬁeld

Here you can make settings for options related to

panel operation.

● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT—INPUT

● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT—OUTPUT

These specify whether the corresponding channel

will be selected when you operate a channel’s

[ON] key or fader. This can be turned on/off sep-

arately for INPUT (input channels) and OUT-

PUT (output channels).

● [CUE] → [SEL] LINK

Speciﬁes whether channel selection will be linked

with cue operations. If this button is on, pressing

the [CUE] key of a channel will simultaneously

select that channel and light its [SEL] key.

● [LAYER] → [SEL] LINK

Speciﬁes whether channel selection will be linked

with fader layer selection. If this button is on, and

you press a panel LAYER key to switch the fader

layer, the last-selected channel of that fader layer

will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.

Preferences

PREFERENCE popup button

• If you are logged in as Administrator, you can move the cursor

to the “for Guest” PREFERENCE popup button and press the

[ENTER] key to access the PREFERENCE popup window,

where you can view or change the guest’s preference set-

tings.

NOTE

1 32

195

Preferences

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING

KNOBS

Speciﬁes whether pressing a knob of the

SELECTED CHANNEL section when the

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is shown

will cause the popup window for that parameter to

appear.

If this button is on, a popup window will appear

(or close) whenever you press a knob.

● LIST ORDER

This speciﬁes the order in which scene memories

and library items will appear in the screen.

• NORMAL.............. Show the list in ascending

numerical order.

• REVERSE ............ Show the list in ascending

numerical order.

● STEREO / MONO LINK

This speciﬁes whether STEREO channel and

MONO channel on/off and fader operations will

be linked.

If you turn this button on, the STEREO channel

on/off setting will be copied to the MONO chan-

nel, and subsequently on/off operations will be

linked. Faders will be linked while preserving the

difference in level.

● METER FOLLOW LAYER

Speciﬁes whether the meter screen will be linked

with fader layer selection. If this button is on,

switching the fader layer will cause the meter

screen to switch to the corresponding fader layer,

regardless of which screen had been displayed.

Turn each button on or off to make the

desired preference settings.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to close the popup

window.

196

User-defined keys

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how you can assign the desired functions to the user deﬁned keys in the USER DEFINED

section of the top panel, and press these keys to execute the deﬁned function.

This assignment procedure will deﬁne the user-deﬁned keys for the user who is currently logged-

in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make user-deﬁned key settings for

the Guest account.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED

KEYS popup button, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will

appear.

The twelve buttons in the screen correspond to user-

deﬁned keys [1]–[12] on the panel, and the function or

parameter assigned to each one is shown at the right of

the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the

button, an indication of “----” is shown.

Move the cursor to the button for the user-

deﬁned key whose function you want to

assign, and press the [ENTER] key.

The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window

will appear. In this window you can select a function

to assign to the user deﬁned key, and select option

parameters.

Make sure that the FUNCTION ﬁeld is

enclosed by a yellow frame, and then use

the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys of the panel

to select the function you want to assign.

If the selected function has additional parameters, the

parameters are shown in the PARAMETER 1/2 ﬁelds.

For details on the assignable functions and their

parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to

user-deﬁned keys” (→ p. 257).

If the selected function has parameters,

move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 or 2

ﬁeld and select parameters 1 and 2 in the

same way.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key to close the USER

DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window.

Assign the desired functions to other user-

deﬁned keys in the same way.

To execute an assigned function, press the

corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[12] key

on the panel.

User-deﬁned keys

USER DEFINED KEYS popup button

197

Console lock

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This set-

ting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controls cannot be

operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a

break.

If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console

Lock function. If you power-cycle the console while it is locked, you will be asked to enter the

password if you had been logged-in as a user for whom a password is assigned. If you had been

logged-in as the Guest, the console will start up normally.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the CONSOLE LOCK

button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is

set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to

enter the password. For details on entering a password,

refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34).

Enter the password of the logged-in user,

move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Con-

sole Lock function will be enabled, and all controls

will become inoperable.

Console lock

• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the LS9’s internal memory” (

→

p. 222).

• The Guest cannot set a password.

•Even while the console is locked, control from an external device via MIDI or LS9 Editor will still operate as usual.

NOTE

Locking the console

CONSOLE LOCK button

• If an image ﬁle is loaded from USB memory, the CONSOLE

LOCK screen will show that image.

HINT

198

Console lock

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

When the CONSOLE LOCK screen is dis-

played, press the [ENTER] key.

If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is

set, the console will be unlocked. If you are logged-in

as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard win-

dow will appear, allowing you to enter the password.

Enter the password of the logged-in user,

move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The console will be unlocked, you will return to the

MISC SETUP screen, and the controls will be opera-

ble once again.

If an image ﬁle is saved in USB memory, the CONSOLE

LOCK screen can display that image.

In the SAVE/LOAD popup window, specify the image ﬁle

that you want to display and load it from USB memory.

For the procedure of loading from USB memory, refer to

“Loading a ﬁle from USB memory” (→ p. 200).

Unlocking the console

•You may disconnect the USB memory device while the con-

sole is locked. Insert the USB memory device before you

defeat Console Lock.

HINT

Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK

screen image

• The image ﬁle is not backed-up in internal memory. Each time you

turn on the power, you will need to reload it from USB memory.

• The image ﬁle will be converted into 320 x 240 pixels, 216 colors

for display.

• The image ﬁle is limited to 8/16/24/32-bit color, un-compressed,

and a maximum of 307,256 bytes.

NOTE

199

Using USB memory to save/load data

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains how you can connect commercially-available USB memory to the USB con-

nector located at the right side of the display, and use it to save or load data such as internal set-

tings for the LS9.

Here’s how all of the LS9’s internal data (except for the

data included in a user authentication key) can be saved on

USB memory as a ﬁle. The saved ﬁle will have an exten-

sion of “.L9A”.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.

If you want to move to a different directory,

move the cursor to the icon of the column

of the desired directory, and press the

[ENTER] key.

To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to

the arrow button in the PATH ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the SAVE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter

a ﬁle name and comment.

Enter a ﬁle name of up to eight characters

and a comment of up to 32 characters; then

move the cursor to the SAVE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

When the ﬁle has ﬁnished being saved, the popup win-

dow showing the save progress indication and the type

of data will close.

Using USB memory to save/load data

• Operation is guaranteed only with USB ﬂash memory.

• The operation of storage media with capacities of up to 16GB has been veriﬁed. (However, this does not necessarily

guarantee the operation of all USB storage media.) The FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. On the LS9

V1.10 or higher, storage media with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32 and storage media with a

capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16. Long ﬁle names are not supported.

NOTE

• The ACCESS indicator will appear in the constant display area of the screen while data is being accessed,

such as during saving, loading, or deleting. Do not disconnect the USB memory or power-off the LS9 while this

indicator is shown. Doing so may damage the data in USB memory.

CAUTION

Saving the LS9’s internal data on

USB memory

SAVE/LOAD button

SAVE button

200

Using USB memory to save/load data

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to load an LS9 settings ﬁle (extension .L9A)

from USB memory into the LS9.

You can use the same procedure to load the following ﬁles

other than the settings ﬁles.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.

If an image ﬁle is saved in USB memory, the CON-

SOLE LOCK screen can display that image (→

p. 198).

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list, and use the

dial on the panel to select the ﬁle you want

to load.

The highlighted line in the ﬁle list indicates the ﬁle

that is selected for operations.

When you move the cursor to the LOAD

button and press the [ENTER] key, a dialog

box will ask you to conﬁrm the operation.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key; loading will begin.

When the ﬁle has ﬁnished being loaded, the popup

window showing the progress indication and the type

of data will close.

Even if you cancel while the settings ﬁle is still being

loaded, the data up to that point will have been loaded.

The type of ﬁle that can be loaded will depend on the

User Level setting at the time you load the ﬁle.

Loading a ﬁle from USB memory

Extension Type Contents of ﬁle

.L9A ALL LS9 internal settings ﬁle

.L9U KEY LS9 user authentication key

.XML XML XML ﬁle for displaying help

.TXT TXT Text ﬁle for displaying help

.BMP BMP

Image ﬁle for display in the CONSOLE

LOCK screen

• Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW

screen, and use the [SEL] keys to select the INPUT channel

from which you want to take a direct output. Before you load,

turn off the power of the equipment connected to the LS9

and/or lower the volume so that there will not be a problem

even if a signal is output from the LS9.

CAUTION

SAVE/LOAD button

LOAD buttonFile list

201

Using USB memory to save/load data

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how you can perform editing operations such as

sorting the ﬁles and directories on USB memory, editing

the ﬁle names or comments, copying, or pasting.

● File editing

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the

saved ﬁles and sub-directories will be shown in a list.

1 COPY button

This button copies a ﬁle into buffer memory (a tempo-

rary holding area) (→ p. 203).

B PASTE button

This button pastes the ﬁle from buffer memory (→

p. 203).

C DELETE button

This button deletes the selected ﬁle (→ p. 203).

D MAKE DIR button

This button creates a new directory (→ p. 203).

E VOLUME NAME

This indicates the volume name of the USB memory.

If the USB memory is write-protected, a protect sym-

bol is shown in the VOLUME NAME ﬁeld.

F FREE SIZE

This indicates the amount of free space in the USB

memory.

G PATH

This shows the name of the current directory. You can

move the cursor to the arrow button and press the

[ENTER] key to move to the next upper level. If the

current directory is the top level, the arrow button is

dimmed.

H File list

This area lists the ﬁles that are saved on USB memory.

The highlighted line indicates the ﬁle selected for

operations.

The ﬁle list contains the following items. If you move

the cursor to the name of an item and press the

[ENTER] key, that item name will turn orange, and the

list will be sorted according to the character strings for

those items. Each time you press the [ENTER] key,

the sorting order will alternate between ascending and

descending order.

● FILE NAME

Indicates the ﬁle name or directory name, and

shows an icon indicating its type.

● READ ONLY

A lock symbol is shown to indicate protected ﬁles.

You can press this area to enable or disable the

protect setting.

● FILE TYPE

ALL indicates a ﬁle containing LS9 internal set-

tings, KEY indicates a user authentication key,

XML indicates a help ﬁle, BMP indicates a bitmap

image ﬁle, MP3 indicates an MP3 ﬁle, and [DIR]

indicates a directory.

● COMMENT

For LS9 ﬁles, the comment is displayed here.

When you move the cursor to this area and press

the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear,

allowing you to enter a comment for the ﬁle.

● TIME STAMP

This shows the date and time at which the ﬁle was

last modiﬁed.

Editing the ﬁles saved on USB mem-

ory

1 2 3 4 78 5 6

9JK L M

•You cannot save if the directory name would exceed 237

characters.

NOTE

•You can use the COMMENT/TIME STAMP button located at

the lower right of the ﬁle list to toggle the display between

COMMENT and TIME STAMP.

NOTE

202

Using USB memory to save/load data

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

I SAVE button

Saves all of the LS9’s internal settings together (→

p. 199).

J LOAD button

Loads the selected LS9 settings ﬁle (→ p. 200).

K CREATE USER KEY button

Creates a user authentication key (→ p. 192).

L FORMAT button

Formats the USB memory media (→ p. 204).

M COMMENT/TIME STAMP button

Toggles the item shown at the far right of the ﬁle list

between COMMENT and TIME STAMP.

Perform the desired editing operation.

For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations

that follow.

● Sorting ﬁles and editing ﬁle names/

comments

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

SAVE/LOAD popup window.

To sort the ﬁles, move the cursor to the

“FILE NAME,” lock symbol, “FILE TYPE,”

“COMMENT,” or “TIME STAMP” ﬁeld at the

top of the ﬁle list, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The list will be sorted as follows, according to the col-

umn title you selected.

1 FILE NAME

Sort the list in alphanumerical order of ﬁle name.

B Lock symbol

Sort the list according to Write Protect on/off status.

C FILE TYPE

Sort the list according to ﬁle type.

D COMMENT

Sort the list in alphanumeric order of the comment.

E TIME STAMP

Sort the list in order of date of creation.

If you want to edit the ﬁle name or com-

ment, move the cursor to the FILE NAME

ﬁeld or COMMENT ﬁeld of each ﬁle and

press the [ENTER] key to access the key-

board window.

For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a

name” (→ p. 34).

Enter a ﬁle name / comment, move the cur-

sor to the RENAME button or the SET but-

ton, and press the [ENTER] key.

To turn the Protect setting on/off, move the

cursor to the lock symbol for that ﬁle and

press the [ENTER] key.

A lock symbol is displayed for protected ﬁles; these

ﬁles cannot be overwritten.

1 2 3 4 5

• By pressing the [ENTER] key again, you can change the

direction (ascending or descending) in which the list is sorted.

HINT

• If the COMMENT ﬁeld is not displayed, use the COMMENT/

TIME STAMP button located at the lower right of the ﬁle list to

turn COMMENT on.

NOTE

•You cannot edit the ﬁle name or comment of a protected ﬁle.

NOTE

203

Using USB memory to save/load data

User settings (Security)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● Copying/pasting a ﬁle

Here’s how to copy a desired ﬁle into buffer memory, and

then paste it with a different ﬁle name.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

SAVE/LOAD popup window.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list, use the

panel dial to select the ﬁle that you want to

copy, move the cursor to the COPY button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The highlighted line in the ﬁle list indicates the ﬁle

that is selected for operations.

If you want to move to a different directory,

move the cursor to the icon of the column

of the desired directory, and press the

[ENTER] key.

To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to

the arrow button in the PATH ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the PASTE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter

the paste-destination ﬁle name.

For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a

name” (→ p. 34).

Enter the paste-destination ﬁle name, move

the cursor to the PASTE button, and press

the [ENTER] key.

If you speciﬁed an existing ﬁle name, a conﬁrmation

message will appear.

● Deleting a ﬁle

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

SAVE/LOAD popup window.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list, use the

panel dial to select the ﬁle that you want to

delete, move the cursor to the DELETE but-

ton, and press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Delete opera-

tion.

To execute the Delete operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

● Creating a directory

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

SAVE/LOAD popup window.

If you want to move to a different directory,

move the cursor to the icon of the column

of the desired directory, and press the

[ENTER] key.

To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to

the arrow button in the PATH ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

• If you attempt to paste using the ﬁle name of an existing copy-

protected ﬁle, the Paste operation will not be executed.

NOTE

•You can’t delete a protected ﬁle.

NOTE

204

Using USB memory to save/load data

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the MAKE DIR button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter

a directory name.

For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a

name” (→ p. 34).

Enter a name for the directory you want to

create, move the cursor to the MAKE but-

ton, and press the [ENTER] key.

If you speciﬁed an existing ﬁle name, a conﬁrmation

message will appear.

Here’s how to format USB memory media using the

FAT16 ﬁle system. USB memory up to 2 Gbytes in capac-

ity is supported.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

SAVE/LOAD popup window.

Move the cursor to the FORMAT button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter

the volume name that will be applied after formatting.

For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a

name” (→ p. 34).

Enter the volume name, move the cursor to

the FORMAT button, and press the [ENTER]

key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the Format oper-

ation.

To execute the Format operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Formatting will require several tens of seconds.

Formatting USB memory media

FORMAT button

205

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

Chapter 20

Other functions

This chapter explains other functionality of the LS9 not covered elsewhere.

In the SETUP screen you can make various settings that apply to the entire LS9. The SETUP

screen includes the following three screens. Repeatedly press the DISPLAY ACCESS section

[SETUP] key to access the desired screen.

● USER SETUP screen

In this screen you can restrict the functionality that is

available to each user, and make settings that affect the

operating environment. Here you can also save or load

user settings to or from USB memory, and create user

authentication keys.

● SYSTEM SETUP screen

In this screen you can make settings related to buses and

output ports, and settings related to word clock and cas-

cade connections.

1 BUS SETUP ﬁeld

Here you can make basic settings for MIX/MATRIX

buses (→ p. 213).

B OUTPUT PORT ﬁeld

In this ﬁeld you can assign an output channel to each out-

put port. For details, refer to chapter 9 “Selecting the out-

put channel for each output port” (→ p. 97).

C MIXER SETUP ﬁeld

Here you can make word clock settings (→ p. 206), slot

settings (→ p. 208), and cascade settings (→ p. 209).

About the SETUP screen

•For details on functions and operation in the USER SETUP

screen, refer to chapter 19 (

→

p. 187).

HINT

LS9-32

206

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

● MISC SETUP screen

In this screen you can make various other settings.

1 MIDI ﬁeld

Here you can make various MIDI-related settings. For

details, refer to chapter 18 (→ p. 177).

B DATE/TIME ﬁeld

Here you can specify the date and time (→ p. 215).

C NETWORK ﬁeld

Here you can make various network-related settings (→

p. 216).

D CONSOLE LOCK ﬁeld

This enables or disables Console Lock. For details, refer

to chapter 19 “Console lock” (→ p. 197).

E CPU/BATTERY ﬁeld

The ﬁrmware version and the state of the internal memory

backup battery are shown here. This will indicate OK if

operation is normal, or LOW or NO if the voltage is low.

F CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS ﬁeld

Here you can adjust the contrast and brightness of the dis-

play, the brightness of the top panel LEDs, and the bright-

ness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector (→

p. 217).

For details on the function and operations for each screen,

refer to the second half of this chapter or to the corre-

sponding other chapter.

“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing.

If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system or HDR (Hard Disk Recorder) to a dig-

ital I/O card installed in a rear panel slot, this equipment must be synchronized to the same word

clock in order for digital audio signals to be sent and received. If digital audio signals are trans-

ferred in an unsynchronized state, the data will not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise

may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.

Speciﬁcally, you must ﬁrst decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the

entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock

slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master. If you wish to use the LS9 as a word

clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must

specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which the word clock is obtained).

The following steps show how to select the clock source that the LS9 will use.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYS-

TEM SETUP screen.

1 MIXER SETUP ﬁeld

B WORD CLOCK button

Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK but-

ton of the MIXER SETUP ﬁeld in the lower

part of the screen, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear,

allowing you to make word clock settings.

This popup window contains the following items.

LS9-32

5 6

• The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. If

this occurs, immediately save your data on a USB memory and

contact your Yamaha dealer.

NOTE

Word clock settings

LS9-32

About the SETUP screen • Word clock settings

207

Word clock settings

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

1 Clock frequency

This indicates the frequency of the currently selected

clock source. This ﬁeld will indicate “UNLOCKED”

while synchronization is lost, such as immediately

after switching the master clock.

B Clock select buttons

These buttons select the master clock source. You can

choose from the internal clock, the word clock signal

supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN connector, or

the word clock data included in the input signal from

an I/O card in a slot.

C Card type {Card type / Slot number}

This area shows the type of I/O card installed in the

slot. {On the LS9-32, this area shows the slot number

and the type of I/O card.}

Use the clock select buttons to select a

clock source.

You can choose one of the following clock sources.

● INT 48 k

● INT 44.1 k

The LS9’s internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or

44.1 kHz, respectively) will be the clock source.

Choose one of these if you want to use the LS9 as the

word clock master.

● WORD CLOCK IN

The word clock signal supplied from the rear panel

WORD CLOCK IN jack will be used as the clock

source. In this case, the LS9 will operate as a word

clock slave.

● SLOT {SLOT 1/2}

The clock data included in the digital audio input sig-

nal from a digital I/O card in the slot {slots 1/2} will

be used as the clock source. (Select this in two-chan-

nel units.) In this case, the LS9 will operate as a word

clock slave.

The status (operating state) of the clock data being

received from each port is indicated by the color of the

symbol displayed immediately above. Each color has

the following signiﬁcance.

● LOCK (light blue)

This indicates that a clock synchronized with the

selected source is being input. If an external device is

connected to the corresponding connector or slot,

input/output is occurring normally between that device

and the LS9. If the sampling frequency is close, this

status may be displayed even if not synchronized.

● LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)

A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized

with the selected clock source. If an external device is

connected to the corresponding connector, input/out-

put cannot occur correctly between that device and the

LS9.

● SRC ON (green)

This is a special status that is unique to a digital I/O

card with SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) functional-

ity installed in the slot {slots 1/2}; it indicates that

SRC is enabled for the corresponding channel. If this

status is displayed, normal input/output with the LS9

is occurring even if the signal is not synchronized.

● UNLOCK (red)

A valid clock is not being input. If an external device

is connected to the corresponding connector, input/

output cannot occur correctly between that device and

the LS9.

● UNKNOWN (black)

This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected

because no external device is connected or because

there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select

this connector/slot, but successful synchronization

cannot occur until a valid connection is established.

If the symbol for the port selected in step 3 has turned

light blue, and the clock frequency is shown in the

upper left of the window, this indicates that the LS9 is

operating correctly with the new clock.

To close the WORD CLOCK popup window,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right) and press

the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen.

LS9-32

• If you use a digital I/O card that contains a sampling rate con-

verter (e.g., MY8-AE96S), input and output can occur nor-

mally with the LS9 even when unsynchronized. In this case,

turn on the SRC button for the slot/channel that is receiving

the signal (

→

p. 208).

HINT

• If the symbol for the selected clock does not turn light blue,

make sure that the external device is correctly connected,

and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.

• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock set-

ting is changed. In order to protect your speaker system, be

sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the

word clock setting.

• If you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the

word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that

the sampling rate converter will be disabled.

NOTE

208

Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If a digital I/O card with SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) functionality (such as the MY8-AE96S)

is installed in the slot {slot 1/2}, you can use the SLOT SETUP popup window to turn the card’s

SRC on/off. In this window you can also check the operating status of the I/O card(s) installed in

the slot(s).

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYS-

TEM SETUP screen.

1 SLOT SETUP button

Move the cursor to the SLOT SETUP button

of the MIXER SETUP ﬁeld in the lower part

of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The SLOT SETUP popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to make slot-related settings. This popup win-

dow contains the following items.

1 Card type {Card type / Slot number}

This area shows the type of I/O card installed in the

slot. {On the LS9-32, this area shows the slot number

and the type of I/O card in each slot.}

B FREQ (Frequency)

This indicates the sampling frequency of the signal

being input to each channel of an MY8-AE96 or

MY8-AE96S digital I/O card, in sets of two channels.

C SRC buttons

For digital I/O cards that contain a built-in SRC (Sam-

pling Rate Converter), the SCR can be switched on/off

in groups of two channels.

D EMPHASIS

This area indicates whether emphasis processing is

applied to the input signals of a slot in which an AES/

EBU format digital I/O card is installed, in units of

two channels.

This indication is displayed as follows.

To turn on the SRC that is built-into the dig-

ital I/O card, move the cursor to the corre-

sponding SRC button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The SRC can be turned on/off in units of two channels.

For channels whose SRC is turned on, input/output

can occur correctly even if the input signal is not syn-

chronized with the LS9’s clock source.

To close the WORD CLOCK popup window,

move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or

the × symbol in the upper right) and press

the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen.

Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off

LS9-32

Item Description

----

No signal, or a signal without emphasis is being

input

A valid digital audio signal is being input, and

emphasis is turned On for that signal

OFF

A valid digital audio signal is being input, and

emphasis is turned Off for that signal

209

Using cascade connections

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

By cascade-connecting two or more LS9 consoles or an LS9 with an external mixer (such as the

Ya maha M7CL) you can share the buses. For example this is convenient when you want to use

an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.

If you are cascading two LS9 consoles, you can use the “Cascade Link” function to link cue oper-

ations, scene recall/store operations, and fader layer selections. In this case, you can operate the

two LS9 consoles as if they were a single mixer.

Here we will explain cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two LS9

consoles are cascade-connected.

To cascade two LS9 consoles, you will install digital I/O

cards in their respective slots, and connect the output ports

of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of

the receiving unit (the cascade master).

The following illustration shows an example in which one

sixteen-channel digital I/O card for each console are

installed in the cascade slave LS9 and in the cascade mas-

ter LS9, and the DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit

connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.

In this example, up to sixteen buses chosen from MIX

buses 1–16, MATRIX buses 1–8, STEREO bus (L/R),

MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and

the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master

LS9. {If you’re cascade-connecting two LS9-32 consoles,

you will be able to share all buses if you install two 16-

channel digital I/O cards in each LS9-32 console.}

Control signals for the Cascade Link function are trans-

mitted and received via the MIDI IN/OUT connectors. In

this type of setup, performing a cue operation, scene

recall/store operation, or fader layer selection on either

console will cause the same to occur on the other console.

When using a cascade connection, you must specify the

slot(s)/channels on each LS9 console that will send and

receive audio signals. Similarly, in order to use the Cas-

cade Link function, you must specify the port that will

transmit and receive control signals, and specify the

parameters and events that will be linked. The following

pages explain the required settings for cascade connection

and the method of operation, separately for the cascade

slave and the cascade master.

Using cascade connections

Audio signals of

unit A

Audio signals of

A + B

Digital I/O

card

Digital I/O

card

Digital audio signal

LS9 A

(Cascade slave)

LS9 B

(Cascade master)

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

Control signals for cascade link

•You can also cascade-connect the LS9 with digital mixers that

have a Mini-YGDAI slot, such as the Yamaha M7CL or PM5D.

However, this only allows you to cascade the audio signals; linking

via control signals is not possible.

•You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections

with an analog mixer.

• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-con-

nected, but the signal delay from each cascade-slave will increase

according to the number of units between it and the cascade-mas-

ter.

HINT

210

Using cascade connections

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYS-

TEM SETUP screen.

1 CASCADE OUT button

In the MIXER SETUP ﬁeld located at the

lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen,

move the cursor to the CASCADE OUT but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

The CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window will

appear. This window contains the following items.

1 Port select popup buttons

These buttons access an OUTPUT PORT SELECT

popup window where you can select the output port

for each bus.

B CASCADE LINK PORT ﬁeld

When using the Cascade Link function, this speciﬁes

the port by which control signals will be transmitted

and received between the two LS9 consoles.

C CASCADE COMM LINK ﬁeld

Here you can select the parameters and events that will

be linked by the Cascade Link function.

Move the cursor to the port select popup

button for the bus whose port you want to

assign, and press the [ENTER] key.

The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear.

[ OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for

the LS9-32 ]

[ OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for

the LS9-16 ]

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Port select buttons

These buttons select the output port for the selected

bus.

B Slot select tabs (LS9-32 only)

These tabs select slots 1/2.

Use the port select buttons {slot select tabs

and port select buttons} to select an output

port, move the cursor to the CLOSE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The port will be assigned to the bus you selected in

step 3.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign output ports

to other buses.

Operations on the cascade slave

LS9

LS9-32

•You can’t assign two or more buses to the same output port. If

you select a bus to which a signal route has already been

assigned, the previous assignment will be cancelled.

NOTE

211

Using cascade connections

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

If you want to use the Cascade Link func-

tion to link parameters and events between

two LS9 consoles, proceed as follows.

1 Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT

ﬁeld, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the port that will transmit/receive control

signals for cascade link.

You can choose from the following items.

B Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK

ﬁeld, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select the item you want to link.

You can choose from the following items.

● OFF

Linking will not occur.

● CUE

The following cue-related parameters and events

will be linked.

• Cue enable/disable

• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE)

• Cue point settings for input channels and out-

put channels

● ALL

All linkable parameters and events (including cue-

related parameters) will be linked.

• Cue-related parameters and events (see above)

• Scene recall operations

• Scene store operations

• DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations

• Switching the fader layer

•Panel LED and display brightness (MISC

SETUP screen) operations

• Master mute group operations

To close the OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup

window, move the cursor to the CLOSE but-

ton (or the × symbol in the upper right) and

press the [ENTER] key.

LS9-16

Item Description

---- No port will be used.

MIDI Rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors

SLOT-1–

SLOT-8

Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting

serial communication, installed in the rear panel

slot

LS9-32

Item Description

---- No port will be used.

MIDI Rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors

SLOT1-1–

SLOT1-8

Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting

serial communication, installed in rear panel slot

SLOT2-1–

SLOT2-8

Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting

serial communication, installed in rear panel slot

• Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot

share the same port. If you select a port that is already speci-

ﬁed for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog

box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.

NOTE

212

Using cascade connections

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYS-

TEM SETUP screen.

In the MIXER SETUP ﬁeld located at the

lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen,

move the cursor to the CASCADE IN button

and press the [ENTER] key to access the

CASCADE IN PATCH popup window.

The CASCADE IN PATCH popup window contains

the following items.

1 Port select popup buttons

These buttons access the INPUT PORT SELECT

popup window, where you can select the input port

whose signal will be added to the bus.

B CASCADE LINK PORT ﬁeld

Here you can select the port that will transmit and

receive control signals when using the Cascade Link

function to link speciﬁc operations and parameter

changes between two LS9 consoles.

C CASCADE COMM LINK ﬁeld

Here you can select the parameters and events that will

be linked by the Cascade Link function.

Move the cursor to the port select popup

button for the bus whose port you want to

assign, and press the [ENTER] key.

The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will

appear.

This popup window contains the following items.

[ INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for

the LS9-32 ]

[ INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for

the LS9-16 ]

This popup window contains the following items.

1 Port select buttons

Here you can select the input port whose signal will be

added to the selected bus.

B Slot select tabs (LS9-32 only)

These tabs select slots 1/2.

Use the port select buttons {slot select tabs

and port select buttons} to select an input

port, move the cursor to the CLOSE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The input port will be assigned to the bus you selected

in step 3. The signal input from this port will be mixed

with the signal of the corresponding bus inside the cas-

cade master.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign input ports

to other buses.

Operations on the cascade master

LS9

•You can’t assign the same input port to two or more buses. If

you select a bus to which a signal route has already been

assigned, the previous assignment will be cancelled.

NOTE

213

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

If you want to link speciﬁc parameters or

events between two LS9 consoles, proceed

as follows.

1 Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT

ﬁeld, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

specify the port that will transmit/receive control

signals for cascade link.

The items you can select are the same as in the

CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window (→

p. 211).

B Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK

ﬁeld, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

specify the item(s) you want to link, so that they

match the settings of the cascade slave. The items

you can select are the same as in the CASCADE

OUT PATCH popup window (→ p. 211).

To close the INPUT PORT SELECT popup

window, move the cursor to the CLOSE but-

ton (or the × symbol in the upper right) and

press the [ENTER] key.

In this state, the bus signals of the cascade slave will

be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master,

and the combined signals of both buses will be output

from the cascade master. If the Cascade Link function

is enabled, the speciﬁed operations or parameter

changes performed on either LS9 console will be fol-

lowed by the other LS9 console.

This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such

as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the position from which the signal is

sent from an input channel.

The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYS-

TEM SETUP screen.

1 BUS SETUP ﬁeld

B MIX button

C MATRIX button

To make MIX bus settings, move the cursor

to the MIX button of the BUS SETUP ﬁeld

and press the [ENTER] key.

The MIX BUS SETUP popup window will appear.

1 SIGNAL TYPE (Signal processing method)

This selects whether two adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered MIX buses will be used as stereo

channels whose main parameters are linked (STE-

REO) or as two monaural channels (MONO × 2).

• Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot

share the same port. If you select a port that is already speci-

ﬁed for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog

box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.

NOTE

Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses

LS9-32

1 2 3

Using cascade connections • Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses

214

Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

B BUS TYPE / PRE FADER SEND POINT

For two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered

buses, this selects the position from which the signal

will be sent from the input channel. You can also

switch the MIX bus type (VARI or FIXED) here.

C PAN LINK

This speciﬁes whether the panning at which the signal

is sent from an input channel to the stereo bus will be

linked with the TO ST PAN setting.

Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE ﬁeld to

specify for each two adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered MIX buses whether

they will function as STEREO (main param-

eters linked for the two MIX channels) or

MONO × 2 (used as two monaural chan-

nels).

Use the buttons of the BUS TYPE / SEND

POINT ﬁeld to select the position from

which the signal of the input channel will be

sent.

In this ﬁeld you can switch the MIX bus type (VARI or

FIXED). The following items can be selected for each

bus.

● VARI PRE EQ

The MIX bus will be a VARI type (adjustable send

level). Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as

an external effect send or as a foldback output. If the

MIX send point of the input channel is set to PRE, the

signal will be sent from immediately before the EQ

(attenuator).

● VARI PRE FADER

The MIX bus will be a VARI type. Choose this if you

want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or

as a foldback output. If the MIX send point of the

input channel is set to PRE, the signal will be sent

from immediately before the fader.

● FIXED

The MIX bus will be a FIXED type (send level is ﬁxed

at nominal level = 0.0 dB).

Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as a group

output or as a bus output for recording on a multitrack

recorder. If the bus is set to MONO, the signal will be

sent from immediately before the pan/balance of the

input channel; if the bus is set to STEREO, the signal

will be sent from immediately after the pan/balance.

As desired, turn the buttons of the PAN

LINK ﬁeld on/off.

For two MIX buses whose SIGNAL TYPE = STE-

REO and BUS TYPE = VARI, the PAN LINK button

is displayed in this position.

This button speciﬁes whether the panning at which the

signal is sent from an input channel to the stereo MIX

bus will be linked with the TO ST PAN setting.

● If the PAN LINK button is on

The PAN knob that appears in the location of the TO

MIX SEND LEVEL knob of the input channel’s

SELECTED CH VIEW screen when the send-destina-

tion MIX bus is stereo will be linked with the TO ST

PAN (BAL) knob.

● If the PAN LINK button is off

The PAN (BALANCE) knob displayed in the position

of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob in the input chan-

nel SELECTED CH VIEW screen can be operated

independently of the TO ST PAN (BAL) knob.

To close the popup window and return to

the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cur-

sor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in

the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key.

To make basic settings for MATRIX buses,

move the cursor to the MATRIX button of

the BUS SETUP ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

The MATRIX BUS SETUP popup window will

appear.

1 SIGNAL TYPE (Signal processing method)

This selects whether two adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered MATRIX buses will be used as stereo

channels whose main parameters are linked (STE-

REO) or as two monaural channels (MONO × 2).

Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE ﬁeld to

specify for each two adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered MATRIX buses

whether they will function as STEREO

(main parameters linked for the two MATRIX

channels) or MONO × 2 (used as two mon-

aural channels).

To close the popup window and return to

the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cur-

sor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in

the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key.

•Even if you select VARI PRE EQ or VARI PRE FADER, input

channels whose MIX send position is set to POST will send

the post-fader signal to the MIX bus.

NOTE

• The PAN LINK button is not displayed for MIX buses whose

SIGNAL TYPE is set to MONO × 2, or MIX buses whose BUS

TYPE is set to FIXED.

NOTE

215

Setting the date and time of the internal clock

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

This section explains how to set the date and time of the clock built into the LS9, and how to view

the date and time. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when sav-

ing a scene.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key to access the MISC SETUP

screen.

1 DATE/TIME ﬁeld

This indicates the currently speciﬁed date and time.

B DATE/TIME SET popup button

This button accesses the DATE/TIME popup window,

where you can set the date and time.

Move the cursor to the DATE/TIME SET

popup button in the DATE/TIME ﬁeld, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The DATE/TIME popup window will appear.

1 DATE ﬁeld

Speciﬁes the date of the internal clock.

B DATE MODE button

Speciﬁes the format in which the date will be dis-

played.

C TIME ﬁeld

Speciﬁes the time of the internal clock.

D TIME MODE button

Speciﬁes the format in which the time will be dis-

played.

Move the cursor to the DATE MODE button

and press the [ENTER] key to select the

date format.

You can select from the following formats.

• MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)

• DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)

• YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)

Move the cursor to each ﬁeld of the DATE

ﬁeld, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to specify the date.

Move the cursor to the TIME MODE button

and press the [ENTER] key to select the

time format.

You can select from the following formats.

• 24Hours (hours shown in a range of 0–23)

• 12Hours (hours shown from AM 0–AM 11 and

PM 0–PM 11)

Move the cursor to each ﬁeld of the TIME

ﬁeld, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to specify the time.

When you have ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The date, time, and display format you speciﬁed will

be ﬁnalized, and the popup window will close. If you

select the CANCEL button or the × symbol instead of

the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the

popup window will close.

Setting the date and time of the internal clock

1 2

LS9-32

1 3

2 4

216

Setting the network address

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to set the network address that will be required when you use the LS9’s NETWORK

connector to connect it to a Windows computer.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC

SETUP screen.

1 NETWORK ﬁeld

This shows the values of network-related parameters.

B NETWORK SET button

This accesses the NETWORK popup window, where

you can make network-related settings.

C MAC ADDRESS ﬁeld

This is the MAC (Machine Access Control) address

speciﬁed for identifying a host within a network. This

ﬁeld is only for display, and cannot be edited.

Move the cursor to the NETWORK SET but-

ton in the NETWORK ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] key to access the NETWORK

popup window.

1 IP ADDRESS ﬁeld

This is a number (IP address) assigned to identify each

device on the Internet or within an LAN (Local Area

Network).

B GATEWAY ADDRESS ﬁeld

This speciﬁes the number (gateway address) that iden-

tiﬁes a device (gateway) that allows data of differing

media or protocol to be exchanged within a network to

allow communication.

C SUBNET MASK ﬁeld

This deﬁnes the number of bits (of the IP address used

within the network) that will be used as the network

address that distinguishes the network.

D LINK MODE ﬁeld

Select either 100BASE-TX (transmission speed: max-

imum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed:

max 10 Mbps) as the speciﬁcation used for communi-

cation via the NETWORK connector.

Move the cursor to the LINK MODE ﬁeld,

and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to

select a communication protocol for the

NETWORK connector as appropriate for the

network to which the LS9 is connected.

Move the cursor to each remaining ﬁeld in

the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/

[INC] keys to specify each address.

If you are connecting the LS9 to your computer in a

one-to-one connection, we recommend that you make

the following initial settings.

● IP address

192.168.0.128 or similar (it must not conﬂict with the

IP address of any other device on the network)

● Gateway address

192.168.0.1 or similar (it must not conﬂict with the IP

address of any other device on the network)

● Subnet mask

255.255.255.0 or similar

Setting the network address

• The network address can be changed only by users who have administrative privileges.

•For details on network settings, refer to the LS9 Editor installation guide which can be downloaded from the following Yamaha website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

NOTE

LS9-32

1 3

2 4

• Be aware that if the speciﬁcation does not match, communi-

cation will not occur correctly.

NOTE

217

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

When you have ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The changes will be ﬁnalized, and the popup window

will close.

If you select the CANCEL button or the × symbol

instead of the OK button, your changes will be dis-

carded and the popup window will close.

Here you can specify the contrast and brightness of the display, the brightness of the top panel

LEDs, and the brightness of the lamp connected to the rear panel LAMP connector.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key to access the MISC SETUP

screen.

1 CONTRAST ﬁeld

B BRIGHTNESS ﬁeld

Move the cursor to a knob of the CON-

TRAST/BRIGHTNESS ﬁeld, and use the dial

or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to set the following

parameters.

● CONTRAST ﬁeld

• SCREEN knob

........ Speciﬁes the contrast of the display

backlight.

● BRIGHTNESS ﬁeld

• SCREEN knob

........ Speciﬁes the brightness of the display

backlight.

•PANEL knob

........ Adjusts the brightness of the top panel

LEDs. If a Yamaha AD8HR is connected

to an I/O card that provides a REMOTE

connector, the brightness of the

AD8HR’s LEDs will also change.

• LAMP knob (LS9-32 only)

........ Adjusts the brightness of the lamp con-

nected to the rear panel LAMP jack.

Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display, LEDs,

and lamps

LS9-32

1 2

•You can also adjust the contrast by holding down the [HOME]

key and turning the dial.

HINT

Setting the network address • Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display, LEDs, and lamps

218

Using the Help function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

You can view Help ﬁles provided by Yamaha, or display any desired text ﬁle created by the user.

*We accept no responsibility for any damages that may result from the use of Help ﬁles created by a third

party other than Yamaha.

The help ﬁle is not backed up in internal memory. Each

time you turn on the power, you must reload it from your

USB memory. It is convenient to save your help ﬁle on the

USB memory that contains your user authentication key.

Before you proceed, save the Help ﬁle

(extension .xml) provided by Yamaha on

your USB memory. You can download the

most recent version of the Help ﬁle from the

Yamaha website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list, and use the

dial on the panel to select the help ﬁle you

want to load.

Move the cursor to the LOAD button and

press the [ENTER] key, and a conﬁrmation

dialog box will appear.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key to begin loading the ﬁle.

Using the Help function

Loading a Help ﬁle from a USB mem-

ory

SAVE/LOAD button

219

Using the Help function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

Using a commercially available text editor

or the “Notepad” included with the

Microsoft Windows series, create a text ﬁle

(extension .txt) and save it on your USB

memory.

By default, the character code set of the text ﬁle will

be detected as UTF-8. However by adding a line con-

sisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning

of the ﬁle, you can force recognition of the ﬁle using

that character code set. You can specify the desired

character code set when using your text editor to save

the text ﬁle. The Help function is able to display the

following text ﬁles (character code sets / languages).

•Text ﬁles written in the ISO-8859-1 character code

set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)

•Text ﬁles written in the Shift_JIS character code set

(Japanese)

•Text ﬁles of the above languages written in the

UTF-8 character code set.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list, and use the

dial on the panel to select the text ﬁle you

want to load.

Move the cursor to the LOAD button and

press the [ENTER] key, and a conﬁrmation

dialog box will appear.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key to begin loading the ﬁle.

Before you proceed, load the Help ﬁle from

your USB memory.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER

SETUP screen.

Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED

KEYS popup button, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will

appear.

Move the cursor to the button for the user-

deﬁned key whose function you want to

assign, and press the [ENTER] key.

Loading a text ﬁle from a USB mem-

ory

Assigning the Help function to a

user-deﬁned key

USER DEFINED KEYS popup button

220

Using the Help function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Use the panel dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys

to select “HELP.” Move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key to close

the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup win-

dow.

Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and

press the [ENTER] key to close the USER

DEFINED KEY popup window.

Before you proceed, load the help ﬁle or

text ﬁle from your USB memory.

Press the user-deﬁned key to which the

Help function is assigned; the HELP popup

window will appear.

Move the cursor to the desired section, and

use the panel dial to scroll the contents.

Links in the selected text will be high-

lighted.

Select a link (underlined portion) in the doc-

ument, and press the [ENTER] key to jump

to the link destination. By selecting a text

link in INDEX mode and pressing the

“ENTER” key, you can switch to CON-

TENTS mode and scroll to the correspond-

ing section.

Move the cursor a window link and press the

[ENTER] key (a location with an symbol and

underlined text), you can close the HELP window and

open the corresponding window.

To return from CONTENTS mode to INDEX

mode, move the cursor to the INDEX button

and press the [ENTER] key.

As necessary, you can also scroll by using

the buttons in the tool bar.

● < INDEX button

Jumps to the table of contents.

If the cursor is at the table of contents, you can use the

panel cursor key as an alternative.

● CONTENTS > button

Jumps to the content (article).

If the cursor is at the table of contents, you can use the

panel cursor key as an alternative.

● button

Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-dis-

played location.

● button

Returns to the previous link in the link history.

If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an

article, you can use the panel [DEC] key as an alterna-

tive.

● button

Proceeds to the next link in the link history.

If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an

article, you can use the panel [INC] key as an alterna-

tive.

To close the window, once again press the

user-deﬁned key to which the Help function

is assigned.

Viewing Help

INDEX mode

CONTENTS mode

221

Using the Help function

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

■ Directly recalling the Help for a speciﬁc

panel controller • • • • • • • • • • •

While holding down the user-deﬁned key to

which you’ve assigned the Help function,

press (or turn) the panel controller whose

function you want to learn about.

Panel controllers (other than the faders) will not func-

tion as long as you continue holding down the user-

deﬁned key to which the Help function is assigned.

If the corresponding controller has an

explanation associated with it, the HELP

popup window will appear, and you will

automatically scroll to the corresponding

item.

If there are multiple explanations for the same control-

ler, you can repeat step 1 to successively display these

explanations.

To close the window, once again press the

user-deﬁned key to which the Help function

is assigned.

■ Directly recalling the Help for a speciﬁc

controller in the LCD screen • • • • •

While holding down the user-deﬁned key to

which you’ve assigned the Help function,

move the cursor to the on-screen controller

whose function you want to read and press

the [ENTER] key.

The on-screen buttons and tabs will not function as

long as you continue holding down the user-deﬁned

key to which the Help function is assigned.

If there is a corresponding Help item, the

HELP popup window will appear and you

will automatically scroll to the correspond-

ing item.

If there are multiple explanations for the same control-

ler, close the HELP popup window and then repeat

step 1 to successively view these explanations.

To close the window, once again press the

user-deﬁned key to which the Help function

is assigned.

222

Initializing the LS9’s internal memory

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If an error occurs in the LS9’s internal memory, or if you have forgotten the password, you can

use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.

While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY]

key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn

on the power.

After the opening screen, the following startup menu

screen will appear.

1 MODE SELECT ﬁeld

B INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button

C INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button

According to the desired type of initializa-

tion, move the cursor to one of the buttons

in the MODE SELECT ﬁeld, and press the

[ENTER] key.

● INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button

The entire memory including scene memories and

libraries will be returned to their factory-set condition.

● INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button

The contents of memory except for scene memories

and libraries will be returned to its factory-set condi-

tion.

To execute the Initialize operation, move the

cursor to the INITIALIZE button located in

the dialog box at the left side of the screen,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the operation.

Move the cursor to the OK button of the

dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.

Initialization will begin.

When initialization has been completed,

move the cursor to the EXIT button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The console will start up in normal operating mode.

Initializing the LS9’s internal memory

• The entire contents of memory will be lost if you initialize the internal memory. Proceed with the following

operation only if you are very sure you want to do this.

CAUTION

• Do not press any key until initialization has been completed.

NOTE

• If the backup battery voltage is low, or if an error occurs in the

internal memory, a warning dialog box will appear, and then

the initialization menu will appear. If the warning dialog box

appears, and you select the EXIT button to start up in normal

operating mode, Yamaha cannot guarantee that the unit will

operate correctly.

NOTE

• Instead of using the EXIT button, you can also select a differ-

ent button of the MODE SELECT ﬁeld.

HINT

223

Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Other functions

Depending on the environment in which you use the console, discrepancies may occur in the

motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies.

While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY]

key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn

on the power.

After the opening screen, the following startup menu

screen will appear.

1 FADER CALIBRATION button

Move the cursor to the FADER CALIBRA-

TION button and press the [ENTER] key.

The FADER CALIBRATION MODE popup window

will appear, where you can adjust the faders.

Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select the

fader for which you want to perform calibra-

tion.

Fader calibration is performed semi-automatically for

the faders you specify using their [SEL] keys. Each

fader selected by its [SEL] key is shown in red in the

popup window.

Move the cursor to the START button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A dialog box will ask you to conﬁrm the operation.

Move the cursor to the OK button of the

dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.

Each of the speciﬁed faders will move to the target

positions in the following sequence.

1 -∞ (push down to the minimum value)

B -20 dB

C 0 dB

D +10 dB (push up to the maximum value)

If there are any faders that are not in the

positions shown in the screen, manually

move them to the appropriate position.

When you have set all faders to the target

location, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The process will proceed to the next fader position.

Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust the faders for

positions 1 through 4.

When you have ﬁnished the calibration pro-

cess and the APPLY button has appeared,

move the cursor to the APPLY button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The calibration settings will be saved in internal mem-

ory.

Move the cursor to the EXIT button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The console will start up in normal operating mode.

Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)

• This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the

fader settings while the LS9 is started up.

HINT

• If the RESTART button appears when calibration ends, cali-

bration has failed. Move the cursor to the RESTART button

and press the [ENTER] key to execute calibration once again.

NOTE

• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu

instead of using the EXIT button.

HINT

224

Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function)

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

If necessary, you can make ﬁne adjustments to the input/output gain.

While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY]

key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn

on the power.

After the opening screen, the following startup menu

screen will appear.

1 INPUT PORT TRIM button

B OUTPUT PORT TRIM button

C SLOT OUTPUT TRIM button

In the MODE SELECT ﬁeld, move the cursor

to one of the following buttons to select the

target you want to adjust, and press the

[ENTER] key.

● INPUT PORT TRIM (ﬁne adjustment of the ana-

log input gain) button

This makes ﬁne adjustments in 0.1 dB steps to the gain

of the speciﬁed analog input port. When you press this

button, the screen will change as follows.

● OUTPUT PORT TRIM (ﬁne adjustment of the

output ports) button

This makes ﬁne adjustments in 0.01 dB steps to the

gain of the speciﬁed output port. When you press this

button, the screen will change as follows.

● SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (ﬁne adjustment of the

output ports) button

This makes ﬁne adjustments in 0.01 dB steps to the

output port gain of the speciﬁed slot. When you press

this button, the screen will change as follows.

Move the cursor to the desired knob in the

screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]

keys to adjust the value.

If you move the cursor to the RESET ALL button in

the screen, and press the [ENTER] key, all knobs in

that screen will be reset to 0 dB (the factory-set default

value).

When you have ﬁnished making adjust-

ments, move the cursor to the EXIT button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The console will start up in normal operating mode.

Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function)

LS9-32

• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu

instead of using the EXIT button.

HINT

Appendices

225

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

EQ Library List

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

01 Bass Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 1.25 10.0 0.90 —

02 Bass Drum 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF

G +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON

F 80.0 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 —

03 Snare Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB

F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz

Q 1.25 4.5 0.11 —

04 Snare Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q — 10.0 0.70 0.10

05 Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB

F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz

Q 1.4 10.0 1.25 0.28

06 Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz

Q — 8.0 0.90 —

07 High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB

F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q — 0.50 1.0 —

08 Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q — 4.5 0.56 —

09 E. Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q — 5.0 4.5 —

10 E. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB

F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q 0.10 5.0 6.3 —

11 Syn. Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 0.10 8.0 4.5 —

12 Syn. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.6 8.0 2.2 —

13 Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q — 8.0 0.90 —

14 Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 5.6 10.0 0.70 —

15 E. G. Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 0.18 10.0 6.3 —

16 E. G. Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0

17 E. G. Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz

Q 8.0 0.40 0.16 —

18 E. G. Dist. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q — 9.0 10.0 —

19 E. G. Dist. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q — 10.0 4.0 —

20 A. G. Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 0.90 4.5 3.5 —

21 A. G. Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz

Q — 9.0 4.5 —

22 A. G. Arpeg. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q — 4.5 4.5 0.125

23 A. G. Arpeg. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz

Q — 7.0 4.5 —

24 Brass Sec.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0

25 Male Vocal 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB

F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

26 Male Vocal 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 10.0 5.6 —

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

EQ Library List

226

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

27 Female Vo. 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB

F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz

Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

28 Female Vo. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q — 0.16 0.20 —

Chorus &

Harmo

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0

30 Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB

F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz

Q 7.0 2.2 5.6 —

31 Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB

F 95.0 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz

Q 7.0 2.8 5.6 —

32 Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 67.0 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz

Q — 0.28 0.70 —

33 Bass Drum 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz

Q 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40

34 Snare Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q — 4.5 2.8 0.10

35 Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q — 4.5 1.25 —

36 Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q 8.0 10.0 9.0 —

37 Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 —

38 Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10

39 Fine-EQ Cass

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q — 4.5 1.8 —

40 Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q 4.0 7.0 0.63 —

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

DYNAMICS Library List

227

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

DYNAMICS Library List

# Title Type Parameter Value

1 Gate GATE

Threshold (dB) –26

Range (dB) –56

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 2.56

Decay (ms) 331

2 Ducking DUCKING

Threshold (dB) –19

Range (dB) –22

Attack (ms) 93

Hold (ms) 1.20 S

Decay (ms) 6.32 S

3 A. Dr. BD GATE

Threshold (dB) –11

Range (dB) –53

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 1.93

Decay (ms) 400

4 A. Dr. SN GATE

Threshold (dB) –8

Range (dB) –23

Attack (ms) 1

Hold (ms) 0.63

Decay (ms) 238

5 De-Esser DE-ESSER

Threshold (dB) –8

Frequency (kHz) 2.00

6 Comp COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 30

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 250

7 Expand EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 70

8 Compander (H) COMPANDER-H

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 6

Release (ms) 250

9 Compander (S) COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

10 A. Dr. BD COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 5.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 58

11 A. Dr. BD COMPANDER-H

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –1.5

Width (dB) 7

Release (ms) 192

12 A. Dr. SN COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 12

13 A. Dr. SN EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 151

14 A. Dr. SN COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 10

Release (ms) 128

15 A. Dr. Tom EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 5.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

16 A. Dr. OverTop COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 38

Out gain (dB) –3.5

Width (dB) 54

Release (ms) 842

17 E. B. Finger COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 4.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 470

18 E. B. Slap COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 6

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 133

19 Syn. Bass COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 3.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 250

20 Piano1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 17

Out gain (dB) 1.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 238

21 Piano2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 174

# Title Type Parameter Value

DYNAMICS Library List

228

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

* At fs=44.1 kHz

22 E. Guitar COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 261

23 A. Guitar COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 5

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 238

24 Strings1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 33

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

25 Strings2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 93

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 1.35 S

26 Strings3 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 76

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 186

27 BrassSection COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 18

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 226

28 Syn. Pad COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –13

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 58

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 238

29 SamplingPerc COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 238

30 Sampling BD COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 35

31 Sampling SN COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 8.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 354

# Title Type Parameter Value

32 Hip Comp COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 20

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 15

Release (ms) 163

33 Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 31

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 342

34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 26

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 3

Release (ms) 331

35 Chorus COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 39

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 226

36 Click Erase EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) –33

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 284

37 Announcer COMPANDER-H

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 180

38 Limiter1 COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 20

Out gain (dB) –3.0

Width (dB) 90

Release (ms) 3.91 s

39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) 0

Ratio ( :1) ∞

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 319

40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 94

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee hard

Release (ms) 447

41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) –16

Ratio ( :1) 6

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 180

# Title Type Parameter Value

Dynamics Parameters

229

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2. Output channels provide

DYNAMICS section 1. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types: GATE,

DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, and EXPANDER. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the fol-

lowing four types: COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), COMPANDER-S (Compander

Soft), and DE-ESSER. An output channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types:

COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), and COMPANDER-S (Compander

Soft).

■ GATE • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).

■ DUCKING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an

announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a

specified amount (RANGE).

Dynamics Parameters

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.

RANGE (dB) –∞, –69 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold

level.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)

This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen

below the threshold.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value

is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.

RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)

This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen

below the THRESHOLD level.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger sig-

nal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required

for the level to change by 6 dB.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

Dynamics Parameters

230

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ COMPRESSOR• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also

be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level

never actually exceeds the threshold.

■ EXPANDER • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal

level relative to change in input signal level.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has

been triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger

signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration

required for the level to change by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor’s output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)

This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee set-

tings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the speciﬁed threshold,

creating a more natural sound.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

This determines the amount of expansion.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger

signal level exceeds the threshold.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below

the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change

by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the expander’s output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)

This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings,

expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the speciﬁed threshold, creat-

ing a more natural sound.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

• I/O Characteristics

(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics

(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)

• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

Dynamics Parameters

231

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.

The companders function differently at the following levels:

1 0 dB and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a limiter.

2 Exceeding the threshold . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a compressor.

3 Below the threshold and width . . . . Functions as an expander.

The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is

essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.

* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.

* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expan-

sion processes.

■ DE-ESSER • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)

This determines the amount of compression.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the com-

pander has been triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain

once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The

value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) –18.0 to 0.0 (181 points) This sets the compander’s output signal level.

WIDTH (dB) 1–90 (90 points)

This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The

expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD –54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect applies.

FREQUENCY 1kHz – 12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the HPF used to detect the high frequencies.

0dB

Input Level

Output Level

THRESHOLD

WIDTH

Effect Type List

232

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Effect Type List

Title Type Description

Reverb Hall REVERB HALL

Concert hall reverberation simula-

tion with gate

Reverb Room REVERB ROOM

Room reverberation simulation

with gate

Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE

Reverb designed for vocals, with

gate

Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate

Early Ref. EARLY REF.

Early reﬂections without the sub-

sequent reverb

Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reﬂections

Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reﬂections

Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay

Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay

Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY

Simple repeat delay with modula-

tion

Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay

Echo ECHO

Stereo delay with crossed left/

right feedback

Chorus CHORUS Chorus

Flange FLANGE Flanger

Symphonic SYMPHONIC

Proprietary Yamaha effect that

produces a richer and more com-

plex modulation than normal

chorus

Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter

Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner

Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo

HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH

Mono pitch shifter, producing

stable results

Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter

Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation

Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator

Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated ﬁlter

Distortion DISTORTION Distortion

Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation

Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled ﬁlter

Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled ﬂanger

Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER

Dynamically controlled phase

shifter

Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel

Rev→Chorus REV→CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series

Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in parallel

Rev→Flange REV→FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in series

Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel

Rev→Sympho. REV→SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series

Rev→Pan REV→PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series

Delay+Er. DELAY+ER.

Delay and early reﬂections in par-

allel

Delay→Er. DELAY→ER.

Delay and early reﬂections in

series

Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel

Delay→Rev DELAY→REV Delay and reverb in series

Dist→Delay DIST→DELAY Distortion and delay in series

Multi Filter MULTI FILTER

3-band parallel ﬁlter (24 dB/

octave)

Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler

Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb

M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor

M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor

REV-X Hall REV-X HALL

New reverb algorithm that deliv-

ers dense and rich reverberation,

smooth decay, and provides a

spaciousness and depth that

enhances the original sound.

Choose from three types depend-

ing on your location and needs;

REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and

REV-X PLATE.

REV-X Room REV-X ROOM

REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE

Title Type Description

Effects Parameters

233

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE,

REVERB PLATE

One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb

simulations, all with gates.

■ EARLY REF.

One input, two output early reflections.

■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early

reflections with reverse gate.

■ MONO DELAY

One input, one output basic repeat delay.

■ STEREO DELAY

Two input, two output basic stereo delay.

Effects Parameters

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb

begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time

ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4

Low-frequency reverb time

ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right

reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms

Delay between early reﬂec-

tions and reverb

E/R BAL. 0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections

and reverb

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all

early reﬂections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed

HOLD

*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate closing speed

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection sim-

ulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay char-

acteristics (0 = dead, 10 =

live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb

begins

DIFF. 0–10

Reﬂection diffusion (left–

right reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback

ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

Parameter Range Description

TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay characteris-

tics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10

Reﬂection diffusion (left–right

reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

(Max. value depends on tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values

for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus val-

ues for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

Effects Parameters

234

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ MOD. DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.

■ DELAY LCR

One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).

■ ECHO

Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback

loop.

■ CHORUS

Two input, two output chorus effect.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level

LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level

LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY L

NOTE C

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY C

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time

FB. G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

FB. G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

L→R FBG –99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback

gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

R→L FBG –99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback

gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY R

NOTE FBL

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. D L

NOTE FBR

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. D R

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effects Parameters

235

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ FLANGE

Two input, two output flange effect.

■ SYMPHONIC

Two input, two output symphonic effect.

■ PHASER

Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.

■ AUTOPAN

Two input, two output autopanner.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET 0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency

offset

PHASE

0.00–354.38

degrees

Left and right modulation phase

balance

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,

14, 16

Number of phase shift stages

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effects Parameters

236

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ TREMOLO

Two input, two output tremolo effect.

■ HQ. PITCH

One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.

■ DUAL PITCH

Two input, two output pitch shifter.

■ ROTARY

One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.

■ RING MOD.

Two input, two output ring modulator.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift

FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift ﬁne

DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY

Parameter Range Description

PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift

FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 1 –100 to +100%

Channel #1 level (plus values

for normal phase, minus values

for reverse phase)

PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan

DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time

FB. G 1 –99 to +99%

Channel #1 feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift

FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 2 –100 to +100%

Channel #2 level (plus values

for normal phase, minus values

for reverse phase)

PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan

DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time

FB. G 2 –99 to +99%

Channel #2 feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE 1

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine Channel

#1 delay

NOTE 2

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine Channel

#2 delay

Parameter Range Description

ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start

SPEED SLOW, FAST

Rotation speed (see SLOW and

FAST parameters)

SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level

ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes

LOW 0–100 Low-frequency ﬁlter

HIGH 0–100 High-frequency ﬁlter

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE OSC, SELF

Modulation source: oscillator or

input signal

OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz

Oscillator frequency modulation

speed

FM DEPTH 0–100%

Oscillator frequency modulation

depth

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

FM NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FM FREQ

Effects Parameters

237

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ MOD. FILTER

Two input, two output modulation filter.

■ DISTORTION

One input, two output distortion effect.

■ AMP SIMULATE

One input, two output guitar amp simulator.

■ DYNA. FILTER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.

■ DYNA. FLANGE

Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees

Left-channel modulation and

right-channel modulation

phase difference

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter type: low pass, high pass,

band pass

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output level

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion,

OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-

DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion,

OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

BASS 0–100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control

TREBLE 0–100 High tone control

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency

change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Filter frequency change decay

speed

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output Level

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency

change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effects Parameters

238

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ DYNA. PHASER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.

■ REV+CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.

■ REV→CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.

■ REV+FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency

change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency

offset

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,

14, 16

Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

REV/CHO 0–100%

Reverb and chorus balance (0% =

all reverb, 100% = all chorus)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and chorused reverb bal-

ance (0% = all chorused reverb,

100% = all reverb)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

REV/FLG 0–100%

Reverb and ﬂange balance (0% =

all reverb, 100% = all ﬂange)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters

239

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ REV→FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.

■ REV+SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in

parallel.

■ REV→SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in

series.

■ REV→PAN

This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan

effect.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and ﬂanged reverb bal-

ance (0% = all ﬂanged reverb,

100% = all reverb)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

REV/SYM 0–100%

Reverb and symphonic balance

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all sym-

phonic)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and symphonic reverb bal-

ance (0% = all symphonic reverb,

100% = all reverb)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and panned reverb bal-

ance (0% = all panned reverb,

100% = all reverb)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters

240

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ DELAY+ER.

One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in

parallel.

■ DELAY→ER.

One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in

series.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

DLY/ER 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂections bal-

ance (0% = all delay, 100% = all

early reﬂections)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Ran-

dom, Revers, Plate,

Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay characteris-

tics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂected delay

balance (0% = all early reﬂected

delay, 100% = all delay)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Ran-

dom, Revers, Plate,

Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay characteris-

tics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Effects Parameters

241

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ DELAY+REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.

■ DELAY→REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.

■ DIST→DELAY

One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback

ratio

DLY/REV 0–100%

Delay and reverb balance (0% =

all delay, 100% = all reverb)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback

ratio

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and delayed reverb balance

(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% =

all delay)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion,

OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone control

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY

MOD.NOT

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Distortion and delay balance (0%

= all distortion, 100% = all

delayed distortion)

Effects Parameters

242

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ MULTI FILTER

Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).

■ FREEZE

One input, two output basic sampler.

■ STEREO REVERB

Two input, two output stereo reverb.

■ M. BAND DYNA.

Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with

individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.

Parameter Range Description

TYPE 1 LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level

RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance

TYPE 2 LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level

RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance

TYPE 3 LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level

RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance

Parameter Range Description

REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT

In MANUAL mode, recording is

started by pressing the REC and

PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode,

Record-Ready mode is engaged by

pressing the REC button, and

actual recording is triggered by the

input signal.

REC DLY

–1000 to +1000

Recording delay. For plus values,

recording starts after the trigger is

received. For minus values, record-

ing starts before the trigger is

received.

PLY MODE

MOMENT,

CONTI., INPUT

In MOMENT mode, the sample

plays only while the that the PLAY

button is pressed. In CONT mode,

playback continues once the PLAY

button has been pressed. The

number of times the sample plays

is set using the LOOP NUM param-

eter. In INPUT mode, playback is

triggered by the input signal.

TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB

Input trigger level (i.e., the signal

level required to trigger recording

or playback)

TRG MASK 0–1000 ms

Once playback has been triggered,

subsequent triggers are ignored for

the duration of the TRG MASK

time.

START

*1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)

Playback start point in milliseconds

END

Playback end point in milliseconds

LOOP

Loop start point in milliseconds

LOOP

NUM

0–100 Number of times the sample plays

PITCH

–12 to +12 semi-

tones

Playback pitch shift

FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift ﬁne

MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL

PLAY button can be triggered by

using MIDI Note on/off messages.

START

[SAMPLE]

0–131000 Playback start point in samples

END

[SAMPLE]

0–131000 Playback end point in samples

LOOP

[SAMPLE]

0–131000 Loop start point in samples

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage,

Plate

Reverb type

INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb

spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R BAL. 0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and

reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =

all early reﬂections)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE –10 to +10

For positive values, the thresh-

old of the high band is low-

ered and the threshold of the

low band is increased. For

negative values, the opposite

will occur. When set to 0, all

three bands are affected the

same.

L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF

Speciﬁes the maximum output

level

CMP. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack

CMP. REL

Compressor release time

CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee

CMP. BYP OFF/ON Compressor bypass

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

EXP. THRE –54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Expander threshold

EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio

EXP. REL

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Expander release time

EXP. BYP OFF/ON Expander bypass

LIM. THRE –12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold

LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack

LIM. REL

Limiter release time

LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee

LIM. BYP OFF/ON Limiter bypass

Effects Parameters

243

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ M.BAND COMP

Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individ-

ual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.

■ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE

Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm.

Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and

provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the origi-

nal sound. Choose from three types depending on your

location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and

REV-X PLATE.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

L-M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M-H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF

Speciﬁes the maximum output

level

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Low band threshold level

MID THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Mid band threshold level

HI. THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB High band threshold level

RATIO 1:1 to 20:1 Compression ratio

ATTACK 0–120 ms Compressor attack time

RELEASE

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Compressor release time

KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee

BYPASS OFF/ON Bypasses the compressor

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME

0.28–27.94 s

*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the

ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type

and ROOM SIZE setting.

Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz

Frequency point for LO.RATIO set-

ting

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb

spread)

ROOM

SIZE

0–28 Size of room

DECAY 0–53 Gate closing speed

HPF

THRU, 22.0 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

1.00 kHz–

18.0 kHz, THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Effects and tempo synchronization

244

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Some of the LS9’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types

of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will

change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will

change according to the tempo.

• Parameters related to tempo synchronization

The following ﬁve parameters are related to tempo synchronization.

1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.

SYNC:.............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.

NOTE and TEMPO: .....These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.

DELAY and FREQ.:.......DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the

way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is

relevant only for modulation-type effects.

• How the parameters are related

Te mpo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making

adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and

DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the

correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.

If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set

If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)

Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note

DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)

= 0.5 (sec)

= 500 ms

Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.

Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121

DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)

= 250 x (120/121)

= 247.9 (ms)

Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.

*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.

• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values

The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or

TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This lim-

itation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.

• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter

The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.

•It is a common value shared by all effects

•You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)

This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is

an example.

Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60

Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were

changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way

between store and recall, the LS9 does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no

longer the same as when that effect was stored.

* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.

Effects and tempo synchronization

= 1/48

= 2/1

= 1/16= 1/24 = 1/12

= 3/4= 3/16 = 1/2

= 3/32 = 1/6

= 1/4

= 1/8

= 1/1= 3/8

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

245

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 1 ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 2

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

Scene

001 065

Scene

065

002 002 066 066

003 003 067 067

004 004 068 068

005 005 069 069

006 006 070 070

007 007 071 071

008 008 072 072

009 009 073 073

010 010 074 074

011 011 075 075

012 012 076 076

013 013 077 077

014 014 078 078

015 015 079 079

016 016 080 080

017 017 081 081

018 018 082 082

019 019 083 083

020 020 084 084

021 021 085 085

022 022 086 086

023 023 087 087

024 024 088 088

025 025 089 089

026 026 090 090

027 027 091 091

028 028 092 092

029 029 093 093

030 030 094 094

031 031 095 095

032 032 096 096

033 033 097 097

034 034 098 098

035 035 099 099

036 036 100 100

037 037 101 101

038 038 102 102

039 039 103 103

040 040 104 104

041 041 105 105

042 042 106 106

043 043 107 107

044 044 108 108

045 045 109 109

046 046 110 110

047 047 111 111

048 048 112 112

049 049 113 113

050 050 114 114

051 051 115 115

052 052 116 116

053 053 117 117

054 054 118 118

055 055 119 119

056 056 120 120

057 057 121 121

058 058 122 122

059 059 123 123

060 060 124 124

061 061 125 125

062 062 126 126

063 063 127 127

064 064 128 128

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

Scene

129 065

Scene

193

002 130 066 194

003 131 067 195

004 132 068 196

005 133 069 197

006 134 070 198

007 135 071 199

008 136 072 200

009 137 073 201

010 138 074 202

011 139 075 203

012 140 076 204

013 141 077 205

014 142 078 206

015 143 079 207

016 144 080 208

017 145 081 209

018 146 082 210

019 147 083 211

020 148 084 212

021 149 085 213

022 150 086 214

023 151 087 215

024 152 088 216

025 153 089 217

026 154 090 218

027 155 091 219

028 156 092 220

029 157 093 221

030 158 094 222

031 159 095 223

032 160 096 224

033 161 097 225

034 162 098 226

035 163 099 227

036 164 100 228

037 165 101 229

038 166 102 230

039 167 103 231

040 168 104 232

041 169 105 233

042 170 106 234

043 171 107 235

044 172 108 236

045 173 109 237

046 174 110 238

047 175 111 239

048 176 112 240

049 177 113 241

050 178 114 242

051 179 115 243

052 180 116 244

053 181 117 245

054 182 118 246

055 183 119 247

056 184 120 248

057 185 121 249

058 186 122 250

059 187 123 251

060 188 124 252

061 189 125 253

062 190 126 254

063 191 127 255

064 192 128 256

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

246

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 3 ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 4

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

Scene

257 065

No Assign

002 258 066

003 259 067

004 260 068

005 261 069

006 262 070

007 263 071

008 264 072

009 265 073

010 266 074

011 267 075

012 268 076

013 269 077

014 270 078

015 271 079

016 272 080

017 273 081

018 274 082

019 275 083

020 276 084

021 277 085

022 278 086

023 279 087

024 280 088

025 281 089

026 282 090

027 283 091

028 284 092

029 285 093

030 286 094

031 287 095

032 288 096

033 289 097

034 290 098

035 291 099

036 292 100

037 293 101

038 294 102

039 295 103

040 296 104

041 297 105

042 298 106

043 299 107

044 300 108

045 000 109

046

No Assign

110

047 111

048 112

049 113

050 114

051 115

052 116

053 117

054 118

055 119

056 120

057 121

058 122

059 123

060 124

061 125

062 126

063 127

064 128

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

No Assign

065

No Assign

002 066

003 067

004 068

005 069

006 070

007 071

008 072

009 073

010 074

011 075

012 076

013 077

014 078

015 079

016 080

017 081

018 082

019 083

020 084

021 085

022 086

023 087

024 088

025 089

026 090

027 091

028 092

029 093

030 094

031 095

032 096

033 097

034 098

035 099

036 100

037 101

038 102

039 103

040 104

041 105

042 106

043 107

044 108

045 109

046 110

047 111

048 112

049 113

050 114

051 115

052 116

053 117

054 118

055 119

056 120

057 121

058 122

059 123

060 124

061 125

062 126

063 127

064 128

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

247

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 5

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 6

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 7

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 8

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 9

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 10

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 11

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 12

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 13

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 14

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 15

■ Preset Bank/Ch# 16

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

RACK5

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

RACK6

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

RACK7

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

RACK8

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

248

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ Bank/Ch#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

001 044 087

002 045 088

003 046 089

004 047 090

005 048 091

006 049 092

007 050 093

008 051 094

009 052 095

010 053 096

011 054 097

012 055 098

013 056 099

014 057 100

015 058 101

016 059 102

017 060 103

018 061 104

019 062 105

020 063 106

021 064 107

022 065 108

023 066 109

024 067 110

025 068 111

026 069 112

027 070 113

028 071 114

029 072 115

030 073 116

031 074 117

032 075 118

033 076 119

034 077 120

035 078 121

036 079 122

037 080 123

038 081 124

039 082 125

040 083 126

041 084 127

042 085 128

043 086

Parameters that can be assigned to control changes

249

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

Parameters that can be assigned to control changes

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

NO ASSIGN — 0

FADER H

INPUT

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STE-

REO L–MONO(C)

FADER L

INPUT

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO L–MONO(C)

CH ON

INPUT

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO L–MONO(C)

PHASE INPUT

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

INSERT

INPUT CH 1–CH 32

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO L–MONO(C)

DIRECT OUT ON CH 1–CH 32{64}

PAN/BALANCE INPUT

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO L–STEREO R

TO STEREO ON

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

TO MONO ON

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

LCR

ON CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

MIX 1–MIX 16

CSR

MIX SEND

MIX 1 ON – MIX16

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

MIX 1 PRE – MIX 16

POINT

MIX 1 LVL H –

MIX 16 LVL H

MIX 1 LVL L –

MIX 16 LVL L

MIX 1/ 2 PAN –

MIX 15/16 PAN

MIX TO ST

TO ST ON

MIX 1–MIX 16TO MONO ON

PAN

MIX TO MTRX

MTRX1 POINT –

MTRX8 POINT

MIX 1–MIX 16

MTRX1 ON – MTRX8

MTRX1 LVL H –

MTRX8 LVL H

MTRX1 LVL L – MTRX8

LVL L

MTRX1/2 PAN –

MTRX7/8 PAN

ST TO MTRX

MTRX1 POINT –

MTRX8 POINT

STEREO L–MONO(C)

MTRX1 ON – MTRX8

MTRX1 LVL H –

MTRX8 LVL H

MTRX1 LVL L – MTRX8

LVL L

MTRX1/2 PAN –

MTRX7/8 PAN

INPUT EQ

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

LOW Q

LOW F

LOW G

LOW MID Q

LOW MID F

LOW MID G

HIGH MID Q

HIGH MID F

HIGH MID G

HIGH Q

HIGH F

HIGH G

LPF ON

LOW TYPE

HIGH TYPE

INPUT ATT INPUT

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

INPUT HPF

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

FREQ

OUTPUT EQ

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO L–MONO(C)

LOW Q

LOW F

LOW G

LOW MID Q

LOW MID F

LOW MID G

HIGH MID Q

HIGH MID F

HIGH MID G

HIGH Q

HIGH F

HIGH G

LOW TYPE

HIGH TYPE

LOW HPF ON

HIGH LPF ON

OUTPUT ATT OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 16

STEREO L–MONO(C)

INPUT DYNA1

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RANGE

HOLD H

HOLD L

DECAY/REL H

DECAY/REL L

RATIO

GAIN H

GAIN L

KNEE/WIDTH

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

Parameters that can be assigned to control changes

250

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

INPUT DYNA2

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RELEASE H

RELEASE L

RATIO

GAIN H

GAIN L

KNEE/WIDTH

FILTER FREQ

OUTPUT

DYNA1

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO L–MONO(C)

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RELEASE H

RELEASE L

RATIO

GAIN H

GAIN L

KNEE/WIDTH

EFFECT

BYPASS

RACK5–8

MIX BAL

PARAM 1 H –

PARAM 32 L

GEQ

ON A

RACK1–8

ON B

GAIN A 1 – GAIN A 31

GAIN B 1 – GAIN B 31

MUTE MASTER ON MASTER 1–MASTER 8

RECALL SAFE ON

CH 1–CH 32{64}

STIN1L–STIN4R

MIX 1–MIX 16

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO L–MONO(C)

RACK1–8

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

Control change parameter assignments

251

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

■ PRESET

Control change parameter assignments

Control

Change#

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

FADER H INPUT

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

NO ASSIGN

FADER L INPUT

CH 1

34 CH 2

35 CH 3

36 CH 4

37 CH 5

38 CH 6

39 CH 7

40 CH 8

41 CH 9

42 CH10

43 CH11

44 CH12

45 CH13

46 CH14

47 CH15

48 CH16

49 CH17

50 CH18

51 CH19

52 CH20

53 CH21

54 CH22

55 CH23

56 CH24

NO ASSIGN

CH ON INPUT

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN

PAN/BALANCE INPUT

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN

Control

Change#

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

Control change parameter assignments

252

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Control

Change#

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

Control

Change#

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

NRPN parameter assignments

253

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

NRPN parameter assignments

Parameter

From

(HEX)

FADER

INPUT 0000 0047

MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR 0060 007D

INPUT to Mix9–16

LEVEL

MIX9 SEND 007E 00C5

MIX10 SEND 00DE 0125

MIX11 SEND 013E 0185

MIX12 SEND 019E 01E5

MIX13 SEND 01FE 0245

MIX14 SEND 025E 02A5

MIX15 SEND 02BE 0305

MIX16 SEND 031E 0365

MIX1–16, STEREO

LR to MATRIX LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 04FE 0513

MATRIX2 SEND 0514 0529

MATRIX3 SEND 052A 053F

MATRIX4 SEND 0540 0555

MATRIX5 SEND 0556 056B

MATRIX6 SEND 056C 0581

MATRIX7 SEND 0582 0597

MATRIX8 SEND 0598 05AD

INPUT 05B6 05FD

MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR 0616 0633

INPUT to Mix9–16

MIX9 SEND 0634 067B

MIX10 SEND 0694 06DB

MIX11 SEND 06F4 073B

MIX12 SEND 0754 079B

MIX13 SEND 07B4 07FB

MIX14 SEND 0814 085B

MIX15 SEND 0874 08BB

MIX16 SEND 08D4 091B

MIX1–16, STEREO

LR to MATRIX ON

MATRIX1 SEND 0AB4 0AC9

MATRIX2 SEND 0ACA 0ADF

MATRIX3 SEND 0AE0 0AF5

MATRIX4 SEND 0AF6 0B0B

MATRIX5 SEND 0B0C 0B21

MATRIX6 SEND 0B22 0B37

MATRIX7 SEND 0B38 0B4D

MATRIX8 SEND 0B4E 0B63

MIX1–8 to STEREO

MIX TO ST 0B64 0B6B

PHASE INPUT 0B6C 0BB3

INSERT ON

INPUT 0BCC 0BEB

MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR 0C2C 0C49

INPUT to Mix9–16

PRE/POST

MIX9 SEND 0C4A 0C91

MIX10 SEND 0CAA 0CF1

MIX11 SEND 0D0A 0D51

MIX12 SEND 0D6A 0DB1

MIX13 SEND 0DCA 0E11

MIX14 SEND 0E2A 0E71

MIX15 SEND 0E8A 0ED1

MIX16 SEND 0EEA 0F31

INPUT57–64 to

Mix1–8 LEVEL

MIX1 SEND 10CA 10D1

MIX2 SEND 10D2 10D9

MIX3 SEND 10DA 10E1

MIX4 SEND 10E2 10E9

MIX5 SEND 10EA 10F1

MIX6 SEND 10F2 10F9

MIX7 SEND 10FA 1101

MIX8 SEND 1102 1109

INPUT57–64 to

Mix1–8 ON

MIX1 SEND 112A 1131

MIX2 SEND 1132 1139

MIX3 SEND 113A 1141

MIX4 SEND 1142 1149

MIX5 SEND 114A 1151

MIX6 SEND 1152 1159

MIX7 SEND 115A 1161

MIX8 SEND 1162 1169

INPUT57–64 to

MIX1–8 PRE/POST

MIX1 SEND 118A 1191

MIX2 SEND 1192 1199

MIX3 SEND 119A 11A1

MIX4 SEND 11A2 11A9

MIX5 SEND 11AA 11B1

MIX6 SEND 11B2 11B9

MIX7 SEND 11BA 11C1

MIX8 SEND 11C2 11C9

INPUT57–64 EQ

LOW TYPE 11EA 11F1

HIGH TYPE 11F2 11F9

INPUT57–64 HPF FREQ 11FA 1201

INPUT57–64 to

MIX1–8 PAN

MIX1–2 1202 1209

MIX3–4 120A 1211

MIX5–6 1212 1219

MIX7–8 121A 1221

INPUT57–64 to

STEREO

ON 1232 1239

INPUT57–64

RECALL SAFE

ON 123A 1241

INPUT57–64 to

MONO

ON 1242 1249

INPUT49–64

DYNAMICS1

RATIO 124A 1259

KNEE/WIDTH 125A 1269

GAIN 126A 1279

INPUT49–64

DYNAMICS2

HIGH ONLY/FULL 127A 1289

FILTER FREQ 128A 1299

EQ INPUT, MIX,

MATRIX, STEREO LR

ON 1304 1381

LOW Q 1382 13FF

LOW FREQ 1400 147D

LOW GAIN 147E 14FB

LOW MID Q 14FC 1579

LOW MID FREQ 157A 15F7

LOW MID GAIN 15F8 1675

HIGH MID Q 1676 16F3

HIGH MID FREQ 16F4 1771

HIGH MID GAIN 1772 17EF

HIGH Q 17F0 186D

HIGH FREQ 186E 18EB

HIGH GAIN 18EC 1969

ATT 196A 19B1

HPF ON 19E8 1A65

LPF ON 1A66 1AE3

INPUT DYNAMICS1

ON 1AE4 1B2B

ATTACK 1B44 1B8B

THRESHOLD 1BA4 1BEB

RANGE 1C04 1C4B

HOLD 1C64 1CAB

DECAY/RELEASE 1CC4 1D0B

INPUT DYNAMICS2

MIX, MATRIX, STE-

REO LR DYNAMICS1

ON 1D24 1DA1

ATTACK 1DA2 1E1F

THRESHOLD 1E20 1E9D

RELEASE 1E9E 1F1B

RATIO 1F1C 1F99

GAIN 1F9A 2017

KNEE/WIDTH 2018 2095

PAN/BALANCE INPUT 2096 20DD

INPUT to Mix9/10–

15/16 PAN

MIX9–10 20F6 213D

MIX11–12 2156 219D

MIX13–14 21B6 21FD

MIX15–16 2216 225D

MIX1–16, STEREO

LR to MATRIX PAN

MATRIX1, 2 2336 234B

MATRIX3, 4 234C 2361

MATRIX5, 6 2362 2377

MATRIX7, 8 2378 238D

MIX1–8 to STEREO

PAN

MIX TO ST 238E 2395

BALANCE MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR 2396 23B3

Parameter

From

(HEX)

NRPN parameter assignments

254

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

RACK5–8(EFFECT)

BYPASS 26B4 26B7

MIX BALANCE 26BC 26BF

PARAM1 26C4 26C7

PARAM2 26CC 26CF

PARAM3 26D4 26D7

PARAM4 26DC 26DF

PARAM5 26E4 26E7

PARAM6 26EC 26EF

PARAM7 26F4 26F7

PARAM8 26FC 26FF

PARAM9 2704 2707

PARAM10 270C 270F

PARAM11 2714 2717

PARAM12 271C 271F

PARAM13 2724 2727

PARAM14 272C 272F

PARAM15 2734 2737

PARAM16 273C 273F

PARAM17 2744 2747

PARAM18 274C 274F

PARAM19 2754 2757

PARAM20 275C 275F

PARAM21 2764 2767

PARAM22 276C 276F

PARAM23 2774 2777

PARAM24 277C 277F

PARAM25 2784 2787

PARAM26 278C 278F

PARAM27 2794 2797

PARAM28 279C 279F

PARAM29 27A4 27A7

PARAM30 27AC 27AF

PARAM31 27B4 27B7

PARAM32 27BC 27BF

RACK1–3(GEQ)

ON 27C4 27C9

GAIN1 27CA 27CF

GAIN2 27D0 27D5

GAIN3 27D6 27DB

GAIN4 27DC 27E1

GAIN5 27E2 27E7

GAIN6 27E8 27ED

GAIN7 27EE 27F3

GAIN8 27F4 27F9

GAIN9 27FA 27FF

GAIN10 2800 2805

GAIN11 2806 280B

GAIN12 280C 2811

GAIN13 2812 2817

GAIN14 2818 281D

GAIN15 281E 2823

GAIN16 2824 2829

GAIN17 282A 282F

GAIN18 2830 2835

GAIN19 2836 283B

GAIN20 283C 2841

GAIN21 2842 2847

GAIN22 2848 284D

GAIN23 284E 2853

GAIN24 2854 2859

GAIN25 285A 285F

GAIN26 2860 2865

GAIN27 2866 286B

GAIN28 286C 2871

GAIN29 2872 2877

GAIN30 2878 287D

GAIN31 287E 2883

FADER MONO(C) 28E4 28E8

Parameter

From

(HEX)

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R to Mix1–8

LEVEL

MIX1 SEND 28EA 2929

MIX2 SEND 292A 2969

MIX3 SEND 296A 29A9

MIX4 SEND 29AA 29E9

MIX5 SEND 29EA 2A29

MIX6 SEND 2A2A 2A69

MIX7 SEND 2A6A 2AA9

MIX8 SEND 2AAA 2AE9

MONO(C) to Matrix

LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 2BEA 2BEE

MATRIX2 SEND 2BF0 2BF4

MATRIX3 SEND 2BF6 2BFA

MATRIX4 SEND 2BFC 2C00

MATRIX5 SEND 2C02 2C06

MATRIX6 SEND 2C08 2C0C

MATRIX7 SEND 2C0E 2C12

MATRIX8 SEND 2C14 2C18

ON MONO(C) 2C2A 2C2E

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R to Mix1–8

MIX1 SEND 2C30 2C6F

MIX2 SEND 2C70 2CAF

MIX3 SEND 2CB0 2CEF

MIX4 SEND 2CF0 2D2F

MIX5 SEND 2D30 2D6F

MIX6 SEND 2D70 2DAF

MIX7 SEND 2DB0 2DEF

MIX8 SEND 2DF0 2E2F

MONO(C) to Matrix

MATRIX SEND 2F30 2F34

MIX9–16 to STE-

REO ON

MIX TO ST 2F36 2F3D

INSERT MONO(C) 2F46 2F4A

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R to MIX1–8

PRE/POST

MIX1 SEND 2F4C 2F8B

MIX2 SEND 2F8C 2FCB

MIX3 SEND 2FCC 300B

MIX4 SEND 300C 304B

MIX5 SEND 304C 308B

MIX6 SEND 308C 30CB

MIX7 SEND 30CC 310B

MIX8 SEND 310C 314B

MONO(C) EQ

ON 325E 3262

LOW Q 3264 3268

LOW FREQ 326A 326E

LOW GAIN 3270 3274

LOW MID Q 3276 327A

LOW MID FREQ 327C 3280

LOW MID GAIN 3282 3286

HIGH MID Q 3288 328C

HIGH MID FREQ 328E 3292

HIGH MID GAIN 3294 3298

HIGH Q 329A 329E

HIGH FREQ 32A0 32A4

HIGH GAIN 32A6 32AA

HPF ON 32AC 32B0

LPF ON 32B2 32B6

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R EQ

LOW TYPE 3440 347F

HIGH TYPE 3480 34BF

MIX, MATRIX, STE-

REO LRC EQ

LOW TYPE 34C0 34E2

HIGH TYPE 34E4 3506

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R HPF

FREQ 3640 367F

MONO(C)

DYNAMICS1

ON 3680 3684

ATTACK 3686 368A

THRESHOLD 368C 3690

RELEASE 3692 3696

RATIO 3698 369C

GAIN 369E 36A2

KNEE/WIDTH 36A4 36A8

Parameter

From

(HEX)

NRPN parameter assignments

255

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R to MIX1–8

PAN

MIX1–2 36AA 36E9

MIX3–4 36EA 3729

MIX5–6 372A 3769

MIX7–8 376A 37A9

MONO(C) to

Matrix1–8 PAN

MATRIX1,2 382A 382E

MATRIX3, 4 3830 3834

MATRIX5, 6 3836 383A

MATRIX7, 8 383C 3840

MIX9–16 to STE-

REO ON

MIX TO ST 3842 3849

RACK4–6(GEQ)

ON 3852 3857

GAIN1 3858 385D

GAIN2 385E 3863

GAIN3 3864 3869

GAIN4 386A 386F

GAIN5 3870 3875

GAIN6 3876 387B

GAIN7 387C 3881

GAIN8 3882 3887

GAIN9 3888 388D

GAIN10 388E 3893

GAIN11 3894 3899

GAIN12 389A 389F

GAIN13 38A0 38A5

GAIN14 38A6 38AB

GAIN15 38AC 38B1

GAIN16 38B2 38B7

GAIN17 38B8 38BD

GAIN18 38BE 38C3

GAIN19 38C4 38C9

GAIN20 38CA 38CF

GAIN21 38D0 38D5

GAIN22 38D6 38DB

GAIN23 38DC 38E1

GAIN24 38E2 38E7

GAIN25 38E8 38ED

GAIN26 38EE 38F3

GAIN27 38F4 38F9

GAIN28 38FA 38FF

GAIN29 3900 3905

GAIN30 3906 390B

GAIN31 390C 3911

LCR IN, MIX

ON 3912 3969

CSR 396A 39C1

DIRECT OUT ON 39C2 3A01

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R to STEREO

ON 3A02 3A41

MUTE MASTER ON 3A5A 3A61

RECALL SAFE ON 3A66 3AEA

INPUT GAIN 1,9,17,25 3B0F 3B12

INPUT GAIN 2,10,18,26 3B1F 3B22

INPUT GAIN 3,11,19,27 3B2F 3B32

INPUT GAIN 4,12,20,28 3B3F 3B42

INPUT GAIN 5,13,21,29 3B4F 3B52

INPUT GAIN 6,14,22,30 3B5F 3B62

INPUT GAIN 7,15,23,31 3B6F 3B72

INPUT GAIN 8,16,24,32 3B7F 3B82

INPUT +48v 1,9,17,25 3B8F 3B92

INPUT +48v 2,10,18,26 3B9F 3BA2

INPUT +48v 3,11,19,27 3BAF 3BB2

INPUT +48v 4,12,20,28 3BBF 3BC2

INPUT +48v 5,13,21,29 3BCF 3BD2

INPUT +48v 6,14,22,30 3BDF 3BE2

INPUT +48v 7,15,23,31 3BEF 3BF2

INPUT +48v 8,16,24,32 3BFF 3C02

EXTERNAL GAIN1 3B06 3B09

EXTERNAL GAIN2 3B16 3B19

EXTERNAL GAIN3 3B26 3B29

EXTERNAL GAIN4 3B36 3B39

EXTERNAL GAIN5 3B46 3B49

Parameter

From

(HEX)

EXTERNAL GAIN6 3B56 3B59

EXTERNAL GAIN7 3B66 3B69

EXTERNAL GAIN8 3B76 3B79

EXTERNAL +48v 1 3B86 3B89

EXTERNAL +48v 2 3B96 3B99

EXTERNAL +48v 3 3BA6 3BA9

EXTERNAL +48v 4 3BB6 3BB9

EXTERNAL +48v 5 3BC6 3BC9

EXTERNAL +48v 6 3BD6 3BD9

EXTERNAL +48v 7 3BE6 3BE9

EXTERNAL +48v 8 3BF6 3BF9

EXTERNAL HPF1 3C06 3C09

EXTERNAL HPF2 3C16 3C19

EXTERNAL HPF3 3C26 3C29

EXTERNAL HPF4 3C36 3C39

EXTERNAL HPF5 3C46 3C49

EXTERNAL HPF6 3C56 3C59

EXTERNAL HPF7 3C66 3C69

EXTERNAL HPF8 3C76 3C79

INPUT1–56, STIN

1L–4R to MONO

ON 3C86 3CC5

MIX to MONO ON 3CC6 3CD5

SLOT OUT DELAY

ON 3CD6 3CF5

TIME HIGH 3D06 3D25

TIME LOW 3D36 3D55

OMNI OUT DELAY

ON 3D66 3D75

TIME HIGH 3D76 3D85

TIME LOW 3D86 3D95

DIGITAL OUT DELAY

ON 3D96 3D97

TIME HIGH 3D98 3D99

TIME LOW 3D9A 3D9B

INPUT1–48, STIN

1L–4R DYNAMICS1

RATIO 3D9C 3DD3

KNEE/WIDTH 3DD4 3E0B

GAIN 3E0C 3E43

INPUT1–48, STIN

1L–4R DYNAMICS2

HIGH ONLY/FULL 3E44 3E7B

FILTER FREQ 3E7C 3EB3

RACK7–8(GEQ)

ON 3EB4 3EB7

GAIN1 3EB8 3EBB

GAIN2 3EBC 3EBF

GAIN3 3EC0 3EC3

GAIN4 3EC4 3EC7

GAIN5 3EC8 3ECB

GAIN6 3ECC 3ECF

GAIN7 3ED0 3ED3

GAIN8 3ED4 3ED7

GAIN9 3ED8 3EDB

GAIN10 3EDC 3EDF

GAIN11 3EE0 3EE3

GAIN12 3EE4 3EE7

GAIN13 3EE8 3EEB

GAIN14 3EEC 3EEF

GAIN15 3EF0 3EF3

GAIN16 3EF4 3EF7

GAIN17 3EF8 3EFB

GAIN18 3EFC 3EFF

GAIN19 3F00 3F03

GAIN20 3F04 3F07

GAIN21 3F08 3F0B

GAIN22 3F0C 3F0F

GAIN23 3F10 3F13

GAIN24 3F14 3F17

GAIN25 3F18 3F1B

GAIN26 3F1C 3F1F

GAIN27 3F20 3F23

GAIN28 3F24 3F27

GAIN29 3F28 3F2B

GAIN30 3F2C 3F2F

GAIN31 3F30 3F33

EQ ATT 3F34 3F4E

Parameter

From

(HEX)

Mixing parameter operation applicability

256

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This table indicates how the behaviors of each of the input channel and output channel parameters are

affected by Stereo, Link, Recall Safe, and User Level settings.

■ Input Channels

*1 Except for Key In Source

*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–16 individual Send

Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.

*3 ST IN 1–4 only.

■ MIX Channels

*1 Except for Key In Source

■ MATRIX Channels

*1 Except for Key In Source

■ STEREO, MONO Channels

*1 Except for Key In Source

*2 STEREO channel only.

Mixing parameter operation applicability

Parameter

Stereo

LINK RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL

HA O INPUT HA INPUT HA INPUT HA

NAME,

ICON

INPUT NAME INPUT NAME

LCR O

INPUT ALL

INPUT

PROCESSING

Insert On O

INPUT ALL

INPUT

PROCESSING

Direct Out

On/Level

INPUT ALL

INPUT

PROCESSING

On O INPUT ON INPUT ON

INPUT

FADER/ON

Fader O INPUT FADER INPUT FADER

INPUT

FADER/ON

Pan/

Balance

INPUT ALL

INPUT

FADER/ON

Att O INPUT EQ INPUT EQ

INPUT

PROCESSING

HPF O INPUT EQ INPUT EQ

INPUT

PROCESSING

EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT EQ

INPUT

PROCESSING

Dynamics1 O

INPUT

DYNAMICS1

INPUT

DYNA1

INPUT

PROCESSING

Dynamics2 O

INPUT

DYNAMICS2

INPUT

DYNA2

INPUT

PROCESSING

Mute

Assign

INPUT ALL

MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN

To Mix

INPUT

MIX ON

INPUT MIX

INPUT

FADER/ON

To Mix

LEVEL

INPUT

MIX SEND

INPUT MIX

SEND

INPUT

FADER/ON

To Mix

PRE/POST

INPUT ALL

INPUT

PROCESSING

To Stereo/

Mono

INPUT ALL

INPUT

PROCESSING

Cue O

Key In Cue O

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe O

Fade Time O STORE

Parameter

Stereo

RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL

NAME, ICON

MIX NAME OUTPUT NAME

LCR O MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING

Insert On O MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING

On O MIX ON MIX FADER/ON

Fader O MIX FADER MIX FADER/ON

Pan/Balance O MIX ALL MIX FADER/ON

Att O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING

EQ O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING

Dynamics1 O

*1 MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING

Mute Assign O MIX ALL MUTE ASSIGN

To Mix ON

WITH MIX SEND WITH MIX SEND

To Mix LEVEL

WITH MIX SEND WITH MIX SEND

To Matrix On O MIX to MATRIX ON MIX FADER/ON

To Matrix LEVEL O MIX to MATRIX SEND MIX FADER/ON

To Matrix POINT O MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING

To Stereo/Mono O MIX ALL MIX PROCESSING

Cue O

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe O

Fade Time O STORE

Parameter

Stereo

RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL

NAME, ICON

MATRIX NAME OUTPUT NAME

Insert On O MATRIX ALL

MATRIX

PROCESSING

On O MATRIX ON

MATRIX

FADER/ON

Fader O MATRIX FADER

MATRIX

FADER/ON

Pan/Balance O MATRIX ALL

MATRIX

FADER/ON

Att O MATRIX EQ

MATRIX

PROCESSING

Dynamics1 O

*1 MATRIX DYNA1

MATRIX

PROCESSING

EQ O MATRIX EQ

MATRIX

PROCESSING

Mute Assign O MATRIX ALL MUTE ASSIGN

To Matrix On

WITH MATRIX SEND

WITH MATRIX

SEND

To Matrix LEVEL

WITH MATRIX SEND

WITH MATRIX

SEND

Cue O

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe O

Fade Time O STORE

Parameter

Stereo

RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL

NAME, ICON

STEREO, MONO

NAME

OUTPUT NAME

Insert On O STEREO, MONO ALL

STEREO, MONO

PROCESSING

On O STEREO, MONO ON

STEREO, MONO

FADER/ON

Fader O

STEREO, MONO

FADER

STEREO, MONO

FADER/ON

Pan/Balance O STEREO, MONO ALL

STEREO, MONO

FADER/ON

Att O STEREO, MONO EQ

STEREO, MONO

PROCESSING

Dynamics1 O

STEREO, MONO

DYNA1

STEREO, MONO

PROCESSING

EQ O STEREO, MONO EQ

STEREO, MONO

PROCESSING

Mute Assign O STEREO, MONO ALL MUTE ASSIGN

To Matrix On O

STEREO, MONO to

MATRIX ON

STEREO, MONO

FADER/ON

To Matrix LEVEL O

STEREO, MONO to

MATRIX SEND

STEREO, MONO

FADER/ON

To Matrix POINT O STEREO, MONO ALL

STEREO, MONO

PROCESSING

Cue O

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe O

Fade Time O STORE

Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys

257

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

Functions that can be assigned to user-deﬁned keys

Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 LED Explanation

NO ASSIGN — — Dark No assignment

SCENE

RECALL —

Flash

Recall the currently selected scene

STORE — Store to the currently selected scene

▲ SCENE +1, LIST UP

SCENE +1 selects the next scene number. LIST UP scrolls

the scene list upward by one. Simultaneously pressing

[SCENE ▲] and [SCENE ▼] keys will return to the current

scene number. After scene 300, wrap around to scene

000.

▼ SCENE -1, LIST DOWN

SCENE -1 selects the previous scene number. LIST UP

scrolls the scene list upward by one. Simultaneously press-

ing [SCENE ▲] and [SCENE ▼] keys will return to the cur-

rent scene number. After scene 000, wrap around to scene

300.

INC RECALL — Recall the scene of the next existing number

DEC RECALL — Recall the scene of the previous existing number

DIRECT RECALL SCENE #000–#300 Directly recall the scene of the speciﬁed number

RECALL UNDO —

Lit if UNDO is possi-

ble

Execute RECALL UNDO

STORE UNDO —

Lit if UNDO is possi-

ble

Execute STORE UNDO

TALKBACK

TALKBACK ON

LATCH ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch TALKBACK on/off

UNLATCH ON: lit, OFF: dark Turn TALKBACK on while pressed

SELECTED CH

ASSIGN

—

Lit if assignment is

the same

When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment

state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a

SEL key of an output channel to switch the assignment on/

off, and its state will be remembered. During this time, the

[SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.

OSCILLATOR

OSCILLATOR ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark

Switch the OSC on/off

When this turns on, the OSC popup window will appear

SELECTED CH

ASSIGN

—

Lit if assignment is

the same

When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment

state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a

SEL key of an output channel to switch the assignment on/

off, and its state will be remembered. During this time, the

[SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.

CUE CLEAR — — Flash Clear all CUE settings together

MONITOR

MONITOR ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch MONITOR on/off

SELECTED CH

ASSIGN

—

Lit if assignment is

the same

When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment

state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a

SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assign-

ment on/off, and its state will be remembered. During this

time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.

SOURCE SELECT

STEREO L/R,

MONO(C), LCR, 2TR

IN L/R, INPUT 15/16

{31/32}, PLAYBACK

OUT, DEFINE

Lit if the selected

monitor source is on

Recall the selected signal to the monitor

DIMMER ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch the monitor dimmer function on/off

MONO MONITOR — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch MONO MONITOR on/off

MONITOR ON MAS-

TER FADER

— ON: lit, OFF: dark

If this is on, you can use the master fader to control the

monitor level, and the ON key to switch the monitor out-

put on/off

EFFECT BYPASS RACK 5–8 — ON: lit, OFF: dark Bypass the speciﬁed effect

TAP TEMPO

CURRENT PAGE —

Blink in synchroniza-

tion to the tempo

Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen

RACK 5–8 — Use the tap tempo function for the speciﬁed effect

MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1–8 — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off

METER

PEAK HOLD ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark Turn the meter PEAK HOLD function on/off

STEREO/MONO(C)

SEL

—

MONO (C): lit, STE-

REO: dark

Switch the top panel STEREO L/R METER function

Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys

258

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

PAGE CHANGE

PAGE BOOKMARK —

When storing a page:

Flash

When showing a

memorized page:

Blink

When not showing a

memorized page: Lit

Not memorized:

Dark

Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the

key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memo-

rized screen (press and release the key within two sec-

onds). Popup windows can also be memorized. In the case

of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized.

CLOSE POPUP — Flash Close the displayed popup window

CH SELECT INC, DEC — Flash Increment/Decrement the channel selection

SET BY SEL

SET [+48V] —

While pressing: Lit

Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off. Dur-

ing this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off.

SET [Ø] —

SET [PRE SEND] —

SET [TO STEREO] —

SET [TO MONO] —

SET [TO LCR] —

SET [INSERT ON] —

SET [DIRECT OUT] —

SET DEFAULT

VALUE

—— While pressing: Lit

Hold down this key and press the SELECTED CH encoder

to return to the default value. You can also return to the

default value by moving the cursor to the knob or fader in

the LCD screen, then holding down this key and pressing

the [ENTER] key.

SET NOMINAL

LEVEL

—— While pressing: Lit

While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the

fader of that channel to nominal level. You can also push a

SELECTED SEND encoder to set the send level to nominal

level. You can also return to nominal level by moving the

cursor to the knob or fader in the LCD screen, then hold-

ing down this key and pressing the [ENTER] key.

SENDS ON FADER

MIX1–16, MATRIX1–

—

Blinks in SENDS ON

FADER mode

Recall the Sends On Fader function to the selected MIX or

MATRIX

GEQ FADER ASSIGN — ON: lit, OFF: dark Turn the GEQ Fader Assign function on/off.

RECORDER

TRANSPORT

PLAY/PAUSE, STOP, FF/

Next, REW/Previous,

REC

Same as the indica-

tion for the corre-

sponding LCD

button

Recorder transport functions

AUTOREC While pressing: Lit

Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY.

Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is exe-

cuted during recording, the ﬁle being recorded will ﬁrst be

closed, and then recording will continue with a new ﬁle.

DIRECT PLAY

Song title or ﬁle name

of audio ﬁles

While pressing: Lit

Start playback of a speciﬁed audio ﬁle from the begining

only once.

The audio ﬁle to be played must be saved in the SONGS

folder within the YPE folder. Please note that you won’t be

able to specify a ﬁle that is in the root directory or another

folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE

LIST screen will change to \YPE\SONGS\.

HELP — — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch the Help function on/off

Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 LED Explanation

Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys

259

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

LS9 EDITOR

MASTER —

Flash Access the LS9 EDITOR screen

OVERVIEW

CH1–16, CH17–32,

{CH33–48, CH49–64 ,}

STIN, MIX, MATRIX,

ST/MONO, CUSTOM

FADER LAYER CH1–16,

{CUSTOM FADER

LAYER CH17–32}, CUS-

TOM FADER LAYER

STIN

SELECTED CHANNEL —

LIBRARY

DYNAMICS LIBRARY,

INPUT EQ LIBRARY,

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY,

EFFECT LIBRARY, GEQ

LIBRARY

PATCH EDITOR

INPUT PATCH, OUT-

PUT PATCH, INPUT

INSERT PATCH, OUT-

PUT INSERT PATCH,

DIRECT OUT PATCH,

PATCH LIST

RACK EDITOR RACK, RACK1–8

METER

INPUT METER, OUT-

PUT METER, CUSTOM

FADER LAYER

GROUP/LINK

MUTE GROUP, CHAN-

NEL LINK

SCENE

SCENE MEMORY,

RECALL SAFE, FADE

TIME

Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 LED Explanation

MIDI Data Format

260

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

This section explains the format of the data that the LS9 is able to understand, send, and receive.

1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is

ON.

They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.

1.2 NOTE ON (9n)

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is

ON.

They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.

1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

Tw o types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN]

(Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x

110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is

ON.

If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE

Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the

settings of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that

can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on

page 249.

If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE

Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number

(62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the

speciﬁed parameter.

Transmission

If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you

operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT

LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the

parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to

control changes” on page 249.

If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you

operate a speciﬁed parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h,

63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx

CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that

can be assigned to control changes” on page 249.

CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to LS9 Editor

because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will

match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)

CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.

If [TABLE] is selected

Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data

paramSteps = paramMax–paramMin + 1;

add = paramWidth / paramSteps;

mod = paramWidth–add * paramSteps;

curValue = paramSteps * add + mod / 2;

(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps

paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;

(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than

16,384 steps

paramWidth = 16384;

(2-1) When High and Low data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);

(2-2) When only Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);

(2-3) When only High data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);

(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than

2,097,152 steps

paramWidth = 2097152;

(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control

value(Low);

(3-2) When only Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);

(3-3) When only Middle data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;

(3-4) When only High data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;

(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control

value(Low);

(3-6) When only High and Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);

(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle)

* 128;

if ( rxValue > paramWidth)

rxValue = paramWidth;

param = ( rxValue–mod / 2) / add;

If [NRPN] is selected

MIDI Data Format

STATUS 1000nnnn 8n

Note off message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity(ignored)

STATUS 1001nnnn 9n

Note on message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 00

Control number (00)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 20

Control number (32)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,

102-119) *

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used.

* Control number 6, 38 can be used.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 01100010 62

NRPN LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter number LSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 01100011 63

NRPN MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter number MSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 00000110 06

Data entry MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter data MSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 00100110 26

Data entry LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter data LSB

* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not

be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly

whether or not the status byte is omitted.

MIDI Data Format

261

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

Reception

If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be

echoed from MIDI OUT.

If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE

Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages

are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene

memory and effect library are recalled according to the settings of the

[PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].

Transmission

If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according

to the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory and effect

library are recalled.

If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH]

channel.

If the recalled scene memory and effect library has been assigned to more than

one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for

each MIDI channel will be transmitted.

PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to LS9 Editor

because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will

match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)

You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.

If SINGLE is selected

You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.

You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.

A bank of up to 16 can be speciﬁed.

If MULTI is selected

The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.

The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select

messages will not be added.

You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.

2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

2.1 SONG SELECT (F3)

Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory

recorder.

2.2 TIMING CLOCK (F8)

Reception

This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four

times per quarter note.

Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.

2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

Reception

Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized

(e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of

400 ms.

This message is not subject to echoing.

2.4 SYSTEM RESET (FF)

Reception

When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,

Running Status will be cleared).

This message is not subject to echoing.

3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

3.1 MMC

< MMC STOP >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.

< MMC PLAY >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.

< MMC DEFERED PLAY >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.

< MMC RECORD STROBE >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped,

starts recording.

< MMC PAUSE >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing,

pauses.

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn

Program change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Program number (0-127)

STATUS 11110011 F3

Song select

Song number 0sssssss ss

Song number (0-127)

STATUS 11111000 F8

Timing clock

STATUS 11111110 FE

Active sensing

STATUS 11111111 FF

System reset

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000001 01

Stop(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000010 02

Play(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000011 03

Deferred Play(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000110 06

Record strobe

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00001001 09

Pause(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

262

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

3.2 BULK DUMP

The LS9 uses the following data types for a bulk dump.

*1) 0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),

*2) 1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only)

*3) 1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only)

*4) 1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only)

*5) 0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)

*6) 1–199 Effect Library Number (1–57 Request Only)

*7) 512–575 Input 1–64,

*8) 576–583 STIN 1L–4R,

*9) 768–783 MIX 1–16,

*10) 1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8 (LS9-32 only),

*11) 1280–1282 STEREO L–C,

*12) 512–519 GEQ 1–8,

*13) 512–515 EFFECT 1–4,

*14) 512 Current Data,

*15) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,

Data is lost when you write to the preset library.

The unique header (Model ID) identiﬁes whether the device is a LS9.

To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE

COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary

complement, and set bit 7 to 0.

CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F

Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time

when a Bulk Dump Request is received.

A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk

Dump Request.

In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of

7-bit data.

[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]

d[0-6]: actual data

b[0-7]: bulk data

b[0] = 0;

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

if( d[I]&0x80){

b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);

}

b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;

}

[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]

d[0-6]: actual data

b[0-7]: bulk data

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

b[0] <<= 1;

d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);

}

3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE

Reception

This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.

This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH]

matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a

PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the speciﬁed parameter will be controlled.

When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received, the current value of the speciﬁed

parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device

Number as the [Rx CH].

Transmission

If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which

CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER

CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.

In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be

transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.

4PARAMETER CHANGE details

4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP

4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Receive

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be

echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding

parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.

Transmission

Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when

[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the

[CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST].

Command rx/tx Function

F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 12 mm … mm dd

dd … ee F7

rx/tx

BULK DUMP

DATA

F0 43 2n 3E 12 mm … mm dd dd F7 rx

BULK DUMP

REQUEST

Module Name(mm) Data Number(dd)

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” *1) *14) *15)

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” *2) *7) *8)

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” *3) *9) *10) *11)

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” *4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11)

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” *5) *12)

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” *6) *13)

Mixer Setup “MIXERSET” Fix (512)

Outport Setup “OUT_PORT” Fix (512)

Monitor Setup “MONITOR_” Fix (512)

MIDI Setup “MIDI_SET” Fix (512)

Lib Number “LIB_NUM_” Fix (512)

Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_” Fix (512)

Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_” Fix (512)

Preference (Current) “PREF_CUR” Fix (512)

Preference (Admin) “PREF_ADM” Fix (512)

Preference (Guest) “PREF_GST” Fix (512)

User Deﬁned Keys (Current) “UDEF_CUR” Fix (512)

User Deﬁned Keys (Admin) “UDEF_ADM” Fix (512)

User Deﬁned Keys (Guest) “UDEF_GST” Fix (512)

Custom Fader Layer (Current) “CFAD_CUR” Fix (512)

Custom Fader Layer (Admin) “CFAD_ADM” Fix (512)

Custom Fader Layer (Guest) “CFAD_GST” Fix (512)

User Level (Current) “UKEY_CUR” Fix (512)

User Level (Guest) “UKEY_GST” Fix (512)

Command rx/tx function

F0 43 1n 3E 12 … F7

RARAMETER CHANGE

rx/tx

LS9 native parameter change

F0 43 3n 3E 12 … F7

PARAMETER REQUEST

rx/tx

LS9 native parameter request

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss sh

number -source start High

0sssssss sl

number -source start Low

0eeeeeee eh

number -source end High

0eeeeeee el

number -source end Low

0ddddddd dh

number -destination start High

0ddddddd dl

number -destination to start Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

FUNCTION NAME Source

start

Source

end

Destination

start

Copy ”LibCpy__” Valid – –

Paste ”LibPst__” – – Valid

Clear ”LibClr__” Valid – –

Cut ”LibCut__” Valid – –

Insert ”LibIns__” – – Valid

Edit Undo ”LibEdtUd” – – –

MODULE NAME function

SCENE LIB “SCENE___“ Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert,

EditUndo

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____“ Only Copy

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___“ Only Copy

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____“ Only Copy

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____“ Only Copy

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__“ Only Copy

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01000001 "A"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 "r"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Scene/Library number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Scene/Library number Low

0eeeeeee eh

Element High

0eeeeeee el

Element Low

0iiiiiii ih

Index High

0iiiiiii il

Index Low

0ccccccc ch

Channel High

0ccccccc cl

Channel Low

0000dddd dd

Data28–31bit

0ddddddd dd

Data21–27bit

0ddddddd dd

Data14–20bit

0ddddddd dd

Data7–13bit

0ddddddd dd

Data0–6bit

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

265

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)

Receive

The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH]

immediately the data is received.

4.4.3 Module Name

4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE

4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Transmission

When LS9 receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will

be sent back with the following Parameter change.

This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.

To p number is requested number or more.

-Example-

SCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101

Request Number:0

Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7

Request Number: 8

Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10

Request Number: 11

Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101

Request Number: 102

Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01000001 "A"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 "r"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Scene/Library number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Scene/Library number Low

0eeeeeee eh

Element High

0eeeeeee el

Element Low

0iiiiiii ih

Index High

0iiiiiii il

Index Low

0ccccccc ch

Channel High

0ccccccc cl

Channel Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MODULE NAME number size

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 0-300 (0:response only) 16

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 1-199 (1-40:response only) 16

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 1-199 (1-3:response only) 16

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” 1-199 (1-41:response only) 16

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 0-199 (0:response only) 16

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 1-199 (1–57:response only) 16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01000101 "E"

(ASCII CODE)

01111000 "x"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01110011 "s"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss nn

Data Status (0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data)

0nnnnnnn nh

Request Number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Request Number Low

0ttttttt nh

Top Number High

0ttttttt nl

Top Number Low

0eeeeeee nh

End Number High

0eeeeeee nl

End Number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

266

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)

Receive

The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH]

immediately the data is received.

4.5.3 Module Name

4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE –

4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Transmission

Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when

[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.

4.6.2 Function Name

4.6.3 Module Name

4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE –

4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Receive

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be

echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect

will function immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type).

4.7.2 Module Name

This will not work when the Effect Type is different.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01000101 "E"

(ASCII CODE)

01111000 "x"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01110011 "s"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Request Number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Request Number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MODULE NAME number

SCENE LIB “SCENE___“ 1-300

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____“ 41-199

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___“ 4-199

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____“ 42-199

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____“ 1-199

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__“ 58-199

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "C"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "o"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "l"

(ASCII CODE)

01010101 "U"

(ASCII CODE)

01101110 "n"

(ASCII CODE)

01010011 "S"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 "r"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Number Low

0ccccccc ch

Channel High

0ccccccc cl

Channel Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Function Number tx/rx

“ColUnStr“ Setup 0

User Deﬁned Key 0

Program Change 0

Control Change 0

Module Name

Mixer Setting “MIXERSET”

Outport Setting “OUT_PORT”

Monitor Setting “MONITOR_”

MIDI Setting “MIDI_SET”

Lib Number “LIB_NUM_”

Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_”

Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_”

Preference(Current) “PREF_CUR”

Preference(Admin) “PREF_ADM”

Preference(Guest) “PREF_GST”

User Deﬁned Keys(Current) “UDEF_CUR”

User Deﬁned Keys(Admin) “UDEF_ADM”

User Deﬁned Keys(Guest) “UDEF_GST”

Custom Fader Layer(Current) “CFAD_CUR”

Custom Fader Layer(Admin) “CFAD_ADM”

Custom Fader Layer(Guest) “CFAD_GST”

User Level(Current) “UKEY_CUR”

User Level(Guest) “UKEY_GST”

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001101 "M"

01101111 "o"

01100100 "d"

01000110 "F"

01111000 "x"

01010100 "T"

01110010 "r"

01100111 "g"

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0eeeeeee ee

Effect number (0:RACK5–3:RACK8)

0ppppppp pp

Release:0, Press:1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MODULE NAME channel

Freeze Play button ”FRZPLAY_” 0:RACK5, 2:RACK7

Freeze Record button ”FRZREC__” 0:RACK5, 2:RACK7

MIDI Data Format

267

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

4.8 FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL –

4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Receive

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be

echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

4.8.2 Module Name

4.9 LEVEL METER DATA

4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the

corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.

If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed

to be sent in at least every 10 seconds.

Receive

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering

data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and

time will vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed,

the transmission will be disabled.

When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.

4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)

Receive

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be

echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. the corresponding

metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of

time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).

When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be

immediately stopped [disabled].

Transmission

When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01000011 "C"

01101000 "h"

01101100 "l"

01010000 "P"

01101001 "i"

01110010 "r"

01000011 "C"

01110000 "p"

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss sh

Source Channel Number H *1)

0sssssss sl

Source Channel Number L *1)

0ddddddd dh

Destination Channel Number H *1)

0ddddddd dl

Destination Channel Number L *1)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MODULE NAME

Pair On (with Copy) ”PAIRONCP”

Pair On (with Reset Both) ”PAIRONRS”

Pair Off ”PAIROFF_”

*1) 0:CH1–63:CH64

256:MIX 1– 271:MIX 16

512:MATRIX 1–519:MATRIX 8

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00100001 21

REMOTE LEVEL METER

DATA 0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

0ddddddd dd

Data1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00010010 12

LS9

DATA

CATEGORY

00100001 21

REMOTE LEVEL METER

DATA 0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

0ccccccc ch

Count H

0ccccccc cl

Count L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Warning/Error Messages

268

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Warning/Error Messages

Message Meaning

xxx Parameters Copied. Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.

xxx Parameters Initialized. Parameter xxx was initialized.

xxx Parameters Pasted. Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.

xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer. Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.

Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8 Sources!

The Monitor Deﬁne function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to

assign more than this.

Cannot Bookmark This Popup. This popup window cannot be bookmarked.

Cannot Recall to Different Parameter Type! You attempted to recall a library of a different type.

Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library.

Cannot Select This Channel.

You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason.

Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library.

Cannot Undo! You pressed the [UNDO] button when Undo was not available.

Couldn’t Access File. File on the USB memory could not be accessed for some reason.

Couldn’t Write File. File could not be saved from the USB memory.

Current User Changed. [xxx] Current user was changed to [xxx].

Directory Not Empty! You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were ﬁles remaining in the directory.

EFFECT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was defeated because you switched from the RACK screen to a different screen.

External HA Connection Conﬂict!

External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA differs

from when the scene was stored.

File Access is Busy! The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB memory is being accessed.

File Already Exists!

The USB memory already contains a ﬁle/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting

to save, rename, or create.

File Error [xx]! Internal ﬁle access error

File Protected! Overwriting was not possible because the ﬁle on the USB memory is write-protected.

Help File Not Found! Can’t ﬁnd HELP ﬁle.

Illegal Address! The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid.

Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Network.

Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been

damaged for some reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer.

Illegal Storage Format! The USB memory could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported.

KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.

KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window to a differ-

ent screen.

Loading Aborted. Loading from USB memory was aborted.

Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low.

Maximum Number of Audio Files

Exceeded!

The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded.

Memory Error! All Memories were

Initialized.

All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to failure

of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer.

MIDI: Data Framing Error! An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.

MIDI: Data Overrun! An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.

MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.

MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.

No Access From Recorder! In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than YPE/SONGS/.

No Controllable Knob.

Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you

operated.

No Corresponding Help Items. A section in the HELP data cannot be found.

No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR.

Page Bookmarked. The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.

Password Changed. The password has been changed.

PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy! Audio ﬁle link playback is not possible because recording is in progress.

Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!

The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. If a malfunction has occurred, please con-

tact your Yamaha dealer.

Processing Aborted. Processing was interrupted.

Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted! Operation of the JPN button was cancelled because time is required for recorder processing.

Saving Aborted. Saving to the USB memory has been interrupted.

Scene #xxx is Empty!

No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that

it cannot be recalled.

Scene #xxx is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.

Scene #xxx is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.

Warning/Error Messages

269

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

SLOT x: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port.

Some Song Files Are Unidentiﬁed.

There was a song ﬁle that could not be identiﬁed. It is possible that the song being used for DIRECT

PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK is different than the song that was speciﬁed.

Song File Not Found! The ﬁle assigned to SCENE LINK or to the DIRECT PLAY user deﬁned key does not exist.

Storage Full! The ﬁle could not be saved because there is not enough space on the USB memory.

Storage Not Found! The USB memory could not be recognized.

Storage Not Ready! Access is not possible because the USB memory is not ready.

Sync Error! [xxx] The LS9 is not synchronized with the [xxx] signal.

Tap Operation Ignored. Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.

This Operation is Not Allowed. This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission.

Too Large Files! Loading Failed.

Loading is not possible because the bitmap ﬁle is too large. The maximum supported ﬁle size is

307,256 bytes.

Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare. More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then compare with Flex15GEQ.

Too Many EQ Bands Used! Cannot Paste! More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then paste to Flex15GEQ.

Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded! The I/O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity.

Unsupported File Format! The ﬁle you attempted to load from the USB memory is of an unsupported format.

USB: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.

USB: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.

USB: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port.

USB: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the USB connector output port.

USB Currently Active for Recorder

function!

Since the USB memory recorder is recording or playing back, functions such as Save/Load cannot be

used.

USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!

The recorder cannot oparate, since mixer scene memory/library data is being saved or loaded in USB

memory.

USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped! Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB memory processing.

USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.

Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory capacity ran out while the USB memory

recorder was operating.

USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder

Stopped.

Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory was disconnected while the USB memory

recorder was operating.

USB over current Error! Disconnect USB

device.

Excessive current has occurred at the USB connector.

Disconnect the USB memory that is connected to the USB connector.

Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped! Recorder was halted because synchronization with the word clock was lost.

Wrong Audio File Format! The format of the audio ﬁle is invalid.

Wrong Password! The password you input was incorrect.

Wrong Word Clock!

The LS9 cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD

CLOCK screen is not appropriate.

You Cannot Create User Key. The current user does not have permission to create a user key.

Message Meaning

Troubleshooting

270

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on, panel LEDs

and the LCD display do not light

❍ Are the LCD contrast and panel brightness adjusted appropriately? You can adjust the LCD contrast by

holding down the [HOME] key and turning the dial.

❍ Is the LS9’s POWER switch turned on?

❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact your Yamaha dealer.

Sound is not input

❍ Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 44)

❍ Is a signal being input from the external device?

❍ Is the input port patched to an input channel? (→ p. 99)

❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57)

❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 115)

❍ Could insert be turned on even though it has not been speciﬁed correctly? (→ p. 101)

❍ Is the [ON] key indicator of the input channel lit?

❍ Is the fader of the input channel raised?

Sound is not output

❍ Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 44)

❍ Is the [ON] key indicator of the STEREO channel lit?

❍ Is an output port patched to the output channel? (→ p. 95)

❍ Could LCR be on, and the CSR value be set to 1.0? (→ p. 58)

Sound is not output from headphones

or the MONITOR OUT jacks

❍ Is the [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume?

Sound is not loud enough

❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57)

❍ Is the fader of the input channel raised?

❍ Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting? (→ p. 115)

❍ Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an extreme setting? (→ p. 117)

❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 115)

❍ Is the fader of the output channel raised?

❍ Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels. (→ p. 155)

Sound is distorted

❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 206)

❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57)

❍ Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high?

❍ Could the fader of the STEREO channel be raised too high?

❍ Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely high setting? (→ p. 115)

Sound is output even though it is not

patched to an output channel

❍ Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out? (→ p. 103)

❍ Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out? (→ p. 101)

The volume of a speciﬁc channel rises

and falls

❍ Could GATE/COMP be set to ducking? (→ p. 117)

Operating a fader does not control the

level as you expect

❍ Is SENDS ON FADER selected and INPUT TO MIX FADER and so on active in the panel?

Only the sound of a speciﬁc channel is

heard from the MONITOR OUT or

PHONES jack

❍ Could a [CUE] key be on?

Noise occurs from an externally

connected recorder or other device

❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 206)

❍ Could the input signal be unsynchronized?

❍ Could oscillator or talkback be turned on? (→ p. 151, 153)

High frequency range is attenuated

❍ Could emphasis be applied? This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the

emphasis data. (→ p. 206)

❍ Could EQ be applied? (→ p. 115)

An input signal is being input, but

there’s no monitor output

❍ Is the dimmer applied?

❍ Is the MONITOR C assigned even though its output port has not been connected to external device.

Not enough headroom, especially

when EQ boost is applied

❍ Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level. (→ p. 115)

Signal is delayed ❍ Check whether the delay setting for each channel is set correctly. (→ p. 95)

Turning a SELECTED SEND encoder

does not change the send level to the

MIX/MATRIX bus

❍ Is the MIX/MATRIX turned on?

❍ Is the MIX/MATRIX [ON] turned on?

❍ Is the MIX bus set to VARI type? (→ p. 213)

❍ If the send point is set to POST, could the fader have been lowered?

Can’t save scene memory or library

data

❍ Are you attempting to save the data to a read-only scene/library or a protected scene? (→ p. 129)

Can’t save to USB memory

❍ Is the USB memory protected?

❍ Does the USB memory have enough free capacity to save the data?

❍ When formatting the USB memory, format it in FAT32 or FAT16 format.

❍ Could the recorder be playing back?

Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data

❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly? (→ p. 178)

❍ Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices? (→ p. 178)

❍ Has an event been assigned for the program change? (→ p. 180)

When you recall a scene, some

channels/parameters are not updated

❍ Could that channel or parameter be set to Recall Safe? Could Focus be turned off in the scene you

recalled? Could user level restrictions have been speciﬁed? (→ p. 139, 140, 192)

Troubleshooting

271

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

You turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT

PARAM screen, but it is automatically

defeated

❍ This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display. (→ p. 170)

When you recall a scene, it takes a

certain amount of time for the faders to

stop

❍ Could you have speciﬁed a fade time? (→ p. 143)

The panel LEDs or LCD display are too

dark / too bright

❍ This can be adjusted in the MISC SETUP screen. (→ p. 217)

Signal level of a speciﬁc frequency is

low

❍ Could the EQ gain be turned down excessively?

❍ Routing a signal through a GEQ or effect will delay it relative to other signals. If this signal is mixed with

the signal via a different signal path, a comb ﬁltering effect will cause the level of a speciﬁc frequency

to be decreased.

Can’t control an external head amp

(AD8HR)

❍ Is the external head amp connected to the speciﬁed port?

❍ Is the audio output signal of the external head amp being input via an I/O card to SLOT 1–3?

❍ Is the input port of the external head amp set correctly?

❍ Could there be a problem with the cable that connects the LS9 and external head amp? Are you using

a D-sub 9-pin cross cable?

Can’t control the LS9 by LS9 Editor.

❍ Refer to LS9 Editor installation guide on our web site.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

In the LCD display, there are some

black points (unlit) or white points

(always lit).

❍ Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs and not a malfunction.

General Specifications

272

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

General Speciﬁcations

Signal Delay Less than 2.5 ms (INPUT to OMNI OUT @Fs=48kHz)

Dimensions (WxHxD)

LS9-16: 480 x 220 x 500 mm

LS9-32: 884 x 220 x 500 mm

Net Weight

LS9-16: 12.0 kg

LS9-32: 19.4 kg

Power Requirements

LS9-16: 95 W, 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz

LS9-32: 170 W, 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz

Temperature Range

Operating: +10˚C to +35˚C

Storage: -20˚C to +60˚C

Included Accessories Owner’s Manual, AC Power Cord, Dust Cover (only LS9-32)

Optional Accessories mini-YGDAI cards, Gooseneck Light LA1L (for LS9-32), Rack Mount Kit RK1

AC Power Cord Length 250 cm

Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

Sampling Frequency

External Clock

Frequency Range 39.69 50.88 kHz

Jitter of PLL *

* The jitter of input

clock is less than 1ns.

Digital Input Fs = 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz 10

Digital Input Fs = 39.69–50.88 kHz 20

Sampling Frequency

Internal Clock

Frequency

Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz 44.1

kHz

Word Clock: INT 48 kHz 48

Accuracy Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz 50 ppm

Jitter Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz 5 ns

Fader

Travel (Stroke) Resolution: 1,024 steps, +10 to -138, -∞ dB for all faders 100

Position Error ±1.5

Moving Time From end to the other end, Under normal software control 0.3 sec

Input/output characteristics

273

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

❏ Analog Input Characteristics

*1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dBu (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all fad-

ers and level controls are maximum position.)

*2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)

* In these speciﬁcations, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.

* All input AD converters are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling.

* +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT XLR type connectors via each individual software controlled switch.

❏ Analog Output Characteristics

*1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)

*2. PHONES OUT stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND)

*3. There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level.

*4. The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max.

* In these speciﬁcations, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.

* All output DA converters are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling.

❏ Digital Input Characteristics

❏ Digital Output Characteristics

Input/output characteristics

Input Terminals GAIN

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Input Level

Connector

Sensitivity

Nominal

Max. before

clip

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

-62 dB

3 kΩ

50-600Ω Mics &

600Ω Lines

-82 dBu

(61.6 µV)

-62 dBu

(0.616 mV)

-42 dBu

(6.16 mV)

XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

+10 dB

-10 dBu

(245 mV)

+10 dBu

(2.45 V)

+30 dBu

(24.5 V)

Output Terminals

Actual Source

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Gain Switch

Output Level

Connector

Nominal

Max. before

clip

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

75 Ω 600 Ω Lines

+24 dB

(default)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.3 V)

XLR-3-32 type

(Balanced)

+18 dB

-2 dBu

(616 mV)

+18 dBu

(6.16 V)

PHONES OUT 15 Ω

8 Ω Phones —

75 mW

150 mW

Stereo Phone

Jack (TRS)

(Unbalanced)

40 Ω Phones —

65 mW

150 mW

Terminal Format Data Length Level Connector

2TR IN DIGITAL Coaxial IEC-60958 24 bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω RCA Pin Jack

Terminal Format Data Length Level Connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL Coaxial

IEC-60958

Consumer Use

24 bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω RCA Pin Jack

Input/output characteristics

274

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

❏ I/O Slot Characteristics

The rear panel provides one slot (LS9-16) or two slots (LS9-32) in which separately sold mini-YGDAI cards can be installed.

The following types of card can be used.

Only Slot 1 has a serial interface (LS9-32).

Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most recent information on mini-YGDAI cards.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

❏ Control I/O Characteristics

*1. Bus-powered hubs are not supported.

*2. 4pin=+12V, 3pin=GND, Supported lamp: max. 5W

Card Name Function Input Output

The number of available cards

LS9-16 LS9-32

MY8-AD24 Analog In 8In — 1 2

MY8-AD96 Analog In 8In — 1 2

MY8-ADDA96 Analog In/Out 8In 8Out 1 2

MY8-AE AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2

MY8-AE96 AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2

MY8-AE96S AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2

MY8-AEB AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2

MY8-AT ADAT 8In 8Out 1 2

MY8-DA96 Analog Out — 8Out 1 2

MY8-TD TASCAM 8In 8Out 1 2

MY4-DA Analog Out — 4Out 1 2

MY4-AD Analog In 4In — 1 2

MY16-AE AES/EBU 16In 16Out 1 2

MY16-AT ADAT 16In 16Out 1 2

MY16-TD TASCAM 16In 16Out 1 2

MY16-CII CobraNet 16In 16Out 1 2

Terminal Format Level Connector

MIDI

IN MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

OUT MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

WORD CLOCK

IN — TTL/75Ω terminated BNC Connector

OUT — TTL/75Ω BNC Connector

NETWORK (Ethernet) 100Base-T 100Base-T RJ-45

USB USB 1.1 Host

USB

USB A Connector (Female)

LAMP (LS9-32 only) — 0V–12V

XLR-4-31 type

Electrical characteristics

275

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator: 150 ohms

❏ Frequency Response Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz@20Hz–20kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1kHz

❏ Gain Error Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz@1kHz

❏ Total Harmonic Distortion Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz

*Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18dB/octave ﬁlter @80kHz

❏ Hum & Noise Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz, EIN = Equivalent Input Noise

* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

❏ Dynamic Range Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz

* Dynamic range is measured with a 6dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

Electrical characteristics

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω GAIN: max. -1.5 0.0 0.5

PHONES OUT 8 Ω GAIN: max. -3.0 0.0 0.5

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω

Input level: -62dBu, GAIN: max. → Output level:

+4.0dBu (Typ.)

-2.0 0.0 2.0

Input level: +10dBu, GAIN: min. → Output level:

+4.0dBu (Typ.)

-2.0 0.0 2.0

Internal Oscillator

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω Full scale output, Output level: +24.0dBu -0.5 0.0 0.5

PHONES OUT 8 Ω

-30dBFs, Phones level control: max. → Output

level: 0dBu (Typ.)

-0.5 0.0 0.5

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω

+4dBu@20Hz-20kHz, GAIN: max. 0.1

+4dBu@20Hz-20kHz, GAIN: min. 0.05

Internal Oscillator

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω Full scale output @1kHz 0.02

PHONES OUT 8 Ω

Full scale output @1kHz, Phones level control:

max.

0.2

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω

Rs=150Ω, GAIN: max.

Master fader: nominal, One channel fader: nom-

inal

-128

EIN

dBu

-62

Rs=150Ω, GAIN: min.

Master fader: nominal, One channel fader: nom-

inal

-84 -79

All Inputs <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> 600 Ω

Rs=150Ω, GAINs: min.

Master fader: nominal, All channel faders: nomi-

nal

-67

All Inputs <LS9-32> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω

Rs=150Ω, GAINs: min

Master fader: nominal, All channel faders: nomi-

nal

-64

—

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω Residual output noise, Stereo Master: off -86

— PHONES OUT 8 Ω Residual output noise, Phones level control: min. -86

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: min. 108

—

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω DA Converter 110

Electrical characteristics

276

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

❏ Crosstalk@1kHz

❏ Maximum Voltage Gain@1kHz

❏ Phantom Voltage

From To Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT n INPUT (n-1) or (n+1) CH 1-16 {1-32}, Adjacent inputs, GAIN: min. -80

OMNI OUT n OMNI OUT (n-1) or (n+1) OMNI OUT 1-8 {1-16}, Input to output -80

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>

OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>

600 Ω Rs=150Ω, Input GAIN: max. 86 dB

Output Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>

INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>

hot & cold: No load 46 48 50 V

Mixer Basic Parameters

277

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

❏ Libraries

❏ Input Function

❏ Output Function

❏ Output Port

❏ Processor

Mixer Basic Parameters

Name Number Total

Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 300 301

Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199

Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199

Dynamics Library Preset 41 + User 158 199

Effect Library Preset 57 + User 142 199

GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

Function Parameter

Phase Normal/Reverse

Attenuator –96 to +24 dB

HPF

Slope= 12 dB/Oct

Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz

4 Band Equal-

izer

Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB

Q= 0.10 to 10.0

Low Shelving (Low Band)

High Shelving, LPF (High Band)

Type I/Type II

Insert

(only ch1-32)

Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Direct Out Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ

Dynamics 1

Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander

Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Hold= 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec

Decay= 5 msec to 42.3 sec (Release)

Releace= 5msec to 42.3 sec

Range= –70 dB to 0 dB

Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16

Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block)

Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF

Dynamics2

Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Com-

pander S

Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec

Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16

Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block)

Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

On On/Off

Mute Group 8 Groups

Mix Send

16 sends

Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes

Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100%

Function Parameter

Attenuator –96 to +24 dB

4Band Equalizer

Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB

Q= 0.10 to 10.0

Low Shelving (Low Band)

High Shelving, LPF (High Band)

Type I/Type II

Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Dynamics 1

Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Com-

pander S

Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec

Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to + 18 dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16

MIX1-16/MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C)

(8ch block)

Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

On On/Off

Mute Group 8 Groups

Mix to Matrix

Stereo to Matrix

Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On

Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

Oscillator

Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step)

On/Off= Software control

Function Parameter

Out Port Delay 0 msec to 600 msec

Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse

Attenuator –96 to +24 dB

Function Parameter

GEQ 31 bands x 4(8) systems

Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 4 systems

Pin Assignment

278

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

❏ LAMP (LS9-32 only)

Pin Assignment

Pin Signal Name

1NC

2NC

3 GND

4 +12V

Dimensions

279

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves

the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications,

equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

European models

Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.

Inrush Current: 16A

Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4

Dimensions

25 430

480

220

500

220

500

884

834 25

Unit : mm

LS9-16

LS9-32

Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit (sold separately)

280

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

You can attach the optional RK-1 rackmount kit to the LS9-16 or LS9-32 and mount it in a rack or an

installed system.

Make sure that the power is turned off.

Remove screws “A” and detach the side pads.

At the locations indicated by the arrows, tighten the screws to attach the rackmount hard-

ware.

The mixer can be attached at either of two angles, as shown in the following illustration.

Attach the hardware to the other side in the same way.

Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit (sold separately)

•Keep the side pad screws together with the pads you removed.

NOTE

Side pad

• When attaching the RK1 rackmount kit, make sure that the power is turned off. You must use the screws

that are included with the RK1.

CAUTION

MIDI Implementation Chart

281

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [ Digital Mixing Console ] Date :8-Aug-2006

Model LS9-16/32 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16 Memorized

Channel Changed 1 - 16 1 - 16

Default x 1, 3 Memorized

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note x 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** x

Velocity Note ON x o 9nH, v=1-127 Effect Control

Note OFF x x

After Key's x x

Touch Ch's x x

Pitch Bend x x

0,32 o o Bank Select

6,38 o o Data Entry

98,99 o o NRPN LSB,MSB

1-31,33-98, o o Assignable Cntrl

Control 102-119

Change

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127 Assignable

Change : True # ************** 0 - 300

System Exclusive o *1 o *1,*2

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x o Recorder Control

: Tune x x

System : Clock x o Effect Control

Real Time: Commands x x

:All Sound Off x x

Aux :Reset All Cntrls x x

:Local ON/OFF x x

Mes- :All Notes OFF x x

sages:Active Sense x o

:Reset x o

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

Notes: *1 :Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request.

*2 :MMC

282

Index

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Numerics

2TR IN DIGITAL jack .........................................25

2TR OUT DIGITAL jack .....................................25

AC IN connector.................................................25

Adjusting faders ...............................................223

Adjusting input/output gain...............................224

Administrator ....................................................187

Analog input connections ...................................41

Analog output connections.................................42

Assigning a name...............................................34

Block Diagram................................ End of Manual

BRIGHTNESS field ..........................................217

Buttons ...............................................................32

Calibration function ..................................223, 224

Cascade connections.......................................209

CH CLEAR screen ...........................................128

CH COPY screen .............................................126

CH LINK screen ...............................................124

CH MOVE screen.............................................127

[CHANNEL JOB] key .........................................19

Channel link .....................................................124

Channel module section.....................................17

Channel parameters

Copying.....................................................126

Initializing ..................................................128

Moving ......................................................127

COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H) ........231

COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S).........231

COMPARE button ..............................................39

COMPRESSOR ...............................................230

Connections .......................................................41

Console lock.....................................................197

Constant display area ........................................30

CONTRAST field..............................................217

Control changes ...............................................183

Cooling fan vent .................................................25

COPY button ......................................................39

Cue function .............................................145, 148

[CUE] key .........................................................149

CUE screen..................................................... 149

Cursor ............................................................... 32

[CUSTOM FADER] key..................................... 91

Custom fader layer............................................ 91

Data entry section ............................................. 22

DE-ESSER...................................................... 231

DEF button ........................................................ 38

Digital input/output connections ........................ 43

Dimensions ..................................................... 279

DIRECT field ..................................................... 82

Direct output.................................................... 103

Display ........................................................ 20, 30

DISPLAY ACCESS section......................... 19, 29

DUCKING........................................................ 229

DYNA field......................................................... 82

Dynamics ........................................................ 117

[DYNAMICS 1] encoder .................................... 21

[DYNAMICS 2] encoder .................................... 21

DYNAMICS Library List................................... 227

Dynamics parameter ....................................... 229

Effect Type List ............................................... 232

Effects ............................................................. 166

Editing parameters................................... 170

Freeze...................................................... 173

Inserting ................................................... 168

Mounting .................................................. 158

Send/return .............................................. 167

Tap tempo................................................ 172

Effects and tempo synchronization ................. 244

Effects Parameters.......................................... 233

Electrical characteristics.................................. 275

EQ ................................................................... 115

EQ field ............................................................. 82

EQ [HIGH]/[HIGH MID]/

[LOW MID]/[LOW] keys.................................. 22

EQ Library List ................................................ 225

EQ [Q]/[FREQUENCY]/[GAIN] encoders .......... 21

Equalizer ......................................................... 115

Error Messages............................................... 268

EXPANDER .................................................... 230

External head amp .......................................... 175

Index

283

Index

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

Fade function ...................................................143

FADER field .......................................................82

Fader layer.........................................................27

Firmware versionn .............................................14

Focus function .................................................139

Front panel.........................................................26

Functions that can be

assigned to user-defined keys ......................257

GATE ...............................................................229

General Specifications.....................................272

GEQ.................................................................161

Graphic EQ ......................................................161

31BandGEQ .....................................161, 163

Flex15GEQ.......................................161, 164

Inserting....................................................161

Mounting...................................................158

Grounding screw................................................25

Guest ...............................................................187

HA field ..............................................................82

[HA GAIN] encoder ............................................21

HA settings ........................................................47

Head amp settings.............................................47

Headphone output jack......................................26

Help function....................................................218

[HOME] key ...........................................22, 27, 82

Initializing internal memory ..............................222

INPUT channels...........................................13, 53

Input channels .............................................13, 53

Head amp settings......................................57

Sending to MIX bus ....................................62

Sending to STEREO bus............................50

Sending to STEREO/MONO bus................58

INPUT jacks.......................................................24

Input patching ....................................................99

Input/output characteristics..............................273

Insert connections............................................101

INSERT field ......................................................82

Internal clock....................................................215

IP address........................................................216

Keyboard window...............................................34

Knobs.................................................................32

LAMP connector (LS9-32 only)..........................25

LAYER section.............................................19, 27

LCR mode....................................................58, 71

Level Diagram.................................End of Manual

LIB button...........................................................35

Libraries .............................................35, 120, 174

List window ........................................................32

LS9 Editor ........................................................216

LS9-16 ...............................................................11

LS9-32 ...............................................................11

MAC address ...................................................216

MATRIX buses.................................................213

MATRIX channels ........................................13, 67

[METER] key......................................................19

METER screen.................................................155

Meters ..............................................................155

MIDI .................................................................177

MIDI Data Format ............................................260

MIDI Implementation Chart ..............................281

MIDI IN/OUT connectors....................................25

MISC SETUP screen .......................................206

MIX bus types (VARI/FIXED).............................14

MIX buses ........................................................213

MIX channels ...............................................13, 67

Sending to MATRIX buses .........................75

Sending to STEREO/MONO bus................71

MIX/MATRIX SELECT section...........................20

MMC ................................................................186

Monitor function .......................................145, 146

[MONITOR] key .................................................19

MONITOR screen ............................................146

MONO channels ..........................................13, 67

MUTE field .........................................................82

Mute group.......................................................121

MUTE GROUP screen.....................................121

Mute safe .........................................................123

284

Index

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Network address ..............................................216

NETWORK connector ................................25, 216

OMNI OUT jacks ................................................24

Oscillator ..........................................................153

OSCILLATOR screen.......................................153

Output channels ...........................................13, 67

Output patching..................................................95

Overview ..............................................................9

[PAN] encoder....................................................21

PAN field ............................................................82

Parameter changes..........................................185

Password .................................................188, 191

PASTE button ....................................................39

PATCH field .......................................................82

PHONES LEVEL control ....................................26

PHONES OUT jack ............................................26

Pin Assignment ................................................278

Playback...........................................................110

Popup windows ..................................................31

POWER switch...................................................25

Power user .......................................................187

Preferences......................................................194

Program changes.............................................180

[RACK 1-4] key ..................................................19

[RACK 5-8] key ..................................................19

RACK screen ...........................................161, 167

Rear panel....................................................11, 23

Recall Safe function .........................................140

RECALL SAFE screen .....................................140

Recorder ..........................................................105

[RECORDER] key ..............................................19

RECORDER screen.........................................106

Recording.........................................................108

SAVE/LOAD popup window.............................199

SCENE FADE screen ......................................143

SCENE FOCUS screen ...................................139

SCENE LIST screen ........................................129

Scene memory ................................................ 129

Clearing.................................................... 137

Constant display area ................................ 30

Copying/pasting ....................................... 136

Cutting...................................................... 138

Initializing current scene............................. 45

Inserting ................................................... 138

Recalling .................................................. 131

Sorting and renaming............................... 134

Storing...................................................... 129

[SCENE MEMORY] key .................................... 19

SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen ................... 113

SELECTED CH VIEW screen ..................... 31, 82

Selected channel............................................... 30

SELECTED CHANNEL section................... 21, 81

Adjusting send levels ................................. 84

Assigning to mute group ............................ 89

Basic operations......................................... 29

Direct output settings ................................. 88

Dynamics settings...................................... 87

HA settings................................................. 85

HPF/EQ settings ........................................ 87

Insert settings............................................. 88

Output patching.......................................... 86

Pan/balance ............................................... 86

Recall Safe settings ................................... 88

Sending signal to MIX bus ......................... 62

Turning a channel on/off ............................ 89

[SELECTED SEND] encoder ............................ 21

SEND field......................................................... 82

SENDS ON FADER mode .......................... 65, 78

[SETUP] key...................................................... 19

Slots ............................................................ 24, 44

ST IN channels............................................ 13, 53

ST IN section..................................................... 17

ST/MONO mode ......................................... 58, 71

STEREO channels ...................................... 13, 67

STEREO MASTER section ............................... 18

Stereo meter / Cue section ............................... 20

STEREO/MONO channels

Sending to MATRIX buses......................... 75

SYSTEM SETUP screen................................. 205

285

Index

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

Appendices

Talkback ..........................................................151

TALKBACK screen ..........................................151

TITLE LIST screen...........................................110

Tool buttons .......................................................35

Top panel...............................................12, 15, 27

Troubleshooting ...............................................270

USB connector...................................................22

USB memory

Editing files ...............................................201

Formatting ................................................204

Loading.....................................................200

Saving.......................................................199

USB memory recorder .....................................105

User .................................................................187

User authentication keys .................187, 188, 192

User defined keys ............................132, 196, 257

USER DEFINED KEYS section .........18, 132, 196

User level.................................................187, 192

USER SETUP screen ..............................187, 205

Virtual rack.......................................................157

VIRTUAL RACK screen...................................158

Warning ...........................................................268

Word clock ...........................................14, 46, 206

WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors ..................25

WORD CLOCK popup window ..................46, 206

286

LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual

■ LS9-16/LS9-32 Block Diagram

+48V

[INPUT]

[2TR IN DIGITAL]

COAXIAL

2TR IN DIGITAL

[1-16{32}]

INPUT

+48V

+48V MASTER

[SLOT

{SLOT1,SLOT2}]

SLOT {SLOT1}

{SLOT2}

SLOT IN

METER

SLOT IN

METER

To CASCADE IN

SELECT

METER

GAIN/TRIM

INPUT 15,16{31,32}

2TR IN

To MONITOR SELECT

PLAYBACK OUT

METER

TALKBACK

INPUT 1-16{32}

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

1-16{32}

INPUT

PATCH

{64}

2TR IN L,R

PLAYBACK

OUT L,R

To OUTPUT PATCH

CH 1-32{64}

To RACKIN PATCH

INSERT OUT 1-32

INSERT IN 1-32

PRE HPF

METER

INSERT

PATCH

SLOT 1-16

{SLOT1 1-16}

{SLOT2 1-16}

SLOT 1-16

{SLOT1 1-16}

{SLOT2 1-16}

RACK1 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK2 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK3 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK4 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK5 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK6 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK7 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK8 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK5

EFFECT CUE

RACK

METER

MIX OUT

1-16

MATRIX OUT

1-8

STEREO OUT

L,R,MONO(C)

INSERT OUT

1-32

MIX

INSERT OUT

1-16

STEREO

INSERT OUT

L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX

INSERT OUT

1-8

RACK

PATCH

RACK1 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK2 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK3 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK4 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK5 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK6 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK7 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK8 IN

A(L)/B(R)

RACK1

METER

RACK IN

31BandGEQ

Flex15GEQ

RACK IN A

RACK IN B

RACK OUT

RACK OUT A

RACK OUT B

METER

RACK IN

31BandGEQ

RACK OUT

Flex15GEQ

RACK IN A

RACK IN B

RACK OUT A

RACK OUT B

RACK IN L

RACK IN R

METER

RACK OUT L

RACK OUT R

EFFECT

RACK6 (same as RACK5)

RACK7 (same as RACK5)

RACK8 (same as RACK5)

METER

RACK2 (same as RACK1)

RACK3 (same as RACK1)

RACK4 (same as RACK1)

METER

RACK1 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK2 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK3 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK4 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK5 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK6 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK7 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

RACK8 OUT

A(L)/B(R)

OUTPUTS

MIX CASCADE OUT 1-16

STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX CASCADE OUT 1-8

CUE CASCADE OUT L,R

DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}

MIX OUT 1-16

STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX OUT 1-8

MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)

CH INSERT OUT 1-32

MIX INSERT OUT 1-16

STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8

DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}

MIX OUT 1-16

STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX OUT 1-8

MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)

DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}

MIX OUT 1-16

STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C),L+C,R+C

MATRIX OUT 1-8

MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)

USB MEMORY RECORDER

DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}

MIX OUT 1-16

STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C),L+C,R+C

MATRIX OUT 1-8

MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)

PHONES OUT LR

ATT

RECORDER CUE

To INPUT PATCH

To MONITOR SELECT

OUTPUT

PATCH

OUTPUT

PATCH

DELAY

(MAX:600ms)

DELAY

(MAX:600ms)

DELAY

(MAX:600ms)

DELAY

(MAX:600ms)

METER

SLOT OUT

OMNI OUT

2TR OUT

TRIM

8{16}

DIT

PHONES LEVEL

SLOT{SLOT1}

{SLOT2}

COAXIAL

[PHONES]

[SLOT

{SLOT1,SLOT2}]

[OMNI OUT](1-8{16})

[2TR OUT DIGITAL]

Tip

Ring

Sleeve

RECORDER

PATCH

ATT

RECORDER IN

METER

RECORDER CUE

PLAYBACK OUT

DECODER

ENCODER

PLAYBACK OUT

USB

OUTPUT

PATCH

METER

To MATRIX INSERT IN

CH INSERT IN 1-32

MIX INSERT IN 1-16

STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8

To CH INSERT IN

To MIX INSERT IN

To STEREO INSERT IN

CUE L

CUE R

KEYIN CUE

EFFECT CUE

RECORDER CUE

KEYIN CH1-32{64}

KEYIN ST IN1L-4R

RACK 5-8 OUT L/R

RECORDER IN L/R

PLAYBACK OUT L/R

KEYIN CUE

SELECT

EFFECT CUE

SELECT

RECORDER CUE

SELECT

BAL

LCR

ST IN 1L-4R

PRE HPF

PRE EQ

ATT

EQ OUT

GR METER

COMP

COMPAND

DE-ESSER

KEYIN CUE

Keyin Filter

Keyin

Self PRE EQ

Self POST EQ

MIX13-16 OUT

ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ

PRE FADER

LEVEL

PRE FADER

POST ON

LR MONO

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

TO MONO TO ST

TO LCR

PAN MODE

ST L

ST R

MIX1,3...15

MIX2,4...16

POST ON

To MIX

FIXED

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

To MIX

FIXED

STEREO

To MIX

VARI

To MIX

VARI

STEREO

PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON

LEVEL

BAL

PAN LINK

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R

MONO(C)

METER

HPF

METER

4BAND

PRE EQ POST EQ

METER

DYNA1OUT

METER

GATE

DUCK

EXPAND

COMP

GR METER

DYNA2OUT

METER METER METER

CSR

METER

MONITOR L

METER

MONITOR R

METER

MONITOR MONO(C)

MONO

MONITOR L

MONITOR R

MONITOR MONO(C)

2TRD L,R

INPUT 15,16{31,32}

PLAYBACK OUT

STEREO OUT L,R

STEREO OUT MONO(C)

STEREO OUT L,C,R

2TRD L,R

INPUT 15,16{31,32}

PLAYBACK OUT

STEREO OUT

L,R

STEREO OUT

MONO(C)

MIX OUT1-16

MATRIX OUT1-8

DEFINE

MIX

(MAX:8ch)

MONITOR SELECT

To PHONES OUT

CUE LOGIC

TALKBACK ON

MONITOR DIMM ON MONITOR LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL LINK

+MONO(C)

PHONES L

PHONES R

MONITOR OUT L

MONITOR OUT R

MONITOR OUT MONO(C)

To PHONES OUT

To OUTPUT PATCH

DIMMER

CUE TRIM

(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)

CUE L

CUE R

MONO

METER

CUE L

METER

CUE R

... ...

15 16

MATRIX CUE

CASCADE IN

SLOT 1-16

{SLOT1 1-16}

{SLOT2 1-16}

CASCADE

SELECT

MIX

(C)

12 78 LR

CASCADE OUT

MIX CASCADE OUT1-16

STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX CASCADE OUT1-8

CUE CASCADE OUT LR

To OUTPUT PATCH

METER

OSCILLATOR

Sine Wave

Pink Noise

Burst Noise

HPF LPF

LEVEL

OSC

KEYIN CUE

PAN LINK

INSERT

PAN

To MIX

LCR

ON LEVEL

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

PRE EQ

EQ OUT

POST EQ

DYNA1OUT DYNA2OUT

Keyin

Self PRE EQ

Self POST EQ

MIX13-16 OUT

CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ{16}

CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48,49-56,57-64]POST EQ{32}

PRE HPF

GR METER

Keyin Filter

PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER

PRE FADER

INSERT

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

LEVEL

FIXED

To MIX

FIXED

STEREO

To MIX

VARI

To MIX

VARI

STEREO

POST ON

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R

POST ON

INSERT OUT

LEVEL

PAN

DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}

LR MONO

POST PAN L

POST PAN R

TO MONO TO ST

TO LCR

PAN MODE

To OUTPUT PATCH

To RECORDER IN PATCH

ST L

MONO(C)

ST R

MIX1,3...15

MIX2,4...16

CUE L

CUE R

HPF

METER

ATT

4BAND

GR METER

GATE

DUCK

EXPAND

COMP

METER METER METER

COMP

COMPAND

DE-ESSER

METER METER

CSR

INSERT

PAN

MIX 1-16

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

INSERT OUT 1-16

MIX

INSERT IN 1-16

MIX

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

METER

INSERT

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

PRE EQ POST EQ

EQ OUT

METER

DYNA OUT

METER

PRE FADER

METER

INSERT

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

LEVEL

PRE FADER

Keyin

Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/

MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ

LEVEL

CUE ON

MATRIX1,3...7

MATRIX2,4...8

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL

PRE FADER / POST ON

To MATRIX

VARI

To MATRIX

VARI

STEREO

ST L

POST ON

METER

POST ON

MIX OUT1-16

(13-16)To KEYIN

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

To MONITOR SELECT

To RECORDER IN PATCH

MONO(C)

ST R

PAN MODE

TO ST TO MONO

TO LCR

PAN

LR MONO

LCR

POST ON

CSR

GR METER

ATT

4BAND

COMP

COMPAND

EXPAND

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

POST ON INSERT OUT

INSERT OUT

POST ON

INSERT OUT

INSERT

To OUTPUT PATCH

To MONITOR SELECT

To RECORDER IN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

To RECORDER IN PATCH

STEREO L,R,MONO(C)

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

STEREO

INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)

STEREO

INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

METER

INSERT

PRE EQ

ATT

POST EQ

4BAND

EQ OUT

METER

DYNA OUT

METER

GR METER

Keyin

Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/

ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

METER

INSERT

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

LEVEL BAL

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL

MATRIX1,3...7

MATRIX2,4...8

CUE ON

PAN

LEVEL

PRE FADER / POST ON

To MATRIX

VARI

PRE FADER / POST ON

To MATRIX

VARI

STEREO

POST ON

METER

To STEREO OUT L+C,R+C

POST ON

STEREO OUT

L,R,MONO(C)

STEREO OUT L

STEREO OUT MONO(C)

STEREO OUT R

STEREO OUT L+C

STEREO OUT R+C

To OUTPUT PATCH

To RECORDER IN PATCH

COMP

COMPAND

EXPAND

POST ON

INSERT OUT

INSERT

MATRIX1-8

To RACKIN PATCH

To OUTPUT PATCH

MATRIX

INSERT OUT 1-8

MATRIX

INSERTIN1-8

CUE ON

INSERT POINT

PRE EQ

METER

EQ OUT

METER

INSERT

PRE EQ

ATT

POST EQ

4BAND

DYNA OUT

METER

COMP

COMPAND

EXPAND

PRE FADER

METER

INSERT

LEVEL

PRE FADER

INSERT OUT

PRE FADER

PRE EQ

INSERT OUT

Keyin

Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/

MATRIX1-8 POST EQ

(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL

POST ON

METER

MATRIX OUT 1-8

To OUTPUT PATCH

To MONITOR SELECT

To RECORDER IN PATCH

GR METER

POST ON

INSERT OUT

INSERT

POST ON

■ LS9-16/LS9-32 Level Diagram

Digital

Bit

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

-170

-190

-200

-210

dBu

Analog

dBFS

-180

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

+30

[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]

[0dBFS = Full Scale]

INPUT 1-32/16 (GAIN MIN.)

INPUT 1-32/16 (GAIN MAX.)

Nominal Input [-62dBu]

Max. Input [-42dBu]

Nominal Input [+10dBu]

Max. Input [+30dBu]

GAIN

DigitalAnalog

INPUT

PATCH HPF

ATT.

ON PAN

BUS Adder

LEVEL

(x4)

DYN

INSERT

OUT

IN IN

OUT OUT

CASCADE OUT

CASCADE IN

Max. DSP Noise Floor

Max. Output

Digital Analog

dBu

Analog

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

Nominal Output

[+24dBu]

[+4dBu]

+30

OMNI OUT1-16/8

[Default setting]

Nominal Output

(75mW@8Ω)

(150mW@8Ω)

Max Output

[The position of the level

control is 10dB lowered

from Max]

PHONES

DELAY

OUTPUT

PATCH

ATT.

(x4) DYN

ø,ATT,

TRIM

INSERTINSERT

MASTER

LEVEL

/ BAL

MASTER

Digital Clipping Level

IN IN

OUT OUT

INSERT

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDAM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 044-387-8080

AUSTRIA/BULGARIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Ofﬁce)

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-500-2925

MARTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida

MSD06

Tel: 02133-2144

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: +34-902-39-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN/FINLAND/ICELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany ﬁlial

Scandinavia

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – ﬁlial

Denmark

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2303

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2303

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2303

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2441

PA29

C.S.G., Pro Audio Division

110POTO-J0

Printed in Japan

WH39070

Yamaha Pro Audio global web site:

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

LS9-16/LS9-32 Owner’s Manual EN FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE Model Name : LS9-16, LS9-32 WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) (3 wires) This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material. Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (Perchlorate) This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual (mercury) Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The above warning is located on the rear or side of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 12 13 14 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (98-6500) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (lithium caution) NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS • Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. • This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. • Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in uw land. • For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative office in your country. • Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. • Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. (lithium disposal) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device. • Use only the included power cord. If you intend to use the device in an area other than in the one you purchased, the included power cord may not be compatible. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock. • Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. Do not open • Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. It emits unusual smells or smoke. Some object has been dropped into the instrument. There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device. • If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • When transporting or moving the device, do not hold the display. Improper transportation can result in injury or damage to the device itself. • When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Before moving the device, remove all connected cables. PA_en_1 4 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. 1/2 • Do not place the device in a location where it may come into contact with corrosive gases or salt air. Doing so may result in malfunction. • Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers. • Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top and rear to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate ventilation can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the device(s), or even fire. • Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise, both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it. Handling caution • When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the power amplifier LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power off, the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason. • Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.). • Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the faders. Doing so may cause problems with electrical contact or fader motion. • Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Backup battery Connections • Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock prevention. If the mains outlet is not grounded, be sure to connect the ground screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into the mains. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock. • This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, the current scene data and library data is retained. However, if the backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When the backup battery is running low, the LCD display indicates “Low Battery!” when you starting up the system (the Battery field also indicates “LOW” or “NO” in the MISC SETUP screen.) In this case, immediately save the data to a USB memory, then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery. XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-). Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the device is not in use. The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components. PA_en_1 2/2 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 5 Contents 1. Introduction 9 5. Input channel operations 53 Thank you ................................................................... 9 Signal flow for input channels.................................53 An overview of the LS9 .............................................. 9 Specifying the channel name / icon ........................55 Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 ......... 11 HA (head amp) settings............................................57 Number of INPUT channels................................. 11 Rear panel ........................................................... 11 Top panel............................................................. 12 Other.................................................................... 13 Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus......58 The LS9’s channel structure ................................... 13 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........62 Using a popup window .........................................64 Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) .....65 About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) ................ 14 About word clock ..................................................... 14 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus..............................62 Conventions in this manual..................................... 14 About the firmware version ..................................... 14 6. Output channel operations 67 Signal flow for output channels ..............................67 15 Specifying the channel name / icon ........................69 Top panel................................................................... 15 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ...................................71 2. Parts and their function Rear panel ................................................................. 23 Front panel ................................................................ 26 3. Basic operations on the LS9 27 Basic operations in the top panel ........................... 27 About the [HOME] key ......................................... 27 Selecting the fader layer ...................................... 27 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ........... 29 Selecting functions .............................................. 29 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses ...................................................75 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........75 Using a popup window .........................................77 Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) .....78 7. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 81 Viewing the display .................................................. 30 About the SELECTED CHANNEL section...............81 Constant display area .......................................... 30 Main area............................................................. 31 The on-screen user interface............................... 32 About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen ..................82 Assigning a name..................................................... 34 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ..83 8. Custom fader layer 91 Using the tool buttons ............................................. 35 About the tool buttons.......................................... 35 Using libraries ...................................................... 35 Initializing settings ............................................... 38 Copying and pasting settings .............................. 39 Comparing two sets of settings ........................... 39 About the custom fader layer ..................................91 Assigning channels to the custom fader layer ......92 9. Input/output patching 95 Changing the output patching.................................95 Changing the input patching ...................................99 4. Connections and setup 41 Inserting an external device into a channel .........101 Connections.............................................................. 41 Directly outputting an INPUT channel ..................103 Installing an option card .......................................... 44 Setup required when starting up ............................ 45 Returning the current scene to the initial state .... 45 Word clock connection and settings .................... 46 HA (head amp) settings ....................................... 47 Sending an input channel signal to the STEREO bus.......................................... 50 10. USB memory recorder 105 About the USB memory recorder ..........................105 Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder.........................106 Recording to USB memory ....................................108 Playing back audio files from USB memory ........110 Editing the title list..................................................112 Linking scene recall with audio file playback ......113 6 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Contents 11. EQ and Dynamics 115 15. Talkback / Oscillator 151 About EQ and dynamics ........................................ 115 About talkback and oscillator................................151 Using EQ ................................................................. 115 Using talkback ........................................................151 Using dynamics ...................................................... 117 Using the oscillator ................................................153 Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries .......................... 120 EQ library........................................................... 120 Dynamics library ................................................ 120 12. Grouping and linking 121 About mute groups ................................................ 121 Using mute groups................................................. 121 Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate mute groups .................................. 121 Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify mute groups ................................... 122 Using the Mute Safe function ............................ 123 16. Meters 155 Using the METER screen .......................................155 17. Graphic EQ and effects 157 About the virtual rack .............................................157 Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack ......158 Graphic EQ operations...........................................161 The Channel Link function .................................... 124 About the graphic EQ.........................................161 Inserting a GEQ in a channel.............................161 Using the 31 Band GEQ ....................................163 Using the Flex15GEQ ........................................164 Linking the desired input channels .................... 124 About the internal effects ......................................166 Copying, moving, or initializing a channel........... 126 Using an internal effect via send/return .............167 Inserting an internal effect into a channel ..........168 Editing the internal effect parameters ................170 Using the Tap Tempo function...........................172 Using the Freeze effect ......................................173 Copying the parameters of a channel................ 126 Moving the parameters of a channel ................. 127 Initializing the parameters of a channel ............. 128 13. Scene memory 129 Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries ............174 About scene memories .......................................... 129 GEQ library ........................................................174 Effect library .......................................................174 Using scene memories .......................................... 129 Using an external head amp ..................................175 Storing a scene.................................................. 129 Recalling a scene .............................................. 131 Using user-defined keys to recall ...................... 132 Remotely controlling an external head amp.......175 Editing scene memories ........................................ 134 Sorting and renaming scene memories ............. 134 Scene memory editing ....................................... 136 Copying/pasting a scene ................................... 136 Clearing a scene................................................ 137 Cutting a scene.................................................. 138 Inserting a scene ............................................... 138 Using the Focus function ...................................... 139 Using the Recall Safe function.............................. 140 Using the Fade function......................................... 143 14. Monitor/Cue 145 About the monitor/cue functions .......................... 145 Using the Monitor function.................................... 146 Using the Cue function .......................................... 148 About cue groups .............................................. 148 Operating the Cue function................................ 149 18. MIDI 177 MIDI functionality on the LS9 ................................177 Basic MIDI settings .................................................178 Using program changes to recall scenes and library items......................180 Using control changes to control parameters .....183 Using parameter changes to control parameters .........................................185 Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) to operate the USB memory recorder ...............186 19. User settings (Security) 187 User Level settings .................................................187 User types and user authentication keys ...........187 Setting the Administrator password ...................188 Creating a user authentication key ....................188 Logging-in ..........................................................189 Changing the password .....................................191 Editing a user authentication key .......................192 Changing the user level .....................................192 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 7 Contents Preferences ............................................................. 194 User-defined keys .................................................. 196 Console lock ........................................................... 197 Locking the console ........................................... 197 Unlocking the console ....................................... 198 Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image.................................................. 198 Appendices 225 EQ Library List ........................................................ 225 DYNAMICS Library List .......................................... 227 Dynamics Parameters ............................................ 229 Effect Type List ....................................................... 232 Effects Parameters ................................................. 233 Using USB memory to save/load data.................. 199 Effects and tempo synchronization ...................... 244 Saving the LS9’s internal data on USB memory ............................................. 199 Loading a file from USB memory....................... 200 Editing the files saved on USB memory ............ 201 Formatting USB memory media ........................ 204 Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table .................................. 245 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes .............................................. 249 Control change parameter assignments .............. 251 NRPN parameter assignments .............................. 253 20. Other functions 205 Mixing parameter operation applicability............. 256 About the SETUP screen ....................................... 205 Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys ........................................... 257 Word clock settings ............................................... 206 MIDI Data Format .................................................... 260 Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off ............. 208 Warning/Error Messages ....................................... 268 Using cascade connections .................................. 209 Troubleshooting ..................................................... 270 Operations on the cascade slave LS9 ............... 210 Operations on the cascade master LS9 ............ 212 General Specifications ........................................... 272 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses ..................................................... 213 Electrical characteristics ....................................... 275 Setting the date and time of the internal clock.... 215 Setting the network address ................................. 216 Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display, LEDs, and lamps......... 217 Using the Help function ......................................... 218 Loading a Help file from a USB memory ........... 218 Loading a text file from a USB memory ............. 219 Assigning the Help function to a user-defined key.......................................... 219 Viewing Help...................................................... 220 Input/output characteristics .................................. 273 Mixer Basic Parameters ......................................... 277 Pin Assignment ...................................................... 278 Dimensions ............................................................. 279 Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit (sold separately).................................................. 280 MIDI Implementation Chart .................................... 281 Index ........................................................................ 282 Block Diagram ..................................... End of Manual Level Diagram ...................................... End of Manual Initializing the LS9’s internal memory .................. 222 Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ......... 223 Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function).......................................... 224 • The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your device. • The bitmap fonts used in this device have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. 8 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Introduction 1 Thank you Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha LS9 digital mixing console. In order to take full advantage of the LS9’s superior functionality and enjoy years of trouble-free use, please read this manual before you begin using the product. After you have read the manual, keep it in a safe place. An overview of the LS9 The LS9 is a digital mixing console with the following features. ■ Mixing system that packs top-class functionality into a compact size • • • • • The LS9 is a full-digital mixing console designed for installed systems or SR applications, and in spite of its compact size, provides functionality and a channel count comparable to large-format consoles. 24-bit linear AD/DA converters are used to deliver up to 108 dB of dynamic range and amazing sound quality. As input channels, it provides 32 (LS9-16 model) or 64 (LS9-32 model) monaural INPUT channels, and four stereo ST IN channels. As output channels, it provides 16 MIX channels, eight MATRIX channels, a STEREO channel, and a MONO channel. L/C/R three-channel output using the STEREO/ MONO channels is also supported. ■ Analog-feeling operability • • • • • • • • • • Simply by pressing a key, you can select the combination of channels (“fader layer”) to be operated from the top panel faders. You can operate the console while quickly switching between input channels and output channels. In addition, you can also use a custom fader layer that lets you specify any desired combination of channels. Since fader/cue operations and on/off switching for all channels can be performed from the panel, even customers using digital consoles for the first time will find operation familiar and comfortable. The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display lets you use the knobs to control the main parameters (gain, EQ, dynamics threshold, bus send levels, etc.) for the particular channel on which you’re focusing. This section can be operated just like a module on an analog mixer. Mix parameter settings, including head amp gain and phantom power for input channels, can be stored and recalled as “scenes.” All faders on the panel are motorized moving faders, so that when you recall a scene, the previous fader locations are reproduced immediately. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 9 An overview of the LS9 ■ Effects and graphic EQ that can be patched into a desired signal path •••• There are eight virtual racks, in which you can mount effects or graphic EQ and then patch them into the desired signal route. Graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 1–4, and effects or graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 5–8. You can simultaneously use up to four high-quality multieffects, which include reverb, delay, multi-band compressor, and various modulation-type effects. These can be used via an internal bus, or inserted into a desired channel. For the graphic EQ you can select either 31-band graphic EQ or Flex 15 GEQ. These can be inserted into the desired channel or output. The Flex 15 GEQ allows you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of the thirty-one bands. Since two Flex 15 GEQ units can be mounted in a single virtual rack, a total of up to sixteen graphic EQ units can be used simultaneously. ■ A recorder function that’s useful for sound checks or recording mixes • • • • A recorder function is provided, allowing you to use USB memory to record the output of the STEREO bus or a MIX bus, or assign an audio file in USB memory to a desired input channel or monitor output and play it back. Supported file formats are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) for recording, and MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio), and MPEG-4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) for playback. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported. This function is convenient when you want to record the mix output of a specific bus, or if you want to play back a song from the speakers during the sound check. ■ Cascade connections in the digital domain • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • A second LS9 console or a digital mixer such as the Yamaha M7CL or PM5D connected via a digital I/O card installed in a slot can be cascade-connected in the digital domain. Of the MIX buses, MATRIX buses, STEREO (L/R) bus, MONO buses, and CUE (L/R) bus, the desired buses can be merged, and all mixed bus signals can be cascaded individually. 10 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ■ Security functions that can be specified at user-level or system-level • • • • • • • User levels can be distinguished into three levels (administrator, guest, user), and the functionality available to each non-administrator user can be restricted. Passwords can be specified for the administrator and users, preventing important settings from being changed accidentally. Information specific to each user (user level, system settings, and user-defined key settings) can be stored on USB memory as a “user authentication key.” By loading your own user authentication key from USB memory, you can instantly set up the ideal operating environment for yourself. ■ I/O card expansion •••••••••••••• The rear panel provides one slot (LS9-16) or two slots (LS9-32) in which separately sold mini-YGDAI cards can be installed. AD cards, DA cards, or digital I/O cards can be installed in these slots to add inputs and outputs port. Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 1 Introduction The LS9 is available in two models; the LS9-16 and the LS9-32. These models differ as follows. Number of INPUT channels The LS9-16 has up to 32 operable INPUT channels, while the LS9-32 has up to 64. The number and structure of other channels (ST IN channels, MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO/MONO channels) are identical. Rear panel The LS9-16 and LS9-32 differ in the number of rear panel INPUT jacks, OMNI OUT jacks, and slots they provide. The rear panel of the LS9-16 provides sixteen INPUT jacks, eight OMNI OUT jacks, and one slot. OMNI OUT jacks INPUT jacks Slot In contrast, the rear panel of the LS9-32 provides thirty-two INPUT jacks, sixteen OMNI OUT jacks, two slots, and one LAMP connector. OMNI OUT jacks LAMP connector INPUT jacks Slots LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 11 Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 Top panel The LS9-16 and LS9-32 differ in the number of top panel channel modules and ST IN channels they provide. The LS9-16 provides sixteen channel modules and two ST IN channels, and by switching fader layers you can operate up to 32 INPUT channels (monaural) and four ST IN channels (stereo). Channel modules ST IN channels The LS9-16 provides thirty-two channel modules and four ST IN channels. By switching fader layers you can operate up to sixty-four INPUT channels (monaural). The four ST IN channels (stereo) can be operated from either layer (1-32 or 33-64). Channel modules 12 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ST IN channels Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 • The LS9’s channel structure Other ● LS9-16 ● LS9-32 LAYER [1-16] key LAYER [17-32] key LAYER [MASTER] key LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key LAYER [1-32] key LAYER [33-64] key LAYER [MASTER] key Introduction 1 The names of the LAYER section keys differ between the LS9-16 and LS9-32. LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key In conjunction with this difference, there are also differences in the numbering of the channel modules on the panel and the channels that are assigned to each fader layer. HINT • In this owner’s manual, whenever there is a difference between the LS9-16 model and the LS9-32 model, specifications that apply only to the LS9-32 model are enclosed in curly brackets { } (e.g., INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}). • When the specifications are common to both models, the manual refers simply to the LS9. The LS9’s channel structure The LS9 provides the following input channels and output channels. ■ Input channels • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This section processes input signals and sends them to various buses (STEREO, MONO, MIX). The LS9 has the following two types of input channel. ● INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} These channels process monaural signals. In the initial state, the input signals from the rear panel INPUT jacks and the input channels of the slot(s) are assigned to these channels. ● ST IN channels 1–4 These channels process stereo signals. In the initial state, the outputs of virtual racks 5–8 are assigned to these channels. Signal assignments to the input channels (input patching) can be changed as desired. ■ Output channels • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This section mixes the signals sent from input channels etc., and sends them to the corresponding output ports or output buses. There are three types of output channel, as follows. ● MIX channels 1–16 These channels process the signals sent from input channels to the MIX buses, and send them from the output ports. These are used mainly to send signals to the monitor system or to external effects. The signals of MIX channels 1–16 can also be sent to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, or MATRIX buses. When the LS9 is in the initial state, these are assigned to the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot(s). ● MATRIX channels 1–8 These channels process the signals that are sent from MIX channels, STEREO channels, and MONO channel to the MATRIX buses, and send them from the output ports. Using the STEREO and MONO buses, different combinations of signals and mix balances can be sent out from the console. ● STEREO channel / MONO channel These channels process the signals that are sent from the input channels or MIX channels, and send them to the corresponding output port. These channels are used as the main stereo output and monaural output. The STEREO channel and MONO channel can be used either to output independent signals, or for three-channel L/ C/R playback. When the LS9 is in the initial state, the STEREO channel is assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 15/16 {31/32} and to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack. Signal assignments to the output channels (output patching) can be changed as desired. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 13 About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) • About word clock • Conventions in this manual • About the firmware version About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) The sixteen MIX buses provided on the LS9 can be assigned either as VARI or FIXED types in pairs of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered buses (→ p. 213). They can also be switched between monaural/stereo for the same pairs of buses. VARI type and FIXED type buses differ as follows. ● VARI ● FIXED This type allows the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus to be varied. The point at which the signal is sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus can be chosen from before the EQ (attenuator), before the fader, or after the channel on/off. This type is used mainly for sending the signal to a monitor system or external effect. With this type, the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the MIX bus is fixed. The signal from an input channel is sent to a FIXED type MIX bus from before Pan (if the MIX bus is monaural) or after Pan (if the MIX bus is stereo). This type is used mainly when you want to distribute signals to an external device with the same mix as the STEREO/MONO buses. About word clock “Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. Normally, one device transmits a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive this word clock signal and synchronize to it. In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or from an external device via the LS9’s 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, the word clock must be synchronized between the devices. Be aware that if the word clock is not synchronized, the signal will not be sent correctly, or there may be unpleasant noise. (For details on synchronizing the LS9’s word clock with an external device → p. 46) Conventions in this manual In this manual, switch-type controllers on the panel are called “keys.” Of the control knobs on the panel, those that turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are called “controls,” while those that turn endlessly are called “encoders.” Controllers located on the panel are enclosed in square brackets [ ] (e.g., [CUE] key) in order to distinguish them from the virtual buttons and knobs displayed in the screen. For some controllers, the name of the section is given before the [ ] (e.g., LAYER [MASTER] key). Whenever there is a difference between the LS9-16 model and the LS9-32 model, specifications that apply only to the LS9-32 model are enclosed in curly brackets { } (e.g., INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}). About the firmware version You can view the firmware version number in the MISC SETUP screen (→ p. 206). You can also download the most recent firmware version from the website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 14 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 Parts and their function 2 Parts and their function This chapter explains the LS9’s parts and their functions. Top panel The LS9’s top panel is organized into the following sections. LS9-16 m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section (p. 20) b DISPLAY ACCESS section (p. 19) n LAYER section (p. 19) . Stereo meter / Cue section (p. 20) , Display (p. 20) ⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section (p. 21) ⁄2 USB connector (side panel, to the right of the display) (p. 22) ⁄1 Data entry section (p. 22) x ST IN (stereo input) section (p. 17) z Channel module section (p. 17) c STEREO MASTER section (p. 18) v USER DEFINED KEYS section (p. 18) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 15 Top panel LS9-32 m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section (p. 20) ⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section (p. 21) ⁄1 Data entry section . Stereo meter / Cue section (p. 20) (p. 22) b DISPLAY ACCESS section (p. 19) ⁄2 USB connector n LAYER section (p. 19) z Channel module section (p. 17) , Display (p. 20) (side panel, to the right of the display) (p. 22) c STEREO MASTER section (p. 18) v USER DEFINED KEYS section (p. 18) x ST IN (stereo input) section (p. 17) 16 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Top panel z Channel module section • • • • • • • • • • • x ST IN (stereo input) section In this section you can operate the main parameters of the input channels and output channels, as well as the monitor output. Use the LAYER section (→ p. 19) to select the channels that are mapped to this section. In this section you can operate the main parameters of the stereo ST IN channels 1–4. The function of each controller is the same as in the Channel Module section, with the exception that the L-channel or R-channel will be alternately selected as the target of operations each time you press the [SEL] key, and the fact that the encoder rather than the fader is used to adjust the level. •••••••• 2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 3 Parts and their function 1 2 4 5 LS9-16 1 [SEL] key This key selects the channel to be operated. When you press this key to make the LED light, the corresponding channel will be selected for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or in the display. In the ST IN section, the L-channel and R-channel will be alternately selected as the target of operations each time you press the [SEL] key. B [CUE] key This key selects the channel to be cue-monitored. When cue is on, the LED will be lit. C Meter LEDs These LEDs indicate the audio signal level of the input channel or output channel. LS9-32 D [ON] key This switches the channel on/off. The key LED will light for channels that are on. In SENDS ON FADER mode, this key is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from that channel to the currently selected MIX bus (or from a MIX channel, to the MATRIX bus). E Fader/Encoder This adjusts the signal level or monitor level of the input channel or output channel. In SENDS ON FADER mode, this adjusts the send level from that channel to the currently selected MIX bus (or from a MIX channel, to the MATRIX bus). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 17 Top panel c STEREO MASTER section ••••••••••• v USER DEFINED KEYS section• • • • • • • • • In this section you can operate the main parameters of the STEREO channel. Here you can execute the functions that are programmed for the user-defined keys. 1 2 1 3 4 1 [SEL] key This key selects the STEREO channel as the target of operations. The L-channel and R-channel will be alternately selected as the target of operations each time you press the [SEL] key. B [CUE] key This key cue-monitors the STEREO channel. When cue is on, the LED will be lit. C [ON] key This switches the STEREO channel on/off. When on, the key LED will light. In SENDS ON FADER mode, you can use this as an on/off switch for MIX/MATRIX channels or as an on/off switch for the signal sent from the STEREO channel to the MATRIX buses, depending on the LAYER. D Fader This adjusts the output level of the STEREO channel. In SENDS ON FADER mode, this adjusts the level of the MIX/MATRIX channels or the send level from the STEREO channel to the MATRIX buses, depending on the LAYER. HINT • If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP screen, the [ON] key and fader will respectively turn MONITOR on/off and control its level. 18 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 1 User-defined keys [1]–[12] These keys execute the functions that have been programmed for each key (e.g., switching scenes, turning talkback or the internal oscillator on/off). Top panel •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D [CHANNEL JOB] key This key accesses a screen where you can make settings for Channel Link, Mute Group, and Recall Safe functions, and copy or move settings between channels. E [RECORDER] key This key accesses a screen where you can operate and make settings for the Recorder function which records and plays audio files. F [METER] key This key accesses a meter screen where you can view the input/output levels of all channels in a single view. G [RACK 1-4] key This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic EQ assigned to virtual racks 1–4. By pressing the [RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously you can access the VIRTUAL RACK screen, where you can assign a graphic EQ (31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ) to each virtual rack. 1 [SCENE MEMORY] key This key accesses a screen where you can store, recall, and edit scene memories, and make settings for the Focus function and Fade Time function. B [MONITOR] key This key accesses a screen where you can make settings for cue, monitor, oscillator, and talkback. H [RACK 5-8] key This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic EQ or internal effect that is assigned to virtual racks 5–8, and make settings for external head amps. By pressing the [RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously you can access the VIRTUAL RACK screen, where you can assign a graphic EQ (31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ) or internal effect to each virtual rack. C [SETUP] key This key accesses a screen where you can set and verify the user level, and make basic system settings. n LAYER section 2 Parts and their function b DISPLAY ACCESS section ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Here you can select the type of channels that will be operated from the channel module section (→ p. 17) and ST IN section (→ p. 17). 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 LS9-16 LS9-32 1 LAYER [1-16] {LAYER [1-32]} key B LAYER [17-32] {LAYER [33-64]} key C LAYER [MASTER] key These keys assign fixed preset combinations of channels to the channel module section and the ST IN section. The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows. For the LS9-16 LAYER key / module 1–16 ST IN 1–2 LAYER [1-16] key CH 1–16 ST IN 1–2 LAYER [17-32] key CH 17–32 ST IN 3–4 LAYER [MASTER] key MIX 1–16 — For the LS9-32 LAYER key / module 1–16 17–24 25–31 32 ST IN 1–4 LAYER [1-32] key CH 1–16 CH 17–24 CH 25–31 CH 32 ST IN 1–4 LAYER [33-64] key CH 33–48 CH 49–56 CH 57–63 CH 64 ST IN 1–4 LAYER [MASTER] key MIX 1–16 MATRIX 1–8 — MONO — D LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key This key assigns the channels selected by you (the user) to the channel module section and the ST IN section. (For the channel assignment procedure → p. 91) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 19 Top panel m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section • • • • • • • • • , Display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • In this section you can select the MIX channel or MATRIX channel that will be the object of operations. In this display you can view and edit all mix parameters, as well as various settings. 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS section (→ p. 19) to select the screen that you want to view. Then use the cursor keys of the data entry section (→ p. 22) to move the cursor to the desired parameter, and use the dial or the [INC][DEC] keys to edit the value. 1 MIX/MATRIX [1]–[16] keys These keys select the MIX channel (or if the selected channel is a MIX/STEREO/MONO channel, the MATRIX channel) whose send level will be adjusted by the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The LED of the key corresponding to the currently selected channel will light (or blink, in the case of a MATRIX channel). In SENDS ON FADER mode, these keys select a MIX bus or MATRIX button as the send-destination. In this case, the LED of the key corresponding to the currently selected bus will blink, and the LED of keys corresponding to selectable buses will light. For MATRIX buses, the [9]– [16] keys will be dark and cannot be selected. . Stereo meter / Cue section •••••••• In this section you can view the level of the STEREO channel or cue monitor. 1 2 3 1 Stereo meter This is a 32-segment LED meter that indicates the L/R channel levels of the STEREO channel. While the [CUE] key of any channel is on, this meter will indicate the cue monitor level. B CUE LED This LED will blink while the [CUE] key of any channel is on. C [CUE CLEAR] key This key clears all cue monitoring that is currently active. 20 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Top panel In this section you can operate the most important mix parameters for the currently selected input channel or output channel. The function of the controllers in this section will depend on the type of channel that is selected. ● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected The encoder will adjust the send level from that channel to the currently selected bus. (For a FIXED type bus, the encoder will switch the send on/off.) If the send-destination bus is stereo, this encoder will specify the panning of the signal sent to the two buses if an odd-numbered bus is selected, or will specify the send level if an even-numbered bus is selected. ● When a MIX channel is selected 1 4 2 3 C [SELECTED SEND] encoder The encoder will adjust the send level from that MIX channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. ● When a MATRIX channel is selected 5 The encoder will adjust the send level from the MIX channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus. 2 Parts and their function ⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section • • • • • • • • • NOTE 6 J 7 8 M • In SENDS ON FADER mode, this encoder will not do anything regardless of which channel is selected. 9 D [DYNAMICS 1] encoder K ● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected L The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 1 (e.g., gate). ● When any other channel is selected The encoder will adjust the threshold of the compressor, etc. 1 [HA GAIN] encoder ● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected The encoder will adjust the gain of the internal head amp or an external head amp device (AD8HR) connected to a rear panel slot. NOTE • The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. ● When any other channel is selected The encoder will not do anything. B [PAN] encoder ● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected ● When a MIX channel is selected The encoder will adjust the panning of the signal sent to the L/R channels (or the L/C/R channels in the case of LCR mode) of the STEREO bus. If a MIX channel set to stereo is selected, the encoder will adjust the output balance of the left and right channels. ● When a MATRIX channel is selected If a monaural MATRIX channel is selected, the encoder will not do anything. If a stereo MATRIX channel is selected, the encoder will adjust the output balance of the left and right channels. ● When a STEREO/MONO (C) channel is selected The encoder will not do anything for MONO (C) channel. For a STEREO channel, the encoder will adjust the output balance of the left and right channels. E [DYNAMICS 2] encoder ● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 2 (e.g., compressor). ● When any other channel is selected The encoder will not do anything. F EQ [Q] encoder G EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder H EQ [GAIN] encoder These encoders adjust the Q, frequency, and gain of the band selected by keys 9–L. HINT • By simultaneously pressing the EQ [Q] encoder and the EQ [GAIN] encoder, you can reset the gain to 0 dB for the band selected by the keys below (9–L). • If you have selected a LOW band or HIGH band whose type can be changed, you can switch the type by turning the EQ [Q] encoder while pressing it when Q is set to the maximum or minimum value. LOW band : • Switches to LOW shelving if you turn the encoder toward the right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value • Switches to high pass filter if you turn the encoder toward the left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO channels only) HIGH band : • Switches to HIGH shelving if you turn the encoder toward the right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value • Switches to low pass filter if you turn the encoder toward the left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value For shelving, high pass filter, and low pass filter as well, you can switch the type by turning the encoder while pressing it. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 21 Top panel I J K L EQ [HIGH] key EQ [HIGH MID] key EQ [LOW MID] key EQ [LOW] key These keys select the band controlled by encoders 6–8. By simultaneously pressing the EQ [HIGH] key and EQ [LOW] key, you can reset the gain of all four bands to 0 dB. ⁄2 USB connector (side panel, to the right of the display) ••••••••••••••••• This connector lets you connect USB memory. M [HOME] key This key returns the state of the LS9’s panel to home position. When you press this key, the panel will change as follows. 1 • The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW screen for the currently selected channel. • The channel level function will be assigned to the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated). ⁄1 Data entry section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This section lets you edit specific parameters in the screen. 1 1 USB connector USB memory can be connected here, and used to save or load internal data. User authentication key data to define the user level can also be saved on USB memory and used to restrict the functionality that is available to each user. NOTE • Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash memory. ■ USB memory format 2 3 4 1 [DEC]/[INC] keys These keys increment or decrement the value of the parameter at which the cursor is located in the screen, in steps of -1/+1. B Cursor keys These keys move the cursor up/down/left/right in the screen. C Dial This dial continuously increments or decrements the value of the parameter at which the cursor is located in the screen. D [ENTER] key This key is used to switch a button in the screen on/off, or to confirm a change you make. 22 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Only USB memory that is 2 GB or less in capacity and is formatted in FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 is supported. If the USB memory is formatted in any other way, you must reformat it in the USER SETUP screen. ■ Write protection Some USB memory has write protection that prevents data from being erased inadvertently. If your USB memory contains important data, we suggest that you use its write protect feature to prevent accidental erasure. Conversely, you must make sure that your USB memory’s write protect feature is disabled before you attempt to save data to it. CAUTION • The ACCESS indicator will appear in the upper part of the screen while data is being accessed, such as during saving, loading, or deleting. During this time, you must not disconnect the USB memory from the USB connector or power-off the LS9. Doing so may damage your USB memory, or damage the data in the LS9 or in the USB memory. Rear panel Rear panel LS9-16 4 2 5 L M 5 67 67 K 8 1 3 Parts and their function 2 J LS9-32 K L M J 4 2 8 9 1 3 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 23 Rear panel 1 INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32} LS9-16 LS9-32 These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks for inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or microphones. The nominal input level is -62 dBu – +10 dBu. Resettable head amps are provided on all jacks, and head amp settings can be stored in scene memory. Male XLR plug 1 (ground) 3 (cold) 2 (hot) B OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} C Slots {1–2} LS9-16 LS9-16 LS9-32 LS9-32 These are XLR-3-32 male output jacks for outputting analog audio signals. These are used mainly to output MIX/ MATRIX channel signals. The nominal output level is +4 dBu. Female XLR plug 2 (hot) 3 (cold) 1 (ground) NOTE • The nominal output level of OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} is +4 dBu (maximum level is +24 dBu), but if necessary this can be changed by an internal switch to -2 dBu (maximum level is +18 dBu). (A fee will be charged for this change.) For details, contact to your Yamaha dealer listed at the end of this manual. 24 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards can be installed in these slots to provide additional input/output ports. The LS9-16 has one slot, and the LS9-32 has two slots. Each slot can input/output a maximum of 16 channels of signals. Rear panel 5 6 7 L 8 M K J 2 LS9-16 4 5 6 7 8 9 LS9-16 J LS9-32 D NETWORK connector This connector allows the LS9 to be connected to a Windows computer via a CAT3 (transfer rate: maximum 10 Mbps) or CAT5 (transfer rate: maximum 100 Mbps) compatible Ethernet cable. This is used mainly for controlling mix parameters or editing scene memories and libraries from the dedicated “LS9 Editor” application program. K Parts and their function 4 M L LS9-32 NOTE • The DME-N Network Driver required for connection to the NETWORK connector, the Studio Manager required for running LS9 Editor, and the LS9 Editor itself can downloaded from the Yamaha website listed below. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ E WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors These are BNC connectors used to transmit and receive word clock signals to and from an external device. The WORD CLOCK IN connector is internally terminated by a 75 ohm resistor. F 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack This is a coaxial jack that outputs the digital audio signal of a specified channel in consumer format (IEC-60958). This is used mainly to output STEREO/MONO channel signals. G 2TR IN DIGITAL jack This is a coaxial jack that inputs a stereo digital audio signal in consumer format (IEC-60958). The signal input from this jack can be patched to any input channel. J AC IN connector Connect the included power cable to this connector to supply power to the unit. K POWER switch This switch turns the power on/off. L Grounding screw To ensure safe operation, be sure to ground the LS9 securely. The included power cable has a three-conductor plug, so if the AC outlet is grounded the LS9 will be grounded appropriately. If the AC outlet is not grounded, establish a secure ground connection from this screw. Correctly grounding the unit is an effective way to eliminate hum and interference noise. M Cooling fan vent This is the vent for the cooling fan inside the console. When placing the console, be careful not to block this vent. H MIDI IN/OUT connectors These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from external MIDI devices. The MIDI IN connector receives messages from an external device, and the MIDI OUT connector transmits messages from the LS9. These are used mainly for recording LS9 parameter operations or scene/library changes on an external device, or for remotely operating LS9 parameters. I LAMP connector (LS9-32 only) This is an XLR-4-31 connector that supplies power to a separately sold gooseneck lamp (e.g., Yamaha LA1L). The brightness of the lamp can be adjusted in the screen. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 25 Front panel Front panel 1 2 1 PHONES LEVEL control This adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the PHONES OUT jack 2. B PHONES OUT (headphone output) jack This is a headphone jack for monitoring the MONITOR OUT or CUE signal. 26 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Basic operations on the LS9 Basic operations in the top panel Here we explain basic operations you’ll perform in the LS9’s top panel. About the [HOME] key The [HOME] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section restores the LS9’s panel to its basic state (home position). Selecting the fader layer 3 Basic operations on the LS9 This chapter explains the various user interfaces you’ll use to operate the LS9, and basic operations. The channel module section of the top panel lets you switch between combinations of channels to be controlled (“fader layers”) so that you can control input channels, output channels, or monitor levels. Press the keys of the LAYER section to switch the combination of channels you want to control. When you press the [HOME] key, the panel will change as follows. • The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, where you can view all parameters of the selected channel. LS9-16 LS9-32 • The channel level function will be assigned to the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated). The [HOME] key will blink if the display is showing any screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, or if SENDS ON FADER mode is active. In such cases, you will find it convenient to press the [HOME] key to restore the panel to home position (the [HOME] key will change to steadily lit), and then proceed with operations. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 27 Basic operations in the top panel The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows. LS9-16 LAYER section key LAYER [1-16] INPUT CH 1–16 STEREO ST IN 1–2 LAYER [17-32] INPUT CH 17–32 STEREO ST IN 3–4 MIX 1–16 STEREO — Any desired channels STEREO Any desired channels LAYER [MASTER] LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] LS9-32 LAYER section key LAYER [1-32] INPUT CH 1–16 INPUT CH 17–32 STEREO ST IN 1–4 LAYER [33-64] INPUT CH 33–48 INPUT CH 49–64 STEREO ST IN 1–4 LAYER [MASTER] LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] MIX 1–16 MATRIX 1–8 — MONO Any desired channels HINT • On the LS9-16, MATRIX channels and MONO channels are not assigned to the fader layers that are preset. If you want to use the top panel faders and [ON] keys to control the MATRIX channels or MONO channel, you can assign them to the custom fader layer (→ p. 91). 28 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual STEREO — STEREO Any desired channels Basic operations in the top panel Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Use the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section when you want to use functions other than mix parameters, or when you want to change various settings. 3 Basic operations on the LS9 You can use the encoders and keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to directly operate the mix parameters (EQ, pan, dynamics, etc.) of the currently selected channel from the top panel. Selecting functions When you press one of the keys in the DISPLAY ACCESS section, the corresponding screen will appear in the display. If the screen consists of more than one page, you can switch between pages by pressing the same key repeatedly. For example if you press the [SCENE MEMORY] key, the SCENE MEMORY screen will appear, where you can store or recall scene memories. 1 Make sure that the desired fader layer is selected in the LAYER section. 2 Use the [SEL] keys of the channel module section, STEREO section, and ST IN section to select the channel that you want to operate. The currently selected channel is indicated in the upper left of the screen. For stereo channels (STEREO channels, ST IN channels), you will alternate between the L-channel and Rchannel each time you press the [SEL] key. HINT • If AUTO CHANNEL SELECT is turned on in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can select a channel simply by operating its [ON] key or fader, without having to press its [SEL] key. HINT • If you press the lit DISPLAY ACCESS key while a popup screen is displayed, the popup screen will close. • If you press and hold down the DISPLAY ACCESS section key, the previously displayed screen will appear. 3 Turn the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the desired parameters. The parameter assigned to each encoder will change. Before operating the EQ encoders, you’ll need to use the EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID], and EQ [LOW] keys to select the band you want to control. HINT • By pressing one of the SELECTED CHANNEL section’s encoders inward, you can also access a popup window where you can edit detailed settings for the parameter (→ p. 194). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 29 Viewing the display Viewing the display Here we explain the various types of information shown in the display. Constant display area 1 2 5 D User name / status This shows the name of the user who is currently loggedin (authenticated and permitted to operate the console). Other indicators are shown here if oscillator or talkback is on, or if internal memory or USB memory is being accessed. When oscillator is on 3 4 When talkback is on While recording to USB memory While playing from USB memory 1 Selected channel This shows the number, name, and icon of the channel currently selected by its [SEL] key for operations. (For details on assigning a name → p. 34, For details on selecting an icon → p. 55, 69) You can also move the cursor to this area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to change the selected channel. B Scene memory This shows the number and name of the scene that is currently selected for store/recall operations. An “R” (Read Only) indication is shown for read-only scenes or write-protected scenes. If you have modified the parameters from their most recently stored or recalled state, an “E” (Edited) indication is shown. Move the cursor to the scene number, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to change the scene number, and press the [ENTER] key to recall the scene. NOTE • Simply changing the scene that is shown here will not execute a store/recall operation. While accessing internal memory when storing USB memory or a scene E ST IN level This indicates the on/off status and input level of ST IN channels 1–4. This shows a gray knob and black index when on, or a dark gray knob and black index when off. In SENDS ON FADER mode, this shows the on/off status and send level of the signal sent from ST IN channels 1–4 to the MIX bus. When on, the knob will be a color corresponding to the send-destination (the same type of color as the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section), and the indices will be white. When off, the knob will be gray and the indices will be black. • To execute a store or recall operation, access the SCENE MEMORY screen and use the STORE/RECALL buttons in the screen (→ p. 129), or press a user-defined key to which you’ve assigned the scene store/recall operation (→ p. 132). • You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the constant display area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to change the scene number. This scene number will blink if the most recently stored or recalled scene is different than the currently selected scene. C MIDI The MIDI indicator will appear when MIDI messages are received. 30 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual HINT • In SENDS ON FADER mode, the send-destination bus is shown blinking at the right of the scene number. Viewing the display Main area The contents of the main area will depend on the currently selected function. ■ Popup windows Some windows show lists or details of specific parameters in the screen. These are called “popup windows.” Popup window ■ SELECTED CH VIEW screen This screen shows all mix parameters of the currently selected channel. To access this screen, press the [HOME] key of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. By operating the knobs and buttons in a popup window, you can edit more detailed parameters. In some popup windows, there are several buttons called “tool buttons” in the upper part of the window. You can use these tool buttons to recall or copy/paste library data. ■ Various function screens These screens allow you to access functions and settings other than channel mix parameters. To access each of these screens, press the appropriate key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section. Basic operations on the LS9 3 To close the popup window and return to the previous screen, move the cursor to the “×” symbol or the CLOSE button, and press the [ENTER] key. (You can also close the popup window and return to the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen by pressing the [HOME] key.) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 31 Viewing the display The on-screen user interface The interface shown in the screen of the LS9 includes the following items. ■ Cursor The blinking red and yellow frame displayed in the screen is called the “cursor.” The cursor is used to specify the object of your operations. Use the cursor keys of the data entry section to move the cursor up/down/left/right. Cursor ■ Knobs and faders Knobs in the screen are used to view or edit the values of the corresponding parameters. Normally, you will move the cursor to a knob and use the dial or [DEC]/[INC] keys of the data entry section to edit the value. The current value is shown in numerical form immediately below the knob. Some knobs will move in tandem with the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Knob Faders in the screen are mainly used to view or edit the level of the corresponding channels. They will move in tandem with the faders of the top panel. You can also move the cursor to a fader and use the dial or [DEC]/ [INC] keys of the data entry section to edit the value. The current value is shown in numerical form immediately below the fader. ■ Buttons Buttons in the screen are used to execute specific functions, to switch parameters on/off, or to select one of several choices. To execute a button’s function, to switch it on/off, or to select a desired item, move the cursor to the desired button and press the [ENTER] key of the data entry section. By moving the cursor to a button that shows the ▼ symbol and then pressing the [Enter] key, you can open another popup window where you can specify details. Buttons Fader ■ List window A window like the following will appear when you are selecting an item from a list, such as when selecting a function for a user-defined key. Within the list, the constantly-highlighted item in the center is the selected item. To scroll the list up or down, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. List window 32 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Viewing the display ■ Keyboard window ● CAUTION dialog box The keyboard window shown below will appear when you assign a name or comment to a scene or library, or when you assign a name to a channel. To enter characters, move the cursor to the desired character in the window and press the [ENTER] key. (For the procedure → p. 34) This dialog box will display a warning if a fatal error has occurred in the operation you attempted to execute. When you move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key, the operation will be forcibly cancelled, and the dialog box will disappear. Keyboard window Basic operations on the LS9 3 ■ Dialog box When you need to confirm the operation you just performed or when a problem has occurred, a dialog box will appear, asking you to confirm the operation or displaying a warning. ● CONFIRMATION dialog box This dialog box will appear when confirmation is required. Move the cursor to the OK button to execute the operation (or to the CANCEL button to cancel it), and press the [ENTER] key. ● ATTENTION dialog box This dialog box will display a warning when a problem has occurred with the operation you are attempting to execute. If you move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key, the operation will be executed in a way that circumvents the problem. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the operation will be cancelled. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 33 Assigning a name Assigning a name On the LS9, you can assign a name to each input channel and output channel, and assign a title to each scene or library data item when you save it. To assign a name, you will use the keyboard window that is shown in the main area. 1 Access the window where you can assign a ● DEL button name. Deletes the character to the right of the text cursor. The illustration below shows the SCENE STORE popup window that is used when assigning a name to a scene. ● BS button Text input box Deletes the character to the left of the text cursor. ● SHIFT LOCK button Switches between uppercase and lowercase alphabetical characters. You’ll be able to enter uppercase characters and symbols if this button is on, and lowercase characters and numerals if this button is off. ● ENTER button Finalizes the name you entered. In the SCENE STORE popup window, you can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the STORE button and pressing the [ENTER] key. 4 When you’ve entered the name, move the cursor to the STORE button or the ENTER button and press the [ENTER] key. A yellow vertical line called the “text cursor” is shown to indicate the current location in the box that displays the characters that have been input. 2 Use the on-screen keyboard to enter text. Move the cursor (the red frame) to the desired character in the keyboard window and press the [ENTER] key; the character will be entered in the text input box, and the text cursor (yellow vertical line) in the box will move to the right. 3 Enter the subsequent characters in the same way. While entering characters, you can use the following buttons in the keyboard window. ● COPY button Copies the entire text string from the text box into buffer memory. ● PASTE button Inserts the text string copied using the COPY button at the location of the text cursor. ● CLEAR button Erases all characters that were entered in the text input box. ● ← / → buttons Moves the text cursor forward or backward in the text input box. ● INS button Inserts a space (blank) at the text cursor. 34 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual The name you entered will be applied. HINT • The basic procedure is the same in the windows that let you assign names to channels or other types of library data. If you’re entering a channel name, the name will be updated immediately, without your having to use the ENTER button. Using the tool buttons Using the tool buttons The title bar at the top of some popup windows and screens contains tool buttons that provide additional functions. You can use these buttons to recall related libraries, or to copy the parameters of a channel to a different channel. Here we will explain how to use the tool buttons. Tool buttons like the following are shown in the ATT/ HPF/EQ, DYNAMICS 1/2, GEQ, and EFFECT popup windows and screens. 1 2 3 3 Using libraries 4 5 1 LIB (library) button This button recalls the library that is related to the current popup window or screen (EQ, dynamics, GEQ, or effect library). B DEF (default) button This button restores the currently selected channel (EQ/ dynamics) or rack (effect) to the default state. C COPY button This button copies the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). The copied settings are held in buffer memory (a memory area for temporary storage). D PASTE button This button pastes the settings held in buffer memory into the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). Here we will explain the basic procedure for using libraries. You can use libraries to store (save) or recall (load) the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). The following libraries are provided. • • • • • Input EQ library Output EQ library Dynamics library GEQ library Effect library Basic operations on the LS9 About the tool buttons The operating procedure is essentially the same for all libraries. ● Recalling data from a library 1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons. To access each popup window or screen, proceed as follows. [ ATT/HPF/EQ popup window ] [ DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window ] E COMPARE button This button exchanges the settings held in buffer memory with the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/ dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). NOTE • You cannot press the PASTE button or COMPARE button if no settings have been copied into buffer memory. In addition, some screens have the following tool buttons. • SET ALL ...............Turns on all of the parameters in the screen. • CLEAR ALL..........Turns off all of the parameters in the screen. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 35 Using the tool buttons In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, move the cursor to the knob corresponding to EQ or dynamics 1/2, or to a button that has a ▼ symbol, and press the [ENTER] key. [ RACK screen ] In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [RACK 1-4] or [RACK 5-8] key. HINT HINT • If POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS is turned on in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can access the popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section encoder that corresponds to EQ or dynamics 1/2. • If you want to change the assignment (31BandGEQ, Flex15GEQ, or effect) to each rack, simultaneously press the [RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] to access the VIRTUAL RACK screen (→ p. 158). 3 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the [ RACK screen ] In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RACK 1-4] or [RACK 5-8] key. toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to access the popup window of the corresponding library. 1 2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to recall. The method of selecting a channel/rack will depend on the type of popup window or screen that is currently displayed. [ ATT/HPF/EQ popup window ] [ DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window ] Press a [SEL] key on the panel, or move the cursor to the selected channel in the constant display area of the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. 2 1 List This shows the settings that are saved in the library. The highlighted line indicates the data that is selected for operations. Read-only data is indicated by an “R” symbol. B RECALL button This button recalls the settings selected in the list into the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). HINT • The right side of the list shows information about the corresponding data (the dynamics type or effect type used, etc.). For the dynamics library, a symbol is shown to indicate whether the data can be recalled by dynamics 1 or 2. Selected channel 4 Move the cursor to the list, and select the recall-source library number by using the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to move the highlighted line in the list. In some cases, the data selected as the recall-source cannot be recalled into the currently selected channel/ rack. Each library has the following limitations. ● Dynamics library The dynamics library holds three types of data; Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 for input channels, and Dynamics 1 for output channels. Recall is not possible if you’ve selected a type that is not supported by the corresponding dynamics processor. 36 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using the tool buttons The GEQ library holds two types of data; 31BandGEQ or Flex15GEQ. Recall is not possible if you’ve selected a type that is different than the recall-destination GEQ. ● Effect library Effect settings whose effect type is “HQ.Pitch” or “Freeze” can be recalled only to racks 5 or 7. They cannot be recalled if any other rack is selected. If you select a library item number that cannot be recalled, the RECALL button will be disabled. 5 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. The selected data will be loaded into the channel (EQ/ dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2. 4 Move the cursor to the list, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the storedestination library number. 5 After you’ve selected the store-destination, move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the data. For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). 6 When you’ve assigned a name to the data, move the cursor to the STORE button in the LIBRARY STORE popup window and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation. HINT • You also have the option of displaying a dialog box that asks you to confirm the recall operation (→ p. 194). 3 Basic operations on the LS9 ● GEQ library ● Storing data in a library 1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons. 2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) whose settings you want to store, or the rack in which the GEQ/effect whose settings you want to store is already mounted. 3 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to access the popup window or screen of the corresponding library. 7 To execute the Store operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The current settings will be stored in the library number you selected in step 4. If you decide to cancel the Store operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. HINT • Even after you’ve stored the settings, you can edit the title of the data by moving the cursor to the data name in the list and pressing the [ENTER] key to access the LIBRARY TITLE EDIT popup window. However, you can’t rename read-only data (indicated by the “R” symbol). NOTE • Please be aware that if you store to a location that already contains data, the existing data will be overwritten. (However, you can’t overwrite read-only data.) • Don’t turn off the power while the Store operation is in progress. The data will not be stored correctly if you do so. STORE button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 37 Using the tool buttons ● Erasing data from a library 1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons. 2 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to access the popup window of the corresponding library. Initializing settings Here’s how you can return the EQ/dynamics settings of the currently selected channel or the effect settings of a rack to their initial state. HINT • GEQ settings can be initialized using the FLAT button in the screen. 1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons. 2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (effect) whose settings you want to initialize. 3 Move the cursor to the DEF button and press the [ENTER] key. 1 A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Initialize operation. 1 CLEAR button Clears (erases) the data that is selected in the list. 3 Move the cursor to the list, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the library item number that you want to clear. 4 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation. 5 To execute the Clear operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The data you selected in step 3 will be cleared. If you decide to cancel the Clear operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • You can’t clear read-only data (data indicated by an “R” symbol). 38 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 4 To execute the Initialize operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The EQ/dynamics settings of the channel you selected in step 2 or the effect settings of the rack will be initialized. If you decide to cancel the Initialize operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. Using the tool buttons Here’s how you can copy the EQ/dynamics settings of the currently selected channel or the GEQ/effect settings of the currently selected rack to buffer memory, and then paste them to a different channel or rack. Copy/paste is limited to the following combinations. • Between EQ of input channels • Between EQ of output channels • Between dynamics for which the same type (GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER) is selected • Between effects mounted in a rack 1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons. 2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to copy. 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the [ENTER] key. The current settings will be held in buffer memory. 4 Select the paste-destination channel or rack. 5 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and Comparing two sets of settings By using the compare button in the toolbar, you can exchange the settings held in the buffer memory with the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). This is convenient when you want to temporarily save an interim result of your editing, and then compare it with subsequent edits. 1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons. 2 Select a channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the [ENTER] key to save the current settings in the buffer memory. This will be the first version of your settings. 3 Basic operations on the LS9 Copying and pasting settings 4 Edit the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/ effect). This will be the second version of your settings. NOTE • Please note that if you copy other settings before you execute the Compare operation, the buffer memory will be overwritten. • After saving the first version of your settings in buffer memory, you can also initialize the channel/rack and create the second version of your settings from scratch. press the [ENTER] key. The settings of the channel (EQ/dynamics) or the rack (GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2 will be pasted. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 39 Using the tool buttons 5 When you want to compare the first and second versions of your settings, move the cursor to the COMPARE button and press the [ENTER] key. You will return to the first version of your settings. At this time, the second version of your settings will be saved in buffer memory. COPY The first set The first set Buffer memory Edit the settings (The second set) The first set Buffer memory COMPARE The first set The second set Buffer memory 6 With the cursor left at the COMPARE but- ton, repeatedly press the [ENTER] key to compare the first and second versions of settings. Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the current settings will be exchanged with the settings saved in buffer memory. Unlike the Paste operation, this operation lets you return to the previous settings at any time as long as the buffer memory has not been overwritten. HINT • The settings held in buffer memory can also be used by the Paste operation. • If you operate the tool buttons for a rack in which Flex15GEQ (of the two types of GEQ) is selected, A and B will be individually exchanged with the buffer memory. 40 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Connections and setup This chapter explains how to connect the audio inputs and outputs, how to perform the setup necessary when starting the LS9 for the first time, and how to check the operation. Connections ■ Analog input connections • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Connections and setup 4 LS9-16 LS9-32 Connect microphones or line level devices to INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}. When the LS9 is in its initial state, the signal from each INPUT jack is patched to the following channels. For the LS9-16 Analog input jacks INPUT jacks 1–16 For the LS9-32 Input channels INPUT channels 1–16 Analog input jacks INPUT jacks 1–32 Input channels INPUT channels 1–32 NOTE • This patching can be changed as necessary (→ p. 99). For example if you want to connect a stereo line-level device, you can assign two INPUT jacks to a ST IN channel so that the left and right channels can be operated in tandem for convenience. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 41 Connections ■ Analog output connections• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Monitor speakers Power amp LS9-16 Power amp Power amp Monitor speakers (foldback) Main speakers OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} can be connected to your main speakers, monitor speakers (foldback), or monitor speakers for the engineer. When the LS9 is in its initial state, the signal from the following channels is patched to each OMNI OUT jack. This patching can be changed as necessary (→ p. 95). For the LS9-16 For the LS9-32 Analog output jacks 42 Output channels Analog output jacks Output channels OMNI OUT jacks 1–6 MIX channels 1–6 OMNI OUT jacks 1–14 MIX channels 1–14 OMNI OUT jacks 7–8 STEREO L/R channel OMNI OUT jacks 15–16 STEREO L/R channel LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Connections ■ Digital input/output connections ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• e.g., CD recorder LS9-16 Power amp Digital I/O card Speaker processor (e.g., Yamaha DME64N) Connections and setup 4 Main speakers Use the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or the mini-YGDAI slot to send or receive digital audio signals between the LS9 and external equipment. When the LS9 is in the default state, the signals of the following channels are patched to the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks and slots. This patching can be changed as necessary (→ p. 95, 99). For the LS9-16 Digital input/output jacks 2TR IN DIGITAL jack (L/R) For the LS9-32 Input/output channels Digital input/output jacks Input/output channels No assignment 2TR IN DIGITAL jack (L/R) No assignment 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel Slot input channels 1–8 INPUT channels 17–24 Slot 1 input channels 1–8 INPUT channels 33–40 Slot input channels 9–16 INPUT channels 25–32 Slot 1 input channels 9–16 INPUT channels 41–48 Slot output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8 Slot 2 input channels 1–8 INPUT channels 49–56 Slot output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16 Slot 2 input channels 9–16 INPUT channels 57–64 Slot 1 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8 Slot 1 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16 Slot 2 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8 Slot 2 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16 The LS9’s 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks are used to transfer two-channel digital audio signals to or from an external device (e.g., CD player or CD/MD recorder). By installing a separately sold digital I/O card in a slot, you can add more input/output jacks to the LS9, or connect a DAW system or speaker processor. For details on the types of I/O cards that can be used, refer to the appendix at the end of this manual (→ p. 274). Check the Yamaha website for the most recent information on I/O cards. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ NOTE • In order for digital audio signal to be transmitted or received via the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or slots, the word clock of both devices must be synchronized (→ p. 46). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 43 Installing an option card Installing an option card Before you install an I/O card in a slot, you must check the Yamaha website to verify whether the LS9 supports that card and to verify the number of other Yamaha cards or third-party cards that can be used in conjunction with it. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 4 Fasten the card using the screws attached To install an option I/O card, proceed as follows. 1 Make sure that the power is turned off. 2 Loosen the screws that fasten the slot, and to the card. Be aware that damage or malfunctions may occur if the card is not fastened. remove the slot cover. Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place. CAUTION • Before installing separately sold I/O cards into the console, you must make sure that the console’s power switch is turned off. Otherwise, malfunctions or electrical shock may occur. LS9-16 Slot cover 3 Align both edges of the card with the guide rails inside the slot, and insert the card into the slot. Push the card all the way into the slot to ensure that the contacts of the card are correctly inserted into the connector inside the slot. LS9-16 Card 44 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Setup required when starting up Setup required when starting up Here we explain the setup that is required when starting the LS9 for the first time. So that you can check whether the connections are correct, we also describe the basic procedure for getting the input signal from an INPUT channel to be output from the STEREO bus. 3 Move the cursor to the scene list, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to make “000 Initial Data” appear in the highlighted line in the center of the list. We will power-on the LS9 and recall (load) the initial setting scene (scene number 000). NOTE • We are recalling the default setting scene here so that the remaining operations in this chapter can be performed appropriately. In actual operation, there’s no need to recall the default setting scene each time you start up. 1 Power-on the LS9. When you power-on the LS9, you must turn on your equipment in the order of the LS9 → power amp or monitor system. (Use the opposite order when powering-off.) 4 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. Scene number “000” will be loaded, and the mix parameters will return to their initial state. 4 Connections and setup Returning the current scene to the initial state NOTE • Be aware that when scene number “000” is loaded, the input patch, output patch, internal effect/GEQ, and HA (head amp) settings will also return to their initial state. (However, the word clock source selection will not be affected.) 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key to access the SCENE LIST screen. In this screen you can recall or store scene memories. 1 2 1 Scene list B RECALL button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 45 Setup required when starting up Word clock connection and settings “Word clock” is the clock data that provides the timing basis for audio signals to be processed digitally. If a digital I/O card installed in a slot is digitally connected to an external device such as a DAW system, CD player, or HDR (hard disk recorder), and you want digital audio signals to be transmitted or received between the LS9 and the external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the respective devices. In order for this to occur, one device must be the word clock master (transmitting device) and the other device must be the slave (receiving device), and the slave device must synchronize to the master device. If you want to set the LS9 as the word clock slave so that it will synchronize to the word clock supplied from an external device, you can either use the clock data included in the digital audio signal received from a digital I/O card, or provide dedicated word clock to the WORD CLOCK IN jack located on the rear panel. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen. In this screen you can make various settings that affect the entire LS9. 1 LS9-32 1 WORD CLOCK button 2 Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK but- Digital audio device + Clock data ton in the MIXER SETUP field, and press the [ENTER] key. The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear, allowing you to select the clock source on which the LS9 will operate. Slot HDR or other digital audio device (word clock master) LS9 (word clock slave) Digital audio signal Clock data Slot WORDCLOCK IN jack Digital MTR or other digital audio device (word clock master) LS9 (word clock slave) In either case, you must use the following procedure to specify the word clock source that the LS9 will use for operation. HINT • The following procedure is not necessary if you are using the LS9 as the word clock master, or if no external devices are digitally connected to the LS9. 46 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual LS9-32 Setup required when starting up clock source to which the LS9 will synchronize. ● If you want the clock source to be the clock data included in a digital audio signal from a slot Turn on a valid 2-channel button for the corresponding slot. ● If you want the clock source to be the clock data included in the digital audio signal from the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack Turn on the 2TR IN button. NOTE • If a conventional CD player or similar device is connected to the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack, use that device as the clock master. In some cases, noise may occur when synchronization is lost. ● If you want the word clock data from the WORD CLOCK IN jack to be the clock source Turn on the WC IN button. ● If you want the LS9’s internal clock to be the clock source Turn on the INT48k (sampling frequency: 48 kHz) or INT44.1k (sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz) button. If the LS9 is correctly operating with the new clock, the symbol located immediately above the corresponding button will turn light blue. Also, the frequency of the selected clock source is shown in the upper left of the window. HA (head amp) settings Here we explain how to adjust the HA (head amp) gain, switch phantom power on/off, and switch the phase for each input channel to which you’ve connected a mic or instrument. When setting HA-related parameters on the LS9, you can either use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH VIEW screen in the display to make settings for a single channel at a time, or use the popup window to make settings for eight channels at a time. ● Making HA settings for one channel at a time Select the channel that you want to set, and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH VIEW screen of the display to make HA settings. 1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is con- 4 Connections and setup 3 Use the buttons in the window to select the nected to the INPUT jack (→ p. 41). 2 Make sure that the fader layer that contains the desired channel is selected in the LAYER section. If necessary, use the keys of the LAYER section to switch fader layers. 4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-16 LS9-32 NOTE • The word clock setting is maintained even if you turn off the power. If you’ve set the LS9 to synchronize to the word clock of an external device, be aware that an error message will appear and the system will not operate correctly if the external device is powered-off when you power-cycle the LS9 or if the connection is disconnected. 3 Press the [SEL] key of the channel for the INPUT jack you want to operate, so that the LED is lit. That channel is now selected for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 1 2 1 [SEL] key B Meter LEDs LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 47 Setup required when starting up 4 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The [HOME] key restores the LS9’s panel to its basic state (home position). When you press this key, the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display, showing all the parameters of the channel that is selected by its [SEL] key. Also, SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated, and the channel level function will be assigned to the faders. 5 Use either of the following methods to adjust the HA gain of the selected channel. ● Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder. When you do so, the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will move in tandem. (If any other screen is displayed, a small popup window will show the value.) ● Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen Use the cursor keys of the DATA ENTRY section to move the cursor to the GAIN knob in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the HA gain. In either case, the level of that channel is shown by the meter LEDs in the channel module section. If the meter does not move even though a signal is being input, check whether the INPUT jack is connected appropriately, and whether the meter detection point might have been set to POST ON (immediately after the channel on/off) (→ p. 155). NOTE • The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. 6 To make HA settings for another channel, use the [SEL] keys to select another channel and make settings in the same way. 1 1 GAIN knob 48 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Setup required when starting up Here’s how to access a popup window where you can make HA settings for a group of eight channels. 1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is connected to the INPUT jack (→ p. 41). 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 2 1 +48V button B GAIN knob C ø (phase) button HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access this popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder. 5 To adjust the HA gain, move the cursor to the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the window, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. The input level of the channel is shown by the level meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN knob in the screen. NOTE • The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. 4 Connections and setup ● Making HA settings for a group of eight channels 6 To turn on phantom power for each chan- nel, move the cursor to the +48V button in the HA field of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. 1 HA popup button B GAIN knob 3 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the [SEL] keys of the channel module section to select the channel for the INPUT jack you want to control. 4 Move the cursor to the HA popup button or GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The HA/PATCH popup window will appear, allowing you to adjust the HA gain, switch phantom power on/ off, and switch the phase in groups of eight channels. This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 2. The +48V button will turn on (red), and phantom power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT jack. NOTE • If you want to use phantom power, you must first turn ON the +48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM SETUP screen. 7 To switch the phase of each channel between normal and reverse phase, move the cursor to the ø button in the HA field and press the [ENTER] key. The ø button will change from black to red, and the phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed. 8 If you want to operate the HA of a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window, use the [SEL] key to select that channel, and then make settings for it. 1 2 For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL] key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9–16. 3 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 49 Setup required when starting up Sending an input channel signal to the STEREO bus Here we explain how to adjust the level of a signal sent from a gain-adjusted input channel to the STEREO bus, adjust its pan (INPUT channel) or balance (ST IN channel), and monitor it from external speakers connected to the STEREO channel. The following procedure will let you check whether the mic, instrument, and main speakers are connected appropriately. When setting the level or pan/balance of a signal being sent to the STEREO bus, you can either use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH VIEW screen in the display to make settings for a single channel at a time, or use the popup window to make settings for eight channels at a time. 3 Make sure that the ST button in the screen is on (white characters on a pink background). The ST button is an on/off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus. If this is off (gray characters on a black background), move the cursor to ST button and press the [ENTER] key. 4 In the STEREO MASTER section of the top panel, make sure that the STEREO channel [ON] key is on, and raise the STEREO channel fader to 0 dB. ● Controlling the signal sent to the STEREO bus, one channel at a time Here’s how to select the input channel that you want to control, and use the top panel faders/encoders, the SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the SELECTED CH VIEW screen of the display to control the level and pan/ balance. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. 1 2 The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 2 1 STEREO channel [ON] key B STEREO channel fader 5 In the channel module section or the ST IN section, make sure that the [ON] key of the currently selected channel is turned on. 1 ST button B PAN/BAL knob 2 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the [SEL] keys of the channel module section to select the channel for the INPUT jack you want to control. 50 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Setup required when starting up 6 Raise the fader of the currently selected channel (or the encoder for a ST IN channel) to obtain an appropriate volume. In this state, you should hear sound from the speaker system patched to the STEREO channel. If you don’t hear sound, watch the stereo meter located at the right of the display to see whether the LR meter is moving. ● Controlling the signal sent to the STEREO bus, eight channels at a time Here’s how to access a popup window in which the level and pan/balance of the signal sent to the STEREO bus can be adjusted for eight channels at a time. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. 1 2 4 Connections and setup The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. ● If the LR meter is moving It is possible that the output jack connected to your speaker system is not correctly patched to the STEREO channel. Check the output port patching (→ p. 95). ● If the LR meter is not moving It is possible that the channel’s [ON] key is off, or that the ST button is turned off in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. Check the setting of the [ON] key or ST button. HINT • You can also use headphones connected to the front panel PHONES OUT jack to monitor the signal that is being output from the STEREO channel (→ p. 146). 7 To adjust the pan/balance of the signal that is sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus, turn the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder. When you turn the [PAN] encoder, the PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will also move in tandem with it. You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. 8 To control another channel, use the [SEL] keys to select another channel and make settings in the same way. 1 PAN popup button B PAN/BAL knob 2 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the [SEL] keys of the channel module section to select the channel for the INPUT jack you want to control. 3 Move the cursor to the PAN popup button or PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The TO STEREO/MONO popup window will appear, allowing you to adjust the level and pan/balance of the signal sent to the STEREO bus, eight channels at a time. This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 2. 1 2 1 ST button B PAN/BAL knob LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 51 Setup required when starting up HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access this popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder. 4 In the STEREO MASTER section of the top panel, make sure that the STEREO channel [ON] key is on, and raise the STEREO channel fader to 0 dB. 5 Make sure that the ST button for each channel in the window is on (white characters on a pink background). The ST button is an on/off switch for the signal sent from each channel to the STEREO bus. This is the same function as the ST button in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. 6 To adjust the pan (INPUT channel) or bal- ance (ST IN channel) of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus, move the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob of the desired channel in the window, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. 7 In the channel module section or the ST IN section, make sure that the [ON] key of the channel you want to operate is turned on. 8 Raise the fader/encoder of each channel to obtain an appropriate volume. 9 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window, use the [SEL] key to select that channel, and then make settings for it. For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL] key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9–16. If you press a [SEL] key of the ST IN section, the L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4 will be displayed together. 52 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Input channel operations This chapter explains operations for input channels (INPUT channels and ST IN channels). The input channel are the section that processes the signals received from the rear panel input jacks or slot, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, and MIX buses. There are two types of input channel, as follows. ■ INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the LS9 is in the default state, the input signals from the rear panel INPUT jacks and the input channels of the slot(s) are assigned to these channels. For details, refer to p.99. MIX 1 2 ...15 16 CH 1-32{64} To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH CH INSERT OUT 1-32 CH INSERT IN 1-32 INSERT POINT PRE EQ METER HPF INSERT ATT PRE HPF LEVEL 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ Keyin Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13-16 OUT CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ{16} CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48,49-56,57-64]POST EQ{32} To MIX FIXED STEREO To MIX INSERT INSERT ST L MONO(C) TO LCR LCR LR ST R CSR PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT POST ON FIXED To MIX PAN MODE LEVEL ON GATE COMP DUCK COMPAND EXPAND DE-ESSER COMP KEYIN CUE Keyin Filter POST PAN L POST PAN R TO MONO TO ST CUE To OUTPUT PATCH To RECORDER IN PATCH DIRECT OUT 1-32{64} POST ON METER LR MONO PRE FADER METER EQ OUT DYNA1OUT DYNA2OUT METER METER METER GR METER GR METER PRE EQ INSERT OUT INPUT PATCH ON PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER PAN PRE HPF METER 32 {64} PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT POST ON INSERT OUT M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 ST Input channel operations 5 Signal flow for input channels POST ON POST ON INSERT OUT MIX1,3...15 ON MIX2,4...16 POST PAN L ON POST PAN R ON PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON VARI (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L To MIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON VARI STEREO ON (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R ON PAN LINK ON ON LEVEL ON LEVEL ON LEVEL PAN CUE L CUE R ■ ST IN channels 1–4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the LS9 is in the default state, the outputs of virtual racks 5– 8 are assigned to these channels. MIX 1 2 ...15 16 BAL ST IN 1L-4R PRE EQ METER EQ OUT DYNA1OUT DYNA2OUT METER METER METER GR METER GR METER PRE HPF METER HPF 8 INPUT PATCH PRE HPF ATT 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ Keyin Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13-16 OUT ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ PRE FADER METER FIXED STEREO To MIX LCR LR ST L MONO(C) TO LCR ST R CSR PAN LINK POST ON ON MIX1,3...15 ON MIX2,4...16 POST PAN L ON POST PAN R ON PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON VARI To MIX VARI STEREO PAN MODE CUE POST ON PRE FADER FIXED To MIX LR MONO LEVEL ON GATE COMP DUCK COMPAND EXPAND DE-ESSER COMP KEYIN CUE Keyin Filter To MIX POST ON METER POST PAN L POST PAN R TO MONO TO ST M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 ST PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON ON LEVEL ON LEVEL ON LEVEL BAL (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L ON CUE L (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R ON CUE R LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 53 Signal flow for input channels ● INPUT PATCH ● LCR (Left/Center/Right) This assigns input signals to the input channels. This sends the signal of the input channel to the STEREO bus / MONO bus as a three-channel signal that adds a C (Center) channel to the L/R channels. ● ø (phase) Switches the phase of the input signal. ● HPF (High Pass Filter) This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency. ● ATT (attenuator) Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal. ● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) A parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW. ● DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a gating, ducking, expander, or compressor. ● DYNAMICS 2 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser. ● LEVEL Adjusts the input level of the input channel. ● ON (on/off) Turns the input channel on/off. If this is off, the corresponding channel is muted. ● PAN This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the INPUT channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, this pan setting can also be applied to signals sent to two MIX buses that are assigned as stereo. ● BALANCE On ST IN channels, the BALANCE is used instead of PAN. The BALANCE adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the ST IN channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, you can also apply this balance setting to the signal sent to two MIX buses that are assigned as stereo. 54 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ● TO MIX ON/OFF MIX (MIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–16. There are two types of MIX buses; FIXED types whose send level is fixed, and VARI types whose send level can be adjusted. You can switch between FIXED type and VARI type in sets of two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MIX buses. (For details, refer to → p. 213) ● TO MIX LEVEL 1-16 (MIX send level 1–16) This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–16. The signal sent to VARI type MIX buses can be taken from pre-EQ, prefader, or post-channel on/off as desired. The signal sent to FIXED type MIX buses is taken pre-pan if the MIX bus is monaural, or post-pan if the MIX bus is stereo. ● INSERT (INPUT channels 1–32 only) This lets you patch the desired output/input ports in order to insert an effect processor or other external device (→ p. 101). The insert-out/insert-in position can be switched pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-channel on/off. ● DIRECT OUT (INPUT channels only) This lets you patch the desired output port in order to output the input signal directly (→ p. 103). The direct out signal can be taken from pre-HPF, pre-EQ, or pre-fader. ● METER This meters the level of the input channel. You can switch the position at which the level is detected. Specifying the channel name / icon Specifying the channel name / icon On the LS9, the name and icon shown in the screen can be specified for each input channel. Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired 4 Move the cursor to the input port select popup button in the HA field of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The PATCH/NAME popup window will appear, allowing you to select an input port and icon for the input channel, and to assign a name. fader layer. 2 3 5 Input channel operations 3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module 4 1 section or ST IN section to select the input channel that you want to operate. 1 LS9-32 This popup window contains the following items. 1 Input port select popup button 1 Input port button This indicates the currently selected input port. When you’re selecting the icon or editing the channel name, moving the cursor to this button and pressing the [ENTER] key will take you back to the input port selection screen. B Icon button This indicates the icon selected for that channel. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a screen where you can select an icon and a sample name will appear. C Channel name input box This indicates the name assigned to that channel. When you move the cursor to this field and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a name. D Tabs These tabs switch the items that are shown in the window. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 55 Specifying the channel name / icon 5 To select an icon for this channel, move the cursor to the icon button and press the [ENTER] key. The window display will change as follows. channel, and specify its icon and channel name in the same way. While the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed, you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel that you’re operating. 3 10 When you’ve finished entering information, 1 You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. 2 1 Icon select buttons These buttons select the icon that is used for this channel. B Sample name select buttons These buttons select sample names that are related to the currently selected icon. When you press a button, its sample name will be entered in the channel name field. C Icon background color select buttons These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the background color for the icon. 6 Use the icon select buttons and the icon background color select buttons to select the icon and icon color you want to use for that channel. The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the upper part of the window. 7 If desired, use the sample name select but- tons to select a sample name. The selected sample name will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the window. HINT • You can add or edit the text after entering the sample name in the channel name field. If you want to assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a number, such as “Vocal 1” and “Vocal 2,” you can simply enter a sample name and then add a number. 8 If you want to enter a channel name directly (or edit the previously-entered sample name), move the cursor to the channel name field in the upper part of the window and press the [ENTER] key. The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the window, allowing you to enter or edit the text. For details on using the keyboard window, refer to p.34. 56 9 Use the [SEL] keys to select another input LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual HA (head amp) settings HA (head amp) settings Here’s how to make HA (Head Amp) settings such as phantom power on/off, gain, and phase for each input channel. [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 2 1 +48V button B GAIN knob C ø (phase) button HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder. CAUTION • If you don’t need phantom power, be sure to turn this button off. • Before you turn phantom power on, make sure that no devices other than phantom-powered devices, such as a condenser microphone, are connected. Otherwise, you risk damaging the devices. • Do not connect or disconnect a device while phantom power is applied. Doing so can damage the connected device and/or the unit itself. 1 HA popup button B GAIN knob 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired 5 Input channel operations 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section • To protect your speaker system, leave the power amps (powered speakers) turned off when switching the phantom power on/off. We also recommend that you set all output level faders to the minimum position. Otherwise, high-volume output may damage your hearing or equipment. fader layer. 3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module section or ST IN section to select the input channel that you want to operate. 4 If you only want to adjust the HA gain for that channel, operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder. You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. 5 If you want to edit detailed parameters such as phantom power on/off and phase, move the cursor to the HA popup button or GAIN knob in the HA field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key to access the HA/PATCH popup window. In the HA/PATCH popup window you can adjust the HA gain, switch phantom power on/off, and switch the phase for sets of eight channels. This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 3. 6 To adjust the HA gain, move the cursor to the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the window, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. The input level of the channel is shown by the level meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN knob in the screen. NOTE • The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. 7 To turn on phantom power, move the cursor to the +48V button of the desired channel in the window, and press the [ENTER] key. The +48V button will turn on (red), and phantom power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT jack. NOTE • If you want to use phantom power, you must first turn ON the +48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM SETUP screen. 1 2 3 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 57 HA (head amp) settings • Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus 8 To switch the phase of each channel between normal and reverse phase, move the cursor to the ø button of the desired channel in the window, and press the [ENTER] key. 10 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. The ø button will change from black to red, and the phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed. 9 If you want to operate the HA of a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window, use the [SEL] key to select that channel, and then make settings for it. For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL] key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9–16. Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. The STEREO bus / MONO bus are used to output signals to the main speakers. Signals can be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode, and you can choose either of these two modes for each channel. These two modes differ as follows. ■ ST/MONO mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• In this mode, signals are sent independently from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus. • The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/ off independently. • The panning of the signal sent from an INPUT channel to the STEREO bus L/R can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this encoder or knob.) • The volume balance of the signal sent from a ST IN channel to the STEREO bus left and right can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.) ■ LCR mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• In this mode, the signal from the input channel is sent to three buses at once; STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C). • The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/ off together. • The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus. • The level of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus will change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder or the TO ST PAN knob / TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen. HINT • If you want to use headphones etc. to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus, you should press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] key several times to access the MONITOR screen, and select “LCR” as the monitor source (→ p. 146). 58 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus 1 Make sure that an input source is con- nected to the input channel you’re operating, and make head amp settings for phantom power, gain, and phase to obtain the optimal input signal (→ p. 57). 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode in sets of eight channels, and change the on/off status and pan/balance settings of the signals sent from those channels to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 4. [HOME] key. 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 5 HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder. Input channel operations The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. This popup window contains the following items. 1 TO ST field B TO ST PAN knob (for a ST IN channel, the TO ST BAL knob) 3 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer. 4 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module section or ST IN section to select the input channel for the desired source. 5 If you only want to adjust the pan or balance for that channel, operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder (→ p. 86). You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. 6 If you want to switch the on/off setting of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus, or if you want to switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode, move the cursor to the TO ST PAN knob or the PAN popup button located in the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window. 1 Channel number / Channel name This indicates the number and name of the channel you’re operating. B MODE button This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode to as the way in which the signal will be sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. This mode can be specified individually for each channel. The setting will alternate between the two modes each time you press the button. The currently selected mode is shown by the position of the indicator (the green ◆ symbol) located immediately above the button. C ST button D MONO button When the MODE button is set to ST/MONO mode, these buttons act as individual on/off switches for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. E TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob For an INPUT channel, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. For a ST IN channel, this acts as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent to the STEREO bus. Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 59 Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are shown instead of the ST button 3 and MONO button 4. 6 7 11 In the top panel channel module section or ST IN section, make sure that the [ON] key is turned on for the input channel you want to operate, and raise the fader/encoder to an appropriate position. The following steps will differ depending on whether you selected a ST/MONO mode channel or an LCR mode channel in step 7. ● For a channel set to ST/MONO mode F LCR button This button is an on/off switch for all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If you turn off the button, no signals will be sent from that input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. G CSR knob This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in a range of 0–100%. Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting. 7 Use the MODE button to select either ST/ MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel. 8 The ST button and MONO button are on/off switches for the signal sent from each channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. 9 If you want to use the STEREO bus, make sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO channel is turned on in the top panel STEREO MASTER section, and raise the fader of the STEREO channel to an appropriate position. 10 If you want to use the MONO bus, make sure that the [ON] key of the MONO channel is turned on, and raise the fader of the MONO channel to an appropriate position. This operation will differ between the LS9-16 and LS9-32. ● For the LS9-16 Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer, press the LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key to access the custom fader layer, and then operate the [ON] key and fader of the corresponding channel module. ● For the LS9-32 Press the LAYER [MASTER] key to access the master fader layer, and operate the [ON] key and fader of channel module 32. 60 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 12 Use the ST button and MONO button in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window as on/off switches for the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. 13 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder to adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL knob in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window. ● For a channel set to LCR mode 12 Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO/ MONO popup window as an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. For a channel that is set to LCR mode, the signal sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be switched on/off in a single operation. 13 Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to adjust the proportion between the signal level sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the signal level sent to the MONO (C) bus. 14 Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO/ MONO popup window to set the panning of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus. If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. Signal level Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus If a ST IN channel is selected, operating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus R TO ST PAN knob Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus L C R Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus 5 Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the MONO (C) bus L L C TO ST BALANCE knob Signal level Signal level If a ST IN channel is selected, operating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case, the [PAN] encoder will operate as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the MONO (C) bus Input channel operations C Signal level L Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus C TO ST BALANCE knob R R TO ST BALANCE knob 15 If you want to operate a channel that is not Signal level currently shown in the popup window, use the [SEL] key to select that channel, and then make settings for it. Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus L C For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL] key will change the popup window to INPUT channels 9–16. 16 When you’ve finished making settings, R move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. TO ST BALANCE knob If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the TO ST PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. Signal level Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus L C PAN knob R LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 61 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to MIX buses 1–16. MIX buses are used mainly to send signals to on-stage foldback speakers or to external effect processors. Signals can be sent from an input channel to a MIX bus in the following three ways. ■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of the signal sent to the MIX bus. This method lets you control the signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX buses. ■ Using a popup window ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• In this method, you use the MIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus. This method lets you control the send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight channels to a specific MIX bus. ■ Using the top panel faders• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • In this method, you switch the LS9 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to adjust the send levels to the MIX bus. This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on/off switching for the signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus. 1 Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Here’s how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of the signals sent from a specific input channel to each MIX bus. 23 4 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the signal, and that a monitor system or external effect processor etc. is connected to the corresponding output port. Refer to p.95 for details on assigning an output port to a MIX bus, or to p.42 for details on connecting external equipment. 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 TO MIX field In this field you can switch the on/off status and adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX bus. B TO MIX LEVEL knob This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus. To adjust the send level in this field, move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. C TO MIX ON/OFF button If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, this button is displayed instead of the knob 2. This button is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input channel to a FIXED type MIX bus. To turn the signal on/off, move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key. 62 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 3 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL] keys of the channel module section or ST IN section to select the input channel that you want to operate. 4 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send-destination MIX bus. The LED of the corresponding key will light, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination. 5 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step 4, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the send level from that channel to the MIX bus you selected in step 4. If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the function of the [SELECTED SEND] encoder will change depending on which of the two adjacent keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are lit. ● If the left key is lit Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the pan (or balance, for a ST IN channel) of the signal that is sent from the INPUT channel to the two MIX buses. ● If the right key is lit Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the send level shared by the two MIX buses. 6 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a VARI type MIX bus, move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen and press the [ENTER] key to accsess the MIX SEND popup window. 5 Input channel operations D PRE/POST indicator This indicates the send position of the signal sent from the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus. The signal is being sent from the pre-EQ or pre-fader position if this indicates PRE, or from immediately after the channel on/off if the PRE indication is not shown. This indicator is only for display. You cannot use this field to change the send position of the signal. If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey. 7 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a FIXED type MIX bus, move the cursor to the TO MIX ON/OFF button in the screen and press the [ENTER] key. If you switch this off, the knob will change to black characters on a blue background. To turn it back on, press the [ENTER] key once again. 8 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select another input channel, and adjust the send level to the selected MIX bus in the same way. 9 Use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT ● If the send-destination MIX bus is the VARI type The TO MIX field in the screen shows the knob in the same color as the corresponding key of the MIX/ MATRIX SEND section. ● If the send-destination MIX bus is the FIXED type The TO MIX field will show the TO MIX ON/OFF button instead of the TO MIX LEVEL knob. In this case, you can’t adjust the send level. section to select another MIX bus as the send-destination, and adjust the send level from the input channel in the same way. HINT • If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus, then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX bus (→ p. 213). • If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213). • If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a specific MIX bus, select the master fader layer and press the [CUE] key for that MIX channel. NOTE • If the LED of only a specific key in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section is blinking and the LEDs of the remaining keys are lit, the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode (the mode in which you can use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX buses or MATRIX buses). Press the desired key in the MIX/ MATRIX SELECT section so that only the LED of that key is lit. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 63 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus In this method, you use the MIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus. The MIX SEND popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 3. The contents of the window will differ depending on whether the send-destination MIX bus is VARI type or FIXED type. 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned [ For a VARI type MIX bus ] Using a popup window to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the signal, and that a monitor system or external effect processor etc. is connected to the corresponding output port. 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 Channel number / Channel name This indicates the number and name of the sendsource channel. B PRE button This switches the position from which the signal is sent from the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX bus. If this button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from immediately after the channel on/off will be sent. C TO MIX ON/OFF button 1 SEND popup button 3 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL] keys of the channel module section or ST IN section to select the send-source input channel. 4 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send-destination MIX bus. 5 Move the cursor to the SEND popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to access the MIX SEND popup window. In the MIX SEND popup window you can control the send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight input channels to the currently selected MIX bus. HINT This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX bus. D TO MIX LEVEL knob This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX bus. E ALL PRE button This button selects PRE as the position from which the signals are sent from all input channels to the VARI type MIX bus. F ALL POST button This button selects POST as the position from which the signals are sent from all input channels to the VARI type MIX bus. If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the screen will change as follows. • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. • If you want to switch the on/off status of the signal sent to a VARI type MIX bus, you can move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen and press the [ENTER] key to access the above popup window. 64 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 7 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus This knob adjusts the pan (or balance, for a ST IN channel) of the signal that is sent from the INPUT channel to the two MIX buses. HINT • If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus, then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX bus (→ p. 213). • If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213). 8 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a VARI/FIXED type MIX bus, move the cursor to the TO MIX ON/OFF button in the screen and press the [ENTER] key. If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, operation of the adjacent left/right pair of buttons is linked. 9 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window, use the [SEL] key to select that channel, and then make settings for it. 10 If you want to adjust the send level to [ For a FIXED type MIX bus ] 1 another MIX bus, use the keys of the MIX/ MATRIX SELECT section to select another MIX bus, and make settings in the same way. 11 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. 2 1 Channel number / Channel name This indicates the number and name of the sendsource channel. B TO MIX ON/OFF button This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX bus. If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, on/off operations are linked for adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MIX buses. 6 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step 4, move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the send level from each channel to the selected MIX bus. If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, move the cursor to the TO MIX PAN (TO MIX BALANCE) knob and adjust the pan (or balance, for a ST IN channel) of the signal sent from each channel to the two MIX buses. 5 Input channel operations G TO MIX PAN/TO MIX BALANCE knob Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) Here’s how to use the top panel faders/encoders to adjust the send level and turn the signal on/off for the signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus. 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the signal, and that a monitor system or external effect processor etc. is connected to the corresponding output port. 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 7 To switch the send position of a signal sent to a VARI type MIX bus, move the cursor to the PRE button in the screen and press the [ENTER] key. If the PRE button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from immediately after the channel on/off will be sent. HINT • If the PRE button is on, then you will be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX bus (→ p. 213). 1 SEND popup button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 65 Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus 3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send-destination MIX bus. The LED of the corresponding key will light, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination. 4 Press the same key of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section once again. The key will change from lit to blinking, and the LEDs of the remaining keys in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section will light. This indicates that the LS9 is now in SENDS ON FADER mode (in which you can use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus / MATRIX bus). In SENDS ON FADER mode, the function of the channel module section’s faders and [ON] keys (the ST IN section’s encoders and [ON] keys) will change as follows. ● Faders/Encoders These will adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channels to the currently selected MIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode, the fader positions will move to the value of the send levels to the currently selected MIX bus. ● [ON] keys These will operate as on/off switches for the signal sent from the input channels to the currently selected MIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode, the [ON] keys will light or go dark according to the on/off status of the signals being sent to the currently selected MIX bus. ● [SEL] keys The [SEL] key of the selected channel will blink, and the [SEL] keys of channels that are not selected will light. However, the [SEL] keys of unassigned modules will go dark. 5 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step 3, use the faders of the channel module section and the encoders of the ST IN section to adjust the send level from the channels to the MIX bus you selected in step 3. As necessary, switch fader layers to the layer that contains the desired send-source input channels. 6 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a VARI/FIXED type MIX bus, press the top panel [ON] key. If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, on/off operations will be linked for the signal sent to the two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses. 7 Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level and switch the on/off status for other MIX buses in the same way. 66 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 8 When you’ve finished setting the MIX send levels, press the key that is currently blinking in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section. The LS9 will return to normal mode. HINT • You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a userdefined key. This allows you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX bus, or quickly return to the previous state. • You can also use the [HOME] key to cancel SENDS ON FADER mode. In SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destination is a MIX bus), the STEREO MASTER module will operate differently depending on the selected fader layer. Fader layer Function 1-16 {1-32}/17-32 {33-64} Send-destination MIX channel module MASTER/CUSTOM FADER STEREO channel (however, the fader and [ON] key will do nothing) NOTE • If you switch the fader layer from 1-16 {1-32}, 17-32 {33-64}, or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destination is a MIX bus), SENDS ON FADER mode will be cancelled. • You cannot operate the fader or [ON] key of a channel that is not a send-source (a channel that does not have a MIX SEND parameter) or of a channel that is not a send-destination bus master. Chapter 6 Output channel operations This chapter explains operations for output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels, MONO channels). The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channel are provided. ■ MIX channels 1–16 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • These channels process the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus. When the LS9 is in the initial state, these are assigned to the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot(s). MIX 1 2 ...15 16 M O N ST O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 Output channel operations 6 Signal flow for output channels CUE LR MIX 1-16 To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH MIX INSERT OUT 1-16 MIX INSERT IN 1-16 INSERT POINT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE EQ METER INSERT EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER ATT 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT CUE ON LEVEL ON MATRIX2,4...8 LEVEL ON LEVEL PAN ON MONO(C) POST ON METER LEVEL ON INSERT PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/ MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ INSERT POST ON INSERT OUT MIX OUT1-16 POST ON (13-16)To KEYIN To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT To RECORDER IN PATCH (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL MATRIX1,3...7 ST L COMP COMPAND EXPAND PRE FADER METER PRE FADER / POST ON To MATRIX VARI To MATRIX PRE FADER / POST ON VARI STEREO PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO TO LCR PAN LR MONO LCR ST R POST ON CSR LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 67 Signal flow for output channels ■ STEREO channel / MONO (C) channel •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and send it to an output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are set to LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels. When the LS9 is in the initial state, the STEREO channel is assigned to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack. MIX 1 2 ...15 16 M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 ST CUE LR STEREO L,R,MONO(C) To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C) INSERT POINT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE EQ METER INSERT EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER ATT COMP COMPAND EXPAND 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT PRE FADER METER POST ON METER LEVEL BAL ON INSERT PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/ ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) INSERT POST ON INSERT OUT To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT To RECORDER IN PATCH POST ON To STEREO OUT L+C,R+C CUE ON (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL MATRIX1,3...7 LEVEL ON MATRIX2,4...8 LEVEL ON LEVEL PAN ON VARI PRE FADER / POST ON STEREO OUT L+C STEREO OUT L To MATRIX PRE FADER / POST ON To OUTPUT PATCH To RECORDER IN PATCH STEREO OUT MONO(C) To MATRIX VARI STEREO STEREO OUT R+C STEREO OUT R To OUTPUT PATCH To RECORDER IN PATCH ■ MATRIX channels 1–8 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • These channels process the signals sent from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports. MIX 1 2 ...15 16 M O N ST O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 CUE LR MATRIX1-8 To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8 MATRIX INSERTIN1-8 INSERT POINT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE EQ METER INSERT ATT EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT CUE ON COMP COMPAND EXPAND PRE FADER METER LEVEL INSERT PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/ MATRIX1-8 POST EQ POST ON METER ON INSERT POST ON INSERT OUT MATRIX OUT 1-8 To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT To RECORDER IN PATCH POST ON (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL ● ATT (attenuator) ● ON (on/off) Attenuates/boosts the level of the signal. Turns the output channel on/off. If this is off, the corresponding channel is muted. ● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) This is a parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW. ● COMP/COMPANDER/EXPAND (compressor/compander/expander) This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or expander. ● LEVEL This adjusts the output level of the channel. ● BALANCE (STEREO channel only) Adjusts the left/right volume balance of the STEREO (L/ R) channel. 68 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ● TO MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1–8. ● TO MATRIX LEVEL 1-8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8) This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1–8. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either pre-fader or after the channel on/off. Signal flow for output channels • Specifying the channel name / icon If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the TO MATRIX PAN knob in the screen to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the sendsource is the STEREO channel or a stereo MIX channel, use the TO MATRIX BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses. ● INSERT You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations. ● METER This meters the level of the output channel. You can switch the position at which the level is detected. ● KEY IN (MIX channels 13–16 only) You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13–16 to the dynamics processors of each channel, and use them as key-in signals to control the dynamics. ● RACK IN PATCH This patches the output signal of a MIX channel to an input of the rack. ● OUTPUT PATCH This assigns an output port to an output channel. ● MONITOR SELECT This selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source. Specifying the channel name / icon Here’s how to specify the channel name and icon for each output channel. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 2 Use the LAYER section to select the fader layer that contains the desired output channel. 4 Move the cursor to the output port select popup button in the PATCH field of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. Output channel operations 6 The PATCH/NAME popup window will appear, allowing you to select an output port and icon for the output channel, and to assign a name. 4 2 3 1 HINT • In order to select a MATRIX channel or MONO channel on the LS9-16, you must assign the channel to the custom fader layer, and then select this layer. 3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module section or ST IN section to select the output channel that you want to operate. 2 1 This popup window contains the following items. 1 Output port button This indicates the output port that is assigned to the corresponding channel. If more than one output port is assigned, one port will be displayed to represent them. When you’re selecting the icon or editing the channel name, moving the cursor to this button and pressing the [ENTER] key will take you back to the output port selection screen. 1 PATCH field B Output port select popup button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 69 Specifying the channel name / icon B Icon button This shows the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a screen where you can select an icon and a sample name will appear. C Channel name input box This indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you move the cursor to this field and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a name. D Tabs These tabs switch the items that are shown in the window. 5 To select an icon for this channel, move the cursor to the icon button and press the [ENTER] key. The window display will change as follows. 7 If desired, use the sample name select but- tons to select a sample name. The selected sample name will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the window. HINT • You can add or edit the text after entering the sample name in the channel name field. If you want to assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a number, such as “Vocal 1” and “Vocal 2,” you can simply enter a sample name and then add a number. 8 If you want to enter a channel name directly (or edit the previously-entered sample name), move the cursor to the channel name field in the upper part of the window and press the [ENTER] key. The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the window, allowing you to enter or edit the text. For details on using the keyboard window, refer to p.34. 9 Use the [SEL] keys to select another output 3 1 2 channel, and specify its icon and channel name in the same way. While the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed, you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel that you’re operating. 10 When you’ve finished entering information, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. 1 Icon select buttons These buttons select the icon that is used for this channel. B Sample name select buttons These buttons select sample names that are related to the currently selected icon. When you press a button, its sample name will be entered in the channel name field. C Icon background color select buttons These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the background color for the icon. 6 Use the icon select buttons and the icon background color select buttons to select the icon you want to use for that channel. The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the upper part of the window. 70 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus This section explains how to send the signal of a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. Signals can be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode, and you can choose either of these two modes for each MIX channel. These two modes differ as follows. ■ ST/MONO mode• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This mode sends the signal from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently. • The panning of the signal sent from a monaural MIX channel to the STEREO bus L/R can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this encoder or knob.) • The volume balance of the signals sent from two stereo-assigned MIX channels to the STEREO bus left and right can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST BAL knob in the screen. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.) ■ LCR mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• This mode sends the signal of the MIX channel to a total of three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) together. • The signals sent from the same MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off together. 6 Output channel operations • The signals sent from the same MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off individually. • The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus. • The level of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus will change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder or the TO ST PAN knob / TO ST BAL knob in the screen. HINT • If you want to use headphones etc. to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus, you should press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] key several times to access the MONITOR (2/4) screen, and select “LCR” as the monitor source (→ p. 146) before you continue with the following procedure. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 2 1 TO ST field B TO ST PAN knob (for a stereo MIX channel, the TO ST BAL knob) 2 In the LAYER section, press the LAYER [MASTER] key to select the master fader layer. 3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module section to select the send-source MIX channel. 4 If you only want to adjust the pan or balance of the MIX channel, operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder (→ p. 86). You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 71 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus 5 If you want to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO/MONO bus, or switch it between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode, use either of the following methods to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window. • Move the cursor to the PAN popup button located in the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key. • Move the cursor to the TO ST PAN knob located in the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode in sets of eight MIX channels, and change the on/off status and pan/balance settings of the signals sent from those channels to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window shows the parameters for the eight channels that include the MIX channel you selected in step 3. C ST button D MONO button When the MODE button is set to ST/MONO mode, these buttons act as individual on/off switches for the signal sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. E TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob For monaural MIX channels, this acts as the PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. For stereo MIX channels, this acts as the BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting. For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are shown instead of the ST button (3) and MONO button (4). 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder. This popup window contains the following items. 1 Channel number / Channel name This indicates the number and name of the channel you’re operating. B MODE button This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode to specify how the signal is sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. You can specify this mode individually for each MIX channel. The setting will alternate between the two modes each time you press the button. The currently selected mode is shown by the position of the indicator (the green ◆ symbol) located immediately above the button. 72 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual F LCR button This button is an on/off switch for all signals sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If you turn off the button, no signals will be sent from that output channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. G CSR knob This knob adjusts the proportion between the signal level sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO (L/ R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus, over a range of 0–100%. To adjust the setting, move the cursor to the knob, press the [ENTER] key, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. 6 Use the MODE button to select either ST/ MONO mode or LCR mode for each MIX channel. 7 The ST button and MONO button are on/off switches for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. 8 If you want to use the STEREO bus, make sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO channel is turned on in the top panel STEREO MASTER section, and raise the fader of the STEREO channel to an appropriate position. Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus 9 If you want to use the MONO bus, make sure that the [ON] key of the MONO channel is turned on, and raise the fader of the MONO channel to an appropriate position. 13 Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO/ MONO popup window to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus. This operation will differ between the LS9-16 and LS9-32. If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST PAN knob of a MIX channel will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. ● For the LS9-16 Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer, press the LAYER [CUSTOM] key to access the custom fader layer, and then operate the [ON] key and fader of the corresponding channel module. 10 Select the master fader layer, make sure that the [ON] key of the desired MIX channel is turned on, and raise the fader to an appropriate position. Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus L C R TO ST PAN knob If a MIX channel set to stereo is selected, operating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/ R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case, the [PAN] encoder will operate as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. The following steps will differ depending on whether you selected a ST/MONO mode MIX channel or an LCR mode MIX channel in step 6. ● For a MIX channel set to ST/MONO mode 6 Output channel operations Press the LAYER [MASTER] key to access the master fader layer, and operate the [ON] key and fader of channel module 32. Signal level ● For the LS9-32 TO STEREO/MONO popup window as on/off switches for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. 12 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section Signal level 11 Use the ST button and MONO button in the [PAN] encoder to adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. Signal sent from the odd-numbered MIX channel to the STEREO (L) bus L 11 Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO/ MONO popup window as an on/off switch for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. For a MIX channel that is set to LCR mode, the signal sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be switched on/off in a single operation. R Signal level You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob in the TO STEREO/ MONO popup window. ● For a MIX channel set to LCR mode C TO ST BALANCE knob Signal sent from the even-numbered MIX channel to the STEREO (R) bus L C R TO ST BALANCE knob 12 Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to adjust the proportion between the signal level sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the signal level sent to the MONO (C) bus. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 73 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the TO ST PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. Signal level Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus L C PAN knob R If a stereo MIX channel is selected, operating the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration. Signal level Signal sent from the odd-numbered MIX channel to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent from the odd-numbered MIX channel to the MONO (C) bus L C TO ST BALANCE knob R Signal level Signal sent from the even-numbered MIX channel to the MONO (C) bus Signal sent from the even-numbered MIX channel to the STEREO (R) bus L 74 C TO ST BALANCE knob LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual R 14 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window, use the [SEL] key to select that channel, and then make settings for it. For example if MIX channels 1–8 are shown in the popup window, pressing the MIX channel 9 [SEL] key will change the popup window to MIX channels 9–16. 15 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses This section explains how to send the signal from a MIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. You can do this in any of the following three ways. ■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of the signal sent to the MATRIX bus. ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• In this method, you use the MATRIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MATRIX bus. This method lets you control the send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight channels to a specific MATRIX bus. ■ Using the top panel faders • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • In this method, you switch the LS9 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX bus. This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on/off switching for the signals sent from MIX, STEREO (L/R), and MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of the signal sent to the MATRIX bus. You can either control the signals sent from a desired MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to all MATRIX buses, or control the signals sent from all MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus. ■ Controlling the signals sent from a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to all MATRIX buses 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 6 Output channel operations ■ Using a popup window 1 TO MATRIX field If a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is selected, this area of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will show the TO MATRIX field, allowing you to switch the on/off status and adjust the send level of the signals sent to the MATRIX buses. B TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs These adjust the send level of the signals sent from the MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to the MATRIX buses. These knobs are the same color as the corresponding keys of the MIX/MATRIX SEND section. To adjust the send level in this field, move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the corresponding knob and press the [ENTER] key. 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan- nel module section [SEL] keys to select the send-source MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel. HINT 2 • In order to select a MONO channel on the LS9-16, you must first select the custom fader layer to which you’ve assigned that MONO channel, and then press the corresponding [SEL] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 75 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses 3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys HINT to select the send-destination MATRIX bus. • If PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus, then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MATRIX buses (→ p. 213). When a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is selected, the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are used to select the send-destination MATRIX bus. When you press a key to select the send-destination MATRIX bus, only the LED of the corresponding key will blink, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination. The cursor will move to the corresponding TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the TO MATRIX field of the screen. • If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213). • If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, select the fader layer that includes that MATRIX channel, and press the corresponding [CUE] key. NOTE • If a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is selected, MIX/ MATRIX SELECT section keys 9–16 are inactive. • If the LED of only the specified key is blinking in the MIX/ MATRIX SELECT section and the LEDs of the remaining keys are lit, the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode. Press the desired key of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section so that only the LED of that key is blinking. 4 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the send level from that channel to the MATRIX bus you selected in step 3. If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, the function of the [SELECTED SEND] encoder will change depending on which of the two adjacent keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are lit. ■ Controlling the signals sent from MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL] keys of the channel module section to select the send-destination MATRIX channel. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will change as follows. ● If the left key is lit Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the pan (or balance, for a STEREO channel) of the signal that is sent from that channel to the two MATRIX buses. 1 2 ● If the right key is lit Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the send level shared by the two MATRIX buses. 5 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen and press the [ENTER] key. If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey. To turn it back on, press the [ENTER] key once again. 6 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select another channel, and adjust the send level to the selected MATRIX bus in the same way. 7 Use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select another MATRIX bus as the send-destination, and adjust the send level in the same way. 1 FROM MIX field If a MATRIX channel is selected, this area of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will show the FROM MIX field, allowing you to switch the on/off status and adjust the send level of the signals sent from each MIX channel to the MATRIX bus. B FROM MIX LEVEL knobs These knobs indicate and control the send level of the signals sent from MIX channels 1–16 to the currently selected MATRIX bus. HINT • In order to select a MATRIX channel on the LS9-16, you must first select the custom fader layer to which you’ve assigned that MATRIX channel, and then press the corresponding [SEL] key. 76 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses to the selected MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the corresponding knob of the FROM MIX field, and operate the [SELECTED SEND] encoder. You can obtain the same result by operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, the send level to the two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MATRIX buses will be linked. 4 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent from a MIX channel to the selected MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the corresponding knob of the FROM MIX field and press the [ENTER] key. If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey. To turn it back on, press the [ENTER] key once again. NOTE • When the SELECTED CH VIEW screen for MATRIX channels is displayed, the keys of the MIX/MATRIX section will operate as keys that select the send-destination MIX bus for the input channels. 5 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to switch the send-destination MATRIX channel and control the send level to a specific MATRIX bus in the same way. 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan- nel module section [SEL] keys to select the send-source MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel. 3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys to select the send-destination MATRIX bus. Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination. 4 Move the cursor to the SEND popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to access the MATRIX SEND popup window. In the MATRIX SEND popup window you can view eight MIX channels or the STEREO (L/R) and MONO channels at once, and control the send level, on/off status, and send point for the signals sent to the MATRIX bus. The MATRIX SEND popup window shows the parameters for a maximum of eight channels that include the channel you selected in step 3. 1 2 3 6 Output channel operations 3 To adjust the send level from a MIX channel 4 Using a popup window Here’s how you can use the MATRIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from up to eight channels to a MATRIX bus. 1 Channel number / Channel name This indicates the number and name of the sendsource channel. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section B PRE button This switches the position from which the signal is sent from the send-source channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. If this button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from immediately after the channel on/off will be sent. [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 C TO MATRIX ON/OFF button This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from the send-source channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. D TO MATRIX LEVEL knob This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the send-source channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. 1 SEND popup button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 77 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, the screen will change as follows. 5 7 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to the MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the TO MATRIX ON/OFF button in the screen and press the [ENTER] key. If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, operation of the adjacent left/right pair of buttons is linked. 8 If you want to operate a channel that is not currently shown in the popup window, use the [SEL] key to select that channel, and then make settings for it. E TO MATRIX PAN/TO MATRIX BALANCE knob This knob adjusts the panning (or the balance, if the send-source is a STEREO channel or a MIX channel set to stereo) of the signal sent from this channel to the two MATRIX buses. HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. • If PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus, then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MATRIX buses (→ p. 213). • If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213). 5 To adjust the send level from each channel to the selected MATRIX bus, move the cursor to a TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys. If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, move the cursor to the TO MATRIX PAN (TO MATRIX BAL) knob and adjust the pan (or balance, for a STEREO channel or MIX channels set to stereo) of the signal sent from each channel to the two MATRIX buses. 9 If you want to adjust the send level to another MATRIX bus, use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select another MATRIX bus, and make settings in the same way. 10 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key. Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) Here’s how to use the top panel faders and [ON] keys to adjust the send level and turn the signal on/off for the signals sent from the MIX, STEREO (L/R), and MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 6 To switch the send position of a signal sent to the MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the PRE button in the screen and press the [ENTER] key. If the PRE button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from immediately after the channel on/off will be sent. HINT • If the PRE button is on, then you will be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered MATRIX buses (→ p. 213). 1 SEND popup button 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the channel module section [SEL] keys to select a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel. 78 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses to select the send-destination MATRIX bus. Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination. 4 Press the same key of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section once again. The key will change from lit to blinking, and the LEDs of the remaining keys in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section will light. This indicates that the LS9 is now in SENDS ON FADER mode, allowing you to use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus / MATRIX bus. In SENDS ON FADER mode, the faders and [ON] keys of the channel module section will change their operation as follows. ● Faders The faders will adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode, the fader positions will move to the value of the send levels to the currently selected MATRIX bus. 7 Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level and switch the on/off status for other MATRIX buses in the same way. 8 When you’ve finished setting the MATRIX send levels, press the key that is currently blinking in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section. The LS9 will return to normal mode. HINT • You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a userdefined key. This allows you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MATRIX bus, or quickly return to the previous state. • You can also use the [HOME] key to cancel SENDS ON FADER mode. In SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destination is a MATRIX bus), the STEREO MASTER module will operate differently depending on the selected fader layer. Fader layer Function 1-16 {1-32}/17-32 {33-64} Send-destination MATRIX channel module ● [ON] keys These keys will function as on/off switches for the signal sent from each channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON FADER mode, the [ON] keys will light or go dark according to the on/off status of the signals being sent to the currently selected MATRIX bus. ● [SEL] keys The [SEL] key of the selected channel will blink, and the [SEL] keys of channels that are not selected will light. However, the [SEL] keys of unassigned modules will go dark. 5 Use the channel module faders to adjust [SEL] key, [CUE] key: STEREO channel MASTER/ CUSTOM FADER 6 Output channel operations 3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys [ON] key, fader: Adjust the on/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses NOTE • If you switch the fader layer from 1-16 {1-32}, 17-32 {33-64}, or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destination is a MATRIX bus), SENDS ON FADER mode will be cancelled. • You cannot operate the fader or [ON] key of a channel that is not a send-source (a channel that does not have a MATRIX SEND parameter) or of a channel that is not a send-destination bus master. the send levels from the channels to the MATRIX bus you selected in step 3. As necessary, switch fader layers to access the layer that contains the desired send-source channel. 6 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent to the MATRIX bus, press the top panel [ON] key. If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, on/off operations will be linked for the signal sent to the two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MATRIX buses. NOTE • While SENDS ON FADER mode is active with a MATRIX bus as the send-destination, the faders/encoders and [ON] keys of input channels will be disabled. If you want to operate an input channel, you must first disable the above SENDS ON FADER mode. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 79 80 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to control the parameters of a selected channel. About the SELECTED CHANNEL section 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display corresponds to a channel module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to manually adjust all the major parameters of the currently selected channel. Operations in this section will affect the channel that is currently selected by its [SEL] key. You can use the encoders and keys on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain, EQ settings, the threshold setting of the dynamics processors, pan/balance settings, and send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. For a ST IN channel or STEREO channel, either the L or the R channel is selected, and the major parameters are linked. LS9-16 SELECTED CHANNEL section HINT • If you want to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to set the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses, use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section located at the left of the display. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 81 About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen When you press the [HOME] key, the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. This screen shows most of the parameters of the channel currently selected by its [SEL] key. You can use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to check the values when operating the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section, or when you need to edit more detailed parameters. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following items. D PAN field ● When an INPUT channel or monaural MIX channel is selected 1 4 23 This functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. Here you can also view or edit the panning of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. 5 ● When a ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel 6 This functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This also lets you view or edit the balance of the left/right signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus. is selected 9 K ● When a stereo MATRIX channel is selected This shows the balance of the signals sent from the two MATRIX channels. ● When a STEREO channel is selected 7 8 J L M 1 SEND field ● When an input channel is selected Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals sent from that channel to each MIX bus (if the MIX bus is set to the FIXED type), and view or edit the send levels. ● When a MIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals sent from that channel to each MATRIX bus, and view or edit the send levels. ● When a MATRIX channel is selected Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals sent from each MIX channel to that MATRIX bus, and view or edit the send levels. B HA field (input channels only) In this field you can view or edit the input port patched to the input channel, the head amp gain, the phantom power on/off status, and the phase setting. The input level OVER indicator is also shown here. 3 C PATCH field (output channels only) For output channels, the PATCH field is shown in the 2 area. In this field you can view and edit the output port that is patched to the output channel. For channels to which two or more output ports are patched, only one will be shown as a representative. 82 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual This shows the balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel. E DYNA1 field F DYNA2 field (input channels only) Here you can view or edit the Dynamics 1/2 parameters. This also accesses the DYNAMICS 1 / DYNAMICS 2 popup windows where you can edit detailed dynamics parameters that cannot be edited in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. G EQ field Here you can switch the four-band EQ on/off, and view or edit its parameters. For input channels, you can also switch the HPF (high-pass filter) on/off, and view or adjust its cutoff frequency. H EQ graph field This shows the response of the EQ/HPF. I INSERT field (INPUT channels 1–32 and MIX/ MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only) The signal route for insertion in the channel can be switched on/off here. J DIRECT field (INPUT channels only) This is an on/off switch for the signal that is directly output from the channel. You can also view and edit the output level here. K SAFE field Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for that channel. If only some of the channel parameters are set to Recall Safe, the PARTIAL indicator will light. L FADER field Here you can view and edit the input/output level of the channel, and switch the channel on/off. M MUTE field Here you can select the mute group to which that channel is assigned. SAFE indicator will light if the corresponding channel is set to Mute Safe. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section This section explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control all of the parameters for a specific channel. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. If you leave this screen displayed, you will always be able to view the settings in the screen while operating an encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Even if a screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW screen is selected, the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section always affect the currently selected channel. When you operate an encoder, a small popup window indicating the value of that parameter will appear in the screen. HINT • You can also access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen by pressing any one of the encoders in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer. 3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module section, ST IN section, or STEREO MASTER section to select a channel. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section will affect the channel that is currently selected by its [SEL] key. The number and name of the currently selected channel is shown in the upper left of the display. 4 Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons and knobs in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel. 1 2 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 7 1 Channel number B Channel name HINT • In the case of ST IN channels or STEREO channels, you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same [SEL] key. • In order to select a MATRIX/MONO channel on the LS9-16, you must first select the custom fader layer to which you’ve assigned that channel, and then press the corresponding [SEL] key. • You can also move the cursor to the selected channel in the upper left of the display, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to change the selected channel. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 83 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Subsequent operations will differ depending on the parameters you want to adjust. ● Adjusting the send levels from a specific channel to the MIX buses / MATRIX buses Use the SEND field when you want to send the signal from an INPUT/ST IN channel to a MIX bus, or from a MIX, STEREO, or MONO channel to a MATRIX bus. 1 To adjust the send level to a MIX bus / MATRIX bus, use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select the send-destination bus, and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL/TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.) If desired, you can use the TO MIX ON/OFF buttons to switch the signal sent to each bus on/off (if the MIX bus is the FIXED type). At the left side of these buttons is shown the position from which the signal is sent from the current channel. (For details on changing the send position → p. 213) 2 HINT • If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a time, use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the popup window (→ p. 64). • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. • You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to the To MIX SEND knob of a VARI type, and pressing the [ENTER] key. • For MIX buses that are set to STEREO, the left knob indicates the PAN of the MIX SEND, and the right knob indicates the SEND LEVEL. 1 SEND popup button This accesses a popup window where you can make send level settings for eight channels at a time. B TO MIX LEVEL (TO MATRIX LEVEL) knobs These knobs indicate the send level of the signal sent from that input channel to each MIX bus or MATRIX bus. If the send-destination MIX bus / MATRIX bus is set to stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a PAN knob. (For a ST IN channel, a stereo MIX channel, or STEREO channel, it will operate as the BALANCE knob.) 3 C TO MIX ON/OFF button If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, the TO MIX LEVEL knob will not appear; instead, the TO MIX ON/OFF button will be shown. By moving the cursor to the TO MIX ON/OFF button and pressing the [ENTER] key, you can turn the signal sent from that channel to the MIX button on/off. 84 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ● Adjusting the send level from the MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus 1 To adjust the send level from the MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus, access the send-destination MATRIX channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. 2 6 3 4 1 1 HA popup button This button displays the HA/PATCH popup window where you can make head amp settings for eight channels at a time (→ p. 57). B Input port select popup button This accesses the PATCH/NAME popup window, where you can select the input port and specify the channel name and icon. The input port assigned to that channel is shown inside this button. C +48V button 1 SEND popup button This button displays a popup window where you can make send level settings for eight channels at a time. B TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs These adjust the send level of the signal sent from each MIX channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. To adjust the send level to a MATRIX bus, use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select the MIX channel you want to operate, and then operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.) At the left side of each of these knobs is shown the position from which the signal is sent from the MIX channel. (For details on changing the send position → p. 213) HINT • If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a time, use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the popup window (→ p. 77). • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. • You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to the To MATRIX SEND knob and pressing the [ENTER] key. • For MATRIX buses that are set to STEREO, the left knob indicates the PAN of the MATRIX SEND, and the right knob indicates the SEND LEVEL. ● Making HA settings (input channels only) To control the head amp (HA) assigned to an INPUT/ST IN channel, you will use the [HA GAIN] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the HA field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. The HA field includes the following items. This button switches the phantom power on/off for the head amp assigned to that channel. D ø (phase) button This button switches the input assigned to that channel between normal phase and reverse phase. The phase is reversed when the button is on, and normal when the button is off. E OVER indicator This will light when the input signal from the HA reaches the overload point. F GAIN knob This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp assigned to that channel. To adjust the gain value, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the GAIN knob and operate the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys.) The indicator above the GAIN knob in the screen shows whether the signal of the patched input port has overloaded. When you move the cursor to the input port select popup button and press the [ENTER] key, the PATCH/NAME popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input port and specify the channel name and icon. (For details on the popup window → p. 55) 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 2 5 HINT • If you want to make head amp settings for eight channels at a time, use the HA popup button in the screen to access the HA/ PATCH popup window (→ p. 57). • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder. NOTE • The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 85 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ● Changing the output patching (Output channels only) To change the output patching of an output channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the PATCH popup button. 1 2 B PAN/BAL knob The following parameter will change, according to the channel that is selected. INPUT channel TO STEREO PAN ST IN channel TO STEREO BALANCE MIX (MONO x 2) channel TO STEREO PAN MIX (STEREO) channel MIX BALANCE MATRIX (MONO x 2) channel Not displayed MATRIX (STEREO) channel MATRIX BALANCE STEREO channel STEREO BALANCE MONO channel Not displayed HINT 1 PATCH popup button This button displays the HA/PATCH popup window where you can make output port settings for eight channels at a time (→ p. 95). B Output port select popup button This accesses the PATCH/NAME popup window, where you can select the output port and specify the channel name and icon. The output port assigned to that channel is shown inside the button. For channels to which two or more output ports are patched, only one will be shown as a representative. To select the output port and specify the channel name or icon, move the cursor to the output port select popup button and press the [ENTER] key to access the PATCH/ NAME popup window (→ p. 69). HINT • If you want to make output port settings for eight channels at a time, use the PATCH popup button in the screen to access the HA/ PATCH popup window (→ p. 95). • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder. ● Setting the pan/balance To adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus, use the [PAN] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the PAN field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. The PAN field includes the following items. 1 3 2 1 PAN popup button This button displays the TO STEREO/MONO popup window where you can make pan/balance settings for eight channels at a time. 86 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual • You can also access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window by moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and pressing the [ENTER] key. C ST/MONO button (INPUT, ST IN, MIX channels only) This switches the on/off status of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus. 4 D LCR button If an INPUT, ST IN, or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR button is displayed in location 3. The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. To adjust the pan/balance of each channel, use the ST/ MONO button or the LCR button to select the send-destination bus, and operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.) HINT • If you want to make pan/balance settings for eight channels at a time, use the PAN popup button in the screen to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window (→ p. 72). Alternatively, you can move the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and press the [ENTER] key to access it. • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ● Making dynamics settings HINT To operate the dynamics of the currently selected channel, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/ [DYNAMICS 2] encoder, and the DYNA1/DYNA2 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoder. NOTE The DYNA1/DYNA2 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following items. 3 4 5 ● Making HPF/EQ settings To operate the HPF/EQ of the currently selected channel, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section EQ encoders, and the EQ field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. The EQ field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following items. 1 1 5 7 6 2 2 4 1 DYNA1/DYNA2 popup buttons These buttons access the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window, where you can make detailed settings for dynamics. B THRESH knob This indicates the setting of the threshold parameter of a gate or compressor. To adjust the value, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/ [DYNAMICS 2] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the knob and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.) C DYNAMICS ON/OFF button These buttons turn dynamics processors 1/2 on/off. D OVER indicator This will light if the output level of the dynamics reaches the overload point. E Level meter This displays a bar graph indication of the signal level being input to the dynamics (on=green, off=gray) and the amount of gain reduction (orange). The threshold setting is shown as a vertical line. F Parameter knobs These knobs indicate the values of parameters other than threshold. To operate the dynamics, turn the DYNAMICS ON/OFF button on, and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders to adjust the threshold parameters. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the DYNA1/DYNA2 field, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.) To make detailed dynamics settings, move the cursor to the DYNA1/DYNA2 popup button or the DYNA1/ DYNA2 field, and press the [ENTER] key to access the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window. (For details on the popup window → p. 117) 6 3 1 EQ popup button This button accesses the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window, where you can make detailed HPF/EQ settings. B EQ ON/OFF button Switches the EQ on/off. C HPF ON/OFF button Switches the HPF on/off. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section • The DYNA 2 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and the [DYNAMICS 2] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are valid only if an input channel is selected. D HPF FREQ knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. E OVER indicator This will light when the post-EQ signal reaches the overload point. F Q/F/G knobs These knobs indicate the Q, F (center frequency), and G (amount of boost/cut) settings for each band (LOW, LMID, H-MID, and HIGH). To operate the EQ, switch the EQ ON/OFF button on, and use the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN] knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the Q, center frequency, and the amount of boost/cut. (Use the EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID], and EQ [LOW] keys to select the band you want to operate.) Alternatively, move the cursor to the knobs of the EQ field in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. To make detailed EQ settings, move the cursor to the EQ popup button or the knobs of the EQ field, and press the [ENTER] key to access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window. (For details on the popup window → p. 115) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 87 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ● Making direct output settings (INPUT channels only) HINT • You can also use the cursor keys to switch bands. • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing an EQ encoder in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Use the DIRECT field to make direct-output related settings for an INPUT channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. This field includes the following items. 1 NOTE • The type of the LOW band EQ or HIGH band EQ cannot be switched in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. If necessary, you can access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window and switch the EQ type. • If the HIGH band EQ type is set to Low Pass Filter, the HIGH band Q knob will not be displayed, and the GAIN knob will function as an on/off switch for the Low Pass Filter. ● Making insert settings (INPUT channels 1–32 and MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only) Use the INSERT field to make insert-related settings in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. This field includes the following items. 1 2 2 1 DIRECT popup button This button accesses the DIRECT OUT popup window, where you can assign an output port to the direct output and adjust the output level for eight channels at a time. B DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button Turns the direct output on/off. To make direct output settings, move the cursor to the DIRECT popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the DIRECT OUT popup window. (For details on the popup window → p. 103) When you’ve assigned an output port to direct output in the popup window, turn on the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button. 3 ● Setting a channel to Recall Safe 1 INSERT popup button This accesses the INSERT popup window, where you can assign input/output ports to insert-in/insert-out and specify the signal insertion points for eight channels at a time. In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the SAFE field to set the currently selected channel to the Recall Safe status (in which that channel will not be affected by Recall operations). This field includes the following items. B IN indicator This indicates the signal level of the input port that is patched to insert-in. C INSERT ON/OFF button 1 3 2 Switches the insert on/off. To make insert settings, move the cursor to the INSERT popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the INSERT popup window. (For details on the popup window → p. 101) When you’ve assigned input/output ports to insert-in/out in the popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button. 1 SAFE popup button This opens the RECALL SAFE screen, where you can make settings related to Recall Safe. B PARTIAL indicator This indicator will light if only some of the parameters of that channel are set to Recall Safe. C RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for the channel. To set all parameters of the channel to Recall Safe mode, press the RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button to turn it on. If you want to set only specific parameters of the channel to Recall Safe mode, use the SAFE popup button to access the RECALL SAFE screen, and select the parameters that you want to be in Recall Safe mode. (For details on the RECALL SAFE screen → p. 140) 88 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ● Turning a channel on/off ● Assigning a channel to a mute group Use the FADER field to switch the channel on/off in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. This field includes the following items. In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the MUTE field to assign a channel to a mute group (a group that allows multiple channels to be muted/unmuted simultaneously). This field includes the following items. 1 2 1 4 3 3 2 1 ∑ CLIP indicator This indicator will light if an overload occurs at even one of the level detection points in that channel. 1 MUTE popup button This accesses the MUTE GROUP screen, where you can select the channels to be assigned to each mute group. C Input/output level This indicates the current setting of the fader. B MUTE buttons 1–8 These buttons select the mute group(s) to which this channel is assigned. D CH ON/OFF button This button switches the channel on/off. This is linked with the [ON] button of the top panel. When you press the CH ON/OFF button in the FADER field, that channel will be switched on/off. If you move the cursor to the fader and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys, the level of that channel will change. If a fader layer that includes the corresponding channel is recalled to the top panel, the corresponding [ON] key and fader will be linked with these operations. C MUTE SAFE indicator This will light if the corresponding channel is set to Mute Safe (the state in which it will not be affected by Mute operations). Mute Safe settings can be made in the MUTE GROUP screen. To assign the channel to a mute group, turn on the desired mute button 1–8 (multiple selections are allowed). To check the channels that are assigned to each mute group, move the cursor to the MUTE popup button and press the [ENTER] key to access the MUTE GROUP screen. (For details on the MUTE GROUP screen → p. 121) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 7 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section B Fader This indicates and adjusts the input/output level of the channel. This is linked with the fader on the top panel. 89 90 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 8 Custom fader layer This chapter explains how to assign the desired channels to the custom fader layer. About the custom fader layer The channel module section and ST IN channel section on the top panel of the LS9 consists of four layers called “fader layers.” Custom fader layer 8 Fader layer 1-16 {1-32} Fader layer 17-32 {33-64} Master fader layer Custom fader layer When you switch between these fader layers, you are changing the channels that will be controlled by the faders, encoders, [ON] keys, and [SEL] keys of the channel module section and ST IN channel section. Use the keys of the LAYER section to switch fader layers. Fader layer 1-16 Fader layer 17-32 Master fader layer Custom fader layer LS9-16 Fader layer 1-32 Fader layer 33-64 Master fader layer Custom fader layer LS9-32 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 91 About the custom fader layer • Assigning channels to the custom fader layer Of the above fader layers, channels are pre-assigned to fader layer 1-16 {1-32}, fader layer 17-32 {33-64}, and the master fader layer (→ p. 28). However, you are free to assign desired channels to the custom fader layer that is recalled when you press the LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key. For example, INPUT channels belonging to different fader layers could be assigned to consecutive modules so that they can be operated together. Alternatively, input channels and output channels can both be assigned, so that you could simultaneously operate the send level from an INPUT channel to a specific MIX bus at the same time that you adjust the master level of that MIX bus itself. CH1 CH5 CH10 CH13 CH17 CH19 MIX1 MIX2 Assigning channels to the custom fader layer To assign the desired channels to the custom fader layer, proceed as follows. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 2 Move the cursor to the CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup window will appear, allowing you to select the channel that will be assigned to each channel module or ST channel. 1 1 2 1 CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup button 92 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual LS9-32 Assigning channels to the custom fader layer 1 Channel module select field Select the channels that will be assigned to the top panel channel modules 1–16 {1–32}. B ST IN channel select field Select the channels that will be assigned to the top panel ST IN channels 1–2 {1–4}. 3 Move the cursor to the channel module ● Channels that can be selected in the ST IN channel select field • ST IN channels 1–4 HINT • As an alternative to using the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys, you can move the cursor to the field you want to edit and press a [SEL] key to select a channel. select field or the ST IN channel select field, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the channel that you want to assign to that field, and press the [ENTER] key. 4 Assign channels to other fields in the same The field will show the name of the selected channel. ated, press the LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key in the LAYER section. way. 5 To recall the custom fader layer you’ve creThe channels you selected in step 3 will be assigned to the channel module section and ST IN channel section of the panel. The following channels can be selected for each field. ● Channels that can be selected in the chan- • Custom fader layer settings are remembered for each user. When a user logs-in, their previous settings will be reproduced. nel module select field • • • • • • • INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} ST IN channels 1–4 STEREO channel MONO channels MIX channels 1–16 MATRIX channels 1–8 MONITOR LEVEL 8 Custom fader layer HINT If you select a ST IN channel 1–4 or the STEREO channel in the channel module select field, the L/R channels will be assigned together. In this case, the channel module will operate as follows. • The fader and [ON] key will operate the L and R channels together. • The L and R channels will be selected alternately each time you press the [SEL] key. • The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of the L or R channel, whichever level is greater. If you select one of a pair of MIX/MATRIX channels set to stereo in the channel module select field, the channel module will operate as follows. • The fader and [ON] key will operate the two MIX/MATRIX channels together. • Pressing the [SEL] key will select only the MIX/ MATRIX channel that you assigned. • The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of the L or R channel, whichever level is greater. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 93 94 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 9 Input/output patching This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs. Changing the output patching When the LS9 is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks and internal ports) are patched to the following output channels. Output port (jack / internal port) Output channels OMNI OUT jacks 1–6 MIX channels 1–6 OMNI OUT jacks 7–8 STEREO L/R channel Slot output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8 Slot output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16 Rack inputs 5A (L), 6A (L), 7A (L), 8A (L) MIX channels 13–16 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel USB memory recorder input (L/R) STEREO L/R channel ● Selecting the output port for each output channel Here’s how to select the output port that will be the output destination for each output channel. 1 Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the [SEL] keys to select an output channel. 1 For the LS9-32 Output port (jack / internal port) 2 3 Output channels OMNI OUT jacks 1–12 MIX channels 1–12 OMNI OUT jacks 13–14 MATRIX channels 1–2 OMNI OUT jacks 15–16 STEREO L/R channel Slot 1 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8 Slot 1 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16 Slot 2 output channels 1–8 MIX channels 1–8 Slot 2 output channels 9–16 MIX channels 9–16 Rack inputs 5A (L), 6A (L), 7A (L), 8A (L) MIX channels 13–16 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R) STEREO L/R channel USB memory recorder input (L/R) STEREO L/R channel However, the above patching can be modified as needed. If you want to change the output patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination for each channel, or you can select the channel that will be the output source for each output port. 9 Input/output patching For the LS9-16 1 Channel number / Channel name B PATCH popup button C Port select popup button HINT • As an alternative to using the PATCH popup button, you can also select the output port in the PATCH/NAME popup window that appears when you move the cursor to the port select popup button and press the [ENTER] key (→ p. 69). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 95 Changing the output patching 2 Move the cursor to the PATCH popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The HA/PATCH popup window will appear. This popup window shows the output port assigned to the output channels, in groups of eight channels. 1 Category tab This selects the type of output ports that are shown in the lower part of the popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following output ports. ● OMNI/2TR OUT Shows the OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} and 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack. 1 2 3 ● SLOT {1/2} Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}. ● RACK Shows the inputs of racks 1–8. Use this when you want to send the signal of an output channel to the input of a GEQ or effect. HINT 1 Channel number • For details on GEQ and effects, refer to p.157. This is the number of the output channel. B Channel name These are the names of each channel. ● REC IN C Port select popup button This button selects the output port assigned to the channel. The currently selected output port is shown. Shows the input of the USB memory recorder. Use this when you want to send the signal of an output channel to the input of the USB memory recorder. B Port select button HINT • Even if multiple output ports are assigned, only one output port is shown. 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the output port for the desired channel, and press the [ENTER] key. The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port for the output channel. This popup window contains the following items. This selects the output port that is assigned to the corresponding channel. C Level indicator This indicates the state of the port’s signal using the following colors. • -60 dB or below ........... black • -60 dB to -18 dB .......... green • -18 dB to 0 dB.............. yellow • OVER............................ red‘ 4 Move the cursor to the desired tab in the upper part of the window, and press the [ENTER] key. The type of ports shown in the lower part of the window will change according to the tab you selected. 1 3 2 5 Move the cursor to the desired port select button, and press the [ENTER] key. That port will be selected as the output destination. You can select more than one output port. 6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and LS9-16 press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen. HINT • As an alternative to using the CLOSE button, you can return to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key once. 7 If necessary, perform the same steps for other output channels. 96 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Changing the output patching ● Selecting the output channel for each output port Here’s how to select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen. 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 J 1 INITIALIZE button This initializes the settings for the displayed output ports. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Initialize operation. C DELAY SCALE field Use the following buttons to select the units for the delay time displayed below the delay time setting knob (6). ● METER The delay time is displayed as a distance in meters, calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20°C (68°F) (343.59 m/s) × delay time (seconds). 9 Input/output patching LS9-16 B I/O card type If the output channel of a slot is selected for operations, this area indicates the type of I/O card installed in that slot. ● FEET LS9-32 In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP field in the center of the screen, you can select the output port assigned to the output channel from the following choices. ● OMNI 1-8 {1-8/9-16} Select the output channels assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16}. ● SLOT {1/2} 1-8/9-16 Select the output channels assigned to output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}. ● 2TR OUT Select the output channel assigned to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack. 2 In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP field, move the cursor to the button for the output ports that you want to set, and press the [ENTER] key. The delay time is displayed as a distance in feet, calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20°C (68°F) (1127.26 feet/s) × delay time (seconds). ● SAMPLE The delay time is displayed in units of samples. If you change the sampling frequency on which the LS9 operates, the number of samples will change accordingly. ● msec The delay time is displayed in units of milliseconds. D Output port This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned. E Channel select button This button selects the channel assigned to the output port. The number of the currently selected channel is shown. The OUTPUT PORT popup window will appear, allowing you to make output port settings. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 97 Changing the output patching F Delay time setting knob This knob sets the delay time of the output port. Move the cursor to this knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys to adjust the setting. The delay time value is shown below the knob, using the units selected in the DELAY SCALE field (3). G DELAY button Switches the delay on/off for the output port. H ø (phase) button Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase (black) and reverse phase (orange). I ATT knob Adjusts the amount of attenuation/boost for the signal assigned to the output port. To change the setting, move the cursor to this knob in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. You can adjust the value in 1.0 dB steps in a range of -96 – +24 dB. The current value is shown immediately below the knob. J Level meter This meter shows the signal level of the channel assigned to the output port. 3 To assign a channel to an output port, move the cursor to the channel number field of that port, and press the [ENTER] key. The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear. This popup window contains the following items. select buttons to select the send-source channel. 5 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen. If PATCH is turned on in the CONFIRMATION field of the PREFERENCE popup window, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to modify the patching. If STEAL PATCH is turned on, a confirmation dialog box will appear if you attempt to change a location that is already patched to another location. (For details, refer to → p. 194) HINT • If you assign CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64} to an output port, the selected INPUT channel will be output directly from the corresponding output port. In this case, the channel select button in the OUTPUT PORT popup window will indicate “DIR CH xx” (xx = channel number). (For details on direct output → p. 103) 6 Make settings for delay, phase, and attenuator as necessary. 7 Repeat steps 3–6 to assign channels to other output ports. 8 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or to the × symbol in the upper right of the window), and press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen. 1 2 LS9-32 1 Category tab This selects the type of channel that will be shown in the lower part of the window. Each tab corresponds to the following channels. ● OUT CH Output channels (MIX channels 1–16, MATRIX channels 1–8, STEREO L/R channel, and MONO (C) channel) will be shown. ● MONITOR OUT The MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels will be shown. ● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64} INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} will be shown. B Channel select button This selects the channel that is assigned to the output port. 98 4 Use the category tabs and the channel LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Changing the input patching Changing the input patching When the LS9 is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks / internal ports) are patched to each input channel. 2 Move the cursor to the HA popup button in For the LS9-16 Input port (jack / internal port) INPUT jacks 1–16 INPUT channels 17–32 Slot input channels 1–16 ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R) Rack outputs 5–8 (L/R) For the LS9-32 Input channels the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The HA/PATCH popup window will appear. In this popup window, you can view the input port and name selected for each input channel, turn the phantom power on/off, adjust the gain, and switch between normal/reversed phase, in groups of eight channels. Input port (jack / internal port) INPUT channels 1–32 INPUT jacks 1–32 INPUT channels 33–48 Slot 1 input channels 1–16 INPUT channels 49–64 Slot 2 input channels 1–16 ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R) Rack outputs 5–8 (L/R) However, the above patching can be modified as needed. Here’s how to change the patching of each input channel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 1 Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the [SEL] keys to select an input channel. 1 2 3 1 Channel number This is the number of the input channel. B Channel name This is the name of the input channel. C Port select popup button This button selects the input port assigned to the channel. The currently selected input port is shown. Input/output patching Input channels INPUT channels 1–16 D +48V button This button switches the phantom power on (red) or off (black) for the head amp assigned to that channel. 1 Channel number / Channel name B HA popup button C Port select popup button HINT • As an alternative to using the HA popup button, you can also select the input port in the PATCH/NAME popup window that appears when you move the cursor to the port select popup button and press the [ENTER] key (→ p. 55). E GAIN knob This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp assigned to that channel. Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting. The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port. NOTE • The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. F ø (phase) button This button switches the head amp assigned to that channel between normal phase (black) and reverse phase (orange). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 99 Changing the input patching 3 Move the cursor to the port select popup button for the desired channel, and press the [ENTER] key. The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input port for the input channel. This popup window contains the following items. 4 Use the category tabs and the port select buttons to select the input-source port. 5 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen. HINT • As an alternative to using the CLOSE button, you can return to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key once. 1 6 If necessary, perform the same steps for 2 other input channels. LS9-16 1 Category tab These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following input ports. ● IN 1-16 {1-32} Shows INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}. ● SLOT {1/2} Shows input channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}. ● RACK Shows the outputs of racks 1–8. Use this when you want to send the output of a GEQ or effect to an input channel. HINT • For details on GEQ and effects, refer to p.157. ● 2TR IN/PB OUT Shows the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack and the USB memory recorder’s output. Use this when you want to send the input signal from the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack or the output signal of the USB memory recorder to an input channel. B Port select button This selects the input port that is assigned to the channel. 100 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Inserting an external device into a channel Inserting an external device into a channel If necessary, you can insert an internal effect/GEQ or an external device such as an effect processor into the signal path of INPUT channels 1–32 or any output channel (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO). When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the signal patch location of the insertion can be specified individually for each channel. Here we will explain how an external device connected to an I/O card in a slot can be inserted into the desired channel. 1 Connect your external device to the I/O card installed in a slot {1/2}. 3 Move the cursor to the INSERT popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE DIGITAL IN DIGITAL OUT • For the INPUT channels, insert connections can be made only for channels 1–32. If an INPUT channel 33–64 is selected on the LS9-32, the INSERT popup button is not shown. DIGITAL IN Digital I/O card Effect processor The INSERT popup window will appear. In this popup window, you can view the insert input/output port, change the insert position and switches the insert on/ off, in groups of eight channels. LS9 1 2 3 4 NOTE • If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the LS9 and the external device (→ p. 46). 9 Input/output patching DIGITAL OUT 5 7 6 2 Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the [SEL] keys to select the channel into which you want to insert an external device. 1 Channel block diagram This shows the direct output position (only for INPUT channels) and the position of the insert connection for the selected channel. B Channel number This is the channel number. 1 C Channel name This is the channel name. D Insert point select box This selects the insert point for the signal. Move the cursor to this box and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to switch between PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the channel on/off). 1 INSERT popup button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 101 Inserting an external device into a channel 7 Move the cursor to the input port select E Output port select popup button F Input port select popup button popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. These buttons select the output port and input port that are patched to insert-out and insert-in. The currently selected output port and input port are shown. G INSERT ON/OFF button This button turns the insert on/off. To switch this on/ off, move the cursor to this button and use the [DEC]/ [INC] keys or the [ENTER] key. 4 Move the cursor to the output port select The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input port that will be patched to insert-in. 1 2 popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port that will be patched to insert-out. LS9-16 1 1 Category tab These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following input ports. 2 ● SLOT {1/2} Shows input channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}. ● RACK LS9-16 1 Category tab These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following output ports. ● SLOT {1/2} Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}. ● RACK Shows the inputs of racks 1–8. Use these when you want to insert a GEQ or effect into that channel. B Port select button This selects the output port that is assigned to insertout. 5 Use the category tabs and the port select buttons to select the insert-out port. 6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen. HINT • After moving the cursor to the insert-out patch select box in step 4, you can also select the output port by using the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys instead of pressing the [ENTER] key. 102 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Shows the outputs of racks 1–8. Use these when you want to insert a GEQ or effect into the channel. B Port select button This selects the input port that is assigned to insert-in. 8 Use the category tabs and the port select buttons to select the insert-in port. 9 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen. 10 Move the cursor to the insert point select box, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the insert point. You can select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the channel on/off). 11 Move the cursor to the INSERT ON/OFF button, and press the [DEC]/[INC] keys or the [ENTER] key to turn it ON. This enables the insertion you specified. Directly outputting an INPUT channel Directly outputting an INPUT channel The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from the desired OMNI OUT jack or from the output channel of a desired slot. For example by sending signals to an external digital recorder via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, you can make a live recording without affecting the LS9’s internal mixing. 1 Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack or to an I/O card installed in a slot {1/2}. DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN 3 Move the cursor to the DIRECT popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The DIRECT OUT popup window will appear. In this popup window you can view the name of each channel, switch the direct output point, and adjust the output level, in groups of eight channels. Digital I/O card Digital recorder 1 2 3 4 5 LS9 NOTE • If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the LS9 and the external device (→ p. 46). 1 Channel block diagram This shows the direct output point for the selected channel. Input/output patching 9 6 7 B Channel number This is the channel number. 2 Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the [SEL] keys to select the INPUT channel from which you want to take a direct output. 1 C Channel name This is the channel name. D Direct out point select box This selects the point from which the signal will be directly output. Move the cursor to this box and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to switch between PRE HPF (immediately before the high pass filter), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ), or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader). E DIRECT ON/OFF button This button turns direct output on/off. To switch this on/off, move the cursor to this button and use the [DEC]/[INC] keys or the [ENTER] key. F Port select popup button This button selects the output port that will be patched to direct output. The currently selected output port is shown. 1 DIRECT popup button G DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob This knob adjusts the level of the direct output. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 103 Directly outputting an INPUT channel 4 Move the cursor to the port select popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port that will be patched to direct output. 8 Move the cursor to the DIRECT OUT ON/ OFF button, and press the [DEC]/[INC] keys or the [ENTER] key to turn it ON. This enables the direct output you specified. 9 As necessary, move the cursor to the DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the level of the direct output. 1 2 HINT • As an alternate method of specifying a direct output, you can select an INPUT channel as the output source of an output port (→ p. 98). LS9-16 1 Category tab These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following output ports. ● OMNI / 2TR OUT Shows OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} and 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack. ● SLOT {1/2} Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}. ● REC IN Shows USB memory recorder input channels. B Port select button This selects the output port that is assigned to direct output. 5 Use the category tabs and the port select buttons to select the port that will be the direct output. 6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen. 7 Move the cursor to the direct out point select box, and use the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys to select the direct out point. You can choose PRE HPF (immediately before the high-pass filter), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ), or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader). 104 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 10 USB memory recorder This chapter explains how to use the USB memory recorder. About the USB memory recorder ■ Signal flow for the USB memory recorder MIX 1–16 MATRIX 1–8 RECORDER INPUT L STEREO L/R USB memory recorder MONO INPUT 1–32 {1–64} DIRECT OUT R L R PLAYBACK OUT INPUT 1–32 {1–64} 10 USB memory recorder The LS9 provides a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal signals to USB memory, or play back audio files recorded on USB memory. As the file format for recording, it uses MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3). For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported. By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to USB memory, or background music or sound effects saved in USB memory can be played back via an assigned input channel. ST IN 1L/1R– ST IN 4L/4R NOTE • Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously. • The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 105 Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder Here’s how to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the RECORDER screen. In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder, and perform recording and playback operations. 2 1 3 4 8 6 7 F PLAYBACK OUT field Here you can make settings for the recorder outputs. G PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons L/R These buttons access the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can patch channels to the L/R outputs of the recorder. H Output level meter This level meter indicates the level of the signal being output from the recorder. I OUTPUT CUE button This button cue-monitors the signal that is being output from the recorder. Move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key to turn cue on/off. 2 To assign channels to the recorder inputs, move the cursor to the RECORDER INPUT popup button L or R, and press the [ENTER] key. The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear. 5 9 1 RECORDER INPUT field 1 Here you can make settings for the recorder inputs. B RECORDER INPUT popup buttons L/R These buttons access the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can patch channels to the L/ R inputs of the recorder. 2 C ATT (attenuator) knob This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation/boost for the signal that is input to the recorder. You can adjust the value in 0.1 dB steps in a range of -96 to +24 dB. The current value is shown immediately below the knob. D Input level meter This level meter indicates the level of the signal being input to the recorder. E INPUT CUE button This button cue-monitors the signal that is being input to the recorder. Move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key to turn cue on/off. 106 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual LS9-32 1 Category tabs These tabs select the type of channels shown in the lower part of the window. ● OUT CH Output channels will be shown. ● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64} Direct outputs of INPUT channels 1–32 {1–32/ 33–64} will be shown. Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder B Channel select buttons Select the channels that will be assigned to the USB memory recorder’s inputs, from the following choices. ● MIX 1–16 MIX channels 1–16 ● MTRX 1–8 6 To assign channels to the recorder outputs, move the cursor to the PLAYBACK OUT popup button L or R, and press the [ENTER] key. The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear. MATRIX channels 1–8 ● ST L/R STEREO channel L/R 1 ● ST L+C STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel 2 ● ST R+C STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO (C) channel ● MONO LS9-32 MONO channel ● CH1–32 {1–64} 3 Use the category tabs and the port select 1 Category tabs These tabs select the type of channels shown in the lower part of the window. buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder input. ● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64} If you select a channel to which another port is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Move the cursor to the OK button of the dialog box and press the [ENTER] key. ● ST IN NOTE • You cannot assign multiple channels to a single input. 4 When you’ve finished making the assign- ment, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key. You will return to the RECORDER screen. 5 Assign a channel to the other input in the same way. HINT • The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to the same channel. INPUT channels 1–32 {1–32/33–64} will be shown L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4 will be shown. B Channel select buttons Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s outputs, from the following choices. 10 USB memory recorder Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–32 {1–64} ● CH 1–32 {1–64} INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} ● STIN 1L/1R–STIN 4L/4R L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4 7 Use the category tabs and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder input. If you select a channel to which another signal is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Move the cursor to the OK button of the dialog box and press the [ENTER] key. HINT • You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output. 8 When you’ve finished making the assign- ment, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key. You will return to the RECORDER screen. 9 Assign a channel to the other output in the same way. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 107 Recording to USB memory Recording to USB memory Here’s how to record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB memory inserted in the USB connector located at the right of the display. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the RECORDER screen. For playback as well, you will only be able to play back audio files that are saved in the SONGS folder or in the currently selected folder below that level. ■ USB memory folder structure YPE folder Root directory SONGS folder Songs (Audio files) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Audio file display field The track number, title, artist, format (MP3/WMA/ AAC), and bit rate of during playback or the most recently played audio file are displayed. B REMAIN/ELAPSE button This button selects the content that is shown in the TIME FIELD (3). When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the field will alternate between showing REMAIN (remaining time display) and ELAPSE (elapsed time display). C TIME (remaining time / elapsed time) field According to the setting in (2), this shows either the remaining time that can be recorded to USB memory, or the elapsed time. D Transport These buttons perform record/play/stop operations for the USB memory recorder. E REC RATE (bit depth) button 3 Assign the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder (→ p. 106). 4 So that you can monitor the signal being recorded on the recorder, raise the fader of the channel(s) that are patched to the input/ output of the recorder. The level meter in the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder. If necessary, use the ATT knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder. NOTE • The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT). This selects the bit depth for recording. F FREE SIZE field This indicates the amount of free capacity in USB memory, in terms of MB and as a percentage. 2 Connect USB memory with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector. The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity. When you connect USB memory to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB memory. The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently selected folder below that level. 108 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual HINT • Operating the ATT knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel. 5 Move the cursor to the REC RATE field in the lower right of the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the bit depth of the audio file that will be recorded. You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but will increase the size of the data. HINT • The word clock rate at which the LS9 is currently operating (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) will automatically be selected as the sampling rate of the audio file. Recording to USB memory 6 Move the cursor to the REC button (●) at the bottom of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. You will use the transport at the bottom of the screen to perform record/play/stop operations for the recorder. 1 2 3 4 5 D FF ( ) button ● When you move the cursor to this button, and press and immediately release the [ENTER] key You will move to the beginning of the next song in the title list. ● When you move the cursor to this button, and press and hold the [ENTER] key for two seconds or longer The song will be fast-forwarded. 1 REW ( ) button ● When you move the cursor to this button, and press and immediately release the [ENTER] key You will return to the beginning of the song. If you were already at the beginning, you will return to the beginning of the preceding song in the title list (→ p. 110). ● When you move the cursor to this button, and press and hold the [ENTER] key for two seconds or longer The song will rewind. In either of the above cases, operating this button during playback will cause playback to resume from the current location when you release the [ENTER] key. B STOP (■) button ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key during playback Playback will stop. ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key during recording Recording will stop, and the recorded content will be saved in a file (the file name and title will be assigned a default name). ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key in record-ready mode Record-ready mode will be defeated. C PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key while stopped In either of the above cases, operating this button during playback will cause playback to resume from the current location when you release the [ENTER] key. E REC (●) button ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key while stopped The recorder will be in record-ready mode, and the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will blink. HINT • You can also assign the function of each button to a userdefined key (→ p. 196). While stopped, move the cursor to the REC (●) button and press the [ENTER] key; the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will blink, and the recorder will be in recordready mode. 7 To begin recording, move the cursor to the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button in the lower part of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. During recording, the REC (●) button and the PLAY/ PAUSE ( ) button will light. The TIME field will indicate the elapsed time. 10 USB memory recorder Each button has the following function. 8 To stop recording, move the cursor to the STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER] key. The audio file will be saved to USB memory. HINT • In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. However, you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder. • The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later. Playback will start. ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key during playback Playback will pause. ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key in record-ready mode Recording will start. ● When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key during recording Recording will pause. 9 To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows. 1 Move the cursor to the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button and press the [ENTER] key. The recorded content will be played back via the input channel you specified in step 3. B To stop playback, move the cursor to the STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 109 Playing back audio files from USB memory Playing back audio files from USB memory Here’s how to play back audio files that have been saved on USB memory. In addition to files that were recorded on the LS9 console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to USB memory. Three types of audio file format can be played: MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA (Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The sampling rate can be either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, and the bit rate can be between 64 kbps and 320 kbps. 1 Connect the USB memory containing the audio files to the USB connector. NOTE • If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you’ve created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the TITLE LIST screen. 9 J C Playback selection check field This field lets you select the files that will be played back during consecutive playback. When you move the cursor to this field and press the [ENTER] key, the check mark will alternately appear or disappear. D Status This field shows a symbol to indicate whether the currently selected file is playing ( ) or paused ( ). E SONG TITLE/FILE NAME This field shows the title or file name of the song. If the title is too long to be displayed, a “~” character is shown at the end. F ARTIST This field shows the artist of the song. If the artist name is too long to be displayed, a “~” character is shown at the end. K G TIME This field shows the length of the song in hours : minutes : seconds. 1 4 H MODE button This button switches the playback mode. You can play back one song or all songs, and play them only once or repeatedly. 23 5 6 7 8 I Change directory button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the list will show the contents of the directory at the next higher level. J PATH (current path) field 1 Title list This list shows the playable audio files and the folders that are saved in the selected folder of USB memory. The row with the blue background in the center of the list indicates the file/folder that is selected for operations. B No. (track number) This number indicates the order of each file for consecutive playback. If there is a lower-level folder, a folder icon ( ) is shown here. If an icon ( ) is shown here, it indicates that an upper level exists. Move the cursor to a displayed number and press the [ENTER] key to play back that audio file. 110 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual This shows the full pathname of the folder (directory) that is currently selected as the recording destination and playback source. K JPN button If this button is on, the titles or artist names in the list or of the currently-playing song will be displayed in Japanese characters compatible with Shift-JIS character encoding (double-byte code). This setting will also be reflected in the RECORDER screen and in the TITLE/ARTIST EDIT popup window. Playing back audio files from USB memory 3 You can use the change directory button in the screen and the folder icon in the No. field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file. ● To move to a folder below Move the cursor to a folder icon shown in the No. field of the list, and press the [ENTER] key. 4 Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys so that the desired file is shown in the center of the list. 5 Move the cursor to the MODE button and press the [ENTER] key to select the playback mode. The setting will alternate between the following four modes each time you press the [ENTER] key. ● Starting with the currently selected song in the title list, songs will play back consecutively, and playback will stop at the last song in the list. ● Starting with the currently selected song in the title list, songs will play back consecutively until the last song; then playback will return to the first song and will continue until you stop playback. ● ● To move to the folder above The currently selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback. Move the cursor to the change directory button and press the [ENTER] key. ● 6 If you selected a consecutive playback mode in step 5, move the cursor to the playback selection check field for each song you want to play, and press the [ENTER] key. When performing consecutive playback, the files with a check mark will be played. 7 Move the cursor to the PLAY/PAUSE ( USB memory recorder 10 The currently selected song will play once and then stop. ) button and press the [ENTER] key. The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing. HINT • When you move to a different folder in this way, that folder will automatically be selected as the recording-destination. NOTE • The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the SONGS folder. HINT • The USB memory recorder can play back audio files whose sampling rate is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. • Even if the sampling rate at which the LS9 is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically convert the rate so that the playback will be correct. NOTE • The LS9 can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 characters. If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly. • A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 songs can be managed in a subdirectory. • If or is selected as the playback mode, playback will continue until you stop playback. 8 To stop playback, move the cursor to the STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 111 Editing the title list Editing the title list Here’s how you can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names. 1 Connect USB memory containing audio 4 If you want to edit a title or file name in the files to the USB connector. [RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the TITLE LIST screen. title list, move the cursor to the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button; if you want to edit the artist name, move the cursor to the ARTIST EDIT button; then press the [ENTER] key. 1 A popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the text. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the 4 7 5 6 2 3 NOTE 1 ↑ / ↓ buttons These buttons move the track number of the song selected in the list earlier ( ↑ ) or later ( ↓ ) in the list. B SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button This button lets you edit the title or file name of the song selected in the list. C ARTIST EDIT button This button lets you edit the artist name of the song selected in the list. D TITLE SORT button This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title. E ARTIST SORT button • The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files. 5 Edit the title or artist name. A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 doublebyte characters) can be input for both the title and for the artist name. (For details on entering characters → p. 34) If the text cannot be shown completely in the input field, the text will scroll horizontally. 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. 7 If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name. NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button, and ↑ / ↓ buttons in the screen to change the order of the title list. F SAVE LIST button This button saves the list sorting data to USB memory. Use the following buttons to change the order of the title list. G SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons These buttons switch the items (title or file name) that are shown in the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME field. ● SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button 3 Use the No. button and the change direc- tory button in the screen to view a list of the contents of the folder that includes the desired file. 112 • If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be converted into for display. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the title list will be sorted in numerical → alphabetical order by title. Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order. ● ARTIST SORT button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the title list will be sorted in numerical → alphabetical order by artist name. Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order. Editing the title list • Linking scene recall with audio file playback ● SAVE LIST button NOTE • Two-byte code or Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1) code characters will not be sorted correctly. ● ↑ / ↓ buttons When you move the cursor to these buttons and press the [ENTER] key, the track number of the file currently selected in the title list will be moved upward or downward by one. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the title list order and playback selections will be saved in USB memory. You should perform this operation if you want the title list to be preserved even after you disconnect the USB memory or turn off the power. Since these settings are stored for each folder, a confirmation dialog box will ask you whether you want to save them if you move to a different folder. Linking scene recall with audio file playback You can make link settings so that a specific audio file from USB memory is played back when you recall a certain scene. This is a convenient way to automatically play back a sound effect or background music at a certain point in the performance. To link scene recall with audio file playback, proceed as follows. audio file to the USB connector. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to access the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen. 1 2 3 4 6 7 F LINK This indicates whether linking from the scene to an audio file is enabled. The PLAY indicator is shown if linking is enabled. If the PLAY indicator is off even though a file is selected, the audio file will not play when scene recall occurs. G SONG TITLE/FILE NAME field This shows the title or file name of the audio file. 8 5 NOTE • The audio file to be played must be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. Please note that you won’t be able to specify a file that is in the root directory or another folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will change to \YPE\SONGS\. 10 USB memory recorder 1 Connect the USB memory containing the • The file name is shown in black if the specified file no longer exists, and the song title or file name is shown in yellow if the file can no longer be recognized. • The file specified for linking is distinguished by its eight-character file name + three-character extension. If you change the file name after specifying it for linking, or if you repeatedly delete and copy the file, there may be rare cases in which the linked file can no longer be recognized. 9 J 1 Scene list This is the list of scenes to which you can assign a song (audio file). The line with the blue background in the middle of the list is the scene that’s selected for operation. B No. (scene number) C TITLE (scene title) D Protect These respectively indicate the scene number, title, and protect status. E Song list This is the list of songs (audio files) that can be linked. The line with the blue background in the middle of the list is the file that’s selected for operation. H OFFSET (Offset time) This shows the time from the recall operation until the corresponding audio file will begin playing. I SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons These buttons select the item that is shown in the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME field. J JPN button If this button is on, the song title will be displayed using Shift-JIS code (double-byte character code) to support Japanese. NOTE • Other items in the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen are the same as in the SCENE LIST screen (→ p. 134). 3 Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys so that the scene to which you want to assign a song is displayed in the middle. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 113 Linking scene recall with audio file playback 4 Move the cursor to the blue background area in the middle of the list SONG TITLE/ FILE NAME field, and press the [ENTER] key. The SONG SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select an audio file. 1 2 5 6 6 If necessary, move the cursor to the OFF- SET knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys to specify an offset time before the audio file will play back. You can specify the offset time in a range of 0–99 seconds in 0.5 second units. 7 7 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The popup window will close, and you will return to the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen. The title or file name of the file you selected will be displayed in the center of the song list. Alternatively, if you select the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, the settings will be discarded and you will return to the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen. 3 4 8 Move the cursor to the LINK field and press 1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons These buttons select the item (song title or file name) that is shown in the song list. B JPN button If this button is on, the song title will be displayed using Shift-JIS code (double-byte character code) to support Japanese. the [ENTER] key to turn on the link to the audio file. The PLAY indicator will appear in the LINK field. The PLAY indicator will also appear in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST screen. C PATH field This indicates the path of the folder (\YPE\SONGS\) in which the audio files are saved. This cannot be changed. D Song list This shows the playable audio files in the SONGS folder. HINT • A maximum of 300 audio files can be displayed. • Files other than playable audio files will not be displayed. E SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the song list will be sorted in alphanumeric order by song tile or file name. Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order. F TYPE This indicates the type of the audio file. The significance of this indication is as follows. • MP3 .............MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 • WMA ...........Windows Media Audio • AAC.............MPEG4 AAC G OFFSET (Offset time) This specifies the time from the recall operation until the corresponding audio file begins to play. 5 114 Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to scroll the song list so that the file you want to link to the scene is shown in the center with a blue background. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 9 Repeat steps 3–8 to assign audio files to other scenes in the same way. HINT • As other ways to control audio file playback, you can use MIDI MMC commands for remote control from an external device (→ p. 186), or assign the DIRECT PLAY function to a userdefined key and play back the audio file directly (→ p. 196). 10 Recall a scene to which you’ve linked an audio file. After the offset time has elapsed, the audio file will play only once. NOTE • When you recall the scene, the constant display area will show a count-down until the offset time has elapsed. • You cannot play back during recording or in record-ready mode. • If another song is playing when scene recall occurs, the currently-playing song will stop when recall occurs, regardless of the offset time setting. • The linked audio file will be played only once, regardless of the playback mode setting. Chapter 11 EQ and Dynamics This chapter explains the EQ (equalizer) and dynamics that are provided on each channel of the LS9. About EQ and dynamics Each input channel and output channel of the LS9 provides a four-band EQ and dynamics. EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to adjust the level of the input signal. In addition, input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. Input channels provide two dynamics processors. Dynamics 1 can be used as gate, ducking, compressor, or expander. Dynamics 2 can be used as compressor, compander hard, compander soft, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as compressor, expander, compander hard, or compander soft. This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 1 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer. 3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module EQ and Dynamics 11 Using EQ section, STEREO MASTER section, or ST IN section to select the channel that you want to operate. 4 In the screen, move the cursor to the EQ popup button or any knob in the EQ field, and press the [ENTER] key. The ATT/HPF/EQ popup window will appear. In the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window you can view and edit all EQ parameters of the currently selected channel. HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can access the above popup window by pressing either of the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], or EQ [GAIN] encoders while the SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown. 1 EQ popup button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 115 Using EQ H LOW shelving button If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will switch to a shelving type. In this case, the LOW band Q knob will not be shown. The window contains the following items. 1 3 2 4 8 J K 5 6 I Q/FREQ/GAIN knobs For each of the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH bands, these knobs adjust the Q (steepness), FREQ (center frequency), and GAIN (amount of boost/cut). HINT • You can move the cursor to one of the knobs in 9 and press the [ENTER] key to switch the EQ on/off. 7 9 1 TYPE I, II buttons These buttons select the EQ type. If the TYPE I button is on, the EQ will use the same algorithm as previous Yamaha digital mixers; if the TYPE II button is on, a newly-developed algorithm will be used. Using TYPE II will reduce interference between bands. J HIGH shelving button If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will switch to a shelving type. In this case, the HIGH band Q knob will not be shown. K Low pass filter button If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will operate as a low-pass filter. In this case, the HIGH band Q knob will not be shown, and the GAIN knob will operate as a switch that turns the low-pass filter on/off. B FLAT button This button resets the GAIN parameter of all bands to the initial value (0.0 dB). When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation. L C EQ graph This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ parameters. A pointer is shown at the peak of each band. Operating the Q, FREQ, or GAIN knobs of each band will change the response curve accordingly. If EQ or high-pass filter is on, the response curve will be highlighted. D Level meter This meter indicates the peak level before the EQ and after the EQ. If the signal has overloaded before or after the EQ, the OVER segment will light. If the corresponding channel is stereo (a ST IN channel, a MIX channel / MATRIX channel that is set to stereo, or the STEREO channel), level meters for two channels will be displayed. E ATT knob This knob specifies the amount of attenuation/gain before entering the EQ, in a range of -96 dB–+24 dB. Use this to compensate for level changes caused by the EQ. F HPF FREQ knob, HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only) This knob and button let you adjust the cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter placed immediately after the attenuation and before the EQ, and switch it on/off. The cutoff frequency can be adjusted in a range of 20– 600 Hz. G EQ ON/OFF button This switches the EQ on/off. 116 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual L High-pass filter button (output channels only) If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will operate as a high-pass filter. In this case, the LOW band Q knob will not be shown, and the GAIN knob will operate as a switch that turns the high-pass filter on/off. 5 To turn the EQ on/off, move the cursor to the EQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key. If you want to make settings in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window, move the cursor to the desired button/ knob and use the [ENTER] key, the dial, or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys. HINT • You can also adjust the Q, center frequency, and boost/cut amount using the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN] encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, use the EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID], and EQ [LOW] keys to select the band that you want to adjust. You can also switch EQ bands for editing by moving the cursor onto a parameter of the desired band. Using EQ • Using dynamics 6 If you want to use the high-pass filter on an input channel, operate the HPF FREQ knob or HPF ON/OFF button in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window. Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Use the HPF ON/OFF button to switch the high-pass filter on/off, and use the HPF FREQ knob to specify the cutoff frequency. HINT • Output channels do not provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However by turning on the high-pass filter button in the popup window, you can use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter. 7 If you want to initialize EQ settings or copy them to another channel, use the tool buttons in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window. For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” (→ p. 35). HINT • You can also use a dedicated library to save or load EQ settings at any time (→ p. 120). You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations. • You can also use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the EQ or high-pass filter (→ p. 87). • For both input channels and output channels, you can turn on the low-pass filter button and use the HIGH band EQ as a low-pass filter. Using dynamics 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key. The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display. 2 1 3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module section, STEREO MASTER section, or ST IN section to select the channel that you want to operate. 4 In the screen, move the cursor to the 11 EQ and Dynamics Input channels provide two dynamics processors, and output channels provide one dynamics processor. DYNA1/DYNA2 popup button or any knob in the DYNA1/DYNA2 field, and press the [ENTER] key. The DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window will appear. In this popup window you can view and edit all dynamics parameters of the currently selected channel. HINT • If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can also access the above popup window by pressing any of the [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders while the SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown. 1 DYNA1 popup button B DYNA2 popup button (input channels only) 2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired fader layer. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 117 Using dynamics F KEY IN SOURCE box You can select a key-in signal in this box. For details on the procedure, refer to step 6. The window contains the following items. 1 2 3 G Other parameters This area shows other dynamics parameters. The parameters shown will depend on the currently selected dynamics type. HINT 6 4 8 9 • For details on parameters, refer to the appendix at the end of this manual (→ p. 229). • You can switch dynamics on/off by moving the cursor to one of the knobs in 5 or 7 and pressing the [ENTER] key. 5 H KEY IN FILTER field (GATE and DUCKING 7 1 Dynamics type buttons Use these buttons to select one of the following four types of dynamics. Input channels GATE DYNAMICS 1 DUCKING COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPRESSOR DYNAMICS 2 COMPANDER-H COMPANDER-S DE-ESSER Output channels COMPRESSOR DYNAMICS 1 EXPANDER COMPANDER-H COMPANDER-S HINT • For details on dynamics types, refer to the appendix at the end of this manual (→ p. 229). B Dynamics graph This graph shows the approximate response of dynamics processing. C Level meters These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR), and the peak levels before the gate (IN) and after the gate (OUT). If the signal has overloaded, the OVER segment will light. If the corresponding channel is stereo (a ST IN channel, a MIX channel / MATRIX channel that is set to stereo, or the STEREO channel), level meters for two channels will be displayed. only) This field lets you apply a filter to the key-in signal. This field provides a FILTER box that lets you select the filter type, a Q knob (which adjusts the Q of the filter), and a FREQ knob (which adjusts the cutoff frequency or center frequency). To change the filter type, move the cursor to the FILTER BOX and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select either HPF (high-pass filter), BPF (band-pass filter), or LPF (low-pass filter); then press the [ENTER] key. If you select “----” in the FILTER box, no filter will be applied. NOTE • After changing the type of filter in the FILTER box, be sure to press the [ENTER] key to apply the change. I KEY IN CUE (GATE and DUCKING only) This button lets you cue-monitor the currently selected key-in signal. HINT • Even if you’ve selected MIX CUE mode (when all channels whose [CUE] key is on will be mixed for monitoring) as the cue mode, turning on the KEY IN CUE button will give priority to monitoring only the corresponding signal. All [CUE] keys that had been turned on at that time will be forcibly defeated. • KEY IN CUE will automatically be cancelled when you exit the corresponding screen. 5 To turn dynamics on/off, move the cursor to the DYNAMICS ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key. If you want to make settings in the DYNAMICS 1/ DYNAMICS 2 popup window, move the cursor to the desired button/knob and use the [ENTER] key, the dial, or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. HINT D DYNAMICS ON/OFF button This switches dynamics on/off. E THRESHOLD knob This specifies the threshold level at which dynamics will operate. 118 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual • You can also adjust the dynamics threshold by using the [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Using dynamics 6 Select the key-in signal as necessary. 7 If you want to initialize dynamics settings or You can select one of the following as the key-in signal. copy them to another channel, use the tool buttons in the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window. For an input channel For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” (→ p. 35). SELF PRE EQ The signal immediately before the EQ (attenuator) of the currently selected input channel SELF POST EQ The signal immediately after the EQ of the currently selected input channel CH 1–32 {64} POST EQ, STIN1L/1R–4L/4R POST EQ MIX OUT 13–16 The signal immediately after the EQ of the corresponding input channel HINT • You can also use a dedicated library to save or load dynamics settings at any time (→ p. 120). You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations. (*1) The signal immediately after the ON of the corresponding MIX channel *1: The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which that channel belongs, from the following five {nine} groups: CH 1–8, CH 9–16, CH17–24, CH25–32, {CH33–40, CH41–48, CH49–56, CH57–64}, and STIN1L1R–4L4R. For an output channel SELF PRE EQ The signal immediately before the EQ (attenuator) of the currently selected output channel SELF POST EQ The signal immediately after the EQ of the currently selected output channel MIX OUT 13–16 The signal immediately after the EQ of the corresponding output channel (*1) 11 The signal immediately after the ON of the corresponding MIX channel EQ and Dynamics MIX 1–16 POST EQ, MTRX1–8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO, POST EQ *1: The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which that channel belongs, from the following four groups: MIX 1–8, MIX 9–16, MATRIX 1–8, and ST/MONO. HINT • If the dynamics type of DE-ESSER, the key-in signal is fixed at SELF POST EQ and cannot be changed. To select the key-in signal, make your selection in the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window. 1 Move the cursor to the KEY IN SOURCE box, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the desired key-in signal. The newly selected key-in signal will blink. B Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection of key-in signal. NOTE • If you move the cursor out of the KEY IN SOURCE box while the key-in signal is blinking in the box, your change will be discarded, and the key-in signal setting will revert to the previous choice. To confirm your new choice of key-in signal, press the [ENTER] key without moving the cursor. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 119 Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries EQ or dynamics settings can be stored in or recalled from dedicated libraries. EQ library Dynamics library The EQ library consists of an input EQ library that lets you store and recall EQ settings for input channels, and an output EQ library that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels. To access each library, move the cursor to the LIB tool button in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window and press the [ENTER] key. LIB button You can use the dynamics library to store and recall dynamics settings. All of the LS9’s dynamics processors use this library. However, the types that can be selected will differ between dynamics 1 and dynamics 2 for input channels, and dynamics 1 for output channels. You can’t recall a type that cannot be used. To access the dynamics library, move the cursor to the LIB tool button in the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window, and press the [ENTER] key. LIB button For details on library operations, refer to “Using libraries” (→ p. 35). HINT • For both the input EQ library and the output EQ library, you can recall 199 settings from each library. Input EQ provides 40 readonly presets, and output EQ provides 3 read-only presets. • For details on how to access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window, refer to “Using EQ” (→ p. 115). For details on library operations, refer to “Using libraries” (→ p. 35). HINT • You can recall 199 settings from this library. The library contains 41 read-only presets. • For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window, refer to “Using dynamics” (→ p. 117). 120 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 12 Grouping and linking This chapter explains the Mute Group function that lets you simultaneously control the muting of multiple channels, the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that let you copy or move parameters between channels. About mute groups Mute groups allow you to switch muting on/off for multiple channels together. For example, you can use mute groups to cut out multiple non-adjacent channels simultaneously. The LS9 has eight mute groups, and they can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the same group. Using mute groups HINT • Mute group 1–8 on/off functions can also be assigned to user-defined keys. For more about user-defined keys, refer to ““User-defined keys” (→ p. 196). 12 Grouping and linking Here we will explain how to use mute groups. You will use the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens to assign channels to each mute group or switch muting on/off. You can also use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify the mute group(s) to which the currently selected channel belongs. Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate mute groups In the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens, you can select a specific mute group and specify the channels that belong to that mute group. You can also switch each mute group on/off. [CHANNEL JOB] key 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens. The [CHANNEL JOB] key accesses various CHANNEL JOB screens that allow you to perform operations on channels. The screen will change each time you press the key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 121 Using mute groups The MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screen contains the following items. 1 4 Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way. 2 4 HINT • You are free to assign the same channel to more than one mute group. 5 To mute the channels assigned to a mute group, move the cursor to the MUTE GROUP MASTER 1–8 button for the desired mute group, and press the [ENTER] key (multiple selections are allowed). 3 5 The selected MUTE GROUP MASTER button will light, and all channels belonging to that mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] key of the muted channels will blink. 6 To defeat muting for a mute group, move 1 Channel display field Channels assigned to the mute group selected by the 1–8 buttons are highlighted in red. If the SAFE button is selected, channels that are temporarily excluded from all mute groups are highlighted in green. the cursor to the MUTE GROUP MASTER button that you turned on in step 5, and press the [ENTER] key to make the button go dark. NOTE B CLEAR ALL button • Mute group assignments are saved as part of the scene. However, the mute on/off settings are not saved. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, all channels that are currently highlighted in the channel display field will be cleared. HINT • If you assigned a mute group on/off function to a user-defined key, you can switch mute on/off by pressing the corresponding user-defined key to make it light or go dark. C 1–8 buttons These buttons select the mute group that is shown in the channel display field. D SAFE button Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude a specific channel from all mute groups. The channel display field shows the channels that are temporarily excluded from the mute groups. For more about mute safe, refer to “Using the Mute Safe function” (→ p. 123). E MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons 1–8 These buttons switch muting on/off for mute groups 1–8. 2 To select the mute group to which you want to assign channels, move the cursor to one of the 1–8 buttons and press the [ENTER] key. 3 Press the [SEL] key of the input channels / output channels (you may select more than one) that you want to assign. The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light. In the channel display field in the screen, the corresponding channels will also be highlighted in red. To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark. 122 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual • Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by mute on/off operations if its [ON] key was off to begin with. Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify mute groups In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can select a specific channel and assign the mute group(s) to which that channel belongs (multiple assignments are allowed). HINT • In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can only assign mute groups. To switch muting on/off, you must either use the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens (→ p. 121), or assign the mute on/off function to a user-defined key and operate that key (→ p. 196). 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. Using mute groups 2 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL] keys to select the channel whose mute group(s) you want to specify. In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can use the MUTE field to specify the mute group(s) to which the currently selected channel belongs. Using the Mute Safe function If necessary, specific channels registered to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations (Mute Safe). 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens. 1 2 1 2 4 3 1 MUTE field This shows the mute groups to which the currently selected channel is assigned. 1 Channel display field When the SAFE button is on, channels that are temporarily excluded from the mute group are highlighted in this field. C Mute group select buttons 1–8 These select the mute group(s) to which the currently selected channel will be assigned. B SAFE button This lets you select the channels that will be set to Mute Safe status. D SAFE indicator This will light if the currently selected channel is set to Mute Safe. For more about mute safe, refer to “Using the Mute Safe function”. 2 Move the cursor to the SAFE button and 3 To select the mute group(s) to which this channel will be assigned, move the cursor to a mute group select button and press the [ENTER] key (multiple selections are allowed). 4 Select the mute group(s) for other channels in the same way. press the [ENTER] key. 3 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan- 12 Grouping and linking B MUTE popup button When you move the cursor to this popup button and press the [ENTER] key, the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screen will appear. For details, refer to “Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate mute groups” (→ p. 121). nel module section [SEL] keys to select the channels you want to exclude from mute group operations (multiple selections are allowed). The [SEL] key will light, and the corresponding channel in the channel display field of the screen will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark. Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs. HINT • Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene. They will remain valid until you cancel the settings. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 123 The Channel Link function The Channel Link function Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input channels. The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices. • • • • • • • HA GAIN settings (linked while preserving the difference in level.) EQ settings Dynamics 1 and 2 settings On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses Fader operations (linked while preserving the difference in level.) [ON] key operations Two or more input channels that are linked are called a “link group.” The maximum number of link groups you can create, and the maximum number of input channels that can be included in each group, is 18 {34}. However, the selection of parameters for which operations of a channel are linked for multiple link groups is shared by all link groups. Linking the desired input channels Here’s how to link specific parameters of input channels. HINT • Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene. • Recall Safe does not affect channel link. When you recall a scene, the link status saved in that scene will always be reproduced. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access the CH LINK screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens. 1 Channel display field When you create a link group, the corresponding channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. HINT • For ST IN channels, all parameters of L and R are always linked. B LINK PARAMETER field Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. These settings are shared by all link groups. C SEND PARAMETER field If you have turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons of this field to specify the send-destination bus(es). 2 Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field to select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed). 1 2 3 The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field. HA button Head amp settings EQ button EQ settings (including ATT/HPF) DYNA 1, 2 buttons Dynamics 1 and 2 settings MIX ON button On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses MIX SEND button Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses FADER button Fader operations CH ON button [ON] key operations HINT • If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in signals are not linked. For more about dynamics, refer to “EQ and Dynamics” (→ p. 115). • If you turn on the EQ button or DYNA 1/2 buttons, library recall operations will also be linked. 124 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual The Channel Link function 3 If you turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND buttons in step 2, use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed). The table below lists the parameters you can select in the SEND PARAMETER field. TO MIX 1–16 buttons MIX buses 1–16 HINT • When you press the [SEL] key of a channel belonging to a link group to make it light, the [SEL] keys of all channels belonging to the same link group will blink. • If you link an INPUT channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored. 5 If you want to add a new channel to an existing link group, do so as described in step 4. • If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be linked. 4 To link channels, proceed as follows. 1 Select the fader layer that contains the link-destination channel. B Use one of the following methods to select the link-source channel. ● If the link-source and link-destination channels are in the same fader layer Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and select the [SEL] key of the link-destination channel. HINT • If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the previous group will be cancelled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group. 6 To cancel a link, proceed as follows. 1 Select the fader layer that contains the channel you want to un-link. B Use one of the following methods to select any channel assigned to the link group. ● If the channel that you want to un-link is in the same fader layer as another channel in that link group ● If the link-source and link-destination channels are in different fader layers Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the channel display field to the link-source channel, then hold down the [ENTER] key and select the [SEL] key of the link-destination channel. At this time, the values of the parameters you selected in steps 2 and 3 will be copied from the link-source to the link-destination channel. Subsequent operations of the parameters you selected in steps 2 and 3 will be linked between channels belonging to the same link group. The current link status is shown in the channel display field of the window. NOTE • HA GAIN and fader values, which are linked while preserving their level difference, will not be copied. Link-source channel Hold down any [SEL] key registered in the link group, and select the [SEL] key of the channel that you want to un-link. ● If no other channel in that link group is in the same fader layer as the channel you want to un-link Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the channel display field to any channel registered in the link group, then hold down the [ENTER] key and select the [SEL] key of the channel you want to un-link. HINT 12 Grouping and linking NOTE • You can temporarily exclude a channel from link groups in order to adjust parameters that maintain their level balance while linked, such as when you want to adjust the level balance between channels in a link group. Hold down the [SEL] key of the channel whose balance you want to adjust, and edit the desired parameter. HA GAIN and fader will not be linked while you are holding down the [SEL] key. (However, this function will not work during the fade of a scene memory recall operation.) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 125 Copying, moving, or initializing a channel Copying, moving, or initializing a channel This section explains how you can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings. Copying the parameters of a channel You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination. You can copy between the following combinations of channels. • Between input channels • Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel • Between MIX channels • Between MATRIX channels 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access the CH COPY screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens. 2 5 E COPY TARGET field If you’ve selected a MIX channel, MATRIX channel, or STEREO/MONO channel as the copy-source, use the buttons of this field to select the parameters that will be copied. You may turn both buttons on if desired. If both buttons are on, the following parameters will be copied. ● MODULE PARAM button All parameters of the copy-source channel ● WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button On/off status and send level settings of the send signals sent to the copy-source channel F COPY button Executes the copy. 2 To select the copy-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light. The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window. When you choose the copy-source channel, the DESTINATION CHs field is automatically emboldened, allowing you to select the copy-destination. If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, move the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • Copy settings can be made only in the order of “copy-source” → “copy-destination.” 1 3 To select the copy-destination channel(s), press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light (multiple selections are allowed). 3 4 6 1 SOURCE CH field Indicates the channel that is selected as the copysource. B CLEAR SOURCE button This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field. C DESTINATION CHs field Indicates the channels selected as the copy-destination. D CLEAR DEST button This button clears the channels shown in the DESTINATION CHs field. 126 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the DESTINATION CHs field of the window. The channels that can be selected as the copy-destination will depend on the channel you selected in step 2. If you want to re-select all of the copy-destination channels, move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button and press the [ENTER] key. 4 If you selected a MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/ MONO channel as the copy-source, use the buttons of the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy. 5 To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the COPY button and press the [ENTER] key. The copy will be executed, and the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination channel(s). After the copy has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will return to an unset state. Copying, moving, or initializing a channel Moving the parameters of a channel The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the movesource and move-destination will move forward or backward by one. Move 2 To select the move-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light. The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window. When you select the move-source channel, the DESTINATION CH field will automatically be emboldened, allowing you to select the move-destination. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, move the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE 2 3 4 5 1 5 2 3 4 • Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order of “move-source” → “move-destination.” 3 To select the move-destination channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light. Move by one You can move settings between the following combinations of channels. • Between INPUT channels • Between ST IN channels 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access the CH MOVE screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens. The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DESTINATION CH field of the window. The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 2. If you want to re-select the move-destination channel, move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button and press the [ENTER] key. 4 To execute the Move operation, move the cursor to the MOVE button and press the [ENTER] key. The settings of the move-source channel will be moved to the move-destination. The settings of all channels between the move-source and move-destination will be moved by one channel in the direction of the move-source. When the Move has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field will return to an un-set state. 2 1 12 Grouping and linking 1 3 4 5 1 SOURCE CH field This indicates the move-source channel. B CLEAR SOURCE button This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field. C DESTINATION CH field This indicates the move-destination channel. D CLEAR DEST button This button clears all channels shown in the DESTINATION CH field. E MOVE button Executes the move. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 127 Copying, moving, or initializing a channel Initializing the parameters of a channel If desired, you can restore the parameters of any channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on any channel(s). 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access the CH CLEAR screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens. 2 3 1 1 TARGET CHs field In this field, select the channel(s) that you want to initialize. B CLEAR TARGET button This button clears the channels shown in the TARGET CHs field. C CLEAR button Executes the initialization. 2 To select the channel(s) to be initialized, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light (multiple selections are allowed). The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the TARGET CHs field of the window. If you want to de-select all channels, move the cursor to the CLEAR TARGET button and press the [ENTER] key. 3 To execute the Initialize operation, move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the [ENTER] key. The parameters of the selected channel(s) will be initialized. After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will return to a state in which nothing is selected. 128 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 13 Scene memory This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations. About scene memories On the LS9, settings such as the mix parameters and input/output port patching can be assigned a name and stored into memory (and later recalled from memory) as a “scene.” Scenes are numbered with a scene number in the range of 000–300. Of these scenes, scene 000 is a read-only scene that restores the mix parameters to their default state, and scenes 001– 300 are rewritable. Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] keys, as well as the following parameters. Input/output port patching Bus settings Head amp settings EQ settings Dynamics 1 and 2 settings Rack (GEQ/effect) settings • • • • • • Pan/balance settings Insert/direct out settings On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses Mute group settings Channel link settings 13 Using scene memories This section explains how to store and recall the LS9’s mix parameters as “scenes.” Scene number and title Storing a scene Scene memory • • • • • • To store the current mix settings as a scene memory, use the SCENE MEMORY screen. 1 Use the various controllers of the top panel or the buttons in the display to set the mix parameters as desired. The number and title of the currently selected scene are shown in the center of the constant display area. HINT • You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the constant display area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to change the scene number. This scene number will blink if the most recently stored or recalled scene is different than the currently selected scene. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 129 Using scene memories NOTE • Simply changing the scene number does not actually execute the store or recall operation. To execute the store or recall operation, you must use the STORE/RECALL buttons in the SCENE MEMORY screen as explained in step 2 and following or in “Recalling a scene” (→ p. 131), or use a user-defined key (→ p. 132) to which you’ve assigned the scene store/ recall function. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to access the SCENE LIST screen. In this screen you can perform operations such as storing or recalling a scene. 3 Make sure that the cursor is located some- where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the store-destination scene number. NOTE • Note that the scene number, channel number, or ST IN channel input level will change if you operate the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys when the cursor is located in the constant display area. 4 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title to the scene. 1 [SCENE MEMORY] key 1 SCENE TITLE field This field lets you enter a title for the scene (a maximum of sixteen characters). 5 Assign a title to the scene as desired. 1 For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34) 6 Move the cursor to the STORE button 2 3 1 Scene list This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that this scene number is selected for operations. A readonly scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a writeprotected scene is indicated by the protect (lock) symbol. B STORE button This stores the current mix settings into the location currently selected in the scene list. C STORE UNDO button This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the most recently performed scene Store operation. This button is available from immediately after you overwrite (save) until the next time you store. 130 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE popup window, and press the [ENTER] key. The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation. Using scene memories 7 To execute the Store operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 3. If you decide to cancel the Store operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. Recalling a scene To recall a scene that was stored in scene memory, use the SCENE MEMORY screen. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to access the SCENE LIST screen. NOTE • If you store to a scene number in which a scene is already stored, the previous data will be overwritten. HINT • You have the option of making settings so that the Store Confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194). 8 If you want to cancel the scene overwrite- 1 store operation, move the cursor to the STORE UNDO button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing. Undo will no longer be possible if you subsequently perform a scene store/recall operation. HINT • You can use the same procedure to store a scene in other SCENE MEMORY screens as well. • The same function as the STORE button or STORE UNDO button can also be assigned to a user-defined key (→ p. 132). 2 3 1 Scene list This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that this scene number is selected for operations. B RECALL button This recalls the scene that is currently selected in the scene list. C RECALL UNDO button This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the most recently performed scene Recall operation. 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some- where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the recall-source scene number. 13 Scene memory Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can use the STORE UNDO button to undo (cancel) the most recently executed scene store operation. When you execute the STORE UNDO button, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. If you want to execute the Undo, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. After executing the Undo, you can use the STORE UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute) the store operation. 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 131 Using scene memories 4 To execute the Recall operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene you selected in step 2 will be recalled. If you decide not to execute the Recall operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. HINT • You have the option of making settings so that the Recall Confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194). 5 If you decide to cancel the scene recall operation, move the cursor to the RECALL UNDO button and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. To execute the operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. After executing the Undo, you can use the RECALL UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute) the recall operation. HINT • You can use the same procedure to recall a scene in other SCENE MEMORY screens as well. • Alternatively, you can recall a scene by moving the cursor to the scene number in the constant display area, using the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select a scene number, and pressing the [ENTER] key. A confirmation dialog box will appear if RECALL CONFIRMATION is turned ON in the PREFERENCE popup window. • The same function as the RECALL button or RECALL UNDO button can also be assigned to a user-defined key. • In addition, you can recall a scene by using MIDI messages (program changes) (→ p. 180). Using user-defined keys to recall You can use the user-defined keys to directly recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a user-defined key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a userdefined key. ● INC RECALL Recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently loaded scene. ● DEC RECALL Recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently loaded scene. HINT • If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently loaded scene, the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled. ● DIRECT RECALL Allows you to directly specify a certain scene number and recall that scene. To assign one of these functions to a user-defined key so that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke, proceed as follows. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. USER DEFINED KEYS button 132 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using scene memories 2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED KEYS button and press the [ENTER] key to access the USER DEFINED KEYS popup window. The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you assign functions to user defined keys [1]–[12]. 5 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. If desired, assign scene-recall functions to other userdefined keys in the same way. 6 Press the user-defined key to which you assigned a recall function. The corresponding scene will be recalled. User defined keys popup buttons 3 Move the cursor to the popup button for the user-defined key to which you want to assign a function, and press the [ENTER] key. The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear. Scene memory 13 4 Move the cursor to the FUNCTION column, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select “SCENE.” In this popup window, you will proceed as follows depending on the function you want to assign. ● To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL.” ● To assign DIRECT RECALL Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to choose “DIRECT RECALL,” and then choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 133 Editing scene memories Editing scene memories This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy/ paste them. Sorting and renaming scene memories You can use a dedicated window to sort the saved scene memories in alphabetical order of their titles or in order of the date on which they were created. You can also edit their titles. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to access the SCENE LIST screen. HINT • The SCENE MEMORY screen consists of four screens, but the left half (scene list, store/recall buttons) and the tool buttons are the same in all screens. 2 3 4 6 B Scene number This is the scene number 000–300. C TITLE This is the name assigned to each scene (maximum 16 characters). You can move the cursor to this area and press the [ENTER] key to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window, where you can assign a title or comment to the scene. D R symbol (READ ONLY) / Protect symbol A read-only scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a write-protected scene is indicated by the protect (lock) symbol. For scenes 001–300, you can move the cursor to this area and press the [ENTER] key to switch between protected and un-protected settings. E Store/Recall buttons These buttons are used to store/recall scenes. You can also undo (cancel) or redo (re-execute) store/recall operations. For details, refer to “Using scene memories” (→ p. 129). F Tool buttons Use these buttons to perform operations such as Copy and Paste on the scenes stored in scene memory. For details, refer to “Scene memory editing” (→ p. 136). G STATUS field This field indicates the status of each scene. For scenes for which something other than the ALL button is selected in the Focus function (→ p. 139), for scenes in which the Fade function is enabled (→ p. 143), and for scenes for which the link with an audio file is enabled (→ p. 113), the “FOCUS”, “FADING”, and “PLAY” indications will respectively be lit. 1 5 8 9 7 1 Scene list This lists the scenes that are stored in scene memory. The line highlighted in blue indicates the scene currently selected for operations. HINT • You can also change the default order in which the list is sorted (ascending or descending scene number) (→ p. 194). H COMMENT/TIME STAMP field This indicates the comment, or the date and time at which the scene was last stored, as the year/month/ date and hours/minutes/seconds. I COMMENT/TIME STAMP tabs These tabs switch the items (comment or time stamp) that are shown in the COOMENT/TIME STAMP field. 2 To select a scene number, make sure that the cursor is located somewhere other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates the scene currently selected for operations. HINT • You can also assign user-defined keys to execute functions such as incrementing or decrementing the scene number or scrolling the scene list up or down (→ p. 196). 134 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Editing scene memories 3 If you want the scenes to be listed in a dif- ferent order, move the cursor to the “NO.” or “TITLE” buttons located above the scene list, or to “TIME STAMP” located above the STATUS/TIME STAMP field, and press the [ENTER] key. 1 2 3 5 To turn the protect setting on/off for a scene, move the cursor to the R symbol / protect symbol of the selected scene, and press the [ENTER] key. Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the indication will alternate between the protect (lock) symbol, R (read only) symbol, and no symbol. ● Protect (lock) symbol The scene cannot be overwritten. ● R (read only) symbol 1 NO. Sorted in order of scene number. B TITLE Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of title. C COMMENT/TIME STAMP In addition to the protection described above, it will also be impossible to overwrite the scene by loading a file from USB memory, etc. This setting can be selected only for consecutive scene numbers from scene number 000. ● No symbol The scene is not protected. Sorted in order of comment or date of creation. NOTE HINT • The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled. • By leaving the cursor at the same button and pressing the [ENTER] key again, you can change the direction (ascending or descending) in which the list is sorted. 6 Use the tool buttons to edit the scene memory. 4 If you want to edit the title of a scene, move the cursor to the TITLE field of the selected scene, and press the [ENTER] key to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window. For details, refer to the section “Scene memory editing” that follows. For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). 13 Scene memory 1 1 TITLE field This field lets you enter a title for the scene. (The maximum is 16 characters.) HINT • You cannot edit the title of a read-only scene or a write-protected scene. • If you want to edit the comment of a scene, use the COMMENT/TIME STAMP tabs to display the comments in the scene list, move the cursor to the SCENE COMMENT field of the selected scene, and press the [ENTER] key to access the COMMENT EDIT popup window. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 135 Editing scene memories Scene memory editing Copying/pasting a scene The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied/pasted to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased). Here’s how to copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the Scene memories are edited using the buttons shown in the upper part of the SCENE MEMORY screen. Each button has the following function. 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some- [SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens. 1 2 3 4 5 6 [SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens. where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the copy-source scene number. 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the [ENTER] key. 1 COPY button Copies a scene into a memory buffer (a temporary storage area). For details on how to use this, refer to “Copying/pasting a scene” below. B PASTE button This button pastes a scene (previously copied into the memory buffer) into another scene number. For details on how to use this, refer to “Copying/pasting a scene” below. C CLEAR button This button clears (erases) the selected scene. For details on how to use this, refer to “Clearing a scene” (→ p. 137). D CUT button Cuts a scene and places it in the memory buffer. Scenes following the scene number you cut will be moved forward. For details on how to use this, refer to “Cutting a scene” (→ p. 138). A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy operation. 4 To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in the buffer memory. HINT • Be aware that if you copy/cut another scene before you paste, the other scene will be overwritten to the buffer memory. E INSERT button 5 Make sure that the cursor is located some- Inserts a scene from the memory buffer at the location of a different scene number. Scene numbers following the inserted position will be moved backward. For details on how to use this, refer to “Inserting a scene” (→ p. 138). 6 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and F UNDO button This button cancels the most recently-executed scene editing operation. If you’ve accidentally cleared an important scene, you can press this key to return to the state prior to editing the scene. where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the paste-destination scene number. press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste operation. 2 Perform the desired editing operations. For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations that follow. HINT • A copied scene can also be inserted (→ p. 138). NOTE • If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE button is not available. 136 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Editing scene memories cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted to the scene number you selected in step 5. If you decide to cancel the Paste operation, use the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. NOTE • Be aware that when you paste to a scene number in which a scene has already been stored, the existing scene will be overwritten. • Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be pasted. Clearing a scene Here’s how to clear a specified scene. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens. 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some- where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the scene number that you want to clear. 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation. 4 To execute the Clear operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene number you selected in step 2 will be cleared. If you decide to cancel the Clear operation, use the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. NOTE • Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 13 Scene memory 7 To execute the Paste operation, move the 137 Editing scene memories Cutting a scene Here’s how to cut a scene. When you cut a scene, the scenes of subsequent numbers will move forward. After you cut a scene, you’ll be able to paste or insert it at the desired location. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens. 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some- where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the scene number that you want to cut. 3 Move the cursor to the CUT button and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut operation. Inserting a scene Here’s how a scene held in the buffer memory can be inserted at the desired scene number location. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of the SCENE MEMORY screens. 2 Perform the Copy operation (→ p. 136) or Cut operation so that the scene you want to insert is placed in the buffer memory. 3 Make sure that the cursor is located some- where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the insert-destination scene number. 4 Move the cursor to the INSERT button and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert operation. NOTE • The CUT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in any other way than by the “NO.” column. 4 To execute the Cut operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene you selected in step 2 will be cut, and the scenes of subsequent numbers will be moved forward. At this time, the scene that was cut will be stored in buffer memory. NOTE • Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut. 5 If desired, you can paste (→ p. 136) or insert the cut scene (that was held in the buffer memory). NOTE • Be aware that if you copy or cut a different scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory. 138 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual NOTE • The INSERT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in any other way than by the “NO.” column. • If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the INSERT button is not available. • The INSERT button cannot be used if the Insert operation would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed 300. • You can’t insert in front of a scene for which the R symbol (read only) is specified. 5 To execute the Insert operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene stored in the buffer memory will be insert at the scene number you selected in step 3. The numbers of scenes stored in locations preceding that scene will be moved back by one. Using the Focus function Using the Focus function “Focus” is a function that lets you select the parameters that will be updated when you recall each scene, so that only specific parameters will be updated when you recall that scene. For example, it is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene. HINT • As a function that is the converse of Focus, there is also a “Recall Safe” function that lets you select channels and parameters to be excluded from recall operations (→ p. 140). However while the Focus function is specified for each scene, Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to access the SCENE FOCUS screen. the parameters that will be subject to recall. These buttons correspond to the following parameters (multiple selections are allowed). In this screen you can make various settings for the Focus function. The screen contains the following items. 1 3 Use the buttons other than “ALL” to select Button name 2 Corresponding parameters RACK Rack settings HA Head amp settings IN (PATCH) Input port patching OUT (PATCH) Output port patching IN Input channel parameters OUT Output channel parameters SEND On/off status and send level settings for signals sent from input channels to MIX buses (shown only if the OUT button is on) HINT 4 If you want to cancel the restrictions you 1 FOCUS field This field lets you make Focus function settings for a scene saved in scene memory. Using the buttons arrayed in the center, select the parameters that will be updated when you recall the scene selected in the list in the left side of the screen. For other scenes, you can only check the on/off status of each parameter. B CURRENT field This field lets you make Focus function settings for the scene you’re currently operating. If you select a parameter in this field and then store the scene, your selections will be used the next time you recall that scene. When you recall a scene, the Focus function settings of that scene are shown in this field. 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some- where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the scene for which you want to make Focus function settings. specified in step 3, so that all parameters will be subject to recall, turn the ALL button on. When you turn on the ALL button, all other buttons for that scene will be turned off. Turning on any other button will turn off the ALL button. 13 Scene memory • The SEND button is shown only if the OUT button is on. However if both the IN button and OUT button are on, the parameters corresponding to SEND will automatically be subject to recall. 5 Make Focus function settings for other scenes as described in steps 2–4. 6 Recall a scene for which you’ve made Focus settings. If buttons other than ALL are turned on for the scene, only the parameters whose buttons are on will be recalled. If the ALL button is turned on for the scene, all parameters will be updated. HINT • For scenes other than the scene number currently selected in the scene list, check marks show the state of the Focus function settings. • Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a “FOCUS” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST screen. • The Focus function can be used in conjunction with the Recall Safe function (→ p. 140). Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 139 Using the Recall Safe function Using the Recall Safe function “Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels from Recall operations. This differs from the Focus settings (→ p. 139) made for individual scenes in that Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access the RECALL SAFE screen. In this screen you can make settings for the Recall Safe function. The window contains the following items. 1 CH RECALL SAFE field The channels for which Recall Safe is turned on are highlighted in this field. If you turn on the SET BY SEL button, you can turn on Recall Safe for a channel simply by pressing the [SEL] key of that channel. B CLEAR ALL button This clears all Recall Safe settings for the channels that are highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field. [CHANNEL JOB] key C GLOBAL field In this field, global parameters (parameters that affect the entire mix, and are not specific to individual channels) can be excluded from Recall operations. D SAFE PARAMETER field Here you can switch Recall Safe on/off for each channel, and choose the parameters that will be excluded from Recall operations. If you select a channel by pressing its [SEL] key, the Recall Safe settings of that channel will be shown in this field. E APPLY TO ALL INPUT button / APPLY TO 2 3 ALL OUTPUT button If these buttons are on when you operate the SAFE PARAMETER buttons, the changes will apply to all input (or output) channels. This is convenient when you want to make settings for all channels in a single action. HINT 1 • You can also access this screen from the SAFE field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 88). 5 2 To select the channel whose Recall Safe settings you want to edit, press the corresponding [SEL] key. 4 LS9-16 2 3 The corresponding channel in the CH RECALL SAFE field will be enclosed by a white border. (However, Recall Safe is not yet enabled at this point.) At this time, the SAFE PARAMETER field will show the Recall Safe settings of the selected channel. HINT • If the CH RECALL SAFE field’s SET BY SEL button is on, Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the [SEL] key, and the corresponding channel will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field. You can select parameters as described in step 3 even after turning Recall Safe on. 1 5 4 LS9-32 140 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using the Recall Safe function 3 If you want to enable Recall Safe for specific parameters of the selected channel, make the following settings in the SAFE PARAMETER field. ● If a STEREO/MONO channel is selected With the exception of the types of button that are displayed, this is the same as for an input channel. ● For an input channel Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER field (except for the “ALL” button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are allowed). If you want all parameters to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting). These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button name LS9-16 Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters EQ EQ settings (including ATT) DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings MTRX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses MTRX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses FADER Fader positions CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys ● If a MIX channel is selected 13 Scene memory Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER field (except for the “ALL” button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are allowed). In addition, you can use the WITH MIX SEND button to enable Recall Safe for the on/off status and send level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses. If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the field to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting). LS9-32 These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button name Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters HA Head amp settings (including external HA) EQ EQ settings (including ATT/HPF) DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings MIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses FADER Fader positions CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys NOTE • If you turn on the ALL button, all other buttons of the SAFE PARAMETER field will be turned off. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 141 Using the Recall Safe function These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button name Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters (except for WITH MIX SEND) EQ EQ settings (including ATT) DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings MTRX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses MTRX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses FADER Fader positions CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys WITH MIX SEND On/off status and send level of signals sent from input channels to MIX buses 4 To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE PARAMETER field. Channels for which Recall Safe is enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field. SAFE button NOTE • If the ALL button is on, all buttons will be turned off except for the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER field. • You can switch the WITH MIX SEND button on/off while the ALL button is left on. ● If a MATRIX channel is selected LS9-16 With the exception of the types of button that are displayed, this is the same as for a MIX channel. In addition, you can use the WITH MATRIX SEND button to enable Recall Safe for the on/off status and send level of the signals sent from output channels to MATRIX buses. SAFE button LS9-32 NOTE These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button name Corresponding parameters ALL All parameters (except for WITH MATRIX SEND) EQ EQ settings (including ATT) DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings FADER Fader positions CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys WITH MATRIX SEND On/off status and send level of signals sent from MIX channels / STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses NOTE • If you turn on the ALL button, all buttons will be turned off except for the WITH MATRIX SEND button located in the SAFE PARAMETER field. • You can switch the WITH MATRIX SEND button on/off while the ALL button is left on. 142 • Simply selecting a parameter in step 3 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on/off, you must also perform the operation of step 4. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual HINT • In the CH RECALL SAFE field, the color of the highlight will be green if the ALL button was selected in step 3, or blue if buttons other than ALL were selected. • If you press the CLEAR ALL button, Recall Safe will be defeated for all channels for which it is enabled (i.e., the highlighted channels). • You can also switch Recall Safe on/off in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen’s SAFE field (→ p. 88). Using the Recall Safe function • Using the Fade function 5 If you want to enable Recall Safe for global parameters, turn on the desired buttons in the GLOBAL field. These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button name Corresponding parameters INPUT PATCH Input port patching INPUT NAME Input channel name OUTPUT PATCH Output port patching OUTPUT NAME Output channel name 1–8 Rack 1–8 settings 6 When you’ve finished making settings, execute a Recall operation. Only the selected channel(s) and parameter(s) will be excluded from Recall operations. Channel Link (→ p. 124) and the MIX/MATRIX bus settings in the SYSTEM SETUP screen (→ p. 213) are not subject to Recall Safe; the settings of the recalled scene will always be reproduced. This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two MIX/MATRIX channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel(s) when you recall a scene. In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the next time it is operated. HINT • The Recall Safe function can be used in conjunction with the Focus function (→ p. 139). Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled. • By performing the Recall operation while holding down the [SEL] key of a channel for which Recall Safe is disabled, you can temporarily enable the Recall Safe settings for that channel. Using the Fade function 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to access the SCENE FADE screen. In this screen you can make various settings for the Fade function. The screen contains the following items. 1 2 1 FADE TIME field This field lets you make Fade function settings for a scene saved in scene memory. Use the buttons located in the center to make Fade function settings for the scene selected in the list shown in the left side of the screen. For other scenes, you can only view the settings. 13 Scene memory “Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. This is convenient when you want to obtain a fade-in/out effect, or when you want the levels to transition smoothly between two scenes. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene. B CURRENT field This field lets you make Fade function settings for the scene you’re currently operating. When you recall a scene, the Fade function settings of that scene are shown in this field. C SETUP popup button This button displays the FADE TIME popup window. D FADING button This button switches the Fade function on/off for each scene. E Fade time This indicates the fade time (the time over which the fader will reach the new value). 3 4 5 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 143 Using the Fade function 2 Make sure that the cursor is located some- where other than the constant display area, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the scene for which you want to make Fade function settings. 3 Move the cursor to the SET popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the FADE TIME popup window. In this popup window you can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. 1 3 6 To turn on the Fade function, move the cursor to the FADING button and press the [ENTER] key. The Fade on/off setting is made individually for each scene. Save the scene if necessary. HINT • Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a “FADING” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST screen. 7 Make Fade function settings for other scenes as described in steps 2–6. 2 8 Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on. The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time. 4 NOTE • The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link. HINT 1 Channel display field The channels to which Fade is applied are highlighted. B FADE TIME knob This knob sets the fade time. Move the cursor to this knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting. C SET ALL button If you press this button, the Fade effect will be enabled for all faders/encoders of that scene. D CLEAR ALL button If you press this button, the Fade effect will be disabled for all faders/encoders of that scene. 4 Press the [SEL] keys of the desired chan- nels to select the channels to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed). The [SEL] keys of the selected channels will light, and those channels will be highlighted in the channel display field of the popup window. You can cancel a selection by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark. 5 Move the cursor to the FADE TIME knob, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the fade time. The range is 0.0 sec–60.0 sec. When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to close the FADE TIME popup window. HINT • The fade time you specify here is used for all channels selected in step 4. 144 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual • If you stop a moving fader while you hold down the corresponding [SEL] key, the fade effect will stop at that point. • If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, all channel faders will move immediately to their target positions. Chapter 14 Monitor/Cue This chapter explains the LS9’s monitor/cue functions. About the monitor/cue functions The Monitor function lets you audition various signals through your nearfield monitors or headphones. The LS9’s front panel has a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring, and this jack always lets you monitor the signal that is selected as the monitoring source. By assigning the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers. You can select the following signals as the monitor source. • • • • • STEREO channel output signal MONO channel output signal STEREO + MONO channel output signal 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input signal • USB memory recorder output signal • Any combination of up to eight signals from the STEREO, MONO, MIX, and MATRIX channels, the USB memory recorder output signal, INPUT channel 15/ 16 {31/32}, and the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel by temporarily sending it from the output jacks assigned to the MONITOR OUT channel or from the PHONES OUT jack. When you press the top panel [CUE] key, the cue signal of the corresponding channel is sent as the monitor output from the selected output port. NOTE • The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor output. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack. CUE LR PHONES OUT LR CUE TRIM (INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA) CUE L MONO METER CUE L CUE LOGIC PHONES LEVEL LINK PLAYBACK OUT STEREO OUT L,R STEREO OUT MONO(C) MIX OUT1-16 MATRIX OUT1-8 DEFINE MIX (MAX:8ch) MONO METER MONITOR L MONITOR R METER MONITOR R MONITOR MONO(C) METER MONITOR MONO(C) PHONES L To PHONES OUT PHONES R To PHONES OUT MONITOR OUT L DIMMER 2TRD L,R INPUT 15,16{31,32} MONITOR SELECT 2TRD L,R INPUT 15,16{31,32} PLAYBACK OUT MONITOR L [PHONES] PHONES LEVEL METER CUE R CUE R STEREO OUT L,R STEREO OUT MONO(C) STEREO OUT L,C,R Tip Ring Sleeve DA 2 Monitor/Cue 14 The following diagram shows the monitor/cue signal flow. To OUTPUT PATCH MONITOR OUT MONO(C) ON TALKBACK ON MONITOR DIMM ON To OUTPUT PATCH MONITOR OUT R To OUTPUT PATCH +MONO(C) MONITOR LEVEL ● MONITOR SELECT ● MONITOR LEVEL Selects the monitor source. Adjusts the level of the monitor/cue signal. This affects the output jacks that are assigned to the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels, and also the PHONES OUT jack. ● METER Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal. ● DIMMER Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount. ● ON (On/off) Turns the monitor output on/off. ● PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level) Adjusts the output level of only the PHONES OUT jack. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 145 Using the Monitor function Using the Monitor function This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES OUT jack or external monitor speakers. 1 Connect your monitor system to the rear E MONITOR LEVEL knob Adjusts the output level of the monitor signal. panel OMNI OUT jacks, 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack, or an I/O card installed in a slot. The monitor signal can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel. If you’re monitoring through headphones, make sure that your headphones are connected to the front panel PHONES OUT jack. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MONITOR] key repeatedly to access the MONITOR screen. In the MONITOR screen you can check the current monitor settings, and turn monitoring on/off. The screen contains the following items. 2 9 6 1 57 F DIMMER field The Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates the monitor signal can be switched on/off here. Use the knob in this field to adjust the amount of attenuation. G TALKBACK DIMMER field If Talkback is enabled, this will indicate the on/off status of the Talkback Dimmer function which automatically attenuates the monitor signal. Here you can also specify the amount of attenuation applied by the talkback dimmer. H Meter field This indicates the level of the monitor signal. This meter shows the level immediately before the dimmer. If you move the cursor to the port select box located below the level meter and press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will appear, allowing you to select the port that will output the monitor signal. 4 8 3 I MONO MONITOR button This button allows monaural monitoring. If this button is on, the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and the MONITOR OUT L/R channels will be monaural. HINT • If the normal dimmer and the talkback dimmer are both switched on simultaneously, the setting with the greatest amount of attenuation will be applied. 1 OUTPUT button Turns the monitor output on/off. B SOURCE SELECT field Use the buttons in this field to select the monitor source. C ASSIGN field If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, use this field to specify the monitor source. You can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously. If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key. 146 3 Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT field to select a monitor source. In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only one monitor source. However if you’ve selected DEFINE, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources. The following table shows the monitor sources you can select in the SOURCE SELECT field. ST L/R button STEREO L/R channel output signal MONO button MONO channel output signal 2TR L/R button 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal D PHONES LEVEL LINK button LCR button STEREO L/R + MONO channel (LCR) output signal If this is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack. IN 15/16 {31/32} button INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input signal PLAYBACK OUT button USB memory recorder playback signal DEFINE button The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using the Monitor function If you’ve selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, you can use the ASSIGN field to select multiple sources. The following table shows the monitor sources you can select in the ASSIGN field. MIX 1–16 buttons MIX channels 1–16 output signals MATRIX 1–8 buttons MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals STEREO L/R button STEREO L/R channel output signal MONO button MONO channel output signal 2TR L/R button 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal INPUT 15/16 {31/32} button INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input signal PLAYBACK OUT button USB memory recorder playback signal 6 To output the monitor signal, move the cursor to the OUTPUT button of the MONITOR screen and press the [ENTER] key to turn it on. The monitor source you selected in step 3 will be sent to the output destination you specified in step 5. HINT • The PHONES OUT jack will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off. 7 Move the cursor to the MONITOR LEVEL knob in the MONITOR screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the monitor level. NOTE • You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Please turn off the buttons for unneeded sources. 4 Move the cursor to one of the port select boxes (L/R/C) located below the level meter, and press the [ENTER] key. The OUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to specify the port from which the L, R, and C monitor signals will be output. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones. HINT • If PHONES LEVEL LINK is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will also affect the PHONES OUT jack. • If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER that you’ve assigned to a user-defined key, you’ll be able to use the master fader to control the monitor. 8 Make settings for Dimmer and Monaural as desired. HINT 14 Monitor/Cue • Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also be assigned to userdefined keys (→ p. 196). LS9-16 5 Move the cursor to the output destination port and press the [ENTER] key to select it; then move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. The following table lists the output ports you can select. OMNI 1–8 {1–16} OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} 2TR OUT L/R 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L, R SLOT {1/2} 1–16 Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in a slot {1/2} HINT • If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers. If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO button or LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 147 Using the Cue function Using the Cue function This section explains how to use the LS9’s Cue function. About cue groups The LS9’s cue signals can be categorized into the following three groups. 1 INPUT CUE group The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press to turn on the [CUE] key of a channel module to which an INPUT channel is assigned or the [CUE] key of a ST IN channel. [CUE] key of a channel module to which an INPUT channel is assigned [CUE] key of a ST IN channel B OUTPUT CUE group The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To switch to Cue for this group, press to turn on the [CUE] key of the STEREO MASTER section or the [CUE] key of a channel module to which a MIX/MATRIX/MONO channel is assigned. C Other CUE group These are the Cue signals operated using buttons displayed in the screen. This group is enabled if you turn on a CUE button in a RACK screen to which you’ve assigned an effect, the CUE button of the RECORDER screen, or the KEY IN CUE button of the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window. This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding screen. CUE button in the screen It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue between different groups. Normally, the group to which the most recently pressed [CUE] key (or a CUE/KEY IN CUE button in the screen) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys of the previously selected group will be defeated. However if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the previouslyselected group will be restored when the current Cue signal is defeated. The following illustration shows the priority order of the [CUE] keys. After you have switched groups from lower to upper levels, if you then defeat Cue for the upper group, the previous [CUE] key status of the group immediately below will be restored. Other CUE group INPUT CUE group OUTPUT CUE group [CUE] key of the STEREO channel [CUE] key of a channel module to which a MIX/MATRIX/MONO channel is assigned 148 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual For example if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group → INPUT CUE group → Other CUE group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys (CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previously selected group. However, if the CUE MODE is LAST CUE, the state of the [CUE] key is not reproduced. Using the Cue function C OUTPUT field Here you can select one of the following choices as the position from which output channels will be cued. Operating the Cue function This section explains how you can use the [CUE] key of a desired channel to monitor the Cue signal. NOTE ● PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button The pre-fader signal will be output ● AFL (After-Fader Listen) button • The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor output. However, the front panel PHONES OUT jack will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. For details on Monitor function settings, refer to “Using the Monitor function” (→ p. 146). 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the The signal immediately after the [ON] key will be output ● PFL TRIM knob If PFL is selected, you can adjust the output level of the cue signal in a range of -20 dB to +10 dB. D Meter field [MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the CUE screen. ● CUE meter In the CUE screen you can check the Cue status, and turn Cue on/off. ● ACTIVE CUE indicator 1 2 3 4 This indicates the level of the cue signal. This indicates the currently-active CUE group. ● CLEAR CUE button Clears all Cue selections. 2 Use the buttons of the CUE MODE section to specify what will happen when multiple [CUE] keys within the same CUE group are turned on. Use the following two buttons to choose the Cue mode. ● MIX CUE button All channels within the same CUE group whose [CUE] key is on will be mixed for monitoring (MIX CUE mode). Only the channel whose [CUE] key was last turned on will be monitored (LAST CUE mode). 1 CUE MODE field This specifies the mode of operation when multiple [CUE] keys within the same group are turned on. B INPUT field Here you can select one of the following positions from which input channels will be cued. ● PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button The pre-fader signal will be output ● AFL (After-Fader Listen) button The signal immediately after the [ON] key will be output HINT • [CUE] keys belonging to different CUE groups cannot be turned on simultaneously. The CUE group to which the lastpressed [CUE] key belongs will be turned on, allowing only the signals of that group to be monitored. 14 Monitor/Cue ● LAST CUE button 3 Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT field and OUTPUT field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE group. ● POST PAN button The post-pan signal will be output ● PFL TRIM knob If PFL is selected, you can adjust the output level of the cue signal in a range of -20 dB to +10 dB. NOTE • Be aware that if you turn the POST PAN button on, you can no longer use input CUE to monitor the signal sent to the MONO bus from an input channel that is set to LCR mode. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 149 Using the Cue function 4 Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel to turn it on. The Cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the monitor signal output destination. You can also watch the Cue meter of the meter field to check the output level of the cue signal. The ACTIVE CUE indicator located below the Cue meter indicates the CUE group (INPUT or OUTPUT) that is currently turned on. CUE meter ACTIVE CUE indicator HINT • If you want Cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the PREFERENCE popup window of the USER SETUP screen, and turn “[CUE]>[SEL] LINK” on (→ p. 194). 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] button to access the MONITOR screen, and use the MONITOR LEVEL knob in the screen to adjust the level of the cue signal. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones. 6 To defeat Cue, press the [CUE CLEAR] key or the currently-on [CUE] key once again. If you want to clear all Cue selections, move the cursor to the CUE CLEAR button in the CUE screen, and press the [ENTER] key. HINT • All Cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section. • You can also assign the same function as the CLEAR CUE button to a user-defined key (→ p. 196). 150 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 15 Talkback / Oscillator This chapter explains how to use the talkback and oscillator functions. About talkback and oscillator Talkback is a function that sends the signal of the selected INPUT jack to the desired bus. This is used mainly to convey directions from the operator to the performers and staff. The LS9 also contains an oscillator that allows a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, and this can be used to check external equipment or to test the response of the room. The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator. MIX 1 2 ...15 16 M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 ST CUE LR TALKBACK INPUT 1-16{32} +48V MASTER +48V INPUT SELEECT ON OSCILLATOR LEVEL HA +48V [INPUT] [1-16{32}] INPUT 1 2 3 ON Sine Wave Pink Noise Burst Noise METER + - AD GAIN/TRIM OSC METER ON HPF LPF Using talkback Here’s how a signal received at an INPUT jack 1–16 {1–32} can be output to the desired bus. [MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the TALKBACK screen. In the TALKBACK screen you can check the status of the talkback and turn it on/off. 2 B INPUT TO TALKBACK field Of the INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}, the input sensitivity, input level, and phantom power on/off status of the jack used for talkback is shown here. You can adjust the input sensitivity by selecting the GAIN knob in this field. ● Input select popup button This displays the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window, where you can select the INPUT jack used for talkback. 15 Talkback / Oscillator 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the ● +48V button 1 This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the INPUT jack used for talkback. ● GAIN knob 3 This adjusts the input sensitivity of the INPUT jack used for talkback. ● Input level meter This indicates the input level of the mic connected to the INPUT jack used for talkback. 1 TALKBACK ON button This switches talkback on/off. C ASSIGN field This selects the buses to which the talkback signal will be sent. If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 151 Using talkback 2 To assign the input from the INPUT jack to talkback, move the cursor to the input select popup window in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field, and press the [ENTER] key. The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear. 6 Using the buttons in the ASSIGN field, select the bus(es) to which you want to send the talkback signal. (You may select more than one.) The buttons correspond to the following buses. MIX 1–16 buttons MIX buses 1–16 MATRIX 1–8 buttons MATRIX buses 1–8 ST L, ST R, MONO buttons STEREO bus L/R, MONO bus HINT • If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key. 7 To enable talkback, move the cursor to the TALKBACK ON button and press the [ENTER] key to turn it on. LS9-32 3 Of the IN1–16 {1–32} buttons, move the cursor to the port you want to use for talkback, and press the [ENTER] key. To cancel the selection, press the [ENTER] key once again on the selected port. You can select only one port at a time. 4 When you’ve selected the port, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. 5 Connect your mic to the rear panel INPUT jack, move the cursor to the TALKBACK GAIN knob, and use the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic. The input level meter in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field shows the input level of the mic connected to the INPUT jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be supplied to the INPUT jack, turn on the +48V button in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field. NOTE • If you want to use phantom power, you must first turn ON the +48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM SETUP screen. • The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. 152 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual The TALKBACK ON button will alternate between on and off each time you press the [ENTER] key (latched operation). While talkback is on, the signal from the INPUT jack selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the send-destination bus. HINT • You can also assign the talkback on/off function to a userdefined key. In this case, you can choose either latched operation or unlatched operation (i.e., talkback will be On only while you hold down the key) (→ p. 196). • You can also use Talkback Dimmer to lower the monitor level of the non-talkback signals when talkback is on (→ p. 146). Using the oscillator Using the oscillator Here’s how you can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the OSCILLATOR screen. In the OSCILLATOR screen you can check the settings of the oscillator and turn it on/off. 3 4 3 If you want to adjust the oscillator parame- ters, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to operate the knobs shown in the field. The parameters shown in the parameter field will depend on the type of oscillator selected in the MODE field. The following table lists the oscillator types and the parameters displayed for each type. Oscillator type 1 2 Parameters SINE WAVE 1CH LEVEL, FREQ PINK NOISE LEVEL, HPF, LPF BURST NOISE LEVEL, HPF, LPF, WIDTH, INTERVAL The following table describes each parameter in detail. Parameter Details LEVEL Oscillator output level FREQ Frequency of the sine wave produced by the oscillator HPF High-pass filter (on/off switch, cutoff frequency) LPF Low-pass filter (on/off switch, cutoff frequency) 1 OUTPUT button WIDTH Duration of the noise This switches the oscillator on/off. INTERVAL Length of silence between noise bursts B MODE field Move the cursor to a button in this field to select the desired type of oscillator. Level INTERVAL C Parameter field Pink noise output WIDTH Here you can adjust the parameters of the oscillator you selected in the MODE field. Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to operate the knobs shown in the field. 15 D Oscillator level This indicates the output level of the oscillator. E ASSIGN field This selects the buses to which the oscillator signal will be sent. If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key. 2 Use the buttons in the MODE field to select the type of signal you want to output. You can choose from the following signals. SINE WAVE 1CH Sine wave, one channel PINK NOISE Pink noise BURST NOISE Burst noise (intermittently output pink noise) Time The BURST NOISE button is on 4 Using the buttons in the ASSIGN field, select the bus(es) to which you want to send the oscillator signal. (You may select more than one.) Talkback / Oscillator 5 The buttons correspond to the following buses. MIX 1–16 buttons MIX buses 1–16 MATRIX 1–8 buttons MATRIX buses 1–8 ST L, ST R, MONO buttons STEREO bus L/R, MONO bus HINT • If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 153 Using the oscillator 5 To enable the oscillator, move the cursor to the OUTPUT button and press the [ENTER] key to turn it on. The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus(es) you selected in step 4. When you select the button and press the [ENTER] key once again, the oscillator will be turned off. HINT • You can also assign the oscillator on/off function to a userdefined key (→ p. 196). 154 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 16 Meters This chapter describes the meter screen which displays input/output level meters for all channels. Using the METER screen By accessing the Meter screen you can view the input/output levels of all channels in the screen, and switch the metering point (the location at which the level is detected) of the level meters. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [ CUSTOM FADER screen ] [METER] key to access the Meter screen. The Meter screen is divided into the METER CH1-32 screen, {METER CH 33-64 screen}, OUTPUT METER screen, and CUSTOM FADER screen. 4 2 [ METER CH1-32 screen ] 5 1 2 LS9-16 B Level meters These show the input/output levels or fader values. The current fader value is shown in a range of -∞–10. When you operate the corresponding fader, the value will change in realtime. [ OUTPUT METER screen ] 1 2 16 Meters 3 1 Metering point select buttons Use these three buttons to select the metering point for the input/output channels. The ∑ segment will light if even one of the level detection points within each channel is overloaded. The ∑ segment level detection points are as follows. • Input channels ........... PRE HPF, PRE FADER, POST ON • Output channels ........... PRE EQ, PRE FADER, POST ON 3 C PEAK HOLD button If you turn this button on, the peak levels of the meters will be held. When you turn this button off, the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 155 Using the METER screen D Metering point select box Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the metering point for the input/output channels. E Channel name This shows the first four characters of the channel name for the channels assigned to the [CUSTOM FADER] layer. Channels that are not assigned are shown as “----”. 2 If desired, you can move the cursor to the metering point select buttons and press the [ENTER] key to switch the metering point. In the CUSTOM FADER screen, move the cursor to the metering point select box, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to make your selection, and then press the [ENTER] key. The metering point for the level meters can be set independently for input channels and output channels. You can choose from the following metering points. ● Input channels • PRE HPF ............Immediately before the highpass filter • PRE FADER .......Immediately before the fader • POST ON ...........Immediately after the channel on/off. ● Output channels • PRE EQ ..............Immediately before the attenuator • PRE FADER .......Immediately before the fader • POST ON ...........Immediately after the channel on/off. For details on the metering points, refer to the block diagram at the end of this manual. 3 If you want to hold the peak levels of the level meters, move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD button and press the [ENTER] key to turn it on. On/off operations of the PEAK HOLD button will apply to both input channels and output channels. When you turn this button off, the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared. HINT • You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a user-defined key (→ p. 196). • If you turn on METER FOLLOW LAYER in the PREFERENCE screen, the same meter screen as the selected layer will be displayed when you press a LAYER key. 156 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 17 Graphic EQ and effects This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ and effects, and how to perform remote control operations via the dedicated protocol to control an external head amp (Yamaha AD8HR) from the LS9. About the virtual rack The LS9 lets you insert the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ”) and effects into the desired signal route to process the signals. You can use two types of GEQ; 31 Band GEQ which lets you freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which lets you adjust any fifteen of thirty-one bands. You can also use 48 different effect types. In order to use a GEQ or effect, you must mount the GEQ or effect in one of the eight virtual racks provided in the screen, and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. Only GEQ can be mounted in racks 1–4, and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5–8. [Figure 1] Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the “31 Band GEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.) [Figure 2] shows the signal flow for the virtual racks. INSERT IN PATCH RACK RACK 2 RACK 3 Only for GEQ RACK 1 METER RACK OUT 31BandGEQ METER RACK IN A METER RACK IN B MIX OUT 1-16 MATRIX OUT 1-8 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) RACK 4 RACK1 METER RACK IN RACK1 IN A(L)/B(R) METER RACK OUT A METER RACK OUT B Flex15GEQ RACK1 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK2 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK2 (same as RACK1) RACK2 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK3 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK3 (same as RACK1) RACK3 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK4 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK4 (same as RACK1) RACK4 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK5 CH INSERT OUT 1-32 RACK 6 RACK 7 RACK 8 [Figure 1] GEQ or effects RACK 5 METER RACK IN METER RACK IN A METER RACK IN B 16 To MIX INSERT IN STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C) 3 To STEREO INSERT IN MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8 To MATRIX INSERT IN 8 METER RACK OUT METER RACK OUT A METER RACK OUT B Flex15GEQ METER RACK IN L METER RACK IN R MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8 To CH INSERT IN MIX INSERT IN 1-16 31BandGEQ MIX INSERT OUT 1-16 STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) CH INSERT IN 1-32 32 METER RACK OUT L METER RACK OUT R EFFECT EFFECT CUE RACK5 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK5 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK6 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK6 (same as RACK5) RACK6 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK7 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK7 (same as RACK5) RACK7 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK8 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK8 (same as RACK5) RACK8 OUT A(L)/B(R) 17 Graphic EQ and effects RACK IN PATCH [Figure 2] HINT • In addition to the virtual rack for GEQ and effects, there is also a rack for mounting external head amps (Yamaha AD8HR). For details, refer to “Using an external head amp” (→ p. 175). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 157 About the virtual rack Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the input/output of the rack. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously to access the VIRTUAL RACK screen. In the VIRTUAL RACK screen you can mount GEQ or effects, and make input/output settings. D INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can select the input source for the rack. E Virtual rack This area shows eight virtual racks in which GEQ or effects can be mounted. Racks 1–4 are only for GEQ, and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5– 8. (However depending on the type of internal effect, some can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7.) When you move the cursor to a virtual rack and press the [ENTER] key, the result will depend on whether a GEQ or effect is already mounted. ● If a GEQ/effect is already mounted in that HINT rack • If you press only the [RACK 1-4] key or the [RACK 5-8] key, the setting screen (RACK 1–RACK 8 screens) for the rack you operated most recently will appear. To ensure that you access the desired screen, hold down one of the keys and then press the other key. The RACK 1–RACK 8 screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect. ● If the rack is vacant The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear, allowing you to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. The screen contains the following items. 1 F OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can select the output destination of the rack. 2 2 To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack, move 3 the cursor to the RACK button for that rack and press the [ENTER] key. The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear. 3 4 5 1 2 6 1 GEQ/EFFECT field In this field you can mount GEQ or effects in racks 1– 8, and edit the input/output patching for each rack. 4 5 B RACK button This displays the RACK MOUNT popup window, where you can select an item to mount in the rack. Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at the immediate right. 1 Rack number This indicates the number of the selected rack. C SAFE button B Virtual rack This is the virtual rack in which you can mount a GEQ or effect. This button switches Recall Safe on/off for the rack. Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at the immediate right. 158 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual About the virtual rack C MODULE SELECT buttons Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following function. ● BLANK button Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the rack will be empty. 4 To select the input source for a rack, move the cursor to the INPUT button for that rack and press the [ENTER] key. The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input source for the rack. ● 31 Band GEQ button Mounts a 31 Band GEQ in the rack. ● Flex15GEQ button 1 Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack. ● EFFECT button Mounts an effect in the rack. This button will not operate for racks 1–4. 2 HINT • Input/output patching will be cleared if you change the item that is mounted or remove the mounted item. E OK button Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window. NOTE • Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the window, all parameter settings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the settings by mounting the same GEQ or effect once again. HINT • You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by moving the cursor to a vacant rack in the GEQ/EFFECT field and pressing the [ENTER] key. 1 Channel select tabs These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown in the lower part of the window. B Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the input source. Use the three tabs to switch between groups of input sources shown in the window. C CLOSE button Closes the popup window. The following input sources can be selected in this popup window. Tab name Button name MIX channel 1–16 outputs MTRX 1–8 MATRIX channel 1–8 outputs ST L, ST R, MONO STEREO (L/R) channel output, MONO (C) channel output CH 1–32 INPUT channel 1–32 Insert Outs MIX 1–16 MIX channel 1–16 Insert Outs MTRX 1–8 MATRIX channel 1–8 Insert Outs ST L, ST R, MONO STEREO (L/R) channel Insert Out, MONO (C) channel Insert Out OUT CH (*1) 3 Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to mount, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. CH 1-32 (INSERT OUT) OUT CH (INSERT OUT) Input source MIX 1–16 *1: This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ. HINT 17 Graphic EQ and effects D CANCEL button Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window. 3 • If you select Insert Out of a channel as the input source for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ, the Insert In of that same channel will automatically be selected as the output destination for that rack. When you defeat an Insert Out, the Insert In will also be defeated automatically. For details on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (→ p. 101). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 159 About the virtual rack 5 Switch the tabs as necessary, and select the input source that you want to use. When you select an input source in the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the change in patching. To confirm the operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The following output destinations can be selected in this popup window (multiple selections are allowed). Tab name • If you selected 31 Band GEQ, you’ll be able to select one channel of input; otherwise you’ll be able to select two channels of input. 6 Move the cursor to the OUTPUT button for Output destination CH 1–32 INPUT channel 1–32 inputs CH33-64 (*1) (LS9-32 only) CH 33–64 INPUT channel 33–64 inputs STIN (*1) STIN1L/1R– 4L/4R ST IN channel 1–4 inputs CH 1-32 (INSERT OUT) CH 1–32 INPUT channel 1–32 Insert In HINT • You have the option of making settings so that the patch change confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194). Button name CH 1-32 (*1) OUT CH (INSERT OUT) MIX 1–16 MIX channel 1–16 Insert In MTRX 1–8 MATRIX channel 1–8 Insert In ST L, ST R, MONO STEREO (L/R) channel Insert In, MONO (C) channel Insert In *1: This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ. that rack, and press the [ENTER] key. The INPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output destination for the rack. HINT • If you selected the Insert In of a certain channel as the output destination for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ, the Insert Out of the same channel will automatically be selected as the input source of that rack. When you defeat an Insert In, the Insert Out will also be defeated automatically. 7 Switch the tabs as necessary, and select 1 the output destination that you want to use. When you select an output destination in the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patching change. To confirm the operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. 2 HINT 3 1 Channel select tabs These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown in the lower part of the window. B Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the output destination. C CLOSE button Closes the popup window. • You have the option of making settings so that the patch change confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194). • You can specify multiple output destinations for a rack. • If you selected 31 Band GEQ, you’ll be able to select one channel of output; otherwise you’ll be able to select two channels of output. 8 To turn Recall Safe on/off, move the cursor to the SAFE button for that rack and press the [ENTER] key. If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack, the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more about Recall Safe, refer to “Using the Recall Safe function” (→ p. 140). HINT • The type of GEQ or effect mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input-source/output-destination settings are saved as part of the scene. 160 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Graphic EQ operations Graphic EQ operations About the graphic EQ Inserting a GEQ in a channel The LS9 lets you mount a GEQ in racks 1–8 and patch it to the insert-out/in of a channel. You can use the top panel faders and [ON] keys to operate the amount of boost/cut for each band. The following two types of GEQ are provided. The LS9’s GEQ units can be patched to the insert-in/out of any channel except the ST IN channels. Here’s how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use. 1 As described in steps 1–3 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158), mount a GEQ in a rack. ● 31 Band GEQ This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, the adjustable boost/cut range is ±15 dB, and the amount of boost/cut for each of the thirty-one bands can be adjusted. If a 31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of input and output can be used for that rack. INPUT The GEQ/EFFECT field shows the approximate settings and input/output levels of the GEQ. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B). OUTPUT Rack 31 Band GEQ ● Flex15GEQ INPUT OUTPUT 2 1 3 1 Racks B INPUT buttons C OUTPUT buttons HINT • If you’re using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ in one rack, or mount two 31 Band GEQ units in adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units later. Rack Flex15GEQ (A) Flex15GEQ (B) 2 Use the INPUT button to open the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the input-source for the rack, and choose the insert-out of the desired channel. The insert-out will be assigned to the input of the GEQ. (For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window → p. 159) 17 Graphic EQ and effects This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, and the adjustable boost/cut range is ±15 dB. The Flex 15GEQ lets you adjust the boost/cut amount for any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31 Band GEQ. (Once you’ve used up fifteen bands of adjustment, you won’t be able to adjust the boost/cut amount of another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.) A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output. If you mount a Flex15GEQ in each rack, you’ll be able to use up to sixteen GEQ units simultaneously. HINT • If you select the Insert Out of a certain channel as the input source, the Insert In of that same channel will automatically be selected as the output destination for that rack. For details on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (→ p. 101). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 161 Graphic EQ operations 3 Use the OUTPUT button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window where you can select the output-destination for the rack, and choose the insert-in to which you want to assign the output of the GEQ (multiple selections are allowed). The insert-in will be assigned to the output of the GEQ. (For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup window → p. 160) HINT • If you select the Insert In of a certain channel as the output source, the Insert Out of that same channel will automatically be selected as the input source for that rack. 4 In the GEQ/EFFECT field, move the cursor to the rack in which you mounted the GEQ and press the [ENTER] key. The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or effect. E GEQ LINK button This button links adjacent GEQ units. In the case of a 31 band GEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same rack will be linked. NOTE • The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. 5 If you want to link two GEQ units, turn on the GEQ LINK button. If you’ve selected 31 Band GEQ for two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered racks, or if you’ve selected a Flex15GEQ, you can use the GEQ LINK button to link the two GEQ units. This is convenient when you want to process a stereo source through GEQ units with identical settings. When you turn the GEQ LINK button on, a popup window like the following will appear. The popup window contains the following items. HINT • You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the [RACK 1-4] key or [RACK 5-8] key. By repeatedly pressing the [RACK 1-4] key you can access the RACK 1–4 screens, and by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key you can access the RACK 5–8 screens and EXTERNAL HA screen. • The RACK screens for the 31 Band GEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 RACK x→y button (“x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and the alphabetical characters A or B) The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked. B RACK y→x button The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked. C RESET BOTH button The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked. D CANCEL button Cancels the link and closes the popup window. 1 GEQ ON/OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off. B FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB. To confirm the link, move the cursor to a button other than CANCEL, and press the [ENTER] key. When you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ/ EFFECT field to indicate the linked status. C INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field. D OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field. 162 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Symbol indicating linked status Graphic EQ operations 6 To turn on the GEQ, move the cursor to the GEQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key. After you’ve turned the GEQ on, adjust the bands of the GEQ. For details on operating the GEQ, refer to “Using the 31 Band GEQ” (below) or “Using the Flex15GEQ” (→ p. 164). 7 Check whether INSERT is turned on for the patched channel. For details, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (→ p. 101). 1 EQ graph This indicates the approximate response of the current 31 Band GEQ settings. B Faders These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each band of the 31 Band GEQ. The frequency and value for the fader currently selected by the cursor are shown below the fader. C FADER ASSIGN field Use this field when you want to operate the boost/cut amount for each band using the top panel faders. D GEQ ON/OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off. E FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB. Using the 31 Band GEQ Here we will explain how to use the 31 Band GEQ. 1 As described in steps 1–3 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158), mount a GEQ in a rack. A rack in which a 31 Band GEQ is mounted will show the approximate settings. F INPUT button This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can select the input source of the rack. G OUTPUT button This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, where you can select the output destination of the rack. H GEQ LINK button This button links adjacent GEQ units. NOTE 2 In the GEQ/EFFECT field, move the cursor to the rack in which you mounted the GEQ and press the [ENTER] key. The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ. You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the [RACK 1-4] key or [RACK 5-8] key. By repeatedly pressing the [RACK 1-4] key you can access the RACK 1–4 screens, and by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key you can access the RACK 5–8 screens and EXTERNAL HA screen. 4 5 6 7 8 • The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. For a 31 Band GEQ, this button is displayed if a 31 Band GEQ is mounted in two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. 3 After you’ve set the input-source and out- put-destination correctly, use the GEQ ON/ OFF button to turn on the 31-band GEQ. 4 To adjust the boost/cut of each band, move the cursor to the desired fader and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. 5 If you want to use the top panel faders to adjust the boost/cut of each band, proceed as follows. 1 Move the cursor to the button in the FADER ASSIGN field and press the [ENTER] key. When this button is turned on, the faders in the screen will turn white, and you will be able to use the top panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands. 1 17 Graphic EQ and effects Rack image display 2 3 LS9-32 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 163 Graphic EQ operations ● For the LS9-16 On the LS9-16, the bands that can be controlled will depend on the button you selected. In order to adjust all of the bands, you’ll need to switch these buttons as you work. Button name Bands [20-630] button 16 bands from 20 Hz–630 Hz [125-4k] button 16 bands from 125 Hz–4 KHz [630-20k] button 16 bands from 630 Hz–20 KHz 6 If you want to copy the currently-displayed 31 Band GEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the screen. For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” (→ p. 35). NOTE • If a 31 Band GEQ is using 15 or fewer bands, its settings can also be copied to a Flex15GEQ. HINT • GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the dedicated library (→ p. 174). Using the Flex15GEQ Here we will explain how to use the Flex15GEQ. 1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect ● For the LS9-32 Only the [20-20k] button can be selected. When this button is on, you can use the top panel faders 1–31 to operate all 31 bands. in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount a GEQ in a rack. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B). B Operate the faders. The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut. 1 2 3 HINT • When a top panel fader is in the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key will go dark. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower the fader even lightly, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band is being modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state. C When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the button(s) of the FADER ASSIGN field. The top panel faders and [ON] keys will return to their previous function. HINT • If a button in the FADER ASSIGN field is on, switching the display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top panel fader assignments. • However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders. • FADER ASSIGN on/off settings apply to all GEQ units together. 164 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 1 GEQ (A) B GEQ (B) C Rack graphic display area HINT • When you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31 Band GEQ units (A and B) are placed in a single rack. However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit. 2 Move the cursor to a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, and press the [ENTER] key. The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of GEQ (A) or GEQ (B). To switch the RACK screen, repeatedly press the [RACK 1-4] keys (RACK 1–4 screens) or [RACK 5-8] key (RACK 5–8 screens / EXTERNAL HA screens). For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the RACK screen is shown separately as xA and xB (x is the rack number). Graphic EQ operations 4 5 Remaining number of bands 1 2 5 If you want to use the top panel faders to adjust the boost/cut of each band, proceed as follows. 1 Move the cursor to the button in the 1 EQ graph This indicates the approximate response of the current Flex15GEQ settings. B Faders These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each band of the Flex15GEQ. The frequency and value for the fader currently selected by the cursor are shown below the fader. C FADER ASSIGN field Use this field when you want to operate the boost/cut amount for each band using the faders. At the right side of “AVAILABLE BANDS,” there is always an indication of the remaining number of bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled for the current Flex15GEQ. D GEQ ON/OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off. E FLAT button This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB. 3 Use the [RACK 1-4] key (for RACK 1–4 screens) or the [RACK 5-8] key (for RACK 5–8 screens) to select either GEQ unit A or B, make the correct input-source and output-destination settings, and then turn on the Flex15GEQ. 4 To adjust the boost/cut of each band, move the cursor to the desired fader and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B), a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled. The remaining number of bands that can be controlled is shown at the right of “AVAILABLE BANDS” in the FADER ASSIGN field. If you have used all fifteen bands, you will have to return one of the used bands (i.e., a band for which a fader was raised or lowered) to the flat position before you can operate any other band. FADER ASSIGN field and press the [ENTER] key. For details on how operation and the buttons differ between models, refer to step 5 of “Using the 31 Band GEQ” (→ p. 163). When this button is turned on, the faders in the screen will turn white, and you will be able to use the top panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands. B Operate the faders. The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut. A maximum of 15 bands can be controlled. HINT • The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band is being modified. • To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key to make it go dark. C When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the button(s) of the FADER ASSIGN field. The top panel faders and [ON] keys will return to their previous function. HINT • If a button in the FADER ASSIGN field is on, switching the display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top panel fader assignments. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders. 6 If you want to copy the currently-displayed Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the screen. For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” (→ p. 35). 17 Graphic EQ and effects 3 HINT • GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the dedicated library (→ p. 174). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 165 About the internal effects About the internal effects The internal effects of the LS9 can be mounted in racks 5–8. For each mounted effect you can choose one of 48 effect types, and patch the effect to the output of an output channel or the input of an input channel, or insert it into a channel. With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 13–16 are input to racks 5–8, and output to ST IN 1–4 (L/R). NOTE • The internal effects cannot be mounted in racks 1–4. • Some effect types can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7. To use an internal effect via send/return, assign the output of a MIX channel etc. to the input of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding MIX bus is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is used as an effect return channel. ● STEREO type effects INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN ● MIX type effects Rack 5 INPUT L Rack 6 EFFECT Rack 7 EFFECT INPUT PATCH Output of the output channel OUTPUT PATCH EFFECT INPUT R If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. Rack 8 Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel. EFFECT Insert-in of a desired channel* * Except for a ST IN channel The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the two channels to monaural before processing them. If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows. 166 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual R RETURN Input of the input channel EFFECT Insert-out of a desired channel* L RETURN EFFECT INPUT L or R L RETURN EFFECT R RETURN About the internal effects Using an internal effect via send/ return Here we will explain how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send/return configuration. HINT • If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type (→ p. 213). This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel. • If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it is convenient to assign the send-source MIX bus to stereo (→ p. 213). 3 Use the OUTPUT L button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, and select the L input of the desired ST IN channel as the output-destination for the rack. The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect return channel will be assigned to the L output of the effect. For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158). If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output of the rack in the same way. HINT • You can select more than one output destination for the effect. 1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect 4 Move the cursor to a rack in which an effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount an effect in a rack. is mounted in the GEQ/EFFECT field, and press the [ENTER] key. A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off status. The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the effect. You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key. HINT • The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate the [RACK 5-8] key is used when you’re using an external head amp (→ p. 175). 1 1 2 4 3 1 Racks B INPUT buttons C OUTPUT buttons 2 Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT- PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack. The output of the MIX channel you’re using as the effect send will be assigned to the L input of the effect. For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 4 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158). If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs of the rack. 17 1 MIX BAL. knob This knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. B Input/output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect. Graphic EQ and effects 2 3 C INPUT L/R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field. D OUTPUT L/R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 167 About the internal effects 5 To change the mix balance of the original sound and effect sound, move the cursor to the MIX BAL. knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. The MIX BAL. knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. This parameter is provided for all effect types. If you’re using the effect via send/return, set this to 100% (effect sound only). HINT 8 To adjust the master level of the effect send, call up the fader layer that includes the MIX channel you specified as the inputsource of the rack in step 2, and adjust the corresponding fader. Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload point. 9 To adjust the effect return level, operate the encoder of the ST IN channel you selected as the output-destination of the rack in step 3. • For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170). 6 To adjust the effect send level of an input channel, press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and access the input channel that you want to control. 1 Inserting an internal effect into a channel Here we will explain how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). 1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect 2 in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount an effect in a rack. A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off status. 1 SEND field B TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob 7 Move the cursor to the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired MIX bus, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the send level. With these settings, the signal will be sent from the input channel to the internal effect. Adjust the send level of other input channels in the same way. By moving the cursor to the knob and pressing the [ENTER] key, you can switch the signal sent from each channel to the corresponding bus on/off, and access a popup window where you can choose the send point (PRE/POST) (→ p. 64). NOTE • Make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to 0. If you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing oscillation. 168 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 2 1 3 1 Racks B INPUT buttons C OUTPUT buttons 2 Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT- PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-out of a channel as the inputsource. Insert-out will be assigned to the L input of the effect. For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 4 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158). About the internal effects 3 Use the INPUT L button to open the INPUT CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the outputdestination. Insert-in will be assigned to the L output of the effect. If you are inserting in a channel that handles a stereo source, use the same procedure to assign the insertout/insert-in of the other channel to the R input and R output of the effect. 7 Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to access the RACK screen for the rack you inserted into the channel. In this screen you can edit the parameters of the effect. The screen contains the following items. 2 1 3 4 Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and access the channel into which you want to insert the effect. 5 Move the cursor to the INSERT popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the INSERT popup window. Make sure that the desired rack is selected for the input/output ports you’re using for the insertion. For details on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (→ p. 101). 1 Input/output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect. B INPUT L/R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field. 1 C OUTPUT L/R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field. 1 INSERT ON/OFF button HINT • The INSERT popup window also lets you change the insertout/in position within the channel. parameters. For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters.” HINT Make sure that the INSERT ON/OFF button is turned on for the channel into which you inserted the effect. If this is off, turn it on. In this state, effect insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel. • The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input/ output meters at the upper right of the RACK screen. NOTE • Adjust the insert out signal level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect. 9 Select the fader layer that includes the channel you selected in step 3 as the output destination of the rack, and operate the corresponding fader to adjust the level appropriately. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 17 Graphic EQ and effects 6 8 Select the effect type and edit the effect 169 About the internal effects Editing the internal effect parameters This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters. 1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect 1 Effect type field This shows the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown. If you move the cursor to the effect type graphic and press the [ENTER] key, the EFFECT TYPE popup window will appear, allowing you to select the effect type. in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3, mount an effect in a rack. B BYPASS button This button temporarily bypasses the effect. A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off status. C EFFECT CUE button This button cue-monitors the output of the currently displayed effect. This cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed. The cue will be cancelled automatically when you switch to a different screen. D Special parameter field This shows special parameters that are specific to some effect types. E Input/output meters These indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect. F INPUT L/R buttons These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window. 1 G OUTPUT L/R buttons These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup window. 2 H Effect parameter field This area shows parameters for the currently selected effect type. 1 Effect title/type B Bypass on/off status 2 Move the cursor to the rack in which the 3 If you want to change the effect type, pro- effect you want to edit is mounted, and press the [ENTER] key. ceed as follows. The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the effect. You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key. 1 Move the cursor to the effect type graphic, and press the [ENTER] key. The EFFECT TYPE popup window will appear. HINT • The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate the [RACK 5-8] key is used when you’re using an external head amp (→ p. 175). 1 2 6 4 5 7 CLOSE button 3 8 170 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual About the internal effects B Use the dial or the cursor keys to move the ● PLAY/REC cursor, and select the new effect type. You can move the cursor up or down to select a new type in steps of twelve. If you decide not to change the effect type, use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the CLOSE button, and press the [ENTER] key. This is shown if FREEZE is selected as the effect type. 1 C When you’ve selected a new effect type, press the [ENTER] key. The EFFECT TYPE popup window will close automatically, and the new effect is now available for use. HINT • You can also switch the effect type by recalling a library setting. 1 PLAY button / REC button These buttons are used to record (sample) and play back when using the freeze effect. For details on how to use this, refer to “Using the Freeze effect” (→ p. 173). ● SOLO • Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and FREEZE” can be used only in rack 5 or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 6 or 8. This is shown if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is selected as the effect type. 4 To edit the effect parameters, move the cur- 1 sor to the knobs in the effect parameter field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. HINT • For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual (→ p. 233). 5 Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary. For some effect types, parameters such as the following will appear in the special parameter field. ● TEMPO This is shown if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected. 1 2 2 1 HIGH/MID/LOW buttons These buttons pass only the selected frequency band (multiple selections are allowed). B Gain reduction meters These show the amount of gain reduction for each band. 6 If you want to monitor only the output sig- nal of the currently displayed effect, press the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on. HINT • If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE mode (in which all channels whose [CUE] keys are on will be mixed for monitoring), only the output signal of the effect will be monitored when you turn on the EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.) 7 If you want to bypass the currently dis- played effect, turn the BYPASS button on. 1 MIDI CLK button If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the currentlyenabled MIDI port. B BPM knob This knob sets the BPM parameter manually. You can also assign the Tap Tempo function to a userdefined key, and set the BPM using it (→ p. 172). 8 If you want to copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the screen. 17 Graphic EQ and effects NOTE For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” (→ p. 35). HINT • Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library (→ p. 174). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 171 About the internal effects Using the Tap Tempo function “Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. To use the Tap function, you must first assign Tap Tempo to a user-defined key, and then operate that user-defined key. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen within the SETUP screens. 4 Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION col- umn, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. To select an item in each column, move the cursor to the desired column and use the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key; the Tap Tempo function will be assigned to the user-defined key you selected in step 3, and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP page. 1 HINT • If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currentlyshown effect (rack). 1 USER DEFINED KEYS popup button 2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED KEYS popup button and press the [ENTER] key to access the USER DEFINED KEYS popup window. The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you assign functions to user defined keys [1]–[12]. • If you specify “RACK x” (x=5–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used only for a specific effect (rack). • For more about user-defined keys, refer to “User-defined keys” (→ p. 196). 5 Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to access the RACK screen for the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted. 6 Select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter. For details on selecting the effect type, refer to step 3 of “Editing the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170). The BPM parameter is shown in the special parameter field. It is included in delay-type and modulation-type effects, and can be used to specify the delay time or modulation speed. 1 1 User defined keys popup buttons 1 3 Move the cursor to the popup button for the user-defined key to which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function, and press the [ENTER] key. The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear. 1 BPM parameter 172 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual About the internal effects 4 Select “FREEZE” as the effect type. HINT • For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual (→ p. 233). 7 At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the For details on selecting the effect type, refer to step 3 of “Editing the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170). If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar are shown in the special parameter field. user-defined key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function. 1 2 3 The average interval (BPM) at which you press the key will be calculated, and that value will be reflected by the BPM parameter. The average interval will be input (the average of a, b, and c) a First tap b Second tap c Third tap Fourth tap HINT • If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored. • If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will change according to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the currentlyenabled MIDI port. 1 PLAY button B REC button C Progress bar HINT • As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall settings that use the “FREEZE” effect type from the effect library. 5 To begin recording (sampling), turn on the REC button to make it light, and then turn on the PLAY button. Here’s how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations in the screen to record (sample) and play back a sound. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously to access the VIRTUAL RACK screen. 2 Mount an effect in rack 5 or rack 7. The signal being input to the effect will be recorded. The progress bar shows the current recording location. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off. HINT • You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed settings for recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For details on the parameters, refer to the supplementary material at the end of this manual (→ p. 233). 6 To play back the recorded sample, move the cursor to the PLAY button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 5 or 7. NOTE 17 Graphic EQ and effects Using the Freeze effect • If, after recording, you turn on the REC button again to enter record-ready mode, the sampled content will be erased. 3 Move the cursor to the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted, and press the [ENTER] key. The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the effect. You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 173 Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall graphic EQ and effect settings. GEQ library Effect library Use the “GEQ library” to store and recall GEQ settings. This GEQ library can be referenced by all GEQ units used in the LS9. (However, the 31 Band GEQ and Flex15GEQ are different types. You cannot recall a GEQ library item of a different type.) 200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is read-only, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written. To access the GEQ library, move the cursor to the LIB toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when a GEQ is shown in the RACK screen, and press the [ENTER] key. Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Library items 1–48 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect types 1–48 respectively. Library items 49–57 are reserved for use by the system. Other library item numbers can be freely read and written. To access the effect library, move the cursor to the LIB toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when an effect is shown in a RACK 5–8 screen, and press the [ENTER] key. 1 1 1 LIB button 1 LIB button For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries” (→ p. 35). NOTE • Store/recall operations are performed on individual racks. You can’t individually store/recall two Flex15GEQ units that are mounted in the same rack. For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries” (→ p. 35). NOTE • Library items using the “HQ.PITCH” or “FREEZE” effect types can be recalled only into rack 5 or 7. They cannot be recalled into rack 6 or 8. HINT • You can also use MIDI messages (program changes) to recall effect settings from the library (→ p. 180). 174 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using an external head amp Using an external head amp If an I/O card (expected to go on sale in the future) that supports the external head amp (Yamaha AD8HR) remote protocol is installed in an LS9 slot, you’ll be able to remotely control parameters such as the external head amp’s phantom power (+48V) on/off, gain, and HPF from the LS9. For an example of actual connections, refer to the owner’s manual of the I/O card. Remotely controlling an external head amp Here’s how to control the external head amp (subsequently called “external HA”) from the LS9 via an I/O card installed in a slot. 1 Connect the LS9 and external HA. Refer to the owner’s manual for the I/O card and for the external head amp. 2 Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to access the EXTERNAL HA screen. The EXTERNAL HA screen includes the following items. 1 B ID / Model name / +48V master This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is assigned automatically as 1 to 2 {1 to 4} in the order in which devices are connected to the I/O card. This area also shows the on/off status of the master phantom power. C Virtual racks These are two {four} racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be mounted. If an external HA is mounted, its settings (gain setting, phantom power on/off, HPF on/off) are shown. When you move the cursor to a rack and press the [ENTER] key, the EXTERNAL HA popup window for that rack will appear. D EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button This button accesses the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window, where you can specify the input ports to which the external HA mounted in the rack will be connected. 3 To select the communication port for the I/O card, move the cursor to the COMM PORT box, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select a port, and press the [ENTER] key. 4 To specify the input ports for an external HA, move the cursor to the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button for that rack, and press the [ENTER] key. 3 4 1 COMM PORT box This box lets you select the communication port for the currently-installed I/O card(s). 1 2 NOTE • When installing an MY16-ES64 or similar EtherSound interface card in an LS9-32, be sure to install it in SLOT 1. ● SLOT {SLOT1} Select the communication port for the I/O card installed in the slot {slot 1}. ● SLOT2 (LS9-32 only) Select the communication port for the I/O card installed in slot 2. 17 Graphic EQ and effects 2 The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window will appear. The popup window includes the following items. 1 PORT SELECT buttons These buttons specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected. B NO ASSIGN button This button defeats the port selection. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 175 Using an external head amp 5 Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected. 7 To remotely control the external HA in an LS9 input channel, press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and access the channel that you want to control. When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. 1 NOTE • If an external HA is connected to one of the LS9’s slots, you must specify the appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels. 6 To remotely control an external HA, move the cursor to the rack in which the external HA you want to control is mounted, and press the [ENTER] key. The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear. Here you can remotely control the external HA by using the knobs and buttons in the LS9’s display or the dial etc. of the top panel. 1 HA popup button 2 8 Move the cursor to the HA popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the HA/PATCH popup window. 1 3 4 1 5 1 Rack select buttons These switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window. B +48V MASTER If an external HA is connected to the REMOTE connector, the on/off status of the master phantom power is shown here. (Switching this on/off is performed on the external HA itself.) C +48V buttons These switch phantom power on/off for each channel. D GAIN knobs These indicate the gain of the external HA. Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting. E HPF knobs / ON buttons These controls switch the external HA’s built-in highpass filter on/off, and adjust its cutoff frequency. HINT • When you newly connect an AD8HR, the above screen will reflect the state of the AD8HR’s settings. • Since the above knobs and buttons will be shown even if an AD8HR is not connected, you can use them to make settings even without the AD8HR, and store these settings in a scene. 176 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 1 Input port popup button 9 Press the input port popup button, and select the input port assigned to the external HA. With these settings, the external HA can be used in the same way as the LS9’s own HA. For details on the HA/PATCH popup window, refer to “HA (head amp) settings” (→ p. 57). HINT • Settings for the external HA are saved as part of the scene (However, master phantom on/off, HPF on/off, and cutoff frequency settings are excepted). • When you adjust the brightness of the LS9’s panel LEDs, this will also affect the LEDs of the external HA. Chapter 18 MIDI This chapter explains how MIDI messages can be transmitted from an external device to control the LS9’s parameters, and conversely how operations on the LS9 can be transmitted as MIDI messages. MIDI functionality on the LS9 The LS9 can use MIDI to perform the following operations. ● Program Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the LS9, a program change message of the corresponding number can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device. ● Control Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (fader/encoder or key operation) on the LS9, the corresponding control change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when control change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later. ● Parameter change (SysEx) transmission and reception When specific events (fader/encoder or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed on the LS9, “parameter change” system exclusive messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when parameter changes are received from an external device. Using this capability, LS9 operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, or changes in system settings and user settings can be reflected on another LS9 console. NOTE • As the MIDI port used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages, you can select either the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in the slot {1, 2}. (If you select an I/O card, you can also select a port number.) All of the above functionality will be common to the selected port. • MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages can be received to control the transport of the USB memory recorder. MIDI 18 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 177 Basic MIDI settings Basic MIDI settings Here’s how to select the type of MIDI messages the LS9 will transmit and receive, the MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen within the SETUP screens. MIDI SETUP popup button C Channel select box Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the MIDI message transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel. D PROGRAM CHANGE field Here you can make settings for program change transmission and reception. ● Tx button Switches program change transmission on/off. ● Rx button Switches program change reception on/off. ● ECHO button This selects whether incoming program changes are echoed-out from the transmission port. HINT 2 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window. 2 3 5 7 • For details on how to assign the scene or effect for each program number, refer to “Using program changes to recall scenes and library items” (→ p. 180). E PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the program change transmit/ receive mode. ● SINGLE button If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel. 1 ● OMNI button If this button is on, program changes of all MIDI channels will be received in Single mode. (Multi mode transmission/reception and Single mode transmission are disabled.) 4 6 8 ● BANK button 9 If this button is on, bank select messages can be transmitted and received in Single mode. (This is disabled for Multi mode transmission/reception.) In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose the port that will be used. This page includes the following items. 1 PORT/CH field Here you can select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. If MIDI messages are being transmitted or received, the SIGNAL indicators at the top of this field will light. B Port select box Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the MIDI message transmit (Tx) port and receive (Rx) port. If you select the same port as used by another function such as cascade link or HA remote, a confirmation dialog box will appear. If you select OK, the port setting for the other function will be disabled. 178 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ● MULTI button If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode). F CONTROL CHANGE field Here you can make settings for control change transmission/reception. ● Tx button Switches control change transmission on/off. ● Rx button Switches control change reception on/off. ● ECHO button This selects whether incoming control changes are echoed-out from the transmission port. Basic MIDI settings G CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the control change transmission/ reception mode. ● NRPN button If this button is on, the LS9’s mix parameters will be transmitted/received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode). 4 To specify the channel (CH1–CH16) on which MIDI messages will be transmitted or received, move the cursor to the channel selection box, use the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys to specify the setting, and press the [ENTER] key. ● TABLE button If this button is on, the LS9’s mix parameters will be transmitted/received as control change messages on one MIDI channel (TABLE mode). H PARAMETER CHANGE field Here you can make settings for transmission/reception of “parameter change” system exclusive messages. ● Tx button Switches parameter change transmission on/off. HINT • When transmitting or receiving parameter changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit). 5 Turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI message. ● Rx button Switches parameter change reception on/off. ● ECHO button This selects whether incoming parameter changes are echoed-out from the transmission port. HINT • For details on using program changes, refer to “Using program changes to recall scenes and library items,” below. • For details on using control changes, refer to “Using control changes to control parameters” (→ p. 183). I OTHER COMMAND field Here you can specify how MIDI messages other than program changes, control changes, and parameter changes (i.e., messages such as note-on/off and MIDI timing clock) will be received. ● ECHO button Selects whether other MIDI messages that are received will be echoed out from the transmit port. 3 To specify the port that will transmit or receive each type of MIDI message, move the cursor to the transmit (Tx) or receive (Rx) port selection box, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to specify the setting, and then press the [ENTER] key. 18 Item MIDI You can choose from the following items. Description ---- No port will be used. MIDI Rear panel MIDI IN (Rx) / OUT (Tx) connector SLOT {1/2} -1–8 (The number of available ports will depend on the card that is installed.) A card that supports serial transmission, installed in a rear panel slot {1/2} (MY16-CII is valid in SLOT {1–2}) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 179 Using program changes to recall scenes and library items Using program changes to recall scenes and library items The LS9 lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each program change number, so that when this event is executed on the LS9, a program change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device. 1 Connect the LS9 to your external device. The following illustration shows an example of using the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT external device 6 Move the cursor to the PROGRAM CHANGE popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the PROGRAM CHANGE popup window. In the PROGRAM CHANGE popup window you can specify how program changes will be transmitted and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned to each program number. This page includes the following items. 1 2 LS9 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the 3 [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen. 4 5 1 PROGRAM CHANGE field Here you can switch program change transmission/ reception on/off, and specify whether program changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP popup window. 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window. 4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→ p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit/receive program changes. 5 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. You will return to the MISC SETUP screen. 180 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual B PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the program change transmit/ receive mode. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP page popup window. C List This list shows the event (scene recall / effect library recall) assigned to each program number. The list shows the following items. ● CH/BANK Indicates the MIDI channel 1–16 on which program changes are transmitted/received. In Single mode if the BANK button is on, this will be labeled BANK, and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number. ● NO. Indicates the program number 1–128. Using program changes to recall scenes and library items Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to the program number for each MIDI channel (bank number). By pressing the popup button for an individual event, you can access the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window, where you can change the assignment for each program number. D CLEAR ALL button Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in the list. E INITIALIZE ALL button Pressing this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state. 7 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the program change transmission/reception mode. You can select one of the following two program change transmission/reception modes. ● Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on) Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP popup window will be ignored.) When a program change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed. When you execute the specified event on the LS9, the program change of the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be transmitted. ● Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on) Only program changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the MIDI SETUP popup window will be transmitted and received. When a program change on the Rx channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed. When you execute a specific event on the LS9, the program change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.) If you turn on the OMNI button / BANK button in Single mode, operation will change as follows. ● When the OMNI button is on Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for program change transmission. ● When the BANK button is on The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and bank select (control change #0, #32) + program change messages can be transmitted and received. This is convenient when you want to control more than 128 events on a single MIDI channel. When bank select and then program change messages (in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed. When you execute a specific event on the LS9, bank select + program change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.) NOTE • The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode. • If the BANK button is on and only a program change on an applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank number will be used. HINT • If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case, bank select + program change messages of all MIDI channels will be received. 8 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on/ off, and make settings for echo output. This field includes the following items. ● Tx button 18 MIDI ● PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT Switches program change transmission on/off. ● Rx button Switches program change reception on/off. ● ECHO button This selects whether incoming program changes are echoed-out from the transmission port. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 181 Using program changes to recall scenes and library items 9 To change the event assignment for each program number, move the cursor to the popup button for the corresponding event in the list, and press the [ENTER] key. The PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window will appear. In this window you can specify the event assigned to each program number. This popup window contains the following items. 1 2 11 Assign events to other program numbers in the same way. With these settings, executing the specified event on the LS9 will cause the corresponding program change (or bank select + program change) message to be transmitted to the external device. When an external device transmits a program change (or bank select + program change) message on the appropriate channel, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding MIDI channel (or bank number) will be executed. HINT • You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to program numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all program number assignments to their default state. • Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes. NOTE 1 TYPE field Select the type of event. The following table lists the events you can select. Item NO ASSIGN Content No assignment SCENE Scene memory recall operations RACK 5–8 Effect library recall operations for racks 5–8 (only if an effect is mounted) B LIBRARY NAME field Select the number and title of the scene or library item to recall. If you selected SCENE in the TYPE field, this shows the scene number and its title. If you selected RACK 5–8, this shows the library number and its title. 10 Use the TYPE field to select the type of event you want to assign, and use the LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene/ library number that will be recalled. To select an item, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to finalize the changes and close the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window. 182 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual • In Single mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one program number on a Tx channel, only the lowest program number will be transmitted. (If the BANK button is on, only the program number of the lowest bank number will be transmitted.) • In Multi mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one MIDI channel and more than one program number, only the lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted. Using control changes to control parameters Using control changes to control parameters You can use MIDI control change messages to control specified events (fader/encoder operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the LS9. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later. You can use control changes to control events in either of the following two ways. ● Using control changes This method uses typical control changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely assign an event to each control number. ● Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) This method uses a special type of control change messages called NRPN. NRPN uses control change numbers 62 and 63 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted control change messages of control change number 6 (or 6 and 26) to specify the value of that parameter. The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed. HINT • For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the appendix (→ p. 253). 1 Connect the LS9 to your external device. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen. 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window. 4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→ p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit/receive control changes. 6 Move the cursor to the CONTROL CHANGE popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the CONTROL CHANGE popup window. In the CONTROL CHANGE popup window you can specify how control changes will be transmitted and received, and assign the event (fader/encoder operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. This page includes the following items. 1 2 5 When you’ve finished making settings, 3 You will return to the MISC SETUP screen. 4 5 18 MIDI move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. 1 CONTROL CHANGE field Here you can switch control change transmission/ reception on/off, and specify whether control changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP popup window. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 183 Using control changes to control parameters B CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Here you can select the control change transmission/ reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP popup window. C List This list shows the event (fader/encoder pattern, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. 9 To change the event assignment for each control number, move the cursor to the popup button for the corresponding event in the list, and press the [ENTER] key. The CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window will appear. In this window you can specify the event assigned to each control number. The window contains the following items. 1 ● NO. 2 This indicates the control number. You can use control numbers 1–31, 33–95, and 102–119. ● CONTROL CHANGE EVENT Indicates/selects the type of event assigned to each control number. When you press the popup button for an event, the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window will appear, allowing you to change the control number assignment. D CLEAR ALL button Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in the list. E INITIALIZE ALL button Pressing this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state. 7 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field to select the control change transmission/reception mode. You can choose one of the following two modes for control change transmission/reception. ● NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on) The LS9’s various mix parameters will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the list will be ignored. ● TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on) The LS9’s various mix parameters will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as control change messages. HINT • The channel on which control changes are transmitted and received is specified by the MIDI SETUP popup window PORT/CH field (→ p. 178). 8 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on/ off, and make settings for echo output. Each button has the following function. ● Tx button Switches control change transmission on/off. ● Rx button Switches control change reception on/off. ● ECHO button This selects whether incoming control changes are echoed-out from the transmission port. 184 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 1 MODE field Select the type of event. B PARAMETER 1/2 field In conjunction with the MODE field, this specifies the type of event. NOTE • If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored. HINT • For details on the events that can be assigned to control changes, refer to the appendix (→ p. 249). 10 In the order of the MODE field → PARAMETER 1 field → PARAMETER 2 field, specify the type of event you want to assign. To select an item, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to finalize the changes and close the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window. 11 Assign events to other control numbers in the same way. When you operate the parameters you assigned on the LS9, control change messages will be transmitted to external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding control change messages are sent from an external device on the appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to those control numbers will change. HINT • You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to control numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all control number assignments to their default state. • Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes. Using parameter changes to control parameters Using parameter changes to control parameters On the LS9, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “parameter changes” to control specific events (fader/encoder operations, [ON] key on/off operations, etc.) as an alternative to using control changes or NRPN messages. For details on the parameter changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI Data Format” in the appendix. 1 Connect the LS9 to your external device. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen. 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window. 4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→ p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels (device numbers) that will be used to transmit/receive parameter changes. NOTE • Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device. The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number. • Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted parameter change does not match the device number of the receiving LS9 console, the message will be ignored. • If parameter change and control change transmission/reception are turned on at the same time, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and cause overflows or other problems, so you should avoid this. 5 Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on parameter change transmission/reception. In this state when you operate specific parameters on the LS9, the corresponding parameter change messages will be transmitted. If valid parameter change messages are transmitted from an external device, the parameters assigned to those parameter changes will be controlled. MIDI 18 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 185 Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) to operate the USB memory recorder Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) to operate the USB memory recorder You can use MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages to operate the LS9’s USB memory recorder from an external device. MMC is only received (not transmitted). For details on the MMC messages that can be received, refer to “MIDI Data Format” in the appendix. 1 Connect the LS9 to your external device. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen within the SETUP screens. 3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the MIDI SETUP popup window. 4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→ p. 178), select the port and MIDI channel (device number) that will be used to receive MMC messages. NOTE • MMC messages include a “device number” that specifies the receiving device. The receive (Rx) channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page is used as the device number. • Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted MMC message does not match the device number of the receiving LS9 console, the message will be ignored. 5 Prepare the USB memory recorder for use. For details on using the USB memory recorder, see p.105. In this state, an external device will be able to control operations such as play, record, stop, and pause on the LS9’s USB memory recorder. The following MMC commands are supported. Command MMC# Stop 01 Stop playback or recording. 02 Begins playback of the selected file. The file to be played can be selected beforehand in the TITLE LIST screen, or the desired track number can be selected using a MIDI Song Select message (F3). 03 Begins playback of the selected file. The file to be played can be selected beforehand in the TITLE LIST screen, or the desired track number can be selected using a MIDI Song Select message (F3). Play Play 186 Content Record 06 Begins recording. Pause 09 Pauses playback or recording. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 19 User settings (Security) This chapter explains the User Level settings that allow restrictions on the parameters that can be operated by each user, the Console Lock function that temporarily disables operation of the console, the Preferences settings that allow the operating environment to be customized, and Save/Load operations using USB memory. User Level settings User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that be operated by each user, or to change the settings of the custom fader layer, user-defined keys, and preference settings for each user. Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” on USB memory, allowing users to be switched easily, simply by connecting the memory device to a USB connector. This is convenient in the following situations. • Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented. • The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited. • In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be locked to prevent unintended operations. • Preferences of each operator can easily be switched. User types and user authentication keys There are three types of user, as follows. In order to operate the LS9, you must log-in as some type of user. ● Administrator This is the administrator of the LS9, and can use all of its functionality. Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users. ● Guest ● User A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. User settings are saved on USB memory as a user authentication key. Multiple sets of User settings can be saved with different user names. Custom fader layer, user-defined key, and preference settings can be edited, and these settings stored in the user authentication key. In addition, a User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level. When a user logs on, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information. • • • • 19 User settings (Security) A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. Only one set of Guest settings is internally maintained in the console. Password (except for Guest) User level (except for Administrator) Preferences User-defined keys LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 187 User Level settings Privileges for each user are as follows. Logged-in user Administrator Custom fader layer / userdefined keys / preference setting editing User Level setting Comment editing Available (Can edit the settings for Administrator and for Guest.) Available (Cannot edit the user level, since the administrator can always perform all operations. Can edit the user level for Guest.) Available — Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Power user User User authentication key (USB memory) Password setting Create new Overwrite-save — Normal user (a user without Power User privileges) Available N/A (View only) Available Available — Available (Only settings other than User Level) Guest Available N/A (View only) — Available — — Setting the Administrator password With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. PASSWORD CHANGE popup button 3 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field; then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The password can be up to eight characters. For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34) Creating a user authentication key Here’s how to create a user authentication key and save it on USB memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User. The user level can be specified when the authentication key is created, but the custom fader layer, user-defined key settings, and preference settings will be carried over from the user who is currently logged-in. 1 Connect USB memory to the USB connector. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. CREATE USER KEY button 2 Move the cursor to the PASSWORD CHANGE popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a password. 188 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual User Level settings 3 Move the cursor to the CREATE USER KEY button and press the [ENTER] key. The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear. 1 2 3 Logging-in In order to operate the LS9, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User. User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself, but in order to log in as a User you must connect USB memory on which a user authentication key has been saved. If you disconnect the USB memory after logging-in, your access privileges will forcibly revert to Guest. NOTE 4 1 USER NAME The user name of up to eight characters is shown (and can be edited) here. When you move the cursor to this field and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a user name (→ p. 34). B PASSWORD Specify a password of up to eight characters. Press this to access a keyboard window where you can enter the password (→ p. 34). • If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest. Similarly, you will also be forcibly logged-in as Guest if you had been logged-in as a user requiring a user authentication key, but USB memory is no longer connected. ● Logging-in as Administrator 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. Log-in popup button C POWER USER Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user. D Access permission settings These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on each item, refer to p.193. 4 When you have specified the user name, If you are logged-in as the Administrator, the user authentication key will be saved on USB memory. If you are logged-in as a Power User, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the store-destination USB memory. If you want to save the user authentication key on different USB memory, connect the desired USB memory and then press [OK]. 2 Move the cursor to the log-in popup button and press the [ENTER] key. The LOGIN popup window will appear. 19 User settings (Security) password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, move the cursor to the CREATE button and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 189 User Level settings 3 Move the cursor to the ADMINISTRATOR LOGIN button and press the [ENTER] key. If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. ● Logging-in as a User To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved on USB memory. You may also log-in using a user authentication key that was created on a different LS9 console. 1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 3 Move the cursor to the log-in popup button and press the [ENTER] key. The LOGIN popup window will appear. 4 Enter the password, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen. ● Logging-in as Guest 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 2 Move the cursor to the log-in popup button 4 Move the cursor to the LOAD USER KEY button and press the [ENTER] key. The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the files and folders saved on the USB memory will be displayed. User authentication keys have a file name of “User name.L9U”. and press the [ENTER] key. The LOGIN popup window will appear. 3 Move the cursor to the GUEST LOGIN button and press the [ENTER] key. File list LOAD button 5 Move the cursor to the file list, and turn the dial to select the user authentication key of the user as whom you want to log-in. The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations. For details on loading from USB memory, refer to “Loading a file from USB memory” (→ p. 200). 190 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual User Level settings press the [ENTER] key. If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. NOTE • If you select a user authentication key that was created on a different LS9 console, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the LS9 console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user. • If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time. (→ p. 192 Editing a user authentication key) 7 Enter the password, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen. Changing the password Here’s how to change the password of the logged-in user. A change in the Administrator password is updated immediately. A change in a User password will be discarded if the user simply logs-out; it must be applied to the user authentication key before the user logs-out. The Guest account does not have a password. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. PASSWORD CHANGE popup button 2 Move the cursor to the PASSWORD CHANGE popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. 19 User settings (Security) 6 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 191 User Level settings 3 Enter the current password, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). When you enter the correct password, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the new password. 3 Move the cursor to the SAVE KEY popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask whether you really want to overwrite (save) the user authentication key. 4 To overwrite (save), move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. HINT • If you attempt to log-in as a different user after changing the settings but not saving them, a message will ask you whether you want to save the user authentication key. In this case, you can also save the user authentication key by moving the cursor to the OK button and pressing the [ENTER] key. Changing the user level Here’s how to view/change the user level of the logged-in user. 4 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field; then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Editing a user authentication key If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your custom fader layer, user-defined keys, and preference settings, and overwrite (save) them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level. 1 Log-in as a user, and edit the custom fader layer (→ p. 91), user-defined keys (→ p. 196) and preference settings (→ p. 194). • For the Administrator ...............There is no such setting for the Administrator himself, but the setting for the Guest account can be changed. • For the Guest ..........The setting of the Guest account can be viewed. It cannot be changed. • For a normal User...The setting of that User account can be viewed. It cannot be changed. • For a Power User ....The setting of that User account can be changed. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. SAVE KEY popup button USER LEVEL popup button 2 Move the cursor to the USER LEVEL popup button and press the [ENTER] key to access the USER LEVEL popup window. NOTE • If you are logged in as Administrator, you can move the cursor to the “for Guest” USER LEVEL popup button and press the [ENTER] key to access the USER LEVEL popup window, where you can view or change the guest’s user level. 192 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual User Level settings 1 8 2 ● BUS SETUP Restricts operations for bus setup. ● RACK 1–8 Restricts operations for the racks (1–8). ● MUTE GROUP ASSIGN / MASTER Restricts operations for mute group assignment and mute group master. C SCENE LIST field This specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories. ● STORE / SORT operations 4 5 7 6 This page includes the following items. 1 CH OPERATION field Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input channels and output channels. The settings will apply to the currently selected channel. Use the panel [SEL] keys to select the channel for which you want to make settings. Channels that have the same settings are shown with the same color in the channel display field. The selected channel is shown with a frame around it. ● RECALL operations D LIBRARY LIST field This specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries. ● STORE / CLEAR operations ● RECALL operations E FILE LOAD field This specifies the types of file that can be loaded from USB memory. ● USER SETUP (user-defined keys and pref- erence settings) ● HA ● SYSTEM SETUP / MONITOR SETUP Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that channel. ● CURRENT SCENE ● PROCESSING ● LIBRARY LIST Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel (except for fader and [ON] key). HINT • For the channel parameters included in PROCESSING, refer to the appendix (→ p. 256). ● FADER / ON Restricts operation of that channel’s fader and [ON] key. ● SET BY SEL If this button is on, you can use the [SEL] keys of the panel to turn all settings of the corresponding channel on or off. B CURRENT SCENE field This specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory. ● INPUT PATCH / NAME Restricts operations for input channel patching and names. ● OUTPUT PATCH / NAME ● SCENE LIST F MONITOR field This specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed. ● OSCILLATOR ● TALKBACK G SYSTEM SETUP field This specifies the system setup operations that can be performed. ● MIXER SETUP ● OUTPUT SETUP ● MIDI H SET ALL/CLEAR ALL buttons These buttons set or clear all items in the window. 3 Specify the user level by turning-on the button for each item that will be permitted. 4 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. Restricts operations for output channel patching and names. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 19 User settings (Security) 3 193 Preferences Preferences Settings related to the operating environment (such as whether or not certain messages are displayed, or whether key operations are linked) can be made according to the preferences of each user. These settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. PREFERENCE popup button This page includes the following items. 1 CONFIRMATION field Here you can select whether confirmation messages will appear when you perform scene or patch operations. ● STORE ● RECALL If these buttons are on, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a scene Store or Recall operation respectively. ● PATCH If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch. ● STEAL PATCH 2 Move the cursor to the PREFERENCE popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the PREFERENCE popup window. NOTE • If you are logged in as Administrator, you can move the cursor to the “for Guest” PREFERENCE popup button and press the [ENTER] key to access the PREFERENCE popup window, where you can view or change the guest’s preference settings. 2 1 3 If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch item that is already patched. B ERROR MESSAGE field Here you can select whether an error message will be displayed when the following problems occur. ● DIGITAL I/O When an error is detected in the digital input/output. ● MIDI I/O When an error is detected in MIDI transmission/ reception. C PANEL OPERATION field Here you can make settings for options related to panel operation. ● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT—INPUT ● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT—OUTPUT These specify whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate a channel’s [ON] key or fader. This can be turned on/off separately for INPUT (input channels) and OUTPUT (output channels). ● [CUE] → [SEL] LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If this button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel will simultaneously select that channel and light its [SEL] key. ● [LAYER] → [SEL] LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader layer selection. If this button is on, and you press a panel LAYER key to switch the fader layer, the last-selected channel of that fader layer will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light. 194 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Preferences ● POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS Specifies whether pressing a knob of the SELECTED CHANNEL section when the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is shown will cause the popup window for that parameter to appear. If this button is on, a popup window will appear (or close) whenever you press a knob. ● LIST ORDER This specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear in the screen. • NORMAL.............. Show the list in ascending numerical order. • REVERSE ............ Show the list in ascending numerical order. ● STEREO / MONO LINK This specifies whether STEREO channel and MONO channel on/off and fader operations will be linked. If you turn this button on, the STEREO channel on/off setting will be copied to the MONO channel, and subsequently on/off operations will be linked. Faders will be linked while preserving the difference in level. ● METER FOLLOW LAYER Specifies whether the meter screen will be linked with fader layer selection. If this button is on, switching the fader layer will cause the meter screen to switch to the corresponding fader layer, regardless of which screen had been displayed. 3 Turn each button on or off to make the desired preference settings. 4 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the popup window. User settings (Security) 19 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 195 User-defined keys User-defined keys Here’s how you can assign the desired functions to the user defined keys in the USER DEFINED section of the top panel, and press these keys to execute the defined function. This assignment procedure will define the user-defined keys for the user who is currently loggedin, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make user-defined key settings for the Guest account. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. USER DEFINED KEYS popup button 2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED KEYS popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will appear. 3 Move the cursor to the button for the userdefined key whose function you want to assign, and press the [ENTER] key. The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear. In this window you can select a function to assign to the user defined key, and select option parameters. 4 Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a yellow frame, and then use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys of the panel to select the function you want to assign. If the selected function has additional parameters, the parameters are shown in the PARAMETER 1/2 fields. For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys” (→ p. 257). 5 If the selected function has parameters, move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field and select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way. 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window. The twelve buttons in the screen correspond to userdefined keys [1]–[12] on the panel, and the function or parameter assigned to each one is shown at the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “----” is shown. 196 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 7 Assign the desired functions to other userdefined keys in the same way. 8 To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[12] key on the panel. Console lock Console lock You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controls cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break. If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console Lock function. If you power-cycle the console while it is locked, you will be asked to enter the password if you had been logged-in as a user for whom a password is assigned. If you had been logged-in as the Guest, the console will start up normally. NOTE • If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the LS9’s internal memory” (→ p. 222). • The Guest cannot set a password. • Even while the console is locked, control from an external device via MIDI or LS9 Editor will still operate as usual. Locking the console 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen. 3 Enter the password of the logged-in user, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Console Lock function will be enabled, and all controls will become inoperable. HINT • If an image file is loaded from USB memory, the CONSOLE LOCK screen will show that image. CONSOLE LOCK button 2 Move the cursor to the CONSOLE LOCK button and press the [ENTER] key. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). User settings (Security) 19 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 197 Console lock Unlocking the console 1 When the CONSOLE LOCK screen is displayed, press the [ENTER] key. If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image If an image file is saved in USB memory, the CONSOLE LOCK screen can display that image. In the SAVE/LOAD popup window, specify the image file that you want to display and load it from USB memory. For the procedure of loading from USB memory, refer to “Loading a file from USB memory” (→ p. 200). NOTE • The image file is not backed-up in internal memory. Each time you turn on the power, you will need to reload it from USB memory. • The image file will be converted into 320 x 240 pixels, 216 colors for display. • The image file is limited to 8/16/24/32-bit color, un-compressed, and a maximum of 307,256 bytes. 2 Enter the password of the logged-in user, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. The console will be unlocked, you will return to the MISC SETUP screen, and the controls will be operable once again. HINT • You may disconnect the USB memory device while the console is locked. Insert the USB memory device before you defeat Console Lock. 198 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using USB memory to save/load data Using USB memory to save/load data This section explains how you can connect commercially-available USB memory to the USB connector located at the right side of the display, and use it to save or load data such as internal settings for the LS9. NOTE • Operation is guaranteed only with USB flash memory. • The operation of storage media with capacities of up to 16GB has been verified. (However, this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB storage media.) The FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. On the LS9 V1.10 or higher, storage media with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32 and storage media with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16. Long file names are not supported. CAUTION • The ACCESS indicator will appear in the constant display area of the screen while data is being accessed, such as during saving, loading, or deleting. Do not disconnect the USB memory or power-off the LS9 while this indicator is shown. Doing so may damage the data in USB memory. Saving the LS9’s internal data on USB memory Here’s how all of the LS9’s internal data (except for the data included in a user authentication key) can be saved on USB memory as a file. The saved file will have an extension of “.L9A”. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 3 If you want to move to a different directory, move the cursor to the icon of the column of the desired directory, and press the [ENTER] key. To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to the arrow button in the PATH field and press the [ENTER] key. 4 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the [ENTER] key. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a file name and comment. SAVE/LOAD button 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key. The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear. and a comment of up to 32 characters; then move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the [ENTER] key. When the file has finished being saved, the popup window showing the save progress indication and the type of data will close. 19 User settings (Security) 5 Enter a file name of up to eight characters SAVE button LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 199 Using USB memory to save/load data Loading a file from USB memory Here’s how to load an LS9 settings file (extension .L9A) from USB memory into the LS9. You can use the same procedure to load the following files other than the settings files. Extension Type .L9A ALL LS9 internal settings file LS9 user authentication key 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key. The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear. If an image file is saved in USB memory, the CONSOLE LOCK screen can display that image (→ p. 198). Contents of file .L9U KEY .XML XML XML file for displaying help .TXT TXT Text file for displaying help .BMP BMP Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen CAUTION • Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the [SEL] keys to select the INPUT channel from which you want to take a direct output. Before you load, turn off the power of the equipment connected to the LS9 and/or lower the volume so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the LS9. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. SAVE/LOAD button File list LOAD button 3 Move the cursor to the file list, and use the dial on the panel to select the file you want to load. The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations. 4 When you move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation. 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key; loading will begin. When the file has finished being loaded, the popup window showing the progress indication and the type of data will close. Even if you cancel while the settings file is still being loaded, the data up to that point will have been loaded. The type of file that can be loaded will depend on the User Level setting at the time you load the file. 200 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using USB memory to save/load data Editing the files saved on USB memory Here’s how you can perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on USB memory, editing the file names or comments, copying, or pasting. ● File editing 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. D MAKE DIR button This button creates a new directory (→ p. 203). E VOLUME NAME This indicates the volume name of the USB memory. If the USB memory is write-protected, a protect symbol is shown in the VOLUME NAME field. F FREE SIZE This indicates the amount of free space in the USB memory. G PATH This shows the name of the current directory. You can move the cursor to the arrow button and press the [ENTER] key to move to the next upper level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed. NOTE • You cannot save if the directory name would exceed 237 characters. 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key. The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the saved files and sub-directories will be shown in a list. 8 5 1 2 3 4 6 7 H File list This area lists the files that are saved on USB memory. The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations. The file list contains the following items. If you move the cursor to the name of an item and press the [ENTER] key, that item name will turn orange, and the list will be sorted according to the character strings for those items. Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order. ● FILE NAME Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon indicating its type. ● READ ONLY A lock symbol is shown to indicate protected files. You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting. ● FILE TYPE ● COMMENT 9 J K L M 1 COPY button This button copies a file into buffer memory (a temporary holding area) (→ p. 203). B PASTE button This button pastes the file from buffer memory (→ p. 203). C DELETE button This button deletes the selected file (→ p. 203). For LS9 files, the comment is displayed here. When you move the cursor to this area and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a comment for the file. ● TIME STAMP This shows the date and time at which the file was last modified. 19 User settings (Security) ALL indicates a file containing LS9 internal settings, KEY indicates a user authentication key, XML indicates a help file, BMP indicates a bitmap image file, MP3 indicates an MP3 file, and [DIR] indicates a directory. NOTE • You can use the COMMENT/TIME STAMP button located at the lower right of the file list to toggle the display between COMMENT and TIME STAMP. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 201 Using USB memory to save/load data I SAVE button Saves all of the LS9’s internal settings together (→ p. 199). 4 If you want to edit the file name or com- J LOAD button Loads the selected LS9 settings file (→ p. 200). ment, move the cursor to the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each file and press the [ENTER] key to access the keyboard window. K CREATE USER KEY button For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). Creates a user authentication key (→ p. 192). NOTE L FORMAT button Formats the USB memory media (→ p. 204). M COMMENT/TIME STAMP button Toggles the item shown at the far right of the file list between COMMENT and TIME STAMP. • If the COMMENT field is not displayed, use the COMMENT/ TIME STAMP button located at the lower right of the file list to turn COMMENT on. 3 Perform the desired editing operation. For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations that follow. ● Sorting files and editing file names/ comments 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 3 To sort the files, move the cursor to the “FILE NAME,” lock symbol, “FILE TYPE,” “COMMENT,” or “TIME STAMP” field at the top of the file list, and press the [ENTER] key. The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column title you selected. 1 2 3 45 5 Enter a file name / comment, move the cursor to the RENAME button or the SET button, and press the [ENTER] key. 6 To turn the Protect setting on/off, move the 1 FILE NAME Sort the list in alphanumerical order of file name. B Lock symbol Sort the list according to Write Protect on/off status. C FILE TYPE Sort the list according to file type. D COMMENT Sort the list in alphanumeric order of the comment. E TIME STAMP Sort the list in order of date of creation. HINT • By pressing the [ENTER] key again, you can change the direction (ascending or descending) in which the list is sorted. 202 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual cursor to the lock symbol for that file and press the [ENTER] key. A lock symbol is displayed for protected files; these files cannot be overwritten. NOTE • You cannot edit the file name or comment of a protected file. Using USB memory to save/load data ● Copying/pasting a file ● Deleting a file Here’s how to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file name. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 3 Move the cursor to the file list, use the panel dial to select the file that you want to copy, move the cursor to the COPY button, and press the [ENTER] key. [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 3 Move the cursor to the file list, use the panel dial to select the file that you want to delete, move the cursor to the DELETE button, and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete operation. The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations. 4 If you want to move to a different directory, move the cursor to the icon of the column of the desired directory, and press the [ENTER] key. To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to the arrow button in the PATH field and press the [ENTER] key. 5 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and press the [ENTER] key. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the paste-destination file name. For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). 4 To execute the Delete operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • You can’t delete a protected file. ● Creating a directory 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 3 If you want to move to a different directory, 6 Enter the paste-destination file name, move the cursor to the PASTE button, and press the [ENTER] key. To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to the arrow button in the PATH field and press the [ENTER] key. If you specified an existing file name, a confirmation message will appear. NOTE • If you attempt to paste using the file name of an existing copyprotected file, the Paste operation will not be executed. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 19 User settings (Security) move the cursor to the icon of the column of the desired directory, and press the [ENTER] key. 203 Using USB memory to save/load data 4 Move the cursor to the MAKE DIR button and press the [ENTER] key. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a directory name. For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. FORMAT button 3 Move the cursor to the FORMAT button and 5 Enter a name for the directory you want to create, move the cursor to the MAKE button, and press the [ENTER] key. If you specified an existing file name, a confirmation message will appear. press the [ENTER] key. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the volume name that will be applied after formatting. For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34). Formatting USB memory media Here’s how to format USB memory media using the FAT16 file system. USB memory up to 2 Gbytes in capacity is supported. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 4 Enter the volume name, move the cursor to the FORMAT button, and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format operation. 5 To execute the Format operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Formatting will require several tens of seconds. 204 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Chapter 20 Other functions This chapter explains other functionality of the LS9 not covered elsewhere. About the SETUP screen In the SETUP screen you can make various settings that apply to the entire LS9. The SETUP screen includes the following three screens. Repeatedly press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [SETUP] key to access the desired screen. ● USER SETUP screen ● SYSTEM SETUP screen In this screen you can restrict the functionality that is available to each user, and make settings that affect the operating environment. Here you can also save or load user settings to or from USB memory, and create user authentication keys. In this screen you can make settings related to buses and output ports, and settings related to word clock and cascade connections. 2 1 3 LS9-32 HINT 1 BUS SETUP field Here you can make basic settings for MIX/MATRIX buses (→ p. 213). B OUTPUT PORT field In this field you can assign an output channel to each output port. For details, refer to chapter 9 “Selecting the output channel for each output port” (→ p. 97). C MIXER SETUP field Here you can make word clock settings (→ p. 206), slot settings (→ p. 208), and cascade settings (→ p. 209). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 20 Other functions • For details on functions and operation in the USER SETUP screen, refer to chapter 19 (→ p. 187). 205 About the SETUP screen • Word clock settings ● MISC SETUP screen C NETWORK field Here you can make various network-related settings (→ p. 216). In this screen you can make various other settings. 2 3 D CONSOLE LOCK field This enables or disables Console Lock. For details, refer to chapter 19 “Console lock” (→ p. 197). E CPU/BATTERY field The firmware version and the state of the internal memory backup battery are shown here. This will indicate OK if operation is normal, or LOW or NO if the voltage is low. 1 NOTE • The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. If this occurs, immediately save your data on a USB memory and contact your Yamaha dealer. 4 5 6 LS9-32 1 MIDI field Here you can make various MIDI-related settings. For details, refer to chapter 18 (→ p. 177). B DATE/TIME field Here you can specify the date and time (→ p. 215). F CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field Here you can adjust the contrast and brightness of the display, the brightness of the top panel LEDs, and the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector (→ p. 217). For details on the function and operations for each screen, refer to the second half of this chapter or to the corresponding other chapter. Word clock settings “Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system or HDR (Hard Disk Recorder) to a digital I/O card installed in a rear panel slot, this equipment must be synchronized to the same word clock in order for digital audio signals to be sent and received. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data will not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same. Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master. If you wish to use the LS9 as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which the word clock is obtained). The following steps show how to select the clock source that the LS9 will use. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen. 1 MIXER SETUP field B WORD CLOCK button 2 Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK button of the MIXER SETUP field in the lower part of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear, allowing you to make word clock settings. This popup window contains the following items. 1 2 LS9-32 206 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Word clock settings ● LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow) A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the LS9. 1 2 3 ● SRC ON (green) LS9-32 1 Clock frequency This indicates the frequency of the currently selected clock source. This field will indicate “UNLOCKED” while synchronization is lost, such as immediately after switching the master clock. B Clock select buttons These buttons select the master clock source. You can choose from the internal clock, the word clock signal supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN connector, or the word clock data included in the input signal from an I/O card in a slot. C Card type {Card type / Slot number} This area shows the type of I/O card installed in the slot. {On the LS9-32, this area shows the slot number and the type of I/O card.} 3 Use the clock select buttons to select a clock source. This is a special status that is unique to a digital I/O card with SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) functionality installed in the slot {slots 1/2}; it indicates that SRC is enabled for the corresponding channel. If this status is displayed, normal input/output with the LS9 is occurring even if the signal is not synchronized. ● UNLOCK (red) A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/ output cannot occur correctly between that device and the LS9. ● UNKNOWN (black) This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established. If the symbol for the port selected in step 3 has turned light blue, and the clock frequency is shown in the upper left of the window, this indicates that the LS9 is operating correctly with the new clock. You can choose one of the following clock sources. The LS9’s internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz, respectively) will be the clock source. Choose one of these if you want to use the LS9 as the word clock master. ● WORD CLOCK IN The word clock signal supplied from the rear panel WORD CLOCK IN jack will be used as the clock source. In this case, the LS9 will operate as a word clock slave. ● SLOT {SLOT 1/2} The clock data included in the digital audio input signal from a digital I/O card in the slot {slots 1/2} will be used as the clock source. (Select this in two-channel units.) In this case, the LS9 will operate as a word clock slave. The status (operating state) of the clock data being received from each port is indicated by the color of the symbol displayed immediately above. Each color has the following significance. HINT • If you use a digital I/O card that contains a sampling rate converter (e.g., MY8-AE96S), input and output can occur normally with the LS9 even when unsynchronized. In this case, turn on the SRC button for the slot/channel that is receiving the signal (→ p. 208). NOTE • If the symbol for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data. • Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. In order to protect your speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting. • If you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled. 4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key. You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen. ● LOCK (light blue) This indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected source is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring normally between that device and the LS9. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 20 Other functions ● INT 48 k ● INT 44.1 k 207 Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off If a digital I/O card with SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) functionality (such as the MY8-AE96S) is installed in the slot {slot 1/2}, you can use the SLOT SETUP popup window to turn the card’s SRC on/off. In this window you can also check the operating status of the I/O card(s) installed in the slot(s). 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen. C SRC buttons For digital I/O cards that contain a built-in SRC (Sampling Rate Converter), the SCR can be switched on/off in groups of two channels. D EMPHASIS This area indicates whether emphasis processing is applied to the input signals of a slot in which an AES/ EBU format digital I/O card is installed, in units of two channels. This indication is displayed as follows. 1 LS9-32 Description ---- No signal, or a signal without emphasis is being input ON A valid digital audio signal is being input, and emphasis is turned On for that signal OFF A valid digital audio signal is being input, and emphasis is turned Off for that signal 3 To turn on the SRC that is built-into the digital I/O card, move the cursor to the corresponding SRC button and press the [ENTER] key. 1 SLOT SETUP button 2 Move the cursor to the SLOT SETUP button of the MIXER SETUP field in the lower part of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. The SLOT SETUP popup window will appear, allowing you to make slot-related settings. This popup window contains the following items. 1 2 3 4 The SRC can be turned on/off in units of two channels. For channels whose SRC is turned on, input/output can occur correctly even if the input signal is not synchronized with the LS9’s clock source. 4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key. You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen. LS9-32 1 Card type {Card type / Slot number} This area shows the type of I/O card installed in the slot. {On the LS9-32, this area shows the slot number and the type of I/O card in each slot.} B FREQ (Frequency) This indicates the sampling frequency of the signal being input to each channel of an MY8-AE96 or MY8-AE96S digital I/O card, in sets of two channels. 208 Item LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using cascade connections Using cascade connections By cascade-connecting two or more LS9 consoles or an LS9 with an external mixer (such as the Yamaha M7CL) you can share the buses. For example this is convenient when you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs. If you are cascading two LS9 consoles, you can use the “Cascade Link” function to link cue operations, scene recall/store operations, and fader layer selections. In this case, you can operate the two LS9 consoles as if they were a single mixer. Here we will explain cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two LS9 consoles are cascade-connected. To cascade two LS9 consoles, you will install digital I/O cards in their respective slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of the receiving unit (the cascade master). The following illustration shows an example in which one sixteen-channel digital I/O card for each console are installed in the cascade slave LS9 and in the cascade master LS9, and the DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit. HINT • You can also cascade-connect the LS9 with digital mixers that have a Mini-YGDAI slot, such as the Yamaha M7CL or PM5D. However, this only allows you to cascade the audio signals; linking via control signals is not possible. • You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer. • There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay from each cascade-slave will increase according to the number of units between it and the cascade-master. Digital audio signal Audio signals of unit A Digital I/O card Audio signals of A+B Digital I/O card LS9 A (Cascade slave) LS9 B (Cascade master) MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN Control signals for cascade link In this example, up to sixteen buses chosen from MIX buses 1–16, MATRIX buses 1–8, STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master LS9. {If you’re cascade-connecting two LS9-32 consoles, you will be able to share all buses if you install two 16channel digital I/O cards in each LS9-32 console.} Control signals for the Cascade Link function are transmitted and received via the MIDI IN/OUT connectors. In this type of setup, performing a cue operation, scene recall/store operation, or fader layer selection on either console will cause the same to occur on the other console. Other functions 20 When using a cascade connection, you must specify the slot(s)/channels on each LS9 console that will send and receive audio signals. Similarly, in order to use the Cascade Link function, you must specify the port that will transmit and receive control signals, and specify the parameters and events that will be linked. The following pages explain the required settings for cascade connection and the method of operation, separately for the cascade slave and the cascade master. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 209 Using cascade connections 3 Move the cursor to the port select popup Operations on the cascade slave LS9 button for the bus whose port you want to assign, and press the [ENTER] key. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen. The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear. [ OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9-32 ] 2 1 1 [ OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9-16 ] LS9-32 1 CASCADE OUT button 2 In the MIXER SETUP field located at the lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cursor to the CASCADE OUT button and press the [ENTER] key. 1 The CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window will appear. This window contains the following items. 1 This popup window contains the following items. 1 Port select buttons These buttons select the output port for the selected bus. B Slot select tabs (LS9-32 only) These tabs select slots 1/2. 2 3 1 Port select popup buttons These buttons access an OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window where you can select the output port for each bus. B CASCADE LINK PORT field When using the Cascade Link function, this specifies the port by which control signals will be transmitted and received between the two LS9 consoles. C CASCADE COMM LINK field Here you can select the parameters and events that will be linked by the Cascade Link function. 210 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 4 Use the port select buttons {slot select tabs and port select buttons} to select an output port, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key. The port will be assigned to the bus you selected in step 3. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign output ports to other buses. NOTE • You can’t assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a bus to which a signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be cancelled. Using cascade connections 6 If you want to use the Cascade Link func- tion to link parameters and events between two LS9 consoles, proceed as follows. 1 Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the port that will transmit/receive control signals for cascade link. You can choose from the following items. LS9-16 Item ---MIDI SLOT-1– SLOT-8 Description No port will be used. Rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting serial communication, installed in the rear panel slot ● ALL All linkable parameters and events (including cuerelated parameters) will be linked. • • • • • • Cue-related parameters and events (see above) Scene recall operations Scene store operations DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations Switching the fader layer Panel LED and display brightness (MISC SETUP screen) operations • Master mute group operations 7 To close the OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-32 Item ---MIDI Description No port will be used. Rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors SLOT1-1– SLOT1-8 Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting serial communication, installed in rear panel slot 1 SLOT2-1– SLOT2-8 Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting serial communication, installed in rear panel slot 2 NOTE • Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings. B Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the item you want to link. You can choose from the following items. ● OFF Linking will not occur. ● CUE The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked. • Cue enable/disable • Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE) • Cue point settings for input channels and output channels Other functions 20 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 211 Using cascade connections Operations on the cascade master LS9 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen. [ INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9-32 ] 2 1 2 In the MIXER SETUP field located at the lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cursor to the CASCADE IN button and press the [ENTER] key to access the CASCADE IN PATCH popup window. The CASCADE IN PATCH popup window contains the following items. 1 [ INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for the LS9-16 ] 1 2 3 This popup window contains the following items. 1 Port select popup buttons These buttons access the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window, where you can select the input port whose signal will be added to the bus. B CASCADE LINK PORT field Here you can select the port that will transmit and receive control signals when using the Cascade Link function to link specific operations and parameter changes between two LS9 consoles. C CASCADE COMM LINK field Here you can select the parameters and events that will be linked by the Cascade Link function. 3 Move the cursor to the port select popup button for the bus whose port you want to assign, and press the [ENTER] key. The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear. This popup window contains the following items. 1 Port select buttons Here you can select the input port whose signal will be added to the selected bus. B Slot select tabs (LS9-32 only) These tabs select slots 1/2. 4 Use the port select buttons {slot select tabs and port select buttons} to select an input port, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key. The input port will be assigned to the bus you selected in step 3. The signal input from this port will be mixed with the signal of the corresponding bus inside the cascade master. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign input ports to other buses. NOTE • You can’t assign the same input port to two or more buses. If you select a bus to which a signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be cancelled. 212 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using cascade connections • Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses 6 If you want to link specific parameters or events between two LS9 consoles, proceed as follows. 1 Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to specify the port that will transmit/receive control signals for cascade link. The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window (→ p. 211). 7 To close the INPUT PORT SELECT popup window, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key. In this state, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master, and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either LS9 console will be followed by the other LS9 console. NOTE • Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings. B Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to specify the item(s) you want to link, so that they match the settings of the cascade slave. The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window (→ p. 211). Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the position from which the signal is sent from an input channel. The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen. 2 To make MIX bus settings, move the cursor to the MIX button of the BUS SETUP field and press the [ENTER] key. The MIX BUS SETUP popup window will appear. 1 2 3 1 2 3 LS9-32 1 BUS SETUP field B MIX button C MATRIX button 1 SIGNAL TYPE (Signal processing method) This selects whether two adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered MIX buses will be used as stereo channels whose main parameters are linked (STEREO) or as two monaural channels (MONO × 2). LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Other functions 20 213 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses B BUS TYPE / PRE FADER SEND POINT For two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered buses, this selects the position from which the signal will be sent from the input channel. You can also switch the MIX bus type (VARI or FIXED) here. C PAN LINK This specifies whether the panning at which the signal is sent from an input channel to the stereo bus will be linked with the TO ST PAN setting. 3 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses whether they will function as STEREO (main parameters linked for the two MIX channels) or MONO × 2 (used as two monaural channels). 4 Use the buttons of the BUS TYPE / SEND POINT field to select the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent. In this field you can switch the MIX bus type (VARI or FIXED). The following items can be selected for each bus. ● VARI PRE EQ The MIX bus will be a VARI type (adjustable send level). Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or as a foldback output. If the MIX send point of the input channel is set to PRE, the signal will be sent from immediately before the EQ (attenuator). ● If the PAN LINK button is on The PAN knob that appears in the location of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob of the input channel’s SELECTED CH VIEW screen when the send-destination MIX bus is stereo will be linked with the TO ST PAN (BAL) knob. ● If the PAN LINK button is off The PAN (BALANCE) knob displayed in the position of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob in the input channel SELECTED CH VIEW screen can be operated independently of the TO ST PAN (BAL) knob. NOTE • The PAN LINK button is not displayed for MIX buses whose SIGNAL TYPE is set to MONO × 2, or MIX buses whose BUS TYPE is set to FIXED. 6 To close the popup window and return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key. 7 To make basic settings for MATRIX buses, move the cursor to the MATRIX button of the BUS SETUP field and press the [ENTER] key. The MATRIX BUS SETUP popup window will appear. 1 ● VARI PRE FADER The MIX bus will be a VARI type. Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or as a foldback output. If the MIX send point of the input channel is set to PRE, the signal will be sent from immediately before the fader. NOTE • Even if you select VARI PRE EQ or VARI PRE FADER, input channels whose MIX send position is set to POST will send the post-fader signal to the MIX bus. ● FIXED The MIX bus will be a FIXED type (send level is fixed at nominal level = 0.0 dB). Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as a group output or as a bus output for recording on a multitrack recorder. If the bus is set to MONO, the signal will be sent from immediately before the pan/balance of the input channel; if the bus is set to STEREO, the signal will be sent from immediately after the pan/balance. 5 As desired, turn the buttons of the PAN LINK field on/off. For two MIX buses whose SIGNAL TYPE = STEREO and BUS TYPE = VARI, the PAN LINK button is displayed in this position. This button specifies whether the panning at which the signal is sent from an input channel to the stereo MIX bus will be linked with the TO ST PAN setting. 214 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 1 SIGNAL TYPE (Signal processing method) This selects whether two adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered MATRIX buses will be used as stereo channels whose main parameters are linked (STEREO) or as two monaural channels (MONO × 2). 8 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MATRIX buses whether they will function as STEREO (main parameters linked for the two MATRIX channels) or MONO × 2 (used as two monaural channels). 9 To close the popup window and return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key. Setting the date and time of the internal clock Setting the date and time of the internal clock This section explains how to set the date and time of the clock built into the LS9, and how to view the date and time. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key to access the MISC SETUP screen. 3 Move the cursor to the DATE MODE button and press the [ENTER] key to select the date format. You can select from the following formats. 1 2 • MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year) • DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year) • YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day) 4 Move the cursor to each field of the DATE field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to specify the date. 5 Move the cursor to the TIME MODE button and press the [ENTER] key to select the time format. You can select from the following formats. LS9-32 1 DATE/TIME field This indicates the currently specified date and time. B DATE/TIME SET popup button This button accesses the DATE/TIME popup window, where you can set the date and time. 2 Move the cursor to the DATE/TIME SET popup button in the DATE/TIME field, and press the [ENTER] key. The DATE/TIME popup window will appear. 1 6 Move the cursor to each field of the TIME field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to specify the time. 7 When you have finished making settings, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The date, time, and display format you specified will be finalized, and the popup window will close. If you select the CANCEL button or the × symbol instead of the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close. 20 4 Other functions 2 3 • 24Hours (hours shown in a range of 0–23) • 12Hours (hours shown from AM 0–AM 11 and PM 0–PM 11) 1 DATE field Specifies the date of the internal clock. B DATE MODE button Specifies the format in which the date will be displayed. C TIME field Specifies the time of the internal clock. D TIME MODE button Specifies the format in which the time will be displayed. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 215 Setting the network address Setting the network address Here’s how to set the network address that will be required when you use the LS9’s NETWORK connector to connect it to a Windows computer. NOTE • The network address can be changed only by users who have administrative privileges. • For details on network settings, refer to the LS9 Editor installation guide which can be downloaded from the following Yamaha website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC SETUP screen. 1 2 1 IP ADDRESS field This is a number (IP address) assigned to identify each device on the Internet or within an LAN (Local Area Network). B GATEWAY ADDRESS field This specifies the number (gateway address) that identifies a device (gateway) that allows data of differing media or protocol to be exchanged within a network to allow communication. C SUBNET MASK field This defines the number of bits (of the IP address used within the network) that will be used as the network address that distinguishes the network. 3 LS9-32 1 NETWORK field This shows the values of network-related parameters. B NETWORK SET button This accesses the NETWORK popup window, where you can make network-related settings. C MAC ADDRESS field This is the MAC (Machine Access Control) address specified for identifying a host within a network. This field is only for display, and cannot be edited. 2 Move the cursor to the NETWORK SET button in the NETWORK field, and press the [ENTER] key to access the NETWORK popup window. 1 3 D LINK MODE field Select either 100BASE-TX (transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps) as the specification used for communication via the NETWORK connector. 3 Move the cursor to the LINK MODE field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select a communication protocol for the NETWORK connector as appropriate for the network to which the LS9 is connected. NOTE • Be aware that if the specification does not match, communication will not occur correctly. 4 Move the cursor to each remaining field in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/ [INC] keys to specify each address. If you are connecting the LS9 to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we recommend that you make the following initial settings. ● IP address 192.168.0.128 or similar (it must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network) ● Gateway address 192.168.0.1 or similar (it must not conflict with the IP address of any other device on the network) 2 216 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 4 ● Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 or similar Setting the network address • Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display, LEDs, and lamps 5 When you have finished making settings, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The changes will be finalized, and the popup window will close. If you select the CANCEL button or the × symbol instead of the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close. Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display, LEDs, and lamps Here you can specify the contrast and brightness of the display, the brightness of the top panel LEDs, and the brightness of the lamp connected to the rear panel LAMP connector. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key to access the MISC SETUP screen. 2 Move the cursor to a knob of the CON- TRAST/BRIGHTNESS field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to set the following parameters. ● CONTRAST field • SCREEN knob ........ Specifies the contrast of the display backlight. HINT • You can also adjust the contrast by holding down the [HOME] key and turning the dial. ● BRIGHTNESS field 1 CONTRAST field B BRIGHTNESS field 2 LS9-32 • PANEL knob ........ Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If a Yamaha AD8HR is connected to an I/O card that provides a REMOTE connector, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change. • LAMP knob (LS9-32 only) ........ Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the rear panel LAMP jack. 20 Other functions 1 • SCREEN knob ........ Specifies the brightness of the display backlight. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 217 Using the Help function Using the Help function You can view Help files provided by Yamaha, or display any desired text file created by the user. * We accept no responsibility for any damages that may result from the use of Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha. Loading a Help file from a USB memory 3 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key. The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear. The help file is not backed up in internal memory. Each time you turn on the power, you must reload it from your USB memory. It is convenient to save your help file on the USB memory that contains your user authentication key. 1 Before you proceed, save the Help file (extension .xml) provided by Yamaha on your USB memory. You can download the most recent version of the Help file from the Yamaha website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. SAVE/LOAD button 4 Move the cursor to the file list, and use the dial on the panel to select the help file you want to load. 5 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key, and a confirmation dialog box will appear. 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to begin loading the file. 218 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Using the Help function Loading a text file from a USB memory 1 Using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with the Microsoft Windows series, create a text file (extension .txt) and save it on your USB memory. By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However by adding a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file. The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets / languages). Assigning the Help function to a user-defined key 1 Before you proceed, load the Help file from your USB memory. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. • Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.) • Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese) • Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER SETUP screen. 3 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key. The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear. USER DEFINED KEYS popup button 3 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED KEYS popup button, and press the [ENTER] key. The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will appear. 4 Move the cursor to the file list, and use the dial on the panel to select the text file you want to load. 5 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the [ENTER] key, and a confirmation dialog box will appear. 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to begin loading the file. 4 Move the cursor to the button for the user- 20 Other functions defined key whose function you want to assign, and press the [ENTER] key. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 219 Using the Help function 5 Use the panel dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select “HELP.” Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window. 6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key to close the USER DEFINED KEY popup window. Viewing Help 1 Before you proceed, load the help file or text file from your USB memory. 2 Press the user-defined key to which the Help function is assigned; the HELP popup window will appear. 3 Move the cursor to the desired section, and use the panel dial to scroll the contents. Links in the selected text will be highlighted. 4 Select a link (underlined portion) in the document, and press the [ENTER] key to jump to the link destination. By selecting a text link in INDEX mode and pressing the “ENTER” key, you can switch to CONTENTS mode and scroll to the corresponding section. Move the cursor a window link and press the [ENTER] key (a location with an symbol and underlined text), you can close the HELP window and open the corresponding window. 5 To return from CONTENTS mode to INDEX mode, move the cursor to the INDEX button and press the [ENTER] key. 6 As necessary, you can also scroll by using the buttons in the tool bar. ● < INDEX button Jumps to the table of contents. If the cursor is at the table of contents, you can use the panel cursor key as an alternative. ● CONTENTS > button Jumps to the content (article). If the cursor is at the table of contents, you can use the panel cursor key as an alternative. ● INDEX mode button Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-displayed location. ● button Returns to the previous link in the link history. If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an article, you can use the panel [DEC] key as an alternative. ● button Proceeds to the next link in the link history. If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an article, you can use the panel [INC] key as an alternative. 7 To close the window, once again press the CONTENTS mode 220 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual user-defined key to which the Help function is assigned. Using the Help function ■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller • • • • • • • • • • • ■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen • • • • • 1 While holding down the user-defined key to 1 While holding down the user-defined key to Panel controllers (other than the faders) will not function as long as you continue holding down the userdefined key to which the Help function is assigned. 2 If the corresponding controller has an explanation associated with it, the HELP popup window will appear, and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item. If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat step 1 to successively display these explanations. 3 To close the window, once again press the user-defined key to which the Help function is assigned. which you’ve assigned the Help function, move the cursor to the on-screen controller whose function you want to read and press the [ENTER] key. The on-screen buttons and tabs will not function as long as you continue holding down the user-defined key to which the Help function is assigned. 2 If there is a corresponding Help item, the HELP popup window will appear and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item. If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, close the HELP popup window and then repeat step 1 to successively view these explanations. 3 To close the window, once again press the user-defined key to which the Help function is assigned. 20 Other functions which you’ve assigned the Help function, press (or turn) the panel controller whose function you want to learn about. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 221 Initializing the LS9’s internal memory Initializing the LS9’s internal memory If an error occurs in the LS9’s internal memory, or if you have forgotten the password, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory. CAUTION • The entire contents of memory will be lost if you initialize the internal memory. Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to do this. 1 While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn on the power. 4 Move the cursor to the OK button of the dialog box and press the [ENTER] key. Initialization will begin. After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. NOTE • Do not press any key until initialization has been completed. 1 5 When initialization has been completed, 2 move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key. 3 The console will start up in normal operating mode. NOTE • If the backup battery voltage is low, or if an error occurs in the internal memory, a warning dialog box will appear, and then the initialization menu will appear. If the warning dialog box appears, and you select the EXIT button to start up in normal operating mode, Yamaha cannot guarantee that the unit will operate correctly. HINT • Instead of using the EXIT button, you can also select a different button of the MODE SELECT field. 1 MODE SELECT field B INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button C INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button 2 According to the desired type of initializa- tion, move the cursor to one of the buttons in the MODE SELECT field, and press the [ENTER] key. ● INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button The entire memory including scene memories and libraries will be returned to their factory-set condition. ● INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button The contents of memory except for scene memories and libraries will be returned to its factory-set condition. 3 To execute the Initialize operation, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button located in the dialog box at the left side of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation. 222 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) Depending on the environment in which you use the console, discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies. 1 While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn on the power. 4 Move the cursor to the START button and press the [ENTER] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation. After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. 5 Move the cursor to the OK button of the dialog box and press the [ENTER] key. Each of the specified faders will move to the target positions in the following sequence. 1 B C D -∞ (push down to the minimum value) -20 dB 0 dB +10 dB (push up to the maximum value) 6 If there are any faders that are not in the 1 positions shown in the screen, manually move them to the appropriate position. 7 When you have set all faders to the target 1 FADER CALIBRATION button 2 Move the cursor to the FADER CALIBRATION button and press the [ENTER] key. The FADER CALIBRATION MODE popup window will appear, where you can adjust the faders. location, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The process will proceed to the next fader position. 8 Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust the faders for positions 1 through 4. 9 When you have finished the calibration process and the APPLY button has appeared, move the cursor to the APPLY button and press the [ENTER] key. The calibration settings will be saved in internal memory. NOTE • If the RESTART button appears when calibration ends, calibration has failed. Move the cursor to the RESTART button and press the [ENTER] key to execute calibration once again. 10 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key. The console will start up in normal operating mode. HINT HINT • Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu instead of using the EXIT button. 3 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select the fader for which you want to perform calibration. Fader calibration is performed semi-automatically for the faders you specify using their [SEL] keys. Each fader selected by its [SEL] key is shown in red in the popup window. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 20 Other functions • This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the LS9 is started up. 223 Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function) Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function) If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input/output gain. 1 While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn on the power. After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. ● OUTPUT PORT TRIM (fine adjustment of the output ports) button This makes fine adjustments in 0.01 dB steps to the gain of the specified output port. When you press this button, the screen will change as follows. 1 2 3 LS9-32 ● SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (fine adjustment of the 1 INPUT PORT TRIM button B OUTPUT PORT TRIM button C SLOT OUTPUT TRIM button output ports) button 2 In the MODE SELECT field, move the cursor This makes fine adjustments in 0.01 dB steps to the output port gain of the specified slot. When you press this button, the screen will change as follows. to one of the following buttons to select the target you want to adjust, and press the [ENTER] key. ● INPUT PORT TRIM (fine adjustment of the ana- log input gain) button This makes fine adjustments in 0.1 dB steps to the gain of the specified analog input port. When you press this button, the screen will change as follows. LS9-32 3 Move the cursor to the desired knob in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the value. LS9-32 If you move the cursor to the RESET ALL button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key, all knobs in that screen will be reset to 0 dB (the factory-set default value). 4 When you have finished making adjust- ments, move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key. The console will start up in normal operating mode. HINT • Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu instead of using the EXIT button. 224 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices EQ Library List Parameter Title 01 Bass Drum 1 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 02 Bass Drum 2 1.25 10.0 0.90 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF G +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON F 80.0 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 03 Snare Drum 1 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz 1.25 4.5 0.11 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz — 10.0 0.70 0.10 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz — 8.0 0.90 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz 1.0 — PEAKING H.SHELF –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz — 4.5 0.56 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz — 5.0 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz 0.10 5.0 6.3 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz 0.10 8.0 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 13 Piano 1 0.50 PEAKING F Q 12 Syn. Bass 2 — L.SHELF G Q 11 Syn. Bass 1 0.28 H.SHELF 106 Hz Q 10 E. Bass 2 1.25 PEAKING –2.0 dB Q 09 E. Bass 1 10.0 PEAKING F Q 08 Percussion 1.4 L.SHELF G Q 07 High Hat — H.SHELF –0.5 dB Q 06 Cymbal 2.2 PEAKING F Q 05 Tom-tom 1 4.5 PEAKING G Q 04 Snare Drum 2 1.4 PEAKING 1.6 8.0 2.2 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz Q — 8.0 0.90 — # Parameter Title 14 Piano 2 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 15 E. G. Clean 5.6 10.0 0.70 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 16 E. G. Crunch 1 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz 10.0 — PEAKING H.SHELF +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz — 10.0 4.0 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz 0.90 4.5 3.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz — 9.0 4.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz — 4.5 4.5 0.125 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz — 7.0 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 26 Male Vocal 2 9.0 PEAKING F Q 25 Male Vocal 1 — L.SHELF G Q 24 Brass Sec. — H.SHELF 355 Hz Q 23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 0.16 PEAKING +5.0 dB Q 22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 0.40 PEAKING F Q 21 A. G. Stroke 2 8.0 L.SHELF G Q 20 A. G. Stroke 1 — PEAKING +4.5 dB Q 19 E. G. Dist. 2 6.3 PEAKING F Q 18 E. G. Dist. 1 10.0 PEAKING G Q 17 E. G. Crunch 2 0.18 PEAKING 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 0.11 10.0 5.6 — LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices # 225 EQ Library List # Parameter Title 27 Female Vo. 1 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz Q 28 Female Vo. 2 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 29 Chorus & Harmo — 0.16 0.20 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 30 Total EQ 1 –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz 7.0 2.2 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB F 95.0 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz 7.0 2.8 5.6 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 67.0 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz — 0.28 0.70 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz Q 34 Snare Drum 3 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz Q 35 Tom-tom 2 — 4.5 2.8 0.10 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz Q 36 Piano 3 — 4.5 1.25 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 37 Piano Low 8.0 10.0 9.0 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 38 Piano High 10.0 6.3 2.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz Q 39 Fine-EQ Cass 226 10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 40 Narrator 7.0 H.SHELF 95.0 Hz Q 33 Bass Drum 3 0.70 PEAKING F Q 32 Total EQ 3 2.0 PEAKING G Q 31 Total EQ 2 2.8 PEAKING — 4.5 1.8 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 4.0 7.0 0.63 — LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual DYNAMICS Library List DYNAMICS Library List 1 2 3 4 5 6 Title Gate Ducking A. Dr. BD A. Dr. SN De-Esser Comp Type GATE DUCKING GATE GATE DE-ESSER COMPRESSOR Parameter 8 Expand Compander (H) EXPANDER COMPANDER-H 10 11 A. Dr. BD A. Dr. BD COMPANDER-S COMPRESSOR COMPANDER-H Type Parameter Value –17 Range (dB) –56 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 0 Attack (ms) Hold (ms) 2.56 12 A. Dr. SN COMPRESSOR Out gain (dB) 8 3.5 Decay (ms) 331 Knee 2 Threshold (dB) –19 Release (ms) 12 Range (dB) –22 Threshold (dB) –23 Attack (ms) 93 Ratio ( :1) 2 Hold (ms) 1.20 S Attack (ms) 0 Decay (ms) 6.32 S 13 A. Dr. SN EXPANDER Out gain (dB) Threshold (dB) –11 Knee Range (dB) –53 Release (ms) Attack (ms) 0 Hold (ms) 1.93 Decay (ms) 400 Threshold (dB) –8 Range (dB) –23 Attack (ms) 1 14 A. Dr. SN COMPANDER-S 0.5 2 151 Threshold (dB) –8 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 10 Release (ms) 128 –20 Hold (ms) 0.63 Threshold (dB) Decay (ms) 238 Ratio ( :1) 2 –8 Attack (ms) 2 Threshold (dB) Frequency (kHz) 2.00 15 A. Dr. Tom EXPANDER Out gain (dB) 5.0 Threshold (dB) –8 Knee Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Release (ms) 749 Attack (ms) 30 Threshold (dB) –24 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Ratio ( :1) 2 2 Attack (ms) 38 16 A. Dr. OverTop COMPANDER-S Out gain (dB) 2 –3.5 Release (ms) 250 Threshold (dB) –23 Width (dB) 54 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Release (ms) 842 Threshold (dB) –12 Attack (ms) 1 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 2 Knee 2 Attack (ms) 15 Release (ms) 70 Out gain (dB) 4.5 Threshold (dB) –10 Knee Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Release (ms) 470 Out gain (dB) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Release (ms) Compander (S) Title Threshold (dB) Width (dB) 9 # –26 Knee 7 Value Threshold (dB) 17 E. B. Finger COMPRESSOR 2 Threshold (dB) –12 0.0 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 6 Attack (ms) 1 250 18 E. B. Slap COMPRESSOR 6 Out gain (dB) 4.0 Threshold (dB) –8 Knee hard Ratio ( :1) 4 Release (ms) 133 Attack (ms) 25 Threshold (dB) –10 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Width (dB) 24 Attack (ms) Release (ms) 180 Threshold (dB) –24 19 Syn. Bass COMPRESSOR 9 Out gain (dB) 3.0 Knee hard Ratio ( :1) 3 Release (ms) 250 Attack (ms) 9 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Out gain (dB) 5.5 Attack (ms) 17 Out gain (dB) 1.0 –11 Knee hard 3.5 Release (ms) 238 Threshold (dB) –18 –1.5 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 7 Attack (ms) Knee 2 Release (ms) 58 Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) 1 Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) 192 20 21 Piano1 Piano2 COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Appendices # 7 6.0 2 174 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 227 DYNAMICS Library List # 22 Title E. Guitar Type COMPRESSOR Parameter A. Guitar COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR Strings2 COMPRESSOR 20 Attack (ms) 7 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Out gain (dB) COMPRESSOR BrassSection COMPRESSOR Syn. Pad COMPRESSOR 30 31 SamplingPerc Sampling BD Sampling SN COMPANDER-S COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR 4 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Width (dB) 15 Threshold (dB) –10 Threshold (dB) –20 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 5 Attack (ms) 31 Out gain (dB) 2.0 Out gain (dB) 1.5 33 Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR Knee 2 1 Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –11 Threshold (dB) –8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 2 Attack (ms) 33 Out gain (dB) 1.5 34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR Attack (ms) 26 Out gain (dB) 1.5 Knee 2 342 3 Release (ms) 749 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –12 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 1.5 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 93 Out gain (dB) 1.5 35 Chorus COMPRESSOR 39 Out gain (dB) 2.5 226 –33 –17 Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 1.5 Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) 76 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 2.5 Click Erase EXPANDER Out gain (dB) Knee 2 2 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) 36 331 Attack (ms) Knee 4 1.35 S 2 1 2.0 2 Release (ms) 186 Release (ms) 284 Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) –14 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 18 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 4.0 37 Announcer COMPANDER-H Out gain (dB) 1 –2.5 Width (dB) 18 Release (ms) 226 Release (ms) 180 Threshold (dB) –13 Threshold (dB) 1 –9 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) 3 Attack (ms) 58 Attack (ms) 20 Out gain (dB) 2.0 38 Limiter1 COMPANDER-S Out gain (dB) Width (dB) 1 –3.0 90 Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) 0 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) ∞ Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 8 –2.5 39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR Attack (ms) 3.91 s 0 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 18 Knee hard Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) 319 Threshold (dB) –14 Threshold (dB) –18 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) 2 Attack (ms) 94 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Out gain (dB) 3.5 40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR Knee 4 Knee hard Release (ms) 35 Release (ms) 447 Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) –16 Ratio ( :1) 4 Ratio ( :1) 6 Attack (ms) 8 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 6.0 41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR Out gain (dB) 8.0 Knee hard Knee Release (ms) 354 Release (ms) * At fs=44.1 kHz 228 COMPANDER-S 163 Knee 29 Hip Comp Release (ms) Knee 28 32 261 Knee 27 2.5 –23 Release (ms) Release (ms) Strings3 Value Ratio ( :1) Knee 26 Parameter 3.5 Knee 25 Type Ratio ( :1) Ratio ( :1) Strings1 Title Threshold (dB) Knee 24 # –8 Knee 23 Value Threshold (dB) 1 180 Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2. Output channels provide DYNAMICS section 1. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types: GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, and EXPANDER. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the following four types: COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft), and DE-ESSER. An output channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types: COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), and COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft). ■ GATE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE). Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) RANGE (dB) –∞, –69 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points) This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold. DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. • Time Series Analysis THRESHOLD Output Signal HOLD ATTACK DECAY Output Level Input Signal Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied. THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level ■ DUCKING Time Time •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE). Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking. RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points) This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the THRESHOLD level. DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. • Time Series Analysis THRESHOLD Output Signal HOLD ATTACK DECAY Appendices Output Level Input Signal Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level Time Time LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 229 Dynamics Parameters ■ COMPRESSOR• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold. Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor’s output signal level. Hard, 1–5 (6 points) This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB) THRESHOLD RATIO Input signal Output Level KNEE Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD Input Level Time Time ■ EXPANDER • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of expansion. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the expander’s output signal level. Hard, 1–5 (6 points) This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) THRESHOLD Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB) Input Signal Output Level KNEE Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD RATIO 230 Input Level LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Time Time Dynamics Parameters ■ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Output Level The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter. THRESHOLD WIDTH 0dB Input Level The companders function differently at the following levels: 1 0 dB and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a limiter. 2 Exceeding the threshold . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a compressor. 3 Below the threshold and width . . . . Functions as an expander. The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2. * The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB. * The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes. Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points) This determines the amount of compression. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) –18.0 to 0.0 (181 points) This sets the compander’s output signal level. 1–90 (90 points) This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width. WIDTH (dB) ■ DE-ESSER • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal. Parameter Range Description –54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect applies. FREQUENCY 1kHz – 12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the HPF used to detect the high frequencies. Appendices THRESHOLD LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 231 Effect Type List Effect Type List Title Description Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate Title Type Description Rev→Chorus REV→CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel Rev→Flange REV→FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate Rev→Sympho. REV→SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate Rev→Pan REV→PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb Delay+Er. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections Delay→Er. DELAY→ER. Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections Delay and early reflections in series Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel Delay→Rev DELAY→REV Delay and reverb in series Dist→Delay DIST→DELAY Distortion and delay in series Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/ octave) Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/ right feedback Chorus CHORUS Chorus M.Band Dyna. FLANGE Flanger M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter Distortion DISTORTION Distortion Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel Flange 232 Type LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual REV-X Hall REV-X HALL REV-X Room REV-X ROOM REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. Effects Parameters Effects Parameters One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter REV TIME Range 0.3–99.0 s Description Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio ■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Parameter TYPE Range Type-A, Type-B Description Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) Reflection density 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0–100% DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD *1 Gate open time DECAY *2 Gate closing speed LO. RATIO E/R DLY *1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz) *2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) ■ EARLY REF. One input, two output early reflections. Parameter TYPE Range S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left– right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 HPF LPF One input, one output basic repeat delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Description Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 INI. DLY ■ MONO DELAY *1. (Max. value depends on tempo setting) ■ STEREO DELAY Two input, two output basic stereo delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio FB. G R –99 to +99% THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY Appendices ■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 233 Effects Parameters ■ MOD. DELAY ■ ECHO One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation. Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop. Parameter DELAY Range Description 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time Parameter DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) L→R FBG –99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) R→L FBG –99 to +99% Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio ■ DELAY LCR HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right). LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FB. GAIN HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD.NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ Low-pass filter cutoff frequency *1. Range (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *2. Parameter Range Description SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FBL *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L NOTE FBR *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) *1. HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency ■ CHORUS LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off FREQ. NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain NOTE C NOTE R NOTE FB *1 *1 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Two input, two output chorus effect. Parameter *1. 234 Description LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Range 0.05–40.00 Hz Description Modulation speed Effects Parameters ■ FLANGE ■ PHASER Two input, two output flange effect. Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time –99 to +99% –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN FB. GAIN Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) OFFSET 0–100 WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. STAGE 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. *1. ■ SYMPHONIC ■ AUTOPAN Two input, two output symphonic effect. Parameter Range Description Modulation speed Two input, two output autopanner. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time DIR. *1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R *2. Appendices *1. Modulation speed LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 235 Effects Parameters ■ TREMOLO ■ DUAL PITCH Two input, two output tremolo effect. Two input, two output pitch shifter. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off LEVEL 1 –100 to +100% NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time FB. G 1 –99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Pitch shift precision LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth MODE 1–10 HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine LEVEL 2 –100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time FB. G 2 –99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay NOTE 2 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay *1. ■ HQ. PITCH One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. Parameter Range Description PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1–10 SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY NOTE Pitch shift precision *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ■ ROTARY One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0–100 Low-frequency filter HIGH 0–100 High-frequency filter ■ RING MOD. Two input, two output ring modulator. Parameter OSC, SELF OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ *1. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Description Modulation source: oscillator or input signal SOURCE FM NOTE 236 Range Effects Parameters ■ MOD. FILTER ■ DYNA. FILTER Two input, two output modulation filter. Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF OFFSET RESO. Parameter Range Description Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SOURCE INPUT, MIDI SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass DECAY *1 Filter frequency change decay speed 0–100 Filter frequency offset TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type 0–20 Filter resonance OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset LEVEL 0–100 Output level RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off LEVEL 0–100 Output Level NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) *1. ■ DYNA. FLANGE ■ DISTORTION Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. One input, two output distortion effect. Parameter Range Description DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction DST TYPE Parameter Range Description Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SOURCE INPUT, MIDI SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY *1 Decay speed OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset DIR. FB.GAIN –99 to +99% ■ AMP SIMULATE Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency One input, two output guitar amp simulator. LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain Parameter AMP TYPE Range *1 Description Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume BASS 0–100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0–100 High tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) Appendices *1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMBDX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 237 Effects Parameters ■ DYNA. PHASER ■ REV→CHORUS Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s SOURCE INPUT, MIDI INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DECAY *1 OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain Decay speed Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off ■ REV+CHORUS NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. *1. Reverb time ■ REV+FLANGE 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio Parameter DIFF. 0–10 Spread REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz DIFF. 0–10 Spread HPF High-pass filter cutoff frequency DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY HI. RATIO Description Range Description Reverb time LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. *1. 238 Description Reverb time Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters ■ REV→FLANGE ■ REV→SYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time Parameter INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) REV.BAL 0–100% HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU HPF Low-pass filter cutoff frequency THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MOD. DLY FB. GAIN WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. Description Reverb time *1. ■ REV→PAN ■ REV+SYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. Parameter Range Range Description Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density REV.BAL 0–100% 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth Panning direction FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. NOTE *1. DIR. *1 WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R *2. Appendices REV/SYM Reverb time This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 239 Effects Parameters ■ DELAY+ER. ■ DELAY→ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. Parameter Range Description Range Description 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio DLY/ER 0–100% Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY *1. *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 240 Parameter DELAY L LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Effects Parameters ■ DELAY+REV ■ DELAY→REV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Range Description Parameter Range Description 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio DLY/REV 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) DLY.BAL 0–100% HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV TIME INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DIFF. 0–10 Spread OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY SYNC NOTE L NOTE R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ■ DIST→DELAY One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series. Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD.NOT E *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DLY.BAL 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *2. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices Parameter DELAY L 241 Effects Parameters ■ MULTI FILTER ■ STEREO REVERB Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave). Two input, two output stereo reverb. Parameter Range Description Range Description 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type TYPE 1 LPF, HPF, BPF FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio TYPE 2 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance 0–100% LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass E/R BAL. TYPE 3 Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency HPF 0–100 Filter 3 level THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LEVEL 3 RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency ■ FREEZE ■ M. BAND DYNA. One input, two output basic sampler. Parameter Range REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT REC DLY PLY MODE TRG LVL Description In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal. –1000 to +1000 ms Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received. MOMENT, CONTI., INPUT In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal. –60 to 0 dB TRG MASK 0–1000 ms Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback) Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time. Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level PRESENCE –10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level CMP. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold CMP. RAT Compressor ratio 1:1 to 20:1 CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack CMP. REL *1 Compressor release time CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee CMP. BYP OFF/ON Compressor bypass LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay START *1 Playback start point in milliseconds EXP. THRE –54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Expander threshold END *1 Playback end point in milliseconds EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio LOOP *1 Loop start point in milliseconds EXP. REL *1 Expander release time LOOP NUM 0–100 Number of times the sample plays EXP. BYP OFF/ON Expander bypass –12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold PITCH –12 to +12 semitones LIM. THRE Playback pitch shift LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine LIM. REL *1 Limiter release time LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee LIM. BYP OFF/ON Limiter bypass MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages. START [SAMPLE] 0–131000 Playback start point in samples END [SAMPLE] 0–131000 Playback end point in samples LOOP [SAMPLE] 0–131000 Loop start point in samples *1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz) 242 Parameter REV TIME Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) Effects Parameters ■ M.BAND COMP Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level L-M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M-H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Low band threshold level MID THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Mid band threshold level HI. THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB High band threshold level RATIO 1:1 to 20:1 Compression ratio ATTACK 0–120 ms Compressor attack time RELEASE *1 Compressor release time KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee BYPASS OFF/ON Bypasses the compressor *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) ■ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.28–27.94 s*1 INI. DLY 0.0–120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) ROOM SIZE 0–28 Size of room DECAY 0–53 Gate closing speed HPF THRU, 22.0 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 1.00 kHz– 18.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb time Appendices *1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 243 Effects and tempo synchronization Effects and tempo synchronization Some of the LS9’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo. • Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization. 1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ. SYNC:.............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization. NOTE and TEMPO: .....These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization. DELAY and FREQ.:.......DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects. • How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows. If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO) Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) = (1/4) x 4 x (60/120) = 0.5 (sec) = 500 ms Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms. Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO) = 250 x (120/121) = 247.9 (ms) Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms. *a Rounded values are used for the calculation results. • Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF. • Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters. • It is a common value shared by all effects • You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.) This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example. Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60 Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the LS9 does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored. * The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values. 244 = 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32 = 1/8 = 1/6 = 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4 = 1/1 = 2/1 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table Program Change# 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 Scene/ Effect Scene ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 2 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Preset# Scene/ Effect Scene 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 Program Change# 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 Preset# Scene/ Effect Scene 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Preset# Scene/ Effect Preset# 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 Scene 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 1 245 Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 3 246 Program Change# 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 Scene/ Effect 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 Scene Preset# 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 000 No Assign LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 4 Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Scene/ Effect Preset# No Assign Program Change# 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 Scene/ Effect Preset# No Assign Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Scene/ Effect Preset# No Assign Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 5 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 13 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 6 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign Preset# No Assign Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 15 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 8 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 14 ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 7 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 16 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 9 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect RACK5 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 10 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect RACK6 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 11 Scene/Effect RACK7 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 Appendices Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 ■ Preset Bank/Ch# 12 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect RACK8 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 247 Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table ■ Bank/Ch# Program Change# 248 Scene/ Effect User# Program Change# Scene/ Effect User# Program Change# 001 044 087 002 045 088 003 046 089 004 047 090 005 048 091 006 049 092 007 050 093 008 051 094 009 052 095 010 053 096 011 054 097 012 055 098 013 056 099 014 057 100 015 058 101 016 059 102 017 060 103 018 061 104 019 062 105 020 063 106 021 064 107 022 065 108 023 066 109 024 067 110 025 068 111 026 069 112 027 070 113 028 071 114 029 072 115 030 073 116 031 074 117 032 075 118 033 076 119 034 077 120 035 078 121 036 079 122 037 080 123 038 081 124 039 082 125 040 083 126 041 084 127 042 085 128 043 086 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Scene/ Effect User# Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Parameters that can be assigned to control changes NO ASSIGN Parameter 1 0 ON INPUT LOW Q OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) INPUT CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) LOW G LOW MID Q LOW MID F LOW MID G INPUT EQ HIGH MID Q HIGH MID F CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) HIGH F INPUT CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R LPF ON INPUT CH 1–CH 32 OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) INPUT ATT ON CH 1–CH 32{64} INPUT HPF HIGH Q HIGH G LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE INPUT ON INPUT CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R LOW Q BALANCE OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–STEREO R ON CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R LOW G TO STEREO ON CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R LOW MID F TO MONO ON LCR MIX SEND CSR CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R MIX 1–MIX 16 MIX TO MTRX LOW MID G HIGH MID Q OUTPUT EQ HIGH MID F HIGH F HIGH G CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R LOW TYPE MIX 1 LVL L – MIX 16 LVL L HIGH TYPE MIX 1/ 2 PAN – MIX 15/16 PAN HIGH LPF ON LOW HPF ON MIX 1–MIX 16 OUTPUT ATT OUTPUT PAN ON MTRX1 POINT – MTRX8 POINT ATTACK MTRX1 ON – MTRX8 ON RANGE MTRX1 LVL H – MTRX8 LVL H MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 16 STEREO L–MONO(C) THRESHOLD HOLD H MIX 1–MIX 16 INPUT DYNA1 HOLD L DECAY/REL H CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R DECAY/REL L MTRX1/2 PAN – MTRX7/8 PAN RATIO MTRX1 POINT – MTRX8 POINT GAIN H MTRX1 ON – MTRX8 ON KNEE/WIDTH MTRX1 LVL H – MTRX8 LVL H MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) HIGH Q MTRX1 LVL L – MTRX8 LVL L ST TO MTRX LOW MID Q MIX 1 PRE – MIX 16 POINT TO MONO ON CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R LOW F HIGH MID G TO ST ON MIX TO ST CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R ON MIX 1 ON – MIX16 ON MIX 1 LVL H – MIX 16 LVL H CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R HIGH MID G FREQ PAN/BALANCE Parameter 2 LOW F INPUT CH ON DIRECT OUT Parameter 1 CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R FADER L INSERT Mode — FADER H PHASE Parameter 2 Appendices Mode GAIN L STEREO L–MONO(C) MTRX1 LVL L – MTRX8 LVL L MTRX1/2 PAN – MTRX7/8 PAN LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 249 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H INPUT DYNA2 RELEASE L RATIO CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R GAIN H GAIN L KNEE/WIDTH FILTER FREQ ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H OUTPUT DYNA1 RELEASE L RATIO MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) GAIN H GAIN L KNEE/WIDTH BYPASS EFFECT MIX BAL RACK5–8 PARAM 1 H – PARAM 32 L ON A GEQ ON B GAIN A 1 – GAIN A 31 RACK1–8 GAIN B 1 – GAIN B 31 MUTE MASTER RECALL SAFE 250 ON MASTER 1–MASTER 8 ON CH 1–CH 32{64} STIN1L–STIN4R MIX 1–MIX 16 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) RACK1–8 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Control change parameter assignments Control change parameter assignments ■ PRESET Control Change# Parameter 2 Control Change# 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 11 CH11 74 CH11 12 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 13 Mode FADER H Parameter 1 INPUT Mode CH ON Parameter 1 INPUT Parameter 2 CH12 CH13 CH24 25 88 26 89 CH 1 27 90 CH 2 91 CH 3 29 92 CH 4 30 93 CH 5 31 94 CH 6 28 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN 33 CH 1 95 CH 7 34 CH 2 102 CH 8 35 CH 3 103 CH 9 36 CH 4 104 CH10 37 CH 5 105 CH11 38 CH 6 106 39 CH 7 107 40 CH 8 108 CH14 41 CH 9 109 CH15 42 CH10 110 CH16 43 CH11 111 CH17 44 CH12 112 CH18 CH13 113 CH19 46 CH14 114 CH20 47 CH15 115 CH21 48 CH16 116 CH22 49 CH17 117 CH23 50 CH18 118 51 CH19 119 52 CH20 53 CH21 54 CH22 55 CH23 56 CH24 FADER L INPUT INPUT CH12 CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN Appendices 45 PAN/BALANCE 57 58 59 60 NO ASSIGN 61 62 63 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 251 Control change parameter assignments Control Change# Mode Parameter 2 Control Change# 1 66 2 67 3 68 4 69 5 70 6 71 7 72 8 73 9 74 10 75 11 76 12 77 13 78 14 79 15 80 16 81 17 82 18 83 19 84 20 85 21 86 22 87 23 88 24 89 25 90 26 91 27 92 28 93 29 94 30 95 31 102 33 103 34 104 35 105 36 106 37 107 38 108 39 109 40 110 41 111 42 112 43 113 44 114 45 115 46 116 47 117 48 118 49 119 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 252 Parameter 1 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 NRPN parameter assignments INPUT MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND INPUT MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND From (HEX) 0000 0060 007E 00DE 013E 019E 01FE 025E 02BE 031E 04FE 0514 052A 0540 0556 056C 0582 0598 05B6 0616 0634 0694 06F4 0754 07B4 0814 0874 08D4 0AB4 0ACA 0AE0 0AF6 0B0C 0B22 0B38 0B4E To (HEX) 0047 007D 00C5 0125 0185 01E5 0245 02A5 0305 0365 0513 0529 053F 0555 056B 0581 0597 05AD 05FD 0633 067B 06DB 073B 079B 07FB 085B 08BB 091B 0AC9 0ADF 0AF5 0B0B 0B21 0B37 0B4D 0B63 MIX TO ST 0B64 0B6B INPUT INPUT MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND 0B6C 0BCC 0C2C 0C4A 0CAA 0D0A 0D6A 0DCA 0E2A 0E8A 0EEA 10CA 10D2 10DA 10E2 10EA 10F2 10FA 1102 112A 1132 113A 1142 114A 1152 115A 1162 0BB3 0BEB 0C49 0C91 0CF1 0D51 0DB1 0E11 0E71 0ED1 0F31 10D1 10D9 10E1 10E9 10F1 10F9 1101 1109 1131 1139 1141 1149 1151 1159 1161 1169 Parameter FADER INPUT to Mix9–16 LEVEL MIX1–16, STEREO LR to MATRIX LEVEL ON INPUT to Mix9–16 ON MIX1–16, STEREO LR to MATRIX ON MIX1–8 to STEREO ON PHASE INSERT ON INPUT to Mix9–16 PRE/POST INPUT57–64 to Mix1–8 LEVEL INPUT57–64 to Mix1–8 ON MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE FREQ MIX1–2 MIX3–4 MIX5–6 MIX7–8 From (HEX) 118A 1192 119A 11A2 11AA 11B2 11BA 11C2 11EA 11F2 11FA 1202 120A 1212 121A To (HEX) 1191 1199 11A1 11A9 11B1 11B9 11C1 11C9 11F1 11F9 1201 1209 1211 1219 1221 ON 1232 1239 ON 123A 1241 ON 1242 1249 RATIO KNEE/WIDTH GAIN HIGH ONLY/FULL INPUT49–64 DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ ON LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q EQ INPUT, MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN ATT HPF ON LPF ON ON ATTACK THRESHOLD INPUT DYNAMICS1 RANGE HOLD DECAY/RELEASE ON ATTACK INPUT DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD RELEASE MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR DYNAMICS1 RATIO GAIN KNEE/WIDTH PAN/BALANCE INPUT MIX9–10 INPUT to Mix9/10– MIX11–12 15/16 PAN MIX13–14 MIX15–16 MATRIX1, 2 MATRIX3, 4 MIX1–16, STEREO LR to MATRIX PAN MATRIX5, 6 MATRIX7, 8 MIX1–8 to STEREO MIX TO ST PAN BALANCE MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR 124A 125A 126A 127A 128A 1304 1382 1400 147E 14FC 157A 15F8 1676 16F4 1772 17F0 186E 18EC 196A 19E8 1A66 1AE4 1B44 1BA4 1C04 1C64 1CC4 1D24 1DA2 1E20 1E9E 1F1C 1F9A 2018 2096 20F6 2156 21B6 2216 2336 234C 2362 2378 1259 1269 1279 1289 1299 1381 13FF 147D 14FB 1579 15F7 1675 16F3 1771 17EF 186D 18EB 1969 19B1 1A65 1AE3 1B2B 1B8B 1BEB 1C4B 1CAB 1D0B 1DA1 1E1F 1E9D 1F1B 1F99 2017 2095 20DD 213D 219D 21FD 225D 234B 2361 2377 238D 238E 2395 2396 23B3 Parameter INPUT57–64 to MIX1–8 PRE/POST INPUT57–64 EQ INPUT57–64 HPF INPUT57–64 to MIX1–8 PAN INPUT57–64 to STEREO INPUT57–64 RECALL SAFE INPUT57–64 to MONO INPUT49–64 DYNAMICS1 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices NRPN parameter assignments 253 NRPN parameter assignments Parameter RACK5–8(EFFECT) RACK1–3(GEQ) FADER 254 BYPASS MIX BALANCE PARAM1 PARAM2 PARAM3 PARAM4 PARAM5 PARAM6 PARAM7 PARAM8 PARAM9 PARAM10 PARAM11 PARAM12 PARAM13 PARAM14 PARAM15 PARAM16 PARAM17 PARAM18 PARAM19 PARAM20 PARAM21 PARAM22 PARAM23 PARAM24 PARAM25 PARAM26 PARAM27 PARAM28 PARAM29 PARAM30 PARAM31 PARAM32 ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 MONO(C) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual From (HEX) 26B4 26BC 26C4 26CC 26D4 26DC 26E4 26EC 26F4 26FC 2704 270C 2714 271C 2724 272C 2734 273C 2744 274C 2754 275C 2764 276C 2774 277C 2784 278C 2794 279C 27A4 27AC 27B4 27BC 27C4 27CA 27D0 27D6 27DC 27E2 27E8 27EE 27F4 27FA 2800 2806 280C 2812 2818 281E 2824 282A 2830 2836 283C 2842 2848 284E 2854 285A 2860 2866 286C 2872 2878 287E 28E4 To (HEX) 26B7 26BF 26C7 26CF 26D7 26DF 26E7 26EF 26F7 26FF 2707 270F 2717 271F 2727 272F 2737 273F 2747 274F 2757 275F 2767 276F 2777 277F 2787 278F 2797 279F 27A7 27AF 27B7 27BF 27C9 27CF 27D5 27DB 27E1 27E7 27ED 27F3 27F9 27FF 2805 280B 2811 2817 281D 2823 2829 282F 2835 283B 2841 2847 284D 2853 2859 285F 2865 286B 2871 2877 287D 2883 28E8 MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MONO(C) MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND From (HEX) 28EA 292A 296A 29AA 29EA 2A2A 2A6A 2AAA 2BEA 2BF0 2BF6 2BFC 2C02 2C08 2C0E 2C14 2C2A 2C30 2C70 2CB0 2CF0 2D30 2D70 2DB0 2DF0 To (HEX) 2929 2969 29A9 29E9 2A29 2A69 2AA9 2AE9 2BEE 2BF4 2BFA 2C00 2C06 2C0C 2C12 2C18 2C2E 2C6F 2CAF 2CEF 2D2F 2D6F 2DAF 2DEF 2E2F MATRIX SEND 2F30 2F34 MIX TO ST 2F36 2F3D MONO(C) MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND ON LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN HPF ON LPF ON LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE 2F46 2F4C 2F8C 2FCC 300C 304C 308C 30CC 310C 325E 3264 326A 3270 3276 327C 3282 3288 328E 3294 329A 32A0 32A6 32AC 32B2 3440 3480 34C0 34E4 2F4A 2F8B 2FCB 300B 304B 308B 30CB 310B 314B 3262 3268 326E 3274 327A 3280 3286 328C 3292 3298 329E 32A4 32AA 32B0 32B6 347F 34BF 34E2 3506 INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R HPF FREQ 3640 367F MONO(C) DYNAMICS1 ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE RATIO GAIN KNEE/WIDTH 3680 3686 368C 3692 3698 369E 36A4 3684 368A 3690 3696 369C 36A2 36A8 Parameter INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R to Mix1–8 LEVEL MONO(C) to Matrix LEVEL ON INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R to Mix1–8 ON MONO(C) to Matrix ON MIX9–16 to STEREO ON INSERT INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R to MIX1–8 PRE/POST MONO(C) EQ INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R EQ MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LRC EQ MIX1–2 MIX3–4 MIX5–6 MIX7–8 MATRIX1,2 MATRIX3, 4 MATRIX5, 6 MATRIX7, 8 From (HEX) 36AA 36EA 372A 376A 382A 3830 3836 383C To (HEX) 36E9 3729 3769 37A9 382E 3834 383A 3840 MIX TO ST 3842 3849 ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 ON CSR ON 3852 3858 385E 3864 386A 3870 3876 387C 3882 3888 388E 3894 389A 38A0 38A6 38AC 38B2 38B8 38BE 38C4 38CA 38D0 38D6 38DC 38E2 38E8 38EE 38F4 38FA 3900 3906 390C 3912 396A 39C2 3857 385D 3863 3869 386F 3875 387B 3881 3887 388D 3893 3899 389F 38A5 38AB 38B1 38B7 38BD 38C3 38C9 38CF 38D5 38DB 38E1 38E7 38ED 38F3 38F9 38FF 3905 390B 3911 3969 39C1 3A01 ON 3A02 3A41 ON ON INPUT GAIN 1,9,17,25 INPUT GAIN 2,10,18,26 INPUT GAIN 3,11,19,27 INPUT GAIN 4,12,20,28 INPUT GAIN 5,13,21,29 INPUT GAIN 6,14,22,30 INPUT GAIN 7,15,23,31 INPUT GAIN 8,16,24,32 INPUT +48v 1,9,17,25 INPUT +48v 2,10,18,26 INPUT +48v 3,11,19,27 INPUT +48v 4,12,20,28 INPUT +48v 5,13,21,29 INPUT +48v 6,14,22,30 INPUT +48v 7,15,23,31 INPUT +48v 8,16,24,32 EXTERNAL GAIN1 EXTERNAL GAIN2 EXTERNAL GAIN3 EXTERNAL GAIN4 EXTERNAL GAIN5 3A5A 3A66 3B0F 3B1F 3B2F 3B3F 3B4F 3B5F 3B6F 3B7F 3B8F 3B9F 3BAF 3BBF 3BCF 3BDF 3BEF 3BFF 3B06 3B16 3B26 3B36 3B46 3A61 3AEA 3B12 3B22 3B32 3B42 3B52 3B62 3B72 3B82 3B92 3BA2 3BB2 3BC2 3BD2 3BE2 3BF2 3C02 3B09 3B19 3B29 3B39 3B49 Parameter INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R to MIX1–8 PAN MONO(C) to Matrix1–8 PAN MIX9–16 to STEREO ON RACK4–6(GEQ) LCR IN, MIX DIRECT OUT INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R to STEREO MUTE MASTER RECALL SAFE HA EXTERNAL GAIN6 EXTERNAL GAIN7 EXTERNAL GAIN8 EXTERNAL +48v 1 EXTERNAL +48v 2 EXTERNAL +48v 3 EXTERNAL +48v 4 EXTERNAL +48v 5 EXTERNAL +48v 6 EXTERNAL +48v 7 EXTERNAL +48v 8 EXTERNAL HPF1 EXTERNAL HPF2 EXTERNAL HPF3 EXTERNAL HPF4 EXTERNAL HPF5 EXTERNAL HPF6 EXTERNAL HPF7 EXTERNAL HPF8 From (HEX) 3B56 3B66 3B76 3B86 3B96 3BA6 3BB6 3BC6 3BD6 3BE6 3BF6 3C06 3C16 3C26 3C36 3C46 3C56 3C66 3C76 To (HEX) 3B59 3B69 3B79 3B89 3B99 3BA9 3BB9 3BC9 3BD9 3BE9 3BF9 3C09 3C19 3C29 3C39 3C49 3C59 3C69 3C79 ON 3C86 3CC5 3CC6 3CD6 3D06 3D36 3D66 3D76 3D86 3D96 3D98 3D9A 3D9C 3DD4 3E0C 3E44 3E7C 3EB4 3EB8 3EBC 3EC0 3EC4 3EC8 3ECC 3ED0 3ED4 3ED8 3EDC 3EE0 3EE4 3EE8 3EEC 3EF0 3EF4 3EF8 3EFC 3F00 3F04 3F08 3F0C 3F10 3F14 3F18 3F1C 3F20 3F24 3F28 3F2C 3F30 3F34 3CD5 3CF5 3D25 3D55 3D75 3D85 3D95 3D97 3D99 3D9B 3DD3 3E0B 3E43 3E7B 3EB3 3EB7 3EBB 3EBF 3EC3 3EC7 3ECB 3ECF 3ED3 3ED7 3EDB 3EDF 3EE3 3EE7 3EEB 3EEF 3EF3 3EF7 3EFB 3EFF 3F03 3F07 3F0B 3F0F 3F13 3F17 3F1B 3F1F 3F23 3F27 3F2B 3F2F 3F33 3F4E Parameter HA INPUT1–56, STIN 1L–4R to MONO MIX to MONO ON ON SLOT OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON OMNI OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON DIGITAL OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW RATIO INPUT1–48, STIN KNEE/WIDTH 1L–4R DYNAMICS1 GAIN HIGH ONLY/FULL INPUT1–48, STIN 1L–4R DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 RACK7–8(GEQ) GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 EQ ATT LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices NRPN parameter assignments 255 Mixing parameter operation applicability Mixing parameter operation applicability This table indicates how the behaviors of each of the input channel and output channel parameters are affected by Stereo, Link, Recall Safe, and User Level settings. ■ Input Channels Parameter HA NAME, ICON Stereo *3 O LINK RECALL SAFE USER LEVEL INPUT HA INPUT HA INPUT HA INPUT NAME INPUT NAME LCR O INPUT ALL Insert On O INPUT ALL Direct Out On/Level O INPUT ALL On O INPUT ON INPUT ON Fader O INPUT FADER INPUT FADER Pan/ Balance O Att O INPUT EQ INPUT EQ HPF O INPUT EQ INPUT EQ EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT EQ INPUT DYNAMICS1*1 INPUT DYNAMICS2*1 INPUT DYNA1 INPUT DYNA2 Dynamics1 O*1 Dynamics2 O*1 Mute Assign To Mix ON To Mix LEVEL To Mix PRE/POST To Stereo/ Mono Cue Key In Cue Mute Safe Recall Safe Fade Time INPUT ALL INPUT ALL O O O INPUT MIX ON*2 INPUT MIX SEND*2 INPUT MIX ON INPUT MIX SEND O INPUT ALL O INPUT ALL O O O O O INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PROCESSING INPUT FADER/ON INPUT FADER/ON INPUT FADER/ON INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PROCESSING MUTE GROUP ASSIGN INPUT FADER/ON INPUT FADER/ON INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PROCESSING STORE *1 Except for Key In Source *2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–16 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled. *3 ST IN 1–4 only. ■ MIX Channels Parameter NAME, ICON LCR Insert On On Fader Pan/Balance Att EQ Dynamics1 Mute Assign To Mix ON To Mix LEVEL To Matrix On To Matrix LEVEL To Matrix POINT To Stereo/Mono Cue Mute Safe Recall Safe Fade Time Stereo O O O O O O O O*1 O O O O O O O O O RECALL SAFE MIX NAME MIX ALL MIX ALL MIX ON MIX FADER MIX ALL MIX EQ MIX EQ MIX DYNA1 MIX ALL WITH MIX SEND WITH MIX SEND MIX to MATRIX ON MIX to MATRIX SEND MIX ALL MIX ALL *1 Except for Key In Source 256 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual USER LEVEL OUTPUT NAME MIX PROCESSING MIX PROCESSING MIX FADER/ON MIX FADER/ON MIX FADER/ON MIX PROCESSING MIX PROCESSING MIX PROCESSING MUTE ASSIGN WITH MIX SEND WITH MIX SEND MIX FADER/ON MIX FADER/ON MIX PROCESSING MIX PROCESSING STORE ■ MATRIX Channels Parameter NAME, ICON Stereo RECALL SAFE MATRIX NAME Insert On O MATRIX ALL On O MATRIX ON Fader O MATRIX FADER Pan/Balance O MATRIX ALL Att O MATRIX EQ Dynamics1 O*1 EQ O Mute Assign O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX EQ MATRIX ALL To Matrix On WITH MATRIX SEND To Matrix LEVEL WITH MATRIX SEND Cue Mute Safe Recall Safe Fade Time O O O O USER LEVEL OUTPUT NAME MATRIX PROCESSING MATRIX FADER/ON MATRIX FADER/ON MATRIX FADER/ON MATRIX PROCESSING MATRIX PROCESSING MATRIX PROCESSING MUTE ASSIGN WITH MATRIX SEND WITH MATRIX SEND STORE *1 Except for Key In Source ■ STEREO, MONO Channels Parameter Stereo *2 RECALL SAFE STEREO, MONO NAME NAME, ICON Insert On O STEREO, MONO ALL On O STEREO, MONO ON Fader O STEREO, MONO FADER Pan/Balance O STEREO, MONO ALL Att O STEREO, MONO EQ Dynamics1 O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 EQ O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO ALL STEREO, MONO to MATRIX ON STEREO, MONO to MATRIX SEND Mute Assign O To Matrix On O To Matrix LEVEL O To Matrix POINT O Cue Mute Safe Recall Safe Fade Time O O O O *1 Except for Key In Source *2 STEREO channel only. STEREO, MONO ALL USER LEVEL OUTPUT NAME STEREO, MONO PROCESSING STEREO, MONO FADER/ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON STEREO, MONO PROCESSING STEREO, MONO PROCESSING STEREO, MONO PROCESSING MUTE ASSIGN STEREO, MONO FADER/ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON STEREO, MONO PROCESSING STORE Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys Function NO ASSIGN PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 LED — — RECALL — Recall the currently selected scene STORE — Store to the currently selected scene SCENE +1, LIST UP SCENE +1 selects the next scene number. LIST UP scrolls the scene list upward by one. Simultaneously pressing [SCENE ▲] and [SCENE ▼] keys will return to the current scene number. After scene 300, wrap around to scene 000. ▲ Dark Flash SCENE Explanation No assignment ▼ SCENE -1, LIST DOWN SCENE -1 selects the previous scene number. LIST UP scrolls the scene list upward by one. Simultaneously pressing [SCENE ▲] and [SCENE ▼] keys will return to the current scene number. After scene 000, wrap around to scene 300. INC RECALL — Recall the scene of the next existing number DEC RECALL — Recall the scene of the previous existing number DIRECT RECALL SCENE #000–#300 Directly recall the scene of the specified number RECALL UNDO — Lit if UNDO is possible STORE UNDO — Lit if UNDO is possible Execute STORE UNDO LATCH ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch TALKBACK on/off UNLATCH ON: lit, OFF: dark Turn TALKBACK on while pressed SELECTED CH ASSIGN — Lit if assignment is the same When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an output channel to switch the assignment on/ off, and its state will be remembered. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. OSCILLATOR ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch the OSC on/off When this turns on, the OSC popup window will appear SELECTED CH ASSIGN — Lit if assignment is the same When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an output channel to switch the assignment on/ off, and its state will be remembered. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. — — Flash Clear all CUE settings together MONITOR ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch MONITOR on/off Execute RECALL UNDO TALKBACK OSCILLATOR CUE CLEAR MONITOR EFFECT BYPASS SELECTED CH ASSIGN — Lit if assignment is the same When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off, and its state will be remembered. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. SOURCE SELECT STEREO L/R, MONO(C), LCR, 2TR IN L/R, INPUT 15/16 {31/32}, PLAYBACK OUT, DEFINE Lit if the selected monitor source is on Recall the selected signal to the monitor DIMMER ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch the monitor dimmer function on/off MONO MONITOR — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch MONO MONITOR on/off MONITOR ON MAS— TER FADER ON: lit, OFF: dark If this is on, you can use the master fader to control the monitor level, and the ON key to switch the monitor output on/off ON: lit, OFF: dark Bypass the specified effect Blink in synchronization to the tempo Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen RACK 5–8 — CURRENT PAGE — RACK 5–8 — TAP TEMPO MUTE MASTER METER Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect MUTE GROUP 1–8 — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off PEAK HOLD ON — ON: lit, OFF: dark Turn the meter PEAK HOLD function on/off STEREO/MONO(C) SEL — MONO (C): lit, STEREO: dark Switch the top panel STEREO L/R METER function LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices TALKBACK ON 257 Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 LED Explanation When storing a page: Flash PAGE BOOKMARK — PAGE CHANGE When showing a memorized page: Blink Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (press and release the key within two secWhen not showing a onds). Popup windows can also be memorized. In the case memorized page: Lit of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized. Not memorized: Dark CH SELECT CLOSE POPUP — Flash Close the displayed popup window INC, DEC — Flash Increment/Decrement the channel selection SET [+48V] — SET [Ø] — SET [PRE SEND] — SET [TO STEREO] — While pressing: Lit SET [TO MONO] — Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off. SET [TO LCR] — SET [INSERT ON] — SET [DIRECT OUT] — While pressing: Lit Hold down this key and press the SELECTED CH encoder to return to the default value. You can also return to the default value by moving the cursor to the knob or fader in the LCD screen, then holding down this key and pressing the [ENTER] key. While pressing: Lit While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the fader of that channel to nominal level. You can also push a SELECTED SEND encoder to set the send level to nominal level. You can also return to nominal level by moving the cursor to the knob or fader in the LCD screen, then holding down this key and pressing the [ENTER] key. SET BY SEL SET DEFAULT VALUE — — SET NOMINAL LEVEL — SENDS ON FADER MIX1–16, MATRIX1– — 8 Blinks in SENDS ON FADER mode Recall the Sends On Fader function to the selected MIX or MATRIX GEQ FADER ASSIGN ON: lit, OFF: dark Turn the GEQ Fader Assign function on/off. — — Same as the indicaPLAY/PAUSE, STOP, FF/ tion for the correNext, REW/Previous, sponding LCD REC button Recorder transport functions AUTOREC While pressing: Lit Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY. Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is executed during recording, the file being recorded will first be closed, and then recording will continue with a new file. TRANSPORT RECORDER HELP 258 DIRECT PLAY Song title or file name of audio files While pressing: Lit Start playback of a specified audio file from the begining only once. The audio file to be played must be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. Please note that you won’t be able to specify a file that is in the root directory or another folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will change to \YPE\SONGS\. — — ON: lit, OFF: dark Switch the Help function on/off LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 MASTER — OVERVIEW CH1–16, CH17–32, {CH33–48, CH49–64 ,} STIN, MIX, MATRIX, ST/MONO, CUSTOM FADER LAYER CH1–16, {CUSTOM FADER LAYER CH17–32}, CUSTOM FADER LAYER STIN LED Explanation SELECTED CHANNEL — PATCH EDITOR INPUT PATCH, OUTPUT PATCH, INPUT INSERT PATCH, OUTPUT INSERT PATCH, DIRECT OUT PATCH, PATCH LIST RACK EDITOR RACK, RACK1–8 METER INPUT METER, OUTPUT METER, CUSTOM FADER LAYER GROUP/LINK MUTE GROUP, CHANNEL LINK SCENE SCENE MEMORY, RECALL SAFE, FADE TIME LS9 EDITOR Flash Access the LS9 EDITOR screen Appendices LIBRARY DYNAMICS LIBRARY, INPUT EQ LIBRARY, OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY, EFFECT LIBRARY, GEQ LIBRARY LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 259 MIDI Data Format MIDI Data Format This section explains the format of the data that the LS9 is able to understand, send, and receive. 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1.1 NOTE OFF Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data (8n) Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1000nnnn 8n Note off message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored) 1.2 NOTE ON (9n) Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1001nnnn 9n Note on message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off) 1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN]. Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON. If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 249. If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter. Transmission If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 249. If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 249. CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to LS9 Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.) CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks. STATUS DATA STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn 00 0vvvvvvv vv 1011nnnn Bn 20 0vvvvvvv vv Control change Control number (00) Control Value (0-127) Control change Control number (32) Control Value (0-127) If [TABLE] is selected STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn Control change 0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95, 102-119) * 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) * Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used. * Control number 6, 38 can be used. 260 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual paramSteps add mod curValue = paramMax–paramMin + 1; = paramWidth / paramSteps; = paramWidth–add * paramSteps; = paramSteps * add + mod / 2; (1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value; (2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps paramWidth = 16384; (2-1) When High and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low); (2-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low); (2-3) When only High data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127); (3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152 steps paramWidth = 2097152; (3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); (3-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low); (3-3) When only Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128; (3-4) When only High data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384; (3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); (3-6) When only High and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low); (3-7) When only High and Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128; if ( rxValue > paramWidth) rxValue = paramWidth; param = ( rxValue–mod / 2) / add; If [NRPN] is selected 1011nnnn Bn Control change 01100010 62 NRPN LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB * The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted. STATUS DATA MIDI Data Format 1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) Reception If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memory and effect library are recalled according to the settings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST]. Transmission If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory and effect library are recalled. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. If the recalled scene memory and effect library has been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted. PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to LS9 Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.) You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH. If SINGLE is selected You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH. You can choose whether a bank select message will be added. A bank of up to 16 can be specified. If MULTI is selected The Rx and Tx channels will be the same. The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages will not be added. You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels. STATUS DATA 1100nnnn Cn Program change 0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127) 3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3.1 MMC < MMC STOP > Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000001 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 01 F7 STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000010 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 02 F7 (F8) Reception This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times per quarter note. Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings. STATUS (FE) Reception Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms. This message is not subject to echoing. STATUS STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Play(MCS) End of exclusive 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000011 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 03 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Deferred Play(MCS) End of exclusive Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts recording. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000110 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 06 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Record strobe End of exclusive Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND 11111110 FE Active sensing EOX 2.4 SYSTEM RESET End of exclusive < MMC PAUSE > 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2.3 ACTIVE SENSING Stop(MCS) Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback. < MMC RECORD STROBE > 2.2 TIMING CLOCK Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id < MMC DEFERED PLAY > 2.1 SONG SELECT STATUS 11110011 F3 Song select Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127) Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback. EOX (F3) Real time System exclusive < MMC PLAY > 2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder. System exclusive message 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00001001 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 09 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Pause(MCS) End of exclusive (FF) Reception When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared). This message is not subject to echoing. 11111111 FF System reset Appendices STATUS LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 261 MIDI Data Format 3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE 3.2 BULK DUMP Command rx/tx F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 12 mm … mm dd dd … ee F7 F0 43 2n 3E 12 mm … mm dd dd F7 rx/tx rx Function BULK DUMP DATA BULK DUMP REQUEST The LS9 uses the following data types for a bulk dump. Module Name(mm) SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Mixer Setup Outport Setup Monitor Setup MIDI Setup Lib Number Program Change Table Control Change Table Preference (Current) Preference (Admin) Preference (Guest) User Defined Keys (Current) User Defined Keys (Admin) User Defined Keys (Guest) Custom Fader Layer (Current) Custom Fader Layer (Admin) Custom Fader Layer (Guest) User Level (Current) User Level (Guest) “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” “MIXERSET” “OUT_PORT” “MONITOR_” “MIDI_SET” “LIB_NUM_” “PRGMCHG_” “CTRLCHG_” “PREF_CUR” “PREF_ADM” “PREF_GST” “UDEF_CUR” “UDEF_ADM” “UDEF_GST” “CFAD_CUR” “CFAD_ADM” “CFAD_GST” “UKEY_CUR” “UKEY_GST” Data Number(dd) *1) *14) *15) *2) *7) *8) *3) *9) *10) *11) *4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *5) *12) *6) *13) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) *1) 0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only), *2) 1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only) *3) 1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only) *4) 1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only) *5) 0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only) *6) 1–199 Effect Library Number (1–57 Request Only) *7) 512–575 Input 1–64, *8) 576–583 STIN 1L–4R, *9) 768–783 MIX 1–16, *10) 1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8 (LS9-32 only), *11) 1280–1282 STEREO L–C, *12) 512–519 GEQ 1–8, *13) 512–515 EFFECT 1–4, *14) 512 Current Data, *15) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe, Reception This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON. This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH]. Transmission If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number. In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number. Command F0 43 1n 3E 12 … F7 RARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 12 … F7 PARAMETER REQUEST [Recovery from bulk data to actual data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]); } 262 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual function LS9 native parameter change rx/tx LS9 native parameter request 4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP 4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F [Conversion from actual data to bulk data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I); } b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F; } rx/tx 4 PARAMETER CHANGE details Data is lost when you write to the preset library. The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a LS9. To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement, and set bit 7 to 0. Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk Dump Request is received. A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump Request. In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of 7-bit data. rx/tx EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 0ccccccc F0 43 1n 3E 12 cc System exclusive message 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 eh el ih il ch cl dd : F7 Element no High. Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 Element no Low. Index no High. Index no Low. Channel no High. Channel no Low. Data End of exclusive MIDI Data Format Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA EOX 4.1.3 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 0ccccccc 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 12 cc eh el ih il ch cl F7 System exclusive message 4.2.2 Function Name FUNCTION NAME Store Recall Unknown Factor Store Unknown Factor Recall Store Undo (only Scene) Recall Undo (only Scene) Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 Element no High. Element no Low. Index no High. Index no Low. 4.2.3 Module Name MODULE NAME Scene Input EQ Output EQ Dynamics GEQ Effect 0x01 00000001 Channel no Low. End of exclusive Function “LibStr__“ NAME Current Scene/Setup/Backup/ User Setup Data “LibUnStr“ 4.2 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY STORE, RECALL – 4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” Channel no High. Data category DATA CATEGORY “LibStr__” “LibRcl__” “LibUnStr” “LibUnRcl” “LibStrUd” “LibRclUd” F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 12 LS9 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Number High nl Number Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive “LibRcl__“ “LibUnRcl“ SCENE Number 1- 300 *5) channel*1) INPUT EQ LIB 41- 199 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 4- 199 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 42- 199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) GEQ LIB 1- 199 *6) EFFECT LIB 58- 199 *7) SCENE 1- 300 0 INPUT EQ LIB 41- 199 0 OUTPUT EQ LIB 4- 199 0 Dynamics LIB 42- 199 0 GEQ LIB 1- 199 0 EFFECT LIB 58- 199 0 SCENE 0- 300 *5) INPUT EQ LIB 1- 199 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 1- 199 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 1- 199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) GEQ LIB 0- 199 *6) EFFECT LIB 1- 199 *7) SCENE 0 *5) INPUT EQ LIB 0 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 0 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) GEQ LIB 0 *6) EFFECT LIB 0 *7) “LibStrUd“ SCENE 0 0 “LibRclUd“ SCENE 0 0 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx *1) 0:CH1–63:CH64 64:ST IN 1L–71:ST IN 4R *2) 256:MIX1–271:MIX16 *3) 512:MATRIX1–519:MATRIX8 *4) 1024:STEREO L–1026:MONO(C) *5) 512:will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one. *6) 0:RACK1–7:RACK8 If a GEQ is mounted in RACK 1–8. *7) 0:RACK5–3:RACK8 If an effect is mounted in RACK 5–8. *8) 1280:CH 1–1343:CH 64 1344:STIN 1L–1351:STIN 4R (Dynamics2) Appendices 4.1.2 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 263 MIDI Data Format 4.3 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY EDIT – 4.4 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE – 4.3.1 4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library title will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 4.3.2 F0 43 1n 3E 12 00 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 OTHER DATA "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) sh number -source start High sl number -source start Low eh number -source end High el number -source end Low dh number -destination start High dl number -destination to start Low F7 End of exclusive Function Name FUNCTION NAME Copy Paste Clear Cut Insert Edit Undo 4.3.3 System exclusive message 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0sssssss 0sssssss 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0ddddddd 0ddddddd EOX 11110111 264 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is received. ”LibCpy__” ”LibPst__” ”LibClr__” ”LibCut__” ”LibIns__” ”LibEdtUd” Source start Valid – Valid Valid – – Source end – – – – – – Destination start – Valid – – Valid – Module Name MODULE NAME SCENE LIB “SCENE___“ INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB “INEQ____“ “OUTEQ___“ “DYNA____“ “GEQ_____“ “EFFECT__“ LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual function Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo Only Copy Only Copy Only Copy Only Copy Only Copy STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 F0 43 1n 3E 12 00 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 OTHER DATA 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0000dddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd EOX 11110111 "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "A" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Scene/Library number High nl Scene/Library number Low eh Element High el Element Low ih Index High il Index Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low dd Data28–31bit dd Data21–27bit dd Data14–20bit dd Data7–13bit dd Data0–6bit F7 End of exclusive MIDI Data Format 4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) Receive The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer OTHER DATA "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "A" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Scene/Library number High nl Scene/Library number Low eh Element High el Element Low ih Index High il Index Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME Module Name MODULE NAME SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” number 0-300 (0:response only) 1-199 (1-40:response only) 1-199 (1-3:response only) 1-199 (1-41:response only) 0-199 (0:response only) 1-199 (1–57:response only) Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Transmission When LS9 receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change. This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only. Top number is requested number or more. -ExampleSCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101 Request Number:0 Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7 Request Number: 8 Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10 Request Number: 11 Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101 Request Number: 102 Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0 LS9 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc EOX 11110111 4.4.3 F0 43 3n 3E 12 00 4.5.1 size 16 16 16 16 16 16 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 F0 43 1n 3E 12 00 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 OTHER DATA 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0sssssss 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "E" (ASCII CODE) "x" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "s" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nn Data Status (0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data) nh Request Number High nl Request Number Low nh Top Number High nl Top Number Low nh End Number High nl End Number Low F7 End of exclusive Appendices 4.4.2 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 265 MIDI Data Format 4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) DATA 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 Receive The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 System exclusive message Number High Number Low Channel High Channel Low End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 4.6.2 Function Name Digital mixer Function “ColUnStr“ LS9 OTHER DATA "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "E" (ASCII CODE) "x" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "s" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Request Number High nl Request Number Low F7 End of exclusive 4.6.3 Number Setup 0 User Defined Key 0 Program Change 0 Control Change 0 number “SCENE___“ “INEQ____“ “OUTEQ___“ “DYNA____“ “GEQ_____“ “EFFECT__“ 1-300 41-199 4-199 42-199 1-199 58-199 4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE – Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 F0 43 1n 3E 12 00 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 OTHER DATA 01001100 "C" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01010101 01101110 01010011 01110100 01110010 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm Module Name Module Name Mixer Setting Outport Setting Monitor Setting MIDI Setting Lib Number Program Change Table Control Change Table Preference(Current) Preference(Admin) Preference(Guest) User Defined Keys(Current) User Defined Keys(Admin) User Defined Keys(Guest) Custom Fader Layer(Current) Custom Fader Layer(Admin) Custom Fader Layer(Guest) User Level(Current) User Level(Guest) “MIXERSET” “OUT_PORT” “MONITOR_” “MIDI_SET” “LIB_NUM_” “PRGMCHG_” “CTRLCHG_” “PREF_CUR” “PREF_ADM” “PREF_GST” “UDEF_CUR” “UDEF_ADM” “UDEF_GST” “CFAD_CUR” “CFAD_ADM” “CFAD_GST” “UKEY_CUR” “UKEY_GST” "o" (ASCII CODE) "l" (ASCII CODE) "U" (ASCII CODE) "n" (ASCII CODE) "S" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) 4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE – 4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type). STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 OTHER DATA 01001101 "M" 01101111 01100100 01000110 01111000 01010100 01110010 01100111 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0eeeeeee 0ppppppp EOX 11110111 4.7.2 F0 43 1n 3E 12 00 "o" "d" "F" "x" "T" "r" "g" mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) ee Effect number (0:RACK5–3:RACK8) pp Release:0, Press:1 F7 End of exclusive Module Name MODULE NAME Freeze Play button ”FRZPLAY_” Freeze Record button ”FRZREC__” channel 0:RACK5, 2:RACK7 0:RACK5, 2:RACK7 This will not work when the Effect Type is different. 266 tx/rx tx tx tx tx Module Name MODULE NAME SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB 4.6.1 EOX 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn EOX 11110111 4.5.3 F0 43 3n 3E 12 00 nh nl ch cl F7 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual MIDI Data Format 4.8 FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL – 4.9 4.8.1 4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds. If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds. Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 OTHER DATA 01000011 "C" 01101000 01101100 01010000 01101001 01110010 01000011 01110000 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0sssssss 0sssssss 0ddddddd 0ddddddd EOX 11110111 4.8.2 F0 43 1n 3E 12 00 "h" "l" "P" "i" "r" "C" "p" mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) sh Source Channel Number H *1) sl Source Channel Number L *1) dh Destination Channel Number H *1) dl Destination Channel Number L *1) F7 End of exclusive Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled. When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA EOX 4.9.2 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00100001 F0 43 1n 3E 12 21 System exclusive message 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ddddddd : 11110111 mm mm mm dd : F7 ADDRESS UL Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 REMOTE LEVEL METER ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Data1 End of exclusive Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. the corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices). When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be immediately stopped [disabled]. Transmission When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. Module Name MODULE NAME Pair On (with Copy) Pair On (with Reset Both) Pair Off Receive The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON. ”PAIRONCP” ”PAIRONRS” ”PAIROFF_” *1) 0:CH1–63:CH64 256:MIX 1– 271:MIX 16 512:MATRIX 1–519:MATRIX 8 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00100001 F0 43 3n 3E 12 21 System exclusive message 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 mm mm mm ch cl F7 ADDRESS UL Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer LS9 REMOTE LEVEL METER ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Count H Count L End of exclusive Appendices STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME LEVEL METER DATA LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 267 Warning/Error Messages Warning/Error Messages Message Meaning xxx Parameters Copied. Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer. xxx Parameters Initialized. Parameter xxx was initialized. xxx Parameters Pasted. Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer. xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer. Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer. Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8 Sources! The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to assign more than this. Cannot Bookmark This Popup. This popup window cannot be bookmarked. Cannot Recall to Different Parameter Type! You attempted to recall a library of a different type. 268 Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library. Cannot Select This Channel. You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason. Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library. Cannot Undo! You pressed the [UNDO] button when Undo was not available. Couldn’t Access File. File on the USB memory could not be accessed for some reason. Couldn’t Write File. File could not be saved from the USB memory. Current User Changed. [xxx] Current user was changed to [xxx]. Directory Not Empty! You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory. EFFECT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was defeated because you switched from the RACK screen to a different screen. External HA Connection Conflict! External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA differs from when the scene was stored. File Access is Busy! The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB memory is being accessed. File Already Exists! The USB memory already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create. File Error [xx]! Internal file access error File Protected! Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB memory is write-protected. Help File Not Found! Can’t find HELP file. Illegal Address! The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid. Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Network. Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer. Illegal Storage Format! The USB memory could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported. KEY IN CUE: Turned Off. KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window to a different screen. Loading Aborted. Loading from USB memory was aborted. Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low. Maximum Number of Audio Files Exceeded! The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded. Memory Error! All Memories were Initialized. All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to failure of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer. MIDI: Data Framing Error! An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port. MIDI: Data Overrun! An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port. MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port. MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port. No Access From Recorder! In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than YPE/SONGS/. No Controllable Knob. Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated. No Corresponding Help Items. A section in the HELP data cannot be found. No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR. Page Bookmarked. The current screen or popup has been bookmarked. Password Changed. The password has been changed. PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy! Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress. Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned! The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. If a malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha dealer. Processing Aborted. Processing was interrupted. Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted! Operation of the JPN button was cancelled because time is required for recorder processing. Saving Aborted. Saving to the USB memory has been interrupted. Scene #xxx is Empty! No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled. Scene #xxx is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene. Scene #xxx is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Warning/Error Messages Message Meaning SLOT x: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port. Some Song Files Are Unidentified. There was a song file that could not be identified. It is possible that the song being used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK is different than the song that was specified. Song File Not Found! The file assigned to SCENE LINK or to the DIRECT PLAY user defined key does not exist. Storage Full! The file could not be saved because there is not enough space on the USB memory. Storage Not Found! The USB memory could not be recognized. Storage Not Ready! Access is not possible because the USB memory is not ready. Sync Error! [xxx] The LS9 is not synchronized with the [xxx] signal. Tap Operation Ignored. Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen. This Operation is Not Allowed. This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission. Too Large Files! Loading Failed. Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 307,256 bytes. Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare. More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then compare with Flex15GEQ. Too Many EQ Bands Used! Cannot Paste! More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then paste to Flex15GEQ. Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded! The I/O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity. Unsupported File Format! The file you attempted to load from the USB memory is of an unsupported format. USB: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port. USB: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port. USB: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port. USB: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the USB connector output port. USB Currently Active for Recorder function! Since the USB memory recorder is recording or playing back, functions such as Save/Load cannot be used. USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD! The recorder cannot oparate, since mixer scene memory/library data is being saved or loaded in USB memory. USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped! Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB memory processing. USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped. Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating. USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder Stopped. Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory was disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating. USB over current Error! Disconnect USB device. Excessive current has occurred at the USB connector. Disconnect the USB memory that is connected to the USB connector. Recorder was halted because synchronization with the word clock was lost. Wrong Audio File Format! The format of the audio file is invalid. Wrong Password! The password you input was incorrect. Wrong Word Clock! The LS9 cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate. You Cannot Create User Key. The current user does not have permission to create a user key. Appendices Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped! LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 269 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 270 Power does not turn on, panel LEDs and the LCD display do not light ❍ Are the LCD contrast and panel brightness adjusted appropriately? You can adjust the LCD contrast by holding down the [HOME] key and turning the dial. ❍ Is the LS9’s POWER switch turned on? ❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact your Yamaha dealer. Sound is not input ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 44) Is a signal being input from the external device? Is the input port patched to an input channel? (→ p. 99) Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57) Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 115) Could insert be turned on even though it has not been specified correctly? (→ p. 101) Is the [ON] key indicator of the input channel lit? Is the fader of the input channel raised? Sound is not output ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 44) Is the [ON] key indicator of the STEREO channel lit? Is an output port patched to the output channel? (→ p. 95) Could LCR be on, and the CSR value be set to 1.0? (→ p. 58) Sound is not output from headphones or the MONITOR OUT jacks ❍ Is the [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume? Sound is not loud enough ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57) Is the fader of the input channel raised? Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting? (→ p. 115) Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an extreme setting? (→ p. 117) Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 115) Is the fader of the output channel raised? Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels. (→ p. 155) Sound is distorted ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 206) Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57) Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high? Could the fader of the STEREO channel be raised too high? Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely high setting? (→ p. 115) Sound is output even though it is not patched to an output channel ❍ Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out? (→ p. 103) ❍ Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out? (→ p. 101) The volume of a specific channel rises and falls ❍ Could GATE/COMP be set to ducking? (→ p. 117) Operating a fader does not control the level as you expect ❍ Is SENDS ON FADER selected and INPUT TO MIX FADER and so on active in the panel? Only the sound of a specific channel is heard from the MONITOR OUT or PHONES jack ❍ Could a [CUE] key be on? Noise occurs from an externally connected recorder or other device ❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 206) ❍ Could the input signal be unsynchronized? ❍ Could oscillator or talkback be turned on? (→ p. 151, 153) High frequency range is attenuated ❍ Could emphasis be applied? This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the emphasis data. (→ p. 206) ❍ Could EQ be applied? (→ p. 115) An input signal is being input, but there’s no monitor output ❍ Is the dimmer applied? ❍ Is the MONITOR C assigned even though its output port has not been connected to external device. Not enough headroom, especially when EQ boost is applied ❍ Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level. (→ p. 115) Signal is delayed ❍ Check whether the delay setting for each channel is set correctly. (→ p. 95) Turning a SELECTED SEND encoder does not change the send level to the MIX/MATRIX bus ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Can’t save scene memory or library data ❍ Are you attempting to save the data to a read-only scene/library or a protected scene? (→ p. 129) Can’t save to USB memory ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data ❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly? (→ p. 178) ❍ Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices? (→ p. 178) ❍ Has an event been assigned for the program change? (→ p. 180) When you recall a scene, some channels/parameters are not updated ❍ Could that channel or parameter be set to Recall Safe? Could Focus be turned off in the scene you recalled? Could user level restrictions have been specified? (→ p. 139, 140, 192) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Is the MIX/MATRIX turned on? Is the MIX/MATRIX [ON] turned on? Is the MIX bus set to VARI type? (→ p. 213) If the send point is set to POST, could the fader have been lowered? Is the USB memory protected? Does the USB memory have enough free capacity to save the data? When formatting the USB memory, format it in FAT32 or FAT16 format. Could the recorder be playing back? Troubleshooting You turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT PARAM screen, but it is automatically defeated ❍ This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display. (→ p. 170) When you recall a scene, it takes a certain amount of time for the faders to stop ❍ Could you have specified a fade time? (→ p. 143) The panel LEDs or LCD display are too dark / too bright ❍ This can be adjusted in the MISC SETUP screen. (→ p. 217) Signal level of a specific frequency is low ❍ Could the EQ gain be turned down excessively? ❍ Routing a signal through a GEQ or effect will delay it relative to other signals. If this signal is mixed with the signal via a different signal path, a comb filtering effect will cause the level of a specific frequency to be decreased. Can’t control an external head amp (AD8HR) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the external head amp connected to the specified port? Is the audio output signal of the external head amp being input via an I/O card to SLOT 1–3? Is the input port of the external head amp set correctly? Could there be a problem with the cable that connects the LS9 and external head amp? Are you using a D-sub 9-pin cross cable? ❍ Refer to LS9 Editor installation guide on our web site. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit) or white points (always lit). ❍ Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs and not a malfunction. Appendices Can’t control the LS9 by LS9 Editor. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 271 General Specifications General Specifications Signal Delay Less than 2.5 ms (INPUT to OMNI OUT @Fs=48kHz) Dimensions (WxHxD) LS9-16: LS9-32: 480 x 220 x 500 mm 884 x 220 x 500 mm Net Weight LS9-16: LS9-32: 12.0 kg 19.4 kg Power Requirements LS9-16: LS9-32: 95 W, 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz 170 W, 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz Temperature Range Operating: Storage: +10˚C to +35˚C -20˚C to +60˚C Included Accessories Owner’s Manual, AC Power Cord, Dust Cover (only LS9-32) Optional Accessories mini-YGDAI cards, Gooseneck Light LA1L (for LS9-32), Rack Mount Kit RK1 AC Power Cord Length 250 cm Conditions Frequency Range Sampling Frequency External Clock Fader Max. Unit 50.88 kHz Digital Input Fs = 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz 10 * The jitter of input clock is less than 1ns. Digital Input Fs = 39.69–50.88 kHz 20 Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz Word Clock: INT 48 kHz 44.1 ns kHz 48 Accuracy Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz 50 ppm Jitter Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz 5 ns Travel (Stroke) Resolution: 1,024 steps, +10 to -138, -∞ dB for all faders Position Error Moving Time 272 Typ. Jitter of PLL * Frequency Sampling Frequency Internal Clock Min. 39.69 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 100 ±1.5 From end to the other end, Under normal software control 0.3 mm sec Input/output characteristics Input/output characteristics ❏ Analog Input Characteristics Input Terminals GAIN Actual Load Impedance For Use With Nominal 3 kΩ 50-600Ω Mics & 600Ω Lines -62 dB INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> +10 dB Input Level Nominal Max. before clip -82 dBu (61.6 µV) -62 dBu (0.616 mV) -42 dBu (6.16 mV) -10 dBu (245 mV) +10 dBu (2.45 V) +30 dBu (24.5 V) Sensitivity *1 Connector XLR-3-31 type (Balanced) *2 *1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dBu (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all faders and level controls are maximum position.) *2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD) * In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms. * All input AD converters are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. * +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT XLR type connectors via each individual software controlled switch. ❏ Analog Output Characteristics Actual Source Impedance For Use With Nominal OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 75 Ω 600 Ω Lines PHONES OUT 15 Ω Output Terminals *1. *2. *3. *4. Gain Switch Output Level *3 Nominal Max. before clip +24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.3 V) +18 dB -2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) 8 Ω Phones — 75 mW *4 150 mW 40 Ω Phones — *4 150 mW 65 mW Connector XLR-3-32 type (Balanced) *1 Stereo Phone Jack (TRS) (Unbalanced) *2 XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD) PHONES OUT stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND) There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level. The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max. * In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms. * All output DA converters are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. ❏ Digital Input Characteristics Terminal 2TR IN DIGITAL Coaxial Format Data Length Level IEC-60958 24 bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω Format Data Length Level IEC-60958 Consumer Use 24 bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω Connector RCA Pin Jack ❏ Digital Output Characteristics 2TR OUT DIGITAL Coaxial Connector RCA Pin Jack Appendices Terminal LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 273 Input/output characteristics ❏ I/O Slot Characteristics The rear panel provides one slot (LS9-16) or two slots (LS9-32) in which separately sold mini-YGDAI cards can be installed. The following types of card can be used. Card Name Function Input Output The number of available cards LS9-16 LS9-32 MY8-AD24 Analog In 8In — 1 2 MY8-AD96 Analog In 8In — 1 2 MY8-ADDA96 Analog In/Out 8In 8Out 1 2 MY8-AE AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2 MY8-AE96 AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2 MY8-AE96S AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2 MY8-AEB AES/EBU 8In 8Out 1 2 MY8-AT ADAT 8In 8Out 1 2 MY8-DA96 Analog Out MY8-TD TASCAM MY4-DA Analog Out MY4-AD Analog In MY16-AE AES/EBU 16In 16Out 1 2 MY16-AT ADAT 16In 16Out 1 2 MY16-TD TASCAM 16In 16Out 1 2 MY16-CII CobraNet 16In 16Out 1 2 — 8Out 1 2 8In 8Out 1 2 — 4Out 1 2 4In — 1 2 Only Slot 1 has a serial interface (LS9-32). Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most recent information on mini-YGDAI cards. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ ❏ Control I/O Characteristics Terminal MIDI WORD CLOCK Format Level IN MIDI — OUT MIDI — — TTL/75Ω terminated BNC Connector BNC Connector IN OUT NETWORK (Ethernet) USB LAMP (LS9-32 only) LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual DIN Connector 5P — TTL/75Ω 100Base-T 100Base-T USB 1.1 Host USB *1 USB A Connector (Female) — 0V–12V XLR-4-31 type *2 *1. Bus-powered hubs are not supported. *2. 4pin=+12V, 3pin=GND, Supported lamp: max. 5W 274 Connector DIN Connector 5P RJ-45 Electrical characteristics Electrical characteristics All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator: 150 ohms ❏ Frequency Response Input INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz@20Hz–20kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1kHz Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω 8Ω PHONES OUT ❏ Gain Error Input INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> Internal Oscillator Internal Oscillator Typ. Max. GAIN: max. -1.5 0.0 0.5 GAIN: max. -3.0 0.0 0.5 RL OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω ❏ Total Harmonic Distortion INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> Min. Unit dB Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz@1kHz Output 8Ω PHONES OUT Input Conditions Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Input level: -62dBu, GAIN: max. → Output level: +4.0dBu (Typ.) -2.0 0.0 2.0 Input level: +10dBu, GAIN: min. → Output level: +4.0dBu (Typ.) -2.0 0.0 2.0 Full scale output, Output level: +24.0dBu -0.5 0.0 0.5 -30dBFs, Phones level control: max. → Output level: 0dBu (Typ.) -0.5 0.0 0.5 Min. Typ. Max. Unit dB Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω 8Ω PHONES OUT Conditions +4dBu@20Hz-20kHz, GAIN: max. 0.1 +4dBu@20Hz-20kHz, GAIN: min. 0.05 Full scale output @1kHz 0.02 Full scale output @1kHz, Phones level control: max. 0.2 Unit % * Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18dB/octave filter @80kHz ❏ Hum & Noise Input INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz, EIN = Equivalent Input Noise Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω Conditions Min. Typ. Max. -62 Rs=150Ω, GAIN: min. Master fader: nominal, One channel fader: nominal -84 -79 All Inputs <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> 600 Ω Rs=150Ω, GAINs: min. Master fader: nominal, All channel faders: nominal -67 All Inputs <LS9-32> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω Rs=150Ω, GAINs: min Master fader: nominal, All channel faders: nominal -64 — OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω Residual output noise, Stereo Master: off -86 — PHONES OUT Residual output noise, Phones level control: min. -86 8Ω Unit -128 EIN Rs=150Ω, GAIN: max. Master fader: nominal, One channel fader: nominal dBu ❏ Dynamic Range Input INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> — Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: min. Conditions Min. Typ. 108 OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω DA Converter 110 Max. Unit dB Appendices * Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave filter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation. * Dynamic range is measured with a 6dB/octave filter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation. LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 275 Electrical characteristics ❏ Crosstalk@1kHz From To Conditions Min. Typ. Max. INPUT n INPUT (n-1) or (n+1) CH 1-16 {1-32}, Adjacent inputs, GAIN: min. -80 OMNI OUT n OMNI OUT (n-1) or (n+1) OMNI OUT 1-8 {1-16}, Input to output -80 Unit dB ❏ Maximum Voltage Gain@1kHz Input INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16> OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32> 600 Ω Conditions Min. Rs=150Ω, Input GAIN: max. Typ. Max. 86 Unit dB ❏ Phantom Voltage Output INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16> INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32> 276 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Conditions hot & cold: No load Min. Typ. Max. Unit 46 48 50 V Mixer Basic Parameters Mixer Basic Parameters ❏ Libraries ❏ Output Function Name Number Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 300 Total 301 Function Attenuator Parameter –96 to +24 dB Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199 Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199 Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB Dynamics Library Preset 41 + User 158 199 Effect Library Preset 57 + User 142 199 GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 4Band Equalizer Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Low Shelving (Low Band) High Shelving, LPF (High Band) Type I/Type II ❏ Input Function Insert Function Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S Parameter Phase Normal/Reverse Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB Attenuator –96 to +24 dB Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 HPF 4 Band Equalizer Slope= 12 dB/Oct Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to + 18 dB Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Key In: Low Shelving (Low Band) Type I/Type II Direct Out Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16 MIX1-16/MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block) Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB On On/Off Mute Group 8 Groups Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander Mix to Matrix Stereo to Matrix Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB Oscillator Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Hold= 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec Decay= 5 msec to 42.3 sec (Release) Dynamics 1 Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz High Shelving, LPF (High Band) Insert (only ch1-32) Dynamics 1 Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step) On/Off= Software control ❏ Output Port Function Parameter Releace= 5msec to 42.3 sec Out Port Delay Range= –70 dB to 0 dB Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB Attenuator –96 to +24 dB 0 msec to 600 msec Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16 Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block) Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S ❏ Processor Function Parameter GEQ 31 bands x 4(8) systems Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 4 systems Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 Dynamics2 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16 Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block) Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB On On/Off Mute Group 8 Groups 16 sends Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes Mix Send Point: Appendices Mix Send Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100% LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 277 Pin Assignment Pin Assignment 2 3 1 278 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ❏ LAMP (LS9-32 only) 4 Pin Signal Name 1 NC 2 NC 3 GND 4 +12V Dimensions Dimensions 220 500 LS9-16 25 430 25 480 220 500 LS9-32 834 25 884 Unit : mm * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendices 25 European models Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2. Inrush Current: 16A Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 279 Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit (sold separately) Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit (sold separately) You can attach the optional RK-1 rackmount kit to the LS9-16 or LS9-32 and mount it in a rack or an installed system. 1 2 Make sure that the power is turned off. Remove screws “A” and detach the side pads. NOTE • Keep the side pad screws together with the pads you removed. A Side pad A 3 A A At the locations indicated by the arrows, tighten the screws to attach the rackmount hardware. The mixer can be attached at either of two angles, as shown in the following illustration. 4 Attach the hardware to the other side in the same way. CAUTION • When attaching the RK1 rackmount kit, make sure that the power is turned off. You must use the screws that are included with the RK1. 280 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA [ Digital Mixing Console ] Model LS9-16/32 MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Recognized Date :8-Aug-2006 Version : 1.0 Remarks Function... Basic Channel Default Changed 1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 Memorized x x ************** 1, 3 x x Memorized Mode Default Messages Altered Note Number x : True voice ************** 0 - 127 x Velocity Note ON Note OFF x x o 9nH, v=1-127 x After Touch Key's Ch's x x x x x x o o o o o o o o Bank Select Data Entry NRPN LSB,MSB Assignable Cntrl o 0 - 127 ************** o 0 - 127 0 - 300 Assignable o *1 o *1,*2 x x x x o x System : Clock Real Time: Commands x x o x :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF Mes- :All Notes OFF sages:Active Sense :Reset x x x x x x x x x x o o Pitch Bend Control 0,32 6,38 98,99 1-31,33-98, 102-119 Effect Control Change : True # System Exclusive Common Aux Notes: : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune Recorder Control Effect Control Appendices Prog Change *1 :Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request. *2 :MMC Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO o : Yes x : No LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 281 Index Index Numerics 2TR IN DIGITAL jack .........................................25 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack .....................................25 A AC IN connector.................................................25 Adjusting faders ...............................................223 Adjusting input/output gain...............................224 Administrator ....................................................187 Analog input connections ...................................41 Analog output connections.................................42 Assigning a name...............................................34 B Block Diagram................................ End of Manual BRIGHTNESS field ..........................................217 Buttons ...............................................................32 C Calibration function ..................................223, 224 Cascade connections.......................................209 CH CLEAR screen ...........................................128 CH COPY screen .............................................126 CH LINK screen ...............................................124 CH MOVE screen.............................................127 [CHANNEL JOB] key .........................................19 Channel link .....................................................124 Channel module section.....................................17 Channel parameters Copying.....................................................126 Initializing ..................................................128 Moving ......................................................127 COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H) ........231 COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S).........231 COMPARE button ..............................................39 COMPRESSOR ...............................................230 Connections .......................................................41 Console lock.....................................................197 Constant display area ........................................30 CONTRAST field..............................................217 Control changes ...............................................183 Cooling fan vent .................................................25 COPY button ......................................................39 Cue function .............................................145, 148 [CUE] key .........................................................149 282 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual CUE screen ..................................................... 149 Cursor ............................................................... 32 [CUSTOM FADER] key ..................................... 91 Custom fader layer ............................................ 91 D Data entry section ............................................. 22 DE-ESSER ...................................................... 231 DEF button ........................................................ 38 Digital input/output connections ........................ 43 Dimensions ..................................................... 279 DIRECT field ..................................................... 82 Direct output .................................................... 103 Display ........................................................ 20, 30 DISPLAY ACCESS section ......................... 19, 29 DUCKING........................................................ 229 DYNA field......................................................... 82 Dynamics ........................................................ 117 [DYNAMICS 1] encoder .................................... 21 [DYNAMICS 2] encoder .................................... 21 DYNAMICS Library List................................... 227 Dynamics parameter ....................................... 229 E Effect Type List ............................................... 232 Effects ............................................................. 166 Editing parameters ................................... 170 Freeze ...................................................... 173 Inserting ................................................... 168 Mounting .................................................. 158 Send/return .............................................. 167 Tap tempo ................................................ 172 Effects and tempo synchronization ................. 244 Effects Parameters.......................................... 233 Electrical characteristics.................................. 275 EQ ................................................................... 115 EQ field ............................................................. 82 EQ [HIGH]/[HIGH MID]/ [LOW MID]/[LOW] keys.................................. 22 EQ Library List ................................................ 225 EQ [Q]/[FREQUENCY]/[GAIN] encoders .......... 21 Equalizer ......................................................... 115 Error Messages ............................................... 268 EXPANDER .................................................... 230 External head amp .......................................... 175 Index F K Fade function ...................................................143 FADER field .......................................................82 Fader layer.........................................................27 Firmware versionn .............................................14 Focus function .................................................139 Front panel.........................................................26 Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys ......................257 Keyboard window...............................................34 Knobs.................................................................32 GATE ...............................................................229 General Specifications.....................................272 GEQ.................................................................161 Graphic EQ ......................................................161 31BandGEQ .....................................161, 163 Flex15GEQ .......................................161, 164 Inserting ....................................................161 Mounting ...................................................158 Grounding screw................................................25 Guest ...............................................................187 H HA field ..............................................................82 [HA GAIN] encoder ............................................21 HA settings ........................................................47 Head amp settings.............................................47 Headphone output jack......................................26 Help function....................................................218 [HOME] key ...........................................22, 27, 82 I Initializing internal memory ..............................222 INPUT channels...........................................13, 53 Input channels .............................................13, 53 Head amp settings......................................57 Sending to MIX bus ....................................62 Sending to STEREO bus ............................50 Sending to STEREO/MONO bus................58 INPUT jacks.......................................................24 Input patching ....................................................99 Input/output characteristics..............................273 Insert connections............................................101 INSERT field ......................................................82 Internal clock....................................................215 IP address........................................................216 LAMP connector (LS9-32 only)..........................25 LAYER section.............................................19, 27 LCR mode....................................................58, 71 Level Diagram.................................End of Manual LIB button...........................................................35 Libraries .............................................35, 120, 174 List window ........................................................32 Login ................................................................189 LS9 Editor ........................................................216 LS9-16 ...............................................................11 LS9-32 ...............................................................11 M MAC address ...................................................216 MATRIX buses.................................................213 MATRIX channels ........................................13, 67 [METER] key......................................................19 METER screen.................................................155 Meters ..............................................................155 MIDI .................................................................177 MIDI Data Format ............................................260 MIDI Implementation Chart ..............................281 MIDI IN/OUT connectors....................................25 MISC SETUP screen .......................................206 MIX bus types (VARI/FIXED).............................14 MIX buses ........................................................213 MIX channels ...............................................13, 67 Sending to MATRIX buses .........................75 Sending to STEREO/MONO bus................71 MIX/MATRIX SELECT section...........................20 MMC ................................................................186 Monitor function .......................................145, 146 [MONITOR] key .................................................19 MONITOR screen ............................................146 MONO channels ..........................................13, 67 MUTE field .........................................................82 Mute group.......................................................121 MUTE GROUP screen.....................................121 Mute safe .........................................................123 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Appendices G L 283 Index N Network address ..............................................216 NETWORK connector ................................25, 216 O OMNI OUT jacks ................................................24 Oscillator ..........................................................153 OSCILLATOR screen.......................................153 Output channels ...........................................13, 67 Output patching..................................................95 Overview ..............................................................9 P [PAN] encoder....................................................21 PAN field ............................................................82 Parameter changes..........................................185 Password .................................................188, 191 PASTE button ....................................................39 PATCH field .......................................................82 PHONES LEVEL control ....................................26 PHONES OUT jack ............................................26 Pin Assignment ................................................278 Playback...........................................................110 Popup windows ..................................................31 POWER switch...................................................25 Power user .......................................................187 Preferences......................................................194 Program changes.............................................180 R [RACK 1-4] key ..................................................19 [RACK 5-8] key ..................................................19 RACK screen ...........................................161, 167 Rear panel....................................................11, 23 Recall Safe function .........................................140 RECALL SAFE screen .....................................140 Recorder ..........................................................105 [RECORDER] key ..............................................19 RECORDER screen.........................................106 Recording.........................................................108 S SAVE/LOAD popup window.............................199 SCENE FADE screen ......................................143 SCENE FOCUS screen ...................................139 SCENE LIST screen ........................................129 284 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual Scene memory ................................................ 129 Clearing.................................................... 137 Constant display area ................................ 30 Copying/pasting ....................................... 136 Cutting...................................................... 138 Initializing current scene............................. 45 Inserting ................................................... 138 Recalling .................................................. 131 Sorting and renaming............................... 134 Storing...................................................... 129 [SCENE MEMORY] key .................................... 19 SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen ................... 113 SELECTED CH VIEW screen ..................... 31, 82 Selected channel............................................... 30 SELECTED CHANNEL section................... 21, 81 Adjusting send levels ................................. 84 Assigning to mute group ............................ 89 Basic operations......................................... 29 Direct output settings ................................. 88 Dynamics settings ...................................... 87 HA settings................................................. 85 HPF/EQ settings ........................................ 87 Insert settings............................................. 88 Output patching.......................................... 86 Pan/balance ............................................... 86 Recall Safe settings ................................... 88 Sending signal to MIX bus ......................... 62 Turning a channel on/off ............................ 89 [SELECTED SEND] encoder ............................ 21 SEND field......................................................... 82 SENDS ON FADER mode .......................... 65, 78 [SETUP] key...................................................... 19 Slots ............................................................ 24, 44 ST IN channels............................................ 13, 53 ST IN section..................................................... 17 ST/MONO mode ......................................... 58, 71 STEREO channels ...................................... 13, 67 STEREO MASTER section ............................... 18 Stereo meter / Cue section ............................... 20 STEREO/MONO channels Sending to MATRIX buses......................... 75 SYSTEM SETUP screen................................. 205 Index T Talkback ..........................................................151 TALKBACK screen ..........................................151 TITLE LIST screen...........................................110 Tool buttons .......................................................35 Top panel...............................................12, 15, 27 Troubleshooting ...............................................270 U USB connector...................................................22 USB memory Editing files ...............................................201 Formatting ................................................204 Loading .....................................................200 Saving.......................................................199 USB memory recorder .....................................105 User .................................................................187 User authentication keys .................187, 188, 192 User defined keys ............................132, 196, 257 USER DEFINED KEYS section .........18, 132, 196 User level.................................................187, 192 USER SETUP screen ..............................187, 205 V Virtual rack.......................................................157 VIRTUAL RACK screen...................................158 W Appendices Warning ...........................................................268 Word clock ...........................................14, 46, 206 WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors ..................25 WORD CLOCK popup window ..................46, 206 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual 285 286 LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual ■ LS9-16/LS9-32 Block Diagram MIX 1 2 ...15 16 M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8 ST CUE CASCADE OUT LR MIX CASCADE OUT1-16 To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH CASCADE IN To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C) SLOT 1-16 {SLOT1 1-16} {SLOT2 1-16} CASCADE IN SELECT To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX CASCADE OUT1-8 To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH CUE CASCADE OUT LR To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH TALKBACK INPUT SELECT ON MIX 1-16 OSCILLATOR ON OSC METER LEVEL HA +48V [INPUT] [1-16{32}] INPUT 1 2 + - 3 AD INPUT 15,16{31,32} GAIN/TRIM 2TR IN INSERT POINT To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH CH INSERT OUT 1-32 CH INSERT IN 1-32 2TR IN L,R 2 To MONITOR SELECT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE EQ METER PRE HPF METER INSERT HPF ATT PRE HPF PRE EQ POST EQ Keyin Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13-16 OUT CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ{16} CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48,49-56,57-64]POST EQ{32} To MIX To MIX [SLOT {SLOT1,SLOT2}] SLOT {SLOT1} {SLOT2} (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L RACK1 OUT A(L)/B(R) (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R ON RACK2 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK3 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK4 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK5 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK6 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK7 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK8 OUT A(L)/B(R) PRE HPF METER HPF 8 PRE HPF ATT PRE EQ POST EQ Keyin Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX13-16 OUT ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ To MIX FIXED STEREO To MIX To MIX VARI STEREO RACK1 ON LEVEL ON LEVEL ON LEVEL PAN POST ON METER Flex15GEQ 16 RACK1 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK2 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK2 (same as RACK1) RACK3 (same as RACK1) RACK3 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK4 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK4 (same as RACK1) RACK4 OUT A(L)/B(R) METER RACK IN METER RACK IN A METER RACK IN B METER RACK OUT A METER RACK OUT B Flex15GEQ METER RACK IN L METER RACK IN R MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8 METER RACK OUT 31BandGEQ METER RACK OUT L METER RACK OUT R EFFECT EFFECT CUE RACK5 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK6 IN A(L)/B(R) POST PAN L POST PAN R TO MONO TO ST PRE EQ METER EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER ON MIX1,3...15 ON MIX2,4...16 CH INSERT IN 1-32 To CH INSERT IN MIX INSERT IN 1-16 To MIX INSERT IN RACK5 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK6 (same as RACK5) RACK6 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK7 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK7 (same as RACK5) RACK7 OUT A(L)/B(R) RACK8 IN A(L)/B(R) RACK8 (same as RACK5) RACK8 OUT A(L)/B(R) 3 STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C) To STEREO INSERT IN MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8 To MATRIX INSERT IN LEVEL ON LEVEL ON LEVEL BAL LEVEL ON MATRIX2,4...8 LEVEL ON LEVEL PAN ON To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8 MATRIX INSERTIN1-8 POST ON METER LEVEL BAL PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/ ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) INSERT INSERT POST ON INSERT OUT POST ON To STEREO OUT L+C,R+C VARI PRE FADER / POST ON STEREO OUT L+C STEREO OUT L To MATRIX PRE FADER / POST ON PRE EQ METER ATT PRE EQ INSERT OUT KEYIN CH1-32{64} KEYIN ST IN1L-4R KEYIN CUE SELECT ON KEYIN CUE EFFECT CUE EFFECT CUE SELECT ON RACK 5-8 OUT L/R RECORDER CUE SELECT ON RECORDER IN L/R RECORDER CUE PLAYBACK OUT L/R STEREO OUT R+C STEREO OUT R 4BAND EQ COMP COMPAND EXPAND PRE FADER METER ON INSERT INSERT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/ MATRIX1-8 POST EQ MATRIX OUT 1-8 To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT To RECORDER IN PATCH POST ON CUE TRIM (INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA) CUE L MONO METER CUE L METER CUE R OUTPUTS DIRECT OUT 1-32{64} MIX OUT 1-16 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX OUT 1-8 MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C) CH INSERT OUT 1-32 MIX INSERT OUT 1-16 STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8 DIRECT OUT 1-32{64} MIX OUT 1-16 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX OUT 1-8 MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C) DIRECT OUT 1-32{64} MIX OUT 1-16 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C),L+C,R+C MATRIX OUT 1-8 MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C) [PHONES] CUE LOGIC PHONES LEVEL OUTPUT PATCH DELAY (MAX:600ms) METER DELAY (MAX:600ms) METER SLOT OUT ATT TRIM SLOT{SLOT1} 16 SLOT OUT {SLOT2} 16 [SLOT {SLOT1,SLOT2}] OUTPUT PATCH DELAY (MAX:600ms) METER OMNI OUT ATT TRIM DA 8{16} DELAY (MAX:600ms) METER 2TR OUT 2 PLAYBACK OUT METER RECORDER IN RECORDER IN PATCH METER 2 1 3 DECODER or ENCODER [OMNI OUT](1-8{16}) COAXIAL ATT TRIM OUTPUT PATCH 2 + - DIT PLAYBACK OUT [2TR OUT DIGITAL] To INPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT ATT RECORDER CUE RECORDER CUE USB PHONES LEVEL LINK 2TRD L,R INPUT 15,16{31,32} PLAYBACK OUT STEREO OUT L,R STEREO OUT MONO(C) STEREO OUT L,C,R USB MEMORY RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1-32{64} MIX OUT 1-16 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C),L+C,R+C MATRIX OUT 1-8 MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C) Tip Ring Sleeve DA 2 To OUTPUT PATCH To RECORDER IN PATCH POST ON METER LEVEL (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL CUE R PHONES OUT LR To OUTPUT PATCH To RECORDER IN PATCH STEREO OUT MONO(C) To MATRIX VARI STEREO EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER PRE EQ POST EQ CUE R ON MIX CASCADE OUT 1-16 STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX CASCADE OUT 1-8 CUE CASCADE OUT L,R To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT To RECORDER IN PATCH INSERT POINT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT POST ON INSERT OUT CUE L 8 PRE FADER METER MATRIX1-8 ON PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON LCR (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL MATRIX1,3...7 PAN LINK PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON PAN LR MONO PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO CUE ON MONO(C) TO LCR POST ON ON To MATRIX VARI STEREO ON COMP COMPAND EXPAND 4BAND EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT ST L CSR POST PAN R ATT PRE EQ POST EQ PAN MODE ST R 32 METER RACK OUT A METER RACK OUT B VARI PRE FADER / POST ON INSERT POINT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT POST ON INSERT OUT CUE ON 31BandGEQ RACK5 STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) LR MONO METER RACK OUT METER RACK IN RACK3 IN A(L)/B(R) MIX INSERT OUT 1-16 STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C) LCR ON To MATRIX STEREO L,R,MONO(C) ON POST PAN L POST ON POST ON To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH LEVEL PRE FADER (13-16)To KEYIN To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT To RECORDER IN PATCH MIX OUT1-16 CSR ON (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R PRE FADER / POST ON TO LCR INSERT METER RACK IN A METER RACK IN B CH INSERT OUT 1-32 ON ST R POST ON To MIX (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) LEVEL PAN MONO(C) FIXED RACK RACK2 IN A(L)/B(R) ON MIX2,4...16 VARI MATRIX OUT 1-8 LEVEL CUE L PRE FADER METER GATE COMP DUCK COMPAND EXPAND DE-ESSER COMP KEYIN CUE Keyin Filter 4BAND EQ {SLOT2 1-16} RACK1 IN A(L)/B(R) MATRIX2,4...8 CUE R DYNA2OUT DYNA1OUT EQ OUT METER METER METER GR METER GR METER PRE EQ METER INSERT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/ MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ ST L PAN LINK BAL ST IN 1L-4R SLOT 1-16 {SLOT1 1-16} MIX OUT 1-16 ON INSERT INSERT IN PATCH RACK IN PATCH LEVEL MIX1,3...15 ON ON INSERT (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL MATRIX1,3...7 ON POST PAN R PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON {SLOT2 1-16} 16 CUE ON ST L MONO(C) LEVEL COMP COMPAND EXPAND 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ ON ON ATT POST ON METER PRE FADER METER ST R POST ON POST ON INSERT OUT POST PAN L To MIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON VARI STEREO ON SLOT 1-16 {SLOT1 1-16} 16 PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER PRE EQ INSERT OUT CSR VARI METER METER PAN MODE TO LCR LCR INSERT INSERT POST ON FIXED STEREO POST PAN L POST PAN R TO MONO TO ST LEVEL FIXED To MIX To OUTPUT PATCH To RECORDER IN PATCH DIRECT OUT 1-32{64} LEVEL POST ON METER LR MONO PRE FADER METER ON GATE COMP DUCK COMPAND EXPAND DE-ESSER COMP KEYIN CUE Keyin Filter 4BAND EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT PLAYBACK OUT L,R ON PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER EQ OUT DYNA1OUT DYNA2OUT METER METER METER GR METER GR METER To CASCADE IN SELECT SLOT IN SLOT IN PRE EQ METER HPF LPF PAN 32 {64} PLAYBACK OUT ON INSERT POINT PRE FADER INSERT OUT INSERT OUT PRE EQ POST ON INSERT OUT INSERT CH 1-32{64} To MONITOR SELECT 2TR IN DIGITAL MIX INSERT OUT 1-16 MIX INSERT IN 1-16 INPUT 1-16{32} METER COAXIAL [2TR IN DIGITAL] Sine Wave Pink Noise Burst Noise INPUT PATCH METER To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH 2TRD L,R INPUT 15,16{31,32} PLAYBACK OUT STEREO OUT L,R STEREO OUT MONO(C) MIX OUT1-16 MATRIX OUT1-8 DEFINE MIX (MAX:8ch) MONITOR SELECT +48V MONITOR L MONO METER MONITOR L MONITOR R METER MONITOR R MONITOR MONO(C) METER MONITOR MONO(C) PHONES L To PHONES OUT PHONES R To PHONES OUT MONITOR OUT L DIMMER INPUT 1-16{32} +48V MASTER MONITOR OUT R MONITOR OUT MONO(C) ON TALKBACK ON MONITOR DIMM ON +MONO(C) MONITOR LEVEL To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH ■ LS9-16/LS9-32 Level Diagram Analog Analog Digital GAIN dBu +30 +24 +20 dBFS 0 1 -10 2 3 4 5 6 -20 -10 -40 -20 -50 -30 -60 -40 -70 -30 -50 -80 -60 -90 -70 -100 -80 -110 -90 -120 -100 -130 -110 -140 -120 -150 -130 -160 -140 -170 -150 -180 -160 -190 -170 -180 -190 -200 -210 AD INPUT PATCH ø HPF INSERT ATT. EQ (x4) DYN 1 DYN 2 INSERT LEVEL ON INSERT PAN BUS Adder INSERT ATT. EQ (x4) DYN MASTER LEVEL / BAL MASTER ON INSERT OUTPUT PATCH DELAY ø,ATT, TRIM Analog Analog DA Bit 0 +10 +4 0 Digital Digital 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 dBu 1 Max. Input [+30dBu] IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT IN CASCADE IN 1 Nominal Input [+10dBu] CASCADE OUT OUT IN Digital Clipping Level [0dBu = 0.775Vrms] [0dBFS = Full Scale] +10 +4 0 Nominal Output (75mW@8Ω) [The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max] -10 -20 -30 -40 2 Max. Input [-42dBu] OMNI OUT1-16/8 [Default setting] -50 -60 2 Nominal Input [-62dBu] -70 1 INPUT 1-32/16 (GAIN MIN.) -80 2 INPUT 1-32/16 (GAIN MAX.) -90 -100 -110 -120 -130 -140 -150 30 31 36 Nominal Output [+4dBu] PHONES Max Output (150mW@8Ω) 27 28 29 34 35 +30 +24 +20 OUT 24 25 26 32 33 Max. Output [+24dBu] -160 Max. DSP Noise Floor -170 -180 -190 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA MARTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 KOREA SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: +34-902-39-8888 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDAM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA/BULGARIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 TAIWAN DENMARK RUSSIA MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 6747-4374 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 SINGAPORE SWEDEN/FINLAND/ICELAND NORWAY Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA GREECE ARGENTINA INDIA Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2303 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2303 MIDDLE EAST OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2303 TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2441 PA29 Yamaha Pro Audio global web site: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ C.S.G., Pro Audio Division © 2006-2011 Yamaha Corporation 110POTO-J0 Printed in Japan WH39070